This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
" (n - 2>" - 1) '" (n - 2k - 1) , (t), ... , (t» ,
k
=
[~J
0 1 '" " '2
1
If n is even, say = 2p, then we have
d8 p _ 1 = -Yp_1
where
If n is odd, say = 2q
+ 1, then d8 q_ 1 = -Y q-l
•
But in this case we have also
so that
We define* 1).2p +}..>,,!
if n = 2q
+ 1 is odd,
or, for a formula covering both cases, (9a)
(_l)n
II =2 n ?THn-
l)
[Hn-I)]}. (;
1
(-1) >..!r(Hn-2>"+1»
* Our present form n differs, in the case of even n, from the corresponding one in our previous paper by a sign. There are several reasons which indicate that the present choice is the appropriate one .
124
677
CURVATURA INTEGRA
and (10)
n=
I
(-I)P
22
1
P1rP
I
p.
L E'1···'nn'1'2 ... n'''-1'.'
o
if n
, if n
= 2p
is even
is odd.
Our foregoing relations can then be summarized in the formula -dII = n.
(11)
2n l
We remark that II is a dllIerential form of degree n - 1 in M - • Over a simplicial chain of dimension n - 1 in M 2n- 1 whose simplexes are covered by coordinate neighborhoods of ~n-l the integral of II is defined.
§2. Remarks on the Formula of Allendoener-Weil .Ai3 we have shown before, the formula (11) leads immediately to a proof of the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil. We shall, however, add here a few remarks. LetObe a point of Rn, and let Oe~ .. . e~ be a frame with origin at O. A point P of R n sufficiently near to 0 is determined by the direction cosines Ai (referred to Oe~ .. . e~) of the tangent of the geodesic joining 0 to P and the geodesic distance s = OP. The coordinates Xi of P defined by (12)
are called the normal coordinates. In a neighborhood of 0 defined by s shall employ s, Ai to be the local coordinates, where
~
R we
(13)
.Ai3 the components of a vector \) through P we shall take the components referred to Oe~ ... e~ of the vector at 0 obtained by transporting b parallelly along the geodesic OP In the neighborhood s ~ R of 0 let a field of unit vectors \) be given, whose components are differentiable functions of the normal coordinates except possibly at O. The forms k , k ~ 1, being at least of degree two in dx" there exists a constant M such that
x"
k
~
1,
where S is the geodesic hypersphere of radius s about O. Let I be the index of the vector field at 0, which is possibly a singular point. By Kronecker's fonnula we have (14)
I
=
o~ n-l
1
WIn"
S
• Wn-l . n ,
125
678
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
where On_l denotes the area of the unit hypersphere of dimension n - 1 and is given by 21l.!n
On-l = r (~n) .
(15)
It follows that there exists a constant Ml such that
or that (16)
I
= (-It lim 8 -0
1
II .
S
Let the Riemannian manifold R n be closed. It is well-known and is also easy to prove directly that it is possible to define in R n a continuous vector field with a finite number of singular points. Draw about each singular point a small geodesic hypersphere. The vector field at points not belonging to the interior of these geodesic hyperspheres defines a chain in M 2n - 1 over which n can be integrated. From (11) and (16) we get, by applying the formula of Stokes, (17)
where I is the sum of indices of the vector field. Hence the sum of indices of the singular points of a vector field is independent of the choice of the field, provided that their number is finite. By the constmction of a particular vector field, as was done by Stiefel and Whitney [2], we get the formula (18) n
where x(R ) is the Euler-Poincare characteristic of Rn. In particular, it follows n that x(R ) = 0 if n is odd. The same idea can be applied to derive the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil for differentiable polyhedra. Let pn be a differentiable polyhedron whose boundary n iW is a differentiable submanifold imbedded in Rn. Let apn be orientable and therefore two-sided. To each point of apn we attach the inner unit normal vector to apn, the totality of which defines a submanifold of dimension n - 1 in 2n M - 1• The integral of II over this submanifold we shall denote simply by
1 is
II.
Then the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil for a differentiable polyhedron
a/,n
P"
(19)
where x'(pn) is the inner Euler-Poincare characteristic of pn.
126
679
CURVATURA INTEGRA
To prove the formula (19), we notice that the field of unit normal vectors on iJP" can be extended continuously into the whole polyhedron P", with the possible exception of a finite number of singular points. Application of the formula of Stokes gives then
r n = - lap" r II + (-1)" J ,
jpn
where J is the sum of indices at these singular points. That J = (-1)" x' (pn) follows from a well-known theorem in topology [3]. It would also be possible to deduce this theorem if we carry out the construction of Stiefel-Whitney for polyhedra and verify in an elementary way that J = (-1) nx' (P") for a particular vector field. §3. A New Integral Formula m
Let R be a closed orientable differentiable (of class ~ 3) submanifold of dimension m ~ n - 2 imbedded in Rn. The unit normal vectors to R m at a point of R m depend on n - m - 1 parameters and their totality defines a submanifold of dimension n - 1 in M 2nthis submanifold.
l
Denote by
•
f
nm
II the integral of II over
Our formula to be proved is then
(20)
where the right-hand member stands for the Euler-Poincare characteristic of R m , which is zero if m is odd. As a preparation to the proof we need the formulas for the differential geometry of R m imbedded in Rn. At a point P of R m we choose the frames Pel" . en such that el, ... , em are the taI'fgent vectors to Rm. We now restrict ourselves on the submanifold R m and agree on the following ranges of indices 1
~
ex, {3
~
m,
m
+1~
r, s
~
n,
By our chQice of the frames we have Wr
=
0,
and hence, by exterior differentiation,
L a
which allows us to put (21)
with (22)
W raWa
= 0
1 ~ A, B ~ n -
1.
127
680
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
Consequently, the fundamental formulas for the Riemannian Geometry on R m , as induced by the Riemannian metric of R n , are dWa
=
L
=
L
WfJWfJa,
fJ
(23)
m
dWafJ
Wa-y
-y~l
w,,~
+Q
afJ ,
where (24)
To evaluate the integral on the left-hand side of (20) we introduce a differentiable family of frames Pal'" a" in a neighborhood of R m , satisfying the condition that aa = fa and that exactly one of the frames has the origin P . The relation between the vectors am+! , ... , a" and em+l , . .. , e" is then given by the equations
er
(25)
L
=
u" n, ,
s
where u" are the elements of a proper orthogonal matrix. In particular, the quantities U nr = U r may be regarded as local coordinates of the vector e" with respect to this family of frames. We now get all the normal vectors to R m at P by letting U vary over all values such that (U )2 = 1. The forms W"a, W"r which occur in IT can be calculated according to the formulas
Lr r
r
W"a
= de,,· fa =
L
U r Ora,
W",
= de,,·e, =
L
du. ·u ra
(26)
n
8
+ L
U.UTtOat,
.s,t=m+l
where the product of vectors is the scalar product and where we define (27)
It is evident that k
For k
~
= 0,
2k> m.
m/ 2 we have by definition k
=
L
EAI·· · An_IOAIA • • • • OA2k-IA2k WA2k+I" ••• WAn_I" •
Each term of this sum is of degree m in the differentials of the local coordinates on R m and of degree n - m - 1 in the differentials du,. It follows that the non1, ... ,n - 1 occur among vanishing terms are the terms where the indices m A2k+! , • . • , A n - 1 • We can therefore write
+
128
681
CURVATURA INTEGRA
where A..- m _ 1 is the surface element of a unit hypersphere of dimension n m-1. The integration of ~I: over R m is then carried out by iteration. In fact, we shall keep a point of R m fixed and integrate over all the unit normal vectors through that point. This leads us to the consideration of integrals of the form }..,+1 }.~A I>-m-1 U",+1 .. , U..
J
over the unit hypersphere of dimension n - m - 1. It is clear that the integral is not zero, only when all the exponents >'m+1, ..• , >. .. are even. But for the integrals obtained from ~k we have >.. = m - 2k. It follows that, if m is odd, we shall have
L
f
R"'
~k =
0,
and hence
This proves the formula (20) for the case that m is odd. More interesting is naturally the case that m is even, which we are going to suppose from now on. It was proved that [4]
(28) (n -
m)(n -
m
+ 2)
2>'m+J .. ·2>... )0..-m_l ... (n - m + 2>'...+1
+ ... + 2>' ..
- 2)'
where the symbol in the numerator is defined by (29)
0) = 1,
2>.) = 1.3 ... (2)' - 1).
To evaluate the integral of ~k over R m we have to expand the product
We introduce the notation
where the last symbol stands for a product of 8's, whose first indices are a2k+1 , ... , am respectively and whose second indices are respectively 2>'",+1(m + 1)'s, 2>'m+2(m + 2)'s, and finally 2>'.. n's. Let it be remembered that b.(k; >'m+1 , ... , >'n) is a differential form of degree m in R"'. Expanding ~k and using (28), we
129 682
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
shall get
1
(31)
( I r -1
Rm
k
=
-
(n - 2k - l)!On-m- l 2'!-=-ffl---;k:---(n--m -'-)-(n---n-l-+~2-)-..:..~.'::':--':' (n---2- k-'-- - 2)
where the summation is extended over all AT ~ 0, whose sum is ~ - k.
nail
It is now to be remarked that for the curvature forms of the Riemannian metric on Rffl we have to substitute Oar for War in the expressions (24). n being m the form on R whose integral over R m is equal to the Euler-Poincare characterffl istic x(R ) by the Allendoerfer-Weil formula, we have 12-
1 "" ...am(12a\a, = (-1) ~m 2m7rlm(.! ),L...fa\ 2m.
"" L...OalTOa ,T)
or, by expansion , _
(32) 12
l!m
k
1
= 2Tn 7r Im L ( - I ) k' L A' k=O . hm+t+ -· · +Xn= lm-k m+l·
1 ·· ·
A ,ll (k;Am+l , ···,An). n ·
By a straightforward calculation which we shall omit here, we get from (9), (31), (32), and (18) the desired formula (20). m So far we have assumed that m ~ n - 2, that is, that R is not a hypersurface n of Rn. In case m = n - 1 the unit normal vectors of R - 1 = R m in R n are, under our present assumptions concerning orientability, divided into two disjoint families. It is possible to maintain the formula (20) by making suitable conventions.
In fact, we suppose that the integrals
1n-\
II over the families
of inward and outward unit normal vectors are t aken over the oppositely oriented manifold R n - I • Then we lvJ.ve
where the integrals at the left and right hand sides are over the families of inward and outward normals respectively. If n is even, we have
If n is odd, we have
130 683
CURVATURA INTEGRA
Both cases can be considered as included in the formula (20). In particular, if n is odd and if R"-l is the boundary ijp" of a polyhedron P", we have also, by (19),
r
II
J(Rn-l)-
= x'(pn).
Comparing the two equations, we get
which asserts that the inner Euler-Poincare characteristic of a polyhedron in an odd-dimensional manifold is -! times the Euler-Poincare characteristic of its boundary, a well-known result in the topology of odd-dimensional manifolds. It is interesting to remark in passing that, so far as the writer is aware, the formula (20) seems not known even for the Euclidean space. §4. Fields of Normal Vectors
We consider the case that R2" is an even-dimensional orientable Riemannian manifold of class ~ 3 and R" a closed orientable submanifold of the same class imbedded in R2". By considering normal vector fields over R", Whitney [5] has defined a topological invariant of R n in R 2n , which is the sum of indices at the singular points of a normal vector field (with a finite number of singular points) over R". Let us denote by if; this invariant of Whitney. To prepare for the study of this invariant we make use of the discussions at the beginning of §3. To each point P of R" we attach the frames Pel· . . e2n such that el, .. . , en are tangent vectors to R" at P. Then we have, in particular, (33)
dW;j
=
L
WikWkj
+ 8ij,
where n
L
8 ij = Q ' i -
(34)
WiaWja
Q=l
the indices i, j running from n + 1 to 2n. The differential forms 8 ij arc exterior quadratic differential forms depending on the imbedding of R n in R 2n. They give what is essentially known as the Gaussian torsion of R" in R 2n. We put, similar to (10), (35)
8 =
(-1) p 22 P 1P
rlO,
7r
'"
,L....- Ei ,· · · i n 8 " i2 . . .
p.
8in-lin ,
. n = 2p if
l~
even,
if n is odd.
·With these preparations we are able to state the following theorems : 1. If R n i s a closed oricntable submanifold imbedded in an orientable Riemannian manifold R 2n , the Whitney invariant if; is given by (36)
if;
=
f
Rn
8.
131
684
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
2. It is always possible to define a continuous normal vector field over a closed orientable odd-dimensional differentiable submanifold (of class ~ 3) imbedded in an orientable differentiable manifold of twice its dimension . The first theorem can be proved in the same way as the formula of AllendoerferWeil. We shall give a proof of the second theorem. For this purpose we take a simplicial decomposition of our submanifold R n and denote its simplexes by u; , i = 1, ... ,m. We assume the decomposition to be so fine that each u; lies in a coordinate neighborhood of Rn. Accordingto a known property on the decomposition of a pseudo-manifold [6], the simplexes u; can be arranged in an order, say u{' , ... , u,;: ,such that ut ,k < m , contains at least an (n - I)-dimensional side which is not incident to u{' , . . . , Uk-I. We then define a continuous normal vector field by induction on k. It is obviously possible to define a continuous normal vector field over u{'. Suppose that such a field is defined over u{' + ... + U[:-I. The simplex q;: has in common with q{' + ... + uk-I at most simplexes of dimension n - 1 and there exists, when 1c < m, at least one boundary simplex of dimension n - 1 of q;: which does not belong to q~ + ... + U;:_I. It follows that the subset of u;: at which the vector field is defined is contractible to a point in q;:. By a well-known extension theorem [7], the vector field can be extended .throughout q;: , k < m. In the final step k = m the extension of the vector field throughout u,;: will lead possibly to a singular point in q';:. Hence it is possible to define a continuous normal vector field over R n with exactly one singular point, the index at which is equal to the Whitney invariant if;. If n is odd, we have, by (36), if; = 0, and the singular point can be removed. This proves our theorem. INSTITUTE FOR ADVANCED STUDY, PRINCETON, NEW JERSEY, AND 'ISING H UA U:-
132 ANNALS OF MATHEMATICS
Vol. 47, No. I, January, 1946
CHARACTERISTIC CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS By
SWING-SHEN CHERN
(Received July 10, 1945) INTRODUCTION
In recent years the works of Stiefel/ Whitney,2 Pontrjagin,3 Steenrod,4 Feldbau,s Ehresmann,6 etc. have added considerably to our knowledge of the topology of manifolds with a differentiable structure, by introducing the notion of so-called fibre bundles. The topological invariants thus introduced on a manifold, called the characteristic cohomology classes, are to a certain extent sus7 ceptible of characterization, at least in the case of Riemannian manifolds, by means of the local geometry. Of these characterizations the generalized Gauss-Bonnet formula of Allendoerfer-Weil8 is probably the most notable example. In the works quoted above, special emphasis has been laid on the sphere bundles, because they are the fibre bundles which arise naturally from manifolds with a differentiable structure. Of equal importance are the manifolds with a complex analytic structure which play an important role in the theory of analytic functions of several complex variables and in algebraic geometry. The present paper will be devoted to a study of the fibre bundles of the complex tangent vectors of complex manifolds and their characteristic classes in the sense of Pontrjagin. It will be shown that there are certain basic classes from which all the other characteristic classes can be obtained by operations of the cohomology ring. These basic classes are then identified with the classes obtained by generalizing Stiefel-Whitney's classes to complex vectors. In the sense of de Rham the cohomology classes can be expressed by exact exterior differential forms which are everywhere regular on the (real) manifold. It is then shown that, in case the manifold carries an Hermitian metric, these differential forms can be constructed from the metric in a simple way. This means that the characteristic classes are completely determined by the local structure of the Hermitian metric. This result also includes the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil and can be regarded as a generalization of that formula. Concerning the relations between the characteristic classes of a complex manifold and an Hermitian metric defined on it, the problem is completely solved by the above results. It is to be remarked that corresponding questions for Rie1
STIEFEl"
(24) .
The number in the bracket refers to the bibliography at the end of the
paper . 2
WHITNEY, (29), (30) .
(18), (19). (21), (22) . , FELDBAU, (12). • EHRJ:)SMANN , (10) . 7 C HERN, [51, (6), (7). 3 PONTnJAGlN ,
• STEI!]NROD ,
8 ALLENDOERFER.WEIL, (2) .
85
133
86
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
mannian manifolds remain open. Roughly speaking, the difficulty in the real case lies in the existence of finite homotopy groups of certain real manifolds, namely the manifolds formed by the ordered sets of linearly independent vectors of a finite-dimensional vector space. The paper is divided into five chapters·. In Chapter I we consider the fibre bundles which include the bundles of tangent complex vectors of a complex manifold and which are called complex sphere bundles. To a given base space a complex sphere bundle can be defined by a continuous mapping of the base space into a complex Grassmann manifold and it is shown that this is the most general way of generating a complex sphere bundle. We take the Grassmann manifold to be that in a complex vector space of sufficiently high dimension and define a characteristic cohomology class in the base space to be the inverse image under this mapping of a cohomology class of the Grassmann manifold. We are therefore led to the study of the cocycles or cycles on a complex Grassmann manifold, a problem treated exhaustively by Ehresmann.9 A close examination of Ehresmann's results is therefore made in Chapter II, in the light of the problems which concern us here. In fact, we are only interested in the cocycles of the Grassmann manifold which are of dimension not greater than the dimension of the base space. If the Grassmann manifold is that of the linear spaces of n (complex) dimensions in a linear vector space of n N dimensions, there are on it n basic cocycles such that all other cocycles of dimenslon ~ 2n can be obtained from them by operations of the cohomology ring. The cycles corresponding to these cocycles are determined and geometrically interpreted. In Chapter III we identify the im2.ges of these cocycles in the base space with the cocycles obtained by generalizing the Stiefel-Whitney invariants to complex vectors. A new definition of these cocycles is given, which is important for applications to differential geometry in the large. Chapter IV is devoted to the study of a complex manifold with an Hermitian metric. It is proved that the n basic cocycles in question can be characterized in a simple way in terms of differential forms constructed from the Hermitian metric. These results are then applied in Chapter V to the complex projective space with the elliptic Hermitian metric. Classical formulas of Cartan 10 and Wirtingerll are derived from our formulas as particular cases.
+
CHAPTER I COMPLEX SPHERE BUNDLES AND THEIR IMBEDDING
1. The complex sphere Various definitions have been given of a fibre bundle. For definiteness we shall adopt the one of Steenrodl 2 and follow his terminology. We are, however, going to restrict the kind of fibre bundles under consideration. 9
10
EURESMANN, CARTAN,
[8] .
[3] . [31] . [22] .
II WIRTINGER, 12 STEENROD,
134 CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
87
Let E(n; C) be a complex vector space of n dimensions/ 3 whose vectors will be denoted by small German letters. In E(n; C) suppose a positive definite Hermitian form be given, which, in terms of a suitable base, has the expression n
(1)
AA
=
L z'i, iz=l
where z' are the components of the vector Ain terms of the base and the bar denotes the operation of taking the complex conjugate. A vector A such that AA = 1 is called a unit vector. The group of linear transformations
i = 1, ... , n,
(2)
which leaves the form (1) unaltered is the unitary group and will be denoted by U(n; C). We shall call the complex sphere Sen; C) the manifold of all the unit vectors of E(n; C). It is homeomorphic to the real sphere of topological dimension 2n - 1. The letter C in these notations will be dropped, when there is no danger of confusion. In this paper we shall be concerned with fibre bundles such that the fibres are homeomorphic to the complex sphere Sen) and that the group in each fibre is the unitary group U(n). Such a fibre bundle is called a complex sphere bundle. The most important complex sphere bundle is obtained from the consideration of the complex tangent vectors of a complex manifold M(n) of complex dimension n and topological dimension 2n. By a complex manifold M(n) we shall mean a connected Hausdorff space which satisfies the following conditions: 1) It is covered by a finite or denumerable set of neighborhoods each of which is homeomorphic to the interior of the polycylinder
I z' I <
1,
i
= 1, ... , n,
in the space of n complex variables, so that Zi can be taken as local coordinates of M(n) . 2) In a region in which two local coordinate systems z' and z*' overlap the coordinates of the same point are connected by the relations (3)
t
where are analytic functions. It follows from this definition that the notions of M(n) which are expressed in terms of local coordinates but which remain invariant under the transformations (3) have an intrinsic meaning in M(n). This is in particular true of a tangent vector at a point, which we define in the usual way as an object which has n com13 Throughout this paper we shall mean by dimension the complex dimension . The dimension of a manifold in the sense of topology will be called the topological dimension, which is twice the complex dimension . The dimensions of simplexes, chains, cycles, homology groups, etc ., are understood in the sense of topology, so long as there is no danger of confusion.
13S
88
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
ponents Zi in each local coordinate system and whose components Zi, Z*' in two local coordinate systems Z*i are transformed according to the equations
z"
(4) It is clear that the space of the tangent vectors at a point is homeomorphic to E(n). We consider the non-zero tangent vectors and call two such vectors
equivalent if their components system satisfy the conditions
z\
Wi with respect to the same local coordinate Wi = pZ\
where p is a positive real quantity. This relation remains unchanged under transformation of local coordinates. Also it is an equivalence relation in the sense of algebra, being reflexive, symmetric, and transitive. Hence the non-zero tangent vectors can be divided by means of this equivalence relation into mutually disjoint classes. We call such a class of non-zero tangent vectors a direction. With a natural topology the space of directions at a point is homeomorphic to the complex sphere Sen). Furthermore, by using the so-called unitarian trick in group theory, it is easy to verify that the manifold of all directions at the points of M(n) is a complex sphere bundle with M(n) as the base space It will be called the tangent bundle of M(n). Although all the results in this chapter will be formulated for general complex sphere bundles, it is the particular case of the tangent bundle of a complex manifold that justifies the study of complex sphere bundles. 2. The Grassmann manifold and the imbedding theorems Consider the space E(n + N ;C) and the linear subspaces of E(n + N ;C) of dimension n. The manifold of all such linear subspaces is called a Grassmann manifold and will be denoted by H(n, N;C) or simply H(n, N). It is of dimension nN. The unit vectors of the complex sphere Sen + N) in E(n + N), which belong to a linear subspace E(n) of dimension n, constitute a complex sphere Sen), to be denoted by Sen + N) n E(n). Now let B be a finite polyhedron in the sense of combinatorial topology and let f be a continuous mapping of B into H(n, N) . From the mapping f we can define a complex sphere bundle 3' with B as base space as follows: 3' consists of the points (b, \J) of the topological product B X Sen + N) such that \J E feb) n Sen N), and the projection 7r of 3' onto B is defined by 7r(b, \J) =b. It is easy to verify that 3' is a complex sphere bundle over B, which we shall call the inducp.d bundle over B . The importance of the notion of complex sphere bundles induced by the mapping of the base space into a Grassmann manifold is justified by the following theorems: THEOREM 1. To every bundle 3' of complex spheres Sen) over a finite polyhedron B of topological dimension d there exists a continuous mapping f of B into H(n, N) with N ~ d/2, such that 3' is equivalent to thc b-undle induced by f.
+
136
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
89
THEOREM 2. Let ~I and ~2 be two bundles of complex spheres Sen) over a finite polyhedron B of topological dimension d induced by the mappings it , f2 respectively of B into H(n, N), N ~ d/2. The bundles ~I and ~2 are equivalent wherJ, and only when the mappings fl and f2 are homotopic. 14 Similar theorems for real sphere bundles are known. It follows from these theorems that to a class of equivalent bundles of complex spheres Sen) over a finite polyhedron B of topological dimension d corresponds a class of homotopic mappings of B into the Grassmann manifold H(n, N), where N is an integer satisfying 2N ~ d. This class of mappings induces a homomorphism h of the cohomology groups of dimension ~ d of H(n, N) into the cohomology groups of the same dimension of B. A cohomology class of B which is the image under h of a cohomology class of H(n, N) is called a characteristic cohomology class or simply a characteristic class and each of its cocycles is called a characteristic cocycle. 3. Proofs of Theorems 1 and 2 The proofs of the Theorems 1 and 2 do not differ essentially from the real case· We shall therefore restrict ourselves to a brief description of the general procedure. We need the following two lemmas: LEMMA 1. (Covering homotopy theorem)15 Let ~ be a fibre space over a base space B, which is a compact metric space. Let S be a compact topological space and let J be the unit interval. Suppose a mapping h(S X 1) C ~ be given having the property: There exists a mapping H(S X 0) C ~ such that h(p X 0) where 7r is the projection of such that
~
= 7rH(p X 0),
into B.
PES,
Then there exists a mapping H(S X J) C
h(p X t) = 7rH(p X t),
PES,
~
O~t~1.
From Lemma 1 follows the lemma: LEMMA 2 (Feldbau) .16 Let ~ be a fibre bundle "ver a compact metric base space B. If B is contractible to a point, then ~ is equivalent to the topological prodw;t of B and one of its fibres F. To prove Theorem 1 we are going to define the mapping f whose existence was asserted by the theorem. We take a simplicial decomposition of B which is so fine that each simplex lies in a neighborhood, and denote by q~ , i = 1, ... , Cik , k = 0, 1, ... , d, its simplexes. We denote as usual by 7r the projection of ~ onto B. Our purpose is to define a mapping feB) C H(n, H) and a mapping f*(m C B X Sen N) such that
+
14 WHITNEY,
[29];
STEENROD,
15 HUREWICZ-STEENROD,
ferent versions . 16 FELDBAU,
[12].
[22].
[15] . The theorem is given in various papers, in slightly dif-
137
90 (5)
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
!*(p)
E
7I"(p) X
{f(7I"(p»
n
Sen
+
N) I
and that for a fixed 7I"(p) the mapping!*(p) is a homeomorphism preserving the scalar product. The definition of these mappings is given by induction on the dimension of the simplexes of B. The images f«(f~) E H(n, H), i = 1, ... , (fo, are defined in an arbitrary way and it is clear how!*(p) can be defined for all p E 15 such that 7I"(p) = (f~ , i = 1, ... , ao. We suppose the mappings be defined over the (k - I)-dimensional skeleton of B and consider any simplex (fk of dimension k. We take a neighborhood U which contains (fk and decompose the set 71"-I(U) into a topological product of U and a complex sphere So(n). Then we can define n mappings 'Pi«(fk) c 15, i = 1, ... , n, such that: I) 7I"'Pi(P) = p, p E (f\ 2) 'Pi(P), 'Pj(p), i =1= j, are orthogonal vectors on the complex sphere 7I"-I(p). We proceed to define by induction !*('Pi(P» = P X qi, which will satisfy the condition that qi , qj for i =1= j are orthogonal vectors of Sen + N). By hypothesis, !* ('PI (p) ) is defined for all p E ()(fk .17 Since O(fk is topologically a sphere of topological dimension k - 1 ~ d - 1 ~ 2N - 1 < 2(n + N) - 1, which is the topological dimension of the complex sphere Sen + N), and since 7I"(p), p E 'PI«(fk), is the cell (f\ it follows that !*('Pl(P», P E O(fk, is contractible in B X Sen + N). This means that there is a continuous mapping g(O(fk X t) c B X Sen + N), 0 ~ t ~ 1, such that the following conditions are'satisfied: I) g(O(fk X 0) is a point; 2) g(O(fk X 1) is identical with !*('PI(P». On the other hand, we can introduce in (fk the "polar coordinates" p, P, where 0 ~ p ~ 1 and P E o(l . For a point of (fk having the coordinates p, P we define J*('PI(p, p» = g(p X p).
Suppose now that J*('PI(P» = P X ql, .. . , J*('Pi-I(P» = P X qi-l, P E (fk, are defined, such that qk , qj , k, j = 1, ... , i - I , k =l= j, are orthogonal vectors of Sen + N). To defineJ*('Pi(p» we consider on Sen + N) the complex spheres Sen + N - i + 1) whose vectors are orthogonal to ql , .. . , qi-I. These complex spheres Sen + N - i + 1), depending on P, constitute a. complex sphere bundle over the simplex (fk. By Lemma 2, it is a topological product of (fk and a complex sphere So(n + N - i + 1) . By induction hypothesis, the boundary 0(/ is mapped into So(n + N - i + 1), by means of the vectors qi E Sen + N - i + 1) (p). Since the topological dimension k - 1 of O(fk is smaller than the topological dimension 2(n + N - i) + 1 of So(n + N - i + 1), the map is contractible and the mapping of O(fk can be extended continuously throughout (fk. It follows that a mapping h«(fk) C So(n + N - i + 1) and hence a mapping hl«(fK) C Sen + N) can be defined such that h,(p)
E
Sen
+
N -
i
+
l)(p),
k PE(f.
We then define J*('Pi(P» = P X h,(p) = P X qi , P E (fk. qi is orthogonal to ql , ... , qi-I .
Clearly the vector
17 We shall make use of the notation auk to denote both the combinatorial and the set. theoretical boundary of the simplex uk, as the meaning will be clear by context.
138 CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
91
To complete the induction on the dimension k let P* E lS such that 1r(P*) = P E ,/. Then p* has n components Ul, ... , Un with respect to 'l'l(P) , ... , 'l'n(P)· We define f(p) to be the linear space of n dimensions of E(n + N) which contains the complex sphere detennined by ql , ...• qn and r(p*) = p X q,
where q belongs to f(p) n Sen + N) and has the components Ul , ... , Un with respect to ql , ... , qn . Thus our induction is complete and it is easily seen that the mappings f and fulfill our desired conditions. It is also clear that the complex sphere bundle induced by the mapping feB) C H(n, N) is equivalent to lS. This proves our Theorem 1. Concerning Theorem 2 it is not difficult to prove that lSI and lS2 are equivalent if fl and f2 are homotopic. The converse is proved by defining a mapping feB X I) C H(n, H), withf(B X 0) andf(B X 1) coinciding with the given mappings fl and f2 respectively. Because of the equivalence of lSI and lS2 a complex sphere bundle can be defined over B X I in an obvious way. The rest of the argument consists of defining the mapping feB X I) by an extension process analogous to the proof of Theorem 1. We shall omit the details here.
r
CHAPTER
II
STUDY OF THE COCYCLES ON A COMPLEX GRASSMANN MANIFOLD
1. Summary of some known results Let H (n, N) be the Grassmann manifold of n-dimensional linear subspaces in E(n, N). Our main purpose in this chapter is to give a homology base for the cocycles of dimension ~2n of H(n, N). It is to be remarked that, H(n, N) being a manifold of topological dimension 2nN, there corresponds to each cycle of dimension 8 a cocycle of dimension 2nN - 8, and vice versa. There are two different ways to describe the cocycles of H(n, N), ,yhich are both useful to our purpose. To explain the first method let 0 ~ rp(i) ~ N, 1 ~ i ~ n, be a non-decreasing integral-valued function. Let L i , 1 ~ i ~ n, be a linear vector space of dimension i rp"(i) in E(n N), such that
+
+
LI
C
L2
C··· C
Ln.
Let Z(rp(i» be the set of all n-dimensional linear spaces X(n) such that dim (X(n)
n L i)
~ t,
i
= 1, ... , n,
where the notation in the parenthesis denotes the linear space common to X(n) and L,. Z(rp(i» is called a Schubert variety in algebraic geometry. It is a pseudo-manifold of dimension 8 = L~-1 rp(i) and carries an integral cycle of dimension 28 of H(n, N). Concerning the significance of the Schubert varieties for the topology of Grassmann manifolds the following theorem was proved by Ehresmann :18 18 EHRESMANN,
[8], p. 418.
139
92
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
THEOREM 3. The Grassmann manifold H(n, N) has no torsion coefficients and has all its Betti numbers of odd dimension equa.l to zero. Its Betti number of dimension 2s is equal to the number of distinct non-decreasing integral-valued functions cp(i), 1 ~ i ~ n, such that L~=lcp(i) = s. The integral cycles carried by the corresponding Schubert varieties Z(cp(l)) constitute a homology base for the Betti group of dimension 2s. The second method to describe the cocycles of H(n, N) is by means of differential forms. Let X(n) E H(n, H) and let el , ••• , en be n vectors in X(n) such that
1
~
i,j
To these n vectors we add N further vectors conditions
~
n.
en+! , • • • ,
en+N
satisfying the
1 ~ A,B ~ n+N.
(6)
When there is a differentiable family of the vectors
el , •.. ,
en+N ,
we put
(7) which are linear differential forms satisfying the conditions
(8) Among 0AB the forms 1
~
i
~
n,
n
+1~ r
~ n
+ N,
constitute a set of 2nN linearly independent forms at each point of H(n, N). Let e be a form in Oir , Bir with constant coefficients. e is called an invariant form jf it remains unchanged under the groups of transformations n
"a
0*,·, -- L-.
(9)
i= 1
0; 0ir.
n+N
07r =
(10)
L
bra 0., ,
$- n+l
where (ai;), (bro) are arbitrary unitary matrices. It is called exact, if de = o. It is well-known that on a differentiable manifold of class two a co cycle with rational coefficients can be expressed by an exact differential form, and conversely. For convenience we shall therefore call an exact differential form a cocycle. Then we have the following theorem of E . Cartan: 19 THEOREM 4. Every invariant form of H(n, N) is exact. The B etti number of dimen sion 2s of H(n, N) is equal to the number of linearly independent (with constant coefficients) invariant differential forms of degree 2s. The set of these forms constitutes a cohomology base of dimension 2s. 19 CARTAN,
[3];
EHRESMANN ,
[8], p . 409 .
140
93
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
2. The basic forms Let r be an integer between 1 and n. For reasons which will be clear later we shall be particularly interested in the n cycles Zr , r = 1, .. . , n, carried by the Schubert varieties defined by the functions 'Pr(i)
(11)
'Pr(i)
=N = N,
=
i
1,
1, ... , n - r
i = n - r
+
1,
+ 2, ... , n.
+
The cycle Zr is of dimension 2(Nn - n r - 1). We shall find the invariant differential form which gives the cocycle of dimension 2(n - r 1) corresponding to Zr. For this purpose we put
+
n+N
e' i = .=n+1 L O•• O'i
(12)
I
1 ~ i,j ~ n,
and (13)
where o(i1 ... in-r+l j j1 ... jn-r+1) is zero except when j1, ... ,jn-r+l form a permutation of i 1 , . •• , i n - r +1 , in which case it is 1 or -1 according as the permutation is even or odd, and where the summation is extended over all indices i1 , ... , i n - r +1 from 1 to n. It is easy to verify that r is an invariant form on H(n, N). Our problem is then solved by the following theorem : THEOREM 5. The invariant differential form r defines a cocycle of dimension 2(n - r 1) on H(n, N), which corresponds to the cycle Zr in the sense that, for any cycle r of dimension 2(n - r 1), the relation
+
+
+
KJ(rl, Zr) =
(14)
i
r
holds,20 whenever both sides are defined. To prove this theorem we notice that both sides of the equation (14) are linear in t, so that it is sufficient to prove (14) for the cycles of a homology base of dimension 2(n - r 1). By Theorem 3, these are the cycles carried by the Schubert varieties Z('P(i» such that
+
n
L 'P(i) i=l
= n - r
+ 1.
Since the function 'P(i) is non-decreasing, we must have (15)
'P(l) = ... = 'P(r - 1) =
o.
20 The notation KI, due to Lefschetz, means the Kronecker index (or the intersection number) .
141 94
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
Let ~k, k 1, ... , m, be the cycles of a homology base of dimension 2(n r 1) defined in this way, and let ~l be the cycle defined by (16) !p(I) = ... = !p(r - 1) = 0, !p(r) = ... = !p(n) = L
+
Then for the cycles
~k,
k
~
1, we must also have
= O.
!p(r)
It is therefore sufficient to prove that
KI(~k , Zr) =
(17)
1
=
k
4>r.
1, ...
,m,
tk
for the cycles ~k which are well chosen so that both sides of (17) are defined. Let us first assume that k ~ 1. By definition, there exists a fixed linear vector space L(r) of dimension r such that any X(n) of the Schubert variety carrying ~k satisfies the condition dim (X(n) U L(r)) ~ r, which means that X(n) ::::> L(r).
On the other hand, any X(n) of the Schubert variety carrying Zr has the property that it intersects a fixed linear space L(N n - r) of dimension N n - r in a linear space of dimension ~ n - r L We take in E(n + N ) a frame tl, . .. , en+N and let L(r) and L(N n - r) be spanned by the vectors tl, ... , er and er+l, ... , en+N respectively. There is clearly no X(n) which conn - r) a linear space of ditains el, ... , tr and has in common with L(N mension n - r + 1, which means that
+ +
+
+
+
k
~
L
To show that the integral on the right-hand side of (I7) is also zero, we choose the frame tl, ... , en+N such that tl, . .. , er belong to L(r) and el, ... , en belong to X(n). It is obviously possible to choose el ; .. . , er to be fixed . Under this choice we have 8;j
= 0,
1
~
i,j
~
r,
and hence 4>r
= O.
Thus the relations (I7) are proved for k ~ L To define ~l we take two linear vector spaces L(r - 1), L(n + 1) of dimensions r - 1, n 1 respectively, such that L(r - 1) C L(n 1) . An element X(n) of ~l is then defined by the conditions
+
+
L(r -
1) C X(n) C L(n
Let el , ... , en+N be a frame in E(n in question to be so chosen that
+ N).
+
1).
We suppose the linear vector spaces
142 95
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
el , ... , e.-I C L(r - 1), el, ... , e1'+l C L(n e
T ,
•••
,
+ 1),
en_I, en-I, ... , e1'+N C L(n
+N
- r).
By this choice L(n + 1) and L(n + N - r) have in common a linear vector space of dimension n - r + 1, namely the one spanned by e en-I, en+l . It follows that ZT and have in common only one X(n), which is spanned by el, ... , en-I, en+l' This intersection is to be counted simply, and we have21 T ,
rl
•• •
,
KI(ZT. rl) = 1. It now only remains to evaluate the integral in the right-hand side of (17) for k =, 1. The linear vector spaces L(r - 1) and L(n + 1) being fixed, we choose a fixed frame 01 , . . • , On+N in E(n + N) such that 01, •••• OT-l belong to L(r - 1) and 01, ..• , 0n+l to L(n + 1). If X(n) E rl , we choose the frame el, ... , en+N, whose first n vectors belong to X(n) such that A = 1, ... , r - 1, n + 2, ,n+N, (18)
B, C = r, ... , n
It follows that
where UBe are the elements of a unitary matrix. (hi
(19)
=
dek·ei
= 0,
k = n
Oik = -Oki = 0,
+ 1,
+ 2, ... , n + N,
i = 1, ... , n
+ N,
and hence that 1
~
i, j
~
n.
For simplicity we shall write e for en+l, UB for Un+l,B , and Oi for On+l,i. We remark that X(n) is completely determined by the vector e, whose components with respect to OT, . .. • On+l are UT , • •. , U1' +l. Our purpose therefore is to transform the form
= de·e, =
(f dUBOB)(~1 B=r
U,eae)
C==r
1'+1
(20)
= O.
L
B=T
dUBU,B ,
i
= r, "', n,
i = I, ... , r - 1,
= 0,
and i,j
all other 21
Cf.
eij
being zero.
EHRESMANN,
= r, ... , n,
It follows that <1>. is equal to
[8], p. 421.
143
96
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
(21)
(21Ty=ly-n-l "0(' ( ) , • £.oJ u tl n-r+l.
= (_I)Hn-r)(n-r+l)
.
. .
. )0 0In-r+l 'I iJ
0 '"
0 0- ..• 0-
... t n- r+l ,Jl .••
(n -
+ 1)
r
(2?Ty _It- +l T
n r
r
•••
O'n-r+IO;.-r+1
n·
From now on we shall agree on the following ranges of indices: 'Y ~
a, (3
~
n,
From (20) and we get, by solving for du; , (22)
=
du,
L: u",O" + U,On+l .
We notice that
o.
(23)
Consider now the form n-r+l
(24) itr
=
L:
dur ··· dUr+k-l dUr+k-l ... dUn+! dU T
•••
dUr+k-l dUr+k+l ... dUn+! ,
k~O
which we shall prove to differ from
+
'" (1)Hn-r)(n-T+J) (n - r I)! ,T, '*'r = (21TY-1)n r+1 "'r·
(25)
To integrate
=
dU r ... dUn dU r ... dUn,
which is to be integrated over the domain Un+l
This integration is then easily achieved.
Then itr
Ur
=
Vr
UT
=
VT
>
O.
In fact, we put
+ y=I Wr , -
V=I W
T
•
= (_1)!(n-T)(n-T+1)( -2 y -1t- T+1dv r dW r ... dUn dW n ,
and the integral is over the domain D:
144
97
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
U~+l
+ v; + w; + ... + v! + w! =
1,
Un+l>
O.
But the integral
is the volume of the domain bounded by the unit hypersphere of dimension 2n - 2r 1, which is equal to 7r n -,+l/(n - r I)!, Hence we have
+
+
( _1)hn-rHn-r+l)
(27r' V- ~)n-r+1 - 1 (n - r
+
1)1 '
and finally,
1 tl
q"
=
1.
Our Theorem 5 is therefore completely proved.
3. The basis theorem The importance of the invariant differential forms q,r, 1 ~ r ~ n, lies in a theorem we proceed to prove, which asserts that every invariant differential form of degree ~ 2n in H (n, N) is a polynomial in q,r with constant coefficients. The exact statement of our theorem is as follows: THEOREM 6. Every invariant differential form of degree ~ 2n in H(n, N) is a polynomial in q,r, 1 ~ r ~ n, with constant coefficients. If the form defines an integral cocycle on H (n, N), the coefficients are integers. The theorem follows easily from the so-called first main theorem on vector invariants for the unitary group, which we state as follows: LEMMA 3. Let 1>1, •.• , Il m be a set of vectors in E(n) under transformations of the unitary group U(n). Every integral rational invariant in the components of Ilk, 1 ~ k ~ m, is an integral rational function of the scalar products Ilitik' 1 ~ i, k ~ m. It is known thae 2 under the unimodular unitary group such an invariant is an integral rational function of the scalar products and of determinants of the form [Ill· .. Ilnl or [b1 .. . tinl. But under a general unitary transformation of determinant eV - 1a the determinants [Ill· .. Ilnl and [01 ... bnl will be multiplied by eV=lo and e-V - 1a respectively. It follows that an invariant will involve the determinants only in products of the form [Ill· .. Ilnl · [ij~ ... ii~], which can however be expressed as a determinant of scalar products:
Thus the lemma is proved. 22
WEYL, [28], p. 45 .
145
98
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
To prove Theorem 6 let 'l1 be an invariant differential form of degree 28 ;;;;; 2n in H(n, N), which is therefore an exterior form in (JiT , 8iT , 1 ;;;;; i ;;;;; n, n + 1 ;;;;; r ;;;;; n + N, with constant coefficients. The form 'l1 being in particular invariant under the transformation (J;r = ev'=ia (JiT , it follows that 'l1,when reduced to its lowest terms, will contain in each term exactly 8 factors each of (JiT and BiT' Let us fix our attention for the moment to the group (10) . We take from 'l1 all the terms of the form
with a fixed set of the indices iI, ... , i. , jl .... ,j., and call their sum 'l11 . Since the indices iI, ... , i. , jl , ... ,j. are now fixed, we shall drop them for simplicity. Now it is well-known that there is an isomorphism between the ring of exterior forms and the ring of multilinear forms with alternating coefficients. To 'l11 corresponds, in the complex vector space of N dimensions, an alternating multilinear form of degree 28. Since 'l11 is invariant under the unitary group (10), the same is true of its corresponding alternating multilinear form. By our Lemma the latter is an integral rational function of the scalar products. It follows by the isomorphism that 'l11 can be expressed as a polynomial in sums of the form LT (JiTB jT = -8ij . Consequently, 'l1 is a polynomial in 8ij, 1 ;;;;; i, j ;;;;; n; with constant coefficients. Let us now put
r = 1, ... ,n.
(26)
By the same argument as above, we can prove that 'l1, being also invariant under the group (9), is a polynomial in P r , 1 ;;;;; r ;;;;; n, with constant coefficients. On ~the other hand, it is easy to show, by induction on r, that P r is a polynomial in <1>1, ... ,r, with constant coefficients. Hence the first part of our theorem is proved. To prove the second part of the theorem consider the products of the form (27) such that (27a)
Al
+ 2A2 + ... + nAn = 8.
These forms constitute a basis for all invariant differential forms of degree 28 ;;;;; 2n on H(n, N). Since 8 ;;;;; n, their number is equal to the number of partitions of 8 as a sum of integral summands. By Theorem 3 this is equal to the Betti number of dimension 28 of H(n, N). It follows that the products in (27) are linearly independent, and that every invariant differential form of degree 28 of H(n, N) representing an integral cocycle is equal to a linear combination of the products (27) with integral coefficients.
146 CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS CHAPTER
99
III
THE BASIC CHARACTERISTIC CLASSES ON A COMPLEX MANIFOLD
1. A second definition of the basic characteristic classes Let 111 be a complex manifold of dimension n. We consider the complex sphere bundle defined from.. the tangent vectors of 111 and imbed it, according t.o Theorem 1, in a Grassmann manifold H(n, N), N ~ n, by means of a mapping of 111 into H(n, N). It follows from Theorem 2 that the inverse image of a cohomology class of dimension ~2n of H(n, N) induced by this mapping is an invariant of 111 (or rather of the analytic structure of 111), which we have called a characteristic cohomology class of 111. From Theorem 6 we see that of all the characteristic cohomology classes of 111 those which are inverse images of the cohomology classes of H(n, N) containing the cocycles if>r • 1 ~ r ~ n, playa particularly important role, because all the others can be obtained from them by operatiom; of the cohomology ring. We therefore call these n classes the basic characteristic classes, the inverse image of the class containing if>r being the rth basic class. Our first aim is to identify these basic classes with the classes obtained by generalizing to complex manifolds the well-known procedure of Stiefel-Whitney.23 In order to understand the situation we recall briefly the results of StiefelWhitney for real sphere bundles, emphasizing the differences between the real and complex cases. From a bundle of real spheres of dimension n - lover a polyhedron as base space Stiefel and Whitney considered the fibre bundle O\'er the same base space whose fibre at each point is the manifold Yen, r) of r(l ~ r ~ n) linearly independent points of the real sphere at this point. It was proved that all homology groups of dimension
STIEFEL,
[24J;
WHITNEY,
[29J .
147 100
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
r».
a sphere of dimension n - r into a fibre and hence an element h of Hn-T(V(n, The delicate point is to get from this element h an integer or a residue class mod. 2. This is possible if a generating element of Hn-T(V(n, r)) is defined. When Hn-T(V(n, r)) is cyclic of order two, it has only one generating element, so that no further assumption is necessary. When Hn-T(V(n, r)) is a free cyclic group, we assume that a continuous field of generating elements of Hn-T(V(n, r)) can be defined over the whole M, which is possible if M is orientable. The element h is then equal to the generator of Hn-T(V(n, r)) so defined, multiplied by an integer or a residue class mod. 2. Taking this integer or the residue class mod. 2 as the value of a cochain for the simplex qn-T+l, we get an integral cochain or a cochain mod. 2. It was proved that the cochain is a cocycle and that its cohomology class is independent of the choice of the mapping from which it is defined. This cohomology class is the class of Stiefel-Whitney. It is to be remarked that the definition can be given under more general conditions, but we shall be satisfied with the above resume. The situation is simpler in the case of complex sphere bundles. From a bundle of complex spheres Sen) we consider the fibre bundle jJ(T) over the same base space whose fibre at each point is the manifold U(n, r) of r(1 ~ r ~ n) linearly independent vectors in E(n). It can be proved thae 4 all homology groups of dimension <2n - 2r + 1 of U(n, r) vanish and that the homology group H2n-2T+l(U(n, r)) of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 is a free cyclic group. To define a generator of H 2n - 2T +l(U(n, r)) we take in E(n) an ordered set of r - 1 mutually perpendicular unit vectors el , . .. , er-l. The unit vector er in E(n) perpendicular to el , .... eT-l describes a complex sphere in the E(n - 'r 1) perpendicular to el, ... , er-l . The complex sphere Sen - r 1) in E(n r -t- 1) is topologically a real sphere of topological dimension 2n - 2r -t- 1. Its two orientations define two cycles belonging respectively to the two generating classes of H2n-2T+l(U(n, r)). The cycle carried by the oriented real sphere Sen r + 1) is completely determined by the orientation of E(n - r + 1) considered as a real Euclidean space of topological dimension 2(n - r + 1). This orientaen in E(n - r + 1). It tion is independent of the order of the vectors e follows that the fibre bundle jJ(T) is orientable in the sense of Steenrod, which means that there is an isomorphism in the large between the (2n - 2r + 1)dimensional homology groups of the fibres of jJ(r), Or that a continuous field o'f generating elements of H 2n - 2T +l(U(n, r)) can be defined over the whole manifold. The fibre bundle jJ(r) has two opposite orientations and we shall from now on make a definite choice of one of them. Using this "oriented" fibre bundle, we shall be allowed to replace an element of H2n~2r+l(U(n, r)) at a point by the integer which, when multiplied by the generating element at this point, is equal to the element in question. With these explanations understood, we have:
+
T ,
• • •
+
,
24 EHRESMANN, [9J. This fact is easily proved by making use of the covering homotopy theorem, the complex case being even simpler than the real case.
148 101
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
THEOREM 7. The rth basic characteristic class of a complex manifold M of dimension n can be defined as follows: Take a simplicial decomposition of M each of whose simplexes belongs to a neighborhood, and define over its skeleton of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 a continuous field of ordered sets of r linearly independent complex tangent vectors. To each simplex of dimension 2n - 2r 2 take a point in its interior and consider the manifold of the ordered sets of r linearly independent complex tangent vectors at that point. The field on the boundary of the simplex defines a mapping of the boundary into this manifold and hence an element of its (2n I)-dimensional homotopy or homology group, which is free cyclic. Attach 2r the corresponding integer to the simplex. The cochain so defined is a cocycle and belongs to the rth basic class. To prove this theorem we take on H(n, N) a definite Schubert variety V defined by the function in (11), which carries a cycle Z, dual to the cocycle 4>T' The Schubert variety being an algebraic variety on the algebraic variety H(n, N), it follows from the triangulation theorem of algebraic varieties25 that H(n, N) can be covered by a complex L such that V is a subcomplex. Let L* be the dual cellular subdivision of Land letfbe a mapping of Minto L*, which, according to Theorem 1, induces over M a complex sphere bundle equivalent to the tangent bundle of M. By the theorem on the simplicial approximation of mappings there exists a subdivision of M and a simplicial mapping fl of the subdivision into L* such that f and fl are homotopic. By Theorem 2 the complex sphere bundle over M induced by fl is equivalent to the tangent bundle of M. For simplicity of notation we can therefore assume f to be a simplicial mapping of Minto L* Let K be the skeleton of M of dimension 2(n - r + 1). j(K) is a sub complex of L* of dimension ~ 2(n - r + 1). The rth basic cocycle of M is by definition a linear function of the integral chains of dimension 2(n - r + 1) of K such that its value at a simplex IT of K is the intersection number of f(IT) and V. To give a description of the Schubert variety V we take in E(n N) a linear N - r) of dimension n N - r, and let L(r) be the linear subsubspace L(n space of dimension r which is totally perpendicular to L(n N - r) . Then V consists of all X(n) of H(n, N) satisfying the condition
+
+
+
+
dim(X(n)
n L(n + N
- r)) ~ n - r
+
+
+ l.
We take in L(r) r mutually perpendicular unit vectors ai, ... , aT' To each X(n) not belonging to V the projection of 01 , . . . , aT on X(n) will give r vectors which are linearly independent, and the construction fails exactly for the X(n) belonging to V. With these preparations consider a simplex IT of K. If the intersection number KI(f(IT) , V) = 0, the above construction will give a continuous field of r linearly independent complex vectors at each point of f(IT) and hence also at each point of IT, which shows that the integer attached to IT according to the statement of the theorem is also zero. It remains therefore to consider the case 25 VAN DER WAERDEN,
(26).
149
102
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
+
that KI(f(u), V) = E ~ o. In this case feu) is of dimension 2(n - r 1) . Since feu) and V belong to dual subdivisions, we have E = 1. Let Xo(n) be the linear space of H(n, N) common to Vandf(u). The orthogonal projection of al , ... , aT defines on each X(n) ~ Xo(n) of feu) r linearly independent complex vectors, which, by the resolution of all the X(n) belonging to feu) into a topological product, are mapped into the manifold p. of all the ordered sets of r linearly independent vectors in Xo(n). Our purpose is to prove that by means of the sets of vectors on the boundary of(u), of(u) is mapped into a cycle belongl)st homology group of p.. For simplicity ing to the generator of the (2n - 2r of language let us call index the integer m obtained by mapping the field on the boundary of(u) into a fibre U(n, r), the image cycle being in the homology class equal to m times the generator of H2n-2T+I(U(n, r)). Suppose first that a continuous field of ordered sets of n linearly independent vectors el, . . . , en is defined throughout feu) and let r linearly independent vectors h, ... , fT be defined over of(u) such that
+
+
n
fi =
L
k-I
fikek ,
1
~
i
~
r.
Regarding el, ... , en as fixed, these equations also define a mapping of df(u) into p.. We assert that their indices are equal. In fact, the existence of the field el, ... , en throughout feu) provides exactly a deformation of the field el , ... , en over df(u) into vectors e; , ... , e: which are constant. We assume that XG(n) has the property that the orthogonal projections of al , .. • , aT_I onto it are linearly independent, which is possible, after applying a small deformation if necessary. Since feu) is a simplex, we can define over feu) a continuous field of n linearly independent vectors, such that in every X(n) the first r - 1 of these vectors are the orthogonal projections in X(n) of ai, ... , aT _ 1 respectively. This continuous field is then deformed into a continuous field el, . . . , en over feu) such that in each X(n) the vectors CI , ... , en constitute a frame (that is, are mutually perpendicular unit vectors). It is well-known that the deformation can be so chosen that during the deformation the vector subspace determined by the first s vectors (1 ~ s ~ n) remains fixed. With these deformations performed, we proceed to study the orthogonal projection a~ of aT in X(n). The index of the field of orthogonal projections of al , .. . , aT on dfCu) is equal to the index of the field el , .. . , er_1 , a~ on df(u) and is also equal to the index of the same field, when CI, . . . , er - 1 are considered as constant vectors. "Ve also remark that the vector a~ is linearly independent of Cl , ... , er - 1 at every point ~ Xo(n) of feu). To show that the index in question is 1 we choose the continuous field of vectors en+l, ... , Cn+N over feu) such that eA, 1 ~ A ~ n N, is a frame in ECn N). Then we have n+N
+
aT
=
L
A-I
UA
eA ,
1,
+
150 CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
103
and
a:
n
=
L
Uriei.
i-I
According to our previous remark we can regard the vectors eA , 1 ~ A ~ n + N, as fixed and consider the mapping of f(q) - Xo(n) into Sen - r) defined by the vector whose components with respect to a fixed frame are Ur,r+l, • . • , Urn. Thus we see that the index is 1, and Theorem 7 is proved. It is also possible to introduce from a bundle of complex spheres Sen) the fibre bundles ~(r)* over the same base space whose fibre at each point is the manifold U*(n, r) of all ordered sets of r(1 ~ r ~ n) mutually perpendicular vectors of S(n) , The manifold U*(n, r) is an absolute retract of U(n, r), Theorem 7 still holds, if we replace everywhere the phrase "ordered sets of r linearly independent complex vectors" by "ordered sets of r mutually perpendicular vectors of S(n)", and, naturally also the manifold U(n, r) by U*(n, r). 2. A third definition of the basic characteristic classes We suppose in this section that the base space M, which is a complex manifold, is compact, From the tangent bundle ~ over M we construct the fibre bundle ~(r)* (1 ~ r ~ n) as explained at the end of the last section, Then the following theorem gives a third definition of the rth basic characteristic class: THEOREM 8. The rth basic characteristic class of Iv.[ is the cohomology class of M, each of whose cocycles 'Y has the following property: Under the projection of ~(r)* into M, 'Y is mapped into a cocycle 'Y*. There exists in ~(r)* a cochain {3*, such that o{3*
=
'Y* and that (3* reduces to a fundamental cocycle on each fibre of
~(r) *.
The last statement in the theorem needs some explanation. Let P be a polyhedron and Q CPa closed subpolyhdron of P. If 'Y is a cochain in P, its reduced cochain on Q is the cochain 'Y' such that 'Y" q = E 'Y' q, where E = 1 or 0 according as the simplex q belongs to Q or not. Moreover, the integral cohomology group of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 of a fibre being free cyclic, a fundamental cocycle on the fibre is a cocycle of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 which belongs to a generator of the cohomology group. It is also understood that the cycles and cocycles are defined in terms of simplicial decompositions of M and ~(r)*. To define the inverse mapping of the cocycles of M into the cocycles of ~(r)* induced by the projection 7r of ~ ( r ) * into M, we therefore take a simplicial approximation 71" of 71'. Let q* be a simplex of dimension 2n - 2r + 2 of ~(r)*. Then we define 'Y* ' q* = 'Y. 7r'(q*),
+
if 7r' (q*) is of dimElnsion 2n - 2r 2 and 'Y*. q* = 0 if 71" (q*) is of lower dimension , The cocycle 'Y* depends on 71", but its cohomology class is independent of it. The theorem asserts that any such cocycle 'Y* reduces to a fundamental co cycle on a fibre.
151 104
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
In order to prove Theorem 8 we need the following lemma: 4. With the notations of Theorem 8 let U be a neighborhood of M and let 71"-1(U) be its complete inverse image in \5(r)*. Let K be a finite complex and L its skeleton of dimension ~ 2n - 2r. Iff and g are two continuous mappings into 71"-1(U) of K and L respectively, there is a continuous mapping f* of K into 71"-1(U) which is homotopic to f and coincides with g on L. We denote by I the unit segment 0 ~ t ~ 1 and consider the topological product K X I. To prove Lemma 4 is to define a continuous mappingf(K X I) C 7I"-I(U), withf(K X 0) andf(L X 1) given. For this purpose we decompose K simplicially and arrange the simplexes of the decomposition in a sequence that every simplex is preceded by its faces. The mapping is then defined by successive extensions over the prisms constructed on the simplexes of the sequence. We resolve 7I"-I(U) into the topological product of U and a fixed fibre Fo and denote by A the projection of 71"-1(U) onto Fo. Let / be a vertex of K. Then f(u o X 0) andf(uo X I) are both defined in \5(r)*, and can be joined by a segment, on which the prism on U O is mapped. Using mathematical induction we suppose f be defined over all prisms on simplexes preceding u m of the sequence, and consider u m , m ~ 2n - 2r. By hypothesis, the mapping is defined over a(u m X I), which is topologically a sphere of topological dimension m. The mapping can be extended over u m X I , if and only if f(a(u m X I)) is homotopic to zero in ij(r)*, that is, by the covering homotopy theorem, if and only if v(a(u m X I)) is homotopic to zero in Fo. The latter is the case, because the m th homotopy group of Fo is zero. It follows that f is defined for the subcomplex L X I + K X 0 of the prism K X I. By a well-known elementary geometric construction26 f is then extended over K X I. Thus the lemma is proved. We proceed to prove Theorem 8. Let'Y be a cocycle of M belonging to the rth basic class defined by the construction of Theorem 7, with the bundle \5(r) replaced by \5(r)*. To explain Theorem 7 for this case, we take a simplicial decomposition of 1vI which is so fine that each simplex belongs to a neighborhood of M. Let K 2n - 2r +l = K be the (2n - 2r + I)-dimensional skeleton of the simplicial decomposition. There exists a continuous mapping 'It of K into ij(r)* such that 7I"'It(p) = P for every p f K . Let u be a simplex of dimension 2n 2r + 2. The mapping 'It defines a mapping of the boundary au of u into \5(r)* and the mapping X'It defines a mapping of au into Fo , and hence a cycle of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 of Fo. Let this cycle be homologous to a multiple 'Y(u) of the generating cycle of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 of Fo. According to Theorem 7 the cocycle 'Y(1/;) defillf~d by assigning the integer 'Y(u) to u belongs to the rth basic class. Moreover, it was also proved 27 that to a given cocycle 'Y of therth basic class there exists a mapping 1/; such that 'Y(1/;) = 'Y. We suppose 1/; to be so chosen. Let 71"' be a simplicial approximation of 1T" and let 'Y* be the inverse image of 'Y under 71"' as defined above. We shall show that 'Y* is the coboundary of an LEMMA
[1], p. 501: [21], p. 124.
26 ALEXANDROFF-HoPF, 27 STEENROD,
152 105
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
+
integral cochain {3* of dimension 2n - 2r 1 of ij(rl*. To define (3* let r* be a simplex of dimension 2n - 2r 1 of ij(r)*, and let r = 11"'( r*). The discussion will be divided into two cases, according as r is of dimension equal to or less than 2n - 2r + 1. Suppose r be of dimension 2n - 2r 1. In this case 11"' establishes a simplicial and therefore topological mapping between rand .,.*. By Lemma 4 there exists a mapping 11"" ( r) C ij(r)*, which is homotopic to 11"'-\ r) and coincides with 'l' on the boundary or. We then take an oriented sphere of topological dimension 2n - 2r 1 arid denote by HI, H2 its two hemispheres. We map HI and H2 into r by the mappings hI and ~ of the degrees -1 and + 1 respectively, such that hi and ~ are identical on the "equator" HI n H 2 . A mapping I of the sphere HI + H2 into ij(rl* is then defined by the conditions
+
+
+
I(p) I(p)
= =
P E HI,
1I""h, (p), f~(p),
p E H2 .
This mapping I is by construction continuous. Taking its projection AI on Fo , we get an element of the (2n - 2r + I)-dimensional homotopy group of the fibre and hence an integer, on account of the orientability of the bundle ij(rl* . This integer we define to be {3* . r* . I t is to be remarked that {3* . r* in general depends on the deformation which carries 11",-1 to 11"", but only one such deformation will be utilized, and (3*. r* is thus well defined. Next let r be of dimension < 2n - 2r 1. We suppose without loss of generality that po = 1I"(Fo) E r. Let any simplex r' of dimension 2n - 2r 1 be mapped into r* by a non-degenerate .o rientation-preserving simplicial mapping. By Lemma 4 this mapping is homotopic to a mapping 1I"'''(r') C ij(rl* such that 1I""'(or') = qo, where qo is a point of Fo. We identify all the points on or', thus getting an oriented sphere of topological dimension 2n - 2r 1, which is mapped into Fo by the mapping A1I"'" (r') C Fo . This mapping defines an element of the (2n - 2r + I)-dimensional homotopy group and hence an integer, \\·hich is defined to be {3*. r*. It remains to show that the coboundary of the cochain (3* so defined is equal to -y*. For this purpose let q* be a simplex of ij(rl* of dimension 2n - 2r 2. It is sufficient to verify that -y*. u* = o{3* · u* = f3*. ou* . Suppose first that u = 1I"'(u*) is of dimension 2n - 2r 2. The mapping 7r" is defined for each simplex of AU and hence for AU itself, because it coincides with f on the (2n - 2r)-dimensional skeleton K 2n - 2r • We therefore have two mappings, Af and A7r" respectively, of AU into Fo such that they are identical on [(2n-2r . Our fibre Fo being (2n - 2r)-simple, this is a situation discussed by Eilenberg,28 who introduced several cochains, denoted in his notation by c(Af) , C(A7r"), deAf, A7r") respectively. In our notation they are given by
+
+
+
+
+
c(Af) . q
=
-y*. u* ,
C(A1I"") = 0, deAf, A1I"") ·ou 28 ElLE N BE RG,
[11], pp . 235-237.
=
f3*·ou*,
153 106
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
where the second relation follows from the fact that A1r" is defined for the simplex u bounded by au. From a theorem of Eilenberg we have odCA1/;, h") = c("A1/;) - c(h"),
or 'Y*' u*
=
(3* ·au*,
which is to be proved. Next suppose u = 1r'(u*) be of dimension <2n - 2r 2. If each simplex of au* is mapped by 1r' into a simplex of dimension <2n - 2r 1, {3*·au* is 1 and clearly zero. The other possibility is that u is of dimension 2n - 2r that exactly two of the simplexes of au* , say T~ and T:, are mapped by 1r' into 11. If T~ and T: are coherently oriented with the boundary i}u*, it follows by definition that {3*' (T~ T:) = O. On the other hand, it is not difficult to see that {3*' (i}u* - Tl* - T2) * = O. Hence we have {3*·i}u* = O. We have thus proved that 'Y* is the coboundary of a cochain {3*. To see that (3* reduces on a fibre Fo , we suppose the simplicial decomposition of \1(r)* so made that Fo is a subcomplex. Every simplex of Fo is mapped by 1r' into a point, so that we have 'Y*' u* = 0 for every simplex u* of dimension 2n - 2r 2 of Fo , which shows that {3* reduces to a cocycle on Fo . To show that {3* is the fundamental co cycle on Fo , it is sufficient to show that one is the value of its product with a cycle belonging to the generating homology class of dimension 2n - 2r -r 1 of Fo . For this purpose we take an oriented sphere of 1 and map it simplicially into Fo such that the topological dimension 2n - 2r map belongs to the generator of the (2n - 2r I)-dimensional homotopy group of Fo. The image of this map defines a cycle of Fo belonging to the generating homology class of the (2n - 2r I)-dimensional homology group, and its product with {3* is 1. It follows that (3* reduces to a fundamental cocycle on Fo. Our Theorem 8 is now completely proved.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
3. In terms of differential forms Consider again the Grassmann manifold H(n, N) . We take as point of a new space a linear space E(n) and r vectors en- r+!, .. . , en belonging to E(n) such that eiej = O,j, n - r 1 ~ i, j ~ n . This space, to be denoted by R(r, n , N), is clearly a fibre bundle over H(n, N), the projection of a point of R(r, n, N) being the corresponding E(n) and each fibre being homeomorphic to U* (n, r). This fibre bundle R(r, n, N) is transformed transitively by the unitary group in the space E(n N). Let TV r be the rth basic class of H(n, N) and'Y E TVr be one of its cocycles. 'Y is mapped by the inverse mapping induced by any simplicial approximation of 1r into a cocycle having the properties asserted by Theorem 8. In particular, we can take for'Y the cocycle defined by the differential form r . The inverse image of r in R(r, n, N) under 1r is a differential form which for convenience we denote by r. The form r then defines a cocycle 'Y* in R(r, n, N).
+
+
154 107
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
From Theorem 8 it follows thae 9 there exists a cochain (3* in R(r, n, N) such that l>{3* = -y* and such that {3* reduces to a fundamental cocycle on a fibre. In order to define (3* in R(r, n, N) by means of a suitably chosen differential 30 form, we shall make use of the following lemma proved by de Rham: LEMMA 5. Let 111 be a compact differentiable manifold of class ~2 and let K be a simplicial decompositwn of lIf, whose simplexes are a'; , i = 1, ... , aI" P = 0, 1, ... , n, and whose incidence relations are
au,p.
__
a~l
(1')
L
1'-1
1)ij
Uj
j=1
Then there exists a set of differential forms (1')
cP i ,
i
p = 0, 1, ...
= 1, .. . , aI"
,n,
such that the following conditions are satisfied: 1)
1
cp~p) =
l>ij,
Uj(p)
2)
A __ (p)
_"
""Pi
-
(1'+1)
L.J
1)ji
(1'+1)
cPj
•
We apply this lemma to the manifold R(r, n, N), and write for simplicity 1. The cochain {3* is defined by definition by a system of equations p
= 2n - 2r
+
1, . . . ,
i
hi,
(XI'.
Let ap
W
=
L
Xicp~P).
i=l
Then we have
1 p
U
w
=
x•
i
which shows that the differential form w defines the cochain (3*. we have
By construction
dw =
+
+
Now the unitary group U(n N) in E(n N) transforms transiti,oely the manifold R(r, n, N). Let s be a transformation of U(n N). If (J is a differen-
+
29 We have tacitly assumed at this point of our discussion that the Theorem 8, proved by a combinatorial construction for the simplicia.l approximations of the projection 1T, holds for 1T itself, when the cocycles are expressed by means of differential forms. It is, however, possible to avoid this assumption by observing that the cochain (3* exists in R(r, n, N) such that 0(3* = 'Y~ . That (3* reduces to a fundamental co cycle on a fibre then follows from the very definition of the characteristic cocyc\e on H(n, N). 30 DE RAHM, [20], p_ 178.
ISS
108
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
tial form in R(r, n, N), we shall denote by sO its transform by the transformation s. We also use the notation 0 '" 0 to denote that 0 is derived. LEMMA 6. Let f3* be a cochain of dimension 2n - 2r 1, whose co boundary is 'Y*. Let w be a differential form which defines f3*. Then sw - w '" O. First of all, the differential form sw - w is exact, since we have
+
d(sw - w) = ~r
s
+ 1 of R(r, n, N).
Let be a cycle of dimension 2n - 2r that
The cycle Sw Then we have
-
<1>, = O.
-
w being homologous to zero, let
1 r
sw - w =
1
.r-r
w
=
Z* be the chain it bounds.
1 =f w
z·
iiZ'
It is sufficient to prove
<1>,.
Let Z be the projection in the base space H(n, N) of the chain Z* in R(r, n, N). The boundary of Z is the projection of Since the Betti group of dimension 2n - 2r + 1 of H(n, N) is zero, the projection of S bound's in H(n, N) a chain which we shall call Zl ' Then the projection of bounds the chain SZl , and we have
ss - s.
ss
It follows that
Thus Lemma 6 is proved. ThEOREM 9. Under the projection of R(r, n , N) into H(n, N) the differential form <1>, is mapped by the inverse mapping into R(r, n, N). There exists a differenN) tialform 'If' which is invariant under transformations of the unitary group U(n operating in R(r, n, N) and whose exterioT derivative d'lf' is equal to <1>•. By Lemma 5 we can construct the differential form w in R(r, n , N) such that
+
dw = <1>,. For such a differential form w it follows from Lemma 6 that 5w - w '"
o.
Let dv be the invariant volume element of U(n dvover U(n N) is equal to 1. We put
+
IT =
1
U(n+N)
+ N) such that the integral of
sw dv.
156
109
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
Then II is invariant under Ul..n
xII
=
1
U(n+N)
+ N) and we have
s·dw·dv = 4>r
1
U( ..+N)
dv ... 4>r,
which proves our theorem. To a point of R(r, n, N) we now attach the frames el , ••• , e,,+N in E(n N) such that el, ... , en determine the E(n) and that en-r+l , ••. , e" are the vectors in question. For clearness let us agree in the remainder of this section on the following ranges of indices:
+
+ 1 .;;:;; A, B, C ~ n, n + 1 ;;:;; i, j, k ~ n + N.
1 ;;:;; a, (3, 'Y ;;:;; n - r,
n - r
In a neighborhood of R(r, n, N) we can choose a differentiable family of such frames, one attached at each point of the neighborhood. By means of the family of frames the forms (JAa , BAa, (JAi , OAi, (JAB can be constructed according to the equations (7) . They constitute a set of linearly independent linear differential forms at each point of R(r, n, N). Our form'll", whose existence was asserted by Theorem 9 and which is invariant under U(n + N), is necessarily a polynomial (in the sense of Grassmann algebra) in the forms of this set, with constant coefficients. On the other hand, the form II, being itself in R(r, n, N), must be invariant under the transformation (J:"1 ~. = £...J ~a '1 · ·(Jn.J •. •
;
where a,j are the elements of a unitary matrix. e AB =
L
We put
(JAi (JiB
i
It follows from the first main theorem on vector invariants of the unitar) group that II is a polynomial in (J Aa , -"a, (JAB, e AB ,with constant coefficients. Moreover, on a fibre, that is, omitting all tenns in e AB , II becomes a fundamental cocycle. All these results can be summarized in the following theorem: THEOREM 10. There exists in R(r, n, N) a polynomial IT in (JAa, IJ Aa , (JAB, eAR , with constant coefficients, such that dIT = 4>r. When all terms involving e A8 in IT are omitted, the form defines a fundamental cocycle on a fibre. CHAPTER
IV
HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
1. Fundamental formulas of Hermitian Geometry
Let M be a compact complex manifold. M is called an Hermitian manifold, if an intrinsic Hermitian differential form is given throughout the manifold. In each local coordinate system :;' the Hermitian differential form is defined by
157 110 (28)
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
ds
2
n
=
L
(Iii (Z,
i
z) (dz dzi) ,
i';=1
where, as well as in later formulas, we insert a parenthesis to designate that the multiplication of the differential forms in question is ordinary multiplication . We shall agree, unless otherwise stated, that the indices i, j, k take the values 1 to n. Our main result in this chapter is to establish that the n basic classes which. arise from the analytic structure of a complex manifold, are completely determined by the Hermitian metric, if the manifold in question is an Hermitian manifold. In particular, as \ye shall see later, the theorem for the class WI reduces to the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil, if \\'e interpret the Hermitian metric as a Riemannian metric for the real manifold of 2n topological dimensions. We begin by establishing the fundamental formulas for local Hermitian Geometry. For this purpose we determine in a neighborhood of 111 n linear differential forms
2
ds =
(29)
L
(
i=l
The forms
(30)
Wi
=
L
Uii
z = 1 ... ,n,
1==1
where Uil are the elements of a unitary matrix
U = (nil)' and which we take to be independent variables. sponding to Wk, so that Wi(Ck)
Let
Ci
be the dual base corre-
= h.
From the Hermitian differential form a scalar product of the contravariant vectors can be defined, and we have We shall call a frame the figure formed by a point P and n such vectors C;. With a natural topology the set of frames constitutes a fibre bundle over M. The forms Wi are intrinsically defined in the fibre bundle. By actual calculation in terms of a local coordinate system, we find that their exterior derivatives are of the form
where
158
111
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
so that Wii
But the fonus
W'J
+
Wii
=
0.
are defined up to the transfonuation
where the quantities Aiik are arbitrary. It is easy to show that there exists one, and only one, set of fonus Wi; , such that the following equations are satisfied: (31)
Wi;
+ Wj;
=
0,
From the uniquenest:l of this set of forms follows the fact that they are intrinsically defined in the fibre bundle. The forms Wi , Wi; constitute therefore a set of linearly independent linear differential fonus in the fibre bundle. From equations (31) it is possible to draw all the consequences of local Hermitian Geometry. In fact, we put (32)
Exterior differentiation of the first set of equations in (31) will give dn; -
L
Wkn k;
k
+L
nkWk;
k
= 0,
where we have put (33)
We remark that
dn i
+ Lk nk-Wki is of the
form
Li.k if;ijkWiwk.
and that we can put
On the other hand, we have
or
which shows that
X iki
is a linear combination of n
X iki
=
L
1=1
w" , Wk :
n
aikil WI
+L
1~1
biikl WI.
It follows that
159 112
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
Substituting this expression of Xikj into the last equation, we see immediately that aikjl must be symmetric in the last two indices j, l. It follows that n,k is of the form
L
=
n ik
bikjlWIWj .
The equations for the exterior derivatives dWi , dWsj and the equations obtained therefrom by exterior differentiation we shall call the fundamental equations of local Hermitian Geometry. These equations will now be summarized as follows: dw,
L
=
WjWj,
=
dWij
+L +L
dni
L
W ik Wkj
k
L L
njWj, -
j
(34)
dn,j
n,kWk; -
W,j
L"
ij ,
Wjn ji
=0,
Wiknkj
= 0,
j
k
ni ; =
+n +n
i ,
j
k
R'j. lm WI Wm ,
+
Wj,
= 0,
n,j
Rji .ml ,
R ij•lm
=
+n
= O.
I.m~l
j,
In a well-known way the forms Wi, W ij can be interpreted as defining an infinitesimal displacement, by means of the equations
dp =
L
w,e i
,
i
(35)
Of importance are the Hermitian metrics satisfying the condition
n.
(36)
= 0,
which will be called Hermitian metrics without torsion. without torsion can be characterized by the condition
An Hermitian metric
d(l: w,w.) = 0,
(37)
i
and was studied by E. Kahler. 31 Kahler proved that in this case there exists locally a function F(z" iii) such that the metric can be written in the form 2
(38)
"i)2
ds = L...J
F
.:> • .:>-k i.k uZ uZ
i_k
(dz dz).
Hermitian metrics ",rithout torsion play an important role in the theory of automorphic functions of several complex variables. 31
KAHLER, [16J.
160 CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
113
2. Formulas for the basic characteristic classes As defined in Chapter III there are on 111 n basic characteristic classes, the rth one (1 ~ r ~ n) being of dimension 2(n - r + 1). We shall show that, if 111 is an Hermitian manifold, the~e classes are defined by the local properties of the Hermitian metric. For this purpose we put 1
(39)
'¥r
= (27rv _ I _l)n-r+\n - r
+
I)!
where n;; are the forms defined in (34) and where the meaning of the summation has been explained before. Then we have the following theorem, which is the main result of this paper: THEOREM 11. The farm '¥r defined by (39) is the farm carresponding to' Ihe r'h basic characteristic class W r in the sense that the praduct af any homalagy class r af dimensian 2(n - r + 1) with W r is equal to' the integral af '¥ r aver r:
r· Wr =
(40)
i
'¥r .
We first establish the following lemma: 7. Let t. be the differential farm II in Thearem 10, with every (J and 8 replaced by the carrespanding wand n with the same indices. Then dt. = '¥r . We observe that the equations for dWi; , dn i ; are exactly of the same fonn as the equations for d(Ji; , d8 ij , the only difference being that 8 ij is given by the equation (12). It follows that LEMMA
,,+N
dt. - '¥r
==
0 mod. nij -
L:
B-,,+1
(JiB (JB;.
By mathematical induction on the degree of dt. - '¥T it is easy to show that then dt. - '¥, = O.
To prove Theorem 11 we make use of the definition of Wr given in Theorem 7, with ~(r) replaced by ~(r)*. A sufficiently fine simplicial decomposition K of 111 is taken and a continuous mapping if; of its (2n - 2r + I)-dimensional skeleton into ~(r)* is defined, such that the image of every point belongs to the fibre over it. Let
r,
equation (40a) will follow
161 114
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
But, by Lemma 7,
The image 1/;(11 A) has a singular point and we see that the last integral is precisely the definition of ')1(11 A) given in integral form . Hence Theorem 11 is proved. 3. The case r
= 1 and the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil
In the case r = 1 we can take for the cycle ~ in (40) one of the fundamental cycles of the manifold M. Then we have ~. W l = x, the Euler-Poincare characteristic of M. On the other hand, the manifold M can be considered as a real differentiable manifold and the Hermitian metric can be used to define a Riemannian metric in the real manifold. It is to be expected that the formula (40) will then reduce to the formula of Allendoerfer-Weil. We shall show that this is actually the case, if the Hermitian metric is without torsion. To study the Hermitian metric as a Riemannian metric, we decompose each of the forms w. , Wij , fl' j into its real and imaginary parts, writing
W. (41)
+ Y-11/;., ().; + Y -l1/;'j, 8.; + Y -1 '!I'i·
= ().
=
Wij
fl'j =
From the last two equations of (34) we have .
(41a)
().; + ();. = 8.; + 8 i • =
0,
1/;.; -
1/;;.
= 0,
0,
'!I.; -
'!I j •
= O.
The Hermitian metric can then be written as a Riemannian metric in the form:
di =
L {((),/ + (1/;.il . •
We get, moreover, by separating the real and imaginary parts of the equations for dw., dw.;, the following equations: (42)
d8. =
L;
()j()j' -
L;
1/;i!J;;; ,
d1/;. =
Li
();1/;ji
+ Li
1/;i()j. ,
and (43)
It follows that, for the Riemannian Geometry of 2n dimensions thus obtained, the curvature forms can be conveniently described by the matrix
162 115
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
(44)
or simply by
(!
-'It)
8.
It only remains to compare the integrand of the Allendoerfer-Weil formula calculated from this matrix of curvature forms with the expression 'ltl defined in (39) .
Let 12 denote the integrand of the Allendoerfer-Weil formula. We observe that (- 2'71)"12 obeys the same expansion rule as a so-called Pfaffian function of the 2n t h order,32 which is an integral rational function in a number of independent variables, whose square is equal to the value <;>f a ske"'-symmetric determinant of order 2n. It follmys that -'It
8
I.
On the other hand, ,ye have 1
from which we get, after some reduction, (-lr(27r)2n 'lt~
= 18 + ~ -1 'It
_18+ V -l'lt - 8+ V-I'lt
8+
~-I'lt1
-8+~'lt1 = (-lr
I:
-'It
8
I.
Hence we have
and finally 12 =
'lt
l ,
by comparing the coefficients of one of the terms in both sides. CHAPTER
V
APPLICATIONS TO ELLIPTIC HERMITIAN GEOMETRY
1. Preliminaries
We are going to make use of the above results to derive some consequences for elliptic Hermitian Geometry. 32 PASCAL,
[17], pp . 60-64 .
163 116
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
The local Hermitian Geometry whose fundamental equations are given by (34) is called elliptic Hermitian, if we have
(45)
i
~
j.
This definition owes its origin to the type of geometry studied by G. Fubini,33 E. Study,34 and E. Cartan,35 which we shall prove to satisfy the conditions (45). The elliptic Hermitian Geometry of Fubini-Study is defined as follows: We consider the complex projective space of n dimensions P n , with the homogeneous coordinates z", where, as well as throughout this section, we shall use the following ranges of our indices:
o~
ct,
{J, 'Y ~ n,
1
~
i, j, k
~
n.
In P" let a positive definite Hermitian form be given: (46) which will serve to define the scalar product of two vectors in the affine space An+! of n 1 dimensions, with the (non-homogeneous) coordinates z". We normalize the coordinates z" in P n, such that
+
(47)
(zz)
=
1.
An Hermitian metric in P n is then defined by the Hermitian form (48)
di
=
(dz dz) -
(z dz)· (2 dz).
The group of linear transformations in An+! which leaves the form (46) in1). We take in An+l n 1 vectors Ak variant is the unitary group U(n such that
+
+
(49)
For a differentiable family of such sets of vectors we have (50)
dAa
=
LII
(J,.pA Il ,
where (51)
and where the forms (52)
33 FuBlNI, 34
STUDY,
[13). [25).
35 CARTAN,
[4).
(Jail
satisfy the equations of structure:
164 117
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
Let B", be fixed vectors in An+! , satisfying the equations = ~afJ'
B",B{J
The coordinates of a vector Ao with respect to B. are defined by the equation
Ao
=
L: z'" B., a
from which we find
(dAo dAo) -
(Ao dAo)(Ao dAo)
=
(dz dZ) -
(z dZ)(z dz).
It follows that, if we regard Ao as defining the points in p" , the Hermitian form in (48) can be written as ds2
= (dAo dAo) - (Ao dAo)(Ao dAo),
and, by (50), as " ds2 = L..J (0 0,0- 0 ,),
(53)
;
This proves in particular that the Hermitian form in (48) is positive definite. To calculate the curvature of the metric (53) we shall make use of the equations (52). Using the notations of local Hermitian Geometry in the last Chapter, we put
=
W,
(JOi.
Then, by (52), we get
dw, = deo, =
L: Wj(Jji + W;«(Jii
-
(Joo).
;~;
From the uniqueness of the set of forms equations of (34) it follows that
Wi;
=
(J;; -
Wi;
satisfying the first and the ninth
(Joo •
We find then
dw ij =
L: WikWkj + (JiO(JOj,
i
k
and therefore i
~j,
~
j,
165 118
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
which are exactly the equations (45). Thus we have proved that it is possible to define in the complex projective space an elliptic Hermitian Geometry. 2. Fonnulas of Cartan apd Wirtinger When the Hermitian manifold is locally elliptic, it is possible to calculate the forms 'lI r in (39) more explicitly. In fact, we are going to prove the following theorem: THEOREM 12. In a locally elliptic H ermitian manifold let A be the exterior differential form corresponding tv t.he H ermitian differential form, that is, A = 2 Li WiWi in case the given H ermitian form is ds = Li (w ic7' Then we have (54)
'lI r
= (27r V
1
-It
r+l
(n + 1) r
A
n-r+l
,
1
~
r
~
n.
It is clear that the construction of A from ds 2 is independent of the choice of the base linear differential forms Wi in terms of which ds 2 is expressed. The theorem is proved by induction on n - r. If n - r = 0, that is, r = n, we have
n
1
'lin
= 27rV-l ~
Suppose the formula (54) be true for r
Aii
+1
= 27rV-l
+ 1, ...
, n.
A.
We have
Consider the second sum inside the braces. If i n - r ~ jn-r , we can replace the sum Lk Qin-rkQkin-r by Win_,Wi,,_,A = Qi.. _,in_,A. If i n- r = jn-r, the sum can be replaced by (Win_,W'n_, + A)A = Qin-,in-,A. By our induction hypothesis we get easily the desired formula (54). As an application let us determine the n basic classes of the complex projective space of n dimensions. The result is given by the following theorem: THEOREM 13. The Tth basic characteristic class (1 ~ r ~ n) of a complex projective space of n dimensions is dual to the homology class containing the cycle carried by a linear subspace of dimension
T -
1
mulhplied by (n ;
1).
To prove this theorem we consider the affine space .1.+1 of dimension n + 1 with the coordi~ates za such that the projective space P n under consideration is the hyperplane at infinity with which .1n~ 1 is made into a projective spacc of n + 1 dimensions. As before, za are homogeneous coordinates in P n . Suppose that we hav'e defined at each point 0 of .4 n+l different from the origin T vectors \)i , 1 ~ i ~ r, whose components v~ , ... , 07 are linear forms in the coordinates
166 119
CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
za of a. Then all the points on the line joining the origin 0 to A are projected from 0 into the same point p of P" and the vectors \). , 1 ~ i ~ r, at the points of 03 are projected from 0 into the same vector of p", which we attach to p. I t. is easy to verify that the r vectors thus defined at each point of P" are linearly independent when and only when the r + 1 vectors A, \)1 , ••• , \)r in An+! are linearly independent. We take 1 ~ i ~ r,
where a'i are constants. The a'i can be so chosen that none of the determinants of order r + 1 of the matrix
will vanish. It then follows that the vectors A, dependent when and only when all products
o~
\)1, . . . , \)r
£Yo, • •• ,
lXr
~
will be linearly
n,
thp indices lXo, •• • , lXr being distinct from each other. This is possible when and only when n + 1 - r of the coordinates z« will vanish. In other words, for this particular field of r vectors the points of P n at which the r vectors are linearly dependent are the linear spaces of dimension r - 1 defined by setting It + 1 r of the homogeneous coordinates of P n to zero. The number of
such linear spaces is
(n ~ 1)
and each of them is to be counted simply.
Hence
our theorem is proved. THEOREM 14. (E. Cartan).36 Let M be a closed submanifold of topological dimension 2n - 2r 2 of the complex projective space of n dimensions P" in /Chich an elliptic Hermitian Geometry is defined. Let m be the number of points oj intersection of M with a generic linear sUbspace of dimension r - 1 of P n. Then
+
m -
(55)
- (271T -
1
1n - r +1)
1
A,,-r+l
m
I n particular, if M is an algebraic variety of dimension n - r -r 1 in P n , m is its order. This theorem is an immediate consequence of the Theorems 11, 12, and 13. Related to these discussions is also a formula due to W. Wirtinger. In Hermitian Geometry, as in Riemannian Geometry, it is common to define an element of volume of topological dimension 2p by means of the equation ~2n~
(5G) 36 CARTAN,
[3], p. 206.
= ±
"L..,
(i,· · · ipl
W·
'I
••• W ·
'1'
W·'. ... W·'I'
,
167
120
SHIING·SHEN CHERN
the summation being over all the combinations of i 1 , 1
to a sign A2p is equal to -; A P •
p.
••• ,
i p from 1 to n.
Up
We define
(57)
From (55) follows the theorem: THEOREM 15. (W. Wirtinger).37 In the complex projective space of n dimensions with the elliptic Hermitian metric let V 2p be a p-dimensional algebraic variety of order m and volume V. Then
V =
(58)
(21rY -,-m. p.
INSTITUTE FOR ADVANCED STUDY, PRINCETON, AND TSING HUA UNIVERSITY, CHINA. BIBLIOGRAPHY L ALEXANDROFF, P., UND HOPF, H., Topologie I, Berlin 1935. 2. ALLENDOERFER, C . B ., AND WElL, A ., The Gauss-Bonnet theorem for Riemannian polyhedra, Trans . Amer. Math. Soc ., Vol. 53 (1943), pp. 101-129. 3. CARTAN, E ., Sur les invariants integraux de certains espaces homogenes clos et les proprietes topologiqucs de ces espaces, Annales Soc. pol. Math., Tome 8 (1929), pp. 181-225. 4. CARTAN, E., Le~ons sur la geometrie projective complexe, Paris 1931. 5. CHERN, S., A simple inlTinsic proof of the Gauss-Bonnet formula for closed Riemannian manifolds, Annals of Math., Vol. 45 (1944), pp. 747-752. 6. CHERN, S., Integral fOT'lliulas for the characteristic ' classes of sphere bundles, Proc. Nat . Acad . Sci., Vol. 30 (1944), pp. 269-273. 7. CHERN, S., Some new viewpoints in differential geometry in the large, to appear in Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 8. EHRESMANN, C., Sur la topologie de certains espaces homoglmes, Annals of Math., Vol. 35 (1934), pp. 396-443. 9. EHRESMANN, C., Sur la lopologie des groupes simples clos, C. R . Acad . Sci . Paris, Vol. 208 (1939), pp. 1263-1265. 10. EHRESMANN, C., Various notes on fibre spaces in C. R. Acad . Sci. Paris, Vol. 213 (1941), pp. 762-764; Vol. 214 (1942), pp. 144-147; Vol. 216 (1943), pp . 628-630. 11 . ElLENBERG, S., Cohomology and continuous mappings, Annals of Math., Vol. 41 (1940), pp . 231-251. 12. FELDBAU, J ., Sur la classification des espacesfibres, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Vol. 208 (1939), pp. 1621-1623. 13. FuBINI, G ., Sulle metriche definite da una forma Hermitiana, Instituto Veneto, Vol. 63, 2 (1904), pp. 502-513. 14. HOPF, H., see ALEXANDROFF, P. 15. HUREWICZ, W., AND STEENROD, N ., Homotopy relations in fibre spaces, Proc. Nat. Acad . Sci ., Vol. 27 (1941), pp . 60-64. 16. KAHLER, E ., UbeT eine bemerkenstwerte Henllilische Metrik; Abh. Math. Sem. Hamburg, Vol. 9 (1933), pp . 173-186. 17. PASCAL, E ., Die Determinanten, Leipzig 1900. 18. PONTRJAGIN, L ., CharactcTistic cycles on manifolds, C. R. (Doklady) Acad . Sci. URSS (N. S.), Vol. 35 (1942), pp. 34-37 . 37
WIRTINGER, [311.
168 CLASSES OF HERMITIAN MANIFOLDS
121
19 . PONTRJAGIN, L., On SOIllC topologic invariants of Riemannian manifolds, C. R. (Doklady), Acad . Sci . URSS (N. S.), Vol. 43 (1944), pp . 91-94. 20. DE RHA~I , G., Sur l'analysis sit1ls des !'arietes d n dimensions, J. Math. pures et appl., Tome 10 (1931), pp. 115-200. 21. STEENROD , X ., Topological method.s for the constrllction of tensor functions, Annals of l\Iath., Vol. 43 (19-12), pp. 116-131. 22. STBENROD, ~., The classification of sphere bundles, Annals of Math., Vol. 45 (1944), pp. 2n-t-311. . 23 . Sn:ENRoD, X ., see I1UREWlCz, W. 24 . STIEFEl" E ., Richtungsfelder lind Fernparallelismus in n-dimensionalen Mannigfaltigkeitcn, Comm . Math . Relv., Vol. 8 (1936), pp. 305-343 . 25. STUDY, E., Kurzeste Wege im komplexen Gcbiet, Math. Annalen, Vol. 60 (1905), pp . 321-377. 26. VAN DER W.~ERDEN, B . L., Topologische Begriindung des Kalkuls der abziihlenden Geometric, Math . Annalen, Vol. 102 (1930), pp. 337-362. 27. WElL, A ., see ALLENDOERFER, C . B. 28. WEYL, II., The Classical Groups, Princeton 193n. 29 . WHITNEY, H ., Topological properties of differentiable mantfolds, Bull . Amer. Math. Soc., Vol. 43 (1937), pp . 785-805 . 30. WIIITNEY, II ., On the topology of differentiable manifolds, Lectures in Topology, pp. 101-141, Michigan 1941. 31. WIRTINGER, W., Eine Determinantenidentitat und ihre Anwendung auf analytische Geb£lde in Euklidischer und Hermitischer Massbestimmung, Monatshefte flir Math. u. Physik, Vol. 44 (1936), pp. 343--365.
169 Reprinted from Science Reports National Tsing Hua Univ. 4 (1947).
~
,
SUR UNE CLASSE REMARQUABLE DE V ARIETES DANS L'ESPACE PROJECTIF
AN DIMENSIONS
Par M. Shiing-shen Chern (g{1tI.Ji' )
Department of Mathematics (Received
SePtem~r 6, 1!J4f})
RESUME On donne dans ceUe Note une propriettJ caracUristique d'une cia sse de varitJtes. dans l' espace projectif a n dimensions, etudiees auparavant par Cartan. Ces varietes fournissent une generalisation des surfac.es ayant un reseau. It "xiste une transformation entre ces varietes generalisant la transformation bien connu" de Laplace. INTRODUCTION La geometrie differentielle projective des reseaux conjugues1 ) a ete j'objet de recherches de bien des geometres. AnaI~tiquement cette theorie est -etroitement lire a. Ia theorie de l'equation aux derivees partielles de Laplace: (1)
od a, b, c' sont des fonctions de u, v. C'est.Ie probl~me de I'integration de I'equation (1) qui a conduit Laplace, Moutara, Goursat de fonder sur cette equation une theorie analytique profonde. Les interpretations geometriques de ces resultats sont dues Ii Darboux, Koenigs, Guichard, Tzitzeica, Bompiani, etc . , en ne citant que Ies noms les plus importants. Je vais signaler dans cette Note une c1asse de varietes Ii p dimensions dans I'espace projectif a n dimensions . qui jouerit de proprietes grneralisant les proprietes des surfaces sur IesquelJes IJ existe un reseau conjugue. M. Cart an a rencontre ces varietes dans un probl~rne de nature differente.'l Je me propose donc d'appeler ces variae5 Ies varietes de Cart an . §l.
NOTIONS PRE LlMINA IRES.
Nous dMinissons
d'apr~s
EQUA nONS FONDAMENT ALES.
Cartan comme
rep~re
projectifl} de l'espace projectif
Ii n dimensions I'ensemble de' n + 1 points analytiques (chacun it n+ 1 composantes) 328
170
329
SUR UNE CLASSE REMARQUABLE
A, At,···. An, dMinis Ii un facteur commun pr~. Un tel rep~re d~pend de fl(n+ 2) paramt~res
arbitraires.
Les ~quations du d~placement infiniMsimal sont de la
forme
(2) dAn=wno A-/-W111Al+",+wnn An.
01\ les W sont des formes de Pfaff a ces param~tres. En introduisant les notions "produit ext~rieur" et . 'd~riv~e exterieure" comme d..'habitude, on sait que les (J} satisfont aux ~quations
wij
=
[wlo Wj]+[wi t U!Jj] + ",+[WiH wniJ,
wio
=
[Win wooJ+[Wit wlftl+ ,,,+[w;n
qui s'appellent les
~quations
i. j=l • ....
H,
(3)
("nol.
de structure de I'espace .
Cela ~tant, consid~rons dans I'espace une variH~ V pap dimensions') et faisons correspondre a chaque point A de cette vari~t~ un re~re dont les n+ 1 sommets seront Ie point A, puis p points AI, A 2 , .... Ap situ~s dans I'hyperpian tangent. enfin n-: p autres points Ap+l' ... . An., Pour tout d~placement infinit~simal dans cette famille de rep~res on a Wp+I='" =Wn=O. (4)
;=1 ..... p; a=p+1. ....
H,
o~
les Cija sont des fonctions des param~tres sur la vari~M et !lont sym~triques par rapport aux indices. i . j . Soit q Ie nombre des formes quadratiques (S)
qui iont lin~airement ind~pendantes. On sa it qu'on peut choisir Ie rep~re attach6 au point A de mani~re que les formes ""PH, .... tPp+q soient Iin~airement
171 M. SHUNG-SHEN CHERN
330
iDd~pendantes, les formes !PP+Hl, ••. , !Pn ~tant identiquement nulles. lin6aire de cones du second ordre de sommet A dMini par l'~quation
Le
r~seau
est appeM Ie reseau asymptotique relatif au point A . 11 jouit de la propri~t~ que toot cone du reseau est engendre par les tangentes aux courbes de la vaJ'iCte dont Ie plan osculateur est situe dans line varietc plane fixe a p + q-l dimensions qui contient l'hyperplan tangent et est contenue dans I'hyperplan osculateur de Vp . Cela pose, M. Cartan s'est propose de determiner toutes les varietes dimensions dont Ie rcseau asymptotique est reductible a la forme 6 ) Al
w~+
(7)
... +lp wp=o.
Pour une telle variete on pourra evidemment supposer choisi Ie point A de rrlani~re a avoir !PP+'i=~'
rep~re
attache au
;=1, ... , p.
Les varietes cherchees peuvent etre done regardees comme les solutions du de Pfaff: W .. =o,
a=p+l, . .. , n,
W~, p+~=wi,
;= I, . .. , p,
ap
(8) syst~me
(9)
(OJ,
p+~=o,
i:f=j; i, j=l, ... , p,
wi, 2p+J.=0, i=l, ". , p ; l= ' , .. .. n-2p, LA derivation exterieure de ces equations nous donne alors I-p
[Wt (wp+~, p+i-2wi~+wOO)] - ~JWkWki)=O, ;=1, ... , p, -[WI Wjt]+[wj wP+j, p+~ ]=0, i:f=j ; i, j=l, ... , p, [wi Wp+ t , 2p+l] =0,
(10)
;=1, .'. , p; },=1, . ' ., n-2p.
U appliquant la theorie des syst~mes de Pfaff en involution, l\L Cartan a demontre va,ietes che,cMes dependent de pCp-I) fonctions a,bit,a;,es de de"" "'pments. Nous appelterons une teile variCte une variCtc de Cartan.
qtJe les
172
3J1
SUR UNE CLASSE REMARQUABLE
Supposons que lea indjces i, j, k prenneot ItlS va1eurs I, ...• I> et qu'lls sont tous distincts. Supposons encore que 1 prend les valeurs 1•... , ,.-2/>. Des equations (10) on dcduit
(11) Wp+i, 'f+),
=
wp+i, p+i -
ei.t Wi,
+
2wii
= - 1;: aji Wj +
Woo
Ci wi'
J
oil les coefficients des w sont des fonctions des paramNrcs auxquels depend Ie rep~re . En utiHsant les equations de structure et tenant compte des Equations (11), on a Wi
t
= [.w i
W'
(w . . -
[ wi (aji
t
+
-
(U ii
k
"ji Wjj
•
w jU
+
_ .
((JP+j. i
f
a jk akj wk )
1 (12)
~ "jk T:1 ki (Ok )]
+
J.
"i k ak ' [ (,). Wj '
a' J w · )]. J. J .
aji Wjj -
[Wj (b jt (u ii -
- E
LJ
(Unn -
U
•
On trouve done. en derivant la premiMe equation de ( 11 ). daji
db)· ;
=
= -
aji
C Wjj -
bJ·jC -
J
+
Wjo
+
i j i Wi
Wii +2 (u. ··-
~ .( bjk "ki
k:f:"
Wnn )
JJ
+
+
~ ajk aki (U k -
+
woo) -
(Ok
gji w j • (1).1<+ '
y
bii akj ) (Ok
aji ~ aki
J. '
+ ( gii
•
-
+
"'i J
(13)
h)·j w . J
aij -
~ b 'k aM )<0 .•
k:f:"j J
On tire de la premihe equation de (12 ) une consequence importante. que chacunt des equations Wi
=
0,
i
=
1, ".,
p
•
C'est
(14)
est rompletement integrable . Geometriquement eel a signifie qu'i! existe sur 1a varietc p families de varietes a p-l dimensions tangentes en chacun de leurs points a I'une des variCtes planes AA1· .. Ai~1 A;H···Ap. i=I, ... , p. Il est facile de voir qu'une telle variete a p-l dimensions est aussi une variCte de Cartan.
173
M. SHIlNG·SHEN CHERN
332
52.
UNE PROPRIfnE CARACT~RISTIQUE DES VARI:ETEs DE CARTAN
Nous dirons qu'un6 variete a p dimensions possede un reseau generalise ou simplement un reseau s'il existe sur la variete p families de courbes telJes que par tout point de la variete il passe une et une seule courbe de chaque famille et telles que quand l'hyperplan tangent est dfplace Ie long d'une courbe d'une de ces families deux hyperplans tangents infiniment voisins se rencontrent a une variet6 plane a p -1 dimensions taogente a tOl,ltes les courbes des p-l autres families passant par Ie point considere. II est clair que cette propriete generalise celIe d'un reseau conjugue sur une surface (variete a deux dimensions). Attachons a chaque point A de )a vari~t~ un rep~re AA1 .. ·An tel que la plane a p dimensions [AAl' .. Ap] soit l'hyperplan tangent au point A. avons donc les ~uations (4). Supposons que les p familles de courbes sont donn~es par les ~quations
vari~t~
Nous
(15)
Nous allons montrer q.ue les conditions necessaires et sujjisantes pour qu',m,
variete
a p dimensions ait un rtiseau gb.eralise donne par les equations • i=j::j. i.j=1. .....
p. a=p+ 1 •....• n.
(15)
SOft#
(16)
avec ta condition supplementaire que les jonctions giip+l' ..... giin. pour chaque. ji%e. ne sont pas toutes nulles. La condition est manifestement n~cessaire. En effect. quand l'hyperplan tangent est deplace Ie long de la courbe (15). la condition que Ie point %A+ x1A 1+ ... + xpAp
appartienne
a )'hyperplan tangent
infiniment voisin est que Ie point
soit une combinaison lineaire de A,Alo .... ,Ap. bJuations
Cette condition s'exprime par les
CIU
p ~ jn =1
g ., x . w Jlfa
J
k
=0,
a=p+ 1, .... , ...
174
333
SUR UNE CLASSE REMARQUABLE Pour que ces ~quations soient identique~ dans notre th~or~me soient remolies.
al' ~l1ation xi = 0
it faut que les conditions.
Nous supprimerons la d~monstration de la suffisance de ces conditions dont les raisonnements sont analogues. On peut remarquer qu'il suffit de supposer que la condition concernant I'in~ tersection des hyperplans tangents infiniment voisins en les d~pla~ant Ie long d'une courbe soit·vMifi~e pour 1'-1 des families de courbes sur la var;~t~. La rr.eme propri~t6 .pour les courbes de la p.i~me famille en r~sulte com me leur con~~quence. Pour une
vari~t~
ayant un
r~seau
on a donc
0=1'+ 1. .... , n.
(17)
Soit q Ie rang de la matrice
( 18)
de sorte que q des formes <Pa soient )in~airement inc~pendantes. II en les hyperplans osculateurs de la vari~t~ sont a I' + q dimensions et que
r~suIte
que
1 <:: q ~ P , q .~ n-p. APT~S
la
ces discllssions pr~liminaires on peut ~noncer dans Ie th~or~me sUlvant caractMistique pour les vari~t~ de Cartan dMinies au num~ro pJ&Ment:
propri~t~
La ccndition n.'cessaire et suffisante pour qu'une variite so;1 une variete tU Cartan est qu'it existe sur elle un reseau generalise et que s,s hyperplans osculateur s soie11 t a 21' dimensions. II est ~vident que la condition est 5uffisante remarquons qu'on a
n~cessaire.
i= I, ...•
p.
Pour voir qu'elle est aussi
175 M. SHLING-SHEN cHERN
334
Dans ces
~quatiol!s
les poillts
g iiP+l A P+l +"'+g I,n . A n' ;=1· " .. p' sont
lin~airement
independants.
On peut mod:fier Ie rerMe attache au point A
en les choisissant com me les points Ap+l ,,,~.' A 2p du rep~re nouveau . Avec cette famille de rep~res nouveaux "n voit facilement que la vari~t~ consideree. est nne vari~t~ de Cartan.
§3.
LA TRANSFORMATION GENERALISEE DE LAPLACE
Dans ce num~ro nous allons ~tudier une transformation des vari~t~s de Cartan, qui jouit de proprj~tes analogues a la transformation bien connue de Laplace des
r~seaux
Commen~ons
conjugues .
a d~monter Ie theor?-me suivant:
Sur chague tangenfe AAi £l ,xiste p-I Mints (19)
ayant la proprietd que quand la. va.1ih6 ..tv dimensions [AA;1 ... Ai.,) placre Ie long de AA j
•
j"#
£1> "', i"" deux varihtl planes
ment voisines ont en commun la variet'; plane Pour demontrer ce
il
.....
i",'
th~or~mc
n v-I
+
J est que Ie
inJin;.
dimensions [Ail i ... Ai"j].
l
.. .
Ai" ] est de la forme
~ %t At t
La condItion pour qu'i1 appartienne aussi [AA~ ... Ai",
de-
supposnns que I'indice t prend les valeurs
Un point de la variete plane [AAi
x A
a v dimensions
est
a la
variele plane infilllment voisine de
point
x dA
+ 'E
Xt
dAI
t
soit une combinaison lineaire de A , Ai 1 ..... Ai 1-' . Lorsque [AAi 1 ... Aiv. ] d~place Ie long de AA j , cette condition s'exprime par I'equation
se
176 335
SUR UNE CLASSE REMARQUABLE Celd montre que I'intersection de [AA . . ... A. ) et de la '1
"v
variet~
plane infiniment
voisine se compose des points
OU " I}
, ".,
"sont arbitrlJ.ires. iv
Done Ie
th~or~me
est
d~montre.
Lorsque Ie point A decrit la variete V p, chacun des points Ajl (i, j
p; • "p j) decrit une
=
I, ' . . ,
vari~te
dont les points sont en correspondance biunivoque avec ceux de V p. Pour ces vari~M on a la propriet~ fondamenfals suivan~e: La varit'te dt'crite par Aji est en gdnhal {me variete de Cartan. Pour detnontrer ce theor~me on utilise les equations du deplacement in. finitesimal (2 ) et les equations (13;. On trouve alors
OU I'on a pose (21)
En supposant que
on voit que la variHe decrite par Aji est a p dimensions, dont I'hyperp)an tangent au point Aji est la varide plane [AAJi . .. Ai_Ii A i + li ··· APi B j , ] . Pour voir si elle cst une varicte de Cartan calculons ?A, dAhl (k"pi, j), dBjt mod. A, Akl (k=foi ), Bji . c'est·a~dire mod.
A, Ak (k"pi), Ap+i
+
bii A,.
Un
calcu)
facile nous donne
Cela montre que la variede de.crite par Ajl est bien une variHe de Cartan, si les points
177 336
M. SHllNG-SHEN CHERN
sont lineairemel1t independants. En generalisant la notion classique de la transformation de Laplace on peut d ire que les varietes decrites par Aji ' i =f:: j; i = 1,···, P sont les varietes transformees de Laplace de la variHe donnee. Vne variete de Cart an poss~de done p(p-l) variete transformees de Laplace qui sont en general aussi les variCtes de Cartan . Dans Ie cas !>pecial p = 2 on obticnt les deux transformes de Laplace d 'un reseau conjugue. On peut chercher a trouver les transformes de Laplace de la variete decrite par Ajt Eo ce qui concerne ce probl~me signalons les resultats suivant5 dont la demonstration est d'ailleurs facile: :u.s tangentes auX courbes du reseau generalise Aji etan! les droites A j ; A, Ajt Aki (k =f:: i, j), Aji BJi , les trans/ormes de Laplace sur Aj; A sont Ajl (l=Fi,j), A, ceux sur Aji Aki(k=f::i, j) sont
/M A,ii - /ji Aki, A ki , (aki - akl ) Aji
+ ( ajl
- aji ) Aki , t=f:: ': , j, k,
tandis que ceux sur Aji Bji sont dotmt:s par· des expressJ'ons pItts compliquces . BIBLIOORAPHI E 1. Les travaux sur Ia theorie des n~seaux sont nombreux. Citons seulement Ie livre: G . Tzitzeica, G.om'trie differentielle projectiv6 des rtseaux, Paris J\)24 .
2. E. Caftan, Sur les varittes de courbure constante d' un espace euc1idietl 014 "0".uclidien, Bull. Soc . math . de France, 47, 12~-1(iO (I Ul:I), 48, 13~-~OS (1!120). Cette Note lera citee comme; Cartan. vade/os. 3. Cartan. variit;s. nos. 1. 2. 4. Cartan. vadet[s. nos . 33-38. 5. Cartan. vartetes. nos . • 3-45.
178 Reprinted from Comm. Math. Helv. 25 (1951).
A Theorem on Orientable Surfaces in Four-Dimensional Space By SHIING-SHEN CHERN and E. SPANIER, Chicago 1. Introduction. Let M be a closed oriented surface differentiably imbedded in a Euclidean space E of four dimensions. Let G denote the Grassmann manifold of oriented planes through a fixed point 0 of E. It is well known that G is homeomorphic to the topological product 8 1 X 8 z of two 2-spheres. By mapping each point P of M into the oriented plane through 0 parallel to the oriented tangent plane to M at P, we define a mapping t: M -+G. If M, 81> 8 z denote also the fundamental cycles of the respective manifolds and t* denotes the homomorphism induced by t, we have
In a recent paper l ) Blaschke studied the situation described above by methods of differential geometry and proved that the sum 1~1 U2 equals the Euler characteristic of M. He also asserted that U 1 = U z • The object of this note is to give a proof of this assertion, as well as a new proof of the theorem on U 1 U z•
+
+
2. Review 0/ some known results on sphere bundles. Let B be an oriented sphere bundle of d-spheres over a base space X with projection / . The relation between the homology properties of B and X are summarized in the following exact sequence Z) ;
where each H denotes a cohomology group relative to a coefficient group which is the same for all the terms of the sequence. The homomorphisms that occur in the sequence can be described briefly as follows: 1) Blaschke, W., Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. (4) 28, 205--209 (1949). 2) GyBin, W., Comm. Math. Helv. 14, 61-122 (1942). Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., U. S. A. 36, 248-255 (1950).
Ohern, S. S. and Spanier, E. H.,
205
179
f*
is the dual homomorphism induced by the projection f ; 'II' is a mapping which amounts to "integrating over the fiber"; the third homomorphism is the cup product with the characteristic class Q (with integer coefficients) of the bundle. From this sequence we see that if, for every coefficient system, the fiber Sa I"j..I 0 in B then the unit element 1 of the integral cohomology ring of X is in the image of 'II' and Q = O. Let E be oriented. Over the oriented surface M (E there are two vector bundles, the tangent bundle of tangent vectors and the normal bundle of normal vectors. By taking unit vectors we get two bundles of circles over M. According to a theorem of Seifert and Whitney 3) the characteristic class of the normal bundle is zero. Since this theorem holds in a more general situation and can be proved in a simple way, we state and prove the theorem for the general case ").
Theorem. Let M be an orientable manifold imbedded in a Riemann manifold M'. If M 0 in M', then the chara.cteristic class of the normal bundle of Min M' is zero. f""oJ
Prool. Let B be a small tube around M. B is then the normal bundle of M . We will show that no fiber S of B bounds in B. Assume that S = 00 in B mod p for some p. Let D be the set of normal vectors of length ~ E having S as boundary. Then 0 - D is a cycle mod pin M' intersecting M in exactly one point. This is impossible because M 0 in M'. The above theorem also follows easily from results of Thom 5). f""oJ
3. PlUcker coordinates in G . Let e1 , e2 , e3 , e, be an orthonormal base for E such that e1 1\ e2 1\ e3 1\ e,6) is the orientation of E. If R is any oriented plane of E, let 11' 12 be an orthonormal base in R such that 11 1\ 12 is the orientation of R. Then 11
1\
12
= au e1 1\ e2
+a +
e2 1\ e3 au e1 1\ e4 23
+a
31
+a
2,
+
e3 1\ e1 a 3 , e3 1\ e, e2 1\ e, .
These "Plucker coordinates" a i ; of R are independent of the choice of 2 and satisfy the two relations
11'
t
8) Seifert, H., Math. Zeitschr. 41 (1936) 1-17. - Whitney, H., Lectures in Topology, Univ. of Mich. Press (1941) 101-141. () We owe this simple description of the proof to Professor H. Hopf, who also called our attention to the problem settled in this paper. 6) Thom, R. , C. R. Paris 230, 507-508 (1950). 6) The wedge denotes Grassmann multiplication as in Bourbaki, N., Algebre Multi. linears, Hermann, Paris (1948).
206
180
a l2 a 34 Ea~i
+ a 23 au + a
=
31
(1)
a 24 = 0
(2)
1 .
Conversely, any set of six real numbers satisfying (1) and (2) are the Plucker coordinates of some oriented plane in E; hence, G is homeomorphic to the subset of six space consisting of aij such that (1) and (2) hold. We introduce a linear change of coordinates by
Then G is homeomorphic to the subset of six space consisting of (Xi' YI) such that E ~ = E if; = 1. Let Sl' S2 be the unit spheres in the x-space and y-space respectively. We orient Sl and S2 by the orientations (Xl' X2, x 3) and (YI' Y2, Y3) of the x-space and y-space. Let h: G -+ Sl X S2 be the homeomorphism defined above using the Plucker coordinates. Let IX; G -+ G map each oriented plane R into its normal plane R', oriented so that R, R' determine the given orientation of E. We want to determine the mapping hIXh-1: SlXS 2 -+SlXS 2 , If R has Plucker coordinates ail and R' has Plucker coordinates bij' it is easy to see that the following equations are satisfied
.I: a ik b;k
=
0
k
.I: a;; b",
(i
*
j)
= 1 ,
the last summation being taken over all even permutations of 1, 2, 3, 4. It follows from these that bii = a kl , where i, j, k, l is an even permutation of 1, 2, 3, 4. Therefore, we see that hIXh-1(x, y) = (x, -y)
where - y denotes the antipodal point to y.
4. T.he Theorem. Let M be a closed oriented surface in E. Let t: M -+ G and n : M -+ G be the maps defined by taking tangent planes and normal planes respectively. It is clear that t = IX nand n = IX t . Over G there is a bundle of circles obtained by considering as the fiber over an oriented plane through 0 the unit circle in that plane. Let Q denote the characteristic class of i;his bundle and let Qt, Q n denote the characteristic classes of the tangent and normal bundles of M. Then
207
181
The bundle of circles over G defined above is the Stiefel manifold V of ordered pairs of orthogonal unit vectors through 0 in E and is easily seen to be homeomorphic to S2 X sa. The following section of Gysin's sequence shows that Q is a generator of the kernel of 1* in H2 ( V), since HI (V) and HI (G) are trivial. To find the kernel of 1* we determine the homomorphism of the second homology groups. A generating 2-cycle in V is S2 X e4 • The points Z of S2 can be represented as vectors of the form ZI e1 Z2 e z Za ea. Then
+
+
a
I ( 1: Zi ei , e4) = 1: zi(e i 1\ e4) i=1
and so
Therefore, we see that 1* (S2 X e4 ) = SI - S2' If S; , S; denote cohomology classes dual to the homology classes SI' S2, then the kernel of 1* consists of all elements of the form u (S; S;) where u is an integer. Orient SI and S2 so that Q = S; S;. Orient M so that Qt· M = XM = Euler characteristic of M. Then
+
Qt
= t* (S;
+ S;) =
t* S;
+
+ t* S;
and Since Q n = 0, we see that (t* S;) . M = (t* S;) . M = (i) XM •
We summarize the above results in the theorem: Let M be a closed orientable surlace in lour space E. Let G be the Grassmann manifold of oriented planes through 0 in E and let t : M -+ G be the map into oriented planes through 0 parallel to the tangent planes of M. Since G is homeomorphic to SI xS 2, we have t* (M) = u 1 SI U 2 S2' Then S1> S2 and M can be oriented so that U 1 = U 2 = (t) XM where XM is the Euler characteristic of M.
+
5. Remarks. The above theorem expresses relations between differential topological invariants of surfaces imbedded in Euclidean space 208
182
and suggests a more general problem. To describe the general situation let Mk (Ek+l be a manifold of dimension k differentiably imbedded in a Euclidean space of k l dimensions. Let G(k, l) be the Grassmann manifold of k-dimensional linear spaces through a point 0 and G(l, k) that of l-dimensionallinear spaces through o. There is a natural homeomorphism IX: G(k,l) ~G(l,k).
+
Using tangent planes and normal planes to M we define mappings t:
M
~
G (k, l) ,
n:
M
~G
(l, k)
such that n=IXt.
The general problem is to study the relation between the homomorphisms t*; Hp (G (k, l»
~ HP(M) ) p
n* ; Hp (G (l, k»
~
=
0, 1, ...
HP(M)
We hope to study this question on a later occasion.
(Received 31 th Mars 1951.)
14
Commeotarii Mathematici Helvetici
209
183 Reprinted from Amer. J. Math. 74 (1952).
ON THE KINEMATIC FORMULA IN THE EUCLIDEAN SPACE OF N DIMENSIONS.* By
SHIING-SHEN CHERN.
Introduction. The idea of considering the kinematic density in problems of geometrical probability was originated by Poincare. It was further exploited by L. A. Santalo and W. Blaschke in their work on integral geometry [1], culminating in the following theorem: Let lo, II be two closed surfaces in space, which are twice differentiable, and let Do, Dl be the domains bounded by them. Let Vi, Xl = K i/4rr be the volume and Euler characteristic of D. and let Ai, M, be the area and the integral of mean curvature of li' i = 0, 1. Suppose lo fixed and II moving. Then the integral of K(Do·D 1 } =4rrx(D o 'D 1 ) over the kinematic density of II is given by the formula
(1)
IK(Do D1):S1
=
81T2(VoKl
+ AoMl + MoAl + Ko V
1 ).
This formula includes most formulas in Euclidean integral geometry as special or limiting cases. The purpose of this paper is to apply E. Cartan's method of moving frames and to derive the generalization of this formula in an Euclidean space of n dimensions. By doing this, we hope that some insight can be gained on integral geometry in a general homogeneous space. Moreover, one of the ideas introduced, the consideration of measures in spaces which are now called fiber bundles, will most likely find further applications. The main procedures of our proof have been given in a previous note [2]. We consider a compact orientable hypersurface l , twice differentiably imbedded in an Euclidean space E of n (> 2) dimensions. At a point P of l there are n - 1 principal curvatures K a, ex = 1, . , n - 1, whose i-th elementary symmetric function we shall denote by Si, i = 0, , n - 1, where So = 1 by definition. Let dA be the element of area of l , and let i
(2) These Mi are integro-differential invariants of l.
=
0, 1, ' . " n - l ,
In particular, Mo is the
* Received :May 10, 1951.
22.
184
228
SHIING-SHEN CHERN.
area and Mn-I is a numerical multiple of the degree of mapping of l into the unit hypersphere defined by the field of normals. Take now two such hypersurfaces lo, ll' whose invariants we distinguish by superscripts. The volume of the domain Di bounded by l i we denote by Vi, i = 0,1. Let lo be fixed and II be moving, and let ~l be the kinematic density of ll. We suppose our hypersurfaces to be such that for all positions of II the intersection Do· Dl has a finite number of components. Then the Euler-Poincare characteristic X (Do· D l ) is well defined. If In--l denotes the area of the unit hypersphere in E and if (3) the kinematic formula in E is
IK(D o · Dl)~l
(4)
=
In{Mn--l(OlV l
+ M1V-l(llVo + ~ ~ (k ~ 1) M k(OlMn--2_k(ll},
where (5)
K(D o · D l ) For n
(6)
=
=
In--lx(Do· Dd·
3 this reduces to the formula (1).
The formula for n
=
4 IS
IK(Do Dd~l =
16.".4 (M 3 (OlV l
+ M (llVo + M o(OlM (ll + 1.Io(llM (Ol + i-Ml(O)Mlll»). 3
2
2
1. Measures in spaces associated with a Riemann manifold. We shall first review a few notions in Riemannian geometry, in a form which will be useful for our later purpose. Let M be an orientable Riemann manifold of class > 3 and dimension n. Associated with M are the spaces Bh (h = 1, · .. , n) formed by the elements Pel . . eh, each of which consists of a point P of M and an ordered set of h mutually perpendicular tangent unit vectors el,· .. , en at P. When h = n, such an element will be called a frame. In the current t erminology Bn is a principal fiber bundle over 111 with the rotation group as structural group and Bh are the associated bundles [3]. We shall introduce a measure in B h. Since Bh is clearly an orientable differentiable manifold, this can be done by defining an exterior differential form of degree Hh+ 1)(2n-h)(= dim of Bh). There is a natural mapping .ph: Bn -') B" defined by taking as the image of Pel · . . en the element Pel · . . eh. It induces a dual homomorphism of the differ ential forms of Bh into those of Bn. This process has in a sense a converse. In fact, let (7)
h
+ 1
185
229
ON THE KINEMATIC FORMULA.
be a rotation of the last n - h vectors. A differential form of En which is invariant under the action of (7) can be regarded as a form of En. The well-known parallelism of Levi-Civita can be interpreted as defining 1)/2 linearly independent Pfaffian forms in En, which we a set of n(n shall denote by Wi, Wij( = - Wji), 1 < i, j < n. To give it a brief description [4] we start from the following useful lemma on exterior forms: Let Wi be linearly independent Pfaffiian forms, and let 7rij = - 7rji be Pfuffian forms such that 1 ~ WJ 1\ 7rj; = O. (8)
+
j
Then
7rij
=
O.
In fact, it follows from (8) that
.
7rji =
~
Ujik'llk.
k=,.
Then ajik is skew-symmetric in its first two indices, because the 7rji are, and is symmetric in its last two indices, on account of (8). Therefore Ujik = 0 or 7rji = O. For geometric reasons we denote by dP the identity mapping in the tangent space at P, which maps every tangent vector into itself. Then dP can be written in the form (9)
where the multiplication is tensor product, and the Wi are Pfaffian forms in E,. and are linearly independent. The fundamental theorem on local Riemannian geometry asserts that there exists a uniquely determined set of Pfaffian forms Wi, Wij in En, linearly independent, which satisfy (9) and (10)
dw i
=
~
Wj
1\ Wji.
J
In fact, the uniqueness follows from the above lemma. For our purpose we shall study the effect of the rotation (7) on these forms. Denote the new forms by the same symbols with asterisks. Clearly we have (11)
1<
CI.
< h, h
+1<
r, s < n.
Taking the exterior derivatives of both sides of these equations and making use of (10), we get 1 We shall, following Bourbaki, use wedge product to denote exterior multiplication. It will sometimes be dropped, when the meaning is clear. Parenthcses will be used to denote ordinary products of dilIerential forms.
186 230
SHIING-SHEN CHERN.
L
+ Lr wr* 1\ (wra* -
<011/\ (wpa* -wlla)
/3
(12)
L a
wa
!\ (
UorIJJao)
L
UorIJJoa) =
+ L wo* /\ 4>0'* =
0
0,
0
0,
•
where 4>.. * are Pfaffian forms skew-symmetric in the indices s, r. The system of equations (12) is of the same form as (8), and the above lemma is then applicable. It follows that (13)
W/3a* =
WPa,
If we put
(14) we see from (13) that na is invariant under the action of (7). is therefore true of the form (15)
L n •h
The same
IT na IT Wall IT W!.
=
a
a3
i
This form is clearly not identically zero, and we define it to be the density in B h • It gives rise to a measure in B h • 2. Differential geometry of a submanifold in Euclidean space. As a further preparation we need some notions on the geometry of a hypersurface in Eucliuean space. As no additional complication is involved, we develop them for a sub manifold V of p dimensions, which is twice differentiably imbedded in E . We agree in this section on the following ranges of indices: (16)
1<
IX,
(3, y < p,
p
+1 <
r, s, t < n,
1
Since E is a Riemann manifold, the discussions of the last section are valid. In this case Bn is naturally homeomorphic to the group of proper motions in E. To study V we consider the submanifold of Bn. characterized by the conditions that P £ V and that the ea are tangent vectors to V at P. If we denote by the same notation the forms on this submanifold induced by the identity mapping, we have (17)
Wr=O.
From (10) it follows that dW r
=
L
Wa / \ Wc:r
=
a
Since the (18)
Wa
are linearly independent, we have
O.
187
231
ON THE KINE)fATIC FORMULA.
where the Arcx.8 are symmetric in
1%,
f3 :
(19)
From these Pfaffian forms it is possible to construct some significant " ordinary" quadratic differential forms. The first is a set (20)
which generalizes the second fundamental form in ordinary surface theory. The second is (21)
'It = ~ ("'ra) 2 r,a
=
~ AratlAra'Y ("'/l"''Y ) ,
r,a,fj,'Y
generalizing the third fundamental form. The latter seems to deserve some attention. However, so far as the writer is aware, it has not been considered in the literature. For a hypersurface we have p = n - 1, and we shall write <1>, Aatl for <1>", Anatl respectively. The n - 1 roots of the characteristic equation
are called the principal curvatures. In the case of the Euclidean space E we can also write products, thus: (23)
"'i =
dP·
Wi, Wij
as scalar
e.,
3. A formula on densities. The situation we are going to consider consists of two hypersurfaces ~o, ~1 in E, with ~o fixed and ~1 moving, which intersect in a manifold V"-" of dimension n - 2, such that at a point of Vn-2 the normals to ~o, ~1 never coincide. We denote by >, > 0, 71", the angle between these normals and by :S1 the kinematic density of ~1. An (n- 2)-frame on V,,-2 has a density on each of Vn-", ~o, ~1' to be denoted by Lv, Lo, L1 respectively. Our formula to be proved can be written . . . .. (24) LV~l = sin n- 1 <j>L oL 1 >.
+-
Throughout this section we shall agree on the following ranges of indices: (25)
1
1<
1%,
f3 < n - 2,
1::;.1,R
• an be the fixed frame aTld 0'0', Let 00 1 . a'" the moving frame. , For a given relative position between 00 ·0" and 0'0', . a'" let Pc, · . en-, be an (n-2)-frame on Vn-". We complement this into a frame Pc,· . en such that en is normal to ::So and also into a frame P'e'l .. e'fl
188 232
SHIING-SHEN CHERN.
such that e'" is normal to ~1 at P, and P' = P, e'a = ea. e'n.-1, e'n we have then the relations
e',,-1 = cos >e....1 + sin >en,
(26)
e'" =
-
sin >e....1
Between e....1, e..,
+ cos >e".
From this we derive the following useful relation
de'f>-l· e'" = dq,
(27)
+ den-1 . en.
Let us now express the relations between the frames so introduced by the equations
(28)
P' = 0'
+ ~ x'ia'i, •
We shall denote the differentiation by d' when O'a'l· .. a'" is regarded as fixed. In other words, d' is differentiation relative to the moving frame. Then we have, from (28), ~
dO' = dP - d'P -
(29)
•
X.dO'i .
It follows that, on neglecting terms in da';,
II(dP · ea)II(dO'· a',;) = II(dp· ea)II(dP· a'.- d'P· a'.) a
i
a
i
= II(dP · ea)II(dP· e'i- d'P· e'i) (30)
a
•
=== ± II(dP· ea)(d'P· e'a)(dP · e'n-1
-
d'P· e'n-1)(dP· e'" - d'P· e'n)
a
=== -t- sin > II (dp· eA)(d'P· e' A). A
These are to be taken as congruences mod da'i. In particular, the last step follows from the fact that e'n is normal to ~1 at P and that the product of n factors involving dP is zero, because the locus of P is a hypersurface ~o. In order to get a further reduction of the left-hand side of (24) we start from the formula (31)
de'i - d'e'i =
~
u';kda\.
k
From the invariance of the kinematic density under a rotation it follows that
II (da'i . a'i) ;< i
Then we have
=
II( (de'; - d'e'.) . e'i). ;< i
189 ON THE KINEM:A.TIC FORMULA..
233
IT (dea ' ep) IT (da', . o'j) = IT (dea ' ep) II (de', - d'e'.) - e'j .<1 a
a
a
a
All {(dea - e' n-1 a
(32)
d'e a ' e' n-1)(de a - e' n -
d'ea - e',,)}
/\(de'n-1 - e'" - d'e'n-1 - e',,)
= ± II (dea ' ep)(d'ea ' ep) II (dea . e'n-1 - d'ea - e'n-l) a
a
/\(de a - e'n) (de'n-1 . e'n)
= ± sin n-2 4> II{(dea - eA)(d'ea ' e'A)}d4>. a
Here the congruences are to be understood mod dP · eA, d'P - e' A. next to the last follows from the relations d'e'A-e' .. = -d'e'n- e'A""=O,
The step
modd'P -e'A,
which in turn are consequences of (18) . In the reduction of the last step we make use of the relations (26), (27), and
deA. - e" =
-
de" - eA == 0,
mod dP - eA.
If we notice that ~
=
II (dO" 0'.) IT (do'. - O'j) , i
i
and recall the expressions for the formula (24)_
Lv, Lo, L
1,
then (30) and (32) together give
4. Total curvature and Euler characteristic. The success of our procedure depends on the possibility of expressing the Euler-Poincare characteristic of a domain bounded by a hypersurface ~ by an integral over ~, a result known as the Gauss-Bonnet formula. Let A be the volume element of the unit hypersphere in E, and N+ the field of outward normals of~. By means of N+ we define the normal mapping of ~ _ The Gauss-Bonnet formula ill this particular case can be written
(33)
I rN A=x(D)In-1' +
where D is the domain bounded by ~, and xeD) is its Euler-Poincare characteristic_ The left-hand side of this equation is sometimes called the total curvature of the domain_ In our later application the domain D will not be bounded by a smooth
190
234
SHIING-SHEN OHERN.
hypersurface but will be such that its boundary consists of a finite number of hypersurfaces which intersect in a number of suhmanifolds V n - 2 of dimension n - 2. To the integral of A over the outward normals we must then add the integral over the vectors belonging to the angle suhtended by the outward normals of the two hypersurfaces. To express the latter analytically let us use the notation of the last section, together with the rangeR of indices (25). In addition we denote by bA, b'A the unit vectors in the principal directions of ~o, ~l respectively. For a differentiation on ~o we can then write
(h = dP· bA,
(34)
where KA are the principal curvatures. we have (35)
Similarly, for a differentiation on ~l K'.4.()'A =
de' n • b'A,
K' A being the principal curvatures of ~l' Since the ea lie in the intersection of the tangent hyperplanes, we have relations of the form
(36) To simplify notation we introduce the unit vectors b, tv in the directions of the angle bisectors of en, e'n. Then we have
en = (cosiel»b- (siniel»w,
(37)
e'n = (cos iel»b
+ (sin tel>}w,
or (38)
en
+ e'n
=
2(cos iel»b,
- en
+ e'
n =
2 (sin H) tv.
Let ;J; be a unit vector between en. e'n, and t) the unit vector perpendicular to and in the plane of en, e'n ' We can then write (39)
;J; =
cos ab
+ sin atv,
t) = -
sin ab
;J;
+ cos aW ; -
iel> < a < tel>·
It follows that the total curvature, i. e., In-I times the Euler-Poincare characteristic of D, is given by
The product in the second integral admits some further simplification. In fact, using (38), we have II{cos a(db ' ea) a =
+ sin a(dtv · ea)}
II {sin(tel> a
a)(de n . ea)
+ sin(tel> + a )(de'n • ea)} /sin
n- 2
eI>.
191 235
ON THE KINEMATIC FORMULA.
By (36), we get
de" . ea de',,· ea
=
~ KACaA(JA =
~ KACixACPA (dP·
A
A.p
~ K' AC'aAC'PA (dp
=
ep),
· ep).
A.fj
It follows that II{cos o7( db' ea )
(41)
a
where
V is the
(42)
D
+ sin O7(dro • e
a )} =
DV/sin"-2 cf>,
volume element of Vn-2, and where
=
1 sin( icf>
-
07)
~
KACaACPA
A
+ sin( lcf> + 07) ~A K'AC'aAC'PA I.
The determinant D can be expanded in the form n-2
~
D=
(43)
Hp sin n - 2-p(lcf> -u)sinP(H
p=O
+
07),
where C, A.
(44)
C, A.
,
C'lB.
c'lBl
Cn-2.A l •
c'.....2.B,
• Cn-2.A.
,
. KA.K B • •
KAl
Hp=-:£.
K B p'
p+q=n-2, •
• C'''-2.B.
the summation being extended over all independent combinations A ,, " , Aq and B , ,' . " Bp of 1, . , n -1. To prove this we observe that the expansion of D is of the above form and that the question is only to determine the coefficient of KAl • . KAoK' B. • . K' B. in Hp. This coefficient is, up to the factor sinq(fcf>-07)sinP(fcf> 07), the value of D, when we set
+
KAl
= . . .=
1,
KA. =
and equal to zero otherwise. Writing CaA =
{sin (fcf> -
07 )
}lCaA'
we have
-,
C Al '
C, A.
C lB.
Cn-2.A l ·
Cn-2,A q
C n-2 , B 1
-,
-I
. C
1t-2,B"
This shows that the coefficient is actually the one asserted in (43) , (44) . 5. Proof of the kinematic formula. Let -:£'0, -:£., be two hypersurfaces twice differentiably imbedded in E, with -:£.0 fixed and -:£., moving. We denote by D; the domain bounded by -:£.i, i = 0, 1, and suppose that the intersection Do D, consists of a finite number of components Fs. The boundary of -:£.F's consists of the sets ~, . Do, ~o' D -:£'0 ' -:£'" so that we can write
"
192 236
SHIING-SHEN CHERN.
(45)
f K(D o' D,)i, = f K(~F8)i, = f K(~, . Do)i,
+ f K(~o . D,)i, =
f K(~o . ~,)~"
The first two integrals are easily evaluated. Take, for instance, the second integral. For every position of ~l the integrand K (~o . D,) is the integral of A over the outward normals to ~o at points of ~o' D , . This domain of integration can be decomposed in a different way by first fixing a common point of D, and ~o, rotating Dl about this point, and then letting this point vary over Dl and ~o respectively. The result of this iterated integration is
(46) Similarly. using the fact that the kinematic density is invariant under the " inversion" of a motion, we have (47) To evaluate the third integral in (45) we use the density formula (24), and the formulas (40) - ( 44) for the total curvature arising from ~o ~1' We get
f K(~o' ~l)il
=
f(Djsinn-2 CP)da-Vil =(1!Jn-2) f(Djsin n-2 cJ»da-tV~l
= (1!Jn-2) f(sin cp)Dda-dcpLoL, = bn-2f HoLoL,
+ ... + bof Hn-2LOLl
where the a's and b's are numerical constants. These constants can be determined if we take ~o, ~l to be two hyperspheres of radii 1 and h respectively. This completes the proof of the kinematic formula. UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO.
REFERENCES.
[1] W. Blaschke, Integmlgeomet1'ie, Hambmg, 193G and l()37.
[ 2] S. Chern and C. T. Yen, "Sulla formula principale cinematica dello spazio ad 7< dimensioni," BoUetino deUa Unione Matematica Italiana (2), vol. 2 (1940), pp. 434·437 .
[3] N. Steenrod, Fibre BUlldles, Princeton, 1951. [4] Cf., for instance, Chern, 'Popics in Diffe.·cntial Geomet·r y (Mimeographed notes), Institute for Advanced Study, Princeton, 1951.
193 Reprinted from Algebraic Geometry and Topology, ed. R. H. Fox et aI., Princeton Univ. Press, 1957.
On a Generalization of Kiihler Geometry Shiing-shen Chern
1. Introduction A Kahler manifold is a complex Hermitian manifold, whose Hermitian metric (1)
ds 2 = ~1 ~ "' , P~mg",p(zl , . .. , zm ; ZI , . .. , zm) dz"'dzP (g",P = gjJ"') ,
has the property that the corresponding exterior differential form (2)
is closed. The importance of Kahler manifolds lies in the fact that they include as special cases the non-singular algebraic varieties over the complex field. So far the most effective tool for the study of the homology properties of compact Kahler manifolds is Hodge's theory of harmonic integrals or harmonic differential forms. t The notion of a harmonic differential form is defined on any orientable Riemann manifold, and can be briefly introduced as follows : The Riemann metric allows us to define the star operator *, which transforms a differential form of degree p into one of degree n - p , n being the dimension of the manifold. From the operator * and the exterior differentiation operator d we introduce the operators (3)
0 = ( - 1 )n p +n+1 * d *, {
D..=do+od.
If the manifold is compact, as we shall assume from now on, a differential form 1J is calle~ harmonic, if D..1J = O. In the case of a complex manifold it will be convenient to consider complex-valued differential forms. The star operator can be extended in an obvious way to such differential forms. For its definition we t Various accounts of this study are now in existence; cf. [3], [4]. [5], [8]. [9]. The numbers refer to the Bibliography at the end of this paper.
194 104
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
follow the convention of Weil,t without repeating the details. We only mention that we can define an operator by
*
(4)
The operator 0 is then extended to complex-valued differential forms by the definition (5)
By means of this we define Ll by the second equation of (3). For a Kahler manifold we introduce furthermore the operators (6)
{
L1J =_0. ~ 1J, A=*L*.
A differential form 1J on a Kahler manifold is called effective or primitime, if A1J = o. The notion of a primitive harmonic form is a formulation, in terms of cohomology, of the effective cycles of Lefschetz on an algebraic variety.t Lefschetz proved that on a complex algebraic variety every cycle is homologous, with respect to rational coefficients, to a linear combination of effective cycles and the intersection cycles, by linear spaces of the ambient projective space, of effective cycles of higher dimension. This result can be expressed in terms of harmonic differential forms by the following decomposition theorem of Hodge: Every harmonic form w of degree p on a compact Kahler manifold of (complex) dimension m can be written in a unique way in the form (7)
where the summation is extended over the following range of k: max (O,p-m)
~ k~q=[tp],
and where wk is a primitive harmonic form of degree p - 2k, completely determined by w. The existing proofs of this theorem depend on the establishment of various identities between the operators introduced above. We attempt to give in this paper what seems to be a better understanding of this theorem by generalizing it and proving it in an entirely different way. It is well known§ that the existence of a positive definite Hermitian metric on a complex manifold allows us to· define a connection with the unitary group and that the Kahler property dO. = 0 is equivalent t Since we are dealing with real manifolds, our IJ operator differs from Weil's in sign. t [6] or [5], p. 182. § [1], p. 112.
195
GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 105
to the absence of torsion of this connection. Our contention is that the latter condition accounts more for the homology properties of Kahler manifolds than the analytically simpler condition df! = o. Utilizing this idea, we generalize the Kahler property as follows: Let M be a real differentiable manifold of dimension n. Suppose that the structural group of its tangent bundle, which is the general linear group GL(n, R) in n real variables, can be reduced, in the sense of fiber bundles, to a subgroup G of the rotation group R(n) c GL(n, R). It will be proved in § 2 that a connection can be defined, with the group G. In general, the torsion tensor of this connection does not vanish. The vanishing of torsion of this connection is then a natural generalization of the Kahler property. On the other hand, the group G acts on the tangent vector space V of M at a point and also on its dual space V* . This induces a linear representation of G in the exterior qth power Aq( V*) of V*, which can also be described as the representation of G into the space of all antisymmetric covariant tensors of order q. If G=GL(n,R), it is well known that this representation is irreducible. However, if G is a proper subgroup of R(n), it is possible that this representation is reducible. When this is the case, suppose W be an invariant subspace of this representation. Since GcR(n), there is an inner product defined in Aq(V*), and the subspace W' in Aq(V*) orthogonal to W is also invariant. The invariance property of Wallows us to introduce the notion of a differential form of degree q and type W, as one which assignstoeverypointxEM an element of W(x) cAq( V*(x)). Similarly, we can define an operator P w on differential forms of degree q, its projection in W. With these preparations we can state our decomposition theorem: Let M be a compact differentiable manifold of dimension n, which has the following properties: (I) The structural group of its tangent bundle can be reduced to a subgroup G of the rotation group R(n) in n variables. (2) There is a connection with the group G, whose torsion tensor vanishes. Let WcAq(V*) be an invariant subspace of Aq(V*) under the action of G, and let P w be the projection of an exterior differential form of degree q into W. Then (8)
Itfollows that if u;., ... , Jtj. are irreducible invariant subspaces of Aq( V*) under the action of G and if 1J is a harmonic form of degree q, then P w ,1J, ... ,PWk 1J are harmonic. Moreover, if1J is a farm of degree q and type W, then 111J is also a form of degree q and type W.
196
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
106
When n= 2m is even and G= U(m) is the unitary group in m complex variables considered as a subgroup of GL(n, R), our notion of a manifold having a G-connection without torsion includes that of a Kahler manifold. As will be shown in § 4, it also includes a generalization of Kahler manifold studied by A. Lichnerowicz, t namely, an orientable even-dimensional Riemann manifold with the property that there exists an exterior quadratic differential form, everywhere of the highest rank, whose covariant derivative is zero. To derive Hodge's decomposition theorem from ours it remains to solve the following algebraic problem: Let Vi, Vi be two m-dimensional complex vector spaces and V* their direct sum. Let U(m) act on V* such that it acts on Vi in the usual way but on Vi by the conjugatecomplex transformation. This induces a representation of U(m) into the group of linear transformations of Aq( V*). Our problem is to decompose this representation into its irreducible parts. It will be shown in § 4 that the summands in (7) correspond to the irreducible parts of the representation. In this sense the Hodge decomposition theorem cannot be further improved. To illustrate that the scope of our theorem goes beyond Kahler geometry, we consider in § 5 the case that G=R(s) x R(n-s) (0 <s
2. G-connection in a tangent bundle; torsion tensor We shall derive in this section the basic notions and formulas for a G-connection in the tangent bundle of a real n-dimensional differentiable manifold M. Since the results are local, M will not be assumed to be compact. The tangent bundle of M has as structural group the general linear group GL(n, R) in n real variables. We consider GL(n, R) to be the group of all n x n real non-singular matrices. Let G be a closed sub-
t
t
[7]. I was first informed of this theorem by Dr T. J. Willmore.
197
GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 107 group of GL(n, R). Bya G-structure in M we mean a covering of M by coordinate neighborhoods Ua. and, to each Ua.' a set of n linearly independent Pfaffian forms 0; in Ua.,t such that, when Ua.rl Up#O, we have (9)
where Ya.p(x)=(Y~P.j(X))EG and the mapping Ua.rlUr*G defined by x--.rYa.p(x) is differentiable. Let Oa. and Op denote respectively the onerowed matrices, whose elements are O~ and O~. Then equation (9) can be abbreviated in the matrix form (9a) The 'coordinate transformations' Ya.p(x) define a principal fiber bundle p: Bo--.rM with the structural group G. We recall that Eo is the union of the sets {Ua. x G}, under the identification (10) where
(X,Ya.)E Ua. x G,
(X,Yp)E Up x G,
XE
Ua.rl Up.
From (9a) and (10) it follows that the one-rowed matrix ofPfaffian forms (II)
is globally defined in Bo. The elements Wi in w = (WI, .. . , wn ) are clearly linearly independent. By exterior differentiation we find (12)
dw= -WAy;;ldYa.+d0a.Ya.,
where y;;ldya. is a matrix of left-invariant Pfaffian forms of G. If (I ~ P ~ r) is a set of linearly independent left-invariant Pfaffian forms of G, we can write (12) in the form 1TP
(13)
dw i = - ~p.ka~kwkA1TP+t ~j.kC}k(b)wi AWk,
where a~k are constants and c}k(b) are functions in Bo satisfying the conditions (14)
The constants a~k in (13) have a simple geometrical meaning. In fact, we can regard G as acting on an n-dimensional vector space with the coordinates (Si), according to the equations (15)
t
Si--.rS'i = ~jygi
((y}) E G).
Unless otherwise stated, we agree on the following ranges of indices: l~i,j, k,l~n,
l~p, O",'T~r.
In this section we use ex, fl, 'Y to index the neighborhoods. When we discuss almost complex manifolds of dimension 2m, we suppose 1 ~ ex, fl, y ~ m.
198 108
SHllNG-SHEN OHERN
Then the infinitesimal transformations (16)
_ Xp-
i
Ck~
~i.kapkS
agi
are linearly independent and generate the group G. It follows that their commutators satisfy equations of the form (17) [Xp , XO']=~Ty~O'XT' y~O'= -y;P' where yTpO' are the constants of structure of G. When the expressions (16) are substituted into (17), we get (18)
~i (a~ka~i -a~ka~i) = ~T y~O'a~k·
The equations (12) or (13) are derived with reference to a representation of win p-l(UaJ and are therefore local in character. To put this in a different way, the forms 1TP are not globally defined in B a · The permissible transformation on 1TP is given by (19)
1TP -+ 1T'P
= 1TP + ~k b'fcw k •
Under this transformation the equations (13) preserve the same form, with new coefficients cji given by (20)
The ln 2 (n-l) expressions (21)
- kJp ~ ( - ai bP + a ip; bP) A ijkk pk ;
are linear and homogeneous in b~, with constant coefficients. We say that the group G has the property (0), if there are nr linearlyindependent ones among them, that is, if A}k = 0 implies = o. If the group G has the property (0), we can define a connectiont in the bundle p': Ba,-+M, where G' is the group of non-homogeneous linear transformations on n variables with G as the homogeneous part and the bundle is obtained from p: Bo-+M by enlarging the group from G to G'. To define such a connection it suffices to determine in Ba a set of forms 1TP satisfying (13). Suppose Aj:,., be a subset of nr linearly independent expressions among the A}k' and suppose A}::k" be its complementary set. Then there exists one, and only one, set of forms 1TP in Ba satisfying the equations (13) together with the conditions ch,=O. These forms , together with Wi, define a connection in the bundle p': Ba,-+M. By abus du langage, we call such a connection a G-connection in the tangent bundle. The bundles p: Bo-+M and p': BG,-+M are G'-equivalent in the sense of bundles. From the point of view of connections it is, however,
b,
t
[2].
199 GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 109
necessary to consider the second bundle. The curvature form of our connection is a tensorial quadratic differential form in M, of type ad(G') and with values in the Lie algebra L(G') of G'. Since the Lie algebra L(G) of G is a subalgebra of L(G'), there is a natural projection of L(G') into the quotient space L(G')jL(G). The image of the curvature form under this projection will be called the torsion form or the torsion tensor. If the forms 1TP in (13) define a G-connection, the vanishing of the torsion form is expressed analytically by the conditions (22) We proceed to derive the analytical formulas for the theory of a G-connection without torsion in the tangent bundle. In general we will consider such formulas in Ba. The fact that the G-connection has no torsion simplifies (13) into the form (23)
i 1TP AW k dw i -":"'p,k a pk - ~ .
By taking the exterior derivative of (23) and using (18), we get (24) where we put (25)
For a fixed value of k we multiply the above equation by getting or
~patkIIPAwlA ... AWn=O, ~pa~kIIp=O,
mod wi.
Since the infinitesimal transformations Xp are linearly independent, this implies that mod wi. It follows that IIp is of the form IIp = ~d)~ AWi ,
where
It follows that
~p(a~k
modw'.
Since G has the property (0), the above equations imply that
200 110
SHIING-SHEN OHERN
In other words, we have (26) These are essentially the curvature form of the G-connection. It will be convenient to introduce the quantities (27)
By substituting (26) into (24) and equating to zero the coefficients of the resulting cubic differential form, we get S}kl + Stli + Sfik = O.
(28)
We now consider a differential form of degree q in Bo which belong to the base manifold M, that is, which is the dual image of a differential form in M under the projection p. Such a differential form can be written as 1 P . . 71 = - ~ . (29) ., q! ." ...••.q ·I. ... ·q. W'IA ••. AW'q, where P., ... i q can be supposed to be anti-symmetric in any two of its indices. In order that 1] belongs to M, it is necessary that d1] has the same property. By using (23), we see that this implies the relations (30)
j dP• I···.q . + ~q-l . j '>6+1 ·· ·.q . a . 1TP= ~IP. 'Ilcd. s- ~ P P'1' " '.-1 po, 'I···.q
Exterior differentiation of this equation gives ~1(dP11 '" tq'Il+~q8= 1~ p" .p1,1'" .
.
j'
1.'-1 1.&+1' "
=1~q-l~JklP. ~ 8, '1'"
·llai.1TP+~ t.q pt., p, j P-'1 ' " 'IJ -'q
ai , 1TP )AW' P
i '_J..I1.'+l ,. ,S~klWkAcd. . .••q 'l,
This allows us to put (31)
dP'tl · · . 1.·ll+~q-l~JP . ... · llai.1TP sp, 1.1'" \6-11 1.'+1'" 'q Pt, q Wk • +~ P.1.p'1 '" i ql·ai,1Tp=~kP 1 P .I·· · 'lllk .q
Substituting this into the last equation and equating to zero the coefficient of w k Acd, we get (32)
p'tl· . · ·1..q Illk- P'l. · ··1.q. Ikll=~q-l~'P 81 1.1 '"
i 8-1 j '1.,+1. . •• i q Sf.1.,kl ·
These equations are usually known as the interchange formulas. An important case of a G-connection is when G is a subgroup of the orthogonal group O(n) in n variables. In this case we shall lower the superscripts of our symbols and use subscripts throughout. We first remark that such a group G always has the property (0). Since the infinitesimal transformations Xp leave invariant the quadratic form
201
GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY III we have (33)
aipk +akpi = o.
Suppose that
Lp ( - (J,ipkb'j + aipjbZ) = O.
Permuting this equation cyclically in i, j, k, we get Lp ( -ajpibZ +ajpkbfj = 0, L p ( - akpjbf + akpib'j) = O. By subtracting the first equation from the sum of the last two equations, we find But these equations imply bf = O. This proves that G has the property (0) . When G is a subgroup of O(n), there are some symmetry properties of Sijkl which will be useful later on. From the second equation of (26) and (33), we have (34)
Sijl.:/ = - Sjikl = - Sij/k'
It is well known that these relations and (28) imply (35)
3. Proof of the decomposition theorem We are now ready to give a proof of the decomposition theorem as stated in the Introduction. Since GcR(n), the G-structure on M defines an orientation on M by the condition Ctl i A ••• ACtIn> 0 and a Riemann metric on M by (36)
Relative to these the operators in (3) are defined. Our first problem is to compute fl.1}, with 1} given by (29). This is a routine computation, and we shall only give the relevant formulas. First of all we have (37)
dl1=~ · ....tq.j . p.tl •.. tq. liCtl.ACtI . A • •• ACtI · • 0' q! L ." 1 t, tq
To make the coefficients anti-symmetric, we can write (38)
d'1l=(-I)qL . (P.t, . . . t' 1'tq+1 -P..q+lt . .•. •. tq'1 t,' 'f (q+ I)! .,· ..... tq+t q
-
•••
-P..tl ••• ,• q_,tq+1 . Itq' )CtItl. A •.• ACtI·tg+!'
202
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
112
We also have, by definition, (39)
1
*1'l= ./ q! (n _ q)!
~ ..
. . . p. . w· A '" ... tIl c·I, ... 'q'q+, " : In I, ... 'q 'q+1
... AW · ,
'n
where ci l ... in is equal to + 1 or - 1, according as iI' ... , in form an even or odd permutation of 1, . . . , n, and is otherwise equal to zero. Using (3), we find ( -1)q (q-l)!
8'Yl=---~ ..
(40)
./
.p.
..::..I, •...• lq_I.]
·
' I ' w , A ... AWi
11···lq_I]]
II
q-I
.
Further computation gives
. - (q - 1) I. do1'l./ = ~ ~IIO ... (41) (
0
"
Iqo ]
PII' " I.q_ t1' 1]'1''q W·'I A
_(q_l)IOd1'l= . . p'I . .. 'q. l ]] 'I ' w, A . ./ q- ~·lto . .. o 'qo] 'I -~ . ~1.h
•• • A W· , 'q
•.. AW·
tq . .p. . . ' l ' I ' w , A ••. ••• , l.q, 1 1.1 .•. 1.q-l' 1.q 1 '1.1
AW · . 1. q
By using (32), we get the following fundamental formula: (42)
1 _(q_l)1. ~'Yl= . ... 'qo] . .pt l . . . tq. I ]] ' I ' W '1 ' A ./ q- ~ ." 0
•••
AW'q ·
.
+~. k jP1.1 ... 1.q-l . kSk"]tq1·W·'1.1 A ... AWl.q· .-'.Jtlt ... tt".·,
- (q-l) ~il ..... iq.k';~I ... iq_.k;Skiq_l;iqWil A . .. AWiq' The disadvantage of this formula is that the coefficients are not anti-symmetric in their indices. The following artifice is used to antisymmetrize the coefficients: Let c(i 1 ... i q; jl" .jq) denote the number which is equal to + 1 or - 1 according as jl' ... , jq form an even or odd permutation of iI' ... , i q , and is otherwise equal to zero. We define
(43)
S(i1 .. . iq,jl ... jq ; k1 ... kq,ll ... lq) = ~c(il . .. i q; r 1 ... rq_1g) c:(jl . .. jq; r 1'" r q-l h) X c(k1 ... k q; 81 ", 8q_1u) c(ll .. . lq; 81 ,,, 8q_ 1r) Sghuv (1 ~ r, 8, g, h, u, v ~ n),
where all the indices run from 1 to n and the summation is over all the repeated ones. To shorten our notation we write the symbol on the left-hand side also as S«i) (j); (k) (l)). It is easily seen that these symbols have the following properties: (1) They are anti-symmetric in any two indices of each of the sets iI' ... , iq; jl' ... ,jq; kl' ... , kq; ll' ... , lq. (2) S«i) (j); (k)(l)) = - S«j)(i); (k)(l)). (3) S«i) (j); (k) (l))
= -S«i) (j); (l)(k)) .
(4) S«i) (j); (k) (l))
=
S«k) (l); (i) (j)).
203 GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 113 From these quantities we define (44)
S«i)(k))=S(il ... iq, k 1 ••• k q) 1
= q! ~it•... iq S(il ... iq, jl .. . jq; k 1 ••• kq, jl' .. jq). Then S«i) (k)) are anti-symmetric in the indices of each one of the sets iI' ... , iq and kl> ... , kq, and (45)
S«i) (k)) =S«k) (i)).
It turns out that S(il ... i q; kl ... k q) are the quantities which occur in the expression for !:l1J. In fact, we find (46)
1
-!:l1J=-~ q! .,' .....•.q". p., . . .•.q I J'I'J W "' A
• • • AW·'q
+ (q! (n~q)!)2 ~i.k~, ... il(il'" The exterior
qth
i q,k1··· kq)Wk, A • •• AWkq·
power Aq(V*(x)) of the space of covectors V*(x)
at xEM of is dimension N = (;) and has as base (47)
. < ... < ~q . =< n ) . (1 < = ~1
Wi, A • • • A Wiq
In Aq( V*(x)) an inner product is defined by (48)
1
(1J , 1J) =q!- ~." ....•.q.
p2.
.
., ... . q.
Under the action of G through its linear representation this inner product remains invariant. If w;, is an invariant subspace of Aq(V*(x)) under G, its orthogonal space»; is also invariant. There exist therefore base vectors <1>1' ... ,
1 <1>, = - ~ . . gi . , W· A ... AW,>q • .. q! ~'" ... 'q. , ... 'q... "
From now on till the end of this section we shall agree on the following ranges of indices: (51)
1 ~A,B,O ~h,
h+ 1 ~a"fl, y~N.
204
SHIING-SHEN OHERN
114
We shall find the condition that ~ and U; are invariant under G. For this purpose we compute the exterior derivative d
qld
=q~ . . """'1.1 •... • 1q -
.
tq-l
. 1T P AW 1.1 I, . 4Aa1ptq · A .. . AW 1,q ·
I , g . . lAg. · ,n_ 1T A
It follows that the invariance of ~ under G implies (53)
or ~ . "', '.q_" I ,m g', . ... ,q_, . lAg "'-"" ...... ',· ... 'q· _,m, a: Slm]·k=O . As to be expected, this relation is symmetric in A and a. Our theorem will be established if we prove that the condition that 1] is of type ~ implies that 6.1] is of type ~. Suppose therefore that
(54)
1
PA
(55)
"'=~
(56)
+ (q! (q~ 1)!)2LPAgi, ... iq,AS(il'" iq, k 1 ••• kq)Wk,A ... AWk = LPA Ii Ii
It suffices to prove that
~i" ...,iq.k" .... kqS (i l ... iq, kl ... kq) gi,. ... iq,A gk, ... kq.a: ='0. For this purpose we consider the quantities introduced in (43), and put (57)
(58)
(q!)4 RICA!'" = ~i" ....lqgi, ... iq.ICgi, ... iq,Agk, ... kq.p gl, .:. lq,v X
S(il'" iq, jl . . . jq; k 1 ... kq, ll .. · lq),
where the indices of R KApv have the ranges (59)
We also put (60)
RICp=~ARICApA'
Because of similar properties of S(il ... i q, jl ... jq; k 1 .. · kq, 11 " .lq), RICA!'" has the properties (61)
R ICApv = -RAIC!",= -RIC)."p, R ICApv = R pvICA '
205 GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 1I5
From (54) it follows that, on remembering the ranges of indices as agreed upon in (51), (62) R.Aal'.=O. From this we find R.Aa = ~,1 R .A,IaA = ~B R .ABaB + ~p R .Apap = O.
But this is exactly the equation (57) to be proved. Thus the proof of our decomposition theorem is complete.
4. The case of the unitary group As discussed in the Introduction, our decomposition theorem reduces the proof of (7) to a purely algebraic problem. The latter has been solved in the theory of representations of the unitary group. To be precise, the problem can be formulated as follows: Let L be a complex vector space of dimension 2m, which is a direct sum of two complex vector spaces V , V of dimension m. Let W a, wa be base vectors of V. V respectively. The equations (63)
{~a-+~~: ~p:ap~p, wa-+wa.-~puapwp,
where (u ap ) is a unitary matrix, define a linear mapping of L, which maps the vector ~a(fawa.+gawa.) into the vector ~a(faw~+gaw~). The linear mappings so obtained, for all (u ap ) E U(m), define a representation of U(m). It induces a linear representation of U(m) in the exterior power AT(L). Our pro blem is to decompose this representation into its irreducible parts. As base vectors of AT(L) we can take (64)
Wa,A ... AW"'pAWp,A ... AWpq
(p+q=r,
l~al<
...
... <{Jq~m).
For fixed values of p, q these vectors clearly span an invariant subspace of N(L), to be denoted by AM(L). An element of AM(L) is said to be bi-homogeneous with the bi-degree (p, q). Such an element can be written in the form (65)
~",pPa AWpA , , ... ap P ,.. . pW_A q -, ... AW", p ' ... AWp, q
where we can suppose the coefficients to be anti-symmetric in the a's and (J's separately. For p ~ 1, q ~ 1, the linear subspace in AP,q(L), defined by the equation (66) ~yp""" ' '''P_l'Yp, ... Pq _l'Y=O, is an invariant subspace.
206 SHIING-SHEN OHERN
116
We wish to remark that the following theorem is true: For p + q ~ m the representation of U(m) in the linear subspace (66) of AM(L) is irreducible. This can be verified by a computation of the character of the representation. In fact, we easily show that in the notation ofH. Weylt this is the representation of signature (1 ... 10 . .. 0 - 1 ... -1). '-..--'
\
,
P
q Moreover, if we consider the maximal Abelian subgroup of all diagonal matrices (67)
of U(m) and introduce the integers (68)
ll =m, ... , ~=m-p~ 1,~p+l =m-~= 1, ... , {
lm_q-q, lm-q+l-q
2, ... , lm-
1,
this representation has the character (69)
X=
where (70)
Iell ... elm 1=
Iell .. . elm I Iem-I ••• eO I'
eim
e!.I
Iem-I ..• eO I=
emI -
I
el.mm
As is well known, condition (66) characterizes the primitive elements. Hence all these add to the remark that each summand in (7) corresponds to an irreducible representation of U(m), so that in this sense Hodge's decomposition theorem cannot be improved. We shall show briefly that our considerations include also as a particular case a generalization of Kahler geometry, which has been studied by A. Lichnerowicz.:j: This is the geometry on a compact even-dimensional manifold on which there are given an exterior quadratic differential form n of highest rank and a Riemann metric with the property that the covariant derivative of n vanishes. Lichnerowicz proved that if such is the case the Riemann metric can be so modified that we can suppose (71)
{ t
dS
2
=~a:
8! + ~a:' 8!"
n- ~a:8a:A8a:"
[10], in particular, pp. 198-201.
t
[7].
207
GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 117 where a' = a + m, etc., and where 0a ' 0"" are linearly independent linear differential forms. By putting (72)
w",=
]2
(0", +iOa,),
we can also write (73)
w",=
]2
(O",-iOa:),
d8 2 = 2 La Wa Wa, {
Q=iL",W",AW",.
These forms define an almost complex structure on the manifold, and the group of the bundle is reduced to U(m). By following the general discussions in § 2, we see that a connection can be defined in the bundle, with the group U(m) . Without going into details, we state that the forms wafJ which define the connection are characterized by the conditions
(74) and (75)
wafJ+wfJa=O.
It is possible to express these equations in the real form. For this purpose we write (76)
wafJ=¢"'fJ+iVrafJ'
where ¢afJ' VrafJ are real. Conditions (75) are equivalent to the conditions { ¢afJ~¢fJa:O, (77) VrafJ VrfJa - 0, and equations (74) will then take the real form (78)
dOa = LfJ (OfJ A ¢fJa -OfJ'A VrfJa) + 0 a, {
dOa, = LfJ (0fJ A VrfJa + 0fJ' A ¢fJa) + 0 a"
where 0 .. ,0.., are defined by Qa=
]2
(0 .. +i0",),
(79) {-
I
'1:\
)
Q .. = .J2(0.. -'£~ .., .
On the other hand, the ds 2 in (71) defines a Riemann metric on the manifold. To this structure with the orthogonal group there always exists a connection without torsion, the parallelism of Levi-Civita.
208
118
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
The latter will be defined by the forms 0AB = satisfying the equations (80)
0lJA
(A , fj = I, . . . , 2m),
dOa = L.fJ (0 fJ" 0fJa + 0fJ'" 0fJ'a), {
dOa' = L.fJ (0fJ" 0fJa' + 0p' " 0fJ'a')'
In terms of this connection we express the condition that the (;()variant derivative of n is zero. This gives 0a'fJ = 0fJ'a'
(81)
0a'p' = OafJ'
Equations (78) are therefore satisfied, if we put (82)
¢fJa=OfJa'
ifrfJa= -OfJ'a,
0 a =O,
0 a,=O.
Since the forms ¢pa' ifrpa, 0 a, 0 a, in (78) are completely determined by their symmetry properties (77) and the form of Qa' it follows that the condition of Lichnerowicz is equivalent to saying that the group of the tangent bundle can be reduced to U(m) in such a way that the resulting connection has no torsion. Our decomposition theorem applies therefore to this case and gives a decomposition of harmonic forms identical with Hodge's theorem for Kahler manifolds. As an illustration to derive topological consequences let us prove the following theorem: If a compact manifold of dimension 2m has a U(m)-connection without torsion, then its odd-dimensional Betti numbers are even. On the complex-valued differential forms 1] of degree r we define the operator (83)
C = L.p+q=r iTJ-qpp,q,
where Pp,q 1] is the bihomogeneous component of 1] of bidegree (p, q). If 1] is harmonic, Pp,q 1] is harmonic, and the same is true of C1]. Moreover, this operator C has the following properties : (1) C2= (-1)'; (2) C is a real operator, that is, it maps a real form into a real form. If r is odd, C defines a linear mapping on the space of real harmonic forms of degree r, such that C2 = - 1. It follows that the dimension of this vector space, that is, the r-dimensional Betti number, must be even.
5. Riemann manifolds with a field of parallel oriented linear spaces We first prove the theorem: Let G = R(s) x R(n - s) c R(n) be the product of two rotation groups in sand n - s variables respectively, 0< s < n. The existence, on a manifold of dimension n, of a G-connection without torsion is equivalent to that
209
GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 119 of a Riemann metric and a continuous field of oriented s-dimensional linear spaces which are parallel with respect to the Riemann metric. We adopt in this section the following ranges of indices: 1 ~ a, fl, y ~ s,
(84)
s + 1 ~ a, b, c ~ n.
Following the general method in § 2, we define, in the cOITesponding principal bundle, a uniquely determined set offormswa,wa , 7Ta/l = -7T/la' 7T ab = - 7T ba' W aa ' such that wa' w a ' 7T /la' 7T ba are linearly independent and (85)
waa=
~/lAaa/lw/l+ ~bBaabwb '
which satisfy the conditions (86)
{
dWa =
~/lW/l A 7T/la - ~aWaAWaa '
dW a =
~a wa AWaa + ~bwbA 7Tba'
The forms 7T/la ' 7Tba define a G-connection in the bundle. It is without torsion, if and only if (87)
waa=O.
wp,
Let ea' ea be tangent vectors which are dual to the covectors Wb' The s-dimensional linear space spanned by ea defines a parallel field, if and only if (87) is fulfilled. This proves our theorem. Suppose from now on that we have a compact manifold with such a G-structure without torsion. A differential form of degree r can be written in the form (88)
7J
= ~p-HI=r ~a,aPal ... apal ... aq Wa, A ••• AWapAWa, A ••• AWaq ,
where the coefficients Pa, ... apa, ... aq are supposed to be anti-symmetric in the a's and in the a's. For fixed p, q we define the operator (89)
Ppq7J=~aaPa aa aWaA .•• AWaAWaA .. . AWaq · , , 1 '" P I '" 7 1 P 1
Then we have (90)
7J=~p-HI=rPp,q7J.
Each ofthese summands is said to be bihomogeneous ofbidegree p, q. According to our decomposition theorem, Pp,q commutes with the operator~. It follows that if 7J is harmonic, then each of the summands in (90) is harmonic. Let Bp,q be the number of linearly independent bihomogeneous harmonic forms of bidegree p, q. Then the r-dimensional Betti number of the manifold is given by (91)
Br= ~p+q=rBP,q.
It can be shown that each of the summands in (90) corresponds to an irreducible representation of G. In this sense the decomposition of a harmonic form 1/ given by (90) cannot be improved.
210
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
120
Let (92)
and let <1> be a bihomogeneous differential form of bidegree 0, q. We wish to prove the following lemma: The differential form <1> is harmonic, if and only if ill A<1> is harmonic. To prove this lemma we remark that the exterior derivative of a bihomogeneous differential form 7J of bidegree (p , q) is a sum of two bihomogeneous differential forms, ofbidegrees (p+ l ,q) and (p,q+ 1) respectively. We call them d l 7J and d 2 7J , so that (93) We write ( 94)
d=d l +d 2 • 1 <1>=-L Wa' A ..• q! a .. ...• aq Pa, ... a q
AWa q ,
where the coefficients pu, ... aq are supposed to be anti-symmetric their indices. We define an operator *2 by 1 (95) *2<1>= q! (n-s-q)!
L a' •...• un _ . ea, ... an_. Pa , ... a q Wa q+1 A... AWa • •
Then we have (96)
In
* <1> = ± ill A*2 <1>, {
* (ill A<1» = ± *2 <1>.
It follows immediately from definition that, for a form of type (0, q), the conditions d 1<1> = 0 and d l (*2 <1» = 0 are equivalent. To prove our lemma, suppose <1> be harmonic: dll>=O,
d*<1>=O.
From the first equation follow d l <1> = 0,
d l (*2 <1» = O.
From the second equation we get It follows that
d(il l H2 <1» = 0
or
d 2 ( *2 <1»
= O.
d(il l A<1» = 0,
d * ( ill A<1» = ± d( *2 <1» = ± d l ( *2 <1> )± d 2 ( *2 <1» = O. Hence ill A<1> is harm!>nic. Conversely, suppose ill A<1> be harmonic: d(il l A<1» = 0,
d * (ill A<1»
From the first equation we get d 2 <1>=0.
= O.
211
GENERALIZATION OF KAHLER GEOMETRY 121 From the second equation we get d( *2 <1»
= 0,
which gives It follows that Therefore is harmonic. From our lemma we get the following equalities: (97)
In particular, we have (98)
which is the result stated at the end of the Introduction. UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO
REFERENCES
[1] S. CHERN, Characteristic classes of Hermitian manifolds, Ann. of Math., 47 (1946), pp. 85-121. [2] - - , Topics in differential geornR.try, mimeographed notes, Princeton,1951. [3] P . R. GARABEDIAN and D. C. SPENCER, A complex tensor calculU8 for Kahler manifolds, Acta Mat,h., 89 (1953), pp. 279-331. [4] H. GUGGENHEIMER, Ober komplex-analytische Mannigfaltigkciten mit Kahlerscher Metrik, Comment. Math. Helv., 25 (1951), pp. 257-297. [5] W. V. D . HODGE, The t.heory and application of harmonic integrals, Cambridge University Press, 1941. [6] S. LEFSCHETZ, L'analysis situs et la geometrie algebrique, Paris, GauthierVillars, 1950. [7] A . LICHNEROWICZ, Generalisations de la geometrie kiihlerielUle globale, Colloque de geometrie differentielle, Louvain, 1951, pp. 99-122. [8] A . WElL, Sur la theorie des f017TlR-8 differentielles attachees a une variete analytique complexe, Comment. Math. Helv., 20 (1947), pp. 110-116. [9] - - , Theorie der Kahlerschen MalUligfaltigkeiten, G6ttingen, 1953. [10] H. WEYL, The classical groups, Princeton, 1939.
212 Reprinted from Amer. J. Math. 79 (1957).
ON THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF IMMERSED MANIFOLDS.* By
SHIl:\'G-SHEl\ CHERN
1
and
RICHARD
K.
LASHO}<'.
Introduction. In the classical theory of surfaces in the ordinary Ellclid t'H IJ space E an important role is played by the normal mapping of Gauss: Let M be an oriented surface which has at every point :r a well-defined unit normal vector I' (x). Then the normal mapping v:.M ~ So is the mapping of M into the unit sphere So about the origin of E, which sends x to v (x). For differentiably immersed submanifolds in an Euclidean space of higher dimension the following is a generalization of the Gauss mapping : We consider a C'" -manifold U n of dimension n, and a C'" -mapping x: j[" ~ En+N into the Euclidean spase En+N of dimension n N (N >- 1). Mn, or rather Mn and the mapping x, is called an immersed submanifold, if the induced mapping of the tangent space is univalent everywhere, or, what is the same, if the Jacobian matrix of x is everywhere of rank n. The submanifold Mil is said to be imbedded, if x is one-one; that is, if x (p) = x (q) , p, q E Mn, implies that p = q. Let By be the bundle of unit normal vectors of x (ilI") , so that a point of By is a pair (p, v(p) ) , where v(p) is a unit normal vector to x(.Mn) at x(p). Then By is a bundle of (N-l) dimensional spheres N - ] . TIl<' mapping oyer .Mn and is a Coo-manifold of dimension 11 v: By ~ SO, .. N-l of B y into the unit sphere SO, .. N-l of E"+N defined by ii(p, v(p)) = I' (p) is the mapping with which we v,ill he concerned in this paper. Let dV be the volume element of M". There is a differential form dlI.V_l of degree N -Ion By such that its restriction to a fiber is the volume element of the sphere of unit normal yectors at a point p E Mil; then dUN-l 1\ dV is the volume element of By (for detail see Section 2) . Let d~n+.V-l be the volume clement of Son,N-l. Th e function G (p, ..( p) ) = G (71, I') defined by
+
+
ji*d~n+N-l
(1)
=
G(p, 1,)dIIX_l 1\ dV.
where ji* is the dual mapping on differential forms induced by I', is a function in By. It generalizes the GauRs-Krollecker curvature and we will call * Rece ived January 4, 1957. Work done when the first·named author is under partial support fr om a contract with the National Science Foundation . 1
306
213 307
THE TOTAL CURVATURE OJ!' IMMERSED MANIFOLDS.
it the Lillschitz-Killing curvature at v(p). G(p,v) has a geometrical interpretation which we will discuss below. It is zero at a point (p, v(p» E B p ,
if and only if p has a critical value at this point.
f
K*(p) =
(2)
We call the integral
I G(p,v)lduN_l>O
over the sphere of uuit normal vectors at x (p) the total CU1'vature of Mn
JMnK* (p) dV,
at p, and define as the total C1Lrt'atw'e of loIn itself the integral (
if it converges. The main results of t.his paper are concerned with the conclusions on Mn when its total Clll'l'atUl'C i~ "small." They can be stated as the following theorems: TUEORKH
En .""
1.
C" -manifold immersed tn the inequality:"
j,et M" be n com.pact oriented
Its latal ClIrl'atU1"()
S(L(.i·~fie8
(]{"(p)dV>2Cn+N_l
(3)
J M" THEoHEM
2.
Under lhe hypothesis of Theorem 1, if ( K*(p)dV
(4)
cJ M "
then Mn is hOIIlI'fJlIIOlphic to l' H EOR EM:1.
< 3C n+N_"
sphere of n-dimensions.
(L
U11 del' tll e sam e hypothesis, if
(5)
(
.J
K* (p) dV = 2C/l+N_" J)["
+
Ihen }Vln belongs to u linea.!' subt;ariety E"" of dimension n 1, and is l:mbedded as a convex hypersurface in E"". The COnt'el'se of this is also tnte. Thcse theorems generalize known results of Fenchel, Fary [2J, and :'IIilnor [31 for curves and sharpen some results of Milnor and one of us [1]. Theorem 3 can be interpreted as a characterir.atioll of convex hypersurfaces among all immersed submanifolds of a giren dimension in an Euclidean space of arbitrary dimension. A large part of our paper is devoted to a proof of thi~ theorem . 1. In
Moving frames.
Surpos('
N"+N
be oriented. By a frame xel
•
en+N
R,,'N we mean a point ~; and an ordered set of mutually perpendicular • C •• N . ,
n+N.
IS
t1w area of the unit hypersphcrc ill an Euclidean space of dimension
214
308
SHIING-SHEN CHERN AND RICHARD K. LASHOl'.
unit vectors e1 , ' ,ell+.v, such that their orientation is coherent with that of En+N Unless otherwise stated, we agree on the following ranges of the indices:
(6)
l
n+l
I
Then we have (7) where the left-hand side is the scalar product of vectors. Let F (n, N) be the space of all frames in En+N, so that dim F(n, N) = (n N) (n N 1) /2 . In F (n, N) we introduce the linear differential forms w'.~, ,,/ All by the equations
+
(8)
dx =
L
+ +
w' Ae.~,
A
where (9)
"/AI:
+
W'8.{ =
O.
Their exterior derivatives satisfy the equation of structure:
(10)
dw'A
=
L W'B B
/\ w' 8 .4,
dw'AB
=
L
W'AC /\ W'CII.
C
As explained in the Introduction, we mean by an immcrsed submanifold in En+N an abstract C"'-manifold Mn and a C"'-mappillg :1': M" ~ E"+N, such that the induced mapping Xi,' on the tangent space is everywhere univalent. Analytically, the mapping can be defined by a vector-valued fUllction x (p), p EM". Our assumption impli~s that the differential d' ~(ll) of ;I:(p), which is a linear differential form in Ill" , with value in E"'.v, ha ~ a:=; values a linear combination of n.. vectors, t1, ,tn, and not les~. Sillce :1:", is univalent., we can identify the tangent spacc of M" at p with th e \'cctor space spannen by t l , ,tn' A linear combination of the latter is called a tangent vector and a vector perpendicular to them is called a normal \'ector. The immersion of M" in E"+N givcs rise to the following fiber bundles ovrr Mn: ] ) The tangent bundle B r , whose bundle space i" the Hubset o( Jlf" X E,,+N, consisting of all points (11,11), such that 11 E AT ann II is a un it tangent I'ector at ;c(p}. 2)
rrhe normal lJulHlle H v , whoHe bundle space
i~
till'
~;uh~et
or
M" X E"+,v, consisting of all points (ll ,v ), such that pE M an(1 " i-; a unit normal vector at :t: (p). il} The bundle B, whose hundle space is the subset of M" X F (n . N). consisting of (11, x( 11 )e, . CIIIl"., (' n,.\') E Mil X F( 11., N) such that Il" . 1'"
215 309
THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF nn£ERSED MANI.FOLDS.
arc tangent vcctors and
e n +h '
. "
en+N
are normal vectors at
x
(p).
The
projection B ~ .1."'[" we denote by",. rrhe last bundle B is the space in which most of our computations take plac!,.3 We define t.he mappings (11 ) by ( 1~ )
\\'e also remark that the Whitney sum BT product bundle ltfn X Sn+N-l ~ Mil.
E9 B. over Mn is equivalent to the
ConRirler the mapping:;
B~M" X F(n,N) ~F(n,N),
(l a) whe T"('
l~
iuelusion and A is the projection into the second factor.
(14 )
WAR
Put
= (Ai) *W'.HI,
'l'hPll we ha.y!', from (9) and (10) , ~).Ht dWA
=
+
WR _4
L WI/ 1\ WR .4, B
= 0,
dWAB
=
L e
WAO
°
1\
WOI/·
From our detinition of B it follows that Wr = and that inuprpn(klIt. Hpnee t.he fird equation of (16) gives
Froll1
(1 ~ )
t.hi~
Wi
are linearly
it follow,; t.hat (f)-i,.
=
L Arijwj,
A rij = A ,-ji.
j
2. fnllll!'~
The total curvature. An essential idea of the method of moviug is to ('oll);id!'r t.h e hlll1(lIc space R, and to construct differential forms
"Thl' hllncllt, /I '·,UI abo lJe detined a.~ follows: Let Q.,,+.\" be the group of all ori"ntation -I'n',('rvillg motion ~ in En+-'", anrl N n X RN the subgroup of Qn+N consisting of all motions whi,·1t leave fixerl the origin 0 of E,.. N and a given oriented linear space of dinWIISioll " throllgh O. Then QnLY -+ Qn.HI Ii" X R .. is a bundle whose structure group is H" X "'.. and whosc base s pace is the s pace of all elements consisting of a point and an ori,'ntetl lin,'ar ~pace of dimension ... through it. The bundle B is induced by the mapl'in~ which sends p EM to the point x(p) and the oriented tangent space at x(p). In parti cular , th" structural g roup of B is R. X R N • Similarly, we {'an rleline the bundleR fiT anrl H",
216
310
SI-IIlNG-SI-IEN CHERN .AND RICHARD K. LASHm'.
in B, which are inverse images of differential forms in },{n and B v, under the mappings t/t and t/tv respectively. In particular, the volume element of Mn can be written dV =WI 1\
(18)
and the volume element of Bv is dV 1\ da N - I
(19)
=
1\ .
WI
1\
W,,+N.lI+I
1\
da N - I being equal to the product of the last N -
1 factor;;.
On the other
hand, we have
1\
W,,+N.n
1\
Wn+N,n+l
1\ ... 1\
0>"+11',,,+."-1'
Using (17), we get
=
(-1) n det (An+N.t;) WI 1\' .. 1\
wn
1\
Wn+N.R+1
1\
1\
(l)nt-N.n+ .\ ' - I-
It follows from the definition (1) of the Lipschitz-Killing cunaturc G([1, v) that (20) G(p,v) = (-1) n det(An+N.i;)'
To see how G (p, v) depends on y, we take a local cross-section of jU" in B, described by the functions eA (q) for q in a neighborhood of p. Theil for any frame e.dq) in B at x(q), we have e.! = L CAnen(q) allo.
L A8iJ"WiW; = L
CarAT;;w;w;,
r , i.J
1..j
where '{r'i is the function Ani restricted to the local cross-section . ticular, if for 11 = e,,+N we write 11 = L l'reT we have at p: (21)
G(p,lI)
J n par-
(-1)ndet(LI'rA";j(p».
=
T
Further we get for the scalar product of differential d 2 x on B (22)
V'
d 2x
=
L l'l-WirWi = L £Or
and hence as forms (23)
OIl
-
I'
T,
and the "ector-valued second
lJ r
A,··i}-WiWj
t .J
B. we have: dvdx =
V'
d~;"C =
L
vrAri]"w;w;,
r,i.J
Therefore we may interpret G (p, 11) as generalizing the determinant of the second fundamental form of a surface. 1f N = 1, i. c., if Mil is an immersed oriented hypersurface in E'''t, its
217 THE TOTAL CURVATUUE OJ<' I:MMERSED
MA~n'OI,DS.
311
orientation (and that of E'1+1) defines a unit normal vector Vo (p) at p EM". Then G(p, vo(p» = G(p) is called the Gauss-Kronecker curvature of M at p. ~\ny other unit normal vector at p is of the form v(p) = ± vo(p), and
G(p, v(p»
=
G(p, ± vo(p»
=
(± l)nG(p).
It follows t.hat, for n even, G (p, I' (p» is independent of the orientation of the hypersurface 31" and of the space En+1 . Naturally, G (lJ) reduces for n = 2 to the classical Gaussian curvature. In the general case G (p, v) admits the following geometrical interpretation in terms of the Gauss-Kronecker curvature: Let L (v) be the linear 1 "panned by the tangent space to x(M") at x(p) space of dimension Il and the llormal vector ,. (p) . 'rlwn G (}J, v) is equal to the Gauss-Kronecker currat ure at Jl of the orthogonal projection of x(1Il") into L(v). Since the theorem is local, we take a local cross-section e.t{ q) of ill" in R ill a lIC'ighhorhoocl of Ii. such that "(P) = en+N (p). We write
+
x(p) =
Io.
If x' (q) c1mlOt.eS t he position I'ector of the projection of x (q) III L (I')' X' (q) is deli lied by the equations
.I"(q) --.1'0=0,
From
t.hi~
~n+X =
If
}i
it. follows that
(:r'(q) -x(q» . (e,,+x)o = (.I· o-:t(q» . (en+x)o
1
L
is fixed and ({ raries all t.he manifold lII n , we have d/ = d.r
+ ~x d~n+x (en+X) 0 =
d';r,' = d 2 x -
~ (d 2 .c · (en+x) 0)
x
so that. (e n+.\·) IId ,r' = (e +.\·) od'.f. 2
ll
3.
Proof of Theorem 1.
dx- ~(d:l; ' (en+x) 0) (en+x) 0, h
(en+:>.) 0,
Thi~
proves our statement.
For this proof we will need the following:
THEoREu (Sard)' Let V and W be two C1- m (J;nifolds of the same dimension Il1l(l f a mapping of class C1 of V into W. The image f(E) of the set FJ of critical points of f i.s a set of measure zero in W. • Cf. [6], p. 10.
218
312
SHIING-SHEN CHERN AND RICHARD K. LASHOF.
We consider the map v: Bv ~ 8 0"+N-I. Every point of 8 0"+N-l is covered at least twice by y. In fact, for a fixed unit vector 1'0, the scalar product I'O 'X (P) as a continuous function on M" has at least one maximum and one minimum, at which ± I'odx(p) = O. If, on the other hand, the maximum and minimum points are the same then M" is contained in a hyperplan':! perpendicular to l'o, and every point of 111" has 1'0 as a normal vector. The set of critical points of j; is the set E of points in Bv such that G(p, v) = O. Hence
j M"'K*(p)dV= JBr jG(p,v)!dVduN_1 II
is the volume of the image in 8 0 "+N-1 of the set of non-critical points of B •. By Sard's theorem and by the above remark that every point of 8 0 "+N-l is ,covered at least twice by ii, we have immediately
4.
Proof of Theorem 2. Suppose that
r Ie (p) dT' <
JMn
3C,,+.I"_1 ; WI'
wi ~h
to show that Mil is homeomorphic to a sphere of n dimensions. Our h}'pothe~i~ implies that there exists a set of positive measure on 8 0 ""v-, such that if 1'0 is a unit vector in this set, 1'0 ' x(p) has jU8t two critical points. For if not; ·every point of 8 0 "+N-t, except for a set of measure zero, would be covered .at least three times by I ' and hence as in Section 3 we would have
r K* (p) dV > 3C
JM"
n +N-l'
Since, by Sard's theorem, the image of the set of critical poiut.,; Hilder r is of measure zero, there is a unit vector 1'0 such that 1'0 ' X (p) Ita:,: exactly two critical points on AIn and such that 1'0 is the image of non-critical points -of Bv under ii. The latter means that G(p, 1' 0) =/= 0 at each critical point p E 111 of the function 1'0 ' X (p), which is equivalent to saying t.hat. l'u' (F.~ is a quadratic differential form of determinant not zero. TIJ othrr word~ . t.he function 1'0' X (p) on M" has exactly two non-degenerat.e critical points. Now a theorem of Reeb [5J (see also [4], p. 401) asserts that if a compact differentiable manifold 111 has a real-valued differentiable function on it with only two critical points which are non-degenerate, then !II is homeomorphic to a sphere. It follows from this that Mn is homeomorphic to a sphere, and our theorem is proved.
219 THE TOTAL CUltVATURE OF IMMERSED MANIFOLDS.
5. Proof of Theorem 3.
313
We begin with two lemmas:
LEMMA 1. Under the hypothesis of Theorem 3, M'f is immersed in a linear subvariety of dimension n 1 of En+N.
+
We may assume N:> 2, since otherwise there is nothing to prove. We En+N. In doing this, \I'e show that the hypothesis of Theorem 3 and the assumption that M" o.oes not lie in a hyperplane of E,,+N lead to a contradiction. Let (p,vo(p»EB. be such that G(p, 1'0) #0; such a point exists by 'l'll('orem 1. Choose a local cross-section of liI" in B; i. e., the vectors BA (q), where q belongs to a neighborhood of 1), and that CMA- (p) = 1'0' Then any other unit normal vector at p may be written I' = ~ VrBr(p) and by equation Irill first show that M is contained in a hyperplane of
r
(2]), Section 3, we have G(p,v)
=
(-l)ndet (~VrA:rij(p».
Holding p
r
fix ed ano. restricting ourselves to normal vectors 1'(0) such that Vn+N
= cos (J,
Vn+N-l
= sin (J,
vr= O,r#n
+ N -1, n + N,
we have G(p,v) =f(0), where f(O) is a polynomial in cos(J and sin(J and is hence an analytic function of (J. f«(J) is not idcuticall.,· zero, since f(O)=G(p,v,,)#O. Let lIo be the tangent hyperplane at x(p} perpendicular to 1' =1'(8). :-liJlee x(M ") does not belong to a hyperplane, there exist tangent hyperplanes HH,' He" (J.<(J., and points q"q2 EM, such that x(q,)EIlo" x(q2)EH o" x(qd ¢ H ", X(q2) ¢ H o,. Since 'f«(J) does not vanish identically, there is a taJigent hyperplane H 0" such that f «(J, ) # 0 and that x-( q.) and :c (1]2) i ie 011 llin'el'ellt sides of the tangent hyperplane II 0,,' The condition f( ( 3 ) # 0 illlpii('s that the mapping ii is one-one ill a neighborhood 111 of (p, 1,(0"») or 13., We call choose W so small that for (q', v') EO: ll', x(q,) and X(q2) lie 011 o.ifferent sides of the tangent hyperplane perpendicular to v' at x(q'l, The function / - x in Mil has at least three point at which v' - dx = 0; namely, the maximum , the minimum, and the point q', The last point q' is distinct from the maximum and the minimum, since, by our construction, there are points of x (Mn) on different sides of the tangent hyperplane at q' perpendicular to 1/, It follows that a neighborhood of Son+N-l is covered by the image of ii at least three timeR, As every point of SOfl+N-l is covered at least twice, we conclude that the total curvature of x (M") is strictly greater than 2C n +N_l' But this is a contradiction. It follows from this contradiction that x(Mn) belongs to a hyperplane En+N-l of En+N. We wish to show that its total curvature in En+N-l is equal
220
314 to
SHIING-SHEN CHERN AND RICHARD K. LASHOF.
We denote by v the unit vector perpendicular to En+N-l and by the unit sphere in EfI+N-l. The sphere SOfl+N-2 can be imagined as the equator of Sn+N-l with v as the north pole. Let Bv' be the bundle of unit normal vectors of x(M") in En+N-l. Then Bv' C Bv and v(Bv') C SoR+N-2. Denote by v' the restriction of ji to Bo'. It suffices to prove that, with the exception of a set of measure zero on So,..N-2, the points of Sofl+N-2 are covered by jl exactly twice. Suppose the contrary be true. There is thus a set A of positive measure on Son+N-", whose points are covered by v' more than twice. To any p. E I1 , x (]lk) there are distinct points p" . ,Pk E lII n , k?: 3, for which x (Pl), . have normal vectors parallel to p.. All the unit vectors in the great circle ,X(pk)' It spanned by p. and v are then normal to x(1I-1") at x(pd,' follows that all the points of So"+N-l belonging to great circles spanned by v and the points of A arc covered by ii more than twice. Since A has positiw measure on So"+N-2, this set has positivc measure on SO,,+N-l, which is a. contradiction. Therefore X( JJII) belongs to E"+N-l and has, as a submanifold of B" +N-" a total curvature equal to 2C n+N_"' By induction on N we see that x(Mn) must belong to a linear Im]lYariet.y E, .. l of dimension n 1 anci has in E"+l the total curvature 2c n • 2C,,+N-2'
Sofl+N-"
+
LElUIA 2. Let x: Mil ~ E"+l be an immersion of a compact or·icnted' manifold and let I': Mil ~ 8,," be the normal map of Gattss. Let J (p) be tll e Jacobian matri:/; of v at p, and let [1".= {pE Mn ImnlcJ(p) =n-m}. Then, if U m contains an open set V, its image under x is genemted by m-dimensional planes. Every boundm"y ]Joint of U"", which is at the same tim e rt limit point of an m-dimensional genemting lilane, belongs to U",.
The fact that thc image under x of V is generated by m-dimcllsional planes is a classical result; we include a proof for completeness. At any interior point p of U the assumption Oil the rank of J implies that w@. may choose coordinates on Mil in the neighborhood of [I, say, t l , ' . ,tn, such that if v is tht' unit normal vector at p, then ov/ ot a = 0, and ov/ota are linearly independent. Here, and for the remainder of this section, we makc thefollowing convention concerning indices: II •
1<
We have
V '
0:,
(3, y < m,
o;/;/ot, = 0.
v' a";/; / at,at a = Renee
0,
m
+1<
a, b, c < n,
1 < i, j, lc < n.
It follows that
ov/ot a · ox/at, + v(a 2 x/ ot,ot a )
= 0,
al/ata . a3;/at a = o.
Ox/ata are vectors orthogonal to the n - m + 1 linearly independent.
221 315
THE TOTAL CUUVATURE OF IMMEUSED MANIFOLDS.
vectors ~', 8y/8t a. The surfaces ta = taO = const. are therefore m-dimensional planes in En+l. Since 8v/8t a = 0, the tangent hyperplane remains constant along an m-dimensional generating plane. Consider now the sub-bundle B' of B consisting of all those frames el, " , en +l such that ea are in the m-dimensional generating planes. Then, as in Section 1, we have
where ~ AiJWh
Wi.n+! =
;
The above assumption on the bundle of frames B' is equivalent to assuming (24)
Wa .1H l
=
-
0;
Wn+l.a. =
i. e., that the matrix (Aij) takes the form det(Aab) =
D =/= 0,
which is an (n X n) -matrix whose elements are zero, except possibly those of the (n - m) X (n - m) block in the lower right-hand corner. Our proof depends on studying the behavior of D along the m-dimensional generating plane. From (24) we have 0= dw a.n + 1 = ~ O'ul.:
~Wall /\ WII.n+! II
/ \ WI.:.,,+! =
k
+ ~waa /\ a
"'a.1I+I·
Our assumption implies Wa.~+!
O'II.n+1 = 0,
~ AabWb,
=
b
so that ~ AabWaa
/\ O'b =
0, or ~
we get
AabWaa /\
a
a.b Waa /\
II We =
O.
II We =
O.
Since det(A.ab) =/= 0,
c
H ence we can put
c
(25)
O'na =
~ haabWb. b
N ow we have
II
OJa.I)+1
=
D II "'c' Exterior differentiation of this equation
a
gives /\ dWa.n +l
. / \ (U.n.1Hl
/\
a
=dD /\ rrwe+D(~(-l)a-",-lo,,,,,, /\ a c
/\ dW a / \ .
. /\
But dw a.n• 1 = ~ Wak
/\ W1;.11.1 =
dwa =
~ WI.: k
~ wab /\ Wb.II+!, b
k /\
wka =
~ haabWa /\ o'b a ,b
+ ~ wb /\ o'ba. b
w,,).
222 316
SHIING-SHEN CHERN AND RICHARD K. LASHOF.
Hence (26)
°
=
d IJ A
n + D ( 2: 11 We
aaaWa
A
u,a
dD
n we), or c
+ D ( a,a2: haaawa) =
0,
mod We·
To complete the proof let p E Mn be a boundary point of V m, such that x(p) is a limit point of a generating m-dimensional plane L. We choose a neighborhood V of p, in which x is one-one, and we suppose that x-'(L) C V.
Let e, (q), . ,en +, (q), q E V, be a local cross-section of V into B, such that, for qE x-'(L), et(q), ,em(q) span L. Such a cross-section clearly exists. If Wi, .oj are the restrictions of Wi, wij respectively to this cross-section, then Wi are linearly inde:'pendent and we will have Waa =
L
haakWk'
11
The coefficients haab(q) are equal to the functions haab(q) introduced above, for qE x-teL). Let y be a curve in ,'c-'(L) abutting at p. We havc, along y, dD
+ D( a,a L hanalJ)a)
=
0,
lt follows by integratioll of this diffen'lItial pqllatioll that
for q E y - po, where iJ o =1= 0 i;; the value of ]) at a fixed point of y. Since D (q) is a contillllous fUIlction and since Ii aao is bounded, we conclude that D(p) =1= 0. This completes the proof of Lemma 2. We now complete the proof of Theorem 3 as follows: Let H be the space of hyperplanes of En+' (with the obvious topology). A tangent hyperplane of x (Mn) is said to be:' of rank m, if it is tangent to x(lIf")at a point of x(V m ) and at no point of ,f(Uz), l < m. By the argument used in the proof of 'l'heore:'m 2, a tangent hyperplane of rank zero does not separate the set x (111") . For otherwise there would be a neighborhood of Son, whose points are covered at least three times by II, which would be contrary to the assumption that M" has the minimum total curvature 2c". We will show that in every neighborhood (in the space II) of a tangent hyperplane 7f' of x (1I1n) there is a tangent hyperplane of rank zero. In fact, let W be such a neighborhood. Suppose x(p), p E V1/I, be a point of contact of 7f' . Either there is a neighborhood of p in 1II which belongs completely to Vm or there are points of V z, l < m, in every neighborhood of p. In both cases we can find a point p, such that the tangent hyperplane 7f't at x (p,) belong-r; to lV and such that PI has a neighborhood in 111" which belongs complete:'h' to VI, l < m . The image under ,T of thi" neighborhoocl of PI is
223 THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF IMMERSEO :MANIFOLDS .
317'
generated by l-dimensional planes and the tangent hyperplane to ;c (Mil) along the generating l-dimensional plane through X(Pl) is 1Tl' If X(P2), P2E Mn, is a boundary point of this l-plane, pz belongs to UI by Lemma 2 and is not an interior point of U I • Hence there exists in every neighborhood about P2 an open set whose points are in Uk, k < l, and which contains a point pa E Uk such that the tangent hyperplane at x(pa) is in W. Continuing this process, we see that W contains a tangent hyperplane of rank zero of x(Mn). This means that every neighborhood of 1T in H contains a tangent hyperplane such that x (Mn) lies on one side. It follows that the same is true for 1T itself. If Vc is any unit vector in Eon+!, Vo' X (p) has a maximum and a minimum on M", which must be distinct, since ],fn cannot be immersed in an m-dimensional hyperplane. Hence the intersection of all the halfspaces of En+' bounded by a tangent hyperplane of x(J[n) and containing points of x(Mn) is a closed convex set with a non-empty interior and with a· pln) on the boundary. Since th e induced homomorphism 3:* of tangent spaces is On e-O ll l', .,. is a local homeomorphism of M into the houndary of the convex set. It follow:> that X(MII) is both open and closed on the boundary ; thus x maps Mn onto the boundary. But the boundary of the convex set is homeomorphic to a sphere S" and by the abO\'e ],fn is a covering space of Sn under the map x. Hence, if n > 2, x is a homeomorphism. The same i;; true for n = 1, on account of the fact that the total curvature is 2c 1 • Conversely, let x (.ilfn) be a convex hypersurface. It is then locally convex. By reversing the orientation of .ilf" if necessary, we can suppose that G(p) >0. Then K*(p) =2G(p) , becau se there are two unit normal vectors at every point. The degree of v is
1/ cn
r G(p)dV = JMn
l.
Hence the total curvature of x(Mn) is 2c n. 6.
A further theorem.
THEOREM 4. Let x: M" ~ En+' be an irnrn ersl:on I) f a closed ol'ientable manifold and v: Mil ~ S on the normal map. Th f' ll tit e following are equivalent:
1. deg v =
± 1 and the Gaussian CU1·vatur p. is of crm stnnt sign ;
2. The total cW'vature is 2c n ; 3. Mil is imb edded a.~ a convex hype1·surfa.cc.
224 318
SHIING-SHEN CHERN AND RICHARD K. LASHOl!'.
It suflices to prove the implications 1) :;> 2) :;> 3) ~ 1). Since 2) ~ 3) ~ 1) are contained in Theorem 3, we only have to prove that 1) implies 2). For this purpose it is sufficient to show that no set V of positive measure on So" is covered more than once by },fro under v. Suppose the contrary. By re\'ersing the orientation of ],fn if necessary, we can suppose that deg I' = and that the Gaussian curvature is non-negative. By Sard's theorem, thert> exists a point y E V su~h that for any point in V-I (y) the curvature is strictly positive. There can only be a finite number of points in v-l(y). For otherwise I,-l(y) will have a limit point p at which v is not locally oneone, while, on the other hand, the Jacobian of v at p E V-I (y), being a nonzero multiple of the Gaussian curvature at p, is different from zero. By our assumption on V the number of points in v-l(y) is > 2. At each point of v-I (y) the J acohian of v is strictly positive. It follows that deg v >2, which contradicts our assumption. Hence the theorem is proved.
+]
Rema?·le. We would like to conjecture that for n > 2 the condition deg I ' = 1 in 1) can be omitted. In other words, it seems likely that a closed orientable hypersurface (of dimension > 2) of non-negative Gauss-Kronecker CllrYature is convex. If the curvature is strictly positive, this follows from Hadamard's principle. On the other hand, it is well-known that this condition is essential for n = 1; there are non-convex immersed curves in the plane with non-negative curvature. UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO.
REFERENCES.
[1] S. Chern, "La geometrie des Rons-varietes d'un eRpace enclidien it plnRiellrg sions," L'Enseigement Matltllmatique, vol. 40 (1955), pp. 26-46.
dim~n
[2] 1. Fary, "Sur la courbure totale d'une courbe gauche faisant un nocud," Bull. Soc. Math. de Franoe, vol. 77 (1949), pp. 128-138.
[3] J. W. Milnor, "On the total curvature of knots," Annals of Mathematios, vol. !i2 (1950), pp. 248-257. [4] -
- , "On manifolds homeomorphic to the seven-sphere," ibid., vol. ()4 (1%6), pp. 399-405.
[5] G. Reeb, "Sur certaines proprictes topologiques des varietks feuilletkes, Actual. Soi. et Indus., vol. 1183 (1952), pp. 91-154, Paris. [6] G. de Rham, Varietes difterentiables (1955), Paris.
225 Reprinted from Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 8 (1957).
ON THE INDEX OF A FIBERED MANIFOLDI S. S. CHERN, F. HIRZEBRUCH, AND J-P. SERRE
Introduction. Let V be a real ·vector space of dimension r. Let yE V, be a real-valued symmetric bilinear function. We can find a base e" 1 ~i~r, in V, such that F(x, y) = (x, y), x,
1'+q
l'
(1)
F(x, y)
=
L:
x'y' -
i-l
L:
x'y'
i-1'+1
where x = L:~-1 x'e, and y = L:~-l y'e,. The number p -q is called the index of F, to be denoted by r(F). It depends only on F. If F is nonsing-ular (i.e. p +q = r), then min (p, q) equals the maximal dimension of the linear subspaces of V contained in the "cone" F(x, x) =0. Now let M be a compact oriented manifold. The index of M is defined to be zero, if the dimension of M is not a multiple of 4. If M has the dimension 4k, consider the cohomology group H2k(M) with real coefficients. This is a real vector space, and the equation
(x,
(2)
y)~ =
x, y E H2k(M),
xU y,
where ~ is the generator of H4k(M) defined by the given orientation of M, defines a real-valued ~ymmetric bilinear form (x, y) over H2k(M). Its index is called the index of M, to be denoted by r(M). Reversal of the orientation of M changes the sign of the index. The form (x, y) defined by (2) is nonsingular, since, by Poincare's duality theorem, the equation xUy=O for all xEH2k(M) implies y=O. The main purpose of this paper is to prove the theorem: THEOREM:; Let E--+B be a fiber bundle, with the typical fiber F, such that the following conditions are satisfied: (1) E, B, F are compact connected oriented manifolds; (2) The fundamental group 1i"l(B) acts trivially on the cohomology ring H*(F) of F. Then, if E, B, F are oriented coherently, so that the orientation of E is induced by those of F and B, the index of E is the product of the indices of F and B, that is,
r(E)
= r(F)r(B).
Received by the editors September 7, 1956. Work done when the first named author was under partial support by the National Science Foundation. 1
587
226 588
S. S. CHERN, F. HIRZEBRUCH, AND J-P. SERRE
(June
REMARK. We do not know whether condition (2) and the connectedness hypothesis of condition (1) are necessary. For instance, let E be an n-sheeted covering of B (the spaces Band E still being compact oriented manifolds); is it true that T(E) =nr(B)? We know the answer to be positive only when B possesses a differentiable structure: in that case, according to a theorem of one of us, T(B) (resp. T(E)) is equal to the Pontrjagin number L(B) (resp. L(E)) and it is clear that L(E) =n·L(B).
1. Algebraic properties of the index of a matrix. Let ei, 1 ~ i ~ r, be a base in V. A real-valued symmetric bilinear function (x, y) defines a real-valued symmetric matrix C= (Ci;) , Cij= (ei' ej), 1 ~i,j~r, and is determined by it. The index of the bilinear function is equal to the index T( C) of C, if we define the latter to be the excess of the number of positive eigenvalues over the number of negative eigenvalues of C, each counted with its proper multiplicity. We have the following properties of the index of a real symmetric matrix: For a nonsingular (rXr)-matrix T we have
(3)
T(C) = T('TCT).
Here, as always, we denote by 'T the transpose of T. For nonsingular square matrices A, L (with A symmetric) we have (4)
T
o
0
L
0
A
'L
0
o = o
T
(0'L L) + 0
rCA) = rCA).
Here and always we make use of- the convention that the index of the empty matrix is zero. To prove (4) it is enough to show that (5)
r( 0 L)0 = O. IL
In this case, r is even. Put r=2J.L. Obviously, the cone F(x, x) =0 of the symmetric bilinear function F(x, y) belonging to the matrix
contains a linear space of dimension J.L. Thus min (p, q) "?;J.L. On the other hand, p+q=2J.L. Therefore, p=q and T=O. LEMMA
1. Let C be a real, symmetric, nonsingular matrix of the form
227 ON THE INDEX OF A FIBERED MANIFOLD
o
589
LO]
L .... :·
•
where Lo, ... , L", are square matrices (empty matrices are admitted) and where Li is the transpose of L".-i. Then r(C)
=
r
0
.
LO]
L",'
0
=
0, if m is odd, { r(L.. ) , if m = 2n.
PROOF. We put
Cx = [0
(6)
.. Lo ],
X.
L",
Since det (Cx) =± II:'-o det (Li) ~o, the index T( Cx) is obviously independent of X, so that T(C) =T(C1) =T(Co). By (4) we have T(C o) =0 resp. T(C o) =T(L n ), q.e .d. LEMMA 2. Let A and B be two square matrices, which are either both symmetric or both skew-symmetric. Then their tensor product A ®B is symmetric, and
r(A ® B)
(7)
= r(A)r(B) or 0,
according as both A and B are symmetric or skew-symmetric. Suppose first that A and B are both symmetric. Let ai>O, aj
= pp'
+ qq' -
pq' - p'q = r(A)r(B).
Now let A and B be both skew-symmetric. By applying (3) to the matrix C=A ®B we can suppose that A and B are both of the form
A..
o
o
228 590
S. S. CHERN, F. HIRZEBRUCH, AND J-P. SERRE
(June
where each A i is a 2 X 2 block:
A, = (
0 1) =
-1
0
J.
Since
we have T(A ®B) =0.
2. Poincare rings. We consider a graded ring A with the following properties: (1) In the direct sum decomposition A =
:E
A'
os.
of A into the subgroups of its homogeneous elements, each A' is a real vector space of fini te dimension. There exists an n with A r = 0 for r>n and with dim An=1. (2) If xEA i, yEAi then xyEA ,+i and
xy = (-1)iiyx. Let ~ r!!0 be a base element of A n _ Relative to ~ we define a bilinear pairing (x, y) of A' and A n-r into the real field by the equation (x, y)~
= xy,
x EA', yEA n-••
Let i n _. be the linear mapping of A n-. into (A') *, the dual vector space of A', which assigns to yEAn-. the linear function (x, y) on A' (xEA'). A graded ring A is called a Poincare ring if it satisfies (1), (2) and has moreover the following property: (3) The mapping i n _. is a bijection of A n-' onto (A') *_ A consequence of (3) is
o~ r
~
n.
The cohomology ring of a compact orientable manifold is a Poincare ring. A differentiation in a Poincare ring A is a linear endomorphism d: A ~A, satisfying the following conditions : (a) dA'CA·+l; ((J) dd =0; (oy) d(xy) = (dx)y+( -1)'x(dy) , if xEAr; (el) dA ..-1 = o.
229 ON THE INDEX OF A FIBERED MANIFOLD
1957)
591
As is well known, such a differentiation defines a derived ring A' =d- 1(O)/dA. If we put A " =d- 1(O)flA'/dAr-1, we have the direct sum decomposition
A' =
L:
A",
0::;,,, ..
and A' is a graded ring. It is easy to verify that, if x/EA", y/EA'f, then xly/EA'Hi, and
X'y' = (-1)ii y I X' • From the property (li) of d we have dim A I .. = 1. Thus A I satisfies (1) and (2) with the same maximal degree n as A. We denote the residue class of ~ in A'" bye. Relative to we have the linear mapping
e
LEMMA
a
3. The derived ring of a Poincar~ ring with differentiation is ring, i.e. i~_, is bijective.
Poincar~
It remains to prove that A' has the property (3) in the definition of a Poincare ring. Let xEA', yEA,,-r-1. By property (li) of d, we have
o=
d(xy)
= (dx)y
+ (-l)'x(dy).
This gives (dx, y)
(8)
=
(-1)r-1(x, dy),
a relation which is independent of the choice of ~. This relation is equivalent to saying that the following diagram is commutative: d A ,,-r-1 - - - - - + ) A ,,-r
I! t"-r-1 .
d
---~)
1i.._,
A ,,-.+1
1
ilO-r+1
(Ar+1)* (-l)'-l{1~ (Ar)* (-l)'{1~ (Ar-1)*
where (Ar)* is the dual space of Ar, and 'd is the dual homomorphism of d. We have the canonical isomorphism (A'r)* ,......, 'd- 1(O) fl (A r)* /'d(A .-+-1)*. The above diagram shows that i n - r induces an isomorphism, namely i~_" of A'n-r onto (A'r)*. It follows that A'r and A'n-r are dually paired into the real field relative to the element rEA'n, which is the residue class of ~.
230 592
ijune
S. S. CHERN, F. HIRZEBRUCH, AND J-P. SERRE
In analogy with the index of an oriented manifold we can define the index Tf(A) of our Poincare ring A relative to t. It is to be zero, if n =0, mod 4. If n = 4k, Tf(A) is to be the index of the bilinear function (x, y), x, yEA 2k. Obviously, Tf(A) =Th(A), if ~1 is a positive multiple of t. LEMMA
4. In a Poincart ring A let t¢O be a base of An, and let
rEA'" be the residue class which contains
~.
Then TdA') =Tf(A).
It is only necessary to prove the lemma for the case n = 4k. Let Z2k = d- 1 (0)(lA 21:, B2l: =dA 2k-l, and let a, b, c be the respective dimensions of A 21:, B2", It follows immediately from (8) that each of the two spaces B2k and Z2k is the orthogonal of the other with respect to the symmetric form (x, y) of A n, whence a = b c. We have B 2k CZ 2k CA 2,.. If e. is a base of A 2k such that e.EB2k for 1 ~ i ~b and e.EZ 2k for b+l ~i~c. the matrix «e., ei» has then the form
zu.
+
[,~
o
L
Q * * *
where Land Q are square nonsingular matrices, of orders band c-b respectively. Its index is Tf(A), while r(Q) is Tf,(A') . By Lemma I, we get therefore Tf,(A') =Tf(A), as contended. 3. Proof of the theorem. It suffices to prove the theorem (see Introduction) for the case dim E=4k, which we suppose from now on. We consider the cohomology spectral sequence p,.f, 2 ~ r ~ 00, of the bundle E~B, with the real field as the coefficient field. Let 2
~
r
~ 00.
Each E, is a graded ring, satisfying E'rE. CE;+" and also E:,iN,'( CE:+P',H(. It has a differentiation dr, such that Er+l is the derived ring of E,. In our case d, is trivial for sufficiently large rand E"" , or E, for r sufficiently large, is the graded ring belonging to a certain filtration of the cohomology ring of the manifold E . The term E2 of the spectral sequence is by hypothesis (2) of our theorem isomorphic to H*(B, H*(F» =H*(B) ®H*(F), such that E:'i '" H"(B, H,
If we identify E;,i with Hp(B) ®Hq(F) under this isomorphism, the multiplication ill E2 is given by
231
593
ON THE INDEX OF A FIBERED MANIFOLD
(b ® I)(b' ® f')
bE H"(B),
= (-l)p'V(h U
h') ® (fU I'),
I' E
h' E Hp'(B),
Hq'(F).
Let m=dim F, so that dim B=4k-m. Since Band F are manifolds, E2 is a Poincare ring with r~spect to the grading •
(EI
= 0 for s > 4k,
..k
Ez
=
4k-m.m
Ez
).
The ring E2 is isomorphic to the cohomology ring of B X F. The orientations of B, F define a generator ~2=~B®~P of lif. Here ~B (resp. ~,) denotes the generator of Htl-m(B) (resp. H"'(F)) belonging to the orientation of B (resp. F). We wish to prove that Th(E:) = T(B)· T(F).
We have (9)
u: n.o Ez =Ez
+ EU-I,I z +···+Ez
%i-m,m
.
Here some of the E~,q might vanish, in particular E~,q = 0 if P < 0, Clearly, for xEE~-q,q and yE~-'" we have xy=O unless
q + q'
= m.
By Poincare duality in Band F, we have · EIk-v,v - d' EZk-tn+q, ...-v -lmz • dl1D2
Therefore, the symmetric matrix, which defines the bilinear symmetric function over E~t, is, when written in blocks relative to the direct sum decomposition (9), of the form
o L",
where the L, are nonsingular square matrices, such that L, is the transpose of L",_,. By Lemma 1 we obtain Th(E:) = 0 if m is odd,
In the first case the equation Th(E z) =T(B)T(F) is proved, since Th(E 2) =T(F) =0. In the latter case we have
232 594
S. S. CHERN, F. HIRZEBRUCH, AND J-P. SERRE
Uune
and it is clear that up to the sign ( _1)m/2 the matrix L"./2 is the tensor product of the two matrices defining the bilinear forms of Band F. If m/2 is odd, both matrices in this tensor product are skew-symmetric, and we have, by Lemma 2, r(L m / 2) =0; on the other hand we have r(B)r(F) =0, since dim Ft=O (mod 4) -and thus by definition reF) =0. If m/2 is even, that is, if m=O (mod 4), both matrices are symmetric, and Lemma 2 gives: r(L m / 2) =r(B)r(F) . Combining all cases, we get the formula (10) in full generality. The differentiation d 2 of E2 satisfies the conditions of a differentiation in a Poincare ring given in §2. In fact, dim E!= 1, since E is a manifold of dimension 4k. Therefore, dim ~=1 for 2~r. Thus d2 annihilates ~-l; more generally d r annihilates ~-l. It follows by Lemma 3 that Ea is a Poincare ring. It has d a as differentiation and therefore E4 is a Poincare ring etc. Finally, E", is a Poincare ring. By Lemma 4 and (10) we get r(B)r(F) = rh(E 2) = rh(E a) = ... =
r~ .. (E",),
where ~r (resp. ~"') is the image of ~2 in Er (resp. E",). It remains to prove thatr~ .. (E",) =r(E). The cohomology ring H*(E) is filtered:
H*(E) = DO :J Dl :J . .. :J Dp :J DP+l :J ... , Dp ,q = Dp
(11)
n Dp
= 0,
n Hp+q(E),
We have the filtration
Hr(E) = DO .r :J Dl ,r-l :J ... :J Dr,O :J Dr+l,-l = 0 and the canonical isomorphism (12) The ring structure of E", is induced by that of H*(E) by the canonical homomorphisms Dp ,q-E!'.:.Q (see (12) and (11». Since E!=E!-m,,,., (where m=dim F), we have (13)
a nd (14)
DH-i , i
= 0
for i
< m.
233 595
ON THE INDEX OF A FIBERED MANIFOLD
Earlier we have chosen a generator ~ .. E~. Under the canonical isomorphism (13) ~'" goes over in the generator ~E of H4k(E) belonging to the orientation of E generated by the given orientations of Band F in this order.2 We now consider the bilinear symmetric function (x, y) over H2k(E) relative to ~E. Choese a direct sum decomposition of H2k(E) in linear subspaces, (15)
H2k(E) = Vo
+ V + V + ... + V", 1
t
=
D2k-q,q
such that q
L
Vj
(0
~
q
~
m).
i-O
Here we use that DU-"=D2k-m,m for s>m. By (11) and (14) we have (16)
(x, y) = 0
for x E Vi, Y E V j and i
+j
< m,
for x E Vi, Y E Vi and i
+j
= m,
and moreover by (13) (17)
(x, y) = (x, y),
where x (resp. y) denotes the image (see (12)) of x (resp. y) in E'!-" (resp. E'!-J.J) and where on the right side of this equation stands the symmetric bilinear form over E,! relative to ~",. Since (x, y) = 0 for xEE,!-M, yEE'!-a',a', unless q+q' =m, and since E", is a Poincare algebra, we can conclude (18)
· dlffi
E2k-q,q '"
= d'
1m
EU:-m-t-q,m- q
'"
.
The preceding remarks, in particular (16), (17), (18), imply: The matrix of the symmetric bilinear function over H2k(E) relative to ~E can be written in blocks with respect to the direct sum decomposition (15) in the form
o
Lo
• 2 This is easy to see when E is a trivial bundle, in which case it is almost the definition of the orientation of a product of manifolds. The general case can be reduced to this one by comparing the spectral sequence of E to that of the bundle induced by E on an open cell of the hase, the cohomology being taken with compact carriers.
234
596
S. S. CHERN. F. ffiRZEBRUCH. AND J-P. SERRE
[June
where the L, are nonsingular square matrices and where Li is the transpose of L m - i • Moreover.
[:.
Lo
o
is the matrix of the symmetric 'bilinear function over E~ relative to By Lemma 1 we have T(E) =T{",(E",,). This concludes the proof of our theorem.
~",.
UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, UNIVERSITY OF NANCAGO, PRINCETON UNIVERSITY AND UNIVERSITAT BONN
235 Reprinted from Michigan Math. J. 5 (1958).
ON THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF IMMERSED MANIFOLDS, II Shiing-shen Chern and Richard K. Lashof Let M n be a compact differentiable manifold of dimension n, and let
x: M" _En +N be a differentiable mapping of Mn into a Euclidean space of dimension n + N with the property that the functional matrix is everywhere of rank n. Then M II is said to be immersed in En+N. II x is one-one, it is said to be imbedded in En+N. To each unit normal vector v(P) of an immersed manifold Mn at p E M, we draw through the origin 0 of E n +N the unit vector parallel to it. This defines a mapping, to be called 'ii, of the normal sphere bundle Bv of M n into the unit hypersphere So about O. In a previous paper [1; this paper will be referred to as TCI J. we studied the volume of the image of 'ii and called it the total curvature of Mn. It will be advantageous to normalize this volume by dividing it by the volume c n +N-l of So, c n +N-l being of course an absolute constant. Throughout this paper. we will understand by the total curvature of Mn the normalized one. Then, if En+]\" c En+N' (N < N'), the total curvature T(M n) of M n remains the same, whether M n is considered as a submanifold of En+N or of En+N' (Lemma I, Section 1) . One of the theorems we proved in TCI states that T(M n) 2 2. We shall show below (Section 1) that the same argument can be used to establish the following more general theorem. THEOREM 1. Let Mn be a compact diffe1-entiable manifold immersed in En+N, and let {3i (0 ~ i ~ n) be its ith Betti number relative to a coefficient field. Then the total curvature T(Mn) of Mn satisfies the inequ
where (3(M")
=L:; f=o{3i
is the sum of the Betti numbers of M n
The right-hand side of (1) depends on the coefficient field. For the real field, the lower bound in (1) cannot always be attained. In fact, we have the following theorem. THEOREM 2. If the equality sign holds in (1) with the real field as coefficient field, then Mn has 1W torsion. For a compact differentiable manifold Mn given abstractl~ the total. curvature T(Mn) or T x(M") is a function of the immersion x: Mn_E n + (N arbitrary). Obviously, the number q(~) - infx Tx(Mn ) is a global invariant of Mn itself. Theorem 1 says that q(Mn) > (3(Mn). In this connection, there is another invariant s(Mn) of Mn, namely the mhiimum number of cells in a cell complex covering Mn. Clearly, we have s(MO) ~ (3(Mn). II M2 is a compact orientable surface of genus g, it is easy to see that q(M2) = S(M2) = (3(M2) _ 2 + 2g.
Received October 18, 1957. Work done while S. S. Chern was under a contract with the National Science Foundation.
5
236 SHIING-SHEN CHERN and RICHARD K. LASHOF
6
Generally, it can be shown that q(Mn) is an integer; but the proof will not be included in this paper. It seems likely that q(Mn) = S(MIl). Another problem in this order of ideas is the characterization of the immersions of M n by which the minimal total curvature of M n is realized, that is, for which T(M n ) = q(Mn). If Mn is homeomorphic to an n-sphere, it is a consequence of Theorem 3 of TCI that such an immersion is characterized by the property that Mn is imbedded as a convex hypersurface in a linear space of dimension n + 1. The general problem can therefore be regarded as a natural generalization of the theory of convex hyper surfaces in Euclidean space. When Mn is immersed as a hypersurface, that is, when N = 1, the Gauss-Kronecker curvature K(p) (p E Mll), a local invariant of Mn, plays an important role in our problem. It is defined only up 10 sign when n is odd. The answer to our problem is most complete in the case of compact surfaces imbedded in ordinary Euclidean space (n = 2, N - 1): THEOREM 3. A compact orlentable surface of genus g is imbedded in the threedimensiollal Euclidean space with total curvature 2g + 2, if and only if the surface lies at one side of the tangent plane at every point of positive Gaussian curvature. For oriented compact hyper surfaces (N = 1) with Gauss-Kronecker curvature K(p) ;? 0 for all p E Mn, we have the following theorem. THEOREM 4. A compact orlentable surface immersed in three-dimensional EuclideQ71 space with Gaussian curvature> 0 is imbedded G7Id convex. There are examples of nanconvex compact orlentablehypersurfaces. of dimension;? 3, whose Gauss-Kronecker curvature is everywhere;? o. The main point of this theorem is that K(p) is assumed merely to be ;? 0, and not strictly > O. In the latter case, a well-known argument due to Hadamard shows that M n is imbedded as a convex hyper surface. Theorem 4 implies that a conjecture made by us in TCI (p. 318) is true for n = 2 and false for n;? 3.
1. TOTAL CURVATURE AND THE SUM OF BETTI NUMBERS
LEMMA 1. Let x: Mn_En+N be an immersion of a compact diffe1·entiable manifold of dimension n in En+N, given by x: p-x(p)
Let x': Mn_E n +N ' (N
< N'),
be the immersion defined by
x'(p) = (xl(p), '.' , xn+N(p), 0, "., 0).
Then the immersed main/olds x(Mn) and x'(MIl) have the same total cU1·vature. The lemma is intuitively obvious. For if B~ is the normal sphere bundle and the corresponding normal map of the immerson x', then cle~rly ii' is the (N' ~ N)-fold suspension of ii on each fiber. Since sn+N'-1 is the (N' - N) fold suspension of S ntN -1, it follows that the ratio of the area covered by ii' on sn+N' -I to the area covered by ii on sn+N -I is the same as the ratio of the areas of sn+N'-1 and sntN - I. In spite of this short argument, we give a more analytical proof as follows:
v': B'_Sn+N'-1
It suffices to prove the lemma for the case N' - N = 1. The general case will then follow by induction on the difference N' - N.
237 ON THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF IMMERSED MANIFOLDS, II
7
We follow the n0tation of TCI, and consider the bundle B of all frames
such that el, "', en are tangent vectors and e n + 1, " ', en +N are normal vectors at x(p). If we put ""ntN.A
(1 .'S A .'S n + N) ,
then the total curvature is, according to our definition, --I-I :.In+N 1 !\ .•• !\:.JntN n+N-I , Cn+N_I B,, ' , where the integral is taken in the measure-theoretic sense. It is to be pointed out that, as stated in the Introduction, we have inserted the factor l/c n +N -I to normalize the to tal curvature. Let a be one of the two unit vectors perpendicular to E in En+N - I. A unit normal vector at x'(p) can be written uniquely in the form (cos 8) en+N + (sin 8) a
( -!!.2.< 8 -< !!.), 2
where en+N is the unit vector in the direction of its projection in En+N. Let
e~+N = (sin 8) e n +N - (cos 8) a,
(1 < s <
n+
N-
1)
and
Then the total curvature of the immersed manifold x' (M ~ is equal to
Now we have (cos 8)de n +N+ {-(sin 8)e n+N+ (cos 8)a}d8
(cos 8)de n +N - e~+N d8 .
Since
0,
-(cos 8)(de n +N· a) we find that
-d8.
238 SHIING-SHEN CHERN :lnd RICHARD K. LASHOF
8 It follows that
Th:l! Tx,(M n )
Tx(Mn) is then :l consequence of the
followin~
well-known formulas:
rr/ 2
.)'
coske de
o This completes the proof of the lemma. Since the total curvature is clearly invariant under motions in space, Lemma 1 implies that the total curvature of x(M n ) in En+N remains unchanged if x(Mn) is considered as a submanifold of a high-dimensional Euclidean space which contains En+N as a linear subspace. We wish now to give a proof of Theorem 1. As in the proof of Theorem 1 of TCI, we consider the map 'ii: Bv - s8+ N -I defined by assigning to each unit normal vector the end-point of the unit vector through the origin parallel to it. The total curvature of M" is by definition the volume of the image of Bv under 'ii. The singular points oi 'ii, that is, the points where the functional determinant of 'ii is zero, are exactly the points where the quadratic differential form v· d 2 x = -dv· dx is of rank < n. By Sard's theorem, their image on Sd'+N-I has measure zero. Hence, for almost all unit vectors v, the function V· x(p) on Mn, with v fixed, has only nondegenerate critical points. By Morse's inequalities, the total number of critical points is ~ ~ i3 i(Mn) = j3(Mn). Now the image of Bv under ii is the same as the set of pOints v € SS+N -I, each counted a number of times equal to the number of critical points of the function V· x(p) on Mn. It follows that the measure of the image is ~ Cn+N _1i3(Mn), and hence that the total curvature of M" is ~ i3(Mn).
2. IMMERSIONS WITH MINIMAL TOTAL CURVATURE
Proof of Theorem 2. t This theorem follows immediately from Theorem 1. In fact, let i3i(Mn, F) be the ith Betti number of M n with the coefficient field F, and let n i3(M , F) be the sum of lfJese Betti numbers. If R denotes the real field and Zp the field mod p (p a prime), we have tWe are indebted to the referee for this elementary argument. Our original proof makes use of results of R. Thorn [3] and of Eilenberg and Shiffman [2, p. 53] concerning the cell decomposition of a manifold on the basis of a real-valued function on it. The result of Eilenberg and Shiffman can be stated as follows: If a compact differentiable manifold M has a differentiable function on it with k nondegenerate critical points of indices ill '" ik, respectively. then M is of the same homotopy type as " cell complex consisting of k cells of dimensions il.- .••• ik. respectively. Theorem 2 follows immediately from this. because there is a coordinate function with i3(Mn.R) nondegenerate critical points. The theorem of Eilenberg and Shiffman also gives more information on manifolds satisfying the hypothesis of Theorem 2. For instance. it follows easily that the fundamental group of M n is isomorphic to its first homology group.
239 ON THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF IMMERSED MANIFOLDS, II (0
9
< i < n) .
Now by hypothesis. T(MO\ = (l(Mn, R), and by Thcon' m 1, T(Mn) ~ i3lM'1, Zp), so that {l(MI1 , R} ~ fl(M n , ZI'}' In view of the inequalities above, this is possible Dilly when fli(M n , R) = fli(M n , Zp}, which means that M n has no torsion. From now on we study the particular case of hypersurfaces (N - 1). Here the most important local inYJ.riant is the Gauss-Kronecker curvature K(p} (p ( M "l. If K(p) "* 0, the principal curvatures of M n at p are all different from zero. In this case, we call the Signature of Mil at p the nonnegative integer which is the excess of the number of principal curvatures of one sign over that of the opposite sign. A part of Theorem 3 is true for n dimensions, and we state it as a lemma: LEMMA 2. Let x: ~f11 ~ En+1 be an immersion of a cOllipac!lIIallifold as a hypersillfacc in Euclidean space with total curvature equal to the SUIII fl(Mn} of the Betti mllnbers of M n relatil'l' to the coefficient field mod 2. Theil every point p ( Mn with K(PI > 0 and signature n lies on the outside of M"; that is. X(M") lies on one side of the tangent hyperplane at x(p). To prove the lemma, we suppose the contrary. namely, that there is a point p with K(p) > 0 and signature n such that x(Mn) lies on both sides of the tangent hyperplane at x(p). Th~n there is a neighborhood U of p whose paints have the same property. We orient U by choosing a field of unit normal vectors. Tile normal map II: U ~s3 is then defined. Since K(p) > 0 (p ( U), II can be supposed to be one-one (with the choice of a smaller neighborhood, if necessary). The image II(U) is therefore of positive measure on S8. It follows that there exists a set F of paints of positive measure in II(U) such that the function II' x(p) on M n (II ( F) has only nondegenerate critical points, and such that there is a tangent hyperplane to x(Mn) perpendicular to II which divides x(Mn) and which is tangent to x(M") at a point of signature n. The latter is a critical point of index 0 or r: for the function II' x(p), and it is neither a maximum nor a minimum. On the other hand, since the total curvature is equal to fl(Mn). and since II· x(p), for almost all II ( S3, has at least fli critical points of index i for each dimension i, the number of critical points of II. x(p) of indices 0 and n must be 1 (= flo = fl n ), except for a set of points II ( S3 of measure zero. These critical points are obviously the maximum and the minimum of the function II· x(p). Thus we arrive at a contradiction, and the lemma is proved. We proceed to give a proof of Theorem 3. Half of the theorem follows from Lemma 2, because a point p ( M" with K(p) > 0 has the Signature 2, the two principal curvatures being either both positive or both negative. Suppose now that the surface M" is imbedded in E3 in such a way that it lies on one side of the tangent plane at every point of positive Gaussian curvature. Suppose also that its total cunature is > 2g + 2. Then there exists a set of points II (S5 of positive measure such that the function II' x(p) on M2 has only nondegenerate critical points, whose number exceeds 2g + 2. Let mi (0 ~ i .::; 2) be the number of critical points of index i of this function. Then we have by hypothesis rna + m 1 + m 2 > 2g + 2, and by Morse's relation, 1110 - m 1 + m 2 = 2 - 2g. Combination of these two relations gives 1110 + m 2 > 2. It follows that there are at least three distinct points of positive Gaussian curvature on M2, whose tangent planes are perpendicular to II. According to our hypothesis, two of these three tangent planes must coinCide, and X(M2) is contained between the two tangent planes and is tangent to one of them, say TT, in two distinct points. Since x is an imbedding, it is geometrically clear that we can rotate
240 10
SHIING-SHEN CHERN and RICHARD K. LASHOF
slightly so that the new plane is again tangent to X(M2) at a pOint of positive Gaussian curvature and divides x(W). This contradiction proves Theorem 3. IT
Re1lla1"k. Examples can easily be given to show that Theorem 3 is not true if x is an immersion. 3. HYPERSURFACES WITH NONNEGATIVE GAUSS-KRONECKER CURVATURE
As remarked before, an immersed compact orientable hypersurface with K(p) > 0 is convex. Its total curvature is equal to 2. We will show that the class of immersed compact hypersurfaces with K(p) LOis much wider. LEMMA 3. Let x: Mn_E n +1 be an immersion such that (1) n is even; (2) Mn is compact and orientable; (3) K(p) L 0 (p £ Ml'). Then Mn has TUJ torsion, the odddimensianal Betti numbers of Mn are zero, and its total curvature is equal to ,B(Ml') . As usual, let 11£ s8 be a unit vector such that the function II'X(p) on M n has only nondegenerate critical points. The second-order terms in the expansion of the fun ction at a critical point are given by II' d2x = -d II' dx, which is the second fundamental form of the hypersurface . Since the critical pOints are nondegenerate, the Gauss-Kronecker curvature is > 0 at these pOints, and the numbers of negative principal curvatures and hence positive principal curvatures are both even. This means that the critical points of II. x(p) are of even indices. By the Theorem of Eilenberg and Shiffman stated in the footnote of Section 2, the manifold ~ is of the same homotopy type as a cell complex which consists vnly of even-dimensional cells. Hence the odd-dimensional Betti numbers of M n are zero, and M n has no torsion. The degree of the normal map II is equal to one-half of the Euler-Poincare characteristic of M", which is in this case equal to ,B(Mn)/2. Since the image under II of the set of points with K(p) = 0 is of measure zero, and since K(p) > 0 otherwise, the number of times which almost every point of So is covered by II is ,B(M")!2. It follows that the total curvature of Mn is /3(Mn), because at every point of Mn there are two unit normal vectors, one being the negative of the other.
Remark. If besides the hypotheses of Lemma 3 we further suppose that the signature of M n at p is equal to n at all points where K(p) > 0, then it follows that the Euler - Poincare characteristic of Mn is ,B(Mn) ! 2 = 1. By Theorem 4 of TCI, we conclude that Mn is imbedded as a convex hypersurface. Proof of Theorem 4. The first statement on compact orientable surfaces follows immediately from Lemma 3 and Theorem 4 of TCI. To prove the secorid statement, it suffices to exhibit some examples of hyper surfaces. First let n be odd. In En+l with the coordinates xl, ... , xn+l, we consider the hyper surface with the equation
where
This hypersurface is obtained by rotating a unit circle about the x n+taxis, and is hence homeomorphic to the Cartesian product Si x Sn-l. Its equation can also be wr itten
241 ON THE TOTAL CURVATURE OF IMMERSED MANIFOLDS, II
where
I:
= ±1 and
c/>(r)
+(1
(r _ 2)2)1/ 2.
Then we have
u
= -+7(1:--+->-I'--+--='~'--'-+-"'-~")lr7""2 (+>1' ... , +>n' -1),
where
This determination of " is inward. It follows that
U
<1> '
and >" denote the first and second derivatives of with respect to r, we
have 2- r >' () r = 1i('rf'
cp(r)
>"(r)
and i
'" 'f'i =
""~ r'
'f'
xixj >' .. 2 > 1J .. = >" ---,r<- + -.,roO (6' Jr -
.. X'XJ) •
The Gauss-Kronecker curvature K(p) is equal to the determinant of the second fundamental form divided by the determinant of the first fundamental form. Since the latter is positive, the sign of K(p) is the same as that of -det (cl>ij). Since our hyper surface is a hyper surface of revolution, it suffices to consider those of its points in the (xn, xn+I)-plane for which xl = ... x n - I = O. At such a point we have _ (>')n-I >" r n- I
>
O.
-
The example for n even (n ~ 4) is similar. It is a hypersurface obtained by rotating a two-dimensional sphere about a two-dimensional coordinate plane, and it has the equation (r ~ 0),
or (E 2 = 1) ,
11
242 SHIING-SHEN CHERN and RICHARD K. LASHOF
12
1{I(x n , r) = {l
(xn) 2
(r - 2)Z}I /Z
2: o.
As in the preceding example, K(p) has the same sign as det (1{Iij) , where 1{Iij It is a straightforward computation to show that det (1{Iij) ~ 0 or K(p)
2:
= o~1{I .• ox'oxJ
0; we omit
the details. The following corollaries are obvious. COROLLARY 1. If a compact manifold M can be imbedded in En, then Mx sn can be ill/bedded i.n En+N. COROLLARY 2. The product of spheres Sn) x ··· x S~ can be imbedded in En) +···+n r +) with minimal fotal cU1-vature 2 r
REFERENCES 1. S. S. Chern and R. K. Lashof, On the total CU17Jature of immersed manifolds, Amer. J. Math. 79 (1957), 306-318.
2. M. Shiffman, Notes on topology (critical point theol-Y), Mimeographed, Stanford University, Spring 1950. 3. R. Thorn, Sur une partition en cellules associee a une fonction sur une variete, C. R . Acad. Sci. Paris 228 (1949), 973-975.
University of Chicago
243
Integral Formulas for Hypersuifaces tn Euclidean Space and Their Applicattons to Uniqueness Theorems SHIING-SHEN CHERN*
+
Introduction. Let .E be the Euclidean space of dimension n 1. By a hypersurface in E we mean a differentiable manifold M of dimension n and a differentiable mapping x: M ~ E, whose functional matrix is everywhere of rank n. Since the strength of the differentiability assumptions will not be the issue, we suppose our manifolds and mappings to be of class C~. If M is compact, certain immediate integral fonnulas are valid. More generally, we will derive integral fonnulas for the hypersurface x and a second hypersurface x' : M ~ E. Such fonnulas are generalizations of well-known fonnulas in the theory of convex bodies, which express the mixed volumes of two convex bodies as integrals [1]. Given two compact hypersurfaces, a rigidity or uniqueness theorem gives a sufficient condition such that commutativity holds in the diagram
M z' '\.
E E 0/ '1'
4
where T is a motion in E . Of interest in differential geometry are conditions expressed in tenns of the relative curvature of the hypersurface. We review its definition as follows : Suppose M to be oriented. Then to p £ M there is a uniquely determined unit nonnal vector Hp) at x(p). We put (1)
II =
d~
dx,
III = dr,
where dx, d~ are vector-valued linear differential fonns in M and multiplication is in the sense of the scalar product in E. These are three quadratic differential forms in M (the "fundamental forms"), of which I is positive definite. The eigenvalues kl , ... , k n of II relative to I are called the principal curvatures. If the Gauss-Kronecker curvature K = kl ... k n =F 0, the reciprocals llkl , ... , llkn are called the radii of principal curvature; they are the eigenvalues of II ·Work done under partial support from the National Science Foundation.
947 Journal of Mathematics and Mechanics, Vol. 8, No. 6 (1959).
244
948
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
relative to III, which is also positive definite under the assumption K this case we introduce the lth elementary symmetric function 1
(2)
~
l
~
=1=
O. In
n.
It seems that our integral formulas are more effective for hypersurfaces which are strictly convex, i.e., hypersurfaces for which the Gauss-Kronecker curvature is everywhere> O. By using an inequality of L. GARDING [2), we can immediately derive the uniqueness theorem of ALExANDRoFF-FENCHEL-JEssEN [3, 4), to the effect that two closed strictly convex hypersurfaces differ by a translation if the function PI (for a fixed l) takes the same value at points with the same normal vector. Actually this proof does not differ essentially from the one given by ALExANDRoFF. Its merit lies perhaps in stn.ting the result in a more general form and in separating the geometrical from the analytical part. One can, however, derive in this way fUi'ther uniqueness theorems. For instance, it will be proved that a closed strictly convex hypersurface is a hypersphere if, for a fixed l, 2 ~ l ~ n, p~-J P~ = const., a G; 0, f3 G; 0, a + f3 > O. In the proofs of more general uniqueness theorems for closed strictly convex (two-dimensional) surfaces the most important tool is the "index method". This does not seem to generalize to higher dimensions, at least not in an obvious way. The need and search for new methods should make the higher dimensional problems more challenging and interesting. One immediate problem is the following: Is a closed strictly convex hypersurface defined up to a translation if the ltb (1 ~ l ~ n - 1) elementary symmetric function of the principal curvatures is given as a function of the normal vector? 1. Integral formulas. Let M be an oriented differentiable manifold of dimension n, and let x: M ~ E be a hypersurface. Let Hp), p I: M, be the unit normal vector at x(p). We consider the orthonormal frames el , •• • , en in the tangent hyperplane at x(p), such that the determinarit (e l , . . . , en , t) = + 1. The space of all el , • • • • en can be identified with the principal fiber bundle B of M relative to the Riemannian metric I. We have (3)
so that
Wi , (}i •
1
~
i
~
n, are linear differential forms in B. Since
t
(4)
dx
= 0,
we get, by exterior differentiation, (5)
dt 1\ dx = O.
The left-hand side in (5) is the exterior product of two vector-valued linear differential forms; vectors are multiplied in the sense of scalar products in E.
245
949
UNIQUENESS THEOREMS FOR HYPERSURFACES
In view of (3), equation (5) can be written (6)
LWi
1\ (ji
= O.
i
This is the fundamental relation in the theory of hypersurfaces in E. Since Wi are linearly independent, we can put, in view of (6), (7)
If det
Ilik
(Ila)
=
1
Ilki ,
~
i, k
* 0, we introduce the matrix (Ail) inverse to
~
n.
(Ilik),
so that we have
(8)
By (1) and (3) we can also write I
= Lw~,
III =
L
(j~
,
(9)
Let (10)
where y is a parameter. Then PI(A) is a homogeneous polynomial of degree l in Aik , and it is easy to see that it is equal to the invariant PI defined in (2) . We now introduce the differential forms A,
=
(x,~, d~, ... ,d~, '----v-----'
dx, . .. , dx), ~
o~ r
~ n -
o~
~
1,
n-l-r
(11)
C. = (x,
D, =
d~,
(~, d~,
.. .
,d~,
dx, . . . , dx),
... ,dt·dx, ... ,dx),
s
n.
Each of these expressions is a determinant of order n + 1, whose columns are the components of the respective vectors or vector-valued differential forms, with the convention that in the expansion of the determinant the multiplication of differential forms is in the sense of exterior multiplication. A, is a differential form of degree n - 1 in M, and C. , D. are differential forms of degree n; the SUbscripts r, s in each case denote the number of entries dx in these determinants. It is to be observed that A. , C. depend on the choice of the origin in the space E, while D. depends only on the hypersurface x(M). Let h = ~ x be the support function, the distance from the origin to the tangent hyperplane at x(p). Since d~ and dx are linear combinations of el , ... en only, we have immediately I
(12)
C. = hD •.
246
950
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
Exterior differentiation gives dA, = C, - D, +l = hD, - D,+l ,
Hence, by Stokes' Theorem, we have,
und~~
L
hD, - D,+l = 0,
(13)
O;;:;r;;:;n-l.
the assumption that M is compact, O;;:;r;;:;n-l.
More generally, for a pair of hypersurfaces x, x': M differential forms A" = (x,
~,d~, ·· · ,d~,
---+
E we introduce the
dx, ... ,dx, dx', ... ,dx'),
'----v-----' ' - - - - v - - - J ' - - - v - - - - ' n - l-(,.+.)
A~.
(14)
= (x',
B" =
~,d~,
...
,d~,
(x , x',d~ ,
.. .
,d~,dx,
dx, ... ,dx, dx', .... dx') , ... ,dx,dx', .. . ,dx'), O;;:;r+s;;:;n-I
d~, . .. , d~, dx, .. . ,dx, dx', ... ,dx'), '----v----' ' - - - - v - - - J ' - - - v - - - - '
Cu. = (x,
n- ( u+.)
C~.
= (x',
Du.
=
d~,
(~ , d~,
. ..
,d~,
...•
d~,
dx, ... ,dx, dx', ... ,dx') ,
o ;;:; u + v
dx , . . . ,dx, dx', ... ,dx'),
;;:; n.
As above, we have
Cu. = hD u •
(15)
,
C~. =
h'Du •
,
h' =
~x'.
By introducing the unit normal vector ~'(p) of the second hypersurface, we could have more general differential forms, but we will not write them down here. Exterior differentiation gives dA" = C" - D, +1.. = hD" - D'+1 .• , (16)
dA~.
=
C~. -
D"'+l = h'D" - D, .• t 1
,
dB" = C"'+l - C~+l .• = hD"'+l - h'D,+l .• ,
O;;:;r+s;;:;n-l.
From these follow the integral formulas
JhD" -
D, +l,. = 0,
J
(17)
h'D" - D"'+l = 0,
J
hD, .O+l - h'D,+1 .• = 0 ,
o ;;:; r + s
;;:; n - 1,
the integrations being over M, supposed to be compact. These integral formulas take a particularly simple form when the hypersurfaces are strictly convex. Then the Gauss-Kronecker curvatures are strictly
247
951
UNIQUENESS THEOREMS FOR HYPERSURFACES
>0, and the nonnal mapping~: M --+ So, where So is the unit hypersphere in E, is a differentiable homeomorphism with functional determinant everywhere different from zero. We can therefore identify M with So and define the hypersurface by x: So --+ E. Geometrically x(~), ~ £ So , is the coordinate vector of the point of the hypersurface at which ~ is the nonnal vector. Similarly, the second hypersurface will be defined by the mapping x': So --+ E. The functions and differential forms previously defined in M are now in So , and the integrals in (17) are over So . We can suppose thehypersurfaces so oriented that II is everywhere positive definite. To apply the formulas (17) we wish to find more explicit expressions for D ... With two parameters y, y' we have "
L..J O:ir+.;Sn =
n! r "D r'.s!(n - r - s)'. y y ..
(-It l:1i
L
i,.···, i.;Sn
fi • • • •
i.(YWi ,
+ y'w:. + (Ji.) 1\ .. . 1\ (YWi. + y'w:. + (Ji.) . . . 1\ (yW. + Y'W~ + (In)
+ y'W: + (JI) 1\ = (-ltn! det (yXik + y'X:k + Oik) dV,
=
(-ltn!(ywi
where dV
=
(JI 1\ ... 1\ (In
is the volume element of So . Let " n! r "P L..J " ),yY .. O,.r+,,..r . s.(n - r - s.
(18)
so that p .. is a polynomial in Xik , X: k , homogeneous of degrees rand s respectively. In particular, PIO = PI (>..), the latter being defined in (10). The integral fonnulas (17) can then be written
J J
(hP .. - P r + I . ,) dV = 0,
(19)
(h'P .. - P r .d l ) dV
J
(hPr.o+ l
-
h'P r + I . ,) dV
= 0, = 0,
O~r+s~n-l.
°
The third equation in (19) is, for ~ r + s ~ n - 2, a consequence of the first two equations. An important consequence of the third equation of (19) consists in the fonnulas
J
(hP Ol - h'P 1 • l _,) dV = 0 ,
J
(hPl-I.l -
h'P lO ) dV
= 0,
1
~
l ~ n.
248
952
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
From these we derive (20)
2
J
h(P ol - P I -
I •I )
dV
=
J
!h'(PI.I-I -
PIO) - h(PI- I ., - POI) I dV.
Let F(UI , ... , un) be a function in n positive variables. We will say that F is of type l ~ 2 if the following conditions are satisfied: (1) F(P IO , ... , P nO ) = F(P OI , ... , Pon) implies P I - I • I - POI ~ 0; (2) F(P IO , ... , PRO) = F(P OI ', ... , Pon), P I - I .I - POI = 0 if and only if X~k = X,k . Theorem 1. Let F(u l , • • • , un) be a function of type l ~ 2. If two closed strictly convex hypersurfaces have the property that at points with the same unit normal vector the functions F(P IO , ... , PRO) and F(P OI , ... , Pan) have the same value, then the hypersurfaces differ from each other by a translation. Proof. It suffices to prove that X~k = X,k at points with the same unit normal vector. Choose the origin in E such that h > O. Then the integral at the lefthand side of (20) is ~ O. The same is therefore true of the right-hand side of (20). But the latter is anti-symmetric in the two hypersurfaces, and hence must be zero. It follows that P I - I .I - POI = O. By the second property of the function F, we get X~k = Xik .
2. The uniqueness theorem of Alexandroff-Fenchel-Jessen. Theorem 2 (ALEXANDROFF-FENCHEL-JEssEN). Two closed strictly convex hypersurfaces differ by a translation if the function PI(X), 1 ~ l ~ n, takes the same value at points with the same unit normal vector.
For 2 ~ l ~ n we will prove that the function F = UI is of type l. Then the theorem for 2 ~ l ~ n will follow from Theorem 1. We will need the following inequality of L. GARDING [2]: To the polynomial PI (X) defined in (10) let PI (X ()), ... , X(I)) be its completely polarized form, so that PI(X, ... , X) = PI(X). Then, for positive definite symmetric matrices (X~~»), ... , (X;~»), the followlng inequality is valid: (21)
PI(X O ),
••• ,
X(I))
~
PI(X(I))1/1 . .. PI(X(I))III.
The equality sign holds if and only if the l matrices are pairwise proportional. Suppose now P IO = POI' This condition can be written PI(X) = PI(X'). By definition PI-I,l = PI(X, ... , X, X'). Since (X,k) and (X~k) are positive definite, it follows from (21) that PI(X, . .. , X, X') ~ PI(X)(I-I)/lpl(X,/11
= PI(X'),
which implies the first condition for a function of type l. The equality sign holds only if X~k = pX,k . Since PI(X) = PI(X'), we have p = 1. The proof of Theorem 2 for l = 1 is different, but is actually easier in the sense that an inequality such as (21) will not be needed. The proof has been given on a previous occasion [5]; we present it here in our notation for the sake of completeness.
249
953
UNIQUENESS THEOREMS FOR HYPERSURFACES
By definition we have n(n -
=
I)P20
(L X.,)2
-
L
(L X:,)2
-:-
,
n(n -
(22)
=
I)P 02
2n(n -
,
L
I)P lI
(X"X~k
•• A:
X~k ,
Lk
L x:i , i .k
+ X:,Xu
- 2X'k X:k)'
From these it follows that A
=:
Ix:' - X.,
L
' .k xt -
Xki
X: k - X'kl = n(n - I)(P 20 X~k - Xkk
+ P 02
- 2P u ).
Our integral formulaa (19) give
Jh(POl -
(23)
P10) dV
=
J(Pu -
h'(POl - P10) dV
=
J
J
From the hypothesis P 10
=
P 20) dV,
(P02 - Pll) dV.
POl we therefore get
J
A dV
=
O.
On the other hand, under the same hypothesis we have A
=
2
L IX:' .
X~,
Xii - Xk,
= 2
L
X'kl
X: k Mk - Xkk
(X:, - Xii)(X~k - Xu) - 2
i
L
L (X:k
- X'k)2
i
(X:, - X,,)(X~k - Xu) -
i ,k
L
(X:, - X,,)2 - 2
L
(":k - X'k?
i
Therefore
which is possible only when
X: k = "'k .
Remark 1. The case l = n of Theorem 2 is called the uniqueness of MINKOWSKI'S problem. The theorem for l = 1, n = 2 goes back to CHRISTOFFEL and HURWITZ. We refer to BONNEsEN & FENCHEL'S book for historical facts concerning the problem and for its relation with the fundamental Brunn-Minkowski inequalities in convex bodies.
2S0
954
SHIING-SHEN-CHERN
Remark 2. The uniqueness of the Minkowski problem can be proved without using GARDING'S inequality as follows: When we replace the matrix Il = (YA,k + y' + 0,.) by 'T Il T, 'where T is an arbitrary non-singular matrix; Pro will be multiplied by (det T) 2. Since (A,.) and (A:.) are both positive definite, we can choose T to make (A:.) = I' == unit matrix and (A,k) = diagonal matrix, while (O,k) will then be transformed to a general positive de~nite symmetric matrix. If Al , ... , An denote the diagonal elements of (A,.), we have
A:.
1 P n- I . I = n _ 1
L
Al •.. An-I,
where the sum denotes the elementary symmetric function of order n - 1 in Al , . . . , An . On the other hand, our condition P nO = Po. gives Al , ... , An = 1. By NEWTON'S inequality we get p~~\n.~1l ~ 1 or P n- l .l - P on ~ O. Moreover, P n- I • • - P On = 0 implies p~~\n.~I) = 1, which is possible only when Al = ... = An = 1. This proves that the function F = Un is of type n, and the uniqueness follows from Theorem 1. Remark J. GARDING'S proof of the inequality (21) makes use of general results on hyperbolic polynomials. It may be of interest to observe that for our purpose it would be sufficient to have the inequality for the case that PI(A) is the ltb elementary symmetric function in n (~ l) positive numbers. It would be interesting to have an elementary proof of this particular case of the inequality. Remark 4. As is well-known, we can determine our hypersurface by the support function h(~), ~ I: So . Then PI can be expressed in terms of h(~) and its first and second partial derivatives. If h(~) is considered to be an unknown function, this relation is, for l ~ 2, a non-linear partial differential equation of the second order in h(~) . Our uniqueness theorem can be interpreted as asserting that two solutions of this equation on the unit hypersphere So differ from each other by a linear homogeneous combination of the coordinates of the space. In this respect the fact that the cases l = 1 (linear case) and l ~ 2 have to be treated differently is of significance. Remark 5. With integral formulas as the main tool in the proofs the theorems can be immediately extended to hypersurfaces with boundaries. The extension amounts merely t.o a writing of the formula (19) with a term pertaining to the boundary, and to an interpretation of this term. It is necessary that the boundaries differ by a translation and that corresponding points have the same normal vectors. This condition, together with the same conditions as in the case of hypersurfaces without boundary, is then sufficient.
3. Characterization of the hypersphere. When the second hypersurface is a hypersphere of radius r, Theorem 1 gives Theorem J. L et F(ul , . . . , un) be a function in n positive variables which has the following properties (l ~ 2) : (1) F(P I , • •• , P n) = F(r, .. . , rn) = canst.
251
955
UNIQUENESS THEOREMS FOR HYPERSURFACES
implies that PH - r l - 1 ~ 0; (2) F(P, , ... ,Pn ) = F(r, ... , rn), together with P , - 1 = r l - " implies Aik = rOik . 'Then a closed strictly convex hypersurface with F(P , , ... , P n ) = const. is a hypersphere of radius r. As a consequence of this theorem we have the following characterization of the hypersphere:
l
Theorem 4. A closed strictly convex hypersurface with n, Ci + {3 > 0, Ci ~ 0, {3 ~ 0, is a hypersphere.
P~_I P~
= const, 2
~
~
Proof. In the inequality (21) we put
Then we get (24) where the equality sign holds if and only if Aik = SOik . In proving Theorem 4 we can suppose (3 > o. Let 7· > 0 be defined by (25) so that
From (24) we get
which gives
Moreover, the equality sign holds here if and only if it holds in (24). Hence l P I - 1 = r - 1 implies Aik = SOik . But then (25) gives s = r. Our theorem therefore follows from Theorem 3. REFERENCES [I) BO:
(2) GARDING, L., An inequality for hyperbolic polynomials, this Jour . Math. and Mech. 8 (1959), pp. 957-965. (3) ALEXANDROFF, A. D., Zur Theorie der gemischten Volumina von konvexen Korpern (Russian), Recueil Math., Serie nouvelle, 2 (1937), pp. 947-972, 1205-1 238, 3 (1938), pp. 27-46, 227-25l. [4J FENCHEL, W. & JESSEN, B., Mengenfunktionen und konvexe Korper, Danske Videns. Selskab., Math.-fysiske Medd., 16 (1938), pp. 1-3l. (5) CHERN, S., Topics in Differential Geometry, Princeton, 1951, pp. 29-30. Cf. also HSIUNG, C. C., On Differential Geometry of Hypersurfaces in the Large, Trans . Amer. Math. Soc., 81 (1956), pp. 243-252. University of Chicago Chicago, Illinois
252
A Uniqueness Theorem on Closed Convex
Hypersurfaces in Eucltdean Space S. S. CHERN,
J.
HANO & C. C. HSIUNG'
The object of this note is to prove the following theorem: Let ~, ~' be two closed, strictly convex, C -differentiable hypersurfaces in a Euclidean space of dimension n 1 (~ 3). Let f: ~ -) ~' be a diffeomorphism such that ~ and l:' have parallel outward normals at pel: and p' = f(p) respectively. Denote by P,(p) (respectively P,(P')) the l'h elementary symmetric function of the principal radii of curvature of ~ (resp. ~') at p (resp. p'). If, for a fixed l, 2 ~ 1 ~ n, we have 2
+
(1)
for all points p
t ~,
then f is a translation.
The interest in this theorem lies in the fact that the conditions (1) involve only inequalities. The proof of the theorem depends on some integral formulas established in a previous paper of one of us 2 and on an algebraic inequality. Let (~ik)' (~:k)' 1 ~ i, k ~ n, be positive definite symmetric matrices. We define the polynomials p .. (~, ~') by means of the equation (2)
det (O'k
+ y~'k + Y'~:k)
=
L
0:;, .• ",.
"( n! )' P,,(~, r. s. n - r - s .
p .. (~, ~') are thus homogeneous polynomials of degrees r, s in tively. It is easy to derive from the definition that (3)
,
~i~
,
respec-
rP,-,.l(~' ~/) = L ~:k aa~'o. i:;ik
P,o(~, ~') is independent Po,(~, ~/) = P,(~/).
Since
~'k
~')y'y' •.
of
~:k
I\ik
, we shall write P,o(~,
~/)
=
P,(~);
then
Lemma. Let cx = (CX'k), ~ = (~'k) be positive definite symmetric matrices such that, for a fixed l, 2 ~ l ~ n,
(4) 'The first two authors are partially supported by the National Science Foundation, and the third author is supported by the Air Force Office of Scientific Research. 2S. S. CHERN, Integral jlYT'mu/as jlYT' hypersurjaces in Euclidean space and their applications to uniqueness thelYT'ems, this Journal, 8 (1959), pp. 947-955. This paper will be quoted as IFH. 85 Journal of Mathematics and Mechanics. Vol. 9, No.1 (1960).
253
86
S. S. CHERN, J. HANO & C. C. HSIUNG
Then (5)
Proof. Let D be the convex domain of all positive definite symmetric matrices of order n. Let 0 = (001) I: D be the unit matrix. We have det (Oi k + 'Aiky) =
L O:;i;r:ijn
(n)Pr('A)Y', r
so that
But the left-hand side can also be written
Comparing the coefficients of yl, we get PI('A
+ to)
=
PI('A)
+ lPI_1('A)t + L
i CiPI_i('A)t ,
C;
>
O.
2~':il
Similarly, comparing the coefficients of y'-ly' on both sides of the equation det (Oik
+ yaik + y'
Oik)
=
L
"(n
O~r , . " nr , s,
n!
)' P .. (a, o)y'y"
- r - s .
we get (6)
It follows that (7)
and therefore that Q,(a, 'A
+ t 0)
= Q/(a, 'A)
+ {lPI-1('A)
+ L CiPI_i('A)t" Co > O. PI-1(a), then QI(a, >.. + to) > QI(a, >..). - 2P H (a) It
2Si.:iil
Hence if t > 0 and PI-l ('A) ~ The tangent hyperplane at a of the hypersurface {'A I PI('A) equation
Since the set {X
I P,I('A)
~ PI (a)
I
= PI(a)
I has the
is strictly convex, we have P I - 1. 1 (a, X)
254
87
CLOSED CONVEX HYPERSURFACES
p,ea) > 0 if P,CA) > p,ea). (This also follows directly from GARDlNG'S inequality.) We now prove that P,-I(a) ~ P,-I(A), Q,(a, A) ~ 0 imply P,_I.I(a, A) ~ p,ea). Suppose the contrary be true. Then there exists Ao t D such that P,-I(a) ~ PI-\(Ao), Q,(a, Ao) ~ 0, P,_I.I(a, Ao) < p,ea). The ray Ao + t~, t > 0, does not belong to the hyperplane P,_I,I(a, A)" ~ P,_I ,I(a, Ao), and hence meets the hyperplane P,_I.I(a, A) = p,ea) in a point Ao + to~, to > O. Then we have PI-\,I(a, Ao + to~) = p,ea). From the result of the last paragraph this implies that P,(Ao + to~) ~ P,(a), It follows that
+ to
Q,(a , Ao
~) ~
2{P ,(a) - P,_I,I(a, Ao
On the other hand, we have, since P,-I(a)
~
+
to
~)
I=
O.
P,-I(Ao),
But this is a contradiction, and our statement is proved. Suppose therefore that PI-\(a) ~ P,-I(A), Q,(a, A) > O. Then P,CA) - P , _I,I(a, A)
>
+ P,_I .I(a, A)
-p,ea)
~
0
or p,ea)
~
P , _I,I(a, A)
< P,CA).
This obviously implies the statement of the lemma. To prove the theorem we utilize the integral formulas established in IFH. Suppose the first hypersurface to be defined by the mapping x: So - ~, where So is the unit hypersphere in the Euclidean space and x(~), ~ t So , is the point of ~ whose outward unit normal vector is ~. Similarly, the second hypersurface is defined by a mapping x': SO - ~/, From their second fundamental forms we construct the mixed scalar invariants p .. , 0 ~ T, S ~ n (cf. IFH) , Then we have the following integral formula:
1.
(8)
s.
(P" -
h'P.,._I) dV
= 0,
1
~
s
~
n,
where dV is the volume element of So and h'm is the support function of ~'. Bya proper choice of the origin we can always suppose h'm> o. From (8) we derive the formula (9)
1.
s.
{(P IO
+ POI
- 2P , _I ,I)
+ (POI
- PIO)
+ 2h' (PI-I ,O -
PO ,I-I) I dV = O.
The hypotheses of the theorem give PI-\ ,O ~ PO , I-I , POI ~ P,O . From these and the lemma it follows that POI + PIO - 2P , - 1 ,l ~ O. Hence the integrand in (9) is ~ 0, and must vanish identically since it is continuous. In particular, we have POI = Pia for all p I: ~, Our theorem then follows from the theorem of ALEXANDROFF-FENCHEL-J ESSEN.
255
88
S. S. CHERN, J. HANO & C. C. HSIUNG
Corollary. Let ~ be a closed strictly convex hypersurface in Euclidean space. If there is a constant c such that (10) then
P £~, ~
is a hypersphere.
Remark. The theorem can obviously be extended to a pair of convex hypersurfaces with boundaries. University of Chicago Chicago, Illinois and
Lehigh University Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.
256 ANNAI.S OF MATHBMATICS
Vol. 71, No. 3, May, 1960
Printed in Japan
THE INTEGRATED FORM OF THE FIRST MAIN THEOREM FOR COMPLEX ANALYTIC MAPPINGS IN SEVERAL COMPLEX V ARIABLES* By SHIING'SHEN CHERN
(Received October 12, 1959)
Introduction
The object of this paper is to make a beginning of the study of complex analytic mappings of the complex euclidean space of m dimensions into the complex projective space of the same dimension in the direction· of a generalization of the classical theory of Picard-Borel for the one-dimensional case. The main geometrical conclusion of the Picard-Borel theory can be interpreted as a statement on the "size" of the image set. It is well-known that similar statements are not true in the case of higher dimensions. In fact, there are examples due to Bieberbach and Fatou in which the image set omits open subsets of the complex projective space [1]. A proper approach to the theory should therefore begin with introducing the suitable concepts and draw conclusions on them. In a problem of this nature it is the general dimension of the original set which creates the difference from the classical theory. We take it to be the complex euclidean space. When the situation in this particular case becomes clear, various generalizations are possible. Let su "', Sm be the coordinates in the complex euclidean space Em of m dimensions. Let Dr be the solid sphere defined by -
SIS,
(1)
-
+ ... + SmSm ~ r
2
,
and };r be its boundary. We will exhaust Em by Dr as r- and consider various geometrical quantities which are functions of r . Another possibility for the exhaustion of Em would be by the polycylinders Is k I ~ r, 1 ~ k ~ m. This seems to be less advantageous, because most of the geometrical quantities will be given as integrals over the boundaries of the domains in question and the boundary of a polycylinder is not a differentiable manifold. Meanwhile, it may be remarked that if we consider Em to be compactified by adding a hyperplane at infinity, then the exterior of Dr is a tube about the hyperplane . This gives a geometrical justification of our choice of the exhaustion of Em by Dr. The space E m has of course the hermitian metric (X)
(2 )
*
Work done under Air Force Contract No. AF49(638)-525. 536
257 537
FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
and the associated two-form (3)
To the complex projective space Pm of dimension m we give the standard hermitian metric with constant holomorphic curvature and let f}, be its associated two-form. Let f: Em """'Pm be a complex analytic mapping. We introduce the quantities vk(r) =
(4)
r f*f},m-k 1\ f},~,
0
JDr
~
k
~m ,
so that vm(r) is the volume of Dr and vo(r) is the volume of the image of Dr in Pm. For a fixed ro > 0 we put (5) T(r) is a generalization of the order function of Nevanlinna for m = 1, as defined geometrically by Ahlfors and Shimizu. The main result of our paper is an integrated form of the so-called first main theorem, which we will give below. We state here the following geometrical consequence: THEOREM. Let f: Em - + Pm be a complex analytic mapping, which satisfies the following two asymptotic conditions as r - + 00 : (1) T(r)--+oo;
(2)
rr (v;(t)dt) /t'm =
Jro
o(T(r».
Then the complement of the set f(Em) in Pm is of measure zero. We remark that, for non-trivial mappings, condition (1) is automatically satisfied when m = 1. Condition (2) shows the necessity of considering v.(r) for values of k other than 0 and m. 1. The hypersphere in the real and complex euclidean space
Let En(R) be the oriented real euclidean space of dimension n with the coordinates x" ... , x n • We will study the geometry on the hypersphere ~r defined by the equation (6)
x~
+ ... + x~ = r'
.
Differentiating this equation we find easily that on ential form
~r
the exterior differ-
258 538
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
is independent of i. We call it (8)r and will show that it is the volume element of ~r' when ~r is oriented so that it is the oriented boundary of its interior (i.e., the set defined by x~ + ... + x; ~ r 2), the latter being coherently oriented with En(R). To prove this, remark that this orientation is the same as the one defined by the property that at every point x = (xu "', x n ) of ~r the outward normal ~ = (x,/r, "', x,./r), followed by the oriented tangent hyperplane of ~r at x, defines the orientation of En(R). If e,(x) = (ull(x), "', u,,,(x», "', e"-l(x) = (U,,_I.l(X), "', U"_I."{X»
are an ordered set of n - 1 fields of mutually perpendicular unit tangent vectors to ~r at x (defined locally), coherent with the orientation of the tangent hyperplane, then the volume element of ~r is dVr = (dx . e,) 1\ ... 1\ (dx . en-I) ,
where dx . e", = El::;;t~" dx,u",j, 1 ~ a ~ n - 1. Since the matrix formed by the components of ~, eu " ' , en - 1 is a proper orthogonal matrix, we find
which, by (6) and (7), is equal to (8)~ • Let Ctl" ""t" be the Kronecker index, which is equal to +1 or -1, according as i" .... in form an even or odd permutation of 1, .... n, and is otherwise equal to zero. Then, if i, iu "', in are mutually distinct, our result can be written (8 )
This relation is equivalent to the following more symmetrical one: (9 )
From (6) we have If follows that (10)
where (8), is the volume element of the unit hypersphere. This gives an expression for the volume element of En(R) in terms of the polar coordinate system, as is well-known. Consider now a complex euclidean space Em(C) of complex dimension
259 FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
539
m, with the coordinates tl> ... , t",. Let the Greek indices run from 1 to m, and put (11)
By convention, E",(C) will be oriented by the ordered set of coordinates XI> ••• , X 2m • The hypersphere ~r is defined by the equation (12)
By differentiation we get (13)
From this it follows that on
~r
the exterior differential form
(-=!)'" dt1/\ ••• /\dt"'-1/\dtIH1/\ ••• /\dt",/\df1/\ '" /\dfm
t", is independent of a, It is therefore a multiple A®r of the volume element ®r' The actual value of A can be found by substituting for tal the expressions in (11) and using (8), An elementary calculation gives 2m_ 1'''' A = (_1) 1.2 m cm+ 1)+1 _ -_t_
(14)
.
r
We can therefore write
E
1 ::;; "'2'" " ' '''m :>m
(15)
c"''''2''''''mdf1 /\ .,' /\ dE". /\ dt"'2 /\ •• , /\ dt"'m
= (_1)!mc m
i"'(m _ 1)! t"'®r ,
+l)2 m - 1
r
or, if a, a .. "', am are mutually distinct, 1$"''''2'' ''''m
(16)
dL /\ " , /\ if; m /\ dt "'2
/\ , . , /\
dt.'m
= (_1)imcm+1l2m-1im t"'®r ' r
Equally valid are naturally also the formulas obtained from (15), (16) by conjugation, 2. An integral formula
In En(R) let (17)
be a differential operator (or vector field) of class C1. A main tool in our
260
540
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
study is the following integral formula (18) where (19)
and where the integral on the right is extended over the unit hypersphere klJ the argument in the integral being rx, for x € k p We remark first that a vector field X on a manifold defines two operators on exterior differential forms: the Lie derivative 8(X) and the interior product i(X). 8(X) preserves the degree of an exterior differential form and is a derivation, while i(X) diminishes the degree by 1 and is an anti-derivation. Between them and the exterior differentiation operator d, there is the following formula due to H. Cartan [2]: (20)
di(X)
+ i(X)d =
8(X) .
To prove the formula (18) we need the following lemma: LEMMA. Let M be a compact oriented manifold of class CI and dimension lJ, and let X be a vector field of class CIon it. Let €> be an exterio-:- differential form of degree lJ on M. Then, for a Cl-function u onM,
(21)
L(XU)€>
=
-LUdi(X)€>
=
-LU8(X)€>.
The equality of the last two integrals follows immediately from (20). To prove the equality of the first two integrals, it suffices to establish the local formula (22)
du /\ i(X)€>
=
(Xu)€> .
For this purpose let tlJ •••. t, be a local coordinate system of M. In terms of the t's let €>
Xu
= adtl /\
... /\ dt, ,
=" b" au WI:;":>' at"
.
Then we have i(X)€> = aLl:;,:;' (-l)!-lb dtl /\ ... /\ dt t - 1/\ dtl+1 /\ •. , /\ dt, j
and
261
541
FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
du 1\ i(X)®
= E l:;;k:;;>
au dt 1\ i(X)® atk k
= (Xu)®
,
which was to be proved. We now proceed to prove (18). Considering X as a vector field of En(R), we decompose it as a sum
a + Xl ,
X = f1ar
(23)
where Xl is everywhere tangent to
~r'
If
(24)
the condition for it to be tangent to
~r
is
(25) (For the remainder of this section we suppose every small Latin index to run from 1 to n.) Since (26)
equation (23) gives (27)
Using (25), we get
r: Ek Xk~k , 1
f1 = (28)
r;k = ~k -1!...Xk , r
which define the decomposition (23). It will be necessary to compute 8(XI)®r' For this purpose notice that 8(XI ) is a derivation and that 8(X I )X k = XIX k = r;k , 8(XI)dxk = dr;k .
(29)
From (9) we have (n - l)!r®r
= E 1I . . ... 1n Ct\ " "nxtldx,Z 1\
... 1\ dX'n .
It follows that (n - 1)!r8(XI)®r =
E'l ..... + (n - 1)E
!" Ct1" " n
il
r;lldx tz /\ ••• 1\ dx ,,, . .. ..
tn
Ctl ... !,..x'ldr;t z 1\ dX!a 1\ .•• 1\ dX!n .
262 542
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
The first sum is zero, by (8) and (25). Substituting for 7), the expressions in (28), we get (n - 1)!rB(Xl)®r
= (n -
1)E e'l"" X (dE'2 'l·····' n " ll
= (n - 1)E
'V " ""
~dX(2) r
e'l"" n x'J( f)f)E'2 dX'1
+
X'l
= (n - 1)!E (-X'Xtc f)Ek '''k f)x, = (n - 1)!
{-~E r
I.k
1\ dx,! 1\ ..• 1\ dx,
f)E'2 dx,) 1\ dx, 1\ ••• 1\ dx, f) 2 3 n X'2 - (n - 1)(n - 1)!P®T
+ x~ f)EIc )~®r -
XIX" 8Etc f)x,
f)x"
+ rE
"
r
(n - 1)(n - 1)!P®r
f)E" - (n - 1)P}®r . " f)x"
It follows that (30)
Meanwhile, let us notice the following easily verified formula: (31)
Using (21), (30), (31), we can transform the integral at the left hand side of (18) as follows:
r (XU)®T = JIT r (pf)U + X1U)®T = r pf)u ®T f)r JIT f)r
JIT
= =
r
~(pU)®T
JxTf)r
-
r
f
JIT
uB(X1)®T
r
U f)p ®T uB(X1)®T JIT f)r JIT
f ~(pU)®T + r u{(n ~ 1)~ JIT f)r JIT r
-
E tc
f)Ek }®T . f)x"
From this the formula (18) follows immediately. We will transform (18) into a formula involving a real operator in the complex euclidean space Em(C). We follow the notation in § 1, keeping the convention that all Greek indices run from 1 to m. Then the operator X can be written (32)
Put
Xu
=
'L.J " ( a",f)u '" f)t",
_ f)U) + a",--=f)t~
.
263 FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
543
where bot., bmu are real-valued functions. In terms of the real coordinates x ..., X m + .. , we have
A straightforward calculation gives from (18) the formula
_1_1
r,m-l JXr
(XU)®r
(33)
where (34)
f1 =
1 --I: (t",a .. + t",a .. ) . 2r ..
Formula (33) will playa fundamental role in our subsequent discussions. 3. The first main theorem
We describe the points of the complex projective space Pm of dimension = (zo, .", zm); two nonzero vectors define the same point of Pm, if and only if they differ by a factor. For convenience we will not distinguish a point from its coordinate vector, with, of course, the understanding that the geometrical properties in question will be invariant when the coordinate vectors are multiplied by non-zero factors. To the vectors Z and W = (wo, •••• w m ) let
m by their homogeneous coordinate vectors Z
(35) Let I ZI = + (Z, Z)~ ~ O. With this hermitian scalar product (35) a distance d(Z, W) between the points Z and W can be defined by cos d(Z W) = I(Z, W)I .
(36)
,
IZI·IWI
Two points Z and Ware called orthogonal, if (Z, W) = O. The space Pm is acted on by the unitary group U(m + 1) in m + 1 variables, and it has the invariant Kahler metric (37)
ds'
= _1_{1 ZI2(dZ, dZ) IZI4
- (Z, dZ)(dZ, Z)} .
It can be verified that the associated two-form of (37) is id'd" log IZI. We put
264 544
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
(38)
n = ..!:..d'd" log I ZI . 'Ir
Let A be a fixed point of Pm, with IA I = 1. Its polar hyperplane 'irA consists of all the points orthogonal to A and is a complex projective space of dimension m - 1. For a point Z of Pm - A we can write (39)
Z=zA+ Y,
with (A, Y) = O. The point Y is the point where the line AZ meets 'irA and is uniquely determined by Z. Moreover, the quotient I YI!I ZI ~'1 depends only on the point Z, and not on the choice of its coordinate vector. In fact, it is equal to sin d(Z, W), as can be immediately verified. The association of Y to Z defines a complex analytic mapping ..y: Pm - A ---+ 'irA. On the other hand, let p: 'irA ---+ Pm be the restriction mapping. Let
ds1
= sin
2
d(Z,
A)ds~
+ c:p(jJ
,
where
IZ12c:p = I Yldz
(41)
- _z_(d Y, Y) .
IYI
The form c:p is of type (1, 0). It is not completely determined by the point Z: if Z is changed to 'A.Z('A. a scalar), c:p changes to ('A./I'A.I)c:p. The relation (40) leads to a corresponding relation on the associated two-forms, which is
n = sin d(Z, A)
(42)
2
+ -'/,-c:p /\ 2'1r
We put u = log sin d(Z, A) ~ 0
(43)
and (44)
A =
_1_ . (d' 2'1r'/,
- d")u /\
(r:
O~k~"'-l
1
-
k
)
•
Then A is a real-valued exterior differential form of degree 2m - 1 in Pm -A.
265 FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
545
The first main theorem for complex analytic mappings f: Em -> Pm as proved by H. Levine [3] can be stated as follows: Let A be a point of Pm and D a compact domain in Em such that f-l(A) n D consists only of a finite number of points and that f-l(A) does not meet the boundary aD of D. Let n(D, A) be the number of times that A is covered by f(D), counted algebraically, and let v(D) be the volume of f(D). Then n(D, A) - v(D) =
(45)
Jr
A.
ICoD)
The theorem shows the importance of the form A and therefore the summands k 1\ n m - 1 - k • It is desirable to express this summand in terms of powers of n by applying (42), be~ause n is independent of the point A, while depends on A. We have (46)
k 1\
nm-l-~ =
.
1
sm 2k d(Z, A)
(nm - 1-
k ~ cp 1\ (j> I\n m - 2), 2rr
O~k~m-l.
The mapping f induces a dual mapping f* on differential forms. We put (47)
where, by (38), (48)
_ 02 log
a",(l-
IZI
•
at;",at; fl
The a",,. are the elements of an hermitian positive semi-definite matrix. An important consequence of the expressions (48) is that the partial derivatives aa"'fl/at;y are symmetric in a, 'Y. Similarly, denoting by fA the restriction of f to Em - f-1(A), we put (49)
Then (b ..fl ) is an hermitian positive semi-definite matrix, also with the property that ab .. fl/at;y are symmetric in a, 'Y. The differential forms (f1
266
546
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
(f~Y
im-1 ( -1) t(m-l)(m-2) 1\ (f*f!)m-l-" = -l-----f.... _ _ _ __
«m - 1)!)2
(50) X
E"V " O'm e"I ...a,mefJl ... (lmC~~~ldsa,2 1\ .•• 1\ dSa,m 1\ dffJ2 1\ ••• 1\ dffJm fJ1··· ··fJ m O~k~m-l,
where
The fact that the forms in (50) are real is equivalent to the condition that
CW are hermitian: (k) C alfJ
(52)
-
-
C-(k)
fJa,·
Observe also that C~J are functions in Em. For later abbreviations we introduce the expressions (53)
r = '" (f*
1\ (f*f!)m-,-"
,
(54) so that r can be expressed in terms of Ca,fJ by a formula analogous to (50). From these expressions for Ca,fJ and the symmetry properties mentioned above of the partial derivatives of aa,fJ and b·fJ we derive immediately the important relation (55)
E
8 -Ca,fJ=O. '" 8sa,
Under the dual mapping f~ the formula (42) gives the relation (56) where Ca, are functions in SP and where we write d for d(Z, A) for simplicity. Solving (56) for ba,fJ and substituting the resulting expressions into (51), we get (57)
where (58)
For further developments we need the following algebraic lemma:
267 FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
547
LEMMA. Let (g",f.\), (h"'fl) be hermitian positive semi-definite matrices,
and let
0~k~m-1.
Then the matrix (P~~) is hermitian positive semi-definite. Also, for any complex numbers Wy , the matrix with the elements
(60)
Q"'fl
= E ........"'m c"''''2''''''mcflfl.... flmW",/Wfl.g"'afla ..• g"'mflm fl . ... ·.fl m
is hermitian positive semi-definite.
As a corollary to this lemma, it follows that the matrices (C~~),' ~ m - 1, (C"'fl)' and (D"'fl) are all positive semi-definite. To prove the first statement of the lemma, we subject g"'fl' h",(3 to the cogredient transformations
o~ k
with a non-singular matrix to the equations
Then
(U"'fl)'
( k) P "'fl -
'"
LJ P.eT
P~~)
are transformed according
U"'P U-fleT P'Ck) peT
•
where
and the matrix (U"'fl) is also non-singular. Since (g",(3)' (h"'fl) are both positive semi-definite, we can find a non-singular matrix (U"' fI) so that (g~(3)' (h~(3) are diagonal, with the diagonal elements ~ O. Then (p;:,n is also diagonal with non-negative diagonal elements. This implies that (P ~~) is positive semi-definite. The second statement follows by taking h",(3 = w",w(3. Since the trace of an hermitian positive semi-definite matrix is ~ 0, it follows from (57) and the Lemma that ' " C (k )
LJ",
< __I_C(o) sin 2k d '
.. '" =
and hence that (61)
E", c"'''' ~
(1
+ si~2 d + ... +
1 )C (O) sin 2",-2 d '
268
548
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
where ceo) -- L...J(f ~ ceO) ~~.
(62)
The function ceo) is defined in Em. It has the following notable geometrical interpretation, as given by the formula (63) Since we have (64)
4. The integrated form of the first main theorem
In the first main theorem (45) we now take D to be the domain Dr defined by (1), so that aD is ~r' We will then write (65)
n(D, A)
= n(r, A),
v(D)
= v(r) =
vo(r) .
We now apply the integral formula (33) to the right-hand side of (45). The integrand can be transformed as follows: f*A =
_1_. (d' 2n~
- d")u /\
r
= _1_. 2n~
E
(u{ dr" - u~ dt,,) /\ "" "
r
(-1) k em - 1 JCm-2) 'm -2
2n«m _
1)!;2
E"l ... ·."m C"l···"mC/ll .. ·/lm C"I/llU{"ldr"l /ll' .. · ·/lm
/\ ... /\ dr" m /\ dt/l.t /\ ... /\ dt/l m ( -1) ke m-IJCm-2) i m - z ~
2n(m _ I)! /\ ••• /\ dr m
2m-z
=
/\
+ complex conjugate
C
d
LJ"./ll ... · ./lm C/lj .. ·/lm
"/ljU{"
dt /12
+ complex conjugate
/\ ••• /\
dt /1 m
rl
-
--E /I (C"/lr/lU~ + C/I"r/lUi )E>r • nr ". " "
During the reduction, use is made of the formulas (50), (53), (54), and the complex conjugate of (15). The integrand is of the form (32), if we set (66)
Then, by (34), we have
269 FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES 2m - 2
(67)
which is
f1 = rrr 2 ~
549
-
E .../l C"/l~"~/l ,
O. Making use of (55), we get
aa 2"'-> 1 E .. -'" =-E C",.. --f1. a~.. rrr" 2r
(68)
The integral formula (33) therefore leads to the relation _l_{n(r, A) - v(r)} (69)
r''''-'
a 2mf1 = ~ I,-(f1U)®, + )I,U(ar r
-
2",-1 --E C.... ) ®, rrr"
,
where in the integrals on the right-hand side, the argument is rx, with x € ~, and r = const. Notice also that the formula (69) is valid only for those r for which ~T does not meet j-'(A). However, as in the case m = 1, the form of (69) suggests its integration with respect to r. This requires the examination of the improper integrals [(r , A) = (70) J(r, A)
r (-uf1)®" JI,
= J,(-uE I
..
C",,,,)®,
for values of r for which ~T n f-'(A) *- 0. In the first place, the integrands of the integrals in (70) are ~ O. By (57) and the positive semidefiniteness of (Da./l), we have 2"'. d ( 1 -uf1 =< -' -10g sm ) EO'-;: k'-;:",-' . -' k d rrr • ( SIn
)E ", . Q
"
O)CC "'/lS"'~/l '
Similarly, by (61), we have C (-u)" L.."a.
Q;£l',
< = (-log sin
d)("
L.JO ;S: k :;i m.-l
_l_)C CO) . sin2k d
n ~T consists of a finite number of points, as we will suppose, the principal part of the integrand at a singularity is
If f-'(A)
( -log sin d)( EO," k,""'-' sin;k d ) , for the integrals of the functions at the right-hand sides of the inequalities, so that these integrals are convergent. The same is therefore true for the integrals of the functions on the left-hand sides, which proves
270
550
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
that I(r, A), J(r, A) are defined for all values of r. Moreover, the integrals of the functions on the right-hand sides over a small domain of radius e of ~l tend to zero uniformly in r as e - O. From this it follows that I(r, A), J(r, A) are continuous functions in r. In particular, this gives the relation
fr dr[ ~ (-Uf1)®l = Jro Jx) 8r
(71)
for 0 < ro ~ r. For a fixed ro and we put
>0
I(r, A) - I(ro, A) ,
and for r
> ro
we define T(r) by (5)
N(r A) = [r n(t, A) dt . , Jro t 2m - l
(72)
Integrating (69) with respect to r, we then get (73)
N(r, A)
= const + T(r) + S(r, A)
- I(r, A) - 2m
fr
Jro
I(r, A) dr . r
where (74)
S(r, A) = 2m-l[r J(r, A) dr . 11:
Jro
r
Since I(r, A) ;;;; 0, this gives the inequality (75)
N(r, A)
< const + T(r) + S(r, A)
.
Thus, unlike the classical case m = 1, an additional term S(r, A) has to be added to T(r) in order that it majorizes N(r, A) asymptotically. Formula (73) is the integrated form 6f the first main theorem. We will now give a proof of the theorem stated in the Introduction. Under the hypotheses suppose the contrary be true. Let p(A) be the characteristic function of the set f(Em), so that p(A) p(A)
= 1, = 0,
A
€
f(Em),
A ef(Em).
Let dA =,nm be the volume element of Pm. The total volume of Pm being 1, we have, by assumption,
f
f p(A)dA = b < 1. Jp m
Clearly we have
n(t, A)p(A)dA = v(t) .
hm
Integration of the inequality (75) with respect to p(A)dA over Pm gives
271 FIRST MAIN THEOREM IN SEVERAL VARIABLES
T(r)
551
< const + bT(r) + ~PmS(r, A)p(A)dA ~ const + bT(r) + I ~
const
+ bT(r) m
S(r, A)dA
hm
2 - ~r -dr ~ + -n ro l
rPm
dA
~ (-log sin d) ( E Xl
_ 1 _ ) C(Ol®l. O;S .t ::Om-l
sin2,t d
But since both dA and d(Z, A) are invariant under the isometries of P"., the integral
JI on(-log sin d)(Eo:a::;; m-l _l_)dA sin d 2,t
P
is equal to a constant (n/2m-l)h, independent of Z. It follows that T(r)
< const + bT(r) + hiT dr I C (Ol®l. JTo r JXl
The last term in this inequality is, by (64), equal to
2!L Jro IT (vi(r)dr/r2m).
By the second hypothesis of the theorem the latter integral is o(T(r». Hence there is a contradiction and the theorem is proved. UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO REFERENCES
1.
s.
BOCHNER, and W. T. MARTIN, Several Complex Variables, Princeton 1948, p. 45.
2. H. CARTAN, Notions d 'algebre differentielle ; application aux groupes de Lie et aux varietes 0\1 opere un groupe de Lie , Colloque de Topologie, Bruxelles 1950, pp. 15-27. 3. H. LEVINE, A theorem on holomorphic mappings into complex proiective space, Ann. of Math . 71 (1960) , pp. 529-535.
272 Reprinted from Acta Math. 114 (1965).
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES AND THE EQUIDISTRIBUTION OF THE ZEROES OF THEIR HOLOMORPHIC SECTIONS BY
RAOUL BOTT and S. S. CHERN Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A., and University of California, Ber/reley, Calif., U.S.A. (')
1. Introduction At present a great dcal is known about the value distribution of systems of mercmorphic functions on an open Riemann surface. One has the beautiful results of Picard,
E. Borel, Nevanlinna, Ahlfors, H. and J . Weyl and many others to point to. (See [1], [2].) The aim of this paper is to make the initial step towards an n-dimensional analogue of this theory. A natural general setting for the value distribution theory is the following one. We consider a complex n·manifold X and a holomorphic vector bundle E over X whose fiber dimension equals the dimension of X and wish to study the zero-sets of holomorphic sections of E. When X is compact (and without boundary) then it is well-known that if the zeroes of any continuous section are counted properly then the algebraic sum of these zero-points is independent of the section and is given by the integral of the nth Chern (2) class of E over X: Thus we have Number of zeroes of
8=
f
x cn(E),
(1.1)
and this formula is especially meaningful for a holomorphic section because the indexes of all the isolated zeroes of such a section are necessarily positive. The central question of the value distribution theory is to describe the behavior of the zeroes of holomorphic sections when X is not compact. (For continuous sections there (') This work was partially supported by a grant from the National Science Foundation . The second author was a professor of the Miller Institute at the University of California (Berkeley) and received partial support from the Office of Naval R esearch. (') With misgivings on tho part of the second author we have adopted a terminology now commonly used .
273 72
RAOUL BOTT .AND S. S. CHERN
are no restrictions in that case, for instance there is always a section which does not vanish at all!) The main results, all concerned with the case dim X
=
1, then take the following form.
One considers a finite-dimensional "sufficiently ample" subspace V of the space of all holomorphic sections of E and shows that under suitable convexity conditions on E and
X "most" of the sections in V vanish the "same number of times". Depending on how "most" and "same number of times" are defined one gets results of various degrees of delicacy and difficulty. For example, the classical Picard theorem asserts that when X is the Gauss-plane, so that E may be taken as the trivial line bundle C, and dim V=2, then at most 2 sections of V in general position can fail to vanish on X. The Borel generalization of this theorem asserts that when dim V =n, then at most n sections in V, in general position, can fail to vanish. Here, as throughout, the term general position is used in the following sense: A set of n elements VI'
... , Vn
of a vector-space V is called in general position,
if any subset of k elements span a k-dimensional subspace of V, for k = 1, ... , dim V.
In the Nevanlinna theory one again deals with X=C, dim V=2, but now a deficiency index O(s) is defined for every sE V -0, which measures the extent to which s behaves unlike the generic section in V. In particular 0 has the properties O(AS) =O(s), if AEC-O;
o,;; o(s) ';; 1; and finally:
o(s) = 1 if s does not vanish on X . The " first main theorem" may
then be interpreted as asserting that 0 considered as a function on the projective space Pl(V) of lines in V, is equal to 0 almost everywhere. Thus " most" sections in the measure
sense behave the same way. The second main theorem yields the much stronger inequality : (l.2)
valid for any system of sections
Si E V
in general position. The Ahlfors generalization deals
with the case dim V =n and again proves among other things that o(s) =0 nearly everywhere, and that now the inequality
is valid for any system of
S i E V,
which are in general position.
Usually these results are stated in terms of maps of X into the Riemann-sphere, (i.e., meromorphic functions) for the Picard and Nevanlinna theory, while the Borel and Ahlfors generalizations deal with m aps of X into complex projective spaces of higher dimensions. The transition to our formulation is quite trivial. Indeed consider the evaluation map: ex: V-'>-Ez which attaches to each section in V, the value of sat x. By definition, a space of sections V will be "sufficiently ample" if and only if:
274 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
ex)
ez : V--'>-Ez is onto for each xEX.
f3)
V contains a section which vanishes to the first order at some point of X .
73
Now let k(x) be the kernel of ez • This is then a subspace of a fixed dimension m=dimV-dimE" in V, so that the assignment x--'>-k(x) defines a map ev:X--'>-Pm(V) of X into the Grassmannian of m-dimensional subspaces in V. Now for each sE V, let z(s) be the subvariety of Pm(V) consisting of those subspaces which contain s. Then, for s =1=0, z(s) has codimension n in P m( V), and it is clear that the zeroes of s on X correspond precisely to the intersections of ev(X) with z(s) in P m( V). In particular, when dim Ex is 1, P m( V) is just a projective space, and z(s) is a hyperplane, so that we may reformulate our statements in the terms of the number of hyperplanes which the image of X avoids. Conversely, starting with a map e:X--'>-P1'l(V), one may pull back the quotient bundle of P m(V) (see the end of Section 6) to obtain a bundle E over X, together with a finite dimensional subspace, V, of sections of E, for which e v =e. Indeed, let K c X x V, consist of the subset. (x, v) for which v Ee(x) . Then K is a sub-bundle of the trivial bundle X x V, and the corresponding quotient bundle, X x V/K is the desired bundle E . The constant sections of X x V over X, then go over into the desired subspace, V, of sections of E. Thus these two points of view are completely equivalent. The aim of this paper is to discuss the n-dimensional case and we are able to push to an analogue of thc first main theorem . Thus we obtain the weak equidistribution in the measure sense only. On the other hand this generalization is not quite immediate and in fact depends on a formula in the theory of characteristic classes, which seems to us of independent interest. To formulate this result we need to recall two facts: Namely 1) That the complex structure on X induces a natural "twisted boundary operator", dC, on the real differential forms, A(X), of X, and 2) That a given Hermitian structure on E determines definite representatives, ck(E) EA(X), k = 1, ... , n, of the Chern classes of E . With this understood, we consider a given Hermitian, complex n-bundle E, over X and its Chern form cn(E)EA(X). Also let B*(E)={eEEIO< lei < I} be the subset of vectors in e which are of length greater than 0 and length less than 1, and set n : B*(E)--'>-X equal to the natural projection. Then our first and principal result is expressed by the theorem: THEOREM
1. There exists a real valued form eon B*(E) which is of type (n-1, n-1)
and for which n*cn(E)
=
dd,c 4n e ·
Further if E is non-negative then e may be chosen to be non-negative.
(1.3)
275 74
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
Remark that B*(E) has the homotopy type of the unit sphere bundle S(E), of E , and it is of course well known that cn(E), when lifted to S(E), becomes a boundary. Hence Theorem I refines this result for the complex analytic model B*(X) of S(E). The method which leads to Theorem I also yields the following auxiliary result. PROPOSITION
1.4. Let E be 'iL complex analytic bundle and let c(E) and c'(E) be the
Chern forms of E relative to two different Hermitian structures. Then c(E) -c'(E) =dd c , A. for some A..
In other words, if we define Hk(X) by:
then the class in H*(X) = LHk(X) of the Chern form c(E) , of E relative to some Hermitian structure on E, is independent of that Hermitian structure, so that we may define a "refined Chern class" c(E) EH*(X) . (Cf. Section 3 for definition of A k. k (X).) In fact, Theorem I will follow directly from the following Whitney type duality theorem concerning these refined Chern classes: PROPOSITION
1.5. Let O-+E'-+E-+E"-+O be an exact sequence of holomorphic
vector-bundles over X . Then their refined Chern classes satisfy the duality formula : c(E') ' c(E") =c(E) .
The formula (1.2) is very pertinant for the whole Nevanfuma theory; for instance in the one-dimensional case, e is just a real valued function on B*(E), and is seen to be minus the logarithmic " height" function : e(e)= -log l(e)12,
eEB*(E).
Indeed one may roughly express the situation by saying that the first " main inequality" of the NevanliIma theory is just a twice integrated version of (1.3) . The plan of the paper is as follows: In Section 2 we review the theory of characteristic classes as found in [3], [5]. We then go on to refine this theory for complex analytic Hermitian bundles in Sections 3 to 5. Section 6 is devoted to a proof of the generalized GaussBonnet theorem which fits into the context of this paper. In Section 7 we define the order function, while in Section 8 we formulate and start to prove the equidistribution theorem. Sections 9 and 10 then complete this proof. Our final section brings a leisurely account of the classical Nevanlinna theorem. This Section 11 is included primarily to show how much more will have to be done before an n-dimensional analogue of this delicate theorem is established.
276 75
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
2. Curvature and characteristic classes
In this section E will denote a Goo-bundle over the Goo manifold X. We write T
=
T(X)
for the cotangent bundle of X, and A(X) = LA fiX) for the graded ring of Goo complex valued differential forms on X. The differential operator on A(X) is denoted by d. More generally we write A(X; E) for the differential forms on X with values in E . Thus if fiE) denotes the Goo sections of E, then A(X; E) =A(X)®A'('K)f(E). The natural pairing from r(E)®A.(X)r(F) to f(E®F)(l) will often be written simply as multiplication. Our aim here is to give an elementary and essentially selfcontained review of the geometric theory of characteristic classes, as developed by Chern and Well. More precisely, we will describe how the curvature of a cOIillection on the vector bundle E can be used to construct closed differential forms on X whose cohomology classes are independent of the connection chosen and therefore furnish topological invariants of the bundle E. Of the many definitions of a connection we will use the differential operator one. It leads to the simplest local formulae . We will also thereby avoid the possibly less elementary concept of principal bundles. For a more general account of this theory see [3], [4], [5). DEFINITION
2.1. A connection on E is a differential operator D:r(E)-+r(T*®E)
which is a derivation in the sense that for any f EAO(X) :
D(fs) =dj-s +j-Ds, sEr(E).
(2.2)
Rerrw,rks. In general a differential operator from riEl to f(F) is just a C-linear map
which decreases supports. If such an operator is also AO(X) linear, then it is induced by a linear map from E to F, i.e., by a section of Hom (E, F). Thus if Dl and D z are connections then Dl - D z is induced by an element of
r
Hom (E*, T*®E)=Al(X; Hom (E , E)) .
Suppose now that E is equipped with a definite connection D . One may then construct the Chern form of E relative to the connection D in the following manner. Let s={St}, i=l , ... , n be a set of sections(Z) of
EI U where U is open in X, such that
the values {Sj(x)} form a base for each Ex. with xE U. (Such a set S will be called a frame of E over U .) In view of (2.2) a formula of the type: (2.3)
(1) The tensor product is over C unless otherwise indicated. (2) We will be dealing with smooth sections throughout.
277 76
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
must then exist and serves to define a matrix of I-forms on U: O(s; D) =
110 Ifll-the so-
called connection matrix relative to the frame s.
In terms of O(s, D) one now defines a matrix K(s, D) =
IIKIIII
of 2-forms on U by the
formula: K II = dO 11- LaO la 1\ Oal. In matrix notation:
K(s, D)"'=dO(s, D) -O(s, D) lIO(s, D) .
(2.4)
This is the curvature matrix of D relative to the frame s. Because even forms commute with one another it makes sense to take the determinant of the matrix I +iK(s, D)/2n and so to obtain an element det {I +iK(s, D)/2n} EA(U). A priori, this form depends on the frame s. However as we will show in a moment, de~
{I +iK(s, D)/2n} is actually independent of the frame s, and therefore defines a
global form, the Chern form of E relative to D, c(E, D) in A(X) . More precisely c(E, D) is defined as follows: We cover X by {Ua } which admit frames
s~
over Ua , and then set
c(E, D) IUa =det {I +iK(sa, D)/2n}. On the overlap these definitions agree because of the asserted independence of our form on the frame s. Consider then two frames sand s' over U. Then there exist elements AijEAO(U) such that s; = LjAijSj and in matrix notation we write simply s' =As. From (2.2) it follows that Ds'={dA+A(!(s, D)}s. Further, by definition, Ds'=(!(s', D)s'. Hence the connection matrices are related by
dA+A(!(s, D)=(!(s', D)A,
s'=As,
(2 .5)
from which one directly derives the important formula :
AK(s, D) =K(s' , D)A,
s' =As.
(2.6)
This transformation law of the curvature matrix, together '''ith the invariance of the determinant under conjugation now immediately implies the desired independence of our form det {I +iK(s, D)/2n} on s. Thus we now have defined c(E, D) explicitly and our next aim is to show that
c(E, D) is closed and its cohomology class independent of D. For this purpose it is expedient to analyse the above construction a little more carefully, and then to generalize the whole situation. Note first of all that the transforma tion law (2.6) is characteristic of the elements of
A(X; Hom (E, E)). Indeed if
~EAD(X;
Hom (E, E)) and if s is a frame for E over U, then
~ determines a matrix of p-forms ~(s) = 1I~(s)ij ll by the formula:
(2.7) and under the substitution s' =As, these matrices transform by the law
~(s')A =A~(s) _
278 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
77
The converse is equally true so that in particular the curvature matrix K(s, D) represents a definite element K[E, D]EA2(X; Hom (E, E)). Next we observe that the "determinant construction" really becomes more understandable when formulated in this manner. We let Mn denote the vector-space of n X n matrices over C. A k-linear function (!J on
M n will be called invariant if for all y EGL(n, C): (2.8) The vector-space of all k-linear invariant forms shall be denoted by Ik(Mn). Now given (!JE1k(Mn) and UcX, we extend (!J to a k-linear map denoted by (!Jrr-from Mn®A(U)
to A(U) by setting:
With this understood consider k elements ';;EA(X; Hom (E, E)) and let (!JE1k(Mn). It is then clear that there is a well-defined form (!J(';l' ... , ';k) EA(X), which has the local description: Given a frame
8
over U, thea (2.10)
where the ';;(8) are the matrices of';; relative to 8 and hence elements of A(U)®Mn' We will abbreviate (!J(';,';, .. .,.;) i.e., the case all .;; equal, to (!J((';))' Now given a connection D on E, and a (!JE1k(Mn) we have well-determined forms (!J((K[E, D])) and (!J((1 +iK[E, D]/2:n:)) in A(X), and our Chern form is clearly of the latter type. Indeed we
need only take for (!J the n-multilinear form det on Mn obtained by polarizing the polynomial function x --+det x on M n' to describe the Chern form in the present frame work: c(E, D) =det ((1 +iK[E, D]/2:n:)).
(2.11)
It is now also an easy matter to construct elements (!JkE1k(Mn) so that c(E, D) =
L (!Jk((K[E, D])) .
In short, the two properties of c(E, D) which we are after will follow from the more conceptual assertion that for any (!JE1k(Mn) , the form (!J((K[E, D])) is closed and its homology class independent of D. We will now derive both these properties from the invariance identity (2.8) . Note first that differentiation with respect to y leads to the identity k
L(!J(xl'oo ,,[XhY],oo,Xk)=O, - 1
XhyEM n
(2.12)
279 78
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
and conversely-because GL(n, C) is connected-(2.12) implies (2.8) . This identity now generalizes in a straight forward manner to the extension of gJu and takes the following form in matrix notation. An element xPEMn@AP(U) (called of deg p) is represented by a matrix of p-forms. Matrix multiplication therefore gives rise to a pairing x@y--+x /\ y, of elements of deg p and deg q to elements of deg (p+q). In terms of this multiplication one now defines the bracket [XV, yO] by the usual formula for graded Lie-algebras: (2.13)
In this terminology the following invariance law for any gJ E Ik(M n) follows directly from (2.9) and (2.10) and (2.12): (2.14) whenever the x'" and yare homogeneous elements with q =deg y, and f((X) = Lp>", deg Xp. From the derivation property of d it follows further that, with the x'" as above:
d gJu(xl' . . . , Xk) = L ( - 1 )D(Cl) gJu(xl' ... , dx., . . . , Xk)
(2.15)
where now g((X) = Lp<", deg xp. PROPOSITION
2.16. Let D be a connection for E over X, and let gJ be an invariant
form on Mn. Then gJ((K[E, D))) is closed. Proof. This is a local matter. Hence it is sufficient to show that if s is a frame over U, then gJu((K)) , K =K(s, D), is closed on U. From (2 .14) we obtain k
dfPu((K)) = L gJu(K, ... , dK, ... , K). 1- 1
On the other hand the definition, (2.4), of K(s, D) immediately implies the "Bianchiidentity":
dK(s, D) =
-
[K(s, D), (}(s, D)].
(2.17)
Substituting (2.17) and applying (2.14) now yields the desired result. PROPOSITION 2.18. Let D t be a smooth one parameter family of connections on E. Then the function s --+dDts/dt, s ErtE), is AO(X)-linear and hence determines an element
D t EAl(X; Hom (E, E)). Further if gJElk(Mn), then
I: gJ((K[E,Dt])) =df: gJ'((K[E,Dt];Dt))dt (') I!f(t) stands for I(b) -/(a) .
(2 .19)
280 79
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
Proof. We have This proves the first part, and so in particular that gJ'((K[E, D t], Dt)) is a well defined form . For the rest we may work locally relative to a frame s over U. It is then easy to see that the matrix of D t relative to s is simply the t-derivative (denoted by a dot) of the connection from (J =(J(s, D t ). Thus Dt(s) =
O. Hence (2.19)
will follow from the identity
¢((K))J U=dLgJu(K, ... ,K,rj,K, ... ,K); t
K=K(s,Dt).
(2.20)
(t)
Consider now the right hand side (= R.H.S.) of this expression. By (2.15) and (2.17) we obtain: R.H.S= -L LIPu(K; ... ;[K,(J]; ... ;O; . .. ,K) «< f
i
f
(IX)
+ LgJu(K; ... , K;dO;K, ... ,K) t (t)
+L
L gJu(K, ... ,0, ... ,[K,(J],K). «>i
f
«
(0
Using (2.14) this simplifies to : R.H .S. = L gJu(K, .. . , K, dO - [0, (J], K, .. . , K) . t
(0
Finally we recall that K = dO - 0/\ O. HenceK = dO - [0, OJ. Thus the R.H.S. takes the form : k
L gJu(K, ... ,K, ... ,K) j~l
(I)
which manifestly is just the left hand side ¢((K)) . Q.E.D. COROLLARY
2.21. The cohomology class of gJ((K[E, D])) is independent of the connec-
tion on E. Indeed if Dl and Do are two connections on E then for each t, D t =tD1 +(I-t)D o is again a connection on E. Hence (2 .19) implies the corollary.
Remarks. This concludes our elementary and therefore necessarily rather pedestrian account of the theory of characteristic classes for vector-bundles. A slightly more conceptual path to the same results might run along these lines. One first notes the following general properties: (2 .22). A pairing of bundles from E ® F to G induces a pairing from
281 80
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
to A"+O(X; G) by combining the above pairing with exterior multiplication. All pairings of this type will be written as a multiplication, i.e., denoted by a dot. (2 .23). If D is a connection for E, then the dual bundle E* has a unique connection
-also denoted by D-which satisfies the equation d<s, s*)=
(2.24). If D , are connections on E i , i
=
sEr(E), s*Er(E*).
1, 2 then the formula
(2.25). The connection D on E extends uniquely to an antiderivation of the A(X)
module A(X; E), i.e., so as to satisfy the law: D(O·s)=dO·s+(-I)"O · Ds,
OEA"(X) , sEr(E).
Now, with these trivialities out of the way, one may argue as follows . First one shows that there is a unique element K[E , D]EA2(X; Hom (E, E)) such that D 2s=K[E, D]·s
for any sEr(E) .
One next observes (as we did) that qJE1k(Mn) defines a definite homomorphism
of the kth tensor power of Hom(E, E) into the trivial bundle, and so induces a map qJ:A(X, Hom (E, E)
Now, our earlier qJ((K[E, D])) is defined simply as qJ{K[E, D]
Then the proof of Proposition 2.21 follows directly from this compatibility and the
Bianchi-identity: DK =0.
3. Hermitian vector-bundles Let E be a vector-bundle over X. Then a real-valued function N:E--+R is said to define a hermitian structure on E-or more briefly to be a norm for E-if the restriction of N to any fiber is a Hermitian norm on that fiber. Thus for each xEX, the expression:
282 81
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
HN(u+v) -N(u) -N(v)}+iHN(u+iv) -N(u) -N(v)},
u, vEEr
is to define a positive definite Hermitian form on E r . This form will generally be denoted by
L Ap.Q(X)
where A"'O(X) is generated over AO(X) by forms
of the type d/ 1 II .:. II dl" II dl,,+l II ... II dl,,+<> the As a consequence d splits into d' +d" where
I,
being local holomorphic functions on X.
These two halves of d are then related by: d'2 =d"2 =0,
d'd" +d"d' =0.
(3 .1)
If E is a vector-bundle over X, then this decomposition of A(X) induces a correspond-
ing decomposition of A(X; E) into A"' O(X, E) =AJ1.Q(X) ® Ao(X)r(E), and hence any connection D on E, splits canonically into the sum of and
D':r(E)-+Al.O(X; E)
D":r(E)-+Ao .l(X; E).
With these preliminaries out of the way we come to the first consequence of the simultaneous existence of a holomorphic and Hermitian structure on E. PROPOSITION
3.2. Let N be a Hermitian norm on the analytic bundle E. Then N
induces a canonical connection D = D(N) on E which is characterized by the two conditions:
(3 .3) D p'reserves the norm N . (3.4) II s is a holomorphic section 01
EI U then D"s=O on U.
The first condition is expressed by the formula: d<s, s' )
=
s, s' Er(E),
(3.5)
where we defined <s, s' ) as the function <s, 8') (x) = <s(x), 8'(X)r and we have in general set <8® (), s' ®()') equal to () 1\ (J'. <s, s' ) . The proof of Proposition 3.2 is straightforward. If s is a frame for E, over U, we write N(s) for the matrix of functions: N(s)
=
II <Sl' sk>lI·
6- 652932 A cta mathematica 114 , Imprime le 11 (Lout 1905 .
(3.6)
283 82
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
This is the norm of the frame. Now, let s be a holomorphic frame over U, and let () be a prospective connection matrix for E, relative to s. Then (3.5) applied to all the pairs
<Sf' Sk> implies the relation (}N+N{Jt=dN,
(3.7)
N=N(s).
Hence if () is to satisfy this condition, and is also to be of type (1,0) so as to satisfy (3.4), then we must have:
(}=d'N·N-l
on U.
(3.8)
Thus there is at most one connection with the properties (3 .5) and (3 .6). Conversely, let s = {Sf} be a lwlomorphic frame over U, and set N(s) =
lI <sl> s,>11 as
before. Then the formula: (3 .9)
defines a connection over U, which is seen to be independent of the lwlomorphic frame s chosen, and hence induces a global connection D(N) on E which manifestly satisfies the condition of our proposition. The independence of D on s is proved as follows : Let SI =As be another lwlomorphic frame, over U. Then dA =d'A, because A is a holomorphic matrix. Further Nl =N(SI) =ANjP. Hence
d'N 1 ·N 11 =dA ·A-l +Ad'N·N-IA-l which shows that the matrices (}(s, N)
·~d'N ·N-I,
N =N(s) transform like the connection
matrix of a connection . COROLLARY
3.10. L et E be a lwloTlwrphic bundle with Hermitian norm N, and let
() , K denote the connection and cun'ature matrices of D(N) relative to a holomorphic frame over U. Then on U one has:
() is of type (1,0), and d'() =() l'IfJ .
(3 .11)
K=d"(), whence K is of type (1 , 1) and d"·K = O.
(3.12)
d'K = -[K, ()].
(3.13)
Proof. The first line follows directly from () =d'N ·N-\ where N = N(s) is the norm of s. Indeed d'() =d'd'N · N - l-d'N · d'N - l and d'N-l =
-
N - 1.d'N · N-l. The others are even more
straightforwa,rd. Note that because K is of type (1, 1), the chamcteristic classes of the con-
nection D(N) always are of type (p, pl . These formulae become especially simple when E is a line bundle. Then a holomorphic frame is simply a nonvanishing holomorphic section s, so that, relative to s, () =d' log N(s) and K =d"d' log N(s). Thus in particular, if E admits a global nonvanishing holomorphic section s, then
c1 (E) =
~
-
2n
d"d' log N(s).
(3 .14)
284 83
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
The next proposition is a refinement of the earlier homotopy formula (2.19). For simplicity, we will abbreviate K[E, D(N)] to K[E, N]. PROPOSITION
3.15. Con.sider a smooth family of norms Nt> on the holomorphic bundle
E. Then the function (s, s')--+d(s, S'>N,jdt is Hermitian linear over AO(X) and hence determines a section LtEr Hom (E, E), by the formula s,s' EnE). If ({I is any invariant form in Ik(M n ); n=dimE, then
(3.16}
'>
d (s, f f" s>= ff' '&,(s,s; d &
Proof. We have
so that L is well defined. Hence ({I'((K[E, Nt]; L t)) is a global form and it suffices to check the formula (3.17)
locally. We therefore choose a holomorphic frame
8
= {s;} over U, and set N = Ne(s),
K=K(s, D(N t )), 8=8(8, D(N t )) . Then the matrix of L relative to s, is easily computed to
be NN-l, the dot denoting the t-derivative as before. Let us denote this matrix by L also. Finally, we will abbreviate ({I'((K[E, Nt]; L t }} I U to O. Then d'O
=
2. ({I(K, .. . , -
j*;
[K, 8] , .. . ,L , ... ,K) + 2.rp(K, ... ,d'L , ... ,K) . (I)
(j)
j
(3 .18)
(j)
Applying the invariance identity one obtains d'O
=
2.1 ({I(K, ... , d'L+(I) [L,8], ... ,K).
(3 .19)
Finally, one now computes directly from L =NN-l and 8=d'N ·N-l, that 8 =d'L + [L, 8] .
(3.20)
Hence d'O is the form ({I'((K[E, D(Nt)], D(Nt))) of Proposition 2.18 so that (2 .19) implies_ (3.16) . Q.E.D.
285 84
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
This proposition now directly proves Proposition 1.2 of the Introduction. Indeed if
NI and N2 are two Hermitian norms on E, then N t =(I-t)N1 +tN2 defines a smooth family between these two Hermitian norms, so that the formula of the proposition becomes a special case of (3.16). As another direct application we have: COROLLARY
3.21. Suppose E is an n-dimensional complex vector bundle over X,
with Hermitian norm N. Suppose also that E admits n holomorphic sections which span the fiber at each point. Then the refined Chern classes c,(E) are zero for i>O so that: c(E)=1.
Proof. Let
8
(3.22)
be the global frame determined by the sections in question, and define
a Hermitian norm on E, by setting NI(S) =identity. For this norm O(s), K(s) and hence c,(E, N 1 ), i>O clearly vanish. Q.E.D. Remark. The deformation Dt=D(N t ) induced by the variation of Nt is not the linear one encountered earlier. Rather, D t satisfies the differential condition: (3.23) In other words
b t is the D' -derivative of L t , and it is clear that much of the foregoing
depends on just the existence of some LtEr Hom (E, E) for which (3.23) is valid.
In the remainder of this section we will formulate a generalization of (3.16) along these lines. DEFINITION
3.24. A connection D on the holomorphic bundle E over X, is called of
.type (1, 1) if: (3.25) For any holomorphic section s of E I U, D"s =0. (3.26) The curvature matrix K(s, D) of D relative to a frame saver U, are of type (1, 1), i.e., K[E, D]EALl(X; Hom (E, E)).
This is then clearly an extension of the class of connections induced by Hermitian norms on E . Next consider a family of connections D, of type (1, 1) . Such a family will be called bounded by LtEAO(X; Hom (E, Ell if the relation (3.23) holds between btEAl(X; Hom (E, E))
.and Lt. Note that the elements of
r
Hom (E, E) may be thought of as defining degree
286 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
85
zero differential operators on A(X; E) and on A(X; Hom (E, E)), the latter action being induced by the composition of endomorphisms. With this understood, the bounding condition (3 .23) may quite equivalently be expressed by: (3.27) In any case it is now easy to check that our earlier argument leading to (3.16) also proves the following more general homotopy lemma. PROPOSITION 3.28. Let D t be a smooth family of connections of type (1,1) on the holomorphic bundle E. Suppose further that D t is bounded by LtEAO(X; Hom (E, E)). Thenfor any g;Elk(M n ), n-=dim E, we have the relation-:
(3.29) We note in conclusion that if D t is related to LtEr{Hom (E, E)} by (3.27), and if Do is of type (1, 1), then D t will be of type (I, 1) for all t. Indeed, D t is of type (1,1) if and only if 0 =O(s, D t ) satisfies the two conditions: OfjEAl.O, d'O =0 1\ 0, whenever s is a. holomorphis frame . Differentiating these conditions with respect to time one obtains: (3.30) Now if (3.23) holds then-setting Lt{s) equal to ~we have d'L+ [L, 0] =(j . It follows that d'(j = [d'L, 0] +[L, d'O] which by resubstituting (3.23) leads to d'O = [11 , 0]. Thus (3.23) together with Oij EAl.O imply the differentiated identities. Q.E.D.
4. The duality formula Consider an exact sequence of holomorphic vector bundles: (4.1) over the base manifold X. We wish to prove the duality formula: c(E) =c(Er)c{Eul for the refined Chern classes of these bundles. For this purpose consider a norm N on E. Such a norm then induces norms N r on
Er and NIl on Ell in a natural manner: The restriction of N to Er defines N r, and the restriction of N to the orthocomplement of Er-denoted by Et---determines NIl' via the Coo isomorphism of Ell and Et induced by (4.1) . Thus (4.1) gives rise to three Chern forms in A(X):c{E)=c{E,N), and c(EbN f ),
287 86 i
=
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
I, I I; and the duality formula will be established once we prove the following proposi-
tion. PROPOSITION
4.2. There exists a form
~
in A(X) such that (4.3)
The proof of (4.3) is based upon a specific deformation of the canonical connection D = D(N). To describe this deformation we need certain preliminaries concerning the geometric implications of the exact sequence (4.1). First we introduce the orthogonal projections (4.2)
which this situation naturally defines. These are then elements of
r Hom (E, E) and there-
fore-interpreted as degree zero operators, they lead to a decomposition of D = D(N) into four parts:
LEMMA
4.3.
In the decomposition just introduced, PjDP j induces the connection
D(N i) on E;. while Pi DPj, i =l=j, are degree zero operators of type (1,0) and (0, 1) respectively: (4.4)
Proof. We first show that P j DPj, i =l=j is AO(X) linear. Consider then Pi DPAts) . Using the derivation properly of D we get PiDPj(fs)=dj-PjP,s+fPiDP,s. Hence as PiP,=O if i=l=j, it follows that PiDPj is a degree zero operator. We next show that PIID"PI=O. This is clearly also a degree zero operator. Hence it is sufficient to show that given e E Ex> there exists some section s of E near x, such that s(x) =e and P//D"PIs =0 at x. Now because
EI is a holomorphic sub-bundle of E we may choose a holomorphic section S1 near x such that the two conditions, S1(X) =PIe; P I S1 = S1 (i.e., S1 Er(E I)) hold ncar x. We may also <:hoose a Coo section S2 of Et which satisfies the two conditions S2(X) =P//e; p//s 2=S2 near x. Now setting s =S1 +S2' we clearly have s(x) =e. Further P I D"P I(S1 +S2) =0 near x because PIS2=0 and D"S1 =0 there. The companion statement of (4.4) now follows directly from the hct that D preserves the inner product: We have d( PIs, p//s' ) =0 whence (4.5)
so that in particular P//D"PI = O implies PID'P//=O. (1) Here as in what f",Hows we use the natural projection
bundles.
EI -+E// to identify these two
288 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
87
It is now quite straightforward to check that the PfDP f interpreted as differential operators on E f , satisfy the two conditions which characterize D(N,). We note that one precisely needs (4.4) to show that the connection induced by PfDP f on E f is of type (1,0) -that is satisfies (3.4). The deformation which we need for the duality theorem is now defined by: (4.6)
By our lemma 15 is a degree zero operator and hence D t a connection for every tER. We have further : LEMMA
4.7. The family D t defined by (4.6) is "bO'Unded" by the element PrEr Hom (E, E) .
Proof. We have to show that [D;, PrJ =
D" or in other words, that
where [A, B) stands for the commutator AB-BA. Now it is clear that [b,P[) =15. Hence we just have to show that PIlD'Pr,Pr-Pr,PIlD'P[=PllDP[ and that follows directly from (4.4). Q.E.D . We next investigate the curvature form K[E, D t ), and its decompositions according to the Pf ' Using some obvious identifications the formulae take the following form: LEMMA
4.8. Let P;K[E, Dt)P, be denoted by Kjf[E, D t]. Then,
KI.r[E, D t) = K[Eb D I) - etb* II 15,
(4.9)
(4.10) (4.11)
where 15": denotes the adjoint of the form bEA1(X; Hom (E, E)), and hence by (4.5) represents the operator - PrDPll . These formulae clearly show the pertinence of our deformation D t to the problem at hand . When t = - 00, we see that Kl.ll=O and the Kf.;[E, D t) reduces to K[E" D f ). As the Chern form c(E, D t ) is defined by det«1 +ij2nK[E, D t ))) it follows directly that lim c(E, D t ) = C(EbDI)' C(Ell' D Il ).
(4.12)
t~-oo
The proof of Lemma 4.8 is quite straightforward. If one interprets K as the operator D2, the terms can be just read off. Alternately one may choose a. frame s = (u, v) which is
289 88
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
naturally suited to the problem-namely of the following type: 1) The frame s is unitary, and its first k components, u, span E I . (Hence the remaining components-v-span Et .) For such a frame O(s, D t ) breaks into blocks Ofis, Dt)-corresponding to the operators
P,DPf-and then (4.8) follows directly from (2.4). We have now nearly completed our argument. Indeed, in view of (4.7) and the general
r
homotopy lemma, one has the formula:
I:
c(E,Dt)=d"d'
det'((I+:o.:K;:o.:PI ))dt,
K=K[E,D t),:o.:=i/2:n:
valid for all tER. (1) Hence if we could simply put t= -
00,
(4.13)
in (4.13), we would be done.
However the integral will not converge in general. In fact, it follows from (4.8) that (4.14)
where OEA2(X; Hom (E, E)) is independent of t. Therefore: n-l
det'((I+:o.:K[E,D t);:o.:PI))=
L
a«e«t,
a«EA(X)
(4.15)
«- 0
with
(4.16)
Hence the integral will converge only if ao =0, and that is generally Jlot the case. Note however that by (4.7) ao can be re-expressed as
It then follows easily that ao is a linear combination of the Chern forms c«(Eb N I ) multiplied by cn-k(E Ib Nul: (4.17) In any case ao will be a closed form. Hence (4.13) will remain valid even when ao is deleted from under the integral sign. But once this is done one may clearly integrate and pass to the limit t = - 00 , in (4.13) to obtain:
C(E)-C(EI).C(EII)=d"d'{i oc-1.a«}; «- 1
a« as in (4.15).
(4.18)
This then completes the proof of the duality formula, and also gives us the explicit form
2::-1oc-··a« for g. In the proof of Theorem I we need to compute the highest compo-
nent of
~
for the case, dim E I
=
1. Thus we want to expand :o.:n det((K[E, D_",) +etO; P))
(') det' is the function denoted by '1", with 'I' = det, in Section 3; see also (4.19) below.
290 89
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
under that assumption. Again using (4.7) we see that because dim E/=l this expression reduces to x" det((K[Eu, N u ] +etDul) where Du=Ku.u[E, D] - K[EI/o N u ]. Hence if we define det"
((~;
1])) by the identity
det ((~ +A1])) = LA" det" ((~; 1])),
(4.19)
then the coefficients a.. which we are after, are given .by xn det "(K[EI/o N u ]; Dul. We record this fact for later reference: PROPOSITION
4.20. Let O-+E/ -+ E-+Eu-+O be an exact sequence of holorrwrphic
vector bundles, and let c(E), and c(Ej), i=I, II denote the Chern forms induced by a norm Non E. Then if dim E/=l, cn(E) - cl(E/)· cn-I(E u ) = xd"d' {L
a-I
det" ((Q[Eu]; - ~u[E]))}
(4.21)
.. > 0
where Q[Eu] =xK[Eu, N u ], Qu[E] =xKu.u[E; N], and -
~u=Qu[E]
-Q[Eul Hence if
E/ admits a nonvanishing holorrwrphic section s, then by 3.15, cn(E) = xd"d' {log N(s)' cn-I(E u ) +
L a-<' det" ((Q[Eu], -
~u[E]))}.
(4.22)
«>0
Note that aside from the positivity assertion, (4.22) proves Theorem 1. Indeed consider the projection n l : E -+ X. The identity map of E into itself, then induces a holomorphic section s of ni(E) over E, which vanishes only on the zero section XcE. Hence if n:B*(E)-+X is the restriction of n l to the subset B*(E) = {eEEIO < N(e) < I} of E then the section s of n* E =ni(E) IB*(E) does not vanish. We may therefore apply (4.22) to n*(E) and so obtain a formula of the type cn{n*(E)}=ud"d'r Now by the obvious func-
tioriality of the Chern forms relative to holomorphic isomorphisms, cn{n*(E)} =n*cn(E), so that we are done . .In the next section we will discuss the positivity of the
~
given by
(4.22). Let us close this one with a direct consequence of the duality formula which generalizes (4.22) but in a less specific fashion. COR OLLAR Y .
Let E be a holorrwrphic bundle over E, which admits k linearly independent
holomorphic sections. Then
Proof. Let E/ be the bundle spanned by the sections. Then by (3.22) e(E/) = 1. Hence
by the duality formula e(E) =e(E/E/) and the bundle E/E/ has dimension (n-k) . Q.E.D.
291 90
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
5. Remarks on Positivity. The proof of Theorem I completed As we have seen (4.22) already proves the combinatorial aspects of Theorem I and it remains only to discuss the "sign" of the
~
there constructed.
We recall first of all that A"'''(X) contains a well determined convex cone of positive (;;;' 0) elements. By definition.a. form Q is in the cone-noted by 0;;;. O-if and only if there exist forms O"EA"'O(X) such that
We may extend this definition to matrix valued forms in the following fashion: DEFI"NI'1.'ION
5.1. Let 0 be an n X n matrix of forms of type (p, pl. Then 0 is positive,
it there exist n x m 'TfU1,trices N" of type (p, 0) such that
0= i'" L:Nr /I N;.
(5.2)
r
Note that if A is any nonsingular n x n matrix of functions , then 0 is positive with AOA'. This enables us to define positivity in AP.P(X; Hom (E , E)) for any bundle E with
a Hermitian structure. Namely if the matrix of
~
~EA"'''(X;
Hom (E, E)) we define
relative to a unitary frame s, be positive:
~(s) ;;;' O.
~;;;.o
to mean that
As unitary frames are
related by unitary transformations-for which therefore AI = A -l,-this concept is thereby well defined. Hence in particular, if E is a holomorphic bundle with Hermitian norm N - then it makes sense to ask whether the "real curvature form " OlE, N] = x K[E; N] is positive or not. To simplify the notation we will, in the sequel, call such a holomorphic bundle with a given Hermitian norm simply a Hermitian bundle, denote it by a single letter E , and write K[E] , OlE] , c(E) etc., instead of K[E; N], OlE, N], c(E) etc . Such a bundle is called positive
if OlE] ;;;' 0.
That these notions of positivity on the form and the vector-bundle level are compa tible follows readily from the following lemma: LEMMA
5.3. Let E be a Hermitian bundle of dimension n , and let
ot A"'''(X; Hom (E, E)) ; r=l, ... , n . Then if p is odd det
(~l '
~r
be positive elements
... , ~n)EApn . "n (x) is positive .
Proof. We may find forms Nr"EA"'O(U) , so that with respect to some unitary frame
s over U, ~r(s) = i P ' L:Nr"rN'''r' "r
Hence det
(~l' " "~n)
is given by the sum:
I ~ a r ~ fJr'
292 91
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
·v· .n( I-I) " (
n.
t
L.
-
1)" NT(I)
",""TT(I)
I"T(I) J..V ,,(I)"T(1) •••
1{'.(n)
n "T(n)
BT(n)
,,(n)"T( n)
G. T , a:
where (] and T vary over the group of permutations and IX denotes independent summation over the IX/S. If we now take all the barred terms to the right and reorder them in ascending order
according to their first lower index then, because p is odd (-1)" cancels out and this expression is seen to take the form : (n!)-I i P ' n . iV'(n'-n) L
NI~I)
... N:.(~). Ni~I) ••. N~~n)
l.T,a::
where;' =
TO (]-I
and we have denoted the appropriate IX-index by a dot. Hence det (el ,
•.• ,
en) = (n!)-I i!1>n)' L 0" A 0"
"
where 0" = LA Ni(l) N~(2) .. . N!
As an immediate corollary we have: (5.4) The forms det" ((e ; 7])) are positive if Further if
~~
e' ~ 0, 7] ~ 7]' ~ 0
Indeed, det" (e , 7]) is just the sum 7]
and the remaining ones are equal to
e, 7]EA1.I(X; Hom (E, E))
are positive.
then det" ((e, 7])) ~ det" ((e'; 7]')).
L det (el , •. . , en)
where IX of the
e. In particular then, we have:
e are set equal to f
Q(E) ~ 0 ~ c(E) ~ O.
(5.5)
When applied to the exact sequence of Hermitian vector bundles (4.1):
our lemma yields the following inequalities: In the notation of that section, define Qj[E], i=I, II, to be the form xPfK[E]P f interpreted as a section of A2(X; Hom (E j , E j )) . Then
in view of (4.4) and (4.8) we immediately obtain the inequalities:
(5.6) (5.7)
Put differently, sub-bundles are less positive and quotient bundles more positive, than the bundle itself. We next return to the formula (4.22) : cn(E) =xd"d'{log N(s) · cn- I(E u ) +e}
where
e L IX- I det" ((Q[Eu] ; Qu[E] =
,, > 0
Q[Eu))).
293 92
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
Assume now that Q[E);;'O. Then Qu[E);;'O and hence by (5.6) Q[Eu);;.t.u[E);;'O. From this it follows that cn.:.1(E u );;' O. The form
L cx- 1 ( -
~
can be written as
1)« det« {Q[Eu); t.u(E)}.
« >0
Hence
~
is an alternating sum of positive terms and therefore neither positive or negative.
However, this is not serious. In fact we can add to ~ a closed form and
~
-
~0 :s:;; O.
~o
so as to make
~ +~o;;.
0
This is done as follows: Let ~o =
L cx-
1
det« «Q[Eu); Q[ElI)))'
(5.8)
« >0
Then by the definition of det«, ~o = Lcx-1(:)cn_1(Eu ), and hence is a closed form. Further note that in view of (5.4), we have
and so our assertion concerning We next replace
~
by
~-~o
~o
is correct.
in (4.1) and use the definition de =i(d" -d').
(5.9)
The formula (4.7) then takes the form: (5.10)
with the bracketed term ;;.0 wherever log N-l(s) >0, i.e., wherever N(s) < 1. Applied to B*(E), this formula therefore precisely proves Theorem I.
6. The relative Gauss Bonnet theorem We already remarked in the introduction that the first main inequality of the Nevanlinn a theory may be thought of as a twice integrated version of the formula (1.2) in Theorem I. The first integral of (1.2) leads to the generalized theorem of Gauss-Bonnet (for the
complex case) and so serves to give a geometric interpretation of the Chern classes cj(E). In this section we will, for the sake of
com~leteness,
briefly derive this development.
The situation we wish to study is the following one: let E be a holomorphic n-bundle with a Hermitian norm N, over the complex n -manifold X with boundary assume that
Sy
ax =
Y, and
is a nonvanishing section of E over Y. The question now arises when
Sy
may be extended to all of X without vanishing, and Theorem I, in the explicit form given by (4.22) may be interpreted as giving an answer to this question.
294 93
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
Indeed, let EocE, be the subset {eIN(e»O} complementary to the zero-section in
E, and let no:Eo-+ E be the projection. As· we already remarked, the identity inclusion Eo-+E then induces a nonvanishing section (5.10) gives rise to a definite form
Sf
of nol(E) over Eo, so that the formula
e over Eo, for which
At this stage we will actually only need the form
de 1J(E) = 4n
e,
for which we therefore clearly have the identity (6.1)
In terms of this form, the answer to our question is given by the following proposition. PROPOSITION
6.2. The section Sy of Eol Y may be extended to all of Eo if and only if
The proof of this proposition follows directly from quite elementary obstruction theory, once it is established that the expression y(X; Y; Sy) =
f x cn(E) -
hS:'YJ(E), always
measures the number of times any extension of Sy to X has to vanish. To be more precise we need to recall the topological definition of the order of vanishing of a section
S
of E
at a point p which is an isolated zero of s. This is an integer, denoted by zero(s; p), which is defined as follows: Let Be be a disc of radius e > 0 about p, relative to local coordinates centered at p. Also, let
E" which is an isomorphism on each fiber . .For small enough eo, the map
295 94
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN PROPOSITION
6.4. Let s be a smooth section of E with the following properties:
oc)
s=!=OonaX=Y
fJ)
s has isolated zeroes only.
Under these circumstances one has the formula:
L zero(p;s)= f where p ranges over the set of zeroes Pt, i
=
(6.5)
x cn(E)- f(sIY)*17(E)
1, ... , m of s.
Proof. We first derive (6.5) from the following proposition: PROPOSITION
6.6. Let ifl:S(ED)-7EO be the inclusion of the unit sphere of ED' into Eo.
Then,
(6.7)
i:17(E) = -the orientation class of S(Ep).
Granted (6.7) we proceed as follows. Let X, be obtained from X by removing the interiors of little discs B~ of radius
E
about Pt from X. Then there is a 6>0 so that s will not vanish on X, for 0 < E.;;;6. Also choose trivializations fJii of EIB~ . We then have
because s is a section of Eo over
X;. Now by Stokes formula it follows that (6 .8)
Using the fJii it is now cle~r that f ilBf s*17(E) is approximately faBf fJiU; i 17(E) when E is small. Hence by (6.7) -
f ilBf s*17(E)-7zero
(s, Pi) . Thus (6.8) goes over directly into (6.5)
as E-70 . Q.E.D. It is Proposition 6.6 which therefore lies at the center of these formulae . To prove
it one may explicitly integrate the form described by (5.10) . Alternatively one may apply the argument we just gave in reverse, to a situation where (6 .5) can be established by some other means . We will follow the second alternative because many of the concepts which are needed for this special example will also be used later. Note finally, that because of the functorial definition of 17(E)
i:17(E) is a well determined form on S2'-1 modulo only
unitary transformations of that sphere. In short, to prove (6.7) it will be sufficient to find
an example of a Hermitian bundle E over the complex manifold X with with a section s of E, such that:
ax = 0
together
296 95
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
(X) s has a single isolated zero at p EX, with zero(s, p) = 1
As we will now show, an example of this type is furnished by the complex projective space and the "quotient bundle" over it. Let then V be a fixed complex vector space, of dim (n+I), and let Pl(V) be the projective space of I-dimensional subspaces of V. (Note that dime P 1 ( V) =n.) Over P 1 (V) we have the canonical exact sequence (6.9)
of holomorphic vector-bundles, defined in the following "tautologous" manner. (6.10) T 1 (V) is the product bundle P 1 (V) x V over P 1 (V) (6.11) SI(V) is the subset of T(V) consisting of pairs (l, v)-where lEP 1 (V) is a line
in V, and vEV-for which vEL. (6.12) Ql(V) is the quotient bundle T 1 (V)/SI(V),
The bundle Q1 (V) over PI (V) is the one we called the quotient bundle of the projective space Pl(V), Note that each vE V, determines a holomorphic section
8v
of Ql(V), defined
by the projection of the constant section: x->-(x, v), xEP1 (V), of T 1 (V) into Ql(V) , Clearly, if
V
,*,0 then
Sv
vanishes at only one point lEP 1(V) namely at the subspace, [v], generated
by v. Further it is not hard to see that zero[sv, [v]] = l. Thus a) is satisfied. To check the condition fJ) we need a hermitian structure on T 1 ( V) which we of course take to be the trivial one induced by a hermitian structure on V. Thus the curvature form of T 1( V) is equal to 7.ero. Hence by the inequality (5.7) we note that Q{Ql( V)} :;;;. O. Thus in any case f Q,{y)C n {Ql( V)} :;;;. O. Hence it will be sufficient to show that Cn {Ql( V)} is an orientation class for P 1 ( V) to establish fJ). Consider the case n = 1, first. Let VI' v 2 be an orthonormal base for V and let Z->-[Vl + ZV 2 ] be a local parameter near [VI]' Also let SI be the section sv" which is therefore hoI om orphic and ,*,0 on P 1 ( V) - [VI]. Hence on this set
where l SI I(l) is the norm of the section at l . Thus near [VI] we have, ISl I 2([Vl +ZV 2 ]) = IzI2/(1
It follows, again by Stokes, that if BE = ( Iz I < e) then
+ IzI2).
297 96
RAOUL BOTT AND S . S. CHERN
Clearly the second term tends to zero, while the first tends to write z = re
tB
,
+ 1, as is seen directly if we
log z = log r + iO and recall that de = id" - id'. Thus fJ) is true for n = 1.
To get fJ) in gener~l one may use the Whitney duality formula. In the present instance this formula yields: C{Sl(V)}'C{Ql(V)} =c{Tl(V)} = 1.
Thus cn{Q(V)} = [- C1{Sl(V)}r· For n=l, this implies that C1{Sl(V 2 )} is an orientation class of P 1(V 2). Now under the inclusion V 2---7 V, Sl(V) clearly restricts to Sl(V2), Hence C1S1(V)} restricts to an orientation class of P 1(V 2 ). But then C1{Sl(V)} must generate H2(X;Z), X=P1(V) and hence (-ltCl{Sl(V)} must be an orientation class for P1(V)
in general. Q.E.D. An important corollary of (6.5) is the following interpretation of cn(E): COROLLARY
6.13. Let E be a lwlomorphic n-bundle over the complex n-manifold X,
and let s: X ---7 E be a smooth section of E, which is 9=0 on
ax, and which is transversal to the
zero section of X in E. Then zero(s) has a natural structure of a COO manifold of real codimension 2n in X, and the proper orientation class of zero(s) is the Poincare dual of cn(E). Proof. Let y be a smooth singular n -cycle in the interior of X, which is transversal to zero(s), i.e., every singular simplex II which intersects zero(s), meets it in an isolated interior point. Just as in the proof of (6 .4) one now concludes from (6.7) that
f
cn(E) = intersection (II, zero(s)) +
a
He!1ce summing over
II
J
s*'YJ(E).
•
in y , we obtain:
J y
cn(E) = intersection (zero(s) , y).
Q.E.D.
Remark I. It is of course artificial to bring in any assumption of complex analyticity when dealing with the Gauss-Bonnet theorem, and one could modify this account by defining'YJ directly on any smooth hcrmitian bundle. However as we are primarily interested in the complex analytic case here and the more general approach would have taken us even further afield, we only discussed that case. In the next integration the analytic structure plays a vital role. Remark I I. There are two quite straightforward generalizations of the exact sequence
298 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
97
over P1(V), for which we will have use later on. Namely, if Pn(V) denotes the Grassmanian of n·dimensional subspaces of V, we have the corresponding sequence O-+Sn(V)-+Tn(V)-+Qn(V)-+O
over P n(V), with T n(V) = P n(V) x V , and Sn(V) being the subset of pairs (A, v) with v EA. Finally this construction makes sense when V is replaced by a vector bundle E over X . That is, one defines Pn(E) as the pairs (A, x) consisting of a point xEX, and an n-
dimensional subspace A in Ex. One lets Tn(E) be the bundle induced from E over Pn(E) by the projection 1\(E)-+X, and then obtains an exact sequence
where Sn(E) consists of the triples (A, x, e) with eC A.
7. The second integration; definition of the order function We are
IlOW
in a position to discuss the generalized first inequality of the Nevanlinna
theory. Just as in Section 6, we will be dealing with a holomorphic hermitian vector bundle E over the complex manifold X, however instead of assuming that X is compact we assume
only that X admits a "concave exhaustion" f. By definition, such an exhaustion is a smooth real valued function, (7.1)
f maps X
f, on X such that
onto R+
(7 .2) f is proper, that is, f-l(K) is compact whenever K is.
(7.3) The (1, 1) form ddcf is
~
0 for large values of f.
With respect to such an exhaustion of X, one defines the order-function of E, by the formula (7.4)
The behavior of T(r) as r-++ the compact case.
00
is then to be thought of as the analogue of
f x cn(E) in
One next defines a corresponding order function for the number of zeroes of a section s on E which is assumed to have only isolated zeroes, by the formula
N(r,s) =
f~ oo zero(s,XT)dr
where zero(s, X T ) = L: zero(s, p), p ranging over the zeroes of s interior to X T • 7- 65 2 932 Acta malhemalica 114. Imprime Ie 11 Bout 1965.
(7.5)
299 98
RAOUL BOTT .AND S. S. CHERN
We note that if the integral along the boundary of Xr could be disregarded, the formula (6.5) would imply that N(r, s) = T(r). This is of course false in general, however we do have the following estimate of this error term under certain circumstances. FIRST MAIN THEOREM. Let E be a positive Hermitian bundle over X where X
has
a concave exhaustion f. Let s be a holomorphic section of E with isolated zeroes, and let N(r, s) be the order function of these zeroes. Then N(r, s) < T(r)
+ constant
(7.6)
where T(r) is the order function of E. In particular if cn(E) > 0 at some point of X, then lim {N(r, s)/T(r)} ':;; 1. Hence the deficiency mea,sure of s, defined by: 6(s) = I-lim {N(r, s)/T(r)} satisfies the inequality
o':;; 6(s) ':;; 1. Proof. Let
"above"
r
rc X
(7.7)
x R be the graph of f, and let W be the region in X x R, which is
and " below" the slice X x r :
W = {(x, t) If(x) .:;; t ':;; r; xEX, tER} . The natural projection W -+ Xr will be denoted by a.
It is then clear that
T(r) =
I
wa"cn(E)dt
with W the orientation induced by the product orientation on X x R, and dt the volume element on R . Suppose now that s =1=0 on X r • Because
lsi < I we may think of s as a section of B*(E)
so that on Xr
where e =e(E) is the form given by Theorem I on B"(E). We may therefore write a"(cn(E) A dt) as d{a"s"dCe A dt}/4n and apply Stokes' formula
to obtain: T(r) =
~
4n
f
a"s"dCe II dt.
(7.8)
ilW
Now the boundary of W clearly falls into the top-face Xr
r" which is the graph of II Xr: aW=(Xr x r) U rr.
X
r, and the bottom face
300 99
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
Further, the integrand in (7.8) clearly restricts to zero on the top-face, as dt does. Hence, keeping track of the orientation we obtain so that identifying
-1/4nf rra*s*dce /I dt for this integral,
rr with Xr one obtains: T(r) =
~
4:n:
fx,
s"dCe /I df·
(7.9)
We next use the fact that s is holomorphic. This implies that s"dCe =dCs"e and, furthermore, that s*e EAn-Ln-1(X). Now a direct verification shows that the following identity is valid: PROPOSITION
7.10.
If X is an n-dimensiona,l complex manifold, and fEAO(X),
AEAn-Ln-1(X), then
df /\ dCA = d(dCfA) - Addcj.
(7.11)
When this identity is substituted into (7 .9) and the Stokes formula is used once more in the first term we obtain the relation:
T(r) =
~
4:n:
f
dct- A -
OXr
~
4:n:
f
Addcf,
A = s* e(E)
(7.12)
Xr
and this is the basic integral relation which lies behind the first main theorem when s does not vanish on X r • In the case when s vanishes at isolated points Pi' i
=
I, ..., m , in Xr let X: be obtained
from Xr by deleting e discs D/(e) about the Pi> and let W(e) be W with the solid cylinders C/(e) above these discs removed. Now
T(r) =
~ limf
4:n: <-+0
a* s* ddce /I dt, W«)
and on W(e) we may apply our earlier argument. However this time aW(e) also contains. the boundaries of the cylinders C/(e), contributing the extra term 1 4 :n:
L:foc/«) a*s"dCe /I dt,
which by ((i.5) is easily seen to tend to N(r, s) as e-+O. Hence (7.12) is modified to:
T(r)-N(r,s)= !..-lim 4:n:<-+o
[f ox~ dCfA- f x~ Addcf];
A=s*e(E).
We next apply the following lemma which will be proved later by an estimate.
(7.13~
301 100
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
LEMMA.
(7.14)
In the situation just described;
limJ •-
J..=s*e(E) .
Idcli\ll=O, 6D(E)
(7.15) The lorm J..ddcl is absolutely integrable on X r • (7 .16) The lorm dCI i\ J.. is absolutely' integrable on oX r •
In view of this good state of affairs we may pass to the limit in (7.13) to obtain the fundamental integral formula:
T(r)-N(r,s)=4~J :n;
OXr
dCI i\ J..- ~ J 4:n;
J.. dd cI,
J..=s*e(E) .
(7.17)
Xr
The inequality of the first main theorem now follows directly. Indeed, by Theorem I,
J..;;.O on X r • By assumption ddcl ";;' O on the complement of some X r,. Hence -J..ddcl ;;' O there, and so the second term on the right hand side is greater than some constant. The term
f ox,dcl i\ A is
actually non-negative, for the following reason. Recall first
that Xr was oriented by the positive (n, n)-forms on X . Recall also that the orientation induced by the Stokes formula fx,dw = fox,i*w, on oX r is characterized by the condition: A real (2n -1) form
~
on X restricts to a pOtiitiv" f0= un oX" relative to the induced
orientation, if and only if dl i\ ~ is positive on X, near X r. Hence the sign of fox, dCI i\ J.. is determined by the sign of dl i\ dt< i\ J.. on X r • But if I is any real valued function, then dt i\ dCt i\ J.. is also positive. Q.E.D. The inequality now follows as we have proved that T(r) - N(r, s) > constant.
Prool
01 the lemma. We need to estimate the form
J..=s*e near an isolated singularity,
p, of s. For this purpose choose a holomorphic trivialization rp :E-*Ep, of E near p . Then
.'J"e will be close to (rpos)*j;e near p, so that it is sufficient to study this form near p. Our first task is therefore to describe j;e. Let :n;:Ep-*p, ar.d set E=:n;-l(Ep) be the induced bundle over Err The identity map
Ep -* E p, then definr;s a section s of E, which does not vanish on Ep.o = Ep -0, and so geneTates a sub-bundle E] of E there. Let jp:Ep.o-*E be the inclusion. The form j;e is then made out of the curvature forms of E] and Ell = EIE], according to the prescription (5.10). Now as E is clearly the trivial Hermitian bundle over Ep-O, the curvature of E vanishes identically. Hence K(E lI ) has the form 6 i\ 6", where 6 is the degree zero operator PlIDP] of Section 4, and may be computed explicitly. Indeed let u"" '" = 1, ... , n, be an orthonormal frame for E p , and let z'" be the corresponding local coordinates on Ep so that Lz",(q)u",=q,
qEE p ,
302 101
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
and let r(q) = (2:lz«(q)12)!. If we interpret the u« as the constant sections of E then the identity section s is given by s(q) = 2:z«(q)u«, and so Ds(q) = 'i,dz«u«. It follows that at a point q, with Zl(Q) = r(q), zp(q) = 0, the frame of Ell determined by the Up, 1 _ 2dz« 1\ dzp, r
f3 = 2, .. . , n, the curvature matrix f3 = 2, .. . , n, is simply given by IX,
f3 =
2, . .. , n.
relative to
(7.18)
In particular then,
With the aid of (7.18) one may estimate all the terms of (5.10) and so conclude that: (7.19) where Wt is bounded on all of Ep.o. The lemma now follows easily from (7.19). Assume first that s is transversal to the zero section at p. Then the Jacobian of rpos is not zero at p. For our convergence questions rpos may therefore be replaced by the identity map. Now let D(e) be the ball of radius e about 0 in
en. Then if e is of the type given by
(7 .19) we clearly have
e1\ O~O,
f
and
IlD('l
for any bounded I -forms () and rp because the volume of the sphere of radius r is of the order r2n-l
and so dominates
r 2(n-ll
log r. The lemma therefore is clear in that case. For a general
isolated zero of s, there exist arbitrarily small perturbations of s with only a finite number
of nondegenerate zeroes near p. Hence our lemma also holds in that case.
8. Equidistrihution in measure In this section we derive "he generalized first equidistibution theorem from the first main theorem with the aid of two essentially known but hard to refer to propositions which are then taken up in later sections. We start with a statement of the theorem we are after: EQUIDISTRIBUTION THEOREM .
L et E be a complex vector bundle of fiber. dimension
n, over the complex connected manifold X, and let V c r( E) be a finite dimensional space of holomorphic sections of E . Assume further that,
(8.1) X admits a concave exhaustion f, in the sense of Section 7. (8 .2) V is sufficiently ample in the sense that:
303 102
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
a) The map
s~s(x),
maps V onto Er for each xEX.
fJ) There is some sEV, and some xoEX, so that s:X-7E, is transversal to the zero-section of E at Xo' Under these circumstances nearly every section in V vanishes the same numher of times. Precisely, a hermitian structure on V defines a hermitian structure on E, and hence a deficiency measure b(s) on the generic sections of V . The assertion is that except for a set of measure 0, <5(s) =0. Proof. We first of all remark more explicitly on how the hermitian structure on V
defines T(r), N(r, s) etc. For this purpose let m = dim V - n, and consider the exact sequence (8.3)
:By (8.2) part a, the map li r : V ~ E r which sends s into s(X) is onto. Hence, kr> the kernel of lir
has dim m. Now it is clear from (8.3) that the induced map e v : X
x~kr'
~ P m( V) ,
defined by
determines an isomorphism of Qm(V) with E: That is (8.4)
A hermitian structure on V induces one on T m( V) and hence on Qm( V) and Sm( V) and hence by (8.4) also on E. Note further that Qm( V) is positive in this structure as T m( V) clearly has zero curvature and "quotient bundles are always more positive" (see Section 4) . Hence E is also positive. Finally, the "height of a section s" in V at any point xEX is clearly bounded by the length of s " qua element" in V. In short we may, after possibly multiplying s by a suitable constant, not only apply the notions of Section 7 to E, but we also obtain the inequality of the first main theorem : N(r, s) < T(r) + constant
valid for sections with isolated signularities. Now condition fJ, of (8 .2) is seen to imply by an explicit check , that e~cn{Qn(V)} is strictly positive near Xo (see remark at end of Section 9). Hence T(r) ~ + 00, so that (8.4)
implies the inequality: ';;: l-;-N(r, s) ';;:1 ..., .
O ..., 1m T(r)
(8 .5)
We now need the following two propositions: PROPOSITION
8.6. Under the assumption (8.2) nearly aU se V, have only isolated
zeroes . In fact nearly all sections sE V are transversal to the zero section of E. (') See the remark at the end of Section 6.
304 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES PROPOSITION
103
8.7. Under the assumptions (8.2) we have the equality
f
N(r,s)w=T(r),
sE[s] EPI(V)
(8.8)
P,(V)
where w is the volume on PI(V) invariant under the group of isometries of V and normalized by f p,
The equidistribution theorem: b(s) =0 almost everywhere now follows directly. Indeed by (8.5) O~b(s)~l. Hence fp,(V)b(s)w;;'O. On the other hand by (8.7) we have lim
f
and so finally
{N(r, s)/T(r)} w
=
1, whence
P.(V)
f
b(8) w;;. O.
f
lim {N(r, s)/T(r)} w ;;' 1, P ,(V)
Q.E.D.
P,(V)
9. The proof of Proposition 8.6 This assertion is clearly a variant of Bertini's theorem, and is proved along the same lines. Briefly the argument runs as follows. Let K=ev1{Sm(V)}, and cons·i der the associated projective bundle P1(K) over X. (See the remark at the end of Section 6 for these concepts.) There is a natural imbedding of P1(K) in X XPI(V) as the subset: P1(K) = {(x, l) with lck x }
and we let :rr::PI(K)-+P1(V) be the projection on the second factor. Next let 1: c P 1(K) be the subset of those pairs (x, l) for which l is generated by a section s:X-+E, which is not transversal to the zero section at x. This is the singular set in P1(K), and it is clear that the complement in P I( V) of the image of 1: under:rr: consists of transversal sections. Now dimPI(K)=dimP1(V) because dim X equals the fiber-dimension of E. Hence if we can show that the codimension of 1: in P1(K) is ;;' 1, then 1: and :rr:(L) will have measure zero and the proposition will be established. Our aim is therefore to show that L is the zero set of a not identically zero section of a certain line-bundle over P1(K). To see this, remark first that if sEkx and if UEX x is a tangent vector to X at x, then the derivative of s in the direction U, is a well determined element U 's of Ex. (Recall that sEkx=s(x)=O; to differentiate general sections one of course needs a connection, however at the zeroes of s all connections on E define the same derivative. )
305 104
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
This operation therefore leads to a map
and it is easy to see that ~ = {(x, l) EP1(K) Idet Jt(s) =0, [s] =l}. Now when lifted to P1(K), det Jt may be interpreted as a section of the line bundle
where An denotes the nth exterior power and T denotes the tangent bundle of X lifted to P1(K). Thus ~ = zero set of det JtEr(L). On the other hand condition (8.2) fJ) demands precisely, that det Jt be non-zero at some point of P1(K). Because X is connected it follows that codim ~ = 1. Q.E.D.
Remark. The transpose of Jt is given by
and may be identified with the Jacobian of ev at x. Thus condition (8.2) fJ) implies that e v is an immersion near xo' From this it follows easily that cn(E) > 0 near Xo' 10. Some remarks on integral geometry. The proof of Proposition 8.7 Suppose n : Y --+ X is a smooth fibering of compact manifolds with oriented fiber F. In that situation there is a well-defined operation
called integration over the fiber, which "realizes" the adjoint of n* in the sense that if X and Yare oriented compatibly then for any cpEA(X), 1pEA(Y) we have the identity: (10.1)
The existence of n* on the " form level", suggests the following definition. DEFINITION
(Y, Z, w) where
10.2. L et cpEAk(X) . By an integral representation of cp we mean a triple,
Y~X
is an oriented fibering over X, with projection n, and wEAm(z) is
a volume element(l) on the oriented m-manifold Z, together with a map
(J:
Y --+Z, such that (10.3)
In general the question whether a given closed form cp on X admits an integral repre(') Volume element means a nonvanishing form of top dimernsion, in the orientation class.
306 105
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
sentation seems quite difficult. Certainly
f{J
must have integral periods and there are most
probably much more subtle conditions which also have to be satisfied. For our purposes it will however be sufficient to show that the characteristic class cn(E) of a hermitian bundle which is ample in the sense of (9.2) CIC) always has an integral representation. Note that if
f{J
has an integral representation, then any pull-back
/*f{J
also has an integral repre-
sentation. Hence it will be sufficient to get a representation theorem for cn[Qn( V)] over Pn(V)· In the next proposition we describe a quite general representation theorem for the
Grassmann-varieties Pn(V). We will first simplify the notation as follows: V will denote a fixed hermitian vector space of dimension d; and we write simply Pm Qn etc., for Pn(V), Qn(V) etc. The bundle Qn is always considered in the hermitian structure induced on Qn by the trivial structure on Tn; so that the Chern forms c(Qn) are well-defined.
Now let 0
We then have the following proposition. REPRESENTATION THEOREM.
In the diagram (10.4) one has the relation:
(10.5) Proof. One may of course compute everything explicitly in these examples and so
verify (10.5). There is also a much simpler global proof based on the corollary (6.13). The argument runs as follows. Consider the action of the group of isometries of V, say I(V), on P n. From the rather canonical definition of the bundles Qn it is then not hard to see that their Chern forms c{Qn}, are invariant under I(V).
It is also easy to see that P n is a symmetric space of I(V) whence every real cohomology class of P n contains a single invariant differential form . We may therefore prove (10.5) by checking it on the cohomology level. Alternately we may pass to homology by Poincare duality. Then 0'. corresponds simply to inverse image of the dual cycle to cv-n{Qn} and:n;* corresponds to projection .
307 106
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. OHERN
Now let v be a non-zero element of V, and consider .t he section Sv it determines in Qn over P n· This is clearly a transversal section and we have: zero{sv) ={An ~v}. Similarly v determines the section s~ of Qm over Pm, and, zero{s~) = (Bm ~ v). Thus we get the formula: zero(s~) =:n:oO'-1ozero(sv) '
(10.6)
Finally, by Proposition 6.13 these zero-sets are duals of the corresponding Chern classes, so that (10.6) proves (10.5) on the homology level. (Because our sections are holomorphic there is no problem with orientations.) We discuss next, the geometric implications of an integral representation. Consider then the diagram: Y....!!.-Z
.
(10.7)
[
I
X with rp =:n:*oO'·w. If z is not in the critical set a (a point p is critical if at some point of O'-1(p), the differential do- is not onto its tangent space Z,,). Then O'-1(z) is a well-defined oriented manifold, so that the pair (a-1(z); :n:) determines a smooth oriented singular submanifold X which we denote by c(z). As already remarked, each c(z) represents the homology class dual to rp. However, we have more than that; the family c(z) determines not only the dual homology class of rp but also the value of rp on any singular k-submanifolds I: K PROPOSITION
-+ X.
10.S. Let the k-Iorm rpEAk(X) have an integral representation won Z ,
in the sense 01 (10.1) . Then lor any compact singular submanifold
t: K -+ X of dimension k;
one has: (10.9) The intersection n(K, c(z)) of K with c(z) is well-defined except for a set of measure
zero in Z. (10.10)
Outline of Proof. Let Y(f) = f-l( Y) be the bundle induced by Y over K , under f, and
let
r: Y(f) -+ Y be the bundle map covering f. If :n: K: Y(f) -+ K f
j*rp=f :n:K*r*oO'*.w=f K
K
is the projection we have:
(O'of')*w
(10.11)
Y(n
where the first step follows from the identity ro:n:' =:n:"fco/,* and the second one from the adjoint property (10.1) of :n:*. One next considers the map A=O'o/,: Y(f)-+Z. A count of dimension shows that
308 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
107
dim Y(f) = dim Z. Hence on the complement of the critical value set of A the degree of A at z, is well-dewrmined and computes the algebraic number of sheets with which some vicinity of
Z
is covered. Thus
f
A*W= Y(f)
f
deg(A;z)w. Z
Finally consider the points of A-1(Z), with Z a regular (i.e., not critical) value of A. We see first of all that these points correspond precisely to the intersections of c(z) with j(K) and furthermore that all these intersections are transversal so that the intersection
numbers are well-defined and their algebraic sum, is precisely deg(A, z) . The theorem now follows from the fact that the critical set of smooth maps have measure zero. The proposition (8.7) which motivated this excursion is a direct consequence of the formulae (10.5) and (10.10). Indeed, let r=d-n, and consider the exact sequence
Let ev :X-+Pr(V) be the evaluation map, so that ev1 [Qr(V)]=E. We now apply (10.5) with n=l, and m=r. Thus the diagram we need is
Applying (10.5) one obtains cn[Qr] =:n;*OCP*Cd-l{Ql} and it is clear that Cd-l(Ql) is a volume of measure 1 on P r ( V)-because s. vanishes at a single point for instance! Now one applies {lO.8) with Xr replacing K, and ev replacing j, to obtain:
f
x
cn(E) =
f
n(r, s) W
P,( V)
with n(r, s) simply the number of zeroes of sE Von Xr (s a generic section). Integrating with respect to r, we conclude that T(r) =
f
N(r,s)w .
Q.E.D.
Pl(V)
ll. The Nevanlinna Theorem We conclude .this paper with a short account of the classical Nevanlinna theorem. In particular we would like to show that the second main theorem of the Nevanlinna theory is also a consequence of the integral formula which yields the first main inequality.
309 108
RAOUL BOTT .AND S. S. OHERN
We therefore specialize all our constructions as follows : (11.1) For X we take the plane C, with an exhaustion, I(z), for which I(z) = log Izl when
Izl ;;' 1.
(11 .2) E is the trivial line bundle over X, so that f(E) is the space of holomorphic
functions on C. (11.3) Vcr(E) is a 2-dimensional sufficiently ample subspace of f(E), i.e., one
generated by two functions SI and s2Er(E) which are not proportional, and which do not have any common zeroes.
Remarks. oc) The assumption that E is the trivial bundle is really no restriction as all holomorphic bundles over C are known to be trivial.
fJ) The function log 1z I, is harmonic for large 1z 1 and therefore has the property dd,cI=O. Hence I does define a "concave" exhaustion. On the other hand, the function 1z 12 would not do, because y) By (11.3) every sE V is of the form as 1 +bs 2 • Hence the zeroes of s correspond to the
points where r(z ) =SI(Z)jS2(Z) = -bja. In short we are dealing precisely with the value distribution of the meromorphic function r( z ). The refinement of the equidistribution theory which is possible in this situation is in the first place' a consequence of the fact that our exhaustion function is harmonic, so that
ddcI=O for large values of
Izl. It follows that (7.16) specializes to the formula:
T(r) - N(r, s) =
J:... flOg {1/lsI2}. dCI + const.
4n
(11.4)
OXr
Indeed, in the case of line bundles, the form
e of Theorem I
may simply be taken to be
log (ljN(s)). The formula (11.4) is furthermore valid for all sE V -0, because all these sections vanish at isolated points. Consider then a set of q sections sjE V, no two of which are dependent. Our aim is the Nevanlinna inequality: (11.5) where For this purpose observe first of aU that a repeated application of (11 .4) yields,
qT(r)-LN(r,sd=~J log,u2 ' dcI+const 4n flXr
(1l.6)
310 HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
109 (11.7)
with
Hence if M(r) denotes the term 1/4n Joxrlogp. 2d cf, then we need to prove the inequality:
lim M(r) .::;;2 -T(r)
(11.8)
to establish (11.5). The estimation of M(r) proceeds by first correcting M(r) for the singular points of our evaluation map (11.9) Let .(X) and .[P1(V)] be the respective holomorphic tangent bundles of X and P1(V), so that de v becomes a section of the line bundle:
(11.10) We consider the global section o/Bz of X, and set t =dev(B/oz) =dev/dz. Then t is a holomorphic section of L = e i:h[PI (V)] and the singular points of e v are precisely the zeroes of t. Now the fixed Hermitian structure on V which underlies all our constructions, induces a Hermitian structure on .{P1(V)} through the well known isomorphism: (11.11)
One may therefore apply the first main integral formula to the section, t, of L =ey1o-r[Pl( V)], and so obtains: T
I
-00
drI XT
c1(L)-N(r,t)= -.!-.I log 1/ltI2·dcf+const. 4n OXT
(11.12)
Once one identifies the first integral in (11.12) with 2T(r), this formula becomes the socalled second main theorem of the Nevanlinna theory. Actually, that identification follows directly from the following quite general proposition: PROPOSITION
11.13. In the natural Hermitian structure on .{Pn(V)} induced by
(11.11), one lw,s the identity of Chern forms:
(11.14) We bring only the proof for n=l, the general case being similar but involving some complicated identities about the determinant. Let then n be 1, and consider the sequence (see Section 6) of bundles: (11.15)
311
llO
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
over P 1 ( V). Taking Hom(S, .) of this sequence we get O-+I-+Hom(Sl' T1)-+T{P1(V)}-+0.
(11.16)
Now we again use the Whitney formula on the homology level, and invariance under the isometries of V to deduce a relation on the form-level. Namely, from (11.6) c1{Hom(Sl' T1)} =C1{T[P1(V)]}, while from (11.15), C1(Sl)= - C1(Ql) and hence c1{Hom(Sl' T1)}=dim V ' C1(Ql) as was to be shown. The formula (11.12) may therefore be used to give the following estimate: 1 2T(r);;' 4 n
I
log 1/ ltIWf+const
(11.17)
ijX,
and this is now precisely the second fundamental inequality of the subject. The proof of (11 .8) now proceeds as follows : Choose 0 < A< 1 and write:
Then if the two expressions on the right are denoted by A(r) and B(r) respectively, we get A lim M(r)fT(r) ,;;; lim A(r)/T(r) + lim B(r)/T(r), whence by the second main theorem, A lim M(r)/T(r) ';;; lim A(r)/T(r) + 2. Hence if it can be shown that lim A(r)/T(r) =0 for every 0 < A< 1 we will be done. For this estimate, one first uses the concavity of the logarithm: Na mely, if z=re'6 are the usual coordinates in C, then for r large enough; r;;'ro; we have f=lnr, whence dCf=dO and df=dr/r. In particular, in faxcdcf = 1. It follows from the concavity of log that for c > lnro
or equivalently:
(11.18)
This last relation is now exploited to construct an integral inequality which in some sense relates
eA(c)
with T(c). For this purpose one needs the following identity, which relates
1t 12 to the Chern-form c1(E) which occurs in the definition of T(c) . The relation in question is the following one:
312
III
HERMITIAN VECTOR BUNDLES
(11.19) To see this formula, consider a point xEC, and choose a section and
SI(X)
=0. Thus
SI
SI
in V, with ISll =1,
spans k, and is of unit length. Choose Sz to be orthogonal to
SI
and
also of unit length. Then near x there is a well determined holomorphic function a(z) such that SI(Z)
-
a(z)sz(z) generates kl for z near x. It follows immediately from the formulae
of Section 5 that in terms of this a,
c (E)= -i . \ -da \Zdz 1\ di. 1 2:n: dz
(11.20)
Finally noting that Ida/dzlz=IW, and that'idz II di=2rdrdO one obtains (11.19). Integrating with respect to c, one now deduces from (11.18) that
and so finally that (11.21 ) The concluding steps of the proof are now expressed by the following two lemmas: LEMMA 11.22. In the notation used above,
where the K j are constants. LEMMA 11.23. The integral inequality
J c
c,
dcJc e[2C+A(C»dc';;;K1 T(c) +Kz Co
implies that the inequality 2c+ A(c) ';;; Plog [Kl{T(c)} + K z],
k > 1,
hold for arbitrarily large values of c. We can clearly conclude from (11.21) and these two lemmas that lim A(c)/T(c) =0, so that the Nevanlinna theorem is a direct consequence of (11.22) and (11.23). Both Lemmas are well·known, see for instance [2]. The first one follows from an integral geometry argument, while the second one is a purely real variable inequality.
313 112
RAOUL BOTT AND S. S. CHERN
References This paper links classical function theory with differential geometry; it is difficult to give an adequate bibliography satisfactory to readers from both fields. We will restrict our· selves in giving some standard literature from which other references can be found: [1]. Classical value distribution theory: NEVANLINNA, R., Eindeutige analytische Funktionen. Berlin, 1936. [2]. Holomorphic curves in projective space: .Am.FORS, L., The theory of meromorphic curves. Acta Soc. Sci. Fenn., Ser. A. 3, no. 4 (1941). WEYL, H., Meromorphic Functions and Analytic Curves. Princeton, 1943. [3]. Differential geometry of connections: KOBAYASm, S. & NOMIZU, K., Foundations of differential geometry. Interscience, 1963. [4]. Characteristic classes: HmZEBRUCH, F., Neue topologische Methoden in der algebraischen Geometrie. Springer 1962. [5]. Curvature of connections and characteristic classes: CHERN, S., Differential geometry of fiber bundles. Proc. International Congress 1950, 2 (1952) 397-411. GRIFFITHS, P. A., On a theorem of Chern. IUinois J. Math., 6, 468-479 (1962).
Received August 17, 1964
314
. On the Kinematic Formula In Integral Geometry SHIING-SHEN CHERN 1. Introduction. The kinematic density in euclidean space was first introduced by Poincare. In modern telminology it is the Haar measure of the group of motions which acts on the space. One of the basic problems in integral geometry is to find explicit formulas for the integrals of geometric quantities over the kinematic density in terms of known integral invariants. An important example is the kinematic formula of Blaschke, as follows [1]: Let E3 be the euclidean three-space, and let dg be the kinematic density, so normalized that the measure of all positions about a point is 87r2 _ (In other words, the measure of all positions of a domain D with volume V such that D contains a fixed point is 87r 2 V.) Let Di , i = 1, 2, be a domain with smooth boundary, of which Vi , M ~i), M~i) , Xi are respectively the volume, the area of the boundary, the integral of mean curvature of the boundary, and the Euler characteristic. Then, if Dl is fixed and D2 moves with kinematic density dg, we have
where xeD} n gD.) is the Euler characteristic of the intersection Dl n gD 2 • Formula (1) contains as special or limiting cases many of the formulas in integral geometry in euclidean three-space. It was generalized to euclidean n-space by C. T. Yen and the present author [3] and to the non-euclidean spaces by Santalo [4].
This paper will be concerned with a pair of compact submanifolds (without boundary) M P , M· of arbitrary dimensions p, q in euclidean n-space E" and with the integration with respect to dg of certain geometrical quantities of the submanifold M P n geM"). The latter depend only on the induced riemannian metric of M P n geM') and are defined as follows: Let X be a riemannian manifold of dimension k. In the bundle B of orthonormal frames over X we have the coframes, which consist of k linearly independent linear differential forms CPa , such that the riemannian metric in X is (2) 101 Journal of Mathematics and Mechanics, Vol. 16, No.1 (1966) .
315
s.
102
S. CHERN
(In this and other formulas in this section we have 1
~ Ci, (3, 'Y,
0
~ k.)
Let
(3)
be the connection forms of the Levi-Civita connection. They are linear differential forms in B and satisfy the" structural equations" dtpa
=
L: f{J{J /I. f{J{Ja , L: f{Ja"/ /I. f{J"l1l + .pall , (J
(4) dtpall
=
"/
where (5)
The coefficients
(6)
Safl"l!
are functions in
and have the symmetry properties
B
Sall"/!
=
-Sall!"I
=
Sall"l!
=
S"llall ,
SaP"/!
+ Sa"/!P + Sa!P"I
-Spa"/! ,
=
o.
From these functions we construct the following scalar invariants in X: (7) ~
where e is an even integer satisfying 0
ofCil
~
e
k,
••• Ci.) (3.
\81 ...
+ 1 or -1 according as CiJ , • •• , Ci . is an even or odd permutation of {3, , .. . , {3. , and is otherwise zero, and the summation is over all Ci\ , ..• , Ci. and (3\ , , fl. , independently from 1 to k. When X is oriented and compact, we let
is equal to
(8)
iJ..(X) =
L
I. dv,
where dv is the volume element. Thus J1.. (X) are integral invariants of X, with J1.o(X) equal to the total volume. If k is even, then the Gauss- Bonnet formula says that [2] (9)
(k -
? )k12 ( ~7r
1)(k -
3) . . . 1 X
(X) ,
where x(X) is the Euler-Poincare characteristic of X . The numerical coefficient before the summation in (7) is so chosen that I,(X) = 1, when X is the unit k-sphere in Ek+l with the induced metric. These integral invariants appear in a natural way in Weyl's formula for the
316
103
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
volume of a tube [8]. In fact, suppose X be imbedded in En and suppose T. be a tube of radius p about X, i.e., the set of all points at a distance ~ p from X. Then, for p sufficiently small, Weyl proved that the volume of T p is given by the formula (10)
_ V(Tp) - 0 ...
~
(e - 1)(e - 3) .,. 1 "'h 2) ... m /l,(X)p ,
"7' (m + e)(m + e _
o~ e ~
e even,
k,
m = n - k,
where 0", is the volume of the unit sphere (of dimension m - 1) in Em, and its value is given by (11) This formula is also valid for large values of p, provided that the volume is counted with multiplicities for domains where Tp intersects itself. The main result of this paper is the kinematic formula
(12)
J}J.,(M n P
L
gMQ) dg =
Q c.}J..(W)}J.,-.(M ),
O:!I ~t!
, even
e even,
o~ e ~ p +
q - n,
where c. , to be given below (formula (79», are numerical constants depending on n, p, q, e. 2. Preliminaries. Let En be the euclidean space of dimension n, and xel .•. en an orthonormal frame, or simply a frame, in En, so that x I: En and e1 , • • • , eft are vectors through x, whose scalar products satisfy the relations 1 ~ A, B, C ~ n.
(13)
The kinematic density is the volume element in the space of all frames, and is given by (14)
dg
=
A
A.B.C B
(dx, eA)(deB , ec),
where the right-hand side is the exterior product of the differential forms in question. By (14), dg is normalized. The factor
(15)
dgo
=
A
B
(deB, ec)
in this product is the kinematic density about a point, and we have (16)
dg = dx dgo ,
where dx is the volume element in En. To define the density dE" in the space of all p-dimensional linear subspaces
317
104
S. S. CHERN
EP in En consider the frames P
parallel to E (so that (17)
dJ?
= A
ep+l ,
E P and e) , ••• , ep are en are normal vectors of E P ). Then
Ul •..
••• ,
en , such that x
(dx, e>.)(de h ,ep ) ,
1
~
h
~
t
p,
p
h.>'.p
+ 1 ~~, Jl.
~
n.
Similarly, the density in the space of all E P through a fixed point 0 of En is (18)
dJ?(O)
= A (de h
1 ~ h ~ p,
,ep ),
p
h.p
+1
~
Jl.
~ n,
where e) , .•• , ep are vectors of the frame, which span E P • We will also consider the space of all (x, E P ), such that E P is a p-dimensional linear subspace of Wand x t E P • Its density will be (19)
A
d(x, J?) =
(dx, eA)(deh ,ep ) ,
A.h . ~
and we have d(x, E")
(20)
= dx (E") dJ?,
where dx(E P ) is the volume element in E P • The total volumes
J
dE"(O)
are finite, and we will give their values. Let e) , ... , en be a frame through O. By mapping it to the last vector en , we get a fibering of the space SO(n) of all frames through 0, whose base space is the unit sphere in En and whose fiber is SO(n - 1). It follows by induction that
f
(21)
dgo
= OnOn-l . .. O2
•
BO(n)
The Grassmann manifold of all oriented E P through 0 is the quotient space SO(n)jSO(p) X SO(n - p), whose total volume is On" ·OdOp·· .0 2 On-p " .0 2 • It follows that the total volume of the Grassmann manifold Gr(p) of all unoriented E P through 0 is (22)
f
dE"(O)
= On ... O)jOp .. . O)On_p ... 0) .
Gr ( p)
Let E~ t Gr(p) be a fixed linear subspace of dimension p through O. Let E~ and E P be spanned by the vectors e~ and ek respectively (1 ~ h, k ~ p), such that (23)
Then ~(E~ , E P) = Idet (e~ , ek)1 depends only on E~ and E P. Since dEP(O) is invariant under the rotations about 0, the integral f Gdp) ~N (E~ , E P) dEP(O) is independent of E~ and is a numerical constant, to be denoted by c(n, P, N).
318
105
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
We wish to show that its value is given by c(n, p, N)
(24)
=
1
/:IN dW(O)
= On+N ... 01
ON'" 01 • O,,+N .•. 01 On-,,+N ... 01
Gr(,,)
To prove this we need a formula for dE"(O), which is also useful for other purposes. In fact, let Eg be a fixed q-dimensional linear subspace through 0, with q ~ p. Let Gr*(p) be the subset of Gr(p), whose E" satisfy the condition dim (E" n (Eg)l.) = p - q, where (Eg)l. is the (n - q)-dimensionallinear subspace through 0 orthogonal to Eg . Gr*(p) differs from Gr(p) by a set of measure zero. We choose the frames Oel •. , e.. associated to E" £ Gr*(p), such that el " . " e,,_. span E" n (Eg)l. and e1 , • • • , e" span E". Let Oe 1 • • ·e,,_. f,,-.+1· . ·f.. be frames satisfying the condition that f.. -.+1 , ... , f.. are constant vectors spanning Eg . Then e, differ from f j by a proper orthogonal transformation (25)
p - q
+ 1 ~ i, j
~
n,
where U,j = (e, , fj).
(26)
Since
t..-.+l ,
(de a
,
tp)
. .. ,
t.. are constant vectors, we have
= -(dtp ,e a ) = 0,
1
~
a ~ p -
n - q
q,
+1~
p ~
n.
It follows that dW(O)
=
1\
(de a
,
e)..)(de r ,e~)
p
+1~
A,
A
= D"-·
(de a
,
t.)(de r ,e~),
a.r,a,p.
a , r , A. 1'
J.L ~
n;
p - q
+
1
~
r
~
p;
p - q
+1
~ 8 ~
n - q,
where (27)
D
= det (U)..~).
We write the last formula as (28) where (29)
is the density in the space of all E" about E"-· = E"
n
(Eg)l., and
(30) a,.
is the density in the space of all E"-· through 0 and in (Eg)l. . We now integrate both sides of the equation (28) over Gr*(p). In integrating its right-hand side, we first hold E"-· fixed and then integrate over all Ep-a
319
106
S. S. CHERN
through 0 and in (E~).L. The result is
c(n _ p
+ q, q, p
_ q)
On ... O,O,,-a .. . 0,
= 0" ... O,On-a ... 0, .
This reduces to (24) by a change of notation. In the same way we can derive for dW a formula analogous to (28). In fact, let E~-a be a fixed space of dimension n - q in En, not necessarily through 0, with q ~ p. Consider those E" such that dim (E" n E~-a) = p - q, and let E,,-a = E" n E~-a . Let (E~-a).L (respectively E,,-aCE").L) be the space through o orthogonal to E~-a (respectively the space through 0 orthogonal to w-a and parallel to E"). Both are of dimension q and the invariant t. is defined. Then we have the following density formula (31) (respectively dE"(E,,-a» is the density in the space of all (respectively all E" through E,,-a). The difference between (28) and (31) lies in the fact that in (28) all the linear subspaces under consideration are through 0, while this condition is not imposed in (31). Let fCE") be an integrable function which depends only on E,,-a = E" n En-a. Then the integration with respect to dE"(E,,-a) can be carried out, and we have where
dE,,-aCE~-a)
E,,-a in
E~-a
JfeW) dW
=
c(n - p
+ q, q, p -
q
+ 1)
(32)
= 0.+, ... O,O.-a+, ... 0,
0,,+1 ... O,On-a+' ... 0,
JfeW-a) dw-a(~-a)
JfeW-a)
dw-a(~-a).
3. A differential formula. Although we will need the formula only in the special case of the euclidean space, it is desirable to formulate the problem for a general homogeneous space, as follows: Let G be a Lie group, acting on a left coset space G/H by left multiplication. Let M', M' be submanifolds in G/H, of dimensions r, s respectively. Consider the space (33)
y =
U (M' n .,0
gM') X g,
with an obvious topology. A point in this space can be written (x
= gy, g I x I: M', y
By sending this point to (x, y) (34)
I:
I:
11[').
M' X M', we get a mapping
if;: Y-tM' X M' .
By definition we have if;-'(x, y) = (x = gHyy, gH.), where H. is the group of isotropy at y, i.e., the subgroup of all transformations of G, which leave y fixed. Suppose that G/ H has a riemannian structure invariant under G. Then JJ1' n gJvI' has a volume element cI>. , and Y has the volume element cI>.dg. The
320
107
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
problem is to express 4>.dg as a multiple of dh.Q,Q2 , where Q, , Q 2 are respectively the volume elements of Mr, M', and dh. that of H •. We wish to solve this problem for a special case: By a k-field in En is meant a point x (: En, together with an ordered set of vectors e, , ... , ek , satisfying
(e., ,er) =
1 ~ 'Y,
l)'Yr ,
T
~
k.
Let Fn • k be the space of all k-fields of En, so that Fn •o = En. We can write F n • k as a left coset space G/ H, where G is the group of all proper motions in En and H is isomorphic to SO(n - k). Let M~ be a submanifold of dimension P of En, and M r be the submanifold of F n • k , which consists of the k-fields xe, ... ek, such that x (: M~ and e l , ••• , ek are tangent to M~ at x(k ~ p). Then
+ (p - 1) + ... + (p - k) = tck + 1)(2p - k). To define a density e on M choose the vectors ek+l , ... , e~ , so that e, , ...
(35)
r
=p
r
constitute an orthonormal frame of tangent vectors to (36)
e
= "(dx, eL)(de., ,e6), 1 ~ L ~
p,
M~
, e~ at x. Then we define
1 ~ 'Y ~ k, 'Y
L • ., .6
+
1 ~
l)
~ p,
which is clearly independent of the choice of ek+' , ... , e~ . Similarly let M' be the manifold of all tangent k-fields of a sub manifold M· of dimension q in En. Since M~ amd gMO generally intersect in a submanifold of dimension p + q - n, our problem is meaningful, only when k ~ p + q - n, which we suppose from now on. We will solve our problem for the submanifolds Mr, M' in F n.k • As we will be using indices over different ranges, let us list them in the following table, which will be strictly followed through the rest of this section: 1 ~ A, B, C ~ n;
+1~
+q-
ni
+ 1 ~ A, fJ. ~ ni q + 1 ~ p, ,i ~ n; p + q - n + 1 ~ a, b ~ Pi p + q - n + 1 ~ h, l ~ q; k + 1 ~ r ~ ni 'Y + 1 ~ l) ~ p + q - n. 1 ~ 'Y, ~ ~ k; p
(37)
+q-
1 ~ a, (3 ~ p
n
i, j
~ n;
p
T,
Let OaA be a fixed frame and O'a~ the moving frame in En, i.e., the frame obtained from the former by a proper motion g. By (14) the kinematic density is (38)
dg
=
"(dO'. a~) (da~ • a6). A;B
By gMO we mean the sub manifold obtained from MO by the motion g, so that gMQ has the same relative position to D'al as MQ is to DaA . Let xeA be orthonormal frames, so that x (: 111~ and e, , ... , e~ are tangent vectors to ltfP at x. Then
(39)
(dx, ex)
= 0
321
s.
108
S. CHERN
and it is well-known that
== 0,
de~
(40)
mod dx, e" •
Similarly, let x'el be frames, such that x' I: gM" and e~ , ... , e~ are tangent vectors to gM" at x'. Let d' be the differential relative to the moving frame O'al , so that (41)
d'O' =
o.
d'a~ =
Then, as above, (d'x', e~) = 0
(39a)
and d'e~
(4Oa)
== 0, mod d'x', e~ .
Suppose g be generic, so that M" n gM" is of dimension p restrict the above families of frames by the condition
x = x',
(42)
ea.
= e~
+
q - n. We
.
Geometrically the latter means that x t M ( \ gM" and e a are the tangent vectors to M P ( \ gM" at x. The two sub manifolds M P and gM" have at x a scalar invariant, which is P
(43)
This is the invariant introduced in §2 for the spaces spanned by eo , e~ respectively in the orthogonal complement of the space spanned by ea • For a pair of hypersurfaces (p = q = n - 1) it is the absolute value of the sine of the angle between their normal vectors. Using these frames we have (44)
Let us write x
=
x'
= 0'
+ L
x~a~ .
By differentiation it follows that dO'
==
dx - d'x,
mod
da~
.
Mod dal we have therefore
A
(dx, ea)(dO', a~)
= A
(dx, ea)(dO', e~)
- A A
(dx, ea)(dx - d'x', e~)
± ±
(dx, ea)(dx - d'x', ea)(dx - d'x', e;)
A A
±~
(dx, ea)(d'x', ea)(dx - d'x', eD(dx, e~) (dx, ea)(dx, e~)(d'x', ea)(d'x', eD
A
(dx, ea)(dx, e.) (d'x' , ea)(d'x', eD.
322 THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
109
In these exterior products the indices run over the ranges agreed on in (37). In the reduction the first step follows from the fact that al differ from el by a proper orthogonal transformation, the fourth step makes use of (39a), and the fifth step uses the fact that an exterior product is zero, if it contains more than p factors involving dx. Observe that the product in the last expression is the product of the volume elements of M P and M" .
Let
so that
(U~B)
is a proper orthogonal matrix. Then
(d - d')e~ =
L U~B da~ , B
and we have
A
A
(da~ • a~)
= A
A
(de~ - d'e~ , e~).
It follows that
A
(de-y , e6)(da~ , a~)
A
A
(de-y , e.)(de~ - d'e~ , e~)
A
(de-y , e6)(de, - d'e, , e~)(def - d'ef , e~)
A
,
±
A
(de-y ,e6)(d'e"/ , e6)(de, - d'e. , e~)(def - d'e; , e~)
A
(de"/ , e6)(d'e"/ ,e6)(de, - d'e. , en(de. , e;)(de; - d'e; , e~)
r
- ±
r
±Llk
A
(de"/ , e6)(de"/ , e.)(d'e y ,e6)(d'e. , e~)(def - d'ef ,e~).
r
Here the congruence is mod d'x' and follows from (40a) in view of the relation (d'e r , e;) = -(d'e;, e.). The densities on Mr, M' are by definition respectively (45)
6 1 = A (dx, e«)(dx, e.)(de"/ ,e6)(de. , e.), 62
=
A
(d'x', e~)(d'x', e~)(d'e"/ ,e6)(d'e. ,en.
Remembering the meaning of the operator d - d', we also see that (46)
dh. =
A
r
(de; - d'e; ,e~).
Multiplying the expressions in (38), (44) and making use of the two long equations above, we get (47)
323
s.
110
S. CHERN
This is the density formula desired, the factor being t:.HI . 4. Higher sectional curvatures and mixed curvatures of a pair of riemannian manifolds. The invariants I. discussed in §1 can be generalized to the notion of a mixed curvature of a pair of riemannian manifolds. Let M P , M' be two riemannian manifolds, of dimensions p, q respectively. Let BJ , B2 be respectively the bundles of k-fields over M P , M'. Thus B, (resp. B 2 ) is the space of all xel ... ek (resp. yfl ... fk) such that x £ M P (resp. y £ M') and el , ... , ek (resp. f, , ... , fk) are k mutually perpendicular unit tangent vectors at x (resp. at y). Let 131 and 132 be the principal bundles of orthonormal frames of M P and M" respectively. Then we have (48)
where the mapping 11" is defined by taking the first k vectors of the frames . .Af3 in §1 we regard the curvature functions
1 of M and M' as scalar functions in 131 X 132 we set P
(49)
I(f, g)
=
•
~ A,~, p,
IT
~
q
Following the definition of I.
(al'" al+o)
f - g)!" (_2)/+0/2k! £.oJ 0 f31 ••• {31+0
(k -
where f, g are even integers, and the a's and (3's run from 1 to k. Clearly I(f, g) is a scalar function in B, X B2 and is thus defined for a pair of k-fields of M P and M' respectively. When M P = M' and the two k-fields are chosen to be g, will depend only on the k-plane spanned by identical, I(f, g) = 1 1 + k = f the k-field. It is then the" sectional curvature for a k-plane" of a riemannian manifold, generalizing the riemannian sectional curvature for a two-plane. This high-dimensional sectional curvature has recently been studied by various authors [6], in connection with some applications of the Gauss-Bonnet formula. The density 8 in (36), which we will now denote by 8 1 , defines a volume element in BI . The product 8 1 8 2 , where 8 2 is the volume element in B2 , gives a volume element in BI X B2 . We wish to prove the formula 0
(50)
f
,
I(t, g)8 18 2
+
= Op ... Op-HIO, .. , O.-HI~/(MP)~o(M·),
B 1 XB .
provided that AC and M' are both compact. To prove this formula we fix a point (x, y) £ M P X M' and integrate over the fiber y;-I(X, y), i.e., over all k-fields with origins at x and y. Let e~ amd f~ be fixed orthonormal frames at x, y respectively and let P~mTl , Q~"P' be the values of the curvature functions for these frames. For the k-fields given by
324
111
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
we have
Thus the integrand is a polynomial F in Ual , Vpx , of even degrees in each of these sets of variables, and no Ual or Vpx appears in a power higher than the second. If el , ... , ek is a k-field at x, replacement of Ual by -Ual , for a fixed I and all a, will give a new k-field at x. This means that the terms in F, which give a non-zero value to the integral, must contain each Ual (and similarly each vpx) exactly in its square. It follows that the only terms of F to be concerned are those for which al, ... ,af and af+l , ••• ,af+. are permutations of {3l,' . " {3f and {3f+l , • •• , (3f+g respectively and hence that the integral over the fiber -,p-l(X, y) is a constant multiple of If(x)I.(y), where each factor stands for the invariant defined in (7) for the manifolds M P and M O respectively. This proves (50), except for the value of the constant factor. The latter is determined by taking M P and M O to be the unit spheres in EP+l and Eo+l respectively. Then the integrand at the left-hand side of (50) is equal to 1 and the integral itself equal to
5. A Meusnier-Euler type theorem. We will pursue the situation studied in q - n. §3, where M P and gM O intersect in a submanifold AC+o- n of dimension p We will use the same notations, and in particular the ranges of indices in the table (37). The calculation of JI..(M HO - n ) in the main formula (12) needs a knowledge of I. , which in turn depends on the induced riemannian metric of M P + o- n • Our first problem is therefore to express the second fundamental forms of MP+o-n in terms of those of M P and gM O and the relative position of their tangent spaces. For the families of frames xeA and xel introduced in §3, let
+
(51)
(dx, eA), (deA , eB),
w~ =
(d'x',
W~B
=
W~
= O.
e~),
(d'e~ ,e~),
so that (52)
Equations (39) and (39a) can be written (53)
while (40) and (40a) allow us to put, when restricted to AP+o-n, (54)
325
s.
112
S. CHERN
where (55) The second fundamental forms of M P and gM O restricted to their intersection M P + o- n are respectively (56)
We wish to express (e. , d2 x) as a linear combination of II~ and II~ . For this purpose set (57)
so that (58) Under our hypothesis (up.), so that
Idet (up.) I =1= 0, let (Vb~) be the inverse matrix of
!:;,.
(59) Then we have (60) where V.~
(61)
= -
L v.pup~ . p
The condition
(e~
, e~)
op. is expressed by
(62)
=
op<
L. up.u•• + L up~u.). . ~
From (60) we have (63)
II.
= (e. ,d2x) =
L
ha.fl"Ja"'{J
=
a , {J
L v.pII~ + L va~II~ . ~
p
For n = 3, p = 2, and gM a plane, this is essentially the classical Meusnier's theorem. It follows from the structure equations of the euclidean space that the curvature forms of the induced riemannian metric on MP+o-n and its second fundamental forms are related by O
(64)
a{J
=
t
L
'Y , 6
Sa{J'Y6"''Y
/\
"'6 =
-
L
"'ai /\
"'Pi,
326
113
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
whence (65)
To express
Sa~.,~
ha~~
in terms of
,
h~p~
, we introduce the quantities
p a~.,a = -
Lx
(ha~.,h~M - haMh~.,),
Qa~.,a
L
(h~p-yh~pa - h~p~h~n)'
(66) =
-
p
which are the curvature functions of M P, gM< respectively. Put also H a~.,H,. = (67)
ha~.,h~,.a
- haMhp,.., ,
H~~.,ap~ = h~~.,h~pa
- h~~ah~p-y ,
and (68)
Then we find, after a little calculation, (69) It is to be observed that each set of the quantities P a~.,a , Qa~.,a , La~.,a satisfies the symmetry relations (6). Formula (69) expresses the curvature functions of 1111>+<-" in terms of those of M Pand gM< and the" mixed curvatures" LaP." •
6. Proof of the main fonnula. In order to prove our formula (12) we take the differential formula (47) with k = p + q - n and carry out the integrations after multiplying both sides by I.(M P +<-"). Integration of the left-hand side obviously gives a constant multiple of J JL.(M P (\ gM<) dg. However, (47) is established under the assumption Il 0, and a crucial question is that of the convergence of the integral at the right-hand side. By definition Vb~ is equal to a cofactor of the matrix (up.) divided by Il. From (68) and (61) it is seen that Lap.,a is equal to 1/ 112 times a quantity which is bounded near Il = o. The integrand is therefore equal to IlPH-,,+1-. times a bounded quantity, and is itself bounded near Il = 0, since e ~ p + q - n. Since the set of g for which Il = 0 is of measure zero in the group of proper motions in E", it suffices to evaluate the integral at the right-hand side under the assumption Il O. To integrate the right-hand side in question (i.e., the right-hand side of (47) multiplied by I.(MP+<-n», we first keep fixed a frame in the tangent space Ts to M P +<-" at x. H v is isomorphic to SO(2n - p - q). But the integrand depends only on the linear spaces spanned bye. and e; respectively. Thus it suffices to integrate over the open subset defined by Il 0 in the Grassmann manifold of all (n - q)-dimensional subspaces spanned bye; in (Tz)l., the space of dimension 2n - p - q through x and orthogonal to T z •
*
*
*
327
114
S. S. CHERN
Actual evaluation of the integral seems to be difficult. In getting its expression we could be aided by the first main theorem on vector invariants ([7], p. 53). In fact, we observe the following: 1) The integral over H. , to be denoted ·by J, is a polynomial in hax~ , h~pJf , and is a linear combination of summands of the form
2) J is invariant under the transformations
h~p~ ~
L sp.,h~~fl , ~
where (sx~), (sp~) are arbitrary orthogonal matrices of orders n - p, n - q respectively. By the first main theorem on vector invariants it follows from 2) that J is equal to a polynomial in
By 1) we see further that J must be a linear combination of the mixed curvatures 1(f, g), 0 ~ j, g ~ e, f + g = e, introduced in (49), with numerical coefficients. Application of (50) then gives (12). It remains to determine the constants c. in (12) . This will be achieved by carrying out the integration in a special case, i.e., the case when both M P and MO are spheres. 7. Determination of the constants. (70)
A. =
We wish to evaluate directly the integral
J
J1..(SP (\ gSO) dg,
where SP, So are spheres of dimensions p, q and radii 1, a respectively. We begin by a special case: Lemma. Let 8';;-1 be a fixed unit sphere in Em, and let sm-1 be the sphere of center x and radius R. Let (71)
B•
=
J (sm-1 (\ sm-1) J1..
0
where dx is the volume element in Em. Then
(72) B.
dx,
328
115
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
The right-hand side is a polynomial of degree m - 1 in R, and we will introduce the constants bii according to the equation (73)
To prove the lemma we suppose, without loss of generality, that R < 1. Let y be the distance of x from the center of S;-l . Then the radius of the sphere sm-l n S;-l is
and m-l
J.I.. (s 0
n
sm-l)
0
=
{4Y - (1 2
m-l
+Y
2)2}(m-2-
R2
4y2
•
Since dx is equal to ym-l dy times the volume element of the unit sphere in Em, we get B
•
=
0 .. 2 m -,-2
Om-1
1
18 +
1-8
y
'+1{4
y
2 _
(1 _
R2
+ Y2)2}C m-'-2)/2 dY .
This integral is elementary and can be evaluated. In fact, put
t=
y2 _
1 _
R2.
We get
Expanding the first factor under the integral sign by the binomial theorem, we see that we will be concerned with integrals of the form J(k, l)
(74)
L:
=
u k (a 2
-
2
U )1/2
du o
Elementary calculus gives (75)
L a
o
U
k(a 2
-U
2)//2
dU
=
Ok+I+3 OH1
0 1+2
k+l+l a ,
and hence (76)
J(k, l) = 0,
if k is odd,
Formula (72) then follows by elementary reductions. We now proceed to the evaluation of A • . Let Ev+\ E·+ l be respectively the linear spaces which contain SP, gS·, and let x be the center of gS·. Then gsa
329
s.
116
S. CHERN
can be identified with the pair {x, EO+!
Ix
E
E O+1 }, and we have the fiberings
(77)
where G is the space of all frames xe l . . . en in En and Gr is the Grassmann manifold of all (q + I)-dimensional linear spaces in En; 7r is defined by taking E o+1 to be spanned by en- o , ... , en . The fibers of the first fibering are isomorphic to the group of isotropy of So and have the dimension {q(q
+
1)
+ (n
- q - 2)(n - q -
1) }/2
and total volume
It follows that
A.
= 20 0 +1
•••
020n-o-l •.. O2
J
/l,(SP
n
gSQ) d(x, E O+I ),
where d(x, E O+1 ) is the density in the homogeneous space of all {x, E Q+! I x E E O+1 } • The factor 2 before the integral arises from the fact that our E O+ I is unoriented. Let Gr* be the subset of all E + 1 , such that Q
dim (EP+l
n
EO+!)
= p
+q-
n
+ 2.
Gr* differs from Gr by a subset of measure zero, and it suffices to calculate the integral over if;-I(Gr*). Let E P +! n E O+1 = E P +a- n+2, and let H be the space of all En+Q-n+2 in W+ 1 • Then we have the natural mapping
and we calculate the integral by iteration with E P+0 -n+2 fixed. It suffices to restrict to those E P +Q-n+2, whose intersection with SP is non-empty. The intersection E P+o- n+2 n SP = SP+o-n+l is then a sphere of dimension p + q - n + 1 and radius r, 0 ~ r ~ 1. The density d(x, EQ+I) can be factored as in (20), with E P replaced by EO+!. We fix E a+l and integrate over the volume element dx(E a+l ) of x E E a+l . Let E n- p- l = (E P +0 -n+2)1. be the orthogonal complement of E P +o-n+2 through the center of SP+a-n+l. A point x E E O+l can be coordinatized by its orthogonal projections Xl E E P + n + 2 and X2 E E"-P-t, and Q
-
where the right-hand members are the volume elements of Xl , X 2 in their respective spaces. Let s be the distance from X to E P+a-n+2. The intersection 2 s~+o-n+l = gSO n E +a- n+ 2 is then a sphere of radius p = (a - i)1/2, and p dx 2 (En-p-l) is equal to sn- -2 ds times the volume element of the unit sphere in En-p-l. It follows that P
330
117
THE KINEMATIC FORMULA
A.
= 00+1 •.• 010n-O-l ••• 020n-p-l
.J
dE a+1
1"
sn- p -2 ds
J
JL.(SP+a-n+l
n s~+a-n+l)
dX 1 (E P+a- n+2).
The last integral has been evaluated in the lemma, which gives
J
~ b. ,,,+a-n+l-..rp+o-n+l+'-' Pp+a- n+l- ••
n+l) d (E P+a-n+2) = SP+aJL. (s p+a-n+l", I \ 1 Xl
L.J
OSi:le .. even
By (75) we get
_ _1_ ~ b
-
0
n-p-l
L.J
O~i ~ e
0.-.+ 2
',1'+a-n+l-' 0
r
p+o-n+3-.
1'+a-,,+I-.+.
a
a-' .
i even
It remains to integrate with respect to dE a+ 1 • This is facilitated by the observation that the integrand depends only on E P + a-,,+2. Applying (32), we get
be,p+
a
a-I
p+0:-n+3-.
To integrate with respect to dEP+a-n+2(EP+l) let u be the distance of E P+a-,,+2 from the center of ~, so that r = (1 - U 2 )1/2. Then, by (17) and (18), dW+ a-,,+2(W+ 1) = dW+ a-,,+2(0)u,,-a-2 du
A•
-
On+l •.• 010p+o-n+3 0 0 0 1
p+2
q+2
~
0 0 +2- .0,,+2-.+.
L.J 0
O;!i i :;e
p+q-n+3-i
0
p+
b
0-'
',1'+a-n+l-. a
.
Comparing (12) and (78) and recalling that 1 - 0 JLi(~) = 1, p+l
1 JL.(sa) 0 a+l
= U (I-i ,
we get (79)
+q-
where the b's are given by (72) and (73), with m = p exact values of the constants c. in (12) are determined.
n
+ 2. Thus the
331
118
S. S. CHERN
A particular case of (12) is the formula
J
l-'o(MP
(80)
(\
gM") dg
=
0,+1 ... 0 2 0.+ 0 -.+ 1 l-'o(~)l-'o(M"),
Op+IOq+1
which was first given by Santalo [4]. 8. Integration over linear space; reproductivity of the invariants. It will be natural to consider the intersections ltfD (\ E" and integrate over dE". By considerations much less elaborate than the above, we can derive the following integral formula (81)
+
where M is a compact submanifold of E' and e ~ p q - n. We will not go into the details here. In conclusion we wish to remark that it would be of interest to characterize the invariants 1-'. (M P ) by geometrical properties. One of them will perhaps be the "reproductive property" expressed by (81) . P
REFERENCES
[1] BLASCHKE, W., Integralgeometrie, 3te Auflage, Berlin, 1955. [2] CHERN, S., On the curvatura integra in a riemannian manifold, Ann. of Math., 46 (1945) 674-684. [3] CHERN, S., On the kinematic formula in the euclidean space of n dimensions, Amer. J. Math., 74 (1952) 227-236. [4] SANTALO, L. A., Geometria integral en espacios de curvatura constante, Publicaciones de la Comision Nacional de la Energia Atomica, Buenos Aires, 1952. [5] SANTALO, L. A., Introduction to integral geometry, Paris, Hermann, 1953. [6] THORPE, J. A., On the curvatures of riemannian manifolds, to appear in Illinois J. Math. [7] WEYL, H ., Classical groups, Princeton, 1939. [8] WEYL, H ., On the volume of tubes, Amer. J . Math., 61 (1939) 461-472. University of California, Berkeley Date Communicated: MARCH 2, 1966
332 Reprinted from Global Analysis, Princeton Univ. Press (1970).
Intrinsic norms on a complex manifold S. S.
CHERN, HAROLD
1.
1.
LEVINE AND LOUIS NIRENBERG*
Introduction
We propose to define in this paper certain norms (or more precisely, semi-norms) on the homology groups of a complex manifold. They will be invariants of the complex structure and do not increase under holomorphic mappings. Their definitions depend on the bounded plnrisubharmonic functions on the manifold and are modelled after the notion of harmonic length introduced by H. Landau and R. Osserman [8] for Riemann surfaces (= onedimensional complex manifolds). It is possible to extend the definition to certain families of chains. In particular we get in this way an intrinsic pseudo-metric on the manifold which is closely related to that of Caratheodory [3] and to one recently introduced by S. Kobayashi [7]. To define one of these semi-norms (possibly the most significant one among those to be introduced below), let M be a complex manifold of complex dimension n. Let d e = i(J - 0) ,
(1)
so that de is a differential operator of degree one on smooth complexvalued exterior differential forms and maps a real form into a real form. Let ~ be the family of plurisubharmonic functions u of class C2 on M satisfying the condition 0 < u < 1. To a homology class I of M with real coefficients we set N{I}
=
SUP" E:}' infT ET
I T[deu
1\ (ddeu)k-l]
I
if dim I = 2k - 1 ,
(2) N{ / }
=
SUP .. E:}'
infTerl T[du 1\ deu 1\ (ddCu) k-l] I if dim 1 = 2k ,
* The first auth or was partiall y supported by NSF grant GP-8623 . The second author was partially supported by NSF grant GP-6761. The third author was partially supported by Air Force Office of Scientific Research , Grant AF- 49(638)-1719.
333
120
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
where T runs over all currents (in the sense of de Rham [10]) of 'Y. Our main theorem (c!. § 3) asserts that N{'Y} is always finite. The following properties are easily verified. (3)
N{a'Y} =
(4)
N{'Y ,
+ 'Y
2}
I a I N{'Y} ,
~ N{'Y ,}
+ N{'Y
aER; 2}
,
dim 'YI = dim 'Y2
•
Furthermore, under a holomorphic mapping, N{'Y} is non-increasing. These properties make it a useful tool in the study of holomorphic mappings. Unfortunately in the case when M is compact, the family :y will consist only of constants and the seminorm will be identically zero. We will show, however, that our definition can be refined to give a meaningful invariant which, in the case of compact Riemann ~urfaces, is "equivalent" to the extremal length of Ahlfors-Beurling [2]. As is well known, the latter, together with the classical topological invariants, gives a complete system of conformal invariants to compact Riemann surfaces, in the sense of the following theorem of Accola [1]. Let f: M - M' be a diffeomorphism between two compact Riemann surfaces under which corresponding homology classes of curves have the same extremal length. Then f is a conformal equivalence. 2.
A lemma on bounded plurisubharmonic functions in
en
Note: Just the corollary of this paragraph is used in the proof of our Theorem 1. The lemma itself is used only in Remark 3 following Theorem 2. Let en be the complex number space of dimension n with the coordinates Zk, 1 ~ k ~ n. We denote its volume element by (5)
For a real-valued smooth function v defined in an open subset of en its partial derivatives will be denoted by (6)
_ov
v · - --
,
OZi'
__ ov
Vk
,etc.
---
iJzk '
1
~
j, k ~ n.
We recall that such a function is called pluris'u,bharmonic if the hermitian matrix (Vjk) is positive semi-definite; v is called pluriharmonic if (Vik) = 0 or dd"v = O.
334
121
INTRINSIC NORMS
Let v be a plurisubharmonic negative-valued function of class C 2 in a polydisc LEMMA.
6.: 1 Zi
in C".
1
< ri ,
1~ i
~
n ,
Let 6. 1 be a compact subpolydisc Zi 1 ~ Pi
< ri
1~ i ~n • Then there is a constant A independent of v, depending only on the numbers Pi' ri, 1 ~ i ~ n, such that for the integral of any l' x l' minor of (-Vi"k/V) over 6. 1 we have the estimate 1
,
(7)
We prove the lemma by induction on r. a stronger form of (7), namely,
For r = 1 we prove
( 7')
1
~
i, k
~
n.
Since (ViI.) is a positive semi-definite matrix, we have 21 ViI. 1~ Vii + Vk"k. Hence it suffices to prove (7') for i = k. Let t;; ~ 0 be a C- function with support in 6. and equal to one in 6. 1 ' Then, by Green's theorem we have
~(~:
+1 ~ nt;;2dV=~(:kv)"kt;;2dV=2~~ t;;t;;"kdV ~ ~(+I ~
the integrations being over 6..
12t;;2
+2
1
t;;k IZ)dV ,
It follows that
which yields (7'). To proceed by induction we suppose the truth of (7) for r-l. Since v is plurisubharmonic, the absolute value of a general r x r minor of (ViI.) is less than or equal to the maximum of the principal minors of order r. It therefore suffices to prove (7) for a principal minor, and we can restrict ourselves to the case il = kl = 1, ... , ir = kr = r. We set 7[f' =
2- 2r ( ~
) ,,-r
A
k>r
dz k A dz k
335
122
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
and choose Cas before.
Then we have
r)6 (ddcv)r A '1fr ~ r ::( dd'v)r A Y -v )6-V
dV r =
(-v)
- r
~4
1
dv A d'v A (dd'v),-' C'1fr - ~ dC A d'v A (dd'v),-' (_V)'+l
6
(-v)'
where the last equality follows from Green's theorem. dC Ad'v -dv Ad'C = i(iJ +aK A (a -iJ)v- i(iJ+a)v A (a -
Av,
Since
oK
= 2i(ac A av - iJC A iJv) ,
it contains no term of type (1,1).
r
L
It follows that
r
dC A d'v A (dd'v),-l A '1fr = dv A d'C A (dd'v),-' A '1fr , (_v)r )6 (-v)'
and by Green's theorem this is equal to _
1 r -1
r
L
dd'C A (dd'v),-l A V . (_V)'-l
On the other hand, one sees easily that dv A d'v A (dd'v)r-l A V is a non-negative multiple of d V. Hence we get Ir ~
1
r - 1
r
L
dd'C A ( dd'v )r-, A '1fr ,
-v
and the desired inequality (7) follows from induction hypothesis. COROLLARY. Let the polydiscs ~, ~, be defined as in the lemma. Let u be a CZ-plurisubharmonic function in ~ with o < u < 1. Then there is a constant B independent of u such that for any r x r minor of (U ik ) we have the estimate
To deduce this corollary from the lemma we set v = u - 1. Then 0 < - v < 1 and abs.
~ _ l _ abs .
-
(-v)'
336
123
INTRINSIC NORMS
Thus the corollary follows from the Lemma and (7'). For r = 1 the corollary was proved by P. Lelong [9]. The lemma proved above has a real analogue whose proof is similar. Let v be a negative convex function of class C2 in a domain g) in R", i.e., a function whose hession matrix is positive semidefinite,
Ei,j V.i.jei~j. ~ 0
0
Fo?" any subdomain K with compact closure in constant A, independent of v, such that
rJK{I v.v.
k
I ~ + -l-Iany 7' x Ivl r
3.
r minor of (v
g),
the're is a
j)l}dV ~ A.
i %%
Semi-norms and their properties
Using the definition (2) we shall prove the theorem. THEOREM 1. Let M be a complex manifold and / a homology class with real coefficients. Then N{t} is finite. To prove the theorem, let T be a closed current belonging to /0 By a theorem of de Rham [10, §. 15], there exist operators RT, AT whose supports belong to an arbitrarily small neighborhood of the support of T such that (9)
RT = T
+ bAT + AbT ,
where b is the boundary operator of currents. The operator R is a regularizing operator, constructed by convohtion with a smooth kernel, which is given by (10) where"", is a closed C~-form with support in a neighborhood of the support of T. Since bT = 0, there exists in every homology class a regular current and it suffices to show that upper bound independent of u, where
IP = dCu A (ddCu)k-l , IP = du A dCu A (ddCu)k-l , Consider first the case dim / = 2k - 1. we have
LIP A "'" has a finite dim / = 2k - 1, dim / = 2k .
By Green's theorem
337
124
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
Since..;r is a fixed C--form, it follows from our Corollary in § 2 that this integral is bounded in absolute value by a constant independent of u E 1"; If dim 'Y = 2k, we have, since dy = 0,
L
L
u(ddCu)k 1\ ..;r •
The existence of an upper bound for the absolute value of this integral again follows from our Corollary. The following theorem is an immediate consequence of our definition. THEOREM 2. Let HI (M, R) be the l-dimensional homology group of M with real coefficients. Then N{'Y}, 'Y E H,(M, R), defines a semi-norm on the real vector space H,(M, R), i.e.,
N{a'Y} =
<11) N{'Y l
+
'Y2} ~
I a I N{'Y} , N{'Y l} + N{'Y2}
aER; ,
'Y l , 'Y2 E H,(M, R) .
Moreover, under a holomorphic mapping f: M -. P we have
(12) where f* is the induced homomorphism on the homology classes, and the semi-norms are taken in M and P respectively. Remark 1. If the closed currents TlJ T2 of 'Yare such that T1[
+ (1
- t)T2}[
while the current tTl + (1 - t)T2 still belongs to 'Y. Therefore in the definition (2) we need only consider functions u for which
(13)
dim 'Y = 2k - 1 ,
du 1\ (ddCu)k = 0 ,
dim'Y = 2k • In § 5 we will give examples for which N{'Y} is a norm i.e., N{'Y} > 0 when 'Y *- o. Remark 2. The family, 1", of plurisubharmonic functions on M with values between 0 and 1 can be used to define another seminorm which assigns to a homology class 'Y the number {13a)
N'{'Y} = suP.. ;€~ infT€T I T[dCu o 1\ ddcu l 1\ ... 1\ ddCu k ]
I,
if dim 'Y = 2k
+
1
338
125
INTRINSIC NORMS
N'{'Y} =
sUP.,e~
inf Ter I T[du o /\ d Cu , /\ dd cu 2
/\
•••
/\
ddCu k] I ,
if dim'Y = 2k • The proof of finiteness of N'('Y) requires a slight modification of the preceding arguments. The analogue of the corollary needed here is Let the polydiscs ~, ~, be defined as in lemma of § 2. Let u" u 2 , •• ' . Ur be C 2 plurisubharmonic functions in ~ with 0 < u, < 1. Then there is constant C independent of the u,' such that if J = (j" . ", ir) and K = (ku "', k r) 1 ~ i, < ... < ir ~ nand 1 ~ k, < ... < kr ~ n, LEMMA.
where UJK is the coefficient of dZ;, /\ dZ k, /\ ••• /\ dZ;r 1\ dZ kr in dd cu , /\ ..• /\ ddcu" and dV is the element of 'Volume in C". To prove this we note first that the matrix with (J, K)'h entry, U JK is positive semi-definite (by induction on r), and so we need only consider the case J = K = (1, 2, "', r). Then using the notation and
technique of the lemma of § 2, we have
rj.l, I UJJ I d V = rj
6,
~
dd cu , /\ ... /\ ddcu r /\
L(·ddCu , /\ ... /\ ddCu r /\ ,y
= - )~ d( = -
=
,y
/\ d Cu , /\ dd"u 2
/\
•••
ddcu r /\
,y
L
du , /\dd Cu 2 / \ · · ·/\dd"ur/\d"(/\,y
~ 6 U, . dd"u 2 / \
•••
/\
ddCu r /\ dd"( /\
,y -
Theorem 2 and Remark 1 following it are true for N', and N';:;:; N. The equations replacing (13) and (13a) are their multilinear versions. (13')
(IS'a)
dd"u o /\ ... /\ ddcUk = 0 , for N' on H 2 k+l(M, R) . c duo /\ dd u , /\ '" /\ dd"u k = 0 , for N' on H 2k (M, R) .
Another, possibly larger, semi-norm results if we change the definition of N' by allowing U o to be any C2 function with 0 < U o < 1, but still requiring u" .. " Uk to be in ~. The other norms which we introduce may also be modified in a similar manner with the aid .of k + 1 functions in place of one.
339 126
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
Remark 3. Another seminorm can be defined by the consideration of a different family of functions. Let ~I be the family of negative C 2-functions, defined locally up to a multiplicative positive constant, which are plurisubharmonic. For such a function v the forms (14)
dv
dd"v
v
v
are well defined on M. With the aid of the functions of fine, to a homology class 'Y, N {'Y} = sup I
.e~,
~I
we de-
infTer I T[ d'v /\(_V)k (dd'v )k-l ] I ' if dim 'Y = 2k-- 1 ,
(15)
N {'Y} = sup '
ve~,
inf
Ter
I T[ dv /\ d'v /\ (dd'v)k-'] I (_V)k+' ' if dim 'Y = 2k .
By applying the Lemma in § 2 it can be proved that N,{'Y} is always finite, and is hence a semi-norm in the homology vector space HI(M, R) (l = 2k - 1 or 2k). Unfortunately we know no example for which N,{'Y} is not zero. In particular, if dim 'Y = 1, then necessarily N,{'Y} = O. It may be observed that in the proof of Theorem 1, only the property of local boundedness of the functions u is utilized. We will therefore introduce wider families of functions and thereby generalize the semi-norms introduced above. Let 61.[ = {U;} be a locally finite open covering of M. We denote by ~(GU) the family of plurisubharmonic C2-functions U;: U; - R defined in each member of the covering which satisfy the following conditions: ( 1) the oscillation of U; in U; is less than one; ( 2) du; = du; in U; n U; *- 0. The latter defines a closed real one-form in M. Similarly, d"u; and dd'u; are also well defined in M. Without ambiguity, we can denote them without the indices. Analogous to (2) we define N{'Y, GU}
=
SUPue~(ql)
N{'Y, GU}
=
SUP"e~lql)
(16)
infTer I T[d'u /\ (ddCu)k-l] I if dim 'Y = 2k - 1 , inf Ter I T[du /\ d'u /\ (dd"u)k-l] I if dim 'Y = 2k •
340 127
INTRINSIC NORMS
Let 7r: M -+ M be the universal covering manifold of M and let be a fundamental domain on M. We denote by 1"( U) the family of plurisubharmonic C2-functions on M such that their oscillation in is less than one and their differentials are well defined on M. We define
a
a
N{'Y,
a} =
SUP"E~(UI infTET I T[dCu 1\ (dd"u)k-I]
I,
if dim 'Y
(17)
N{'Y,
a}
= 2k -
= SUP.. e:T
1,
I,
if dim 'Y = 2k • We will suppose of the fundamental domain fJ that each of its points is in the interior of the union of fJ and a finite number of its translates by deck transformations. By a partition of unity the proof of Theorem 1 also gives the following theorem. THEOREM
3.
The N{'Y, GU} and N{'Y, fJ} defined in (16) and
(17) are finite and define seminorms in the homology vector spaces
HI(M, R). Between them and N{'Y} there are the inequalities (18)
N{'Y}
~
N{'Y, GU} ,
Addendum. For non-compact complex manifolds M and P and fa holomorphic map from M to P, we do not in general have an inequality analogous to (12) for the semi-norms, N{· .GU} and N{·, U}.
a
However, let and V be fundamental domains for the universal covering spaces M and P and let 1 cover f. Then if l( a) is covered by a finite number T of deck-transforms of V, we have N'p{f*('Y), V} ~ TkNM{'Y,
a} ,
for dim 'Y = 2k - 1 or 2k - 2.
In particular, if M is compact we always have such inequalities. Similarly, let GU be a simple open covering of M, that is a locally finite open covering of M each member of which is simply connected, and let "0 be an arbitrary, locally finite open covering of P. If for any element Ui E GU, f( Ui ) is covered by S or fewer elements of "0, we again have for dim 'Y = 2k - 1 or 2k - 2 . Of course if M is compact and GU is simple, we'have such inequalities.
341
128
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
4.
Comparision of semi-norms.
Very little is known about the relations between the different semi-nonns. If we apply the above Addendum to the case that M = P is compact and f is the identity map, we find that the equivalence class of N{·, t1} and the equivalence class of N{ ., Gtl} are independent of the choice of fundamental domain tJ and simple covering U respectively. Both of these facts are implied by 4. Let M be a compact complex manifold without boundary. Let Gtl = {U.} be a finite open simple covering of M, and let tJ be a fundamental domain in the universal covering manifold of M. Then the seminorms N{'Y, Gtl} and N{'Y, tJ} are equivalent, Le., there is a constant C> 0, independent of "1, such that THEOREM
(19)
It follows that for any two finite simple open coverings Gtl and "0 the semi-norms N{'Y, Gtl} and N{'Y, "O} are equivalent. In fact, if a point of U. is lifted to a point of tJ, the lifting of U. to if is uniquely detennined. It follows that if u E :J( tJ), then the oscillation of u on each of the U. is bounded by some constant c. Hence c-1u E :J(Gtl), from which the second inequality of (19) follows, with C = ck or CHI according as dim "1 = 2k - 1 or 2k. In a similar way it is easily seen that if u E :J(Gtl) then c-· u E :J( tJ) for some constant c and the first of (19) follows. If M is a compact Riemann surface and "1 is a one-dimensional homology class, the extremal length ).,("1) of Ahlfors-Beurling is defined by (20)
where p ~ 0 ranges over all lower semicontinuous densities which are not identically zero [2].
Let M be a compact Riemann surface without boundary and Gtl = {U.} a finite open simple covering of M. Then the semi-norms N{'Y, Gtl} and ).,~('Y) defined over the one-dimensional homology group HI (M, R) are equivalent, Le., there is a constant C > 0, independent of'Y E HI (M, R), such that THEOREM
5.
342
129
INTRINSIC NORMS
(21) We proceed to prove this theorem. For u E J'(GU) we set p =
I U I. Let C be any closed curve belonging to the homology class 'Y. Since d
L I d"u I ~ 2 L I U II d. I , Z
and hence infeST
LI dCu I ~
2}"!('Y)HL
I U z 12 dXdy}i
•
On U, the oscillation of u is less than 1. It follows that on any eompact subset K of U, we can find a uniform bound for
~ ~K I u~ 12 dxdy for all harmonic functions u. Hence there is a constant C, depending only on q[ such that
Thus infc£T
LI d"ul ~
2C,}"!('Y).
Since this holds for all u E J'(GU), the last inequality of (21) follows. To prove the first inequality of (21) we make use of a theorem of Accola [1] which says that there is a harmonic one-form (J on M representing the homology class 'Y such that (22) where II (J II is the L 2-norm of (J. In U, we write (J = du, where u is a harmonic function defined up to an additive constant. Then we have },,('Y) =
II (J W =
2
~
LI
u.12 dxdy •
On the other hand, by standard results on harmonic functions we have
I osc u in U, I ~ const
0LI
U.
12 dxdy)t •
Thus we may suppose u be so chosen that on each U"
343
130
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
o < u < C2A.~('Y)
= a ,
say, where C2 is a constant. It follows that u/a E ~(GU). Since d'u is closed, we have, for a current T E 'Y, T ( dCu ) a
= ~ f dcu /\ a = ~ r a* /\ a a )M
=
J}[
a
~ II a W= ~ A.~('Y) a C2
•
Hence A.~('Y) ~ C 2N{'Y, GU}, and the first inequality of (21) is proved. Remark. From the comparison with the extremal length it seems natural to extend our definition to a family of chains of a fixed dimension. We could also take the integrals of the absolute values of the corresponding differential fonns. For instance, let G be a family .of chains of dimension 2k - 1. We define (23)
N{G} = sUP,,':f" inf"G
LI
d'u /\ (dd'u)k-l i •
Unfortunately we are unable to prove that N{G} is finite, except the following case. If k = 1 and G contains all curves homo topically equivalent to a closed curve, then N{G} is finite. 5.
Some examples
In C .. with the coordinates
Zk,
1~ k
~
n, we set
(24)
We consider the annulus A .. defined by 1 < r < a. The homology group H 2 .. _ 1(A .. , Z) is free cyclic and we denote by 'Y its generator defined by the natural orientation of Cn • By definition we find d' log r =
;r~ Ek (zkdz k - zkdz k) ,
(25)
ddClogr = ;. {r2Ekdzk/\dzk_(Ekzkdzk)/\(Ekzkdzk)}. The differential form in the last expression is a real-valued twoform of type (1,1). It remains unchanged when Zk are multiplied by the same factor. This means that if we denote by "y:
C.. -
to} -+ P"-'
the identification of the space of lines through 0 in C.. with the
344 131
INTRINSIC NORMS
complex projective space P"-l of dimension n - 1, dd e log r can be regarded as a form in P"-l. The function u = log r/log a satisfies in A" the condition 0 < u < 1. Since P"-l is of real dimension 2n - 2, we have (ddeu)" = 0 •
(26)
It follows that the integral (27)
~d"U
1\ (ddeu)"-l =
rde log r
1
(log a)" )
1\ (dd" log r)"-l
over a cycle of the homology class 'Y depends only on 'Y. It is an easy computation that over the unit sphere in C" the form d" log r(dd elog r)"-l
is equal to (n - 1)! 2"-1 times its volume element. Using the value of the volume of the unit sphere in C", we find that the integral (27) is equal to (21r/log a)". By definition we have N{'Y} G
(28)
(lo~1ra
)" > 0 .
Thus N{I} is a norm on H 2 n _ I (A", R). Since the norm is non-increasing under a holomorphic mapping, we derive from this the theorem: Let f: A" - + A" be a holomorphic mapping. Then f* 'Y = ± 'Y or 0, f* being the induced homomorphism on homology. This generalizes a theorem of M. Schiffer [12] and H. Huber [6] for n = 1. We do not know the exact value of N{'Y}. In the case n = 1 Landau and Osserman [8] showed that the equality sign holds in (28). Let U be the domain: 0 ~ arg z < 21r. We wish to show that for n = 1 we have N{I} = N{I,
(29)
U}
21r log a
=
In fact, let u be a harmonic function in F( U). Imagining the ring slit on the positive x-axis between 1 and a, the function u is well defined in U. It suffices to prove the inequality
I~
I I~
d"u = 1_1 = '
2~ 0
I
rU,dO::;; -
21r , log a
where z = re i 8 • Let S denote the operator of averaging with respect to angle. Since Ue is periodic, it is easily seen that v(r) = Su
345
132
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
is harmonic. Thus v = clog r, with c It follows that
Irvrl ~
~
1/log a, since 0 < v < 1.
_1_,
log a
which is the inequality to be proved. Our next example is concerned with the torus M = 8 1 X 8 1 and with I the homology class of the torus itself. For any current TEl we have then T[gJ] =
L
9' ,
is a Coo two-form. We consider M to be covered by the tJ be the fundamental domain consisting of the open square where
gJ
(x, y)-plane. Let
o<
x < 1, 0 < y < 1
and the segments y = 0, 0 ~ x < 1 and x = 0, 0 ~ y < 1. We shall prove that N{" tJ} = 1. For this purpose let U E:J( tJ). Since du is well defined on M and M is compact, we have \ dd'u = O • • ft[
Since u is plurisubharmonic, this implies dd
u =
(30)
I!Z
+ az .
For TEl we have T[du 1\ dCu] =
L
du 1\ d'u =
4~
L1
Uz
12 dxdy
=
41 a 12.
Now the values of u at the corners of tJ are 0, a + ii, i(a - ii). a(1 + i) + ii(1 - i). The fact that the oscillation of u in tJ is at most one means that (30a)
2IReal<1, 2 i Re a(1 + i) 1 < 1 ,
2IImal<1, 2 1 Re a(1 - i) 1 < 1 .
These imply 1 a 1 < (1/2). Consequently we have
N{" tJ} = suP.. 4 1a 12 = 1 .
346
133
INTRINSIC NORMS
6.
Intrinsic pseudo-me tries
In § 4 we remarked about the possibility of defining the seminorm of a family of chains of a fixed dimension. The simplest case is the family I of curves (rather than chains) having two given points z, (E M as boundary and containing all curves homotopic to a given one in the family. To indicate that the notions so introduced will be pseudo-distances on M we will change our notation and repeat the definitions as follows: py(Z, () = SUPUE ~ infTEY I T[dCu]
(31)
I,
= supuE :f«11l infTEY I T[dCu] I , U) = supuE:f
(32)
py(z, (; ('11)
(33)
py(z, (;
We shall omit the subscript ~/ if the family consists of all (smooth) curves joining z and ( and we shall denote py(z, () by Pc(z, () if the family consists of all chains joining z and (. Clearly p ~ PY for the three definitions, with equality if M is simply connected. The definitions (32) and (33) refer respectively to a locally finite open covering "l.l of M and a fundamental domain U in the universal covering manifold .Iii of M. In all three formulas T denotes a curve wi th z - ( as boundary. As in the general case it suffices to restrict ourselves to functions u which satisfy the additional condition ddCu = 0, i.e., which are pluriharmonic. From the definitions we have
p(z, ()
(34)
~
p(z, (; (11) ;
p(z, () ~ p(z, (; U) .
Remark. If M is compact, then p(z, () = O. However, the quantities in (32), (33) need not be zero. Consider for example the torus discussed in the end of the last section with U defined as before. The harmonic functions in :J( U) are given by (30), where a satisfies the inequalities (30a). For z, ( on the torus we have \~ T[d Cu ] = j. dcu = 2 1m [a((- - z)] ,
(35)
where z and ( are points in the plane, the covering surface, lying over z and ( respectively. N. Kerzman has found that in this case p(z, ~; U) is equal to the maximum of the horizontal and vertical distances from ( - z to the sides of a period square containing ..,p - z . ~
THEOREM
G.
The qna.ntities p(z, (), p(z, (; Gtl), p(z, (;
U) are
347
134
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
pseudo-distances, i.e., they are finite and satisfy the triangle inequalities. The finiteness follows from the fact that the only functions u which enter into consideration are bounded pluriharmonic functions, so that their first partial derivatives are uniformly bounded on compact sets. The last statement follows immediately from definition. We wish to compare our pseudo-metric with those of Caratheodory [3] and S. Kobayashi [7]. We recall their definitions as follows. Let D be the unit disk I, I < 1, whose hyperbolic distance we denote by h('I, '2), '1, '2 ED. Then the Caratheodory pseudodistance is defined by c(z,I;:) = sup h(J(z), f((») ,
(36)
as f runs over the family of all holomorphic mappings f: M To define the Kobayashi pseudo-distance let
->
D.
be holomorphic mappings which satisfy the conditions
z EnD) , j;(D)
We choose
Zo
= Z, Zi
Let
ai'
I;:
E
fk(D) ,
n fi+l(D)
=F 0 ,
Zll ••• , Zk_lI Zk
E
j;(D)
= (,
n fi+l(D)
such that
,
bi E D be points satisfying Zi_l = j;(a;), Zi = f i(b;) ,
Then the Kobayashi pseudo-distance is defined by d(z, 1;:) = inf El&i:>k h(a i , b;) ,
(37)
where the infimum is taken with respect to all the choices made. Kobayashi proved that c(z, () ~ d(z, (). We will establish the theorem. Between the pseudo-distances the following inequalities are valid THEOREM 71 •
(38)
< IT c·.( z, ("V) ="2
< 7r P( w, " Y) < Pc ( z, '".V) ="2 ,,=
d( Z, '"r) •
1 In our original proof we showed c ~ (2 '::)p ~ d. Kerzman observed that our argument could be used to prove the more general result (38).
348
135
INTRINSIC NORMS
The first inequality becomes an equality if M is simply connected.
By the conformal mapping T
(39)
we map u + iv. and the induced ( 40)
= i - exp (rriw) i
+ exp (rriw)
,
the unit disk D onto the infinite strip S: 0< u < 1, w = Under (39) the real axis of D corresponds to the line! + iv origin of D to the point w = t. S has a hyperbolic metric from that of D by the mapping (39), which is given by ds Z
=
---,--_dT_d_f=-2(1 - cos 2rru)
(1 - n)'
Thus the hyperbolic distance on S between the points t and t + vi is (41)
Since S admits the group of hyperbolic motions, we can normalize the holomorphic mappings M -- S such that the image of z is the point ~ and the image of ~ lies on the line Re w = t. Hence the Caratheodory pseudo-distance can be redefined as follows. (42)
where g runs over all holomorphic mappings g: M -- S such that =!. If a denotes the segment joining g(z) to
g(z) = k and Re g«() g«(), we have
1m g(O =
L L
dCu =
dv =
~: dcu
.
where u = Re g is a pluriharmonic function which belongs to the family Y. Since T[d Cu] = 1m g«() for any chain T this proves that c(z, ()
~
-%- Pc(z, 0 .
To prove equality consider a pluriharmonic function u in :T. If among all chains T, infT I T[d'u] I 0, then the integral of dcu around any closed path vanishes. But then the function
*
v(z) =
r' dOu
J
'0
is well defined independent of the path of integration and is there-
349
136
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
fore a conjugate pluriharmonic function of u. Hence w = u defines a holomorphic mapping 10: M -> S. By (40) we have
; I dv i ~
+ iv
ds .
Since dv = d'u, it follows that ;
p,(z, () ~ c(z, ~) ,
and hence
If M is simply connected then to every pluriharmonic function u in J" there exists a conjugate pluriharmonic function v defined up to an additive constant. It follows that for any chain T bounded by ( and z, T[d'u] equals v(~) - v(z) and is therefore independent of the chain T. Consequently p,(z,
0
= p(z, () .
To prove the last inequality in (38) we use the fact that ,0 is non-increasing under a holomorphic mapping. We will also follow the above notation in the definition of the Kobayashi pseudo-distance. Let li be the straight segment in D joining a i to bi and let fi(l;) = L i , 1 ~ i ~ k. Let u be a pluriharmonic function on M, with 0< u < 1. Then we have
..!!..- I r 2
JL;
d'u
I~ ~ po(a 2
i ,
b;) = h(a;, b;) ,
where Po is our metric in D. The last equality follows from what we just proved, as D is simply connected. It follows that
+IEi ~L; dc~~1 ~ Ei
h(a;, b;) ,
l~i~k.
Now the right-hand side may be chosen as close to d(z, () as we like, while the left-hand side is not smaller than (rr /2)(p(z, (»). This implies the desired inequality. Remark. We do not know when (7':/2)p(z, () = d(z, (), nor how (rr/2)p(z, (; U) compares with d(z, (). Using chains one may also introduce pseudo-metrics p ,(z. (; 011) and ,o,.(z, (; U); but on a compact manifold these are zero.
350
137
INTRINSIC NORMS
7. Remarks on the differential equations
The differential equations (13) and (13a) are, in general, overdetermined systems of non-linear differential equations. For k =1. equation (13), ddcu = 0,
asserts that u is pluriharmonic, while in general, equation (13) means that the rank of the hessian U;j is less than k. Almost nothing is known about the solvability of these equations. The case k = n reduces to a single equation which is the complex analogue of the Monge-Ampere equation det {U;i} = 0 ; it is non-linear degenerate elliptic in view of our requirement that the matrix U ;j be positive semi-definite. It would be interesting to formulate boundary value problems for these equations. We remark that the equation (ddCu)" = 0 also arises as the Euler equation for a stationary point of the functional I(u) =
(43)
L
d11, 1\ d"u 1\ (ddcu)"-l
under, perhaps, some boundary conditions. Consider for example the class B of C2 plurisubharmonic functions which are required to equal one on some components of the (smooth) boundary of a compact manifold M, and zero on the others. If v is a member of B, let 'Y denote the (2n - I)-dimensional homology class of the level hypersurfaces v = constant. Then we observe that for T E 'Y, if v satisfies (dd' v)" = 0, (44)
\ dv 1\ (dd' v)" -' = \ dv 1\ d'v 1\ (ddCv)"-' = I(v) .
J7'
)M
It is not difficult to verify that the functional I is convex and one is therefore tempted to conjecture that (45)
N {/ }
= infveB I(v)
.
If this is the case then N{'Y}, which is defined as the supremum of a functional would also be characterized as the infimum of another, a situation that often arises in, so called, dual variational problems in the calculus of variations. The problem of minimizing l(v) seems an interesting one. In the case of the annulus 1 < I z I < a,
351 138
CHERN, LEVINE, AND NIRENBERG
the function Vo = log I z Iflog a is indeed the minimizing function, since the convex functional I is stationary at Vo. The differential equation (13) has a real analogue, which is a2u ) ;£ k , rank ( -.~-. ax'ox'
(46)
1 ;£ i, j ;£ n ,
where u(xt, ... , x") is a real-valued Cqunction in the real variables xt, "', x". Equation (46) and its generalizations have been studied in connection with some geometrical problems (cf. [4], [5], [11]). In fact, if u = U(XI, " ' , xn) is considered as the equation of a nonparametric hypersurface in the eu~lidean (n+1)-space E"+t, the left-hand side of (46) is called the index of relative nullity, being the rank of its second fundamental form. Hartman and Nirenberg [5, p. 912] proved that for n = 2, k = 1 (in which case condition (46) means that the surface has zero gaussian curvature) the surface is a cylinder if U(XI, x') is defined for all (Xl, x2) E R2. For higher dimensions a similar result is not true, as shown by an example of Sacksteder [11]. In this respect we wish to refer to a general theorem of Hartman [4] concerned with sufficient conditions for an isometrically immersed submanifold in an euclidean space to be cylindrical. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY BRANDEIS UNIVERSITY COURANT INSTITUTE. NEW YORK UNIVERSITY.
REFERENCES [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
R. D. M. ACCOLA, Differentials and extremal length on Riemann surfaces. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 46 (1960), 540-543. L. V. AHLFORS and L. SARlO, Riemann Surfaces, Princeton University Press, Princeton , 1960. C. CARATHEODORY, Uber eine spezielle Metrik, die in der Theorie der analytischen Funktionen auftritt. Atti. Pont. Acad. Sci. Nuovo Lincei 80 (1927), 135-141. P. HARTMAN, On isometric immersions in euclidean space of manifolds with non-negative sectional curvatures. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc . 115 (1965),
94-109. [5 J - - - and L . NIRENBERG, On spherical image maps whose jacobians do not cha.nge sign. Amer. J. ~ath. 81 (1959), 901-920 . [6] H . HUBER, Uber analytische Abbildungen vvn Ringgebieten in Ringgebiete. Compos. Math . 9 (1951), 161-168. [7] S. KOBAYASHI, Invariant distance s on complex ma.nifolds and holomorphic mappings. J. ~ath . Soc. Japan 19 (1967), 460-480.
352 INTRINSIC NORMS
139
H. J. LANDAU and R. OSSERMAN, On analytic mappings of Riemann surfaces . J. Anal. Math. 7 (1959-60), 249-279. [9] P. LELONG, Sur les derivees d'une fonction plurisousharmonique. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 238 (1954), 2276-2278. [10] G. DE RHAM, Varietes Diiferentiables, Actualites Sci. et Ind. No. 1222,. Hermann, Paris, 1955. [11] R. SACKSTEDER , On hypersurfaces with no negative sectional curvatures. Amer. J. Math. 82 (1960) , 609-630. [12] M. SCHIFFER, On the mod1tlus of doubly connected domains. Quart. J. Math. 17 (1946), 197-213.
[8]
(Received September 9, 1968)
353 Reprinted from Essays on Topology and Related Topics, Springer Verlag, 1970.
Some Formulas Related to Complex Transgression RAOUL BOTT
and SHIING S. CHERN 1
1. Introduction Let X be a complex manifold of complex dimension nand rr : E -+ X a holomorphic vector bundle whose fiber dimension is also n. On E we introduce a positive definite hermitian norm N and denote by B*(E)={eEEIO
In this paper we wish to give a proof of (1) based on an explicit construction. We will follow and extend a formalism developed in the real case by H. Flanders [3]. It is possible that this formalism will be useful for later purposes.
2. Multilinear Algebra Over a Complex Vector Space Let V be a complex vector space of dimension n. Let V be its conjugate space, i.e., another copy of V with the complex structure defined by - i. The identity mapping j: V-+ V will be denoted by j(X)=X,XEV, and this mapping is antilinear: (2)
r
x
We will denote 1 also by a bar, so that = x. The exterior algebra A(V® V) has a bigrading: (3)
A(VEf)V)=LApq(V®V). 1
Work done under partial support of the National Science Foundation.
354 Some Formulas Related to Complex Transgression
e, .... , en
In fact, if (', . .. .. (' n form a oasis of V. thcn form a oasis of and an element of A''''( V EB V) is a sum of terms of the form
49
r-
The har operation acts on /l(VEB V) and is an anti-linear map of AlVEf> 17') onto itself. An clement ~EA(VEf> V) is called r('al if ~=~. The exterior algebra A(VR) of the underlying real vector space J'R of V can be identified with the real subalgebra of rca I elements of A(VEf> V). In particular. JI R itself can be identified with the real vector space of the real clements of V EB V. The space Ann(VEf> V) is one-dimensional, and it has a generator in (', /\ ('n /\ defined up to a positive factor. It therefore makes sense to talk about the sign of a non-zero real element of A"nl VEB V). If W is a second vector space, we have a direct sum decomposition
e, /\ .. . /\
en
(4) where each summand has four degrees. the superscripts being the bidegrees relative to the first factor and the subscripts those to the second factor. If (,¢'EA(VEf> j;"),
I/,I]'EA(WEB W),
we define a multiplication by
(5)
(( ®,,) ,\ (¢' ® ,,') = (~ /\
n ® (" /\ ,,').
By linearity this is extended to a multiplication in A( V Ef> V) ® l II Ef> W). Having several kinds of products, we will, in later formulas. frequently drop all multiplication signs whenever there is no danger of confusion. We observe that, if
(6) then
(7) where
(7 a)
k=(p+q)(P' +q')+(r+s)(r' +s').
3. Affine Connection Let X be a complex manifold of complex dimension m and Ti: E-+X be a holomorphie vector bundle of fiber dimension n. At a point XEX let Ex be the fiber of E and T: the cotangent space of X . We consider the COO -bundle
355 50
RAOlil. BUTT
and
SIIIIN(;
S.
CIII:Rl'
U A (E., EEl £..)0 A(T;EEl T;)~ X
(8)
xeJ
and the bundles
(9) XE.\'
whose fibers arc respectively the summands in the decompositions of the fibers of (8) according to (4) (with V and W replaced by Ex and T; respectively). Let A~: be the space of ex' sections of the bundle (9). Then A88, which we will denote by AO(X) or simply by AO, is the ring of Coo complex-valued functions on X and A~sq is a module over A O More generally. A?sO is the space of CO-forms of type (r,s) and exterior differentiation in X defines the mappings d'" . A-oO rs
(10)
-+
A- r,oOS + 1 •
An affine connection in the bundle E is a structure which allows us to extend the operators in (10) to the more general spaces A~sq . An affine connection in E is defined to be the operators (11 ) ( 12)
d=d'+d",
which have the properties : (13)
d(v+w)=dv+d\\" d(jv)=df®v+ fdr,
v,wEA68,
[EA O
An element l'E A68 (i. e., a vector field) is called holomorphic if the corresponding mapping l': X -+E is a holomorphic mapping. The connection d is said to be of type (1,0), if d" v = 0 for holomorphic v. We have the following theorem: Theorem. If d is an affine connection in E, there exists a unique collection of operators (14) (15)
d". Apq rs
-+
Apq . r+l,5'
d'" . Apq rS
-+
Apq r.s+l'
d=d'+d",
which have the following properties: lX)
/3)
d(¢+'1)=d¢+d'1, ¢,'1EA~sq, d({()=d~ (+( -1)'+s¢dC (EA{t,
y) d commutes with the bar operation and coincides with the given affine connection on .,168 and with the exterior differentiation on .,1~o.
356 Some Formulas Related to Complex Transgression
51
The proof of this theorem parallels that of Theorem 7.1 in [3] and is straightforward. We will omit it here. The local properties of an affine connection arise most readily from the consideration of a frame field. By this we mean elements ejE .1))::. 1~ i ~ 11. defined locally in a neighborhood U of X, such that e •.. .. 'C n #0. (Notice that by our convention the latter is the exterior product.) Then we .:-an write (16)
where w{ are complex-valued one-forms in U. Differentiating (16) according to our Theorem, we get (17) where
Q{ = dwi -
(18)
I
W: wi. , 1\
1 ~ i,j, k~n.
k
The matrices (19)
w=(w{),
Q=(Q{)
are called the connection and curvature matrices respectively (relative to the frame field). It can be verified (cf. [2]) that under a change of the frame field Q goes into a similar' matrix. Therefore the 2n-form
(V2~ 1)" det
Q is globally defined in X; it is called the n-th Chern form
of the affine connection. Since E is a holomorphic vector bundle, the bundle space E is a complex manifold and the projection n: E-+X is a holomorphic mapping. Over E we have the induced holomorphic bundle n* E-+E and the above results apply. We denote by (x, v), vEE;:e, a point of E and by r(..f) the cotangent space to E at (x,v). Analogous to (8) and (9) consider the bundles (20)
U
A(E;:e Ef) E;:e) ® A( r~.v) EB r~,v)) -+ E
(x.I ') eE
and (21)
U
A~s~(;:e,v) -+ E.
(x,f')eE
Let M~sq be the space of CO sections of the bundle (21). The projection n induces the mapping (22)
n *·.
Apq -+ Mpq rs rs ,
which permits us to identify A~sq with a subset of M~r
357 RAOUL BUTT and SIIIING S . CIiERN
52
The affine connection in E induces an affine connection and gives rise to the operators (23)
" M- rspq --+
(/ .
'-1I'q
n
r
.
+ l.s·
d" : M:': ---. M:'.~ +
III
If·
E
I '
with d=d' +d". By assigning v to (x. dE E. I'E Ex. we can consider I" as an clement of Albg. Similarly, we have rEM~~(\. If the connection is of type (1.0). we have dl'EM:~~ and drEAlg:. Then (24)
rx=dvdv=cx
is real and belong to
M:::
~ will play an important role later on.
4. Hermitian Structure Suppose an hermitian structure be given in our holomorphic vector bundle E, i.e., a scalar product (1',11' ) .. , XEX, v,wEE.. , which is positive definite hermitian and is C oo in x . Let e j , 1 ~ i ~ n, be a frame field and let
1 ~i,j~n .
(25)
In order to simplify the formulas which follow, we introduce the matrices (26)
so that (27)
I
~i,j,k~n.
The hermitian structure defines uniquely an admissible connection of type (1,0), whose connection matrix relative to our frame field is given by (cf. [2, p. 45]) (28)
w=d' H · H- 1
It follows from (18) that the curvature matrix is (29)
Q= -d' d" H ' H-I +d'H ' H-
1
/\
d"H·H- 1 •
Thus the elements of the matrix Q are two-forms of type (1,1) and the n-th Chern form is a form of type (n, n). Algebraically the curvature is perhaps best described by the element (30)
358 53
Some Formulas Related tll.complex Transgression
which is independent of the choice of the framt: field ej and is globally ddined in X. It can be verified thai the Bianchi identity is t:<.jui\":Ilent to the relation (31 )
dK=O.
5. The Recursive Formulas We restrict ourselves to the submanifold B*(E). i.e .. the bundle E with the zero section omitted. We introduce the elements
and t~ = It'I-
(33)
24
(4'
y~ = It,r 24)'41
II"
t~ = t~ + 2ky~(d' -d")loglvl,
t
= Irl- 2k \\.k'l
=11,
w~ = w~+kt~dloglvl,
where Ivl is the norm of v. We wish to establish the following recursive formulas (34)
k-l (d' - d") Yk'= - ('k - n-k+l t"k - I ' -I
(35)
2
d "k tk =' W
+
k W k" /I-k+ 1
1•
The method of proof is to expand the quantities introduced above in terms of v, v. The calculations being local, we choose a frame field ell "' , en such that en = V and such that the matrices in (26) take the forms (36)
H=(~ Iv~2)'
=(:
'-v-'
'-v-'
"-1
"-1
By (28) we have then (37)
1
H-
Iv~-2).
359 54
RAOUL
Ron and
SHIING
S.
C'HI!KN
and this differential form will be denoted for simplicity by II. Equation (16) !,!ives
I
do=de" = 1
())~('i=fl+l'fJ,
~j~n
where /1 stands for the terms not involving v. It follows that :x. =dl'cI'V =CXl
+ 1'0 fi + iljj fl + l''iiOii.
By induction we have the formula
where :x I does not involve v, 'V. Next we consider the curvature matrix Q = (Q;). It will be convenient to introduce the two-forms (40)
Qij
=
I
hik Qt.
I
~i,j,k~n ,
k
so that (40a)
and. because of the special form of our matrix H, we have (40 b)
By setting
cp=Q"",
(41)
Y=
we get , from (17), (42)
Observe that the matrix H- 1 Q is skew-hermitian ([2], formula (5.56», so that we have
q>+
(43)
With these new notations we write the element K in (30) as
(44)
K = I eiejQii=K 1 +vy+vy-vvcp, i, j
where Kl does not involve v,v. By induction we have (45)
K"-k= K~-k+(n -k)(vy+ vy)K~-k-l +(n -k)vvK~-k-2 { - Kl cp+(n -k-l)yY} .
360 Some Formulas Related
55
Complex Transgression
10
From (39) and (45) we get expansions for I. and Wk' which arc (46)
(k
=k(I}-O)rl+(II-k)l'f({Jy-/1 Y)ll-1 K n I - - \I'l=l)f.l k K n -
II-k
k
-
k
-
I
,
2 {- K cp+(n-k-I)yy}
(47)
In verifying these formulas care should be taken on the commutativity or anti-commutativity of the products ; also many terms drop out because of degree considerations. We are now in a position to prove the formulas (34) and (35). By definition we have. since dK =0 and d2 !'EM:?, (d' -dn)Yk = - tk+(k -1)l'vcx~ - 2 K~-l( _d 2 vii +d 2v!3) = -tk+(k-l)lvl2vrcx~-2 K7- k(Py-/JY)
= -t k -
k-I II-k+l
Irl 2 t k _ 1
2(k-I)2 -
n-k+1
n
11'1 2Yk_l(d'-d )logl l" .
the last step following from (46). From this we get (34) immediately. Similarly, we find, by using (32). (38), (42), (43), (46), (47), 1
k- 1 K n - l +2k(n - k)I'Vyy-cx k- 1 Kn-k- I IvI2 (dt k - 2 wk)= - 2kvVIIlCX r 1 I I 1
-
-k(k -1)v v(8 - O)(y P+y fJ)cx~- 2 Kj-k 2k ---W
n-k+l
k- I
+
2k(k-l) /I-k+l
From this (35) follows. From (39) we have
Comparsion with (46) gives (48) Similarly we verify that (48 a)
w;=o .
tk_1dloglvl ·
361 RAOIII. BOlT
and
Sill/NO
S.
CIIEKN
Equations (35) and (8) purnit us 10 express combination of J(~. The result is (49)
11'0
\\1(1
= Kn as a linear
I (- I)k (11) . tI(~.
= - . ,I -
k
\ :::; k ;:, n
Similarly, from (34) and (48a) we get (50)
(cf-cl
I
U )
\ :::; ~ ~ n
( - It
. y~=O. (k11-1) - I
and (51)
I
(d'-dO)
(_I)k
(II-I) (I + ... + - I ) .
k
11
II-I
( - I l (11) t~.
I
= - -I
y~
-
/;-1
l:::;k:::;n-\
k
l:::;k:::;n-\
It follows from (33) that (52)
= (d' -dO)O', where (53)
0'
I
= - 11
l:::;k:::;"-l
-211 I
(- I)k (11-1) . /;-1
(-It
l:::;k :::; "
(n-l) k-l
(I + ... + -11-11-) -
k
y~
y~loglvl·
Combining (49) and (52) we get the following basic formula for complex transgression:
n* K"= -td(d' -dO)O'.
(54) We note that for
11= 1,2
(55)
0'
=
(56)
0'
= - 2 viiK +
we have respectively
2viiloglvl, 2
Ivl
4 -4
Ivl
(-viia+lvI 2 viiK)loglvl.
362 Some Formulas Related to Complex Transgression
57
6. Proof of the Theorem We first observe that Let X be locally an element of A~~, with norm equal to 1. It is defined up to a factor which is a complex number of absolute value I, so that XI. to .10'0 is globally defined in X. Since the connection is of type (1,0), we have £I' (X X) = d"(x 1)=0.
(5 7)
Re.:-all that with the choice of the frame field ei , I ~ i ~ n, in § 4 we will have (58)
Frl)m the expressions
L
K =
eiejQij ,
I ;fii. j;fin
we derive immediately
n' Kn=( -lf2 n!(27rtcn(Elxi . The theorem in § I follows if we set "2-1
(59)
0'=( -1)-2- n !(27tr- 1 pxi.
Remark. Our proof does not use the assumption that the dimension of the fibre be equal to the dimension of X. The theorem is therefore valid without this dimension restriction. Our formulas seem to show is very natural to the geometrical that the use of the spaces .-1:::, situation under consideration.
Ai::
Bibliography [1) Bott, R., and S. Chern : Hermitian vector bundles and the equidistribution
of the zeroes of their holomorphic sections. Acta Math. 114,71-112 (1965). [2) Chern, S. : Complex manifolds without potential theory. Princeton : Van Nostrand 1967. [3) Flanders, H. : Development of an extended exterior differential calculus. Transactions of American Mathematical Society 75,311-326 (1953).
363 Reprinted from Ann. of Math. 99 (1974).
Characteristic forms and geometric invariants By SHIING-SHEN CHERN AND JAMES SIMONS* 1. Introduction
This work, originally announced in [4], grew out of an attempt to derive a purely combinatorial formula for the first Pontrjagin number of a 4-manifold. The hope was that by integrating the characteristic curvature form (with respect to some Riemannian metric) simplex by simplex: and replacing the integral over each interior by another on the boundary, one could evaluate these boundary integrals, add up over the triangulation, and have the geometry wash out, leaving the sought after combinatorial formula. This process got stuck by the emergence of a boundary term which did not yield to a simple combinatorial analysis. The boundary term seemed interesting in its own right and it and its generalization are the subject of this paper. The WeiI homomorphism is a mapping from the ring of invariant polynomials of the Lie algebra of a Lie group, G, into the real characteristic cohomology ring of the base space of a principal G-bundle, d. [5], [7]. The map is achieved by evaluating an invariant polynomial P of degree lon the curvature form Q of a connection, 8, on that bundle, and obtaining a closed form on the base, P(QI). Because the lift of a principal bundle over itself is trivial, the forms P(QI) are exact in the bundle. Moreover, in a way that is canonical up to an exact remainder one can construct a form TP(8) on the bundle such that dTP(8) = P(QI). Under some circumstances, e.g., dimP(QI) > dim base, P(QI) = 0 and TP(8) defines a real cohomology class in the bundle. Our object here is to give some geometrical significance to these classes. In § 2 we review standard results in connection theory. In § 3 we construct the forms TP(8) and derive some basic properties. In particular we show that if deg P = n and the base manifold has dim 2n - 1 that the forms TP(8) lead to real cohomology classes in the total space, and, in the case that P(QI) is universally an integral class, to R/Q characteristic numbers. Both the class above and the numbers depend on the connection. In § 4 we restrict ourselves to the principal tangent bundle of a
* Work
done under partial support of NSF Grants GP-20096 and GP-31526.
364 CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
49
manifold and show that if 0, 0', Q, Q' are the connection and curvature forms of conformally related Riemannian metrics then P(QI) = P(QII). Moreover, if P(QI) = 0 then TP(O) and TP(O') determine the same cohomology class and thus define a conformal invariant of M. In § 5 we examine the question of conformal immersion of an n-dim manifold into R'Hk. We show that a necessary condition for such an immersion is that in the range i> [k/2] the forms Pt(Q2i) = 0, and the classes {(1/2) TPt(O)} be integral classes in the principal bundle. Here Pt is the ith inverse Pontrjagin polynomial. In § 6 we apply these results to 3-manifolds. In a subsequent paper, [3], by one of the present authors and J. Cheeger, it will be shown that the forms TP(O) can be made to live on the manifold below in the form of "differential characters". These are homomorphisms from the group of smooth singular cycles into R/Z, subject to the restriction that on boundaries they are the mod Z reduction of the value of a differential form with integral periods evaluated on a chain whose boundary is the given one. These characters form a graded ring, and this ring structure may be exploited to perform vector bundle calculations of geometric interest. We are very happy to thank J. Cheeger, W. Y. Hsiang, S. Kobayashi, J. Roitberg, D. Sullivan, and E. Thomas for a number of helpful suggestions. 2. Review of connection theory*
Let G be a Lie group with finitely many components and Lie algebra §. Let M be a C~ oriented manifold, and {E, M} a principal G-bundle over M with projection n: E ->- M. Rg: E ->- E will denote right action by g E G. If {E', M'} is another principal G-bundle and cp: E ->- E' is a C~ map commuting with right action, cp is called a bundle map. Such a map defines rp: M ->- M', and the use of the same symbol should lead to no confusion. Let {Ea, Ba} be a universal bundle and classifying space for G. Ba is not a manifold. Its key feature is that every principal G-bundle over M admits a bundle map into {Ea, Bal, and any two such maps of the same bundle are homotopic. If A is any coefficient ring, U E Hk(Ba, A), and a = {E, M}, then the characteristic class u(a)
E
Hk(M, A)
is well-defined by pulling back u under any bundle map. Since G is assumed to have only finitely many components it is well-known that (2.1) We finally recall that Ea is contractible.
* This
chapter summarizes material presented in detail in [7].
365
50
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS I A
Let §l = § (8) § (8) ••• (8) §. Polynomials of degree l are defined to be symmetric, multilinear maps from §l -+ R. G acts on §I by inner automorphism, and polynomials invariant under this action are called invariant polynomials of degree l, and are denoted by JI(G). These multiply in a natural way, and if PEI1(G), QEJl'(G) then PQEP+l'(G). We set I(G) = E(8)II(G), a graded ring. These polynomials give information about the real cohomology of B a• In fact, there is a universal Weil homomorphism (2.2)
such that W: I(G) -+ H eVen (Ba , R) is a ring homomorphism. If {E, M} is a principal G-bundle over M we denote by Ak .l(E) k-forms on Etaking values in §I. We have the usual exterior differential d: Ak.l(E)-+ Ak+l .I(E). If ep E Ak,Z(E) and 'ifF E Ak·.l·(E) define ep /\ 'ifF ep /\ 'ifF(x" ••• , Xk+ k')
=
E
A k+k' .Z+/ ' (E)
Errshufflea(n)ep(x"l' ••. , X"k ) (8) 'ifF(x"k+l' ..• , Xr.k+k') •
If ep E Ak.1(E) and 'ifF E Ak·.l(E) define [ep,
'ifFl E Ak+k·.l(E)
[ep, 'ifF](x" ••• , XHk') = E rrshuffl e a(n)[ep(x"l' ••• , Xr.k )' 'ifF(X,Tk+l' ••. , Xr.k+k' )] •
Let P be a polynomial of degree land ep E Ak.l(E). Then P(ep) = po ep is a real valued k-form on E. The following are elementary
'ifFl
epl
(2.3)
[ep,
(2.4)
([ep, ep], ep] = 0
(2.5)
d[ep,
(2.6)
d(ep /\ 'ifF)
(2.7)
d(P(ep»)
(2.8)
P(ep /\ 'ifF /\ p) = (-l)kk'P('ifF /\ ep /\ p)
= (_l)kk '+l[y,
'ifFl =
[dep,
'ifFl +
(_l)k[ep, d'fl
= dep /\ y + (-l)kep /\ d'ifF
= P(dep)
where epEA k.!, 'ifFEA k·. l ', pEAk". l" and in the first three lines l
= lf = 1.
If P E [l(G) then differentiating the invariance condition shows (2.9)
E:=l (-l)k'+" '+k; P('ifFl /\ ••• /\ ['ifF;,
epl/\ ••• /\
'ifFl)
= 0
where 'ifFi E Aki.1(E) and ep E A' .l(E). For e E E, let T(E), denote the tangent space of E at e and V(E), = {x E T(E), I dn(x) = O}. V(E), is called the vertical space, and may be canonically identified with §. If x E V(E), we let x E 9 denote its image
366
51
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
under this identification. A connection on {E, M} in a § valued I-form, 8, on E satisfying R;(8) = ad;'o 8, and 8(v) = if for vertical v. If 8 is a connection, setting H(E), = {x E T(E). I 8(x) = O} defines a complement to V(E), called the horizontal space; i.e., T(E), V(E), EB H(E), and dR.(H(E),) = H(E)RaW The structural equation states
=
(2.10)
d8
=
1
Q - -[8 8] 2
'
where Q is the curvature form. Q E N"(E) and is horizontal, i.e., Q(x, y) = Q(H(x) , H(y)), H(x), and H(y) denoting the horizontal projections of x and y. (2.4) and (2.5) show dQ = [Q,O].
(2.11)
An element cp E Ak,l is called equivariant if R;(cp) = ad g-' 0 cpo A connection is equivariant by definition, and so is its curvature by (2.10), as equivariance is preserved under d, wedge products, and brackets. If rp E Ak'I(E) is equivariant and PE Jl(G) then P(cp) is a real valued invariant
. I
!dorm on E. In particular, Ql = Q /\ ••• /\ Q is equivariant, and so P(QI) is real valued, invariant and horizontal, and so uniquely defines a 2l-form on M whose lift is P(QI). We will also denote this form on M by P(QI). Formulae (2.11) and (2.9) immediately show this form is closed. THEOREM 2.12 (Weil homomorphism). Let a = {E, M, 8} be a principal G-bundle with connection, and let P E II(G). Then
P(QI) Le., P(QI) represents the Weil image of P.
E
W(P)(a) ;
chara(,"~eristic
class corresponding to the universal
For some of the calculations in the sections that follow it will be convenient to have classifying bundles equipped with connections. To do this we use a theorem of Narasimhan-Ramanan [10]. We introduce the category c(G). ObJ"ects in c(G) are triples a = {E, M, 8} where {E, M} is a principal G-bundle with connection O. Morphisms are connection-preserving bundle maps; i.e., if a = {E, M, 8} and a = {E, M, e}, and cp: {E, 1If} -+ {E, M} is a bundle map, then cp: a -+ a is a morphism if cp*(B) = O. An object A E c(G) is called n-classifying if two conditions hold: First for every a E c(G) with dim M ~ n there exists a morphism cp: a -+ A. Second, any two such morphisms are homotopic through bundle maps. We do not require the homotopy to be via morphisms.
367
52
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
THEOREM 2.13 (Narasimhan-Ramanan). For each integer n there exists an n-classifying A E s(G).
3. The forms TP(O)
Let a = {E, M, O} E s(G). The bundle {n*(E), E} is trivial as a principal G-bundle, and so all of its characteristic cohomology vanishes. Thus n*(P(Ql») = P(Ql) is exact when considered as a form on E. Set CPt = tQ + 1/2(t2 - t)[O, 0], and set (3.1)
TP(O)
= l ~:P(O /\ cp:-')dt •
P E Jl(G), and TP(O) is a real-valued invariant (2l - l)-form on E. It is of course not horizontal. PROPOSITION
3.2. dTP(O)
Proof. Set f(t)
= P(cpD.
= P(Ql). Then f(O)
(3.3)
P(Ql)
=0
and f(l) =-= P(Ql), Thus
= ~:f'(t)dt •
We claim (3.4)
1'(t)
= ldP(O /\ cpl-') •
We first observe !i(CPt) dt
=
Q
+ (t
-
~)[O, 0]
•
2
Using (2.3)-(2.8) we have
l' = lP(;/CPt) /\ cpl-')
= lP(Q /\ cp:-') + l(t - ~)P([O, 0]/\ cp;-') • On the other hand, ldP(O /\ cp:-l) = lP(dO /\ cp:-') - l(l - l)P(O /\ dcpt /\ cpl-2) = lP(Q 1\ cpl-') -
~lP([O 0] /\ CP:-') - l(l - l)P(O 1\ dcpt 1\ cpl-2) 2
'
by the structural equation (2.10). Now using (2.10), (2.11), and (2.4) dcpt = t[ CPt, 0] •
Plugging this into the formula above and using the invariance formula (2.9) on the last piece we get
368 53
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
ldP«(} /\ ~l-I)
lP(Q /\ ~l-I)
=
- ~
lP([B, B] /\ ~:-I)
+ ltP([B, B] /\ ~l-I) = ff
by the computation above. This shows (3.4) and the proposition follows from (3.3). The form TP«(}) can of course be written without the integral, and, in fact, setting Ai = (_1)il! (l - 1)!/2i(l
+ i)! (l
- 1 - i)!
one computes TP(B)
(3.5)
=
:L::~ AiP(B /\ [B, B]i /\ QH-I) •
The operation which associates to a E e(G) the form TP(B) is natural; i.e., if ~: a-+a is a morphism, since ~*(O) = B and thus ~*(n) = Q, clearly 9*( TP(O)} = TP(ff). This naturality characterizes T up to an exact remainder: PROPOSITION 3.6. Given PE ]I(G), let S be another functor which associates to each a E e(B) a (2l - I)-form in E, SP(B), which satisfies dSP(B) = P(QI). Then TP(B) - SP(B) is exact.
P1·oof. Let a = {E, M, B} with dim M = n. Choose a = {E, ii,O} E e(G) so that is m classifying with m sufficiently greater than n. Let~: a -+ be a morphism. Now in E we have dSP(O) = dTP(O) ==> SP(iJ) - TP(iJ) is closed. But since E is an approximation to Ea its 2l - 1 cohomology vanishes for sufficiently large m. Thus SP(O) = TP(O) + exact. So by the naturality assumption on S, SP(B)=~*SP(iJ)=~*TP(O)+~* exact = TP(B) + exact. 0
a
a
3.7. Let PE JI(G) and QE ]'(G). (1) PQ(QI+.) = P(QI) /\ Q(Q')
PROPOSITION
(2) TPQ(B)
=
TP(B) /\ Q(Q')
+ exact =
TQ(B) /\ P(Ql)
+ exact.
Proof. (1) is immediate. To prove (2) we may use naturality and work In a classifying bundle. But there, d( TP(B) /\ Q(Q'») = P(Ql) /\ Q(Q') = PQ(Q l+.) = d(TPQ(B»). Similarly d(TQ(B) /\ P(Ql») = d(TPQ(B»). (2) then
follows by low dimensional acyclicity of the total space of the classifying bundle. 0 We are interested in how the forms TP(B) change as the connection changes. PROPOSITION 3.8. Let B(s) be a smooth 1-parameter family of connections on {E, M} with s E [0, 1]. Set B = B(O) and B' = (d/ds)(B(s») 1.=0' For PE]I(G)
369
54
S-S CHERN AND :s(TP(8(S)))
1.=0
J.
SIMONS
= lP(8' /\ Ql-1)
+ exact.
Proof. Building on the theorem of Narasimhan-Ramanan it is not difficult to show that one can find a principal G-bundle {E, M} which classifies bundles over manifolds of dim ~ m ~ dim M, and to equip this bundle with a smooth family of connections lJ(s) , and to find a bundle map cp: {E, M} --+ {E, M} such that cp*(IJ(s») = 8(s) s E [0, 1). It thus suffices to prove the theorem in {E, M}, and by choosing m large enough E will be acyclic in dimensions ~2l-1. We now drQ.p all "hats" and simply assume H2l-1(E, R) = O. Thus it is sufficient to prove both sides of the equation have the same differential. Now d(:s(TP8(S»)
18=0)
=
~(dTP(8(S»)) 1.=0
= ~ (P(Q(S)I) 1.=0) = lP(Q' where
Q'
/\ Ql-l)
= (d/ds)(Q(s») 1.=0' Also
d(lP(8' /\ Ql-1»)
= lP(d8' /\ Ql-1) - l(l - 1)P(8' /\ dQ /\ QI-2)
= lP(d8' /\ Ql-l) - l(l - 1)P(8' /\ [Q, 8) /\ Ql-2) by = lP(d8' /\ Ql-1) + lP([ 8'. 8)/\ Ql-l) by (2.9) .
(2.11)
Now d8' = d( (d/ds)(8(s) )1,=0) = (d/ds)(d8(s») 1.=0 = (d/ds)(Q(s) - (1/2)[ 8(s), 8(s)]) 1.=0= Q' - [8', 8). Putting this in the calculation above shows
and this with the first calculation completes the proof.
o
If P E Jl(G) and P(Ql) = 0 then TP(8) is closed in E and so defines a cohomology class in E. We denote this class by {TP(8)} E H 21-1(E, R).
THEOREM 3.9. Let a = {E, M,8} with dim M = n. If 2l - 1 ·= n then TP(8) is closed and {TP(8)} E H"(E, R) depends on 8. If 2l - 1 > n then TP(8) is closed and {TP(8)} E H 2l-1(E, R) is independent of 8. Proof. P(Ql) is a horizontal 2l-form. If 2l - 1 ~ n then 2l > nand since the dimension of the horizontal space is exactly n, P(Ql) = O. Thus TP(8) is closed, and {TP(8)} is defined. We will see in a later section that when 2l - 1 = n, {TP(8)} depends on the connection. However, suppose 2l - 1 > n. Since any two connections may be joined by a smooth I-parameter family, it is sufficient to show, using the notation of the previous proposition that
370 CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
!(TP(O(S»))
1.=0 =
55
exact.
By that proposition it is sufficient to show P(O' 1\ QH) = O. Since 0' is the derivative of a family of connections, all of which must agree on vertical vectors, O'(v) = 0 for v vertical. Thus P(O' 1\ QH) is a horizontal (2l - 1)0 form, and thus must vanish for 2l - 1 > n. The equation in E, dTP(O) = P(QI), implies that TP(O) 1 Em is a closed form, where Em is the fibre over mE M. Formula (3.5) shows that TP(O) 1 Em is expressed purely in terms of 01 Em' which is independent of the connection. More specifically, let c:v denote the Maurer-Cartan form on G, which assigns to each tangent vector the corresponding Lie algebra element. Set TP
(3.10)
=
(_1)1-1 P(c:v 1\ [c:v, c:v]H) •
21Cl ~ 1)
TP is a real valued, bi-invariant (2l-1)-form on G. It is closed and represents an element of H2H(G, R). For mE M and eE Em let A.: G--Em by A.(g) = R g(e). Then A. *(8) = c:v, and (3.5) shows A.*(TP(O») = TP.
(3.11)
The class {TP} E H2I-1(G, R) is universally transgressive in the sense of [1]. In fact, recalling Borel's definition of transgressive ([1], p. 133), a class hE Hk(G, A) is called transgressive in the fibre space {E, M} if there exists e E Ck(G, A) so that c 1 G E hand oe is a lift of a cochain (and thus a cocycle) from the base. It is called universally transgressive if this happens in the classifying bundle. In this case the transgression goes from {TP} via TP(8) to P(QI). One can do this over the integers as well as the reals, and if we set
I;(G) = {PE J1(G) 1 W(P)
E
H21-1(Bc, Z)}
one can easily show (3.12)
PE I;(G)
{TP}
=
E
H 2!-1(G, Z)
and (3.11) shows this is equivalent to (3.13)
PE I;(G)
=
TP(8) 1 Em E H 21-1(Em' Z)
where in all these equations we mean the real image of the integral cohomology. The following proposition will provide a proof of this, but also will give us some extra understanding of the form TP(8) when PE I;(G). For a real number a let aE RjZ denote its reduction, and similarly for
371
56
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
any real cochain or cohomology class The Bockstein exact sequence (3.14)
~
will denote its reduction mod Z.
- . H;(X, Z) ~ H;(X, R) ~ H;(X, R/Z) ~ H;+l(X, Z) - .
shows that a real class, U, is an integral class if and only if [j = O. For X any manifold and A any coefficient group we let C(X, A) denote the cochain group with respect to the group of smooth singular chains. If cp is a differential form on X then cp E C(X, R), and by ;p E C(X, R/Z) we mean its reduction mod Z as a real cochain. 3.15. Let a = {E, M, O} E €(G). C2l-1(M, R/ Z) so that
PROPOSITION
exists u
E
,,-....;
Then if P E I;(G) there
+ coboundary •
TP(O) = n*(u)
Proof. Let a = {E, £1, B} E €(G) be k-classifying with k sufficiently large. Since PEl; we know that P(fil) represents an integral class in £1. ~
Thus the R/Z co cycle P(fil) vanishes on all cycles in
£1,
and so is an R/Z ,,-....;
coboundary; i.e., there exists U E C21-1(£1, R/Z) such that OU = P(fil). Thus ,,-....;
on*(u) = n*(ou) = n*(p(fil)) ~
= n*(p(fil)) = So on*(u) and so
=
~
...--..
~
dTP(B)
= oTP(B) = o(TP(B)) .
o(iP(B)). Since we have chosen k large, Eis acyclic in dim 2l-1, ,,-....;
TP(B)
= n*(u) + coboundary .
The proposition then follows in general by choosing a morphism cp: a and taking u = cp*(u).
a 0
We note that (3.13) and hence (3.12) follow directly from this. We also note that for these special polynomials, the classes {TP(O)}, when they exist, have the property that their mod Z reductions are already lifts. That is THEOREM 3.16. Let a = {E, M, O} E €(G) and let P E I;(G). P(QI) = O. Then there exists UE H2l-1(M, R/Z) so that
{TP(8)}
= n*( U)
Suppose
.
Proof. Choose u E C 2l-1(M, R/ Z) as in Proposition 3.14. The assumption P(QI) = 0 implies n*(ou) = O. Since every chain in M comes from one in E this means ou = O. Thus u is an R/ Z cocycle in M, and Proposi-
372
57
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS ~
tion 3.14 shows n*(u) ~ TP(O). Letting U E H21-1(M, R/ Z) denote the class represented by u the theorem follows. Characteristic numbers in R/Q. An interesting special case of this theorem occurs when M is compact, oriented, and dim M = 2l - 1. Then for each PE J;(G) we know that P(Q Z) = 0 and {TP(O)} E H21-1(E, R) depends ~
on the connection. On the other hand, reducing mod Z, {TP(O)} = n*(U) for some U E H2Z-1(M, R/ Z) ~ R/ Z. Thus U is determined up to an element of ker n"'. Now, either ker n* = H2Z-1(M, R/Z), or ker n* is a finite subgroup of H21-1(M, R/Z). In the second case, since all finite subgroups of R/Z lie in Q/Z, U is determined uniquely in R/Z /Q/Z ~ R/Q. Let f.L denote the fundamental cycle of M. Define SP(O) E R/Q by if ker n'" = H2Z-1(M, R/Z) SP(O) = u{f!)/Q otherwise. SP(O)
=0
Examples in the last section will show that these numbers are nontrivial invariants. * COROLLARY
3.17. Suppose dim M {TP(O)}
E
< 2l-
1. Thenfor PE J;(G)
H21-1(E, Z) .
Proof. Since dim M < 2l - 1, H2Z-1(M, R/Z) = 0 and so {T.P(8)} = Thus from (3.14) {TP(O)} is the image of an integral class.
o.
4. Conformal invariance
In this section we suppose G = Gl(n, R). § consists of all n x n matrices, and we define the basic invariant polynomials Q" ••• , Q"
It is well known that the Qi generate the ring of invariant polynomials on a = {E, M, O} is a principal G bundle then 0 = {O;;} and Q = {Q;,}, matrices of real valued 1 and 2-forms respectively. One verifies directly that for any cP = {cp;j} E Ak .1(E)
§. If
(4.1)
Q . . 1\ Q . . 1\ •.. 1\ Q . . QI( Q I) = ,"," L..iil'···.il = l '1"2 '2" 3 'l"l
(4.2)
These polynomials have different properties. In particular the Wei! map
* This construction was made in discussion with J . Cheeger. producing the mod Q reductions of R/Z invariants developed in (3).
It is an easy way of
373 58
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
(see (2.2») takes the ring generated by {Qzl} isomorphically onto the real cohomology of BOICn.Rl = B OCn )' while the kernel of the Wei! map is the ideal generated by the {Q21+1}' PROPOSITION 4.3. Let a = {E, M, O} E c(Gl(n, R»). Suppose 0 restricts to a connection on an O(n) subbundle of E. Then Q2IH(Q2!+1) = 0, and TQ2l+1(0) is exact.
Proof. The first fact is well known and is one way to prove Q21+1 E Ker W. Our assumption on 0 is that there is an O(n) subbundle F ~ E such that at each fE F, H(E)f ~ T(F)f' or equivalently that at all x tangent to F, O,;(x) = - O;,(x). It easily implies that at all points of F, Q;; = -Q;, as a form on E. Now if A is a skew symmetric matrix then tr (A 2 1+1) =::- 0 and by polarization we see Q2t+,(A, @ ••• @ A Zl+ 1) = 0 when all A, are skew symmetric. Since QZIH(Q21+') is invariant, we need only show it vanishes at points in F, but at these points the range of Q2t+1 lies in the kernel of Q2l+" Thus Q21+,(Q21+') = O. The same argument shows that TQ2l+1(0) F = O. (Here we mean the form restricted to the submanifold, F, and not simply as a form on E considered at points of F.) Thus TQ2t+'(0) is a closed form in E whose restriction to F is O. Since E is contractible to F, TQ2t +'(0) can carry no cohomology on E and hence must be exact. 0 1
Let us now specialize to the case where of the tangent bundle of M. Points in E (m; e" "', en) where mE M and e" "', en equipped with a natural set of horizontal, defined by dn:(x) =
E = E(M), the bundle of bases are (n + I)-tuples of the form is a basis of T(M)m' E comes real valued forms W,' "', W,,'
L:?=,wi(x)e,
where x E T(E)., and e = (m; e" "', en)' Now let g be a Riemannian metric on M, and let 0 be the associated Riemannian connection of E(M). Let E" "', E" be horizontal vector fields which are a dual basis to w,' "', w". Let F(M) denote the orthonormal frame bundle. F(M) ~ E(M) is the O(n) subbundle consisting of orthonormal bases, and since 0 is the Riemannian connection, 0 restricts to a connection on F(M). Let h be a C~ function on M, and consider the curve of conformally related metrics SE
[0, 1] •
Let O(s) denote the curve of associated Riemannian connections on E(M). Let 0 = 0(0), 0' = (djds)(O(s») 1.=0' and F(M) the frame bundle with respect to g = g(O).
374
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
59
LEMMA 4.4. At points in F(M) O~;
= o,;d(h n) + E;(h n:)w; - E;(h n:)w; • 0
0
0
Proof. This is a standard computation, and is perhaps most easily done by using the formula for the Riemannian connection in terms of covariant differentiation (cf. [7]). It is easily seen how the connection changes under conformal change of metric, and one then translates this result back into bundle terminology. THEOREM 4.5. Let g and {j be cdnformally related Riemannian metrics on M, and let 0, Q, 8, {i denote the corresponding connection and curvature forms. Then for any PE I'(Gl(n, R») (1) TP(8) = TP(O) + exact, (2) P({il) = P(Ql) . COROLLARY. P(Ql) = 0 implies that the cohomology class {TP(O)} E 2 l H - 1(E(M), R) is a conformal invariant. The corollary follows immediately from the theorem, and (2) follows immediately from (1) and Proposition 3.2. So it remains to prove (1). Since the Qi generate I(Gl(n, R») we can assume P is a monomial in the Q,. Using Proposition 3.7, an inductive argument shows that it is sufficient to prove (1) only in the case P = Ql. Proposition 4.3 shows that for any Riemannian connection Q2l+,(Q2l+1) = 0 and TQ2l+1(O) is exact, so we can assume l is even. Any two conformally related metrics can be joined by a curve of such metrics, with associated connections O(s). By integration it is sufficient to prove :S(TQ21(O(S»)) = exact.
(*)
Since each point on the curve is the initial point of another such curve, it is enough to prove (*) at s = O. By Proposition 3.8 it will suffice to prove (**)
We use the notation and formula of Lemma 4.4, and work at f E F(M). Set a = (o;;d(f n:») (3 = (E;(f 0 n:)w; - E;(f 0 n:)w;) • 0
Then 0' = a
+ (3.
Now (4.2) shows Q2l(a 1\ Q2l-')
= d(f
by Proposition 4.3. Also using (4.2),
0
n:) 1\ Q,l_l(Q21-')
=0
375
60
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
But, since 8 is a Riemannian connection, the Jacobi identity holds. This states
and shows Q2I((3/\ Q2H) = O. Thus at points in F(M), Q2I(8' /\ and (**) follows by invariance.
Q21-') =
0,
0
5. Conformal immersions
Let G = U(n). Let A be a skew Hermitian matrix and define the i'h Chern polynomial Ci E J;( U(n») (5.1)
where Ci is extended by polarization to all tensors. Let ei denote the i'h integral Chern class in B u(.. ). Then ei E H2i(BG' Z), and letting 'r(e i ) E H2i(BG' R) denote its real image, W(Ci )
(5.2)
=
r(e i )
•
We also define the inverse Chern polynomials and classes Cl and eiL
(5.3)
(1 (1
+ C~ + ... + Ct + ... ) (1 + C, + ... + C.. ) = 1 + ei + ... + ef + ... ) U (1 + e, + ... + e,,) = 1 . l
These formulae uniquely determine Cf and ef, and since W is a ring homomorphism (5.4)
W(Cf) =
et .
The inverse classes are so named because, for vector bundles , they are the classes of an inverse bundle. That is, if V, Ware complex vector bundles over M with V EEl W trivial, then using the product formula for Chern class, cf. [9], one knows (5.5)
ei ( W)
=
e;'(V) •
Let G"je) denote the Grassmann manifold of complex n-planes in C.. H, and let E ". k(e) denote the Stiefel manifold of orthonormal n-frames in C"H, with respect to the Hermitian metric. Then {E ...k(e), G" .k(e) } is a principal U(n) bundle. There is a natural connection in this bundle most easily visualized by constructing it in the associated canonical n-dim vector bundle over G"je). Let i(t) be a curve in G" .k(e) and let p(t) be a curve in the
376
61
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
vector bundle with rr p = 'Y. So for each t, 'Y(t) is an n-plane in C"+k, and p(t) is a vector in C"+k with p(t) E 'Y(t). Then p'(t) = (d/dt)(p(t)) is a vector in C,,+k, and the covariant derivative of p(t) along 'Y is obtained by orthogonally projecting p'(t) into 'Y(t). We let 0 denote this connection and 0
set a".k(C) = {E".k(C), G".k(C), O} • PROPOSITION
5.6. For i
>k
(1)
C/(Qi) = 0
(2)
{TCt(On E H
2H
(E".k(C),
Z) .
Proof. Since the n-dim vector bundle associated to {E".k(C), G".k(C)} has a k-dim inverse, (5.5) shows that ct(a".k(c») = 0 for i > k. Thus the form CNQi) is exact on G".k(C). Now G".k(C) is a compact, irreducible Riemannian symmetric space, and it is easily checked that the forms P(QL) are invariant under the isometry group. Thus CHQi) is invariant and exact, and therefore must vanish. So the class {TCHOn E H 2H (E".k(C), R) is defined. Since W(Cn = ct E H 2'(Bu ("" Z) we see that Ct E 1;( U(n»). Using Theorem ~ 3.16 we see that {TCl (O)} is a lift of a 2i - 1 dimensional R/Z cohomology class of G".k(C). But the odd dimensional cohomology of this space is zero ~ (for any coefficient group), and thus {TCt(On = o. The Bockstein sequence (3.14) then shows that {TCHOn E H 2H (E" .k(C), Z). 0
i
Now let G = O(n). Let A be a skew symmetric matrix and define for ' .. , [n/2] the i th Pontrjagin polynomial Pi E I~'(O(n»)
= 1,
(5.7)
det (r.J - (1/2rr)A) =
2, I:::':J P,(A ® ... ® A)","-2i + ..---'-----.
Q(", ,,-Odd)
where we ignore the terms involving the n-odd powers of "'. Also let Pi E H " (B o("" Z) denote the i th integral Pontrjagin class. Then W(Pi)
Let p: O(n)
~ U(n)
=
r(Pi) •
be the natural map. Then p induces p*: I( U(n») -+ -+ H*(O(n»), and p: B o(", -+ B u (", . Using Theorem 2.12
I(O(n») , p*: H*( U(n»)
one easily sees W(p*(Q»)
=
p*(W(Q))
for any Q E [L( U(n»). The definitions of Pi and Pi are such that (5 .8)
P*(C2i ) = (-I)iPi
,
p*(c2.) = (_I)ipi .
We also define the inverse Pontrjagin polynomials Pl(5.9)
(1
+ P + ... + P("/2])(1 + P t + ... + l
Pt
+ ... ) =
1
377
62
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
and note that Pi that
E
Io2i(O(n») since p*(ct)
E
H 2i (B oc .. ), Z), and one easily sees
W(pn = (-1)ir(p*(cli)) • Formula (5.9) shows PiL = -Pi - P i - 1Pt - ••. - P,Pf-,. Proposition 3.7 shows that TPt(8) = - TPi (8) + terms involving curvature. Thus for any
a
=
{E, M, 8} E s(O(n»)
(5.10)
TPt(8) 1 Em
= -
TPi (8) 1 Em •
We now define the real Grassmann manifold, G... k , the real Stiefel manifold E ... k , and the canonical connection 8 on {E ... k' G... k } exactly as in the complex case. We set a ... k = {E... k , G...k , 8} E s(O(n». PROPOSITION
5.11. For i > [k/2]
(1)
Pt(Q2i) = 0
(2)
{(1/2) TPl(8)} E H"-'(E... k , Z) .
Proof. The natural map R" -+ C" induces the commutative diagram 'P
E ... k ---> E"'k(C)
1
'P
1
G... k ---> G... k(c) • It is straightforward to check that Pt(Q2i) = (_1)i
TPi(8) = (_1)i
Since i > [k/2] = 2i > k, (1) follows from Proposition 5.6, and from (2) of that proposition we see that {TPt (8)} = (_1)i
We will be finished when we show LEMMA 5.12. Let class in H*(E... k' Z).
'1 E
H*(E... k(c), Z).
Then
Proof. For any Lie group G and any coefficient group A we want to consider the inverse transgression map r: Hi(Ba , A) -+ Hi-1(G, A). This map is defined as follows. Let U E Hi(Ba , A) be given and choose '1 E Z i(B a , A) with '1 E U and with '11 {m} = 0 for all mE Ba. Letting n: E o -+ Ba be the projection map, and recalling that Eo is acyclic, we see that n*('Y) = 0(3, where (3 E Ci-l(Ea , A). Since '11 {m} = 0, (31 G is closed, and thus defines r(u) E Hi-l(G, A). Acyclicity of Eo guarantees the map independent of
378 CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
63
choice of (3, and it is easy to check it is also independent of choice of "I. Thus r: Hi(Bo, A) - Hi-1(G, A) is well-defined. r is in fact the inverse of the transgression mapping considered in [1]. We remark that if A is a ring then r(u U u) = o. This follows since if "I E u with 11:*("1) = 0(3, then rr*("1 U "I) = 0((3 U 11:*("1»), and (3 U 11:*("1) I G = o. We first consider the case k = 0, i.e., E".o = O(n), E".o(c) = U(n) , and q;: O(n) - U(n) is the natural map. We consider the diagram
~ H*(O(n»)
H*( U(n»)
IT
' *
fT
H*(Bu (",) ~ H*(Bo(n')
and note that it is commutative. The Bockstein exact sequence of cohomology corresponding to the coefficient sequence O-Z":'Z-Zz-O shows that an integral class is even if and only if its mod 2 reduction is zero. Thus it is sufficient to show that for any u E H*( U(n) , Zz), g:>*(u) = o. Let ci E H Zi( U(n) , Zz) denote the mod 2 reduction of Ci • Now it is well-known that p*(ci ) = Wi U Wi
where Wi is the ith Stiefel-Whitney class. Thus g:>*(r(ci»)
»
= r(p*(c = r(Wi U Wi) = O. i
On the other hand, H*( U(n) , Zz) is generated by the set {r(c",}}, and thus q;*(u) = 0 for any u
E
H*( U(n) , Zz).
To do the general case consider the commutative diagram H*(E" .k(C), Z z)
~ H*(E" .k, Z z)
lrr*
where
11::
U(n+k)
--->
lrr*
~ H* (O(n + k), Zz) U(n+1)jU(k) = E".k(C), and 11:: O(n+k)-O(n+k) j O(k) =
H*( U(n
+ k),
Zz)
E ",k are the quotient maps. It is known, cf. [2], that the 11: '" on the right is injective. Thus, since the image of the lower g:>* is zero from our special
case, so is that of the upper g:>*. This completes the proof of the lemma and the proposition follows. 0 By restricting this proposition to the fibre and using (5.10) and (3.11) we obtain the well-known fact that (5.13)
~{TPi}
E
H'i-1(O(n), Z) .
2
The polynomials Pi and Pt were considered on the Lie algebra of O(n),
379 64
S-S CHERN AND
J.
SIMONS
but they also live on that of Gl(n, R), and pull back under O(n) --+Gl(n, R). We will also denote these by Pi' Pt E Igi(Gl(n, R»). THEOREM 5.14. Let M" be an n-dim Riemannian manifold. Let a(M) = {E(M"), M", O} denote the Gl(n, R) basis bundle of M equipped with the Riemannian connection O. A necessary condition that M" admit a global conformal immersion in R"H is that Pt(Q2i) = 0 and {(1/2) TPHO)} E H 4H (E(M), z) for i> [k/2]. Proof. Let cp: M" --+ R"H be a conformal immersion. By Theorem 4.5 we may assume cp is an isometric immersion. Let F(M") denote the orthonormal frame bundle of M", and consider the Gauss map <1>
1
Mn
1
which is defined as usual by mapping a point into the tangent plane at its image. Letting 0 denote the canonical connection on En .• , it is a standard fact that <1>*(0) = 0, the Riemannian connection on F(Mn); i.e., <1>: {F(Mn), Mn, O}
~
a n •k
is a morphism. Thus by naturality and the previous proposition, in F(M") , Pt(Q2i) = 0 and ((1/2) TPt(O)} E H4H(F(M"), Z) for i> [k/2]. By invariance, Pt(Q2i) = 0 in all of E(M") , and since ((1/2) TP{{O)} E H4i-I(E(Mn), R) it must actually be an integral class there since its restriction to the retract F(Mn) is integral. 0 Remark. This theorem is probably of interest only for the codimension k ~ n/2. This is because if k > n/2 our condition i > [k/2] already implies Pt(Q2i) = 0 for dimension reasons, and the corresponding class, {TPi'(O)}, is
independent of connection (see Theorem 3.9). At the same time Corollary 3.17 already shows that {TPt(O)} E H
In this section M will denote a compact, oriented, Riemannian 3-manifold, and F(M) ~ M will denote its 80(3) oriented frame bundle equipped with the Riemannian connection 0 and curvature tensor Q. For A, B skew symmetric matrices, the specific formula for PI shows PI(A ® B) = - (1/8n2) tr AB. Calculating from (3.5) shows
380
65
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
(6.1)
Since dim M = 3, dTP1 = O. By (5.13), (1/2)TP1(8) I F(M)", E HS(F(M)"" Z). We will thus be interested in the class {
~
TP1 (8)} E HS(F(M), R) .
From the general considerations at the end of § 3 this data is enough to produce an R/Q invariant of M, ,but since M is an oriented 3-manifold, F(M) is trivial; and we define the R/Z invariant, * (M) , as follows: Let z: M -+ F(M) be any cross-section. Then set (M) =
(6.2)
r .2.. TP (8) E R/Z .
L2
1
X' were another such, then homologically X' = X + nF(M)", + torsion, where n is an integer. Thus since (1/2) TP1(8) I F(M)", is integral, and forms
If
integrated over torsion classes give 0, (M) is well-defined. Recalling that P, = - P 1 we immediately get the following two special cases of Theorems 4.5 and 5.14. THEOREM
6.3. (M) is a conformal invariant of M.
THEOREM 6.4. A necessary condition that M admit a conformal immersion in R4 is that (M) = O.
E xample 1. Let M = of constant curvature 1. invariant fields on 80(3), \l E1 E2 = E " 'il E1Es = - E 2, section determined by this
RP3 = 80(3) together with the standard metric Let Eu E 2 , Es be an orthonormal basis of left oriented positively. Then it is easily seen that and 'il E2E s = E 1 • Let X: M -+ F(M) be the crossframe. The above equations and (6.1) show X*(.2..TP1 .2
(8») =
-lw 21r2
where w is the volume form on 80(3). Thus from (6.1) (80(3»)
=
_1 2rr2
Vol (80(3»)
= .2.. 2
since Vol (80(3») = (1/2) Vol (8 S) = 1r2. Using Theorem 6.4 we see that 80(3) admits no global conformal immersion in R4. This is interesting since, being parallelizable, it certainly admits a C ~ immersion in R\ and locally it is isometrically imbeddable in R4.
* Atiyah has subsequently shown that 2(M) is the mod Z reduction of .. real class. This will be discussed further in [3].
381
66
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
Example 2. Again let M = 80(3), but this time with the left invariant metric, gA' with respect to which )"'E" E z, E3 is an orthonormal frame. Direct calculation shows 2)"'Z- _
1
<1>(80(3), gA) = - 2)..,'
and this can take any value in RjZ. Let M be a fixed 3-manifold and let e(M) denote the space of conformal structures on M. Since is a conformal invariant we may regard <1>: e(M)
-----+
Rj Z •
If gt is a C= curve of conformal structures then (gt) is a C= RjZ valued function (we shall see this below). We are interested in calculating the critical points of the map <1>. Let g = be a fixed metric on M. With respect to this we let Vx Y and Rx.yZ denote covariant differentiation and curvature; i.e.,
<,)
Rx.yZ = VxVyZ - VyVxZ - V(x.y)Z
where X, Y, Z are vector fields. The operator Vx extends as a derivation to all tensors, and all tensors have a natural inner product induced by <, ). We make the usual identification of N with skew symmetric linear transformations and so for x, y E T(M)", we often regard (6.5)
R x.y E AZT(M)", .
Because we are working on an oriented 3-manifold there is an identification of T(M)m with AZT(M)m given by the metric. We denote this by
* : T(M)", -----+ AZT(M)m •
(6.6)
Let e" e2 , e3 be an orthonormal basis of T(M)m and define oR: T(M)",
(6.7)
oR(x) =
-----+
AZT(M)m ,
L::=l V./Rk,x •
This definition is independent of choice of frame. Combining (6.6) and (6.7) /'.. we define the symmetric bilinear form oR on T(M)m by
(6.8)
/'..
oR(x, y)
=
+
.
Now let B = B( ,) be a C= field of symmetric bilinear forms on M and consider the curve of metrics gt(x, y)
=
<x, y)
For small t these are Riemannian.
+ tB(x, y)
•
382
67
CHARACTERISTIC FORMS THEOREM
6.9. Let M t = {M, gt}. Then for small t, (Mt) E C-(t) and
~((Mt»1 dt
= t=o
2rJM
-1 167r
Prool. The invariant was defined by choosing a cross-section in F(M), but we would clearly get the same value by choosing one in E(M) , the full Gl(3, R) basis bundle. This is more convenient. So let (}t denote the curve of connections in E(M) corresponding to the metrics go and let () = 0' , Q = QO, and ()' = (djdt)W) 1/=0' The general variation formula in Theorem 3.8 shows (6.10)
where this makes sense since the forms P«(}' 1\ Q/-l) all are horizontal and invariant. The definition of Pi given in (5.7) works as well for general matrices and one easily sees (6.11)
P,(A, B) = _1_[tr A tr B - tr AB] • 2 R7r
Now if we work at points in F(M), range Q is skew symmetric matrices, and so the first term vanishes, to give (6.12)
at points of F(M). Let x E T(M)m' Y a local vector field, and let V~ Y denote covariant differentiation with respect to the connection at time t. Differentiating we get a tensor, A, defined by
AzY = ~(V~
(6.13)
dt
y)1 t=o(m)
where Y = Y(m). At I = (m; 1,'/2'/3) E F(M) the following hold (};i(X) Qii(X, Y)
= = -
(Ad~(zJi' Ii) (Rd~(z).d~(yJi' Ij)
where x E T(E(M»)f and R is the curvature of {M, g}. P,(B' I\ Q) as a form on M, (6.12) gives
P,«(}' 1\ Q)(x, y, z) = ~[(A., Rv .• ) - (Av, R z.• ) 87r
=
1
87r 2 (A,
R
0
*)w(x, y,
z)
Now regarding
+ (A.,
R z.v)]
383
68
S-S CHERN AND J. SIMONS
(w = volume form on {M, g}). Combining this with (6.10) gives
=
dd(
(6.13)
t
'=0
_1 ( (A, 8rr 2 )M
RH).
Since the range of R * is skew symmetric linear transformations, we may as well project A to have the same range; i.e., set 0
~
(A.y, z)
1
1
2
2
= -(A.y, z) - -(A.z, y) •
Then
(A, R *) = (A, R *) .
(6.14)
0
0
Finally, using the definition of Riemannian connection in terms of covariant derivatives (cf. [7]), and setting (DB.y, z)
=
-.!...[V.(B)(z, x) - V.(B)(y, x)] 2
equation (6.13) shows and thus from (6.13)
~(
= _1 '=0
8rr 2
(
).lf
(DB, Ro *)
= __1_ ( 16rr2
)J[
(B,
m)
where the last equation used Stokes' theorem and integration by parts. /'..
0
/'..
We should note from the definition of oR that tr oR = 0, and this is as it should be since if B = A,g, where A, is a function on M, our metric is /'.. changing conformally,
384 CHARACTERISTIC FORMS
69
COROLLARY 6.15. Suppose M is a simply connected compact oriented 3_manifold. Then either has exactly one critical point and M is diffeomorphic to S3 or has no critical points and M is not diffeomorphic to S3.
We do not see how this helps to settle the Poincare conjecture. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA AT BERKELEY UNIVERSITY OF NEW YORK AT STONY BROOK REFERENCES 11] A. BOREL, Sur la cohomologie des espaces fibres principaux et des espaces homogenes de groupes de Lie compacts, Ann. of Math. , 57 (1953), 115-207. 12] - - - , La cohomologie mod 2 de certains espaces homogenes, Comm. Math. Relv., 27 (1953), 165-197. 13 ] J. CHEEGER and J. SIMONS, Differential characters and geometric invariants, to appear~ I J] S. CHERN and J . SIMONS, Some cohomology classes in principal fibre bundles and the application to Riemannian geometry, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., U.S.A., 68 (1971), 791-794. I 5 ] S. CHERN, Geometry of characteristic classes, Proc . of 13th Biennial Seminar, Canadian Math. Congress 1972. 16] L. P. EISENHART, Riemannian Geometry, Princeton, 1949. 17] S. KOBAYASHI and K. NOMIZU, Foundation of Differential Geometry, Vol. I, II, Interscience, 1969. 18 ] N. R. KUIPER, Conformally fiat spaces in the large, Ann. of Math., 50 (1949), 916-924. 19] J. MILNOR, Lectures on Characteristic Classes, Princeton Lecture Notes, 1957. 110] M. S. NARASIMHAN and S. RAMANAN , Existence of universal connections, Amer. J . Math., 83 (1961), 563-572; 85 (1963), 223-23l.
(Received June 13, 1972) (Revised December I, 1972)
385
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS BY
S. S. CHERN and J. K. MOSER University of California Berkeley, Cal., USA
New York University New York, N. Y., USA
Introduction \Vhether one studies the geometry or analysis in the complex number space Cn+1' or more generally, in a complex manifold, one will have to deal with domains. Their boundaries are real hypersurfaces of real codimension one. In 1907, Poincare showed by a heuristic argument that a real hypersurface in C2 has local invariants under biholomorphic transformations [6]. He also recognized the importance of the special unitary group which acts on the real hyperquadrics (d.
~
1) . Following a remark by B. Segre, Elie Cartan
took, up again the problem. In two profound papers [1], he gave, among other results, a complete solution of the equivalence problem, that is, the problem of finding a complete system of analytic invariants for two real analytic real hypersurfaces in C2 to be locally equivalent under biholomorphic transformations. Let
Zl , ... ,
zn+1 be the coordinates in Cn +1 ' We study a real hypersurface M at the
origin 0 defined by the equation (0.1) where r is a real analytic function vanishing at 0 such that not all its first partial derivatives are zero at O. We set z = (z\ ... , zn),
zn+l
=W
= u+iv.
(0.2)
After an appropriate linear coordinate change the equation of M c&n be written as v
=
F(z, ii, u),
(0.3)
where F is real analytic and vanishes with its first partial derivatives at O. Our basic assumption
OD
M is that it be nondegenerate, that is, the Levi form
This work was partially supported by the National Science Foundation, Grants GP-2Q096 and GP-34785X. We wish to thank the Rockefeller University for their hospitality where the first author was a visitor in the Spring of 1973. 15 -742902 Acta mathematica 133. lmprime Ie 31 Janvier 1975
386 220
S. S. CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
( z, z) =
L
l ~ r:t..fJ~n
( (iF)
Yl1. pz l1.il, Yrzp = 8z""8z/l
(0.4) 0
is nondegenerate at O. In § 2, 3 we study the problem of reducing the equation to a normal form by biholomorphic transformations of z, w. This is first studied in terms of formal power series in § 2 and their convergence to a holomorphic mapping is established in § 3. The results are stated in Theorems 2.2 and 3.5. It is worth noting that the convergence or existence proof is reduced to that of ordinary differential equations. The normal form is found by fitting the holomorphic image of a hyperquadric closely to the given manifold. For n = 1 this leads to 5th order osculation of the holomorphic image of a sphere at the point in question, while for n ;;' 2 the approximation is more complicated. In both cases, however, the approximation takes place along a curve transversal to the complex tangent space. The family of the curves so obtained satisfies a system of second order differential equations which is holomorphically invariantly associated with the manifold. For a hyperquadric, or the sphere, these curves agree with the intersection of complex lines with the hyperquadric. For n
=
1 the differential equa-
tions can be derived from those of the sphere by constructing the osculating holomorphic image of the sphere, while for n> 1 such a simple interpretation does not seem possible. This family of curves is clearly of basic importance for the equivalence problem. At first the differential equations for these curves are derived for real analytic hypersurfaces but they remain meaningful and invariant for five times continuously differentiable manifolds. On the other hand, equation (0.1) implies
i8r = -i8r,
(0.5)
which is therefore a real-valued one-form determined by M up to a non-zero factor; we will denote the common expression by O. Let Tr and T; be respectively the tangent and cotangent spaces at xEM. As a basis of T; we can take 0, Re (dz""), 1m (dzl1.), 1 ~ (l(~n. The annihilator Tr .c=O.l. in T has a complex structure and will be called the complex tangent space of M at x. Such a structure on M has been called a Cauchy-Riemann structure [8]. The assumption of the nondegeneracy of the Levi form defines a conformal hermitian structure in T r • c. To these data we apply Cartan's method of equivalence, generalizing his work for C2 • It turns out that a unique connection can be defined, which has the special unitary group as the structure group and which is characterized by suitable curvature conditions (Theorem 5.1). The successive covariant derivatives of the curvature of the connection give a complete system of analytic invariants of M under biholomorphic transformations. The result is, however, of wider validity. First, it
387 221
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
suffices that the Cauchy-Riemann structure be defined abstractly on a real manifold of dimension 2n + 1. Secondly, the connection and the resulting invariants are also defined under weaker smoothness conditions, such as Coo, although their identity will in general not insure equivalence without real analyticity. In this connection we mention the deep result of C. Fefferman [2] who showed that a biholomorphic mapping between two strictly pseudo convex domains with smooth boundaries is smooth up to the boundary. The equivalence problem was studied by N . Tanaka for real hypersurfaces in CHi
called by him regular, which are hypersurfaces defined locally by the equation (0.3)
where F does not involve u [7 I]. Later Tanaka stated the result in the general case [7 II], but the details, which are considerable, were to our knowledge never published . One interesting feature of this study is the difference between the cases C2 and
Cn+!, r
n ;;' 2.
There is defined in general a tensor which depends on the partial derivatives of
up to order four inclusive and which vanishes identically when n
invariants of order four in the general case, while for n
=
=
1. Thus there are
1 the lowest invariant occurs in
order six: This distinction is also manifest from the normal forms. The Cauchy-Riemann structure has another formulation which relates our study to systems of linear hom.ogeneous partial differential equations of first order with complex coefficients. In fact, linear differential forms being covariant vector fields, the dual or annihilator of the space spanned by 0, dz'" will be spanned by the complex vector fields X"" 1 ';;; cx ';;; n, which are the same as complex linear homogeneous partial differential
operators (ef. § 4) . The question whether the differential system
X", w = 0,
1 ,;;; cx ,;;; n,
(0.6)
has n + 1 functionally independent solutions means exactly whether an abstractly given Cauchy-Riemann structure can be realized by one arising from a real hypersurface in
Cn+!' The answer is not necessarily affirmative. Recently, Nirenberg gave examples of linear differential operators X in three real variables such that the equation (0.7)
does not have a nonconstant local solution [5]. It may be interesting to carry out this correspondence in an example. In C2 with the coordinates (0.8)
consider the real hyperquadric M defined by (0.9)
On M we have
388 222
S . S. CHERN AND J. K . MOSER
() = !dw-iidz = (!du+xdy-ydx), dz () =dz
Solving the equations
dx : dy: du
we get
=
=
dx+idy.
0,
-i: 1: -2z.
=
The corresponding operator, defined up to a factor, is T .u =
{I (() . () ) .( + yt.)au-a},
+ -C - 2 z -() = - 2 t' - - + t ()x()yau 2 ax ()y
- t• -()
- t X
(0.10)
which is the famous operator discovered by Hans Lewy. The spirit of our study parallels that of classical surface theory. We list the corresponding concepts as follows: Surfaces in euclidean 3-space
Real hypersurfaces in Cn +1
Group of motions
Pseudo-group of biholomorphic transformations
Immersed surface
Non-degenerate real hypersurface
Plane
Real hyperquadric
Induced riemannian structure
Induced CR-structure
I sometric imbedding
Existence of local solutions of certain systems of
Geodesics
Chains
PDEs
Because of the special role played by the real hyperquadrics we will devote § 1 to a discussion of their various properties. Section 2 derives the normal form for formal power series and § 3 provides a proof that the resulting series converges to a biholomorphic mapping. These results were announced in [4]. In § 4 we solve the equivalencfl problem of the integrable G-structures in question in the sense of Elie Cartan. The solution is interpreted in § 5 as defining a connection in an appropriate bundle. Finally, the results of the two approaches, extrinsic and intrinsic respectively, are shown to agree with each other in § 6. In the appendix we include results of S. Webster who derived some important consequences from the Bianchi identities_
1. The real hyperquadrics Among the non-degenerate real hypersurfaces in Cn+l the simplest and most important are the real hyperquadrics. They form a prototype of the general non-degenerate real hypersurfaces which in turn derive their important geometrical properties from the " osculating" hyperquadrics. In fact, a main aim of this paper is to show how the
389 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
223
geometry of a general non-degenerate real hypersurface can be considered as a generalization of that of real hyperquadrics. We shall therefore devote this section to a study of this special case. Let Z"',
zn+!
(=w=u+iv), l ';;; a ';;; n, be the coordinates in
Cn+!'
A real hyperquadric is
defined by the equation (1.1)
where hu.p are constants satisfying the conditions (1.2)
Throughout this paper we will agree that small Greek indices run from 1 to n, unless otherwise specified, and we will use the summation convention. By the linear fractional transformation
2z'" Z"'=-w+i'
w=_· w+i' W-t
(1.3)
equation (1.1) goes into (1.4)
This defines a hypersphere of dimension 2n + 1 when the matrix (h",p) is positive definite. In general, we suppose (haP) to have p positive and q negative eigenvalues, p -i-q = n. In order to describe a group which acts on the hyperquadric Q defined by (1.1), we introduce homogeneous coordinates CA , 0 ';;; A .;;; n
+ 1, by the equations (1.5)
Cn +! is thus imbedded as an open subset of the complex projective space P n+l of dimension
n + 1. In homogeneous coordinates Q has the equation (1.6)
For two vectors in Cn +2 : (1.7)
we introduce the hermitian scalar product (1.8) This product has the following properties:
390 224
S . S. CHERN AND J. K . MOSER
(1) (Z, Z') is linear in Z and anti-linear in Z'; (2) (Z,Z')=(Z',Z);
(3) Q is defined by (Z,Z) =0.
(1.6a)
Let S U (p + 1, q + 1) be the group of unimodular linear homogeneous transformations on CA , which leave the form (Z, Z) invariant. Then Q is a homogeneous space with the group SU(p + 1, q + 1) as its group of automorphisms. Its normal subgroup K of order n + 2. consisting of the transformations (1.9) leaves Q pointwise fixed , while the quotient group SU(p + 1, q + 1)/K acts on Q effectively. By a Q-frame is meant an ordered set of n + 2 vectors Zo, Zl' .. ., Zn+l in Cn+ 2 satisfying (1.10)
while all other scalar products are zero, and (1.11) For later use it will be convenient to write (1.10) as (1.10a)
where
(1.10 b)
while all other h's with an index 0 or n + 1 are zero. There is exactly one transformation of SU(p+l, q+l) which maps a given Q-frame into another. By taking one Q-frame as reference, the group SU(p+l, q+l) can be identified with the space of all Q-frames. In fact, let ZA' Z~ be two Q-frames and let (1.12)
The linear homogeneous transformation on Cn + 2 which maps the frame ZA to the frame Z~ maps the vector CAZA to (1.13)
If we denote the latter vector by C·sZs, we have (1.14)
which is the most general transformation of SU(p+l,q+l) when Z~ runs over all Q-frames.
391 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
225
Let H be the isotropy subgroup of SU(p + 1, q+ 1), that is, its largest subgroup leaving a point Zo of Q fixed . The most general change of Q-frames leaving the point Zo fixed is
(1.l5)
where t,,= -2itt"gr'hfiO= -2itt«grQ,
tl-' det(t/) = 1, (1.l6)
In the first equation of (1.16) we have used hfiO to raise or lower indices. Observe that the last equation of (1.16) means that the point Z~ + l lies on Q, as does Zn +l; the equation can also be written (1.l7) H is therefore the group of all matrices
(US)
with the conditions (1.16) satisfied . Its dimension is n2+2n+2. By (1.14) the corresponding coordinate transformation is
C·o = tCO + t"C" + rcn+1, l:,*P = t"fll:," + r P l:,n+1,
I
(1.l9)
l:,*n+l = 1-1l:,"+1, or, in terms of the non-homogeneous coordinates defined in (1.5),
z*P = (t/z"+ rPw) t- 1 .5- 1 } w* =
Itl-·w.5-"
(1.20)
where
(1.21)
We put
(1.22)
Then (1.20) can be written
z*P = C/(z"+ a"w) .5-"} w*=ew.5- 1 •
(1.23)
392 226
8. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
By (1.l6) the coefficients in (1.23) satisfy the conditions (1 .24) and the coefficients in 0 satisfy
t- 1ta = -2iaa = -2iha{Ja~,} Im(t-1r)= -ha"jJaaaP.
(1.25)
Equations (1.23) give the transformations of the isotropy group H in non-homogeneous coordinates. Incidentally, the hyperquadric Q can be viewed as a Lie group. To see this we consider the isotropy subgroup leaving (1.19) by the involution
Zn+l
fixed. The relevant formulae are obtained from
C°-+Cn+l, Cn+l-+ -Co, Ca-+C a (oc=l, 2, ..., n) : (1.26)
with the same restrictions (1.16) on the coefficients. We consider the subgroup obtained by choosing
t= 1
t/=o/,
(1.27)
and hence, by (1.16),
In non-homogeneous coordinates we obtain (1.28) where Thus the point with the coordinates (at, a 2 , we take the point (Zl,
Z2, ••. ,
.. . ,
an, b) can be viewed as a point on Q. If
zn, w) also in Q then (1.28) defines a noncom mutative group
law on Q, making Q a Lie group. Moreover, the (n+2)2-1 dimensional group SU(p+l, q + 1)/K is generated by the subgroup (1.26) satisfying (1.27) and the isotropy group H.
The Maurer-Cartan forms of SU(p + 1, q + 1) are given by the equations (1.29) They are connected by relations obtained from the diffentiation of (1.lOa) which are (1.30)
393 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
227
where the lowering of indices is relative to hAll' For the study of the geometry of Q it will be useful to write out these equations explicitly, and we have
n",p+ np", = 0, 7l
11
0
+
1
-
no n+l
=
Jl n +lo -
ii oo +
nn +lo =- 0,
tln + ln -l 1 =
0,
(UOa)
! ifi",O + nn+l hp« = 0, fi.: +l+ 2in/h pa =0. Another relation between the n 's arises from the differentiation of (1.11) . It is (1.31 ) (1.31 a)
or, by (1.30a) ,
The structure equations of SU(p+ I,q+ I) are obtained by the exterior differentia· tion of (1.29) and are O ~ A,B ,O~ n+1.
(1.32)
The linear space Tc spanned by Zo, Zl' ... ,Zn is the complex tangent space of Qat ZOo It is of complex dimension n, in contrast to the real tangent space of real dimension
2n+1 of Q, which is defined in the tangent bundle of P n +1 , and not in P n +1 itself. The intersection of Q by a complex line transversal to Tcis called a chain. One easily verifies that a complex line intersecting Tc transversally at some point of Q is transversal to Tc at every other point of intersection with Q. Without loss of generality, suppose the complex line be spanned by Zo , Zn+1"
The line Zo, Zn+1 being fixed, it follows that along a chain
dZ o, dZ n+1 are linear combinations of Zo, Zn+1' Hence the chains are defined by the system of differential equations (1.33) Through every point of Q and any preassigned direction transversal to Tc there is a unique chain. Since the complex lines in P n+1 depend on 4n real parameters, the chains on Q depend on 4n real parameters. The notion of a chain generalizes to an arbitrary real
hypersurface of
en +1' § 2. Construction of a normal form
(a) In this section we consider the equivaJence problem from an extrinsic point of view. Let. r(zl, Z2, ... ,zn+l, ZI, ... , zn+l)
=0
394 228
S . S. CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
denote the considered hypersurface M in
en +! ,
where r is a real analytic function whose
first derivatives are not all zero at the point of reference. Taking this point to be the origin we subject M to transformations holomorphic near the origin and ask for a simple normal form. At first we will avoid convergence questions by considering merely formal power series postponing the relevant existence problem to the next section. We single out the variables
and assume that we have
at the origin. This can be achieved by a linear transformation. Solving the above equation for v we obtain v
=
F(z, z, u)
where F is a real analytic function in the 2n + 1 variables z,
(2.1)
z, u,
which vanishes at the
origin together. with its first derivatives. This representation lacks the previous symmetry but has the advantage that F is uniquely determined by M. We subject this hypersurface to a holomorphic transformation z* = I(z, w),
where
I
w*
=
g(z, w) ,
is n-vector valued holomorphic, g a holomorphic scalar. Moreover,
(2.2)
I, g
are
required to vanish at the origin and should preserve the complex tangent space (2.1) at the origin: w =0. Thus we require 1=0,
g=O,
0!.=0 at z=w=O. OZ
(2.3)
The resulting hypersurface M* will be written v* = F*(z* , z* , u*) .
Our aim is to choose (2.2) so as to simplify this representation of M* From now on we drop the assumption that F is real analytic but consider it as a formal power series in zl, ... , zn, Zl, ... , zn, and u with the reality condition F(z,
z, u) =
F( z, z, u).
Moreover, F is assumed to have no constant or linear terms. This linear space of formal power series will be denoted by j. Similarly, we consider transformations (2.2) given by formal power series
I,
g in zl, ... , zn, w without constant term and-according to (2.3)-
395 229
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
no terms linear in z for g. These formal transformations constitute a group under composition which we call
g. Often
we combine
I and
g to a single element h.
For the following it is useful to decompose an element FE 'J into semihomogeneous parts: 00
F= LFv(Z,Z,u) where Fv(tz, tz, t2U)=tvFv(z, Z, u) for any t > O. Thus we assign u the "weight" 2 and z,
z
the "weight" 1. To simplify the terms of weight v = 2 we observe that they do not contain u-since F contains no linear terms-so that
F2 = Q(z) +Q(z) +H(z, z) where Q is a quadratic form of z and H a hermitian form . The transformation
removes the quadratic form , so that we can and will assume that F2=H(z, z) is a hermitian form. This form, the Levi form , will be of fundamental importance in the following. In the sequel we will require that this form which we denote by
( z,z) =F2 is a nondegenerate hermitian form. If ( z, z) is positive the hypersurface M is strictly pseudoconvex. With (z1> Z2) we denote the corresponding bilinear form, such that
With this simplification M can be represented by
v = ( z, z) +F
(2.4)
where contains terms of weight v ;;. 3 only. Now we have to restrict the transformation (2.2) by the additional requirement that o2g/0Z"oz/l va.nishes a.t the origin. (b) Normal forms. To determine a formal transformation in
9
simplifying M· we
write it in the form 00
z·= z+ L Iv , ,,-2
where
Iv(tz, ttw)
=
tVlv(z, w),
00
w~= w+ L gv, .,-3
gv(tz, t2w)
=
tVgv(z, w),
(2.5)
396 230
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
and call
11
the "weight" of these polynomials lv, gv' Inserting (2.5) into
v*
=
(z*, z*) +F*
and restricting the variables z, w to the hypersurface (2.4) we get the transformation equations, in which z,
z, u
are considered as independent variables. Collecting the terms of
weight p. in the relation we get
where the dots indicate terms depending on I v-I' gv, F v' F: with 11
(2.6)
and write the above relation as (2.7) and note that L maps 11'-1' gpinto terms of weight p.. In order to see how far one can simplify the power series F~ one has to find a complement of the range of the operator L which is a matter of linear algebra. More precisely we will determine a linear subspace
n of 'J such that n and the range of L span 'J;
i.e., if 19 denotes the space of h = (f, g) with
I=
2:~2
Iv;
g = 2:~3gv' then we require that
'J=L19+n and nnL19=(O). Thus
(,2.8)
n represents a complement of the range of L .
Going back to equation (2.7) it is clear that we can require that
F;
belongs to
n
and solve the resulting equation for h. Using induction it follows that (2.5) can be determined such that the function F* belongs to
n.
We call such a hypersurface M* with
F* E n in "normalform". It is of equal importance to study how much freedom one has in transforming (2.4) into normal form which clearly depends on the null space of L . Thus we have reduced the problem of finding a transformation into normal form of M to the determination of a complement of the range goal will be to choose
n and the null space of the operator L.
Our
n such that the elements N in n vanish to high order at the origin
so that the hypersurface M* can be approximated to high degree by the quadratic hypersurface v = (z, i). (c) Clearly a transformation into a normal form can be unique only up to holomorphic mappings preserving the hyperquadric v = (z, z) as well as the origin. These mappings form the (n+l)2+1 dimensional isotropic group H studied in § 1 and given
397 231
REAL HYPER SURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
by (1.23). We will make use of H to normalize the holomorphic mapping transforming M into normal form . After the above preparation we may consider the group {it of all formal transformations preserving the family of formal hypersurfaces
v =
z* where
=
Oz + {weight ;;' 2} : w*
ew + <weight ;;. 3) ,
=
Using the form (1.23) one sees that any cP E Ql can be factored
uniquely as with cPo EH and tp a formal transformation of the form (2.5) with Re
fi
8w2 g4
(O , W)=O
atw=O.
The first term can be normalized by choice of a"'· (ct = l, .. . , n) in (1.23) and the second by Re (t- 1,). We summarize the normalization conditions for tp by requiring that the series
0 ~t t, oz"t, 8w (2.9)
o2g g, oz"g, ow g, oz"o~' 0
0
all have no constant term. From now on we may restrict ourselves to transformations (2.5) with the normalization (2.9). The submanifold of power series h = (f, g) with the condition (2.9) will be called
190 , Similarly, we denote the restriction of the operator L to 190 by Lo. We will see 190 -* '1 is injective. This implies, in particular, that the most general formal power
that Lo:
series mapping preserving v =
o
0
0
0
oi"
ow
X=">t"- +g -+ "'f"-+g- -
'; oz"
ow
L..
near the manifold , M. We describe the manifold v=
r(z, i, w, w) =
1
2i (w- w) =
O.
398 232
S. S. CHERN AND J. K . MOSER
Then is the Lie-derivative of r along the holomorphic vector field X restricted to r =0. Of course, L is meaningful only up to a nonvanishing real factor. For example, if we represent the manifold r=O by Q=
=
1
we can associate with a holomorphic vector field
a - a az" az"
a aw
- a aW
X=LA"-+A"~+B - +B-=
"
the Lie derivative of the above quadratic form
CxQ
=
2 Re {
restricted to Q = 1. For the following we will determine the kernel and a complement of the range for L in the original variables z, w . To formulate the result we order the elements F in terms of powers of z,
z with
coefficients being power series in u. Thus we write
where for all complex numbers A, p., and call (k, l) the "type" of F kl . The basic hermitian form will be written as
"h - ,,-/I L,. "flz z , " ·fI
Using the notation of tensor calculus we define the contraction tr (Fkl ) = Gk -
Fk l-" -L a
-
Cll •• • (%j:{Jl • • .
{J,
z'"
•. ,
1 • 1- 1
of
z"·zP. •• z/l· 0
where we assume that the coefficients a"•... P, are unchanged under permutation of <Xl' ••• , <Xk as well as of
PI' ... ,Pl'
We define for k, l-;. 1
- - Z"· ... Z".-lZ-P, . .. z-P,-. tr (Fkl ) -- "b L.. " •..• ".-lfl•... fI,-l where Here h"P is defined as usual by being the Kronecker symbol.
(2.10)
399 REAL HYFERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
233
For the description of a complement of the range of Lo we decompose the space
J of
real formal power series as J='R+11
where 'R consists of series of the type
Glm being of type (j, m), and where
11 = {NEJ ; NkL = 0 min (k, l)
~
1;
tr N22 = (tr)2N32 =(tr)3 N33 = O} .
(2.11)
This constitutes a decomposition of J, i.e. any F can uniquely be written as F = R + N with
R E 'R , N E
n. Thus P F = R defines a projection operator with range 'R and null space n.
One computes easily that (2.12)
where
4 2 2 GU=--2tr(F22)2 (tr) (F 22 ) (Z , Z) n+ (n+ 1) (n+ )
6 3 Goo = n(n+ 1) (n+ 2) (tr) F33 In particular, for n = I (2 .13)
While for n> 1 it is a requirement that ( z, Z) L divides FkL (k ~ l), this is automatically satisfied for n = 1. Evidently this decomposition is invariant under linear transformations of z which preserve the hermitian form ( z, z ). The space 11 turns out to be an ideal in J under multiplication with real formal power series. We will not use this fact, however, and turn to the main result about the kernel and corange of Lo: LEMMA
2.1. Lo maps 190 one to one onto
'Ra =PJ3 ,
where
J 3 denotes the space of those
FE J containing terms of weight;;. 3 only, and 190 is the space of formal power series satisfying (2.9).
400 234
S . S. CHERN AND J . K . MOSER
Before proving this lemma we draw the crucial conclusion from it: For any FE 13 the equation
Lo h
F (mod 71)
=
can uniquely be solved for h in 190 , since this equation is equivalent to PLoh =P F . Thus
71 represents a complement of the range of Lo and applying our previous considerations on normal forms we obtain THEOREM
2.2. A formal hypersurface M can be transformed by a formal transformation z· = z + f(z, w) ,
w* = w +g(z, w)
normalized by (2.9) into a normal form
v"
=
with N E 71.
(z*, z* ) +N
Moreover , this transformation is unique . COROLLARY.
The only formal power series transformations which preserve v =(z, z)
and the origin are given by the fractional linear transformations (1.23) constituting the group H . (e) Obviously it suffices to show that the equation
Lh
=
F (mod
71)
possesses a unique solution hE 190 . Here F is a formal power series containing terms of weight ;' 3 only. Collecting terms of equal type we have to solve the equations
(Lh)k' (Lh)k'
=
Fkl (mod
=
Fkl
for min(k, l) ~ 1
71) for
(k , l) = (2, 2), (3 , 2), (3,3).
For this purpose we calculate (Lh)k' for the above types (k, l); because of the real character of F we m"a y 'take k ;' l. We Will use the identity
f(z,u+i (z ,z» )=
(0)
2:co v-I
v
Ow
f(z , u)
i V( z z) V " . v.
Expanding f(z, w), g(z, w) in powers of z, z we write co
g=
2:
gk
k-O
where This notation should not be confused with the previous one which combined terms of equal weight, and which will no longer be needed .
401
235
REAL HYl'ERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
We write Lh in the form
r
Lh= Re{2 =
+ ~ (g+ g'i
I, /" ..., g, g',
... are z,
U,
conj.
and the prime indicates differentiation
with respect to u. Now we collect terms of equal type (k, l) . For example, if k ;;;> 2 the terms of type (k , O) and (k + I , I), respectively are
so that we have (k;;;>
2).}
(2.14a)
For k = lone gets additional terms and an easy calculation shows
+ 2
11))
(2.14b)
Finally, for k =0 one obtains four real equations, - 1m go
=Foo
t 1m g~
2 1m ~, z)
+2Re
(mod 71) (2.14 c)
=Fn
i Re g~'
+ 2
2i
=
2F10
=
2F 21
- 4
F~o
(mod 71).
Since the last equation has to be solved (mod 71) only we replace the right-hand side by its projection into
'R, which we call G10
16-742902 Acta mathematica 133. Imprime Ie 20 Fevrier 1974
402 236
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
-4( z, I~) With such a choice of Here g1>
10 is fixed
10 one
=
GIO •
solves the first equation for
(II
12' 10 and hence
and then the second for
up to a linear function in w ; but by our normalization (2.9),
12
are uniquely determined . Finally we have to solve (2.14c): Since
the second equation takes the form
t 1m g~ (z, z) -2 1m (/~, z) =
Gu
which can be solved with the first for 1m go and 1m (/~, z) = (d/du) 1m ( 11) z). Since 11 vanishes for u=O we determine 1m go, 1m ( 11) z) uniquely in this way.
The last two equations of (2.14c) are equivalent to -Re g~ (z,z) +2 Re ( 11' z) = Fu
-t Re g~' where we used that
F 33 +tFi1( Z, Z)2 = Goo(z, z/ (mod 71).
Clearly, the last equation can be solved for Re g~' and then the first for Re ( 11) z). Thus go is determined up to aw+bw2 , a, b real. But by our normalization both a=O and b=O,
and Re go' Re ( 11' z) are uniquely determined . Thus, summarizing, all equations can be satisfied by Ik' gk satisfying the normalization (2.9) and uniquely so. This concludes the proof of the Lemma 2.1 and hence of Theorem 2.2.
§ 3. Existence theorems (a) So far we considered only formal series and now turn to the case of real analytic hypersurfaces M. We will show that the formal series transforming M into normal form are, in fact, convergent and represent holomorphic mappings. In the course of the proof we will obtain a geometrical interpretation of the condition tr N22 = 0,
(tr)2 N32 = 0,
(tr)3 N33 = 0
describing the normal form. We begin with a transformation into a partial normal form: Let M be a real analytic hypersurface and y a real analytic arc on M which is transversal to the complex tangent space of M. Moreover, we give a frame of linear independent vectors e"ETc (oc=l, ..., n), also real analytic along the curve y. All these data y, e" are given locally near a distinguished point p on y.
403 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS THEOREM
237
3.1. Given a real analytic hypersurface M with the above data y, eIX there
exists a unique holomorphic mapping 4> taking p into the origin z = w = 0, y into the curve z =0, w =~, where ~ is a real parameter ranging over an interval, and eIX into 4>*(eIX ) =8/8z IX and the hypersurface into 4>*(M) given by v=Fu(z,z,u)+
L
(3.1)
Fkl(z ,i,u).
mln(k.l) ~ 2
Proof. We may assume that the variables z = (z\ ... ,zn) and ware so introduced that p is given by z=O, w=o and the complex tangent space of M by w=o . If Y is given by
z = p(~), where
~=O
w=
q(~)
corresponds to z=O, w=o then q'(O) =1=0. The transformation z = p(w*) +z*,
w = q(w*)
is holomorphic and takes the curve y into z* =0, w* =~. Changing the notation and dropping the star we can assume that the hypersurface is given by v
and y by z=O,
w=~,
=
F(z, i, u)
so that F(O , 0, u)=O.
The function F(z, i, u) is given by convergent series and is real. In the variables x",
yIX
given by z"=x"+iy", i"=x"-iy" the function F(z, i, u) is real analytic. The space
of these functions, real analytic in some neighborhood of the origin and vanishing at the origin will be denoted by ':J"'. In the following it will be a useful observation that z, i can be considered as independent variables for FE ':J"'. LEMMA
3.2. If FE':J'" and F(O,O,u)=o then there exists a unique holomorphic
transformation z* = z;
w* = w +g(z, w);
°
v =F(z,z, u)
taking v*
into
g(O, w) =
=
F*(z*, i*, u*)
(3.2)
where Proof. The conditions (3.2) can be expressed by F*(z*, 0, u)
=
°
(3.3)
and a second equation which follows on account of the real character of F* . The transformation formula gives
404 238
S. S . CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
2i1 (g(z, w) -
F* (z*, z*, u*) =
where
-g(z, w)) + F(z, z, u)
u*=u+ !(g(z, w)+ g(z, w)) ,
w=u+ iF(z,
z, u).
Keeping in mind that z, Z, u can be viewed as independent variables, we set z=o in the above equations. Observing that g(z,w) =0 for z=O, since g(O, w) =0, we obtain with (3.3)
o=~ g(z, u+ iF(z,O, u))+ F(z, 0, u)
(3.4)
as condition for the function g. To solve this equation we set s
=
u +iF(z, 0, u) .
Since, by assumption, F(z, 0, u) vanishes for z=O we can solve this equation for u: where G(O, s) = 0.
u =8+G(Z, s)
Equation (3 .4) takes the form 1 1 0=-2.g(z, s)+ -:- (s- u) t
or
t
u=s+!g(z,s).
Thus g(z , w) = 2G(z, w) is the desired solution which vanishes for z =0. It is clear that the steps can be reversed, and Lemma 3.2 is proven. Thus we may assume that M is of the form v=F(z,z,u)=
2:
FkZ(z ,z,u),
miD. (k,l )~1
w=~.
and the curve y is given by z=O,
Now we will require that Fll(z , Z, 0) is a
nondegenerate hermitian form. LEMMA
3.3.11 FE'Jw and F kO =
°
= FOk
lor k =0, 1, ...
and Fll(z , z, 0) nondegenerate then there exists a holomorphic translormation z*
=
z+/(z, w);
w·
=
(3.5)
w
with 1(0, w) =0, 1.(0, w) =0 and such that v=F(z, z, u) is mapped into v· = F~l (z·, z*, u·) +
2:
min (k.n;'2
F:z•
(3.6)
405
239
REAL HYl'ERSURFAOES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
Proof. By Od we will denote a power series in z, ii containing only terms of type (k, l) with k ?!>x and l ?!> .t Thus F(z, ii, u) can be written as n
n
F(z. ii, u) = F l1 (z, ii, u)+ L z"A" (ii, u)+ L a- I
«-1
tx A",(ii, u) + 0
22
where We restrict u to such a small interval in which the Levi form
is nondegenerate. If (h"-P) is the inverse matrix of (h,ip) and the holomorphic vector function f(z, w) is defined by /3.7) then
Fll (z+
f, ii+ f, u) = F l1 (z, ii, u)+ Lz"'A,,+ L tx A" + 0 22 =
F(z , ii, u) + 0 22
so that v=F(z, ii, u) is transformed by (3.5), defined by (3.7), into
Note also that, by (3.6), f(z, u) E 0 20 which finishes the proof. With these two lemmas we see that the coordinates can be so chosen that y is given by the u-axis: z =O, w=~ and M given by (3.6). Actually the coordinates are not uniquely fixed by these requirements but the most general holomorphic transformation preserving the parametrized curve y: z=O,
w=~
z*
and the form (3.6) of M is given by
= M(w)z,
w*
=w
where M(w) is a nonsingular matrix depending holomorphically on w. This matrix can be used to transform the frame e", into 8/8z'" which, in turn, fixes M(w) uniquely. This completes the proof of Theorem 3.1. In order to make the hermitian form F l1 (z, ii, u) independent of u we perform a linear transformation z*
= C(w)z,
w*
=w
and determine C such that Fl1(C(u)z, C(u)z, 0)
=
F l1 (z,
ii, u).
406 240
S. S. CHERN AND J . K. r.IOSER
The choice of Cluj becomes unique if we require that Cluj be hermitian with respect to the form
z, 0) =
Fu(z,
i.e.
Fu(Cz,
z, 0) =
Fu(z,
Oz, 0)
Denoting the matrix (h",.B(u» by H(u) these requirements amount to the two matrix equations C*(u) H(O) C(u) H(O)C(u)
=
=
H(u) }
(3.8)
C*(u)H(O).
Eliminating C*(u) we obtain C2(U)
=
H(O)-l H(u).
Since the right-hand side is close to the identity matrix for small u there exists a unique matrix Cluj with C(O) = I. This solution depends analytically on u and, morever, satisfies automatically the relation (3.8). Indeed, if Cluj is a solution so is H-l(O)C*(u)H(O) which also reduces to the identity for u=O. By uniqueness it agrees with Cluj yielding (3.8). Thus we can assume that the hypersurface is represented by V=
and y is given by z =0,
W
=
r
L
min(k.l) ~ 2
Fkl(Z,i,u)
(3.9)
The freedom in the change of variables preserving y and the
above form of M is given by linear map z ..... U(w)z, w ..... w which preserve the form
In other words we can prescribe an analytic frame e",(u) (01:=1, ... , n) along the u-axis which is normalized by
The coefficients of Fkl(Z, i, u) in (3.9) can be viewed as functionals depending on the curve y: z =p(;) , w =q(;). These are, of course, local functionals and more precisely we have LEMMA
3.4. The coefficient8 of Fkl in (3.9) depend a:nalytically on p, q, p, Ii and their
derivative8 of order ';;;k+l. More preciBely, theBe coefficienta depend rationally on the derivative8 p', p', q', etc. Proof. Let v = G(z, i, u) represent the given hypersurface containing the curve z =p(;), w=q(;) where Re q'(O) =1=0. The condition that this curve be transversal to the complex
tangent space amounts to Re {q' - 2 iGz p' - iGu q'} =1= 0
(3.10)
which we require for ;=0. First we subject the hypersurface to the transformation
4"07 241
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
z
=
p(W*) +Z*,
W = q(W*)
and study how the resulting hypersurface depends on p, q. This hypersurface is given implicitly by 1
2i {q- q} -
-
(3.11)
G(p+ z*, p+ z*,! (q+ q)) = 0
where the arguments in p, q are w*. Under the assumption (3.10) we can solve this equation for v· to obtain the desired representation. Since the given curve was assumed to lie on the given hypersurface we have V*=O as a solution of (3.11) if z*=O, z*=O Therefore the solution of (3.11) v*
=
F*(z*, z*, u*)
(3.12)
vanishes for z* =0, z* =0. We expand the terms in (3.11) in powers of z\ z*, v* and investigate the dependence of the coefficients on p(u*), q(u*) and their derivatives. To simplify the notation we drop the star and denote the left-hand side of (3.11) by (z, 12, u, v) =
L <1>,.
C+,..>O
where <1>,. is a polynomial in z, 12, v, homogeneous of degree 1; in z, 12 and of degree The equation (3.11) takes the form
p
in v.
(3.13)
where
Av =<1>01 =Re {q'-2iG.(p,p, !(q+q))p'-iGuq'}v
Thus A is an analytic function of p, p, q, q and their derivatives, in fact, depending linearly on the latter. Moreover, by (3.10), we have A =1=0 for small
lui.
Similarly, the coefficients of <1>,. are analytic functions of p, p, q, q at ; derivatives of order
';;;P.
=U
and their
This becomes clear if one replaces q(u+iv) byq(u)+q'(u)iv+ ...
and similarly for p(u +iv) in (3.11) and rewrites the resulting expressions as the series
in z, 12, v. In fact, the coefficients of will depend polynomially on p, p', q' etc. Finally to obtain the same property for the coefficients of F* in (3.12) we solve (3.13) for v as a power series in z, 12; let where V, are homogeneous polynomials in z, 12 of degree 1;. We obtain V, by comparison of coefficients in (3.13) in a standard fashion, which gives A V, as a polynomial in
VI' V z, •.• , V C- 1 with coefficients analytic in p, q, p, q and their derivatives of order ';;;1;; in dependence on the derivatives they are rational, the denominator being a power of A .
408 242
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
This proves the statement about the analytic behavior of the coefficients of F* in (3.12). To complete the proof we have to subject this hypersurface to the holomorphic
transformation of Lemma 3.2, 3.3 which preserve the curve z=O,
w=~ .
From the proofs of
these lemmas it is clear that the coefficients of the transformation as well as of the resulting hypersurface (3.6) have the stated analytic dependence on p, q. The same is true of the transformation z-+O(w)z, w->-w which leads to (3.9). (b) Returning to (3.9) it remains to satisfy the relations tr
F22 =
0,
(tr)
2 F32 =
0,
(tr)3
F33 =
0
which give rise to a set of differential equations for the curve y and for the associated frame. We begin with the condition (tr)
2 F32 =
0 which gives rise to a differential equation
of second order for the curve y, where the parametrization is ignored. For this purpose we assume that the parametrization is fixed, Bay by Re F32
q(~) =~
on p(~). According to Lemma 3.4 the coefficients of
F32
and study the dependence of are analytic functions of p, p
and their derivatives up to order 5. But if the hypersurface is in the form (3.9) then depends on the derivatives of order
~2
F32
and is of the form (3.14)
where K 32 , B depend on p, p, p', p' analytically, and B is a nonsingular matrix for small lui. To prove this statement we recall that (3.9) was obtained by a transformation z ->- p(w) +O(w)z + ... , w->-q(w) + ...
We choose Re q(u) =u fixing the parametrization; 1m q(u) is determined by p, p. To study the dependence of
F32
z
at U=U o we subject (3.9) to the transformation =
8(W*) +z* + ... , w
=
q(w* +uo)
(3.15)
which amounts to replacing p(u) by p*(u*) =p(uo+u) +O(Uo+U)8(U). Considering p and p' fixed at u = germ of
8
U o we require 8(0) = 0, 8'(0) = 0 and investigate the dependence of F 32 on the at u=auo. We choose the higher order terms in (3.15) in such a way that the
form of (3.9) is preserved as far as terms of weight
~5
is concerned. This is accomplished
by the choice z = Z*+8(W*)+2i
Since the hermitian form <,) is a.ntilinear in the second argument this transforma.tion is holomorphic. One computes
409 REAL HYPERSURFAOES IN OOMPLEX MANIFOLDS
v - ( Z, Z)
=
243
V* - (Z*, z* ) +4 Re (z*, s"(O) ( z*, Z* ) 2 + ...
if z, w lies on the manifold (3.9). The dots indicate terms of weight ;;;.6 in z*, z·, u·. Thus, for u* =0 we get, setting z* =z,
Hence F:2 depends on s, s', s" only, and using that (C(uo+u)s(u))"
we see that
=
C(uo)s"(O)
for u
=
0
F:2 +2( z*, C-l(UO)p"(O) ( z·, Z* ) 2
is independent of s which proves (3.14) with B(u) = _2C-l(UO)' Thus B(O) = -21, and
I I.
B(u) is nonsingular for small values of u
Therefore the equation (tr) 2F32 =0 can be written as a differential equation p" =Q(p,p,p',i/, u)
with an analytic right-hand side. Thus for given p(O), p'(O) there exists a unique analytic solution p(u) for sufficiently small
lui.
Choosing the curve y in this manner we have
(tr) 2F32 =0. To show that this differential equation (tr)2 F32 = 0 is independent of the parametrization and the frame e" we subject the hypersurface (3.9) to the most general self mapping
w-+g(w)
where 1m g(u) =0, g(O) =0, g'(O) >0, ( Uz, Uz) = ( z, z) for real w. One checks easily that under such mapping F32 is replaced by
and the equation (tr)2 F32 = 0 remains satisfied for z = O. Thus (tr)2 F32 is a differential equation for y irrespective of the parametrization and the frame. Next we fix the frame e" so that tr F 22 =0. For this purpose we subject (3.9) with (tr)2 F32 = 0 to a coordinate transformation z* = U(w)z,
w* = w
with a nonsingular matrix U(w) which for 1m w=O preserves the form (z, z ) = ( Uz, Uz ) . We will define U via a differential equation
410 244
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
~U=UA
du
with (Az,z)+(z,Az)=O
(3.16)
and find from U(w) = U(u) +ivU' + ... that (z*, z*)
=
«U +iU'(z, z) + ... )z, (U +iU'( z, z) + ... )z)
=
«/ +iA( z, z) + ... )z, (/ +iA(z , z) + ...)z)
= (z, z) (1 +2i( Az, z)
+ ... )
where the arguments of U, A are u and the dots indicate terms of order ;;;.6 in z,
z. Thus
where on the left side we set z* = U(u)z. Thus, since tr F22 is a hermitian form the equation tr F~2 =0 determines (iAz, z) uniquely as a hermitian form, hence A is uniquely determined as an antihermitian matrix with respect to ( , ). Thus the differential equation (3.16) defines a U(u), analytic in u, and preserving the form ( , ) if U(O) does. More geometrically, (3.16) can be viewed as a first order differential equation
for the frame. Note that the term F32 is not affected by this choice of the frame. Finally, we are left with choosing the parametrization on the curve in such a way that (tr)3 F33=0. For this purpose perform the transformation z" = (q' (W))1/2Z, with
q(O) = 0,
w* = q(w)
q(w) = q(.a,),
q'(O) >0.
v*=q'(u)v-iq''' ·v3+ •..
Thus
(z*,z*) = q'(u) ( z, z)-! (q'"
_~,2) (Z,Z) 3
which gives for z, w on the hypersurface v* - ( z*, z*)
or
=
q'(v- (z, z») +
F:s = q'F33 +
(tq'" - t q;,) (z, Z)3+ ...
(tq'" -t q;,) (z,
Z) 3.
Thus, (tr)3 F;s = 0 gives rise to an analytic third order differential equation for the real
411
245
REAL HYPERSURF ACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
function q(u), uniquely determined by q(O) =0, q'(O) > 0, q"(O), which are assumed real. Thus we have a distinguished parameter to real projective transformations
~
in the above curve which is determined up
~-+~/(rxe +(J),
(J> O.
Thus we have constructed a holomorphic transformation taking M into the normal form, and the existence proof has been reduced to that for ordinary differential equations. The choice of the initial values for p'(O) Eon, U(O) and Re q'(O), Re q"(O) allows us to satisfy the normalization condition (2.9) of § 2. In fact, these 2n +n2 + 1 + 1 = (n + 1)2 + 1 real parameters characterize precisely an element of the isotropic group H. Thus we have shown THEOREM
3.5. If M
i8
a real analytic manifold the unique formal transformation of
Theorem 2.2 taking M into a normal form and 8ati8fying the normalization condition is given by convergent 8eries, i .e. defines a holomorphic mapping. Two real analytic manifolds Ml> M2 with distinguished points PIEMl> P2EM2 are holomorphically equivalent by a holomorphic mapping", taking PI into P2 if and only if <Mk,Pk) for k=l, 2 have the same normal forms for some choice of the normalization conditions. Thus the problem of equivalence is reduced to a finite dimensional one. The arbitrary initial values for the differential equations tr (tr)3
F33 =
F22
= 0, (tr)2 F32 = 0,
0 have a geometrical interpretation: At a fixed point P EM they correspond to
(i) a normalized frame e"ETc, <e", ep) =h"fj (ii) a vector en +l E TR - Tc corresponding to the tangent vector of the curve y, and (iii) a real number fixing the parametrization, corresponding to Re q"(O). With the concepts of the following section this will be viewed as a frame in a line bundle over M. As a consequence of these results above we see that the holomorphic mappings taking
a nondegenerate hypersurface into themselves form a finite dimensional group. In fact, fixing a point the dimension of this group is at most equal to that of the isotropy group H, i.e. (n+l)2+l. Adding the freedom of choice of a point gives 2n+l +(n+l)2+1 =(n+2)2-1 as an upper bound for the dimension of the group of holomorphic self mappings of M. This upper bound is realized for the hyperquadrics. The above differential equations define a holomorphically invariant family of a parametrized curve y transversal to the complex tangent bundle, with a frame e" propagating along y. The parameter ~/(IX~+{J)
({J=FO) keeping
~=O
~
is fixed up to a projective transformation
fixed. Thus cross ratios of 4 points on these curves are
invariantly defined. We summarize: (i) tr F22 =0 represents a first order differential
412 246
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
equation for the frame ea , (ii) (tr)2 Fa2 =0 defines a second order differential equation for the distinguished curves y, irrespective of parametrization and (iii) (tr)a Faa =0 defines a third order differential equation for the parametrization. (c) The differential equations tr
F22
=0, (tr)2 Fa2 =0, (tr)a Faa =0 remain meaningful
for merely smooth manifolds. Indeed, if M is six times continuously differentiable one can achieve the .above normal forms up to terms of order 6 inclusive, simply truncating the above series expansions. Clearly the resulting families of curves and frames are invariantly associated with the manifold under mappings holomorphic near .ill. Indeed since the differential equations are obtained by the expansions of § 2 up to terms of weight ,;; 6 at any point one may approximate M at this point by a real analytic one and read off the holomorphic invariance of this system of differential equations. In this case the distinguished curves yare, in general, only 3 times continuously differentiable but the normal form (see (2.11) via a holomorphic map, cannot be achieved, not even to sixth order in z,
z.
This would require that the function f(z, u), g(z, u) defining the transforma-
tion and which can be taken as polynomials in z admit an analytic continuation to complex values of u. If the Levi form is indefinite one has to require an analytic continuation to both sides which can happen only in the exceptional case of analytic curves y . If, however, the Levi-form is definite, i.e. in the pseudoconvex case one has to requirc only that f(z, u), g(z, u) admit one sided analytic continuations. However, we do not pursue this artificial question but record that the structure of differential equations for the curves y and their associated frame is meaningful in the case of six times differentiabl, manifolds. (d) In the case n = 1 the normal form has a simpler form since the contraction (tr)
becomes redundant. For this reason F 22 , F 2a , F a2 , Faa all vanish and the normal form can be written
v = zz+ C42 Z 4 Z2+ C24 Z 2Z4 +
L:
Ck1i'
Zl
(3 .18)
k+I~7
where again min (k, l) ;;;' 2. This normal form is unique only up to the 5 dimensional group H given by
z ~ J.(z+ awl 15-\ w ...... 1J.1 2 wt5- 1
(3.19)
with O+J.EC, aEC, rER. It is easily seen that the property C42 (0)+0 is invariant under these transformations. If C42 (0) = 0 we call the origin an umbilical point. For a nonumbilical we can always achieve c42 (O) = 1 since z~J.z leads to c42(0) ...... J.alc42(0) . By thib normalization J. is fixed up to sign.
413 247
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
For a nonumbilical point we can use the parameters a, r to achieve
so that the so normalized hypersurface can be approximated to order 7 in z, Z, u by the algebraic surface (3.20) where j EC, k E R, and j2, k are invariants at the origin. The above statements follow from the fact that (3.19) with A=I, r=O leads to
so that j = C52 (0) +2C43(0) is unchanged. We fix a so that C43 (0) =0 and consider (3.19) with A=I, a=O which gives rise to
Choosing Re C~2(0) = 0 we obtain (3.20), where we still have the freedom to replace z by -z. Thus j2 and k are indeed invariants. The above choice (3.20) distinguishes a special frame at the origin, by prescribing a
a/au transversal to the complex tangent plane and a complex tangent ±a/oz in the complex tangent plane. These pairs of vectors can be assigned
tangent vector vector pair
to any point of M which is non-umbilical. These considerations clearly are meaningful for seven times differentiable M. The above vector fields, singular at umbilical points, can be viewed as analogous to the directions of principal curvature in classical differential geometry. This analogy suggests the question: Are there compact manifolds without umbilical points1 Are there such manifolds diffeomorphic to the sphere 8 3 1 Clearly the sphere 1z 12 + 1W 12 = 1 consists of umbilical points only as, except for one point, this manifold can be transformed into v =zz (cf. (1.4)) . Therefore we can say by (3.18): Any 3-dimensional manifold M in 0 2 can at a point be osculated by the holomorphic image of the sphere 1z 12 + 1W 12 = 1 up to order 5 but generally not to sixth order. In the latter
case we have an umbilical point. For
n;;' 2
the analogous definition of an umbilical point is different: A point p on
M is called umbilical if the term F 22 in the normal form vanishes. Again, it is easily seen that this condition is independent of the transformation (1.23) and we can say: Any nondegenerate manifold M of real dimension 2n + 1 in Cn +1 (n;;' 2) can at a point be osculated by the holomorphic image of a hyperquadric v= ( z, z) up to order 3, but generally not to order 4.
In case one has fourth order osculation one speaks of an umbilical point.
414 248
S . S . CHERN AND J. K . MOSER
(e) The algebraic problems connected with the action of the isotropy group on the normal form are prohibitively complicated for large n . But for a strictly pseudoconvex 5-dimensional manifold in C3 we obtain an interesting invariant connected with the 4th order terms F 22 . We assume n=2 and
2
_
2: z"' z'"
=
a-l
and consider a quartic F 22(Z, z) of type (2, 2) with tr F 22 = O. If we subject the manifold v*
=
to the transformation (1.23) of the isotropy group of Q the fourth order term is replaced by (3.21) where
(3.22)
The question arises to find invariants of N22 under these transformations, which are evidently multiples of unitary transformations. It turns out, and we will show, that one can find (3.22) such that N22 takes the form
where
The
A,
may still be replaced by
eA"
so that
is a numerical invariant, provided we assume that the A, are distinct. In this case the matrix GaP is fixed up to a complex factor by these requirements. Geometrically speaking to every A, corresponds a pair of complex lines-if the A, are distinct-so that we have altogether three pairs of complex lines in the complex tangent space holomorphically invariantly associated with the manifold. We remark that A3 = max, A, = 0 characterizes an umbilical point, i.e. F 22 = O. The A, are reminiscent of eigenvalues of a quadratic form and, in fact, the above problem can be reduced to the equivalence problem of a quadratic form. One verifies by computation that any quartic F22 with tr F 22 =O is invariant under the involution
415 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
249 (3.23)
and conversely any such quartic differs from one with tr F 22 = 0 by a multiple of The function
can be viewed as a function on t.he complex projective
space CPI, that is on 82 . We use the familiar mapping [3], derived from the stereographic projection:
so that
to map
1 onto 8 2 Then the above involution (3.23) goes into the antipodal maps
and one verifies that F22 becomes a real quadratic form 3
F22(Z, z)=(~)=
L
bvp.~v~p.-
V,JJ"'" 1
Moreover
so that tr F 22 = 0 if and only if the trace of the quadratic form vanishes. We subject F22 to the transformation (3.22). At first we take
e =1, so that (0/) =0 is
unitary. We assume furthermore that det 0=1 because of the homogeneous character of
F 22' Then, as is well known every such 0 corresponds to a proper orthogonal transformation of the
~-space,
and every such orthogonal transformation belongs to two such unitary
transformations, namely
± O.
Thus the equivalence problem is reduced to that of the
quadratic form under proper orthogonal transformations. Choosing this transformation so that is mapped into diagonal form
we have 2~-1 itv = O. Moreover, if the eigenvalues itv are distinct and ordered the orthogonal transformation is up to
~v-+- ±~v
uniquely determined by this requirement.
To complete the discussion we have to free ourselves from the restriction det 0 = 1 and take the stretching
z-+ez
into account. Both factors are taken into account by a
transformation z -+- yz, w -+ 1y 12 w with y a complex number which leads to it, -+ 1Y 12 it,.
416 250
S. S . CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
Thus if we set
CPI = ~~ =
I + Re (Z9)2}
2{ZlZ2 Z Z2
CP2= ~~= -
l 2 { Z Z2 Z1 Z2 -
Re (z9Y)
CP3 = ~;= (Z9)2 + (Z9)2 - 2hq ii Then the above assertions follow . The pairs of complex lines which correspond to an eigendirection have the form
where aI ' a 2 are not both zero, i.e. the second line is obtained from the first by the involution (3.23).
4. Solution of an equivalence problem Let G be the group of all nonsingular matrices of the form
(4.1)
where, as throughout this section, the small Greek indices run from 1 to n , u is real, and va:, ufi~ are complex. G can be considered as a subgroup of GL(2n + 1, R) . A G-structure in a
manifold M of dimension 2n + 1 is a reduction of the group of its tangent bundle to G. Locally it is given by linear differential forms
e, e", e", where e is real and e" are complex,
which are defined up to a transformation of G and satisfy the condition (4.2) Let Tr and T; , xEM, be respectively the tangent and cotangent spaces of M atx. The multiples of
e define a line Er in T; and their totality is a real line bundle over M,
to be denoted by E _The annihilator
Ei = T r.c in T r '
called the complex tangent space, has
a complex structure_ The G-structure is called integrable if the Frobenius condition is satisfied: belong to the differential ideal generated bye,
e
fi _ Since
de, de"
e is real, this condition implies (4.3)
where
(4.4)
417
251
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
An integrable G-structure is called nondegenerate if (4.5)
Integrable G-structures include the special cases: (1) Real hypersurfaces in C n +!- Let z"', w be the coordinates of Cn+!' A real hyper-
surface M can be locally defined by r(z"', z"", W, w) = 0,
rw =1= 0,
(4.6)
where r is a smooth real-valued function. On MaG-structure is defined by putting (j = ior,
(j'" = dz"'.
(4.7)
(2) Complex-valued linear differential operators of the first order in R 2n +!. Denote the operators by P", and suppose the following conditions be satisfied: (a) P"" Pp are linearly independent; (b) [P"" P p] is a linear combination of P 1'- We interpret the operators as complex vector fields and let L be the n-dimensional linear space spanned by P "'. Its annihilator L.l. is of dimension n + 1. Condition (a) implies that L.l. n Ll. is one-dimensional. We can choose a real one-form (j ELl. n Ll. and the forms (j, (j'" to span Ll.. The Gstructure so defined is integrable because of condition (b). We shall define a complete system of local invariants of nondegenerate integrable G-structures. We consider the real line bundle E, which consists of the multiples ufJ, u (>0) being a fiber coordinate. In E t.he form (4.8)
is intrinsically defined. By (4.3) its exterior derivative has the local expression
-
dw = iuh",p(j'" /I (jP + w /I
(dU) - -;; + CPo ,
(4.9)
where (j"', CPo are one-forms in M and CPo is real. This equation can be written dw = ig«p w'" /I w P+w /I cp,
(4.10)
where w'" are linear combinations of (jP, (j and ga:1J=gp", are constants. The nondegeneracy of the G-structure is expressed by det (ga:1J) =1= O. The forms w, Re w"', 1m w~ and
(4.11)
cp constitute a basis of the cotangent space of E. cp leaving the equation (4.10) (and the form
The most general transformation on w, w«, w", w) invariant has the matrix of coefficients
17 -742902 Acta mathematica 133. Imprime Ie 20 Fevrier 1975
418
s.
252
S. CHERN AND .T . K. MOSER
(. V" 8
where
8
is real and up"',
V"
0
0
U,t
0
0
u-" p
igq;,UlVu
-igq;,u-/vP
~)
(4.12)
are complex satisfying the equations n-u"u-P-n"ap U t1 - "qu'
(4.13)
Let G1 be the group of all the nonsingular matrices (4.12). It follows that E has a G1-structure. Denote by Y its principal G1-bundle. Then we have
G1 where
i
is inclusion of a fiber and
11:
-
I
" Y-E,
is projection. The quantities
(4.14) 8,
u/,
V"
in (4.12),
considered as new variables, are local fiber coordinates of Y . Observe that we have the dimensions (4.15)
In Y there are intrinsically (and hence globally) defined forms w, wet, wit, cf>, and we will introduce new ones by intrinsic conditions, so that the total number equals the dimension of Y and they are everywhere linearly independent. The condition that our G-structure is integrable implies (4.16)
where cf>/, cf>" are not completely determined. We shall study the consequences of the equations (4.10), (4.16) by exterior differentiation. To be in a slightly more general situation the gap's are allowed to be variable. It will be convenient to follow the practice of tensor analysis to introduce g"fJ by the equations (4.17)
and to use them to raise and lower indices. It will then be important to know the location of an index and this will be indicated by a dot, thus (4.18)
The exterior differentiations of (4.10), (4.16) give respectively
i(dgap- cf>"p- cf>P"+ gapcf» " wet 1\ wP + (- dcf> + iwp" cf>P + icf>pA wP)" w= 0,
(4.19)
(dcf>l - cf>p.Y1\ cf>Y~ - iWfJ" cf>") " wfJ + (dcf>" - cf> 1\ >" - >fJ " >p~) 1\ w = O.
(4.20)
419 253
REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS LEMMA
4.1. There exist 4>l. which satisfy (4.16) and
dgap + g,,:[34> - 4>ap - 4>pa = 0,
or
(4.21)
4>PI< = 4> pa,
dga./J - ga./J 4> + 4>a/J + 4>/ia. =
o.
(4.21 a)
Such 4>,t are determined up to additive terms in w. In fact, it follows from (4.19) that the expression in its first parentheses is a linear combination of wI<, wi, w, i.e., (4.22)
where
(4.23)
From the hermitian property of gap we have also (4.24) (4.25)
The forms
satisfy on account of (4.23) the equations (4.16) and (4.21). The second statement in the lemma ca.n be verified without difficulty. From now on we will suppose (4.21) to be va.lid. Equation (4.19) then gives (4.26) where
1jJ
is a real one-form.
LEMMA
4.2. Let
<J>p~
be exterior quadratic differential forms, satisfying (4.27) modw,
Then we have
(4.28)
where SaiQo has the symmetry properties: (4.29) (4.30)
Computing mod w, we have, from the first equation of (4.27), <J>p~==Xp~yA w
y,
where Xp«y are one-forms. Its complex conjugate is
y <J>pa == X[3ay A w •
420 254
S. S. CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
By the second equation of (4.27) we have
The first term, XaPy II wY, is therefore congruent to zero mod w, wU • But it is obviously congruent to zero mod we. Hence we have the conclusion (4.28). The symmetry properties (4.29) and (4.30) follow immediately from (4.27). Thus Lemma 4.2 is proved. Equation (4.20) indicates the necessity of studying the expression (4.31)
Using (4.21) we have (4.32) It follows that
since Using the differentiation of (4.21), we get (4.33)
TIpa+ TIap=gpad>.
By (4.20), (4.26), (4.33), it is found that (4.34)
or
(4.34a)
fulfill the conditions of Lemma 4.2. For such II> the conclusions (4.28)-(4.30) of the Lemma are valid. The forms
>fJ~
I
, >a, 1JI fulfilling equations (4.16), (4.21), and (4.26) are defined up to
the transformation
>fJ~=.pp .a+DfJ~w, >a =>'a+D/I~w/l+Eaw
1JI
=
where G is real and LEMMA
4.3. The
(4.35)
1JI' + Gw+i(Eawa-Eawa), (4.36)
Dl
can be uniquely determined by the conditi0n8 - - gaPsaQ/I,,-· -- - 0 S(Il1-
(4.37)
der
To prove Lemma 4.3 it suffices to study the effect on SaP"iU when the transformation (4.35) is performed. We put
421 REAL HYFERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
S=yaPsaf!, -
D=D:: .
255 (4.38)
Since yaP and SaP are hermitian and DaP is skew-hermitian, S is real and D is purely imaginary. Denoting the new coefficients by dashes, we find (4.39) (4.40)
It follows that
Since we wish to make one set of
S;u =
DI. satisfying
0, the lemma is proved if we show that there is one and only
(4.36) and
- iSga= ygUD+ (n+ 2) DiU'
(4.41)
In fact, contracting (4.41), we get
2(n+I)D
=
-is.
(4.42)
Substitution of this into (4.41) gives
(n+ 2) DiU =
-
iSiU+ 2 (n~ I) SYiU'
(4.43)
It is immediately verified that the DiU given by (4.43) satisfy (4.36) and (4.41) . This proves
Lemma 4.3. By the condition (4.37) the
rpi
are completely determined and we wish to compute
their exterior derivatives. By (4.34) we can put (4.44) where
Ai
are one-forms. Substituting this into (4.20), we get
drpa -rp II rpa -rpP II rpft -
Ap~ II
w P = flN\ W,
(4.45)
fta being also one-forms. From (4.44), (4.33), and (4.26), we get (APa+Aap) II W=YPa wll "P, (4.46)
or
To utilize the condition (4.37) we shall take the exterior derivative of (4.44). We will need the following formulas, which follow immediately from (4.16), (4.45), (4.21):
dW a = d(Yapo./i) = - w PII rpaP + Wa II rp + W II ,foa,
(4.47)
drpa = d(YaPrpP) = rpap II rpP + Aya II wY + fta II w.
(4.48)
We take the exterior derivative of (4.44) and consider only terms involving we lIo.i, ignoring those in w. It gives
422 256
S. S. CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
dS p:'" - ST:''' 4>1.- Sp:'" 4>~~ + Sp:'" 4>i. - Sp:'" 4>a: =.i(A.I g~+ A.!.gp,,- fJl A.aQ - fJ/ Aup)
mod w, w"', ai
(4.49)
and by contraction
When (4.37) is satisfied, the left-hand side, and hence also the right-hand side, of (4.50) are congruent to zero. The congruence so obtained, combined with (4.46), gives ,--
1
-
1L~=-~g~1ji
or
,u_
1.1lu
lLe.=-~UQ1ji,
"ii mo d w,w,w.
Hence we can put (4.51) or
(4.510.)
Substituting into (4.46), we get
v~p+ W"QP=O.
(4.52)
We can therefore write (4.44) in the form
-
=
Sp:'"ofi /\ wO" + Vlewe /\ w -
..
V:pawO" /\ w,
(4.53)
which is the formula for d>J.. Formula (4.53) defines <1>/. completely; it is consistent with earlier notations in Lemma 4.2 and in the subsequent discussions where <1>/. are defined only mod w. Substituting into (4.20), we get
where
11"
are one-forms. Notice also that (4.49) simplifies to
dSp:,,,-ST:'''4>I.-Sp!.a4>e~+S~a4>i.-SPl.. 4>J.='O, mod w, wt%, w ii
(4.55)
on account of (4.51) or (4.51 a). Consider again the transformation (4.35) with Dp~=O. The 4>P~ are now completely determined. From (4.53) its effect on
V/'II is given by
VIQ= Vp:~-i{fJ/Ep+!fJlEe} · Contracting, we have This leads to the lemma:
VllI =
VP~e- i{n+ HEp.
(4.56) (4.57)
423 257
REAL HYPERSURFAOES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
LEMMA 4.4. With (4.21) and (4.37) fulfiUed as in Lemmas 4.1 and 4.2 there is a unique set of >'" satisfying
(4.58) To find an expression for dtp we differentiate the equation (4.26). Using (4.16), (4.47), and (4.54), we get w II (-dtp+> IItp+2i>P JI.>p-iw/lllvp-iv PIIwp)
=
o.
Hence we can write (4.59) where
e is a
one-form.
With this expression for dtp (and expressions for other exterior derivatives found above) we differentiate (4.54) mod wand retain only terms involving w ll II w IF • By the same argument used above, we derive the formula
-- S pp.u." "-.l.P • - ",+' JI " +~Q<7v 2uQ va mod w, w", wi".
(4.60)
Condition (4.58) is equivalent to (4.58a)
V~;;(r=o.
Its differentiation gives, by using (4.21 a) and (4.60), vy = 0,
Hence we can put
vy
mod w, w", w/J.
= P,1 wI>. + QJ'p. ~
(4.61)
mod w.
Substitution into (4.54) gives P P <1>'" = - V p".y w P II w Y+ V"R:; ."" w II w t; + Pp". w /\ w + Q~ p. w /J II w.
(4.62)
For future use we also write down the formula <1>.. = d>", - >alJ II >/J + t =
-
tp /\
w..
Vp..yw/J /\ w y - V..ypw P II w Y+ Qp.. w p /\ w+Pp.. ro/J /\ w.
(4.63)
Since the indeterminacy in w can be absorbed in e, substitution of (4.61) into (4.59) gives
'I" = i {Q.. pw'" II roP - Qv.pw;' /\ w ii } - iFqowflll where
WU
+ e II w,
(4.64)
(4.65)
424 258
S . S . CHERN AND J . K . MOSER
It remains to determine '1jJ, which can still undergo the transformation
(4.66) where G is real. Denoting the new coefficients by dashes, we get, from (4.54) and (4.62), (4.67)
'", poe nG P ". = ".+"2 .
which gives
(4.68)
On the other hand, from (4.65) we have (4.69) The equation involves only real quantities and we have the lemma: LEMMA
4.5. The real form'1jJ is completely determined by the condition P",~=O .
(4.70)
We differentiate the equation (4.64), using th fact that qr is defined by (4.59). Computing mod wand considering only the terms involving we /\ wIT, we get
dPua-PTo,pQ~ -Prir,pJ-pua,p =2V~gO,pp+2VPoQ,pP-!lua'fJ,
mod w, w"', w p.
(4.71)
From (4.70) and using (4.2la) and (4.58) , we get
'fJ =-0 ,
mod w, w '" ,w /J .
Since qr is real, we can write (4.64) in the form
We summarize the discussions of this section in the theorem: THEOREM
4.6. Let the manifold M of dimension 2n+l be provided with an integrable
nondegenerate G-structure. Then the real line bundle E over M luL8 a Grstructure, in whose associated principal G1-bundle Y there is a completely determined set of one-forms w, w"', ,p, ,pt., ,p"', '1jJ, of which w,,p, '1jJ are real, which satisfy the equations (4.10), (4.16), (4.21), (4.26), (4.37), (4.53), (4.54), (4.58), (4.59), (4.62), (4.70), (4.72). The forms -
W,
are linearly independent.
-
wee:, wa. , cfo, cpa!], cpa., cpa. , 1p
(4.73)
425 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
259
In particUlar, suppose that the G-structure arises Irom a real analytic real hypersurlace M in
en+!.
Suppose there is a second real analytic hypersurlace M' in Cn +! whose cor-
responding concepts are denoted by dashes. In order that there is locally a biholomorphic translor'l7UJ,tion 01 Cn +! to C~+l which 'l7UJ,pS M to M' it is necessary and sufficient that there is a real analytic diffeomorphism 01 Y to Y' under which the lorms in (4.73) are respectively equal to the lorms with dashes. The necessity follows from our derivation of the forms in (4.73) . To prove the sufficiency condition take the 2n + 1 local variables on M as complex variables. The w, w" are linear combinations of dz" , dw and are linearly independent over the complex numbers. From w'
=
CO,
w'a. =WIX
we see that the diffeomorphism has the property that dz''', dw' are linear combinations of dz li , dw which implies that z''', w' are holomorphic functions of zli, w. The problem for n = 1 was solved by E. Cartan [1]. In this case conditions (4.37), (4.58), (4.70) reduce to
Exterior differentiation of (4.53) then gives
Our formulas reduce to those given by Cartan. As a final remark we wish to emphasize the algebraic nature of our derivation.
Most likely the theorem is a special case of a more general theorem on filtered Lie algebras.
5. The connection (a) The fiat case. We apply the results of § 4 to the special case of the nondegenerate real hyperquadrics Q discussed in § 1. The notations introduced in both sections will be used. In particular, we suppose (5.1)
and write the equation (1.1) of Q as (5.2)
By (4,7) and (4.8) we have (5.3)
426 260
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
On the other hand, given Q consider Q-frames ZA such that the point Zo lies on Q. We write
Zo=tY, Y=(l,zl, .. . ,z",w)
(5.4)
Then
(5.5)
u=IW,
By setting
(5.6)
we have
(5.7)
The structure equation (1.32) for d1r:on+l shows that we can put (5.8a)
In fact, by setting (5.8b) we find with the aid of (1.30a) that the equations (1.32) are identical to the equations given in Theorem 4.6 of § 4 with (5.9) A (nondegenerate integrable) G-structure satisfying the conditions (5.9) is called flat.
Conversely, it follows from the Theorem of Frobenius that every real analytic flat G-structure is locally equivalent to one arisen from a nondegenerate real hyperquadric in
en+l.
Under the change of Q-frame (1.15) we have, by (5.7), (5.10) We therefore restrict ourselves to the subgroup HI of H characterized by the condition
It I =1.
The form co is then invariant under HI . From (1.29) we have 1r:oo=2i(dZo, Zn+l),
1r:oa.=ga. P(dZ o, Zp) .
(5.11)
By (5.8a) it follows that under a change of Q-frames by HI' we have of"
= 00,
co*'" = t(it"'co + t~coP), co*;= t- 1 (
-
itCico + ~iicoP),
(5.12)
>* =Re (Tt- 1 ) co-2it-r",co"'+2it- 1 T;coCi +>. The matrix of the coefficients in (5.12) belongs to the group G1 introduced in § 4. The mapping (5.13)
427 REAL HYPER SURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS 80
261
defined is clearly a homomorphism. In fact, if K denotes the group defined in (1.9), we
have the isomorphism (5.13 a) Since SU(p + 1, q + l)/K =:> Hl/K, we will consider Gl as a subgroup of the former via the isomorphism (5.13a). This identification is essential in the treatment of the general case; the group SU(p+l, q+l) is paramount in the whole theory. We introduce the matrix notation (5.14) where
hAS
are defined in (1.lOa) . The Lie algebra SU of SU(p+l, q+l) is the algebra of
all matrices O,;;; A,B ';;; n+l,
(l)=(V),
satisfying (l) (h)
+ (h) I(l) =
Tr (l)
0,
=
O.
(5.15) (5.16)
The Lie algebra of HI is the subalgebra of SU satisfying the conditions (5.17) With this notation it follows from (1.30) and (5.16) that the matrix (5.18) is an su-valued one-form on the group SU(p+l, q+l). The Maurer-C'lrtan equations (1.32) of the latter can be written din)
(n) 1\ (n).
=
Let
(5.19) (5.20)
be a matrix of vectors of Cn +2 • Then equation (1.29) can be written d(Z)
=
(n) (Z),
(5.21)
and equation (1.15) for the change of Q-frames becomes (Z·)
=
(t) (Z),
(5.22)
where the entries in (t) are supposed to be constants. If (n·) is defined by d(Z·)
we have
=
(n·) (Z·),
(n·) = (t) (n) (WI
=
ad (t) (n).
de'
This equation will have an important generalization.
(5.23) (5.24)
428 262
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
(b) General remarks on connections. Let Y be a principal Grbundle over a manifold E. Let r be a linear group which contains G1 as a subgroup; in our case we will have (5.25)
In applications of connections it frequently occurs that one should consider in the bundle
Y a connection relative to the larger group r. For instance, this is the case of classical Riemannian geometry, where we consider in the bundle of orthonormal frames a connection relative to the group of motions of euclidean space . Let y be the Lie algebra of r realized as a Lie algebra of matrices. Then G1 acts on y by the adjoint transformation ad (t)(l)
=
(t)(l)(t)-l,
(t)EG1 , (l)Ey.
(5.26)
A r-connection in the bundle Y is a y-valued one-form (n), the connection form, such that
under a change of frame by the group G1 , (n) transforms according to the formula (n*)
=
ad (t)(n),
(5.27)
(t) EG1 .
Its curvature form is defined by (5.28)
(TI) =d(n)-(n) II (n)
and is therefore a y-valued two-form following the same transformation law: (TI*)
=
ad (t)(TI),
(t) E G1 .
(5.29)
The adjoint transformation of G1 on y leaves the Lie algebra gl of G1 invariant and induces an action on the quotient space y/gl' The projection of the curvature form on y/gl is called the torsion form. (c) Definition of the connection.
This will be a geometrical interpretation of the
results of § 4. Our first problem is to write the equations listed in the Theorem 4.1 of
§ 4, i.e., the equations (4.10), etc. in a convenient form, making use of the group SU(p + 1, q + 1) and its Lie algebra
su.
The gap are from now on supposed to be constants and we
call attention to the convention (5.1). Following the flat case we solve the equations (5.7), (5.Sa), (5.8b) and put -(n+2)noo
n!.
=
t cpa, ,i>!. + fI/noo,
n"~l
=
-i1p,
nn~l =
=4>/'+4>,
n,,"+l
=
Jt ClO
=
2iwa ,
-ic/>a, )
(5.30)
429 REAL HYPERSURFAOES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
263
The :n;A B are one-forms in Y, and the matrix (5.31) l~
au-valued, i.e., (:n;) (h) + (h) t(n) = 0,
Tr (:n;)
=
o.
(5.32)
Moreover, restricted to a fiber of Y, the non-zero :n;'s give the Maurer-Cartan forms of HI' as is already in the flat case. As in the flat case it is immediately verified that using the form (:n;) the equations in the theorem of § 4 can be written d(:n;) = (:n;) II (:n;) +(II),
(5.33)
where
(5.34)
and (n + 2) IIoo =
IIao =
- a~ , IIn2I = - i", IIn~l =
i 'Y, ) ! P,
(5.35)
II P= p _ _ l_ PY a. a. n+ 2 da y.. where the right-hand side members are exterior two-forms in w, w", wi, defined in § 4. For any such form
o == a"ji w" II w7i + terms quadratic in we or wU, mod w, we set
Tr 0
=
ga7i aaji.
(5.36) (5.37)
Then equations (4.37), (4.58), (4.70) can be expressed respectively by Tr III
=
0, Tr IIoo 0,) =
Tr II/ =Tr IIn~l =0,
(5.38)
Tr IIn~1 =0, and their totality can be summarized in the matrix equation Tr (II) =0.
Under the adjoint transformation of HI' (:n;) ..... ad (t)(:n;), (II) ..... ad (t) (II),
(5.39)
430 264
S. S. CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
the condition (5.39) remains invariant. We submit w, w", wfJ, > to the linear transformation with the matrix (4.12) and denote the new quantities by the same symbols with asterisks. Since (:n;) is uniquely determined by (5.39) according to theorem 4.1 in § 4 and since these conditions are invariant under the adjoint transformation by HI' we have (:n;O)
=
ad (t)(:n;),
tEGI •
(5.40)
Therefore (:n;) satisfies the conditions of a connection form and we have the theorem: THEOREM
5.1. Given a non-degenerate integrable G-structure on a manifold M of
dimension 2n+1. Consider the principal bundle Y over E with the g'rOUp G1 cSU(p+l, q+l)/K. There is in Y a uniquely defined connection with the group SU(p+l, q+l), which is characterized by the vanishing of the torsion form and the condition (5 .39). In terms of Q-frames ZA which are meaningful under the group SU(p+l, q+l), the connection can be written (5.41) These equations are to be compared with (5.21) where the differential is taken in the ordinary sense. (d) Chains. Consider a curve A which is everywhere transversal to the complex tangent hyperplane. Its tangent line can be defined by
w"=O.
(5.42)
By (4.16) restricted to A, we get (5.43) The curve A is called a chain if b"=O. The chains are therefore defined by the differential system
w"=>" =0.
(5.44)
They generalize the chains on the real hyperquadrics in Cn +! (cf. (1.33)) and are here defined intrinsically. It is easily seen that through a point of M and tangent to a vector transversal to the complex tangent hyperplane there passes exactly one chain. When restricted to a chain, equations (4.10), (4.26), (4.59), (4.72) give (5.45)
The forms w, >,
1p
being real, these are the equations of structure of the group of real
linear fractional transformations in one real variable. It follows that on a chain there is a preferred parameter defined up to a linear fractional transformation. In other words, on a chain the cross ratio of four points, a real value, is well defined.
431 REAL HYPERSURFACES m COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
265
6. Actual computation for real hypersurfaces Consider the real hypersurface M in en+l defined by the equation (4.6) . We wish to relate the invariants of the G-structure with the function r (z", z" , W , w), and thus also with the normal form of the equation of M established in § 2, 3. This amounts to solving the structure equations listed in the theorem of § 4, with the G-structure given by (4.7); the unique existence of the solution was the assertion of the theorem. We observe that it suffices to find a particular set of forms satisfying the structure equations, because the most general ones are then completely determined by applying the linear transformation with the matrix (4.12). In actual application it will be advantageous to allow g"p to be variable, which was the freedom permitted in § 4. Our method consists of first finding a set of solutions of the structure equations, without necessarily satisfying the trace conditions (4.37), (4.58), (4.70). By successive steps we will then modify the forms to fulfill these conditions. We set (6.1) ro = 0 = iOr, ro" = dz". Then (4.10) becomes (6.2) It is fulfilled if
g"p= -r"p+r;;;lr"rwp+r~lrprw"-(rwrw) - lrwwr,,rp } _ _ -l Ii + (Twrw) -1 Tww(r"dz " Ii , >rw rw"dz, , _ Tw- l Tw{Jdz +rpdz)
(6.3)
where we use the convention (6.4) Exterior differentiation of (6.2) gives
i(dg"p+g"p» II az"l1 dzli - 0 II d>=O .
(6.5)
dg"p + g"p> = a"pydz Y + ap""dzY+ c"pO,
(6.6)
d> = ic"pdz" II dzli + 0 II ft,
(6.7)
This allows us to put
where
(6.8)
With 0, gaji, > given by (6.1), (6.3), equations (6.6), (6.7) determine completely aajiy, c"p, and also ft, when we assume that ft is a linear combination of dz", dz P only. The a"jiy, c"p, ft
80
defined involve partial derivatives of
T
up to order 3 inclusive.
With ro, ro", > given by (6.1), (6.3\, we see that the following forms satisfy (4.16) , (4.21), and (4.26):
432 266
S. S. CHERN AND J. K. MOSER .I.. «(I)=a« 'f'fl· fi.l' dZl'+~C«O) ~ fi· ,
c/>«(1) = !cldz fi , 1p(I) =
(6.9)
flo·
Its most general solution, to be denoted by C/>l, c/>",
1p,
is related to the particular solution
(6.9), the "first approximation", by c/>l(l) = c/>«(I) = '1JI(I)
where
dfi~
c/>l=dlO, c/>a.+ dldz fi + e"O,
) _
(6.10)
=1p+gO+i(e"dz"-e pdz fi ),
satisfy
(6.11)
and g is real; cf. (4.35), (4.36). We will determine the coefficients in (6.10) by the conditions (4.37), (4.58), (4.70). In view of (4.53) we set
d.l.. y(l) _.I.. a(l) /\ 'f'fi· 'f'fi·
.I.. yell -
'f'a.
ig pa-di; /\
.l..y(l)
'f'
+ i.l..(I) /\ dzl' + ilJ Y (.1..(1) /\ dz
== S (Je·y~l) dze /\ dz u a ' by which
sfi y~l)
e· a
mod (),
(6.12)
are completely determined. Let (6.13)
By (4.43) the condition (4.37) is fulfilled if we put (n+2)d-= _is(~+ __t_·- g - s(1). (!a ea 2(n+ 1) (!a
(6.14)
This equation determines dqa and we have completely determined (6.15) For the determination of C/>" we introduce the "second approximation": (6.16)
Again in view of (4.53), we set
dc/>l. - c/>; /\ c/>J'. - ig p-a dzu /\ c/>y(2) + ic/>~) /\ dz1' + ilJl (c/>~) /\ dz
8
y-dze /\ dzu + V fi.Qy(l) dze /\ () - vY·(!)fdziua /\ 0'
fie· a
which defines the coefficients 8{l:'-;;, vi: l ) The former satisfy
(6.17)
433 REAL HYPERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
267 (6.18)
By (4.57) we determine ep by (6.19) so that (4.58) will be satisfied . We have then completely determined (6.20) and we introduce the "second approximation" (6.21) By (4.54) and (4.62) we set
d,pa - c/> /I c/>a - c/>P /I c/>l + hPJ /I dzo. =
-
u • P/I P VfJ".y dzfJ /I dz"t + V"fJ. q dz /I dz +PfJ,,(l)dz
P/I e. e+ q-"dz (I.
(6.22)
The condition (4.70) is fulfilled by setting (6.23) and
(6.24) The forms
c/>fJ~'
c/>a,
'IjJ
so determined in successive steps satisfy now all the structure
equations, together with the trace conditions (4.37), (4.58), (4.70). Notice that our formulas allow the computation of the invariants from the function r. The determinations dfJ~'
ea , g involve respectively partial derivatives of r up to the fourth, fifth, and sixth
orders inclusive. The procedure described above can be applied when the equation of M is in the normal form of § 2, 3. Then we have (6.25) where N22 =
ba..a../J./J.za.·za·zP·zP'
NS2 =
N 23 = ka.a..a..p./J.za.·za·za·zP·zP.
N 42 =N-24 =l
(Xl • ••
--za.·za.·za.·za·zP,zP. a./hPt
(6.26)
- - - za·Za.·Z"'ZP·z/l·ZP. N 33 =m(tlazfXs{Jlp,(JS and N 22 and N 33 are real; the coefficients, which are functions of u, satisfy the usual symmetry relations and are completely determined by the polynomials. Moreover, we have the trace conditions 18 -742902 Acta malhematica 133. lmprime Ie 20 Fevrier 1975
434 268
S. S. CHERN AND J . K. MOSER
(6.27) (6.28) where the traces are formed with respect to ( , ) . The computation is lengthy and we will only state the following results: (1) Along the u-curve
r,
i.e., the curve defined by
z'" =V =0, we have cp"'=O. This means that
r
(6.29)
is a chain. In fact, this is true whenever the conditions
(6.27) are satisfied. (2) Along
r
we find (6.30) p _ 12 i p(i _ v",.y- - n+ 2 h k",ya,
_"'= _
qP.
48 h"';Y l-(n+l)(n+2) yp,
(6.31)
(6.32)
where the quantities are defined by (6.33) (6.34) (6.35) The situation is particularly simple for n = 1. Then conditions (6.27) and (6.28) imply (6.36) On the other hand, we have the remarks at the end of § 4; the invariant of lowest order is qll' Equation (6.32) identifies it with the coefficient in Nn-
Appendix. Bianchi Identities BY S. M. WEBSTER University of Oalifornia, Berkeley, Oalifornia, USA
In this appendix we will show that there are further symmetry relations on the curvature of the connection, which follow from the Bianchi identities and which simplify the structure equation.
435 REAL HYPER SURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
269
The Bianchi identities for the connection defined in section 5c are obtained by taking the exterior derivative of the structure equation (5.33). This yields 0= (TI) /\ (;71;)-(;71;) /\ (TI)+d(TI).
To write this more explicitly it is convenient to use the formulation given in the theorem of section 4. In the G1 bundle Y over E we have the independent linear differential forms
the relations with the gap constant, and the structure equations dw = igapw a /\ wP + w /\ dw a = w P/\
>
(A. I)
>t/ + w /\ >a
(A.2)
d> = iwp /\ >P + i>p /\ w P + w /\ 'IjJ d>{t =
>/ /\ >ua+ iwp /\ >" d>" = > /\
i>p /\ w" - io{t(>u /\
W
U) -
(A. 3)
t Op"'IjJ /\ w + <1>p"
>" + >p /\ >p"- t 'IjJ /\ w" + <1>"
(A . 4) (A . 5)
d'IjJ=> /\ 'IjJ+2i>P /\ >p+ 'Y.
(A. 6)
The curvature forms are given by
<1>p'" = Spe":awe /\ W U+ Vp~Qwe /\ w - V:p.w u /\ w
<1>"= -
VQ~uwe
/\ w u +
V~~we 1\ W
-U
(A. 7) -
+ Pea we /\ w+Q,twU /\ w,
(A. 8)
where the coefficients satisfy the relations
P"p =P"p+P(J",
and
Vl e = gP-;'SPQ«. = g"P Pap = O.
Differentiating equations (A.I) through (A. 6) yields, respectively, a 0= (>aP + >Pa - gaP» /\ w 1\ wP 0= w P1\
>;.+ w /\ <1>'"
(A . I') (A. 2')
436 270
S. S . CHERN AND J. K. MOSER
0= w /\ 'Y - i(" /\ w" - <1>" /\ 0 = d
W~)
(A. 3')
c5/ {i
(A . 4')
0= d
(A. 5')
0= d'Y + 2 i
(A. 6')
These are the Bianchi identities. The actual verification of these equations is rather long, but they result from differentiating and simply dropping all terms which do not contain one of the curvature forms ,t, <1>", 'Y or one of their differentials. Equations (A.I'), (A.2'), and (A .3') are trivial because of the relations >,,13 + >13" = g"p > and Sp:'ii =
S~p"A.
Substituting
(A.3') into (A.4') gives
Substituting the expression (A .7) for <1>/ into (A.4") gives, after differentiating and lowering the index
C£,
-
o=DSp~ii /\ we /\ w" + Bp~~ 1\ we /\ w -
B"p~
-- -
-
/\ we /\ w -
+ iC p~p.~wp./\ we /\ w" + iC"pp.~ wI' /\ we /\ w" ._ -
-
+ iD P~~" we /\ w" /\ w + iD"p~" we /\ w" /\ w + iE p~~we /\ w" /\ w,
(A. 10)
where we define
-
-
DSp~ii=dSPQ~ii- Sp.~ii>p-Bpp.«a>~ - Sp~j;<1>~ -Sp~,,>~ +Sp~a>
= Sp~ap.wp.+Sp~a;;wp. + SP~aw, -
-
DVp~ =dVp«~- Vp.«~>p- Vp,,~>~- Vp~p.>~ -SP~a>"
Ep«~
gPaP ~ - Papg~+ t gp~(P~ -PaQ ).
=
Comparing terms of the same type in (A.lO), we get the following three relations: S p~iip. - Sppa.aQ =
-
i{V P~Qgp.CJ - V p~p.g~ + (V pa.Q- V ~p.)gpa+~pVpaQ-~QVpap.+gp~(Vp.CJQ- V ~p)},
VP~"Q- VP~Q"
=
-i{QQpg,,~-Qirpg~+tgp~(QQ,,-Q"Q)}'
(A.U) (A. I2)
437 REAL HYl'ERSURFACES IN COMPLEX MANIFOLDS
271 (A. 13)
Multiplying (A.Il) by gp;'gPU, summing over ex, {J, 1", and G, and using the relations -- = V~ gP;'S Ppaol' p.p = 0 gives
so that contracting {J and iX only in (A.Il) gives (A.I4) It then follows that gP;' VpiXo p =0, so that contracting the indices (J and iX in (A.I2) and in (A.I3) gives (A.I5) Equations (A.5') and (A.6') give further relations but no further symmetries of the curvature functions SPrP-'" Vp"p, P p", QQ" or Ra.. We can now write the curvature forms
V~" we 1\
-
w"
-
+ ppa we 1\ w + Q"a w" 1\
w,
(A.S') (A. 9')
Since V!p=O we now have
Received May 15, 1974
438 ROCKY MOUNTAIN IOURNAL OF MATHEMATICS Volume 10, Number I, Winter 1980
AN ANALOGUE OF BACKLUND'S THEOREM IN AFFINE GEOMETRY SHIING-SHEN CHERN· AND CHuu-LIAN TERNG** ABSTRACT. It is well-known that there is a correspondence between solutions of the Sine-Gordon equation (SGE)
a'¢
a'¢
-ax'-- - "a,'-
.
= Sin
¢
and the surfaces of constant curvature -I in R' (see below). The classical Backhtnd transformation of such surfaces furnishes a way to generate new solutions of the SGE from a given solution. This has received much attention in recent studies of the soliton solutions of the SGE,and the technique has been used successfully in the study of other non-linear evolution equations. In the first section of this paper we present a simple derivation of the classical Backlund theorem and its applications by using the method of moving frames . Our main result concerns affine minimal surfaces. They arise as the solution of the variation problem for affine area. The corresponding Euler-Lagrange equation is a fourth order partial differential equa· tion. In §2,we develop the basic properties of affine minimal surfaces.!n §3 we study the transformation of affine surfaces by realizing them as the focal surfaces of a line congruence. The natural conditions that the congruence be a W-congruence and that the affine normals at corresponding points be parallel lead to the conclusion that both surfaces are affine minimal. This is the content of Theorem 4, the main result of our paper. As in the classical case, the Theorem leads to the con· struction of new affine minimal surfaces from a given one by the solution of a completely integrable system of first order partial differential equations.
I. The classical Backlund theorem and its consequences. Let M be a surface in R3. We choose a local field of orthonormal frames VI> Vz, V3 with origin X in R3 such that X is a point of M and the vectors VI> Vz are tangent to M at X. Let rh, Oz, 03 be the dual coframe of VI> Vz, V3' We can write dx = l:Oava a
(\.1)
dV a
=
l:Oa~v~, {3
Here and throughout this paper we shall agree on the index ranges (1.2)
I
~
i,j, k ~ 2,
I
~
a, {3,
r
~
3.
The structure equations of R3 are *Work done under partial support of NSF grant MCS74-23180. **Work done under partial support of NSF Grant MCS76-01692. Received by the editors on April 13, 1978. Copyright © 1980 Rocky Mountain Mathematics Consortium
105
439
106
s. S.
CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
+ Opa
dO a = ~ Oil /\ 0lla, Oall (1.3)
II
dO all
=
= 0
~ Oar /\ 0rll· II
Restricting these forms to the frames defined above, we have (1.4)
and hence
o=
(1.5)
d0 3 = ~ 0; /\ 0;3. ;
By Cartan's lemma we may write (1.6)
=
0;3
~ h;jO j'
h;j
= hj;.
j
The first equation of (1.3) gives (1.7)
dO;
=
~ OJ /\ OJ; j
(where OJ2 is the Levi-Civita connection form on M which is uniquely determined by these two equations). The Gauss equation is (1.8)
where (1.9)
K def det(h,)
= the Gaussian curvature of M.
The Codazzi equations are (I. 10) j
The first fundamental form of the surface is (I.ll)
and the second fundamental form is (1.l2)
II
=
~ 0;0;3 ..
=
~ h;jO;Oj. ij
Near a non-umbilical point M can be parametrized by its lines of curvature, i.e., there are coordinates U; in which I and II are both diagonalized. Explicitly we write (1.l3)
= (aJ)Z(duJ)Z + (a2)Z(duz)Z II = b J(aJ)Z(duJ)2 + bz(aZ)Z(du2)Z, I
440 AFFINE GEOMETRY
107
so that hij = bj and hl2 = O. Observe that bj are the two principal curvatures. The Riemannian connection is given by
812 =
(1.14)
l
!
oa2 dU2 _ oal dUb aloul a20Uj
and the Codazzi equation can be written
ob·
lij- =' -b~ au~ = -
(1.15)
o(log aj) OUj
, i -# j.
Now suppose M has constant negative curvature K == -I; then b l b2 = -I. By (1.15)
bj
(1.16)
b;(b j
-
obj _ o(log aj) . ~ . b)au j - OUj ,I -rJ,
or ( 1.17) Therefore there exist two positive valued functions CI(UI), C2(U2) such that
b; + I
( 1.18)
= CI{~J. aj
Making a change in each coordinate separately, we may assume Cj = I. Writing b l = tan cj;, b2 = - cot cj;, then al = cos cj; and a2 = sin cj;, i.e., I
(1.19)
II
= =
cos 2 cj;(dUI)2
+
sin 2 cj;(dU2)2
sincj; cos cj;( (dUI)2 - (dU2)2) ,
so 2cj; is the angle between the two asymptotic directions. The connection form (1.l4) becomes
8 12 =
( 1.20)
.~
OUI
OU2
The Gauss equation (1.8) then gives 'j)2cj; 02cj; 'j)(UI)2 - 0(U2)2
(1.21) i.e., ¢ (1.22) Th~
=
.
=
Sin
cj; cos cj;,
2cj; satisfies the Sine-Gordon equation (SGE) 'j)2¢ 'j)2¢ IJ(UI)2 - 'j)(U2)2
.
=
Sin
¢.
converse is also true by the existence and uniqueness theorem on surfaces . Therefore we have proved: There is a one to one correspondence between solutions ¢ of SGE with 0 < ¢ < 7r and the local surfaces of constant Gaussian curvature K == - 1 in R3 up to rigid motion.
441
s. S. CHERN AND C.
108
L. TERNG
A congruence of lines is an immersed surface in the Grassmann manifold Gr of all lines in R3. Locally we can suppose the lines be oriented, with their points given by
y = X(u, v)
+ A~(U, v),
e = I,
Abeing a parameter on each line. The equations u
= u(t), v = v(t), u'Z +
ViZ
i= 0
define a ruled surface belonging to the congruence. It is a developable if and only if the determinant (~,
dX, d~)
= o.
This is a quadratic equation in du, dv. Suppose that it has two real and distinct roots. There are then two families of develop ables, each of which (in the generic case) consists of the tangent lines of a surface. It follows that the lines of the congruence are the common tangent lines of two surfaces M and M*, to be called the focal surfaces. There results a mapping /: M -> M* such that the congruence consists of the lines joining P EM to /(P) E M* . This construction, of great geometrical simplicity, plays a fundamental role in the theory of transformation of surfaces. DEFINITION 1. Consider a line congruence with the focal surfaces M, M* such that its lines are the common tangents at P E M and p* = /(P) E M* The congruence is called pseudo-spherical (p.s.) if (I) II pp* II = r, which is a constant independent of P (2) The angle between the two normals lip and IIp* at P and P* is equal to a constant 7: independent of P We can now state the classical Biicklund theorem and give a simple proof by the method of moving frames. THEOREM I. Suppose there is a p.s. congruence in R3 with the focal surfaces M and M* such that the distance r between corresponding points and the angle 7: between corresponding normals are constants. Then both M and M* have constant negative Gaussian curvature equal to - ·sinZ7:/rz. PROOF. We choose an orthonormal frame Vlo vz, V3 on M such that is the unit vector in the direction of PP* (where P and p* are the corresponding points) and V3 is the normal to M. From the definition of a on M* given by p.s. congruence, there is an orthonormal frame vi, v!,
VI
vr
vi (1.23)
= VI
v! = cos 7:Vz + sin 7:V3 = - sin 7:V2 + con 7:V3
vr
=
the normal to M*
442
109
AFFINE GEOMETRY
Suppose locally M is given by an immersion X: U open subset ofR2, then M* is given by (1.24)
X*
=
-+
R3, where U is an
+ rVl
X
Taking the differential of (1.24) gives
+ rdvl 1:; O;v; + r1:; 01a V a
dX* = dX (1.25)
=
;
a
= 01Vl + (0 2 + rOdv2 + r013v3· On the other hand, let 01 be the dual coframe of v1 we have dX* = Oivi + Ofvf (1.26) = O*lVl + Of cos ..V2 + Of sin ..V3· Comparing coefficients of V; in (1.25) and (1.26), we get
or = 0
1
(1.27)
Of cos .. = O2 + ,0 12 Of sin .. = r013
This gives (1.28)
O2 + r012 = , cot ..0 13 .
Since Or ; 0; are linearly independent, by (1.27) h12 never vanishes. In order to compute the curvature of M*, we have, by using (1.23), (1.28),
Oia = dvi ·vr (1.29)
= - sin .. 012 + cos ..Ola = sin, .. O2,
Then
(1.30)
er2 = - Or3 /\ Ofa sin .. - -O /\ 023 r 2
On the other hand, using (1.27),
er2 = -
K*Oi /\ Of
443 110
s.
S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
(1.31) Comparing coefficients in (I 30) and (1.31), we have (1.32)
_ K* ~hlz
= hlz sin" r
SID"
Since h lz never vanishes, (1.33)
z
K*
= - sin " --,z.
K
z = - sin " --,z.
By symmetry, (1.34)
The differential form equation (1.28) is called the Biicklund transformation. We can write it as a system of partial differential equations. For simplicity, we may assume K == -1, so that r = sin ". Let a be the angle between the ul-curves in the coordinate system (1 .19) and the vector PP* . Then (1.28) becomes
(1.35)
o(a _~ cjJ)
=
o(a - cjJ)
= I sin (a + cjJ),
ox
oy
a sin (a - cjJ)
a
where x = 1/2 (UI + uz), Y = 1/2 (UI - uz) are the asymptotic coordinates, and a = csc " - cot " = constant. In the asymptotic coordinates, the SGE becomes (1.36)
o2ifJ
axoy =
. SIDifJ·
By equating the cross derivatives of (1.35), it follows that 2a is also a solution of SGE. Note that the geometric derivation of (1.35) is local and the range of a and cjJ are restricted to lie in (0, 11:/2). However, from the analytic point of view, if 2cjJ is any solution of SGE and a, cjJ satisfy (1.35) then 2a is also a solution. Next we discuss the complete integrability of (1.28) or (1.35). THEOREM 2. Suppose M is a surface of constant negative curvature, K = - sin z "/r2, where r > 0 and" are constants. Given any unit vector Vo E TPo(M), which is not in a principal direction, there exists a unique surface M* and a p.s. congruence with M and M* as focal surfaces such that if
444 111
AFFINE GEOMETRY
P6 E M* is the point corresponding to Po, we have PoP6' the angle between the normals at Po, Pt. PROOF.
=
rvo and
1: is
The differential form equation (1.28) is completely integrable,
since
+ rOlZ - r cot 1:0 13) = 01 1\ 01Z + r013 1\ 032 - r cot rB 12
d(Oz
=( - t-- rK csc
1:) 01 1\ O2 , 2 1: - sin ----,:2. 2
. = 0, since K =
1\
023 ,
using (1.28)
Then the theorem follows directly from Frobenius Theorem. DEFINITION 2. A line congruence e': M --+ M* is called a Weingarten congruence (or W-congruence) if e'maps the asymptotic curves of M to the asymptotic curves of M*. COROLLARY I. PROOF.
11*
=
A p.s. congruence is a W-congruence .
OtOt3
+ OfOf3
Since the second fundamental forms are proportional, the asymptotic curves correspond under e'. The above results generalize to the case of n-dimensional submanifolds of constant negative curvature in R2n-l . This generalization will be the subject of a paper by K. Tenenblat and C. L. Terng. In what follows we will study the analogue of the geometric Backlund transformation in affine differential geometry. 2. Affine surfaces. Let A3 be the unimodular affine space of dimension 3, i.e., the space with real coordinates x-1, xZ, x 3 and volume element dV = dx 1 1\ dx z 1\ dx3. The linear group G which preserves the volume form is the unimodular affine group, i.e., (2.1 )
x*"
= L: c~x~ + ~
where
da
445
s.
112
S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
(2.2)
det(cp)
=
1
Following §I we shall continue to adopt the range 1,2,3, for small Greek indices and the range I, 2 for small Latin indices. In the space A3 distance and angle have no meaning, but there are the notions of vectors and parallelism. Let x be the position vector of the surface M sitting in A3. Let x, eb ez, e3 be an affine frame on M such that eb ez are tangent to M at x, and (2.3) We can write (2.4)
= I: w~efJ·
de a
fJ
wa , w~
The are the Maurer-Cartan forms of G. Differentiating (2.3) and using (2.4), we get
1: w~ =0.
(2.S)
a
The structure equation of A3 gives dw a
(2.6)
=
1: wfJ
/\ wp
f3
dw~
= I: w~
/\ w:.
r
If we restrict the forms to the surface M as defined above, we have (2.7) and the first equation of (2.6) gives
(2.8) By Cartan's lemma, we have
(2.9)
w7 = I: hikWk, hik =
hki ·
k
From now on we assume that M is non-degenerate, i.e., the rank of (h ij ) is equal to 2. Let H = det(h,J. Then it follows that the quadratic differential form
(2.10) is affinely invariant. Since it is of rank 2, it defines a pseudo-Riemannian structure on M, which is called the affine metric of M, to which the method
446
113
AFFINE GEOMETRY
of Riemannian geometry can be applied. In particular, the Gaussian curvature of II is defined. Since M is non-degenerate, we can choose e3 suitably such that
W~ +
(2.11)
i d log IHI = o.
Under such a choice the line through x in the direction of e3 is called the affine normal at x. Moreover, the vector IHj1/4e3 is affinely invariant, and is called the affine normal vector. The affine normal has interesting geometrical properties; see [1, 3]. Differentiating (2.11), we get
I; w£ /\ w1 = 0,
(2. 12)
i
which gives W~
(2.13)
= I; /ikW~,
/ik
=
/ki.
k
Equation (2.13) can be written as (2.14)
where /~
(2.15)
= I; N h jk · j
Then we can verify easily that the quadratic differential form (2. 17)
III
= I; w~wt i
is invariant under any change of frame keeping the affine normal e3 fixed. Therefore the trace of III relative to II, i.e., (2.18)
L
= ~IHlt I; /: I
is an affine invariant. It is called the affine mean curvature. A surface is called affine minimal if L = O. These are the critical points for the variational problem for the affine area defined by II. (See [2]) . Formula (2.18) can also be put in the form (2. l8a) Next we define the Fubini-Pick cubic form of M. Taking the exterior differential of (2.9), we get (2.19)
I; (dh ik k
-
I; h;jw{ j
-
I; hjkw{)
/\ w k
= O.
447
s. S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
114 We define (2.20)
Dhik
= 1: hikiWi = dhik
1:
1:
hiiWik hikW{. i i i
It follows from (2.9) and (2.19) that hiik are symmetric in all the indices. The cubic differential form (2.21)
P=
1:
hijkWiWiWk
i, j,k
is called the Fubini-Pick form on M. It measures the difference between the affine connection (2.22) and the Levi-Civita connection of II, which we write as (2.23) In fact, we find (2.24)
w{
=
w{
+ ~ 1: hikhik/W/,
(hik)
= inverse matrix of
(h ik ) .
k, /
Therefore the curvature tensor of the affine metric II can be computed from III and the Fubini-Pick form. Fpr later use, we will now develop the local theory for hyperbolic surfaces (i.e., H < 0). If M is hyperbolic, we may assume X(u, v) to be parametrized by its asymptotic curves. Choose el = ax/au, e2 = ox/ov, and e3 to be in the affine normal direction such that
Then
and by supposing
1112
> 0, w~
I
= - 2 d log 11 12 .
The affine metric is II = 2 Fdu dv
(2.25) where F
=
(1112)112
Then a standard computation implies that the Gaussian curvature of II, which is called the affine curvature is given by (2.26)
I o2iog F K= - - - - . F ouov
448
1I5
AFFINE GEOMETRY
By (2.20) j = dh lZ - h12W~ j hlljw = - 2hI2W~,
(2.27)
h Z2jWi
= -
+
hl2wl
hlZjw
hIZW~
=0
2hI2W~.
So we have hlZi ,.,2
(2.28)
""1 ,.,1 ""2
= 0, = - ~
2h 12
du
'
= _ h222 dv
2h 12
·
Therefore the Fubini-Pick form is (2.29)
Using the structure equation (2.6), we get
wI = ~u (log F) du (2.30)
w~ = ~v (log F) dv w~
w~
+ /~ dv = /~du + /dv, =
/du
where
/~ = _ (2.31)
1_av ~ (hill) 2F '
F3
/~ = _ ~ ~ (1z2?,J,)
au
2F '
=J-
K,
F3
(2.32)
L
=
F/
(2.33)
Since K, L are affine invariants, J is also an affine invariant. Next we develop a necessary and sufficient condition for a graph to be affine minimal. Let a surface be locally given by (2.34)
x 3 = f(x l , x 2 )
So x = (xl, x 2 ,f(XI , x 2») is the position vector. Then equations (2.4), (2.5) hold if we set
449 116
S. S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
_ (1,0, ()f) ()x! _ ( ()f) ez - 0, I, ()xz
(2.35)
el -
e3
= (0,0,
I)
with
,,()2f
3 _ Wi -
(2.36)
~ ~. j
Hence hij we let
ux'uX!
.
w!.
= ()ZfI()xi()x j and H = Hessian off. To find the affine normal, e1 = ei
(2.37)
ef
= e3 +
aIel
+
aZez
where ef is in the affine normal direction. Then a,.'s are determined by (2.38)
d loglHI
+ 4 L;
aihikdx k
= O.
i,k
Hence () I - L;j hij --. (log IH) 4 ()X!
(2.39) where (2.40) We compute
Wfl =
(def, ei,
en = da
(2.41)
l
+ a4
1
2
".*2
~3
dloglHI
a 2 = (e*1, de*3, e*) 3 = da + 4 d log IH I.
Therefore the affine mean curvature is
450
117
AFFINE GEOMETRY
We note that the equation for affine minimal surfaces is a fourth order equation in f If f is a non-degenerate quadratic polynomial, then H = constant. Hence the elliptic paraboloid x 3 = (x 1)Z + (x2)2 and the hyperbolic paraboloid x 3 = (X 1)2 - (x2)Z are affine minimal surfaces. Our next result is a formula for affine mean curvature in terms of Riemannian geometry. Let el> ez, e3 be a local orthonormal frame field on M such that el> ez are tangent to M, ()i is the dual coframe and ()ap are defined by (2.43)
de a
= I; ()apep, ()ap + ()Pa = O. P
Then we have equations (1.1) and (1.4) as in section I, and
(2.44)
H
= det(h ij) = K = Gaussian curvature of M .
To find the affine normal direction, we let
ei = ei
(2.45) where
ef
is in the affine normal direction, then ai's are determined by
(2.46) Hence (2.47) where (f)j denotes the covariant derivative ofJwith respect to ej. In fact
DJ = dJ = I;J..ui i
(2.48)
DJ.. = I; kw j = dJ.. - I; jjw{, j
j
We compute
en = w~ + Da Wf2 = (et, deL en = W5 + Da Wfl =
(2.49)
(def , e~,
1
l
+ 4a
Z
+ ~ d log IKI,
d log
IKI,
(2.50)
One immediate application of this formula is the following theorem
451 118
S. S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
THEOREM 3. Suppose M is a surface in R3 which is isometric to a piece of the elliptic paraboloid with its induced Riemannian metric. Then as an affine surface M is affine minimal. PROOF. Rewrite (2.50) as follows
21 K I- t L = hu{ - K -
i (log IKI)12 + 136 (log IKIMlog IKlh}
- 2h12{ -
(2.51)
! (log IKI)22 + ttl (log IKIH}
(In this formula the superscript 2 means square.) For the surface x 3
= (x1)2 + X(u, v)
(2.52)
(x2)2, we choose coordinates
= (v cos u, v sin u, v 2).
Then the coefficients of hjj in (2.51) vanish identically, and the theorem follows from the fact that these coefficients only depend on the first fundamental form of the surface. 3. Backlund theorem for affine surfaces. to prove our main theorem:
In this section we are going
THEOREM 4. Let M and M* be the focal surfaces of a W-congruence ill A3, with ihe correspondence denoted by 1': M --+ M* such that the affine normals at P and P* = I'(P) are parallel. Then both M and M* are affine minimal surfaces. PROOF. Choose an affine frame el
(3.1)
eb
e2, e3 such that
= PP*
e2 is tangent to M at P e3 is in the affine normal direction.
Suppose the position vector for M is given by X . Then the position vector for M* is given by (3.2)
X* = X
There exists a function k such that
(3.3)
+ el '
452
119
AFFINE GEOMETRY
is an affine frame on M*, with ef tangent to M* at X*. Let W*i be the dual frame of (3.3). Then
dX* (3.4)
= w*lef + w*zef = - w*lel + w*z (ez +
Le3)'
However, differentiating (3.2) we get (3.5)
+ del = (wi + WDel + (w Z + wi)ez + Wfe3'
dX* = dX
Comparing coefficients of (3.4) and (3.5), we get
+ wD
W*I = - (WI (3.6)
w*z
=
+ mf
wZ
Hence (3.7) Let
a = wi
+ wi +
kw~
= - w~ - dk + 2kw~ r = w 2 + WI - kWf = O.
~
(3 .8)
Then we have
W*I =
(3.9a) From (2.4) we
kw~
- a
w*z = kwf. h;:-'/ e
=( -el> ez + ke3, (J.9b)
= WI3
-
I
-del)
z
fWI
using (3.7) . Similarly, we have
1 - k Z (ka
+
m+ kI WI
453
120
S. S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
1 2 CV3*3 = CV33 - k CV3
(3.9c)
CVjl
= CV~
CVj2
= - CV§.
It follows from (2.18a), (3.9a), (3.9b) and (3.9c) that
= 21 IH*14l
L *cv*l /\ cv*2
1
(cv*l /\ cvj2
+ cvjl
l
= 21H*14 [( - kcv~ + a) =
/\ cv§
/\ CV*2)
+ kcv! /\
1 21H*14 [k(cv! /\ cv~ + cv§ /\ cv~) + a l
1
=~
IH*14l [k dcv~ + a
Since e3 is in the affine normal direction,
dcv~
cv~]
/\ cv§]
/\ cv§].
= 0 by (2.11). So we have
(3.10)
By hypothesis, e3 and ef are in the affine normal directions of M and M* respectively; we rewrite (2.11) as
cv~ (3.11) cvj3
= - !dlog IHI
= - ~dlOg
IH*I
Next we compute the following tensor by using (3.9a), (3.9b) and (3.9c) getting,
1: hjicv*' ® cv*i = ~j
(3.12)
1: cv*' ® cv1 3 i
=
(kcv~
=
cv~
=
L: hljcv
- a) ® (1cv 2)
® cv 2 + cv~ ® cv l i
® cvi -
+ kcv~ ® [ - b(ka + (3) + icvll -
1 k [a ® cv 2
+
cv~
® (ka + (3)]
k[a ® cv2 + cv~ ® (ka + (3)].
'. J
We note that the tensors 1:i.i h,jCV*i ® cv*i and 1: •. ihIjCV· ® cv i are symmetric and the same must be true of their difference. Because I is a Wcongruence (i.e., 11* is a multiple of II), these two tensors are proportional in the tensor space. Hence there exists a function b such that
454 121
AFFINE GEOMETRY
(3 .13)
a (is)
W
Z
+ w~ ® (ka + f3) = b 1.:: hijWi ® wi. i, j
This b oF k, for otherwise 11* = 0, contradicting the non-degeneracy of M*Suppose
ka
alw l = blw l
=
a
(3.14)
+ f3
+ azw2 + b2w 2.
Comparing the coefficients of W i (is) wi in (3.13), we get (3.15)
al
+ hllbz =
hlzb l
= hlzb
hllb l = hllb
(3.16) (3.17)
az
+ hl2 bz
= hZ2 b.
Since M is non-degenerate, hll and h lz cannot vanish simultaneously, and (3.15), (3.16) imply that bl = b. It also follows from (3.15) and (3 17) that (3.18) Using (3.9) and (3. 18), we get (3. 19)
W* I 1\ w*z
=
kH(b - k)w 1 1\
WZ
(3.20) However, (3.21) and (b - k) never vanishes, so we have (3 .22)
k4H*H
=
l.
Taking Ij4d log of (3.22) and using (3.11), we obtain dk - wj3 -
w~
=
o.
Then (3.9) implies that
f3 = o.
(3.23) Therefore by (3.14) (3.24)
b;
= ka;.
S.ubstituting (3.24) in (3.15) and (3.17), we obtain (3.25)
(l - khlz)al
-h22al
+ (I
+ hl\kaz = 0 + kh lZ )a2 = o.
455
122
S. S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
The determinant of (3.25) is
+
kZH If kZH
+
I¥-O then aj
I.
= 0, so a = O. And if kZH + I == 0, then
gZ - w5 = o.
(3.26)
But (3 = 0, so w~ = O. Therefore we have shown that either a or w~ is zero, so by (3.10) L * = O. Then by symmetry L = 0, i.e., both M and M* are affine minimal. We use the same notations as in the proof of the above theorem. We claim that if (j)~ = 0 then pp* is an asymptotic vector. Indeed using (3 .9),
= 0, L = 0, and L * = 0, we have wjl = /!lW*2 = k/!lW~ (3.27) = w! = /~z . Therefore hll == 0, i.e., el = PP* is an asymptotic vector. Suppose pp* is an asymptotic vector for all P, then hll == O. By using w~
the local theory for hyperbolic affine surfaces in section 2 and (3.7), we can conclude that wi = 0 and k = Ijh 1z . By (2.28), we have hlll = O. So J = O. But we have already shown that L = 0, hence K = O. Therefore we have proved the following two corollaries. COROLLARY I. Assumptions as in Theorem 4. totic direction for all P E M, then
a = 0, {3 = 0,
(3.28)
/fPP* is not in the asymp-
r = o.
COROLLARY 2. Assumptions as in Theorem 4. /f PP* is an asymptotic vector for all P E M, then both M and M* are affine minimal and affinely flat (i.e., the affine curvature is zero).
Now we wish to prove the integrability theorem. THEOREM 5. Suppose M is an affine minimal surface in A3. Given Vo E TpoCM) which is not an asymptotic vector, then there exist a surface M* and a W-congruence /: M -> M* with parallel affine normals at P E M
and P*
= /(P) E M* and PoPo* =
PROOF.
Taking the differential of the system (3.28), we have
da = (3.29)
Vo·
r
1\ w~ -
d{3 = - w! 1\ T dr
=a
1\
wi -
{3 1\ w~
+a
+ w~
a
1\
w~ 1\ {3.
+
1\ wI
2{3
1\
w~
-
21HI-t Lw l
1\ w 2
456 123
AFFINE GEOMETRY
That the system (3.28) is completely integrable follows from the fact that M is affine minimal. So there exist a function k and an affine frame el> ez, e3 with e3 in the affine normal direction and el(PO) = Vo such that a = 0, f3 = 0, T = 0. Let X be the position vector of Min A3, and X* = X + el' Using T = 0, we have
dX* = dX (3.30)
=
+ del
+ WDel + kwr(ez + ke3).
(WI
Since a = 0, (WI
(3.31)
+ wi)
A
kw¥ = kZwr
A w~
= kZHwl A wZ.
Since M is non-degenerate, WI + wi and kw¥ are linearly independent. Hence X* defines a surface M* having el> ez + l/ke3 as tangent at X* Therefore we can choose an affine frame on M* as follows
(3.32)
Then we have (3.9). Since a
= f3 = 0, (3.12) implies that
(3 .33) i.e.,
t' :
X ...... X ';' is a W-congruence.
Next we want to show that ej is in the direction of affine normal of M*. By (3 .9), (3.34) However, (3.35) =
-kZH*Hwl A
WZ
using (3.9),
so (3.36)'
k4H*H
=
Since e3 is in the affine normal direction, we have
1.
w3 = -
1/4 d log
IHI . By (3 .36),
457 124
(3.37)
S. S. CHERN AND C. L. TERNG
dk k
+ dlog4IH*I
-
3
QJ3
°
= .
Using (3.9), (3.37) and {3 = 0, we get
dk
k -
3 QJ3
i.e., ef is in the affine normal direction of M*. We note that if M is affinely flat and affine minimal in A3 with position vector X, then given any asymptotic vector field el on M such that X* = X + el defines a surface in A3, it follows from the local theory for hyperbolic surfaces in section 2 that <': X --> X* defines a W-congruence with parallel affine normals. The significance of the above theorem in geometry is that we can construct new affine minimal surfaces by solving the completely integrable system (3.28) on a given affine minimal surface. This fact seems to be of some geometric interest. We do not know, however, whether it has any physical applications. Our theorem can most likely be generalized to higher dimensions. REFERENCES
1. W. Blaschke, Vorlesungen iiber Differential geometrie II, Berlin 1923. 2. S. S. Chern, Affine minimal hypersur!aces, Proceedings of US-Japan Seminar on Minimal Submanifolds, Tokyo 1978, 1-14. 3. P. A. Schirokow and A. P. Schirokow, Affine Dijferentialgeometrie, Leipzig 1962 (translated from Russian). UNIVERSITY Of CALIfORNIA, BERKELEY CA94720.
458 Reprinted from Amer. Math. Monthly 86 (1979).
FROM TRIANGLES TO MANIFOLDS SHIING-SHEN CHERN
1. Geometry. I believe I am expected to tell you all about geometry; what it is, its developments through the centuries, its current issues and problems, and, if possible, a peep into the future. The first question does not have a clear-cut answer. The meaning of the word geometry changes with time and with the speaker. With Euclid, geometry consists of the logical conclusions drawn from a set of axioms. This is clearly not sufficient with the horizons of geometry ever widening. Thus in 1932 the great geometers O. Veblen and J. H. C. Whitehead said, "A branch of mathematics is called geometry, because the name seems good on emotional and traditional grounds to a sufficiently large number of competent people" [1]. This opinion was enthusiastically seconded by the great French geometer Elie Cartan [2]. Being an analyst himself, the great American mathematician George Birkhoff mentioned a "disturbing secret fear that geometry may ultimately tum out to be no more than the glittering intuitional trappings of analysis" [3]. Recently my friend Andre Weil said: "The psychological aspects of true geometric intuition will perhaps never be cleared up. At one time it implied primarily the power of visualization in three-dimensional space. Now that higher-dimensional spaces have mostly driven out the more elementary problems, visualization can at best be partial or symbolic. Some degree of tactile imagination seems also to be involved" [4]. At this point it is perhaps better to let things stand and turn to some concrete topics. 2. Triangles. Among the simplest geometrical figures is the triangle, which has many beautiful properties. For example, it has one and only one inscribed circle and also one and only one circumscribed circle. At the beginning of this century the nine-point circle theorem was known to almost every educated mathematician. But its most intriguing property concerns the sum of its angles. Euclid says that it is equal to 180 or 'IT by radian measure, and deduces this from a sophisticated axiom, the so-called parallel axiom. Efforts to avoid this axiom failed. The result was the discovery of non-Euclidean geometries in which the sum of angles of a triangle is less or greater than 'IT, according as the geometry is hyperbolic or elliptic. The discovery of hyperbolic non-Euclidean geometry, in the eighteenth century by Gauss, John Bolyai, and Lobatchevsky, was one of the most brilliant chapters in human intellectual history. The generalization of a triangle is an n-gon, a polygon with n sides. By cutting the n-gon into n - 2 triangles, one sees that the sum of its angles is (n - 2)'IT. It is better to measure the sum of the exterior angles! The latter is equal to 2'IT, for all n-gons, including triangles. 0
,
3. Curves in the plane; rotation index and regular homotopy. By applying calculus we can consider smooth curves and closed smooth curves in the plane, i.e., curves with a tangent line everywhere and varying continuously. As a point moves along a closed smooth (oriented) curve C once, the lines through a fixed point 0 and parallel to the tangent lines of C rotate through an angle 2n'IT or rotate n times about O. This integer n is called the rotation index of C. (See Fig. 1.) A famous theorem in differential geometry says that if C is a simple curve, i.e., if C does not intersect itself, n = ± I. Clearly, there should be a theorem combining the theorem on the sum of exterior angles of an n-gon and the rotation index theorem of a simple closed smooth curve. This is achieved by considering the wider class of simple closed sectionally smooth curves. The rotation index of The author received his D.Sc. from the University of Hamburg (Germany). He has taught at Tsinghua University, Academia Sinica, and the Univt:rsity of Chicago, and is now at the University of California, Berkeley; he has also held visiting positions at numerous universities around the world. He is a member of the National Academy of Sciences, received the National Medal of Science in 1976, and was awarded the Chauvenet Prize in 1970. His main research interests are in differential geometry, integral geometry, and topology.-Editol".f
339
459 340
[May
SIDING-SHEN CHERN
I I
/
"
--1-- " .....
\ \
I
I
\
I
\
/ \
" ..... ...... ----' ..,
I /
FlO. I
such a curve can be defined in a natural way by turning the tangent at a comer an amount equal to the exterior angle. (See Fig. 2.) Then the rotation index theorem above remains valid for simple closed sectionally smooth curves. In the particular case of an n-gon formed by straight segments, this reduces to the statement that the sum of its exterior angles is 2'11. This theorem can be further generalized. Instead of simple closed curves we can allow closed curves to intersect themselves. A generic self-intersection can be assigned a sign. Then, if the curve is properly oriented, the rotation index is equal to one plus the algebraic sum of the number of self-intersections. (See Fig. 3.) For example, the figure 8 has the rotation index zero.
n=-2 FIo. 2
Flo. 3
A fundamental notion in geometry, or in mathematics in general, is deformation or homatopy. Two closed smooth curves are said to be regularly homotopic if one can be deformed to the other through a family of closed smooth curves. Since the rotation index is an integer and varies continuously in the family, it must remain a constant; i.e., it keeps the same value when the curve is regularly deformed. A remarkable theorem of Graustein-Whitney says that the converse is true [5) : Two closed smooth curves with the same rotation index are regularly homotopic. It is a standard practice in mathematics that in order to study closed smooth curves in the plane it is more profitable to look at all curves and to put them into classes, the regular homotopy classes in this case being an example. This may be one of the essential methodological differences between theoretical science and experimental science, where such a procedure is impractical. The Graustein-Whitney theorem says that the only invariant of a regular homotopy class is the rotation index.
460 1979]
341
FROM TRIANGLES TO MANIFOLDS
Flo. 4
4. Euclidean three-space. From the plane we pass to the three-dimensional Euclidean space where the geometry is richer and has distinct features. Perhaps the nicest space curve which does not lie in a plane is a circular helix. It has constant curvature and constant torsion and is the only curve admitting 00 1 rigid motions. There is an essential difference between right-handed and left-handed helices (See Fig. 4), depending on the sign of the torsion; a right-handed helix cannot be congruent to a left-handed one, except by a mirror reflection. Helices play an important role in mechanics. From a geometrical viewpoint it may not be an entire coincidence that the Crick-Watson model of a DNA-molecule is double-helical. A double helix has interesting geometrical properties. In particular, by joining the end points of the helices by segments or arcs, we get two closed curves. In three-dimensional space they have a linking number. (See Fig. 5.)
00 L=O
FIo. 5
A recent controversial iss\le in biochemistry, raised by the mathematicians William PoW and George Roberts, is whether the chromosomal DNA is double-helical. In fact, if it is, it will have two closed strands with a linking number of the order of 300,000. The molecule is replicated by
461 342
[May
SlflING-SHEN CHERN
separation of the strands and formation of the complementary strand of each. With such a large linking number Pohl and Roberts showed that the replication process would have severe mathematical difficulties. Thus the double-helical structure of the DNA molecule, at least for the chromosome, has been questioned [6]. (Added January 26, 1979: A number of recent experiments have shown that some of the mathematical difficulties for the double helical structure of the DNA-molecule can be overcome by enzymatic activities (d. F . H. C. Crick, Is DNA really a double helix? preprint, 1978).) The linking number L is determined by the formula of James H . White [7):
(I)
T+W=L,
where T is the total twist and W the writhing number. The latter can be experimentally measured and changes by the action of an enzyme. This formula is of fundamental importance in molecular biology. Generally DNA molecules are long. In order to store them in limited space, the most economical way is to writhe and coil them. These discussions could indicate the beginning of a stochastic geometry, with the main examples drawn from biology. In a three-dimensional space surfaces have far more important properties than curves. Gauss's fundamental work elevated differential geometry from a chapter of calculus to an independent discipline. His Disquisitiones generales circa superficies curvas (1827) is the birth certificate of differential geometry. The main idea is that a surface has an intrinsic geometry based on the measure of arc length alone. From the element of arc other geometric notions, such as the angle between curves and the area of a piece of surface, can be defined. Plane geometry is thus generalized to any surface ~ based only on the local properties of the element of arc. This localization of geometry is both original and revolutionary. In place of the straight lines are the geodesics, the "shortest" curves between any two points (sufficiently close). More generally, a curve on ~ has a "geodesic curvature" generalizing the curvature of a plane curve and geodesics are the curves whose geodesic curvature vanishes identically. Let the surface ~ be smooth and oriented. At every point p of ~ there is a unit normal vector lI(p) which is perpendicular to the tangent plane to ~ atp. (See Fig. 6.) The vector lI(p) can be viewed as a point of the unit sphere So with center at the origin of the space. By sending p to lI(p) we get the Gauss mapping (2) The ratio of the element of the area of So by the element of area of ~ under this mapping is called the Gaussian curvature. Gauss's "remarkable theorem" says that the Gaussian curvature depends only on the intrinsic geometry of ~. In fact, in a sense it characterizes this geometry. Clearly the Gaussian curvature is zero if ~ is the plane.
v(p)
,, ------~----1
FIG. 6
462 1979]
FROM TRIANGLES TO MANIFOLDS
343
As in plane geometry we consider on }; a domain D bounded by one or more sectionally smooth curves. D has an important topological invariant X(D), called its Euler characteristic, which is most easily defined as follows: Cut D into polygons in a "proper way" and denote by v, e, and f the number of vertices, edges, and faces, respectively. Then X(D)= v- e+ f .
(3)
(Euler's polyhedral theorem was known before Euler, but Euler seems to have been the first one to recognize explicitly the importance of the "alternating sum.") The Gauss-Bonnet formula in surface theory is
~ext angles +
1 geod curv+ Jf Gaussian curv= 2'ITX(D), aD
(4)
D
where aD is the boundary of D. For a plane domain the Gaussian curvature is zero. If in addition the domain is simply connected, we have X(D)= I. Then this formula reduces to the rotation index theorem discussed in §3. We are indeed a long way from the sum of angles of a triangle. Generalizing the geometry of closed plane curves we can consider closed oriented surfaces in space. The generalization of the rotation index is the degree of the Gauss mapping g in (2). The precise definition of the degree is sophisticated. Intuitively it is the number of times that the image g(};) covers So, counted with sign. Unlike the plane, where the rotation index can be any integer, the degree d is completely determined by the topology of };; it is equal to
d=
I
2 x(};).
(5)
For the imbedded unit sphere this degree is + I independently of its orientation. A surprising result of S. Smale [8] says that the two oppositely oriented unit spheres are indeed regularly homotopic or, more intuitively, that the unit sphere can be turned inside out through a regular homotopy. It is essential that at each stage of the homotopy the surface has a tangent plane everywhere, but is allowed to intersect itself. 5. From coordinate spaces to manifolds. It was Descartes who in the seventeenth century revolutionized geometry by using coordinates. Quoting Hermann Weyl, 'The introduction of numbers as coordinates was an act of violence" [9]. From now on, paraphrasing Weyl, figure and number, like angel and devil, fight for the soul of every geometer. In the plane the Cartesian coordinates of a point are its distances, with signs, from two fixed perpendicular lines, the coordinate axes. A straight line is the locus of all points whose coordinates x,y satisfy a linear equation ax+by+c=O.
(6)
The result is the translation of geometry into algebra. Once the door was opened for analytic geometry, other coordinate systems came into play. Among them are polar coordinates in the plane and spherical coordinates, cylindrical coordinates in space, and elliptic coordinates in the plane and in space. The latter are adapted to the confocal quadrics and are particularly suited to the study of the ellipsoids, which include our earth. There is also a need for higher dimensions. For even if we start with a three-dimensional space, the theory of relativity calls for the inclusion of time as a fourth dimension. On a more elementary level, to record the motion of a particle, including its velocity, requires six coordinates (the hodograph). All the continuous functions in one variable form an infinite-dimensional space. Those which are square-integrable form a Hilbert space, which can be coordinatized by an infinite sequence of coordinates. Such a viewpoint, of considering all functions with prescribed properties, is fundamental in mathematics. From the proliferation of coordinate systems it is natural to have a theory of coordinates.
463 344
SJillNG-SHEN CHERN
[May
General coordinates need only the property that they can be identified with points; i.e., there is a one-to-one correspondence between points and their coordinates-their origin and meaning are inessential. If you find it difficult to accept general coordinates, you will be in good company. It took Einstein seven years to pass from his special relativity in 1908 to his general relativity in 1915. He explained the long delay in the following words: "Why were another seven years required for the construction of the general theory of relativity? The main reason lies in the fact that it is not so easy to free oneself from the idea that coordinates must have an immediate metrical meaning" [10). After being served by coordinates in the study of geometry, we now wish to be free from their bond. This leads to the fundamental notion of a rrumifold. A manifold is described locally by coordinates, but the latter are subject to arbitrary transformations. In other words, it is a space with transient or relative coordinates (principle of relativity). I would compare the concept with the introduction of clothing to human life. It was a historical event of the utmost importance that human beings began to clothe themselves. No less significant was the ability of human beings to change their clothing. If geometry is the human body and coordinates are clothing, then the evolution of geometry has the following comparison. Synthetic geometry Coordinate geometry Manifolds
Naked man Primitive man Modern man
A manifold is a sophisticated concept even for mathematicians. For example, a great mathematician such as Jacques Hadamard "felt insuperable difficulty . . . in maintaining more than a rather elementary and superficial knowledge of the theory of Lie groups" [11), a notion based on that of a manifold. 6. Manifolds; local tools. With coordinates practically meaningless there is a need for new tools in studying manifolds. The key word is invariance. Invariants are of two kinds: local and global. The former refer to the behavior under a change of the local coordinates, while the latter are global invariants of the manifold, examples being the topological invariants. Two of the most important local tools are the exterior differential calculus and Ricci's tensor analysis. An exterior differential form is the integrand of a multiple integral, such as f f/dydz + Qdzdx + Rdxdy,
(7)
in (x,y ,z)-space, where P, Q, R are functions in x,y,z and D is a two-dimensional domain. It is observed that a change of variables in D (supposed to be oriented) will be taken care of 2.utomatically if the multiplication of differentials is anti-symmetric, i.e., dy 1\ dz = - dz 1\ dy, etc., (8) where the symbol 1\ is used to denote exterior multiplication. It is also more suggestive to introduce the exterior two-form w= Pdy I\dz + Qdzl\dx+ Rdxl\dy (9) and to write the integral (7) as a pairing (D ,w) of the domain D and the form w. For if the same is done in n-space, then Stokes's theorem can be written (D ,dw) = (aD,w) , (10) where D is an r-dimensional domain and w is an exterior (r-l)-form; aD is the boundary of D and dw is the exterior derivative of w and is an r-form. Formula (10), the fundamental formula in multi-variable calculus, shows that a and d are adjoint operators. The remarkable fact is that, while the boundary operator a on domains is global, the exterior differentiation operator d on forms is local. This makes d a powerful tool. When applied to a function (=O-form) and a
464 1979]
FROM TRIANGLES TO MANIFOLDS
345
I-form, it gives the gradient and the curl, respectively. All the smooth forms, of all degrees (.;; dim of manifold), of a differentiable manifold constitute a ring with the exterior differentiation operator d. Elie Cartan used the exterior differential calculus most efficiently in local problems of differential geometry and partial differential equations. The global theory was founded by G. de Rham, after initial work of Poincare. This will be discussed in the next section. In spite of its importance the exterior differential calculus is inadequate in describing the geometrical and analytical phenomena on a manifold. A broader concept is Ricci's tensor analysis. Tensors are based on the fact that a manifold, being smooth, can be approximated at every point by a linear space, called its tangent space. The tangent space at a point leads to associated tensor spaces. Differentiation of tensor fields needs an additional structure, called an affine connection. If the manifold has a Riemannian or Lorentzian structure, the corresponding Levi-Civita connection will serve the purpose. 7. Homology. Historically a systematic study of the global invariants of a manifold began with combinatorial topology. The idea is to decompose the manifold into cells and see how they fit together. (The decomposition satisfies some mild conditions, which we will not specify.) In particular, if M is a closed manifold of dimension nand ak denotes the number of k cells of the decomposition, k=O, 1, ... ,n, then, as a generalization of (3), the Euler-Poincare characteristic of M is defined by
(ll) The basic notion in homology theory is that of a boundary. A chain is a sum of cells with multiplicities. It is called a cycle if it has no boundary, i.e., if its boundary is zero. The boundary of a chain is a cycle (see Fig. 7). The number of linearly independent k-dimensional cycles modulo k-dimensional boundaries is a finite integer bk , called the kth Betti number. The Euler-Poincare formula says (12)
(b)
(a) FIG. 7
The Betti numbers bk , and hence X(M) itself, are topological invariants of M, that is, they are independent of the decomposition and remain invariant under a topological transformation of M. This and more general statements could be considered the fundamental theorems of
465 346
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
[May
combinatorial topology. After the path-breaking works of Poincare and L. E. J. Brouwer, combinatorial topology blossomed in the u.s. in the 1920's under the leadership of Veblen, Alexander, and Lefschetz. While this is an effective way in deriving topological invariants, the danger in cutting a manifold is that it might be "killed." Precisely, this means that by using a combinatorial approach we may lose sight of the relations of the topological invariants with local geometrical properties. It turns out that, while homology theory depends on the boundary operator a, there is a dual cohomology theory based on the exterior differentiation operator d, the latter being a local operator. The resulting de Rham cohomology theory can be summarized as follows: The operator d has the fundamental property that, when applied repeatedly it gives the zero form; that is, for any k-form 0:, the exterior derivative of the (k+ I)-form do: is zero. This corresponds to the geometrical fact that the boundary of any chain (or domain) has no boundary. (See (10).) A form 0: is called closed, if do: = 0. It is called a derived form, if there exists a form {3, of degree k - I, such that it can be written 0: = d{3. Thus a derived form is always closed. Two closed forms are called cohomologous if they differ by a derived form. All the closed k-forms which are cohomologous to each other constitute the k-dimensional cohomology class. The remarkable fact is that, while the families of k-forms, closed k-forms, derived k-forms are immensely large, the k-dimensional cohomology classes constitute a finite-dimensional linear space whose dimension is the kth Betti number bk • De Rham cohomology is the forerunner of sheaf cohomology, which was founded by J. Leray [12] and perfected and applied with great success by H. Cartan and J.-P. Serre. 8. Vector fields and generalizations. On a manifold M it is natural to consider continuous vector fields, i.e., the attachment of a tangent vector to each point, varying in a continuous manner. If the Euler-Poincare characteristic X(M) is not zero, there is at least one point of M at which the vector vanishes. In other words, when the wind blows there is at least one spot on earth with no wind (for the Euler characteristic of the two-dimensional sphere is equal to 2). More precisely, at an isolated zero of a continuous vector field, an integer, called the index, can be defined, which describes to a certain extent the behavior of the vector field at the zero, i.e., whether it is a source, a sink, or otherwise. No matter what the vector field is, so long as it is continuous and has only a finite number of zeros, then the theorem of Poincare-Hopf says that the sum of its indices at all the zeros is a topological invariant which is precisely X(M). This is a statement on the tangent bundle of M, i.e., the collection of the tangent spaces of M. More generally, a family of vector spaces parametrized by a manifold M and satisfying a local product condition is called a vector bundle over M. A fundamental question is whether such a bundle is globally a product. The above discussion shows that the tangent bundle is not a product if X(M)7bO; for if it were a product, there would exist a continuous vector field which is nowhere zero. The existence of a space which is locally but not globally a product, such as the tangent bundle of a manifold M with X(M)*O, is not easy to visualize; geometry thus enters a more sophisticated phase. To describe the global deviation of a vector bundle from a product space the first invariants are the so-called characteristic cohomology classes. The Euler-Poincare characteristic is the simplest of the characteristic classes. The Gauss-Bonnet formula (4) in §4 takes the particularly simple form
f f KdA = 2'ITX(};)
(4a)
when the surface}; has no boundary. In this formula K is the Gaussian curvature and dA is the element of area. Formula (4a) is of paramount importance because it expresses the global invariant X(};) as the integral of a local invariant, which is perhaps the most desirable relationship between local and global properties. This result has a wide genera1ization.
466 1979]
FROM TRIANGLES TO MANIFOLDS
347
Let (13) be a vector bundle. The generalization of a tangent vector field on M is a section of the bundle, i.e., a smooth mapping s: M-,>E, such that the composition 7TOS is the identity. Since E is only locally a product, the differentiation of s needs an additional structure, usually called a connection. The resulting differentiation, called covariant differentiation, is generally not commutative. The notion of curvature is a measure of the noncommutativity of covariant differentiation. Suitable combinations of the curvature give rise to differential forms which represent characteristic cohomology classes in the sense of the de Rham theory, of which the Gauss-Bonnet formula (4a) is the simplest example [13]. I believe that the concepts of vector bundles, connections, and curvature are so fundamental and so simple that they should be included in any introductory course on multivariable calculus.
9. Elliptic differential equations. When M has a Riemannian metric, there is an operator • sending a k-form a to the (n-k)-form .a,n=dimM. It corresponds to the geometrical construction of taking the orthogonal complement of a linear subspace of the tangent space. With. and the differential d we introduce the codifferential (14)
and the Laplacian
il=d8+8d.
(15)
Then the operator 8 sends a k-form to a (k -I)-form and il sends a k-form to a k-form. A form a satisfying (16) ila=O is called harmonic. A harmonic form of degree 0 is a harmonic function in the usual sense. The equation (16) is an elliptic partial differential equation of the second order. If M is closed, all its solutions form a finite dimensional vector space. By a classical theorem of Hodge this dimension is exactly the kth Betti number bk • It follows by (12) that the Euler characteristic can be written
x(M)=d.-do,
(17)
where de (respectiveiy, do) is the dimension of the space of harmonic forms of even (respectively odd) degree. The exterior derivative d is itself an elliptic operator and (17) can be regarded as expressing X(M) as the index of an elliptic operator. The latter is, for any linear elliptic operator, equal to the dimension of the space of solutions minus the dimension of the space of solutions of the adjoint operator. The expression of the index of an elliptic operator as the integral of a local invariant culminates in the Atiyah-Singer index theorem. It includes as special cases many famous theorems, such as the Hodge signature theorem, the Hirzebruch signature theorem, and the Riemann-Roch theorem for complex manifolds. An important by-product of this study is the recognition of the need to consider pseudo-differential operators on manifolds, which are more general than differential operators. Elliptic differential equations and systems are closely enmeshed with geometry. The CauchyRiemann differential equations, in one or more complex variables, are at the foundation of complex geometry. Minimal varieties are solutions of the Euler-Lagrange equations of the variational problem minimizing the area. These equations are quasi-linear. Perhaps the "most" non-linear equations are the Monge-Ampere equations, which are of importance in several geometrical problems. Great progress has been made in these areas in recent years (14). With this heavy intrusion of analysis George Birkhoffs remark quoted above sounds even more disturbing. However, while analysis maps a whole mine, geometry looks out for the beautiful
467 348
[May
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
stones. Geometry is based on the principle that not all structures are equal and not all equations are equal. 10. Euler characteristic as a source of global invariants. To summarize, the Euler characteristic is the source and common cause of a large number of geometrical disciplines. I will illustrate this relationship by a diagram. (See Fig. 8.) Combinatorial Topology
Elliptic Topology
Total Curvature
Homology and Sheaf Cohomology
Characteristic Gasses
FIG. 8
11. Gauge field theory. At the beginning of this century differential geometry got the spotlight through Einstein's theory of relativity. Einstein's idea was to interpret physical phenomena as geometrical phenomena and to construct a space which would fit the physical world. It was a gigantic task and it is not clear whether he said the last word on a unified field theory of gravitational and electromagnetic fields. The introduction of vector bundles described above, and particularly the connections in them with their characteristic classes and their relations to curvature, widened the horizon of geometry. The case of a line bundle (i.e., when the fiber is a complex line) furnishes the mathematical basis of Weyl's gauge theory of an electromagnetic field. The Yang-Mills theory, based on an understanding of the isotopic spin, is the first example of a nonabelian gauge theory. Its geometrical foundation is a complex plane bundle with a unitary connection. Attempts to unify all field theories, including strong and weak interactions, have recently focused on a gauge theory, i.e., a geometrical model based on bundles and connections. It is with great satisfaction to see geometry and physics united again. Bundles, connections, cohomology, characteristic classes are sophisticated concepts which crystallized after long years of search and experimentation in geometry. The physicist C. N. Yang wrote [15]: "That nonabelian gauge fields are conceptually identical to ideas in the beautiful theory of fiber bundles, developed by mathematicians without reference to the physical world, was a great marvel to me." In 1975 he mentioned to me: "This is both thrilling and puzzling, since you mathematicians dreamed up these concepts out of nowhere." This puzzling is mutual. In fact, referring to the role of mathematics in physics, Eugene Wigner spoke about the unreasonable effectiveness of mathematics [16]. If one has to find a reason, it might be expressed in the vague term "unity of science." Fundamental concepts are always rare. 12. Concluding remarks. Modern differential geometry is a young subject. Not counting the strong impetus it received from relativity and topology, its developments have been continuous.
468 19791
FROM TRIANGLES TO MANIFOLDS
349
I am glad that we do not know what it is and, unlike many other mathematical disciplines, I hope it will not be axiomatized. With its contact with other domains in and outside of mathematics and with its spirit of relating the local and the global, it will remain a fertile area for years to come. It may be interesting to characterize a period of mathematics by the number of variables in the functions or the dimension of the spaces it deals with. In this sense nineteenth century mathematics is one-dimensional and twentieth century mathematics is n-dimensional. It is because of the multi-variables that algebra acquires paramount importance. So far most of the global results on manifolds are concerned with even-dimensional ones. In particular, all complex algebraic varieties are of even real dimension. Odd-dimensional manifolds are still very mysterious. I venture to hope that they will receive more attention and substantial clarification in the twenty-first century. Recent works on hyperbolic 3-manifolds by W. Thurston [17] and on closed minimal surfaces in a 3-manifold by S. T. Yau, W. Meeks, and R. Schoen have thrown considerable light on 3-manifolds and their geometry. Perhaps the problem of problems in geometry is still the so-called Poincare conjecture which says that a closed simply connected 3-dimensional manifold is homeomorphic to the 3-sphere. Topological and algebraic methods have so far not led to a clarification of this problem. It is conceivable that tools in geometry and analysis will be found useful. This paper, written with partial support from NSF Grant MCS77-23579, was delivered as a Faculty Research Lecture at Berkeley, Ca1ifornia, on April 27, 1978. Refereaces
1. O. Veblen and 1. H. C. Whitehead, Foundations of Differential Geometry, Cambridge, England, 1932, p. 17. 2. Elie Carlan, Le role de Ia theorie des groupes de Lie dans I'evolution de la geometrie moderne, Congres Inter. Math., Oslo, 1936, Tome I, p. 96. 3. George D. Birkhoff, Fifty years of American mathematics, Semic.:ntennial Addresses of Amer. Math. Soc., 1938, p. 307. 4. A Wei!, S. S. Chern as friend and geometer, Chern, Selected Papers, Springer Verlag, New York, 1978, p. xii. S. H. Whitney, On regular closed curves in the plane, Comp. Math. 4 (1937) 276-284. 6. William F. Pohl and George W. Roberts, Topological considerations in the theory of replication of DNA, 10urnal of Mathematical Biology, 6 (1978) 383-386, 402. 7. lames H. White, Self-linking and the Gauss integral in higher dimensions, American 1. of Math ...91 (1969), 693-728; B. Fuller, The writhing number of a space curve, Proc. Nat. Acad Sci., 68 (1971) 815-819; F. Crick, Linking numbers and nucleosomes, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., 73 (1976) 2639-2643. 8. S. Smale, A classification of immersions of the two-sphere, Transactions AMS, 90 (1959) 281-290; cf. also A. Phillips, Turning a surface inside out, Scientific American, 214 (May 1966) 112-120. A film of the process, by N. L. Max, is distributed by International Film Bureau, Chicago, III. 9. H. Weyl, Philosophy of Mathematics and Science, 1949, p. 90. 10. A. Einstein, Library of Living Philosophers, vol. I, p. 67. 11. 1. Hadamard, Psychology of Invention in the Mathematical Field, Princeton, 1945, p. 115. Il. R. Godement, Topologie algebrique et theorie des faisceaux, Hermann, Paris, 1958. 13. S. Chern, Geometry of characteristic classes, Proc. 13th Biennial Sem. Canadian Math. Congress, 1-40 (1972). 14. S. T . Yau, The role of partial differential equations in differential geometry, Int. Congress of Math., Helsinki, 1978. 15. C. N . Yang, Magnetic monopoles, fiber bundles, and gauge fields, Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 294 (1977) 86-97. 16. E. Wigner, The unreasonable effectiveness of mathematics in the natural sciences, Communications on Pure and Applied Math., 13 (1960) 1-14. 17. W. Thurston, Geometry and topology in dimension three, Int. Congress of Math., Helsinki, 1978. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS,
UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA, BERlCEl.BY, CA 94720.
469
manuscripta mathematica
manuscripta math. 28, 207 - 217 (1979)
© by Springer-Verlag 1979
LIE GROUPS AND KdV EQUATIONS Shiing-shen Chern * and Chia-kuei Peng Dedicated to Hans Lewy and Charles B. Morrey, Jr. I.
In troduct ion In recent years there have been extensive studies
of evolution equations with soliton solutions, among which the most important ones are the Korteweg-deVries and sine-Gordon equations.
We will show that the
alge-
braic basis of these mathematical phenomena lies in Lie groups and their structure equations; their explicit solutions with special properties often give the evolution equations. The process is thus similar to the introduction of a "potential".
In fact,
from SL(2; R),
the special linear group of all (2 X 2)-real unimodular matrices, one is led naturally to the KdV and MKdV (= modified Korteweg-deVries) equations of higher order. A Miura transformation exists between them. H.H. Chen,
Following
(2) this leads to the Backlund transforma-
tions of the KdV equation.
2.
KdV equations Let
(1)
SL(2; R)
* Work
done under partial support of NSF grant MCS77-23579. 207
470 be the group of all (2 X 2)-real unimodular matrices. Its right-invariant Maurer-Cartan form is Wl 1
(2)
w=dXX
1 1
=
(
w 2
where
1
w
(3)
l
2 + w = O. 2
The structure equation of SL(2;R), or the Maurer-Cartan equation, is
(4)
dW=W"w,
or, written explicitly, =w (4a)
U
1
2 l
2w
dwl 2
2W
dW
Let
2
l 1 1
2
2 " Wl 1 1
" W
be a neighborhood in the (x,t)-plane and
consider the smooth mapping (5)
f : U
-7
SL(2; R)
.
The pull-backs of the Maurer-Cartan forms can be written 1
W l
T)dx + Adt qdx + Bdt
(6 )
w
1
2
= rdx + Cdt ,
where the coefficients are functions of
x,t.
The forms in (6) satisfy the equations (4a). gives
208
This
We c o n s i d e r t h e s p e c i a l c a s e t h a t
i s a p a r a m e t e r i n d e p e n d e n t of
x,t.
we g e t from (7)
and
7
Writing
,
q = u(x,t)
(8)
r = +1
,
S u b s t i t u t i o n i n t o t h e second e q u a t i o n of (7) g i v e s (10)
u
,
= K(u)
t
where K(u) = u C X
+
2uC
X
+
2 27 C - x 2
cxxx
A s a n example we t a k e
Then (10) becomes
which is t h e well-known KdV (= Korteweg d e V r i e s ) equa-
t ion. I t is t h e r e f o r e n a t u r a l t o take
7.
C
t o be an a r b i -
S i n c e t h e e x p r e s s i o n i n (11) 2 i n v o l v e s e x p l i c i t l y o n l y 7 , we s h a l l s u p p o s e C t o 2 be a polynomial i n 7 , i . e . , p r e c i s e l y . t r a r y polynomial i n
472
where
C.(x,t)
are functions of
x,t.
Substi tuting
J
(14) into (11) and equuting to zero the powers of
Tj
2
,
we get (15)
Co = const.,
(16)
C
1
j+l,x
2
+ !. C u C. - uC 4 j,xxx j,x x J
o <
~
j
n-1
It is interesting to note that the latter is exactly the recursion formula for the conserved densities of the KdV equation! [4] We write the right-hand number of (10)
as 1
K (x) = u C + 2uC - - C n x n n,x 2 n,xxx
(17)
def
The last quantity is introduced by definition. more, introducing an infinite sequence of suppose (16) be valid for all
j, 0
-2C
n+1,x
Further-
C . we can J
<
j
< +
00.
The
equation (18)
u
t
= K (u)
n
is called the KdV equation of the nth order. The C . 's are polynomials in
u
--J
derivatives with respect to
(19)
C
=
x.
C.Tj
and its successive
To prove this, we put
-2j
J
There is no loss of generality in assuming (20)
Equ ation (16) can be written (21 )
1
2~
T) C
2
x
~
u C - uC x
x
1 ~ + -4 C , xxx
~
When multiplied by
2C,
1
~2
- (uC )
this becomes
x
~~
+ -2 (C C 210
xx
-
1 ~2 C ) 2 x x
-
473 Integrating with respect to 2 ,...,2 11 (C -1)
(22)
,...,2
x,
we have
1,...,,...,
= -uC
+ - CC 2
Equating the coefficients of
11
1 ,...,2
- - C xx 4 x
-2j
,j~O,
in both sides we
get
C C - u k j+1-k
2C. 1 J+
1
(23)
+
C C k j-k
C C k j-k,xx
2
1
C
4
C k,x j-k,x
The second equation determines
C. J+1
j
1,2 I
•••
as a polynomial
of
C , ... I C and their x-derivatives. Hence the l j statement to be proved follows by induction. We assign to x
the weight
1
2.
u
the weight 1 and to the subscript
Then
C. J
is isobaric of weight
j,
as seen by induction. one gets the explicit form of the nth n+l is a polynomial of order KdV equation by (17); K (u) From
C
n
u
and its x-derivatives, and is isobaric of weight 3 n + 2. The next two 2C
2
2 3 u 4
(23a) 2C
3
=-
C.' s are given by J
1 u 4 xx
2 5 5 3 5 uu u +-u + 16 x 8 8 xx
1 u 16 xxxx
In our terminology the classical KdV equation is of the
211
474 f i rs t order;
3.
cf (12),
(13).
MKdV equations In the same way we set
(24)
=
q
~n
(7) and consider
of
x,t.
=
r ~
v (x, t)
to be a parameter independent
Then equations (7) become
A
v(C-B),
x
+ 2vA
2~B
B x
(25)
of which the last two can be written (C-B) (26) v
2~(B
4vA -
x
+ C)
1 (B + C) + 2 x
t
~
,
(C - B)
.
Let (27)
C+B
C-B=~P,
Q,
A
~R
The above equations become R
vP,
P
4vR - 2Q ,
x
(28)
v Eliminating
x
t
Q + x
~
2
P
we get
P, Q,
(29)
= ~2
v
t
= M(v) ,
where (30)
2
M(v)
~
R x + (vR) _ x v
By taking
(31)
R
2 ~
1 2 v 2 2 12
~(R:)
xx
475 equation (29) becomes
v
(32)
1 = - v
4
t
-
xxx
which is the well-known modified
KdV equation .
In general, we set R. (x, t) T} 2 (n-j) J
(33)
R
In order that
M(v)
be independent of
we get the
T}
conditions RO (34)
v
const
-1
(v -1 R . )
1
R.
4
J+l,x
J,X xx
-
(vR ) j
o< By using the second equation to define
suppose (34) to be valid for all hand side of (29) , with noted by
M (v).
>
~
n-l
Rj + l , we can The rightO.
given by (33) , will be de-
R
Then we have
n
(35)
j
j
x
M (v)
n
=
-v
-1
R
n+l, x
(v)
From (34) we immediately observe that
R . are even, J
i. e. ,
R. (-v) J
(36)
It follows from (35) that M (-v) n
(37)
=
R . (v) J M (v) n
are odd, i.e.,
-M (v) .
n
There is no loss of generality in supposing
(38)
are found to be
R.' s
and the first
J
RO
=1
Rl
=- 2
1
V
2
213
RO = 1,
476
~
4.
3
= 8"
1
4
v
2
1
vv
- "4
+ 8 Vx
xx
Miura transformation The connection between the KdV and MKdV equations
is furnished by the Miura transformation.
To define it
we observe that (17) can be written formally as (39)
K 1 (u) = TK (u) n+ n
where (40)
1 u'
T
2
d D = dx'
-1
D,
I'
u
u
x
Similarly, we write (35) as
(41)
M (v) = SM (v) n+l n
,
where 1
2
- v
S -- -4 D
(42)
2
- v
,-1
D
v.
By an easy computation the following commutativity relations can be verified: ,
(2v + D)S(v)
T(v
(2v - D)S(v)
T(-v
2 + v ) (2v + D)
(43) I
,
2 + v ) (2v - D)
.
It follows that K (v n (44) K (-v n In fact, and (32), Ml (v)
for
n = 1,
+ v 2)
I
,
2 + v )
(2v - D)M (v) n
this follows directly from (13)
their right-hand sides being
respectively.
,
(2v + D)M (v) n
Kl (u)
and
The general case follows from in-
duction by applying (43)
to
M l(v). nThese results were derived by a different method
214
477
in [1], in which they, or at least a part of them, were attributed to P. Olver.
Formula (44) gives a funda-
mental relation between the KdV and MKdV equations and is at the basis of the Miura transformation.
Of impor-
tance is the relation (45) If
= vx
u u
and
v
+ v
2
are so related and if
R . (v)
satisfy
J
then, by a straightforward computation, we find
(34),
that 1 = - - M.
C . (u)
J
2
J-l
(v)
+ R . (v) J
satisfy the recurrent relation (16).
-!.2
(46a)
It follows that 2 C. (v + v ) J x
M (v) + R . (v) j-l J
.
Similarly, we have 1
= C . (-v
-2 M. l(v) + R.(v) JJ
(46 b)
J
x
2 + v )
.
These relations can also be written 2 2 -C. (v + v ) + C . (-v + v ), x J J x
M. 1 (v) J(47)
= CJ. (v x
2R . (v) J
In particular, we draw from (47) M. (v), R.(v) J
are polynomials of
J
tives.
Moreover, if
v
2 2 + v ) + C . (-v + v ) x J the conclusion that v
and its x-deriva-
and the subscript
given the weight I,
then
isobaric of weight
2j.
M. 1 (v)
J-
and
x
R . (v) J
are each are
From (44) we get
~~
(48)
where
u
- Kn (u)
=
(D + 2v)
is given by (45).
tion of MKdV,
then
u(x,t),
tion of KdV.
But then
-v
(~~
Thus, if
- Mn v
(V)) is a solu-
given by (45), is a soluis also a solution of MKdV, 215
478 so that the KdV has a new solution given by (49)
u
=
-v
to
x u
formation, and that from
u
This passage from
v
+ v
2
is called a Miura transto
u
a Backlund trans-
10rmation, following an approach of To pass from
u to
u
H.H. Chen [3).
we set
(50)
u = w x
Then u - u
=
(w - ';)
2v
x
x
and we can suppose 2v
(51)
w - w
I t follows that
(w +
';)
x
~ 2 1 (w - w) 2
(!
(52) ~
(w - w) t Wi th
w
given, such that
(w 2M n 2 u = w
x
;))
is a solution of (18),
the system (52) is completely integrable. w
of (52)
gives a new solution
is a Backlund transform of
u = w x
A solution of (18);
u
u.
From the MKdV equation one can pass to a twice modified KdV equation by a similar procedure.
This and
other results will be reported later. References 1.
M. Adler and J. Moser, On a class of polynomials connected with the Korteweg-deVries equation, Communications in Math Physics 61, 1-30 (1978)
2.
HSing-Hen Chen, Relation between Backlund transformations and inverse scattering problems, Lecture Notes in Math, no. 515, 241-252, Springer 1976
216
479 3.
M. Crampin, F.A.E. Pirani, D.C. Robinson, The soliton connection, Lett. Math. Phys. 2, 15-19 (1977)
4.
C. S. Gardner, J.M. Greene, M.D. Kruskal, R.M. Miura, Korteweg-deVries equation and generalizations VI, Methods for exact solution, Comm. Pure and Appl. Math. 27, 97-133 (1974)
University of California Berkeley, California 94720, USA and University of Science and Technology of China Hofei, Anhwei People's Republic of China
(Received February 23, 1979)
2 17
Reprinted from Diferential Geometry and Complex Analysis, Springer Verlag, 1984.
Deformation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures By Shiing-shen Chern '
1. Introduction and Statement of Results The isometric deformation of surfaces preserving the principal curvatures was first studied by 0.Bonnet in 1867. Bonnet restricted himself to the complex case, so that his surfaces are analytic, and the results are different from the real case. After the works of a number of mathematicians, W. C. Graustein took up the real case in 1924 -, without completely settling the problem. An authoritative study of this problem was carried out by Elie Cartan in [2], using moving frames. Based on this work, we wish to prove the following: Theorem: The non-trivial families of isometric surfaces having the same principal curvatures are the following: 1) a family of surfaces of constant mean curvature; 2) a family of surfaces of non-constant mean curvature. Such surfaces depend on six arbitrary constants, and have the properties: a) they are W-surfaces; b) the metric d i 2 = (grad H)2 ds2/(H2- K), where ds2 is the metric of the surface and H and K are its mean curvature and Gaussian curvature respectively, has Gaussian curvature equal to - 1. By a non-trivial family of surfaces we mean surfaces which do not differ by rigid motions. The theorem is a local one and deals only with pieces of surfaces. We suppose that they do not contain umbilics and that they are C5. The analytic formulation of the problem leads to an over-determined system of partial differential equations. It must be the simple geometrical nature of the problem that the integrability conditions give the clear-cut conclusion stated in the theorem. The surfaces in class 2) are clearly of interest. An analogous problem is concerned with non-trivial families of isometric surfaces with lines of curvature preserved. They also have a simple description and are given by the molding surfaces; cf. [I, pp. 269-2841. I wish to thank Konrad Voss for calling my attention to this problem.
' Work done under partial support of NSF grant MCS 77-23579
481 Defonnation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
156
2. Formulation of Problem We consider in the euclidean space E3 a piece of oriented surface M, of sufficient smoothness and containing no umbilics. Over M there is then a well-defined field of orthonormal frames xel e 2e3' such that x E M, e3 is the unit normal vector at x, and el>e 2 are along the principal directions. We have then dx = wle l + W2e2 del = W12e2 + W13e3, de 2 = - wlt"e l + W23 e 3, de3 = - W13 e l - w23e~,
(1)
the w's are one-forms on M. Our choice of the frames allows us to set W I2
WI3
= hWI + kW2 = aWl, W23 = CW2,
a> c.
(2)
Then a and c are the two principal curvatures at x. As usual we dellote the mean curvature and the Gaussian curvatures by H
= -Ha + c), K = ac.
(3)
The functions and forms satisfy the structure equations obtained by exterior differentiation of (1). They give dW I dW 12 dW I3
= W12 /\ W2 , dW 2 = WI /\ W12 , = - KWI /\ W2, = W I2 /\ W23, dW23 = W13 /\ W12 ·
(4)
The equation in the second line of (4) is called the Gauss equation and the equations in the last line of (4) are called the Codazzi equations. Using (2), the Codazzi equations give {da - (a - c) hw 2} /\ WI = 0, {dc - (a - c) kwd /\ W2 = 0.
(5)
We introduce the functions u, v by 2dH
= d(a + c) = (a
- c) (UWI
+ vw 2 ).
(6)
Then we have 1 - - da a-c 1 - - dc a-c
=
(u - k)wI
+ hW2, (7)
= kWI + (v - h)W2'
and d log(a - c)
= (u - 2k)wI - (v - 2h)W2 '
(8)
We note also the relation 4(grad H)2 = (a - C)2 (u 2
+ v 2 ).
(9)
482 Defonnation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
157
For our treatment we introduce the forms
= - VWI + UW2, exl UWI - VW2' ex 2 = VW I + UW 2 • = 0 is tangent to the level curves H = const and (Jl
= =
UWI
+ VW2'
(J2
(10) (11)
Thus (JI exl = 0 is its symmetry with respect to the principal directions. If H =l= const, the quadratic differential form d§2
=
(Ji
+ (J~ = exi + ex~ = (u 2 + v2 )(wi + w~) (grad H)2
= H2_K ds
2
(12)
defines a conformal metric on M . We find it convenient to make use of the Hodge *-operator, such that *W2= -WI'
(13)
on one-forms. Then we have
* (JI = (J2, * (J2 = -
(14)
(Jt>
(15)
Using these notations Eq. (6) and (8) can be written
+ c) = (a + 2 * W12.
2dH = d(a d log(a - c)
=
exl
C)(JI'
(6 a) (8 a)
Suppose M* is a surface which is isometric to M with preservation of the principal curvatures. We shall denote the quantities pertaining to M* by the same symbols with asterisks, so that a* = a,
c*
= c.
(16)
As M and M* are isometric, we have wT = cos rWI - sin rw 2 , w! = sin rWI + cos rw 2 •
(17)
Exterior differentiation gives dwT = (- dr + W 12 ) 1\ wt = wT 1\ ( - d r + W 12),
d w!
so that (18)
By (8 a) we get Applying the *-operator to this equation, we find WT2 -
W I2
=
i(ex! - ex 2)·
483 Defonnation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
158
This gives dr=Hx2 - a
n
(19)
We wish to simplify the last expression. From (6a) we have
Or = 01> i.e. which gives, in view of (17), u* v*
= cos r u - sin r v = sin r u + cos r v.
(20)
It follows that a!
= sin 2 r . a I + cos 2 r . a2'
Putting t
= cot r,
(21)
we get from (19), dt
=
tal - a2'
(22)
This is the total differential equation satisfied by the angle r of rotation of the principal directions during the isometric deformation. In order that the deformation be non-trivial it is necessary and sufficient that the Eq. (22) be completely integrable. This is expressed by the conditions dal
= 0,
(23)
When the mean curvature H is constant, we have tt=v=O
and t = const. This gives the theorem of Bonnet (cf. [3]) : Theorem (Bonnet) : A surface of constant mean curvature can be isometrically deformed preserving the principal curvatures. During the deformation the principal directions rotate by a fixed angle.
3. Connection Form Associated to a Coframe Given the linearly independent one-forms WI, W 2 , the first two equations in (4) uniquely determine the form W 1 2' We call WI, W2 the (orthonormal) coframe of the metric (24)
484 Deformation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
159
and W I2 the connection form associated to it. The discussions leading to (18) give the following lemma: Lemma 1. When the coframe undergoes the transformation (17), the associated connection forms are related by (18).
We now consider a conformal transformation of the metric d§2 = A2 ds 2 = A2(wf + w~),
(25)
where A > 0 is a function on M. Let (26) Then we have: Lemma 2. Under the changes of coframe (26) the associated connection forms are
related by Wf2 = W 12 -
i(iJ - 0) log A.
(27)
Here iJ,"O are the differentiation operators relative to the complex structure = WI + iW2 of M. The proof is by straightforward calculation and will be omitted. We note, however, the useful formula
W
*(iJ - 0)/= - id/
(28)
where / is a function on M.
4. Surfaces of Non-Constant Mean Curvature Suppose H =l= const. Then A = + (u 2 + V2)1/2 > 0,
(29)
and we write u
+ iv = A
exp(it/!).
(30)
Let
= () =
W
WI
()I
rx = rxl
+ iW2' + i()2, + irx2.
(31)
Then
() = A exp( - it/!)w, rx = A exp(it/!)w,
(32)
rx = exp(2 i t/!)().
(33)
so that The forms w, (), rx define the same complex structure on M and the operators *, can be used without ambiguity.
a, "0
485 Defonnation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
160
Let (0\2,0 12 ,0(\2 be the connection forms associated to the co frames (01' (02; 01>0 2 ; 0(1,0(2 respectively. By Lemmas 1 and 2, Sect. 3, we have the fundamental relation 0\2
= (0\2 + d", - i(a - 0) log A = 2d", + 0(12.
(34)
In addition, from (23) we have (35) The second equation of (23) then implies that the metric d§2 on M has Gaussian curvature equal to - 1. Moreover, the Eq. (35) shows that the curves 0(2 = 0 are geodesics and the curves 0(1 = 0 have geodesic curvatures equal to 1, i.e., are horocycles relative to the metric d§2. From (8 a) and (23) we get d*(O\2
= O.
(36)
* to (34), we get, by using (28), *0\2 = *(012 + *d", - d log A = 2*d",
Applying
-
0(1.
(37)
Exterior differentiation of the last equation gives, in view of (23), (36), d*d", = 0,
(38)
which says that", is a harmonic function. Differentiation of (37) then gives (39)
d*012=O.
By differentiating (6a) and using (8 a), we get dOl
+ (0(1 + 2*(Od
/\ 0 1 =
o.
But (40)
From (37) we find
- * 0 12 + 0(1 + 2 * (012 =
2d log A.
It follows that
d log A /\ 0 1 = 0,
(41)
and we set
d log A = B0 1 •
(42)
This is a differential equation in log A . But a"O log A is related to the Gaussian curvature K of M . We wish to combine these facts to draw the remarkable conclusion that M is a W-surface. This involves further computation of the integrability conditions. The simplest way is to make use of the coframe 0( 1,0(2' because their exterior derivatives satisfy the simple Eq. (23). For a function f on M we define df=flO(I +f20(2·
(43)
486 Defonnation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
161
Its cross covariant derivatives satisfy the commutation formula
121 - 112
+ 12 = o.
(44)
Moreover, the condition for 1/1 to be a harmonic function is
+ 1/1 22 + 1/1 1 = o.
1/1 11
(45)
Note also that, by (37),
*0 12 = - (21/12 + 1)0: 1 + 21/110: 2.
(46)
By (6 a) and (8 a), the condition for M to be a W-surface is (0: 1 + 2 * W 12)
1\
01 =
o.
Using (37) and (42), this can be written
21/11 cos 21/1
+ (21/12 + 1) sin 21/1 = O.
(47)
From (42) we have (log A)l = B cos 21/1,
(log A)z = B sin 21/1,
(48)
whose differentiations give (log A)\i = Bi cos 21/1 - 2Bl/li sin 21/1, (log A)zi = Bi sin 21/1 + 2Bl/li cos 21/1,
i
= 1,2.
(49)
The commutation formula (44) applied to log A gives
B1 sin 21/1 - B2 cos 21/1
+ B{21/11
cos 21/1
+ (21/12 + 1) sin 21/1} = 0. (50)
But there is another equation between B 1 , B 2 , to be derived from the Gauss equation (51)
as follows: From (34) we have W 12
= d 1/1 + 0:2 + (log A)2 0:1 - (log A)I 0:2·
(52)
Substituting into the above equation, we get - (log A)11 - (log A)22
+ {- (log A)I +
I}
+ ac A - 2 = 0,
or, by (49),
- B I cos 21/1 - B 2 sin 21/1 + B {2 1/1 I sin 21/1 - (21/12
+ 1) cos 21/1} + 1 + a c A - 2 = 0.
(53)
Solving for B I , B2 from (50), (53),
BI
+ B(2"'2 + 1) -
(1 B2 - 2BI/II - (1
+ acA -2) cos 21/1 = 0, + acA -2) sin 21/1 = 0.
(54)
Differentiating the first equation with respect to the second index, the second equation with respect to the first index, subtracting, and using the Eq. (45) that 1/1
487 162
Deformation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
is a harmonic function, we get
- 2(1
+ ae A -2) {21/11 cos 21/1 + (21/12 + 1) sin 21/1} + A -2 {- (ae)1 sin 21/1 + (ae)2 cos 21/1} = o.
(55)
The expression in the last braces is the coefficient of IXI /\ IX2 in
- * d(ae)
/\ ()2.
Now 4ae
= (a + e)2 - (a - e)2,
and its differential can be calculated, using (6 a) and (8a). We get 2d(ae) -- =
a-e
(a
+ e)()1 -
(a - e)(IXI
+ 2*wd
and
-
2 (a - c)
2 (* d(ae)) /\ ()2 = (IX2 - 7.wd /\ ()2 = - {21/11 cos 21/1
+ (21/12 + 1) sin 21/1} IXI
/\ IX2·
Hence (55) becomes (1
+ H2 A -2) {21/11
cos 21/1
+ (21/12 + 1) sin 21/1} = O.
Since the first factor is non-zero, the second factor must vanish, which is the condition (47) for M to be a W-surface. On M with the metric d §2 of Gaussian curvature - 1 we search for a harmonic function 1/1 satisfying (47). We shall show that such a function depends on two constants. In fact, Eq. (47) allows us to put 21/11 = C sin 21/1,
21/12
+ 1 = - C cos 21/1.
(56)
Differentiation gives Ci sin 21/1 + 2Cl/li cos 21/1, 21/1li = - Ci cos 21/1 + 2Cl/li sin 21/1, i = 1,2 .
2 1/1 Ii
=
(57)
The commutation formula for 1/1 and Eq. (45) give - C I cos 21/1 - C 2 sin 21/1 + 2CI/I I sin 21/1 - C(21/12 + 1) cos 21/1 -1 = 0, C I sin 21/1 - C 2 cos 21/1 + 2CI/I I cos 21/1 + C(21/12 + 1) sin 21/1 = o. (58)
Solving for C I, C 2, we get C I + C(21/12+ 1) + cos 21/1 =0, C 2 - 2 C 1/1 I + sin 21/1 = O.
(59)
It can be verified by differentiating (59) that the commutation relation for C is satisfied. Hence there exist harmonic functions 1/1 satisfying (47). The solution depends on two arbitrary constants, the values of 1/1 and C at an initial point. From our discussion the differentials of the functions log A, B, a, e are all determined. Hence our surfaces, e.g., the surfaces of non-constant mean curvature which can be isometrically deformed in a non-trivial way preserving the principal
488 Defonnation of Surfaces Preserving Principal Curvatures
163
curvatures, depend on 6 arbitrary constants. This proves the main statement of our theorem in Sect. 1, the other statements being proved before. Our derivation makes use of the 5th order jet of the surface M, which is therefore supposed to be of class 5.
References [1]
Bryant, R.; Chern, S.; Griffiths, P. A.: Exterior differential systems. Proceedings of 1980 Beijing DD-Symposium. Science Press, Beijing, China and Gordon and Breach, New York, 1982, vol. 1, pp. 219-338 [2] Cartan, E.: Sur les couples de surfaces applicables avec conservation des courbures principales. Bull. Sc. Math. 66 (1942), 1- 30, or Oeuvres Completes, Partie III, vol. 2, 1591-1620 [3] Darboux, G .: Theorie des surfaces, Partie 3. Paris 1894, p. 384
491 Reprinted from Differential Geometry and Topology. Lecture Notes in Math. 1369. Springer Verlag. 1989.
DUPIN SUBMANIPOLDS IN LIE SPHERE GEOMETRY Thomas E. Cecil and Shiing-Shen Chern
1. Introduction .
Consider a piece of surface immersed in three- dimensional Euclidean space E3 .
Its normal lines are the common tangent lines of two surfaces. the focal
surfaces .
These
focal
surfaces
may have singularities.
and a classical
theorell says that if the focal surfaces both degenerate to curves. then the curves are conics. and the surface is a cyclide of Dupin . [CR . pp. 151-166].)
(See. for example.
Equivalently. the cyclides can be characterized as those
surfaces in E3 whose two distinct principal curvature s are both constant along their corresponding lines of curvature . The
cyclides
have
been
generalized
hypersurfaces in En. the Dupin hypersurfaces .
to
an
interesting
class
of
Initially. a hypersurface M in
En was said to be Dupin if the nUlllber of distinct principal curvatures (or focal points) is constant on M and i f each principal curvature is constant along the leaves of its corresponding principal foliation. [GU] . )
(See [CR] . [Th].
More recently. this has been generalized to include cases where the
number of distinct principal curvatures is not constant.
(See [P3]. [CC] . )
The study of Dupin hypersurfaces in En is naturally situated in the context of Lie sphere geometry. developed by Lie [LS] as part of his work on The projectivized cotangent bundle PT * En of En has a n In fact. if xl .. . .• x are the coordinates in En. the
contact transformations . contact structure .
contact structure is by the linear differential defined form n 1 n-l dx -p dx - . . . -Pn-ldx . Lie proved that the pseudo- group of all contact transformations carrying
(oriented)
hyperspheres
in
the
generalized
sense
(i.e .. including points and oriented hyperplanes) into hyperspheres is a Lie group. called the Lie sphere group . isomorphic to 0(n+l.2)/±I. whe re 0(n+l . 2) n 3 is the orthogonal group for an indefinite inner product on R + with signature (n+l . 2) .
The first
The Lie sphere group contains as a subgroup the Moebius group of
author was
s upported by NSJi Grant No . DMS 87-06015.
author by NSF Grant No . OMS 87-01609 .
the second
492 2
conformal transformations of En and , of course , the Euclidean group ,
Lie
exhibited a bijective correspondence between the set of oriented hyperspheres in En and the points on the quadric hypersurface Qn+1 in real projective space n+2 n+3 P given by the equation <x , x> 0, where <, > is the inner product on R n+1 mentioned above . The manifold Q contains projective lines but no linear n+2 subspaces of P of higher dimension . The 1-parameter family of oriented spheres
corresponding
to
the
points
of
a
projective
consists of all oriented hyperspheres which are
line
ly i ng on Qn+1
in oriented contact at a
certain contact element on En. Thus, Lie constructed a local diffeomorphism .. n 2n-1 n+1 between PT E and the manifold A of projective lines which lie on Q . An imme rsed submanifold f : 14k -+ En naturally induces a Legendre sub2n 1 n 1 n 1 manifold A: B - -+ A - , where B - is the bundle of unit normal vectors to f n n 1 1 (take B - = M - in the case k n-1). This Legendre map A has similarities with the familiar Gauss map, and like the Gauss map, it can be a powerful tool in the study of submanifolds of Euclidean space .
In particular , the Dupin
property for hypersurfaces in En is easily formulated in terms of the Legendre map,
and
it
is
immediately
seen
to
be
invariant
under
Lie
sphere
transformations . The
study
of
Dupin
submanifolds
has both local and global aspects .
Thorbergsson [Th) showed that a Dupin hypersurface 14 with g distinct principal curvatures at each point must be taut. i . e .. every nondegenerate Euclidean 2 distance function Lp (x) = 1p- x 1 , pEEn, must have the minilRulR nUllber of critical
points
on M.
Tautness
was
shown
transformations in our earlier paper [CC) .
to
be
invariant
under
Lie
Using tautness and the work of
Munzner [Mu] , Thorbergsson was then able to conclude that the number g must be 1 . 2 , 3.4 or 6, as with an isoparametric hypersurface in the sphere Sn .
The
case g = 1 is . of course, handled by the well-known classification of umbilic hypersurfaces.
Compact Dupin hypersurfaces with g=2 and g=3 were classified
by Cecil and Ryan (see [CR. p . 168]) and Miyaoka [M1] respectively . recent
preprints,
classification Meanwhile,
of
Grove
Miyaoka
(142),
compact
Dupin
and
Halperin
(143)
has
aade
hypersurfaces [GH]
have
further
progress
In two on
the
in the cases g=4 and g=6 .
deterllined
several
important
topological invariants of compact Dupin hypersurfaces in the cases g=4 and g=6. In this paper. we study Dupin hypersurfaces in the setting of Lie sphere geoaetry using local techniques .
In Section 2 , we give a brief introduction
493 3
to Lie sphere geometry .
In Section 3, we introduce the basic differential
geometric notions: the Legendre map and the Dupin property .
The case of E3 is
handled in Section 4, where we handle the case of g=2 distinct focal points for En .
This was first done for n > 3 by Pinkall [P3) .
Our main contribution
lies in Section 5, where we treat the case E4 by the method of moving frames . This case was also studied by Pinkall [P2), but our treatment seems to be more direct and differs from his in several essential points .
It is our hope that
this method will provide a framework and give some direction for the study of Dupin hypersurfaces in En for n > 4 .
2 . Lie Sphere Geoaetry. We first present a brief outline of the main ideas in Lie ' ~ geometry of n This is given in more detail in Lie ' s original treatment [LS) ,
spheres in IR
in the book of Blaschke [B), and in our paper [eel . The basic construction in Lie sphere geometry associates each oriented n U {~} sn with a point on the
sphere, oriented plane and point sphere in IR quadric
Qn+1
in
projective
space
pn+2
given
in
homogeneous
coordinates
(xl " .. ,x + ) by the equation
n 3
(2.1 )
<X,X>
We will denote real
O.
+ . .• +
(n+3)-space endowed with the metric (2.1) of signature
(n+1,2) by 1R~+3 We can deSignate the orientation of a sphere in IR minus sign to its radi us .
n
by assigning a plus or
Positive radius corresponds
to the orientation
determined by the field of inward normals to the sphere, while a negative radius corresponds to the orientation determined by the outward normal . (See n A plane in IR is a sphere which goes through the point 00 .
Rellark 2 . 1 below) . The orientation of
t~
plane can be associated with a choice of unit norllal N.
The specific correspondence between the points of Qn+1 and the set of oriented n spheres, oriented planes and points in IR u {Go} is then given as follows :
EuclidRan Points: u E R~
2
P'P+r
Spheres: Center p, signed radius r
2
w: u-N
h, unit normal N
, p.r)
I
[(h.-h.N.l)I
+ ~ by Here the square brackets denote the point in projective space P ~ given the homogeneous coordinates in the round brackets, and u - u is the standard Euclidean dot product in R". From (2.2). we see that the point spheres correspond to the points in the n+2 with the hyperplane in P given by the equation
intersection of Q"+' 0.
Xn+3 A
The manifold of point spheres is called Moebius space.
fundamental notion in Lie sphere geometry is that of oriented contact
of spheres.
Two oriented spheres S1 and S2 are in d e n t e d contact if they If pl and
are tangent and their orientations agree at the point of tangency.
p2 are the respective centers of S1 and S2, and rl and r2 are the respective signed 'radii, then the condition of oriented contact can be
expressed
analytically by
If S1 and S2 are represented by [k 1] and [k2] as in (2.2). then (2.3) is equivalent to the condition
In the case where S1 and/or S2 is a plane or a point in Rn, oriented contact has the logical meaning.
That is, a sphere S and plane m are in
oriented contact if n is tangent to S and their orientations agree at the point of contact.
Two oriented planes are in oriented contact if their unit
normals are the same. They are in oriented contact at the point
m.
A point
sphere is in oriented contact with a sphere or plane S if it lies on S , andoo is in oriented contact with each plane.
In each case, the analytic condition
for oriented contact is equivalent to (2.4) when the two "spheres" in question are represented in Lie coordinates as in (2.2).
495 5
Remark 2 . 1 : In the case of a sphere equation (2 . 4) is equivalent to p·N
[k1l
and a
h+r .
plane
[k2l
as
in (2.2),
In order to make this correspond
to the geometric definition of oriented contact, one must adopt the convention that the inward normal orientation of a sphere corresponds to positive signed radius . radius,
To get one
[(h,-h,N,I)].
the outward normal
should
represent
orientation to correspond to posi ti ve
the
plane
Then (2.4) becomes p'N
by
[( -h, h, -N, 1)]
instead
of
h-r, which is the geometric formula
for oriented contact wi th the outward normal
orientation corresponding to
positive signed radius . Because of the signature of the metric (2.1) , the quadric Qn+l contains lines in pn+2 but no linear subspaces of higher dimension .
A line on Qn+l is
determined by two points [xl, [y] in Qn+l satisfying <x,y> O. The lines on Qn+l form a manifold of dimension 2n-l, to be denoted by A2n - 1 In R n , a line on Qn+l corresponds to a I-parameter family of oriented spheres such that any two of the spheres are in oriented contact, tangent
to an oriented plane at
i.e., all the oriented spheres
given point, i.e. ,
a
an
oriented
contact
element. Of course, a contact element can also be represented by an element of T Sn , the bundle of unit tangent vectors to the Euclidean sphere Sn in En +1 1 with its usual metric .
This
is
the
starting
point
for
Pinkall's
[P3]
considerations of Lie geometry . A
~ ~ transformation is a projective transformation of pn+2 which
takes Qn+l to itself.
Since a projective transformation takes lines to lines,
a Lie sphere transformation preserves oriented contact of spheres.
The group
G of Lie sphere transformations is isomorphic to O(n+l,2)/{±I}, where 0(n+l,2)
is
the
group
of
orthogonal
transformations
for
the
inner product
(2.1).
Moebius transformations are those Lie transformations which take point spheres to point spheres .
The group of Moebius
transforlllations
is
isomorphic to
O(n+l,1 )/(±I}. 3. Legendre Subaanifolds . Here we recall the concept of a Legendre submanifold of the contact manifold A2n - 1 (= A) using the notation of [ee]. In this section, the ranges of the indices are as follows : (3.1 )
1
3
~
A,B,e
~
n +
3,
i,j , k
~
n
1.
+
496 6
Instead of using an orthonormal frame for the metric <,> defined by (2 . 1), it is useful to consider a
.L.iJ:~ ,
that is, an ordered set of vectors Y in A
1R~+3 satisfying
(3 . 2)
gAB'
with 0 (3 . 3)
I
(gAB)
[:
n-1 0
:]
where I _ is the i dentity (n-1) x (n-1) matrix and n 1
[~ oj . 11
J
(3 . 4)
The space of all
Lie
frames
can be
identified with the orthogonal group
0(n+1,2), of which the Lie sphere group, being isomorphic to 0(n+1,2) ( {±I}, is a quotient group .
In this space, we introduce the Maurer-Cartan forms
(3 . 5)
Through differentiation of (3 . 2), we show that the following matrix of 1-forms is skew-symmetric 2 (,II
(3 . 6)
("'AB)
2 (,12 2 \oJ . J
2 (,I n+2 2 (,I n+3
1 (,11 1 (,12 1
i (,11 i (,12 i (,I .
(,Ij
n+3 (,11 n+3 (,12 n+3 (,I.
J
1 n+2 1 (,I n+3
\oJ
i n+2 i \oJ n+3
(,I
J
n+3 n+2 n+3 (,I n+3
(,I
n+2 (,II
n+2 (,12 n+2 (,I . J
n+2 n+2 n+2 (,I n+3 \oJ
Next, by taking the exterior derivative of (3.5), we get the Maurer-Cartan equations
(3 . 7)
dw
B A
In [CCl, we then show that the for ..
497 7
smooth map A:B
o on B.
~
A Legendre ~ is
A which annihilates the contact form on A, i . e . , All of our calculations are local in nature .
We use the
method of moving frames and consider a smooth family of Lie frames Y on an A open subset U of B, with the line A(b) given by [Y (b), Y + (b)] for each 1 n 3 b E U.
The Legendre map A is called a Legendre submanifold if for a generic i
choice of Y1 the forms w1 ' 3 SiS n+1, are linearly independent, i . e . , (3 . 8)
A w
i
1
f'
0 on U .
n 1 Here and later we pull back the structure forms to B - and omit the symbols of such pull-backs for simplicity .
Note that the Legendre condition is just
o .
(3.9)
We
now
assume
that
our
choice
of
Y1
satisfies
(3 ."8) .
By
exterior
differentiation of (3 . 9) and using (3 . 6) , we get (3.10)
X
w~
Aw
i n+3
0
Hence by Cartan's Lemma and (3.8), we have (3.11 )
wi n+3
The quadratic differential form
defined up to a non-zero factor and depending on the choice of Y , is called 1 the
~
fundamental 1Q£m .
This form can be related to the well-known Euclidean second fundamental fora in the following way.
Let e n +3 be any unit timelike vector in ~~+3.
For
498 8
each b
U, let Y (b) be the point of intersection of the line A(b) with the 1
E
.l
hyperplane e + . Y1 represents the locus of point spheres in the Moebius n 3 n+l .l n e + , and we call VI the Moebius pro lection of A determined by space Q n 3 Let e
and
1
e
2
be
unit
ti.elike ,
respectively
spacelike ,
vectors
orthogonal to e + and to each other , chosen so that Y is not the point at n 3 I infinity [e -e ) for any b € U. 1 2
We can represent VI by the vector
+ f· f _______ e
(3.13)
2
l
- f· f e
+ _______
2
as in (2.2), where f(b) lies in the space We will
and e n +3 .
call
R
the lIIap f : B ...
determined by the ordered triple
R
n
2
+ f,
of vectors orthogonal to e ,e 1
n
2
the Euclidean projection of A
el'~2'~n+3 '
The regularity condition (3.8)
is equivalent to the condition that f be an immersion on U into R
n
For each
b E U, let V + (b) be the intersection of A(b) with the orthogonal complement n 3 of the
light like
~
O.
vector
Y + n 3
e1
is
distinct
froM
VI
and
thus
So we can represent Y + by a vector of the form n 3
(3 . 14)
where ( : U ...
R
n
has unit length and h is a sMooth function on U .
Thus,
according to (2 . 2), Y n+3 (b) represents the plane in the pencil of oriented spheres in
n corresponding to the line A(b) on Qn+l.
o
Vn+3>
R
o
is
equivalent
to h
f·t,
while
Note that the condition the Legendre condition
is the same as the Euclidean condition
( ' df
o .
Thus, ( is a field of unit normals to the ia..ersion f on U.
Since f is an
imlllersion, we can choose the Lie frallle vectors Y3 ' .. . . 'Y +1 to satisfy n (3 . 16)
499 9
for tangent vector fields X ' . . . ,X + on U. 3 n 1
Then, we have
(3 . 17)
Now using (3 . 14) and (3 . 16), we compute (3 . 18)
d(Xj) . df(X ) i -A ij ,
- df(AXj)·df(X i ) [A
where A
ij
] is the Euclidean shape operator (second fundamental form) of
the immersion f .
Hence h
ij
=
-A
ij
But by (3 . 11) and (3.17), we have
, and
[h
ij
]
just the negative of the Euclidean shape
is
operator A of f . n 1 n Bemark 3.1 : The discussion above delonstrates how an ililiersion f: B - .... R n 1 with field of unit normals t induces a Legendre submanifold A: B - .... A defined Further, ilmersed submanifold f:M
k
an
n
.... R of codilension greater than one also gives rise n 1 n 1 to a Legendre submanifold A: B - .... A, where B - is the bundle of unit normals to f in Rn .
As in the case of codilension one, A(b) is defined to be the line
on Qn+1 corresponding to the oriented contact element determined by the unit vector b normal to f at the point x from Bn - 1 to Mk.
n(b), where n is the bundle projection
As one would expect, the eigenvalues of the second fundamental form have geolletric significance .
Consider a curve .,(t) on B.
The set of points in
Qn+1 lying on the lines A(., (t)) forms a ruled surface in Qn+1 . the conditions that this ruled surface
be
tangent lines to a curve in Qn+1 .
+
Let rV
1
developable,
We look for consist
of
Vn+3 be the point of contact .
We
i.".,
have by (3 . 5) and (3 . 6) (3.19)
Thus,
the
lines
A(.,(t))
form
a
developable
if
and only if the tangent
500 10
direction of
~(t)
is a common solution to the equations
(3.20)
O.
3$ i $ n+1 .
In particular. r must be a root of the equation
o .
(3.21 )
Denote them by r , ... ,r + . 3 n 1
By (3 . 11) the roots of (3.21) are all real. points r i VI
t
Vn +3 .
3$
S n+1 are called the focal points or curvature
i
spheres (Pinkall [P3]) on A(b) . n
f:U ~ R
The
If V and Vn+3 correspond to an immersion 1
as in (3.13) and (3 . 14) . then these focal points on A(b) correspond
by (2 . 2) to oriented spheres in Euclidean focal points of f .
R
n
tangent to f at feb) and centered at the
These spheres are called curvature spheres of f
and the r i are just the principal curvatures of f, i . e .. eigenvalues of the shape operator A. If r is a root of (3 . 21)
of multiplicity
define an II-di.ensional subspace Tr of TbB. point b.
III.
then the equations (3.20)
the tangent space to B at the
The space Tr is called a principal space of TbB. the latter being
deco.posed into a direct
SUIII
of its principal spaces.
Vectors in Tare r
called principal vectors corresponding to the focal point rV course, if VI and V + correspond to an illlilersion f : U ~ n 3
R
n
l
+ Vn+3.
Of
as in (3 . 13) and
(3.14). then these principal vectors are the salle as the Euclidean principal vectors for f corresponding to the principal curvature r . With a change of frame of the form Vi*
(3.22)
=2:
c ji Vj , 3 $
S n+1 .
i
where
[c~]
is an (n-1) x (n-1) orthogonal matrix. we can diagonalize [h
ij
] so
that in the new frame, equation (3.11) has the forlll (3 . 23)
i
"'n+3
i
r
i"'l
3
S
S n+1 .
Note that none of the functions r i Is ever infinity on U because of the
501 11
assumption that (3 . 8) holds, i.e, Y is not a focal point . I
By associating Y I
to a Euclidean immersion f as in (3 . 13), we can apply results from Euclidean geometry to our situation .
In particular , it follows from a result of Singley
[S] on Euclidean shape operators that there is a dense open subset of B on which the number g(b) of distinct focal points on A(b)
is locally constant .
We will work exclusively on open subsets U of B on which g is constant . that case, each distinct eigenvalue function t : U
~
In
is smooth (see Nomizu
~
[N]) , and its corresponding principal distribution is a smooth m-dimensional foliation, where m is the multiplicity of r (see [CR, p . 139]). can find smooth ve c tor fields X3 , · " Xn+l dual to smooth I-forms
Thus, on U we 3 n+1 ~I""'~l
respectively , such that each Xi is principal for the smooth focal point map riY 1 + Yn +3 on U. on
If rY l + Yn+3 is a smooth focal point map of multiplicity m
then we can assume that
U,
(3 . 24)
r
By a different choice of the point at infinity, i . e. , e
1
and e , if necessary , 2
we can also assume that the function r is never zero on U, i . e . , Y + is not a n 3 focal point on U. We now want to consider a Lie frame Y* for which Y* is a smooth focal I A point map of multiplicity m on U.
(3 . 25)
Specifically, we make the change of frame
Y* I
r Y + Yn+3 I
Y* 2
(I/r)Y
2
Y*
- (I/r)Y Y n+2 2
Y* n+3
Y n+3
n+2
Y.* 1
Y.
1
3
~
~
n+I
B
We denote the Maurer-Cartan forms in this frame by 6 . A
Note that
(3 . 26) By examining the coefficient of Y * i
Yi in (3 . 26) , we see from (3.23) that
502 12
(3.27)
From (3.24) and (3.27). we see that
o .
(3.28)
This equation characterizes
3 5 a 5 m+2 .
the condition that a
focal
point map Y*I have
constant multiplicity m on U. We now introduce the concept of a Dupin submanifold and then see what further restrictions it allows us to place on the structure forms. A connected submanifold NcB is called a curvature submanifold if its tangent space is everywhere a principal space.
The Legendre submanifold is
called DYw1n if for every curvature submanifold NCB. the lines A(b). bEN. all pass through a fixed point. i.e .. each focal point map is constant along its curvature submanifolds . Pinkall
[P3] .
It
This definition of "Dupin" is the same as that of
is weaker
than
the definition of Dupin for
Euclidean
hypersurfaces used by Thorbergsson [Th]. Miyaoka [MI]. Grove-Halperin [GH] and Cecil-Ryan [CR]. all of whom assumed that the nu.ber g of distinct curvature spheres is constant on B.
As we noted above. g is locally constant on a dense
open subset of any Legendre submanifold. but g is not necessarily constant on the whole of a Dupin submanifold. as the example of the Legendre submanifold induced from a tube B3 over a torus T2 c R3
C
R4 demonstrates (see Pinkall
[P3]. Cecil-Ryan [CR. p. 188]). It is easy to see that the Dupin property is invariant under Lie sphere 2n 1 Suppose that A:B ~ A is a Legendre transformations as follows . 2n 1 submanifold and that a is a Lie transformation . The map cA : B ~ A - is also a Legendre
submanifold
Furthermore.
with aA(b)
k=rYl+Yn+3 is a curvature sphere of It at a point b
E
if
B. then since a is a
linear transformation. ak is a curvature sphere of aA at b with the same principal space as k.
Thus It and aA have the same curvature submanifolds on
B. and the Dupin property clearly holds for A if and only if it holds for cA . We now return to the calculation that led to equation (3.28).
•
We have
that Y = rY + Y + is a smooth focal point map of multiplicity. on the open n 3 l 1 set U and its corresponding principal space is spanned by the vector fields
x3 •...• X.+ 2 . is simply
The Dupin condition that Y• be constant along the leaves of Tr 1
503 13
(3.29)
From (3 . 17), (3.27) and (3.28) , we have that (3 . 30)
Comparing (3 . 29) and (3.30), we see that
o ,
(3 . 31)
3
~
a
~
111+2 .
We now show that we can make one .ore change of frame and .ake 9 n+3 3 n+3 in ter.s of the basis (,)1' · · · '(,)1 as can write the form 9 1
From (3 . 31), we see that we actually have
(3 . 32)
Using (3 . 17) , (3 . 27) and (3.32), we compute for .+3
~
b
(3.33)
We now make the change of frame ,
-Y
a
Y a
3
~
a
~
.+2,
(3.34)
Yn+2
n+l X (ab/r-rb)Y b + Yn+2 b=III+3
1/2
~
n+l,
n+3 1
O.
We
504 14
Let
Q
B
A
be the Maurer-Cartan forms for this new frame .
(3 . 35)
0,
Further~ore ,
since V 1
•
1
o ~
b
3 < a < m+2 .
V , the Dupin condition (3 . 29) still yields
(3 . 36)
Finally, for m+3
We still have
a
~
,3
~
~+2
.
n+1 , we have from (3.33) and (3 . 34)
(3 . 37)
<9~(Xb)YI
+
(r- r b )Y b , Yn +2>
0
From (3 . 36) and (3.37), we conclude that
o .
(3 . 38)
Thus, our main result of this section is that the assumption that the focal point map Y I
=
rY
1
+ Y + has constant multiplicity m and is constant along n 3
the leaves of its principal foliation Tr allows to produce a Lie fraille VA whose structure forms satisfy a 0 1 n+3 Q 0 1
(3 . 39)
Q
3
~
a
~
m+2
4. Cyclides ot Dupin . Dupin initiated the study of this subject in 1822 when he defined a cycUde to be a surface M2 in E3 which is the envelope of the family of spheres tangent to three fixed spheres . req'Jiring that both sheets of the curves . spheres .
focal
This was shown to be equivalent to set of M2
in E3 degenerate
into
Then M2 is the envelope of each of the two faillilies of curvature The key step in the classical Euclidean proof (see,
for example,
50S 15
Eisenhart [E,
pp.
312-314] or Cecil-Ryan [CR, pp . 151-166]) is to show that 3 the two focal curves are a pair of so-called "focal conics· in E , i.e ., an
ellipse and hyperbola in mutually orthogonal planes such that the vertices of the ellipse are
the
foci
of
the hyperbola and vice-versa,
or a
pair
of
parabolas in orthogonal planes such the vertex of each is the focus of the other.
This classical proof is local, 1. t:., one needs only a small piece of
the surface to determine the focal conics and reconstruct the whole cyclide . Of course, envelopes of families of spheres can have singularities and some of the cyclldes have one or two singular points In E3 .
It turns out, however,
that all of the different forms of cyclides in Euclidean space induce Legendre submanifolds which are locally Lie equivalent .
In other words,they are all
various Euclidean projections of one Legendre submanifold.
Pinkall
generalized this result to higher dimensional Dupin submanifolds .
[P3]
He defined
a cyclide of characteristic (p,q) to be a Dupin submanifold with the property that at each point it has exactly two distinct focal points with respective multlpllcltes p and q.
He then proved the following .
Theorem 4 1 : (Pinkall [P3]): (a) Every connected cyclide of Dupin is contained in a unique compact and connected cyclide of Dupin. (b) Any two cycl1des of the same characteristic are locally Lie equivalent, each being Lie equivalent to an open subset of a standard product of spheres in Sn
In this section, we give a proof of Pinkall's result using the method of Lie frames.
Let A: B
~
A be the Dupin cyclide.
The main step in the proof of
the Theorem 4 . 1 is to show that the two focal point maps k1 and k2 from B to n+1. n+1 are such that the Image k1 (B) lies in the intersection of Q with
Q
a
n+2 (p+1)-dimensional subspace E of P while k (B) lies In the intersection of 2 1. n+1 This generalizes the key step in the (q+1)-dimensional subspace E with Q the classical
Euclidean' proof that the two focal curves are focal conics .
Once this fact has been established for kl and k , it is relatively easy to 2 complete the proof of the Theorem . We begin the proof by taking advantage of the results of the previous section.
As
WP
showed in (3 . 39), on any neighborhood U in B, we can find a
local Lie frame, which we now denote by Y , whose Maurer-Cartan forms, now A denoted
B
~A'
satisfy
506 16
o ,3
(4.1)
a
~
p+2 ,
~
o . n+l In this fram e, VI is a focal point map of multiplicity p from U to Q .
By
the hypotheses of Theorem 4 . 1, there is one other focal point of multiplicity q
n-l-p at each point of B.
By repeating the procedure used in constructing
the frame VA ' we can con s truct a new frame VA which has as
Yn+3
the other
focal point map sV 1 + V + , where s is a root of (3.21) of .ultiplicity q . n 3 The
principal
space
Ts
is the span of the vectors Xp +3 ' · · · ,Xn+l
notation of the previous section .
o
(4 . 2)
in analogy to (3.28) .
in the
The fact that V + is a focal point yields n 3
p+3
b
~
~
n+l ,
The Dupin condition analogous to (3 . 29) is
(4.3)
This eventually leads to
o .
(4.4)
One can check that this change of fra.e does not affect condition (4.1).
We B
now drop the bars and call this last fraJle VA with Maurer-Cartan foras IMA satisfying , a 1M1
(4.5)
b 1M n+3 n+3 IMI
3
0 0
p+3
0
1M
Furthermore, the following forms cotangent space at each point of U,
(4 . 6)
S a S p+2 1 n+3
~
b
~
n+l
0
are easily shown to be a basis for
the
507 17
We begin by taking the exterior derivative of the equations w~
W~+3
0 in (4.5).
(4 . 7)
0
(4 . 8)
0
o
and
Using (3.6) , (3 . 7) and (4 . 5), we obtain
p+3 ColI 3 = '"' n+3
1\
n+1 wa + .. . + wI p+3
I\w
p+2 b 3 + . . . + '"'n+3
1\
1\
Cola n+1
b '"'p+2
3
a
~
p+3
~
p+2
~
b
~
n+1
We now show that (4.7) and (4 . 8) imply that a
(4 . 9)
o
'"'b
3 5 a 5 p+2 , p+3 5 b 5 n+1 .
To see this, note that since
w:
b
'"'a' each of the terms Col
a oc c urs in exactly b
one
of the equations (4 . 7) and in exactly one of the equations (4.8). p+3 n+1 Equation (4.7) involves the basis forms 10)1 , .. . ,10)1 while equation (4.8) 3 p+2 involves the basis forms Io)n+3' ··· ,lo)n+3 · 3
Io)p+3; the others are treated in
si~ilar
We now show how to handle the form
fashion.
The equations from (4.7) and
(4.8) , respectively, involving 10)3 3 p+
(4 . 10)
o
(4 . 11)
o
3 Col n +3
1\
p+3 + Col 4 n+3 Col 3
1\
p+2 Col p +3 4 + . . . + Io)n+3
p+4 We take the wedge product of (4 . 10) with 10)1
1\ . . .1\
1\
Col p +3 p+2
n+1 10)1 and get
o 3 p+3 n+1 which implies that wp+3 is in the span of Col 1 ' . . . ,Col 1 . 4 taking the wedge product of (4 . 11) wlth wn+3
1\ • •• 1\
On the other hand,
p+2 w + yields n 3
o and thus that Col 10)3 p+3
3
+
p 3
3 p+2 is in the span of '"'n+3' . . . ,w + . n 3
0, as desired.
We conclude that
508 18
We next differentiate wIn+3
dw n + 3
o
(4.12)
1
o
and use (3 . 6). (3 . 9) and (4.5) to obtain
wp +3 A wn +3 wn +1 A wn +3 n+l 1 p+3 + ... + 1
This i_plies that n+3 p+3 n+l wb e Sp an(w 1 • . ... w }. p+3 1
(4 . 13)
o
Similarly . differentiation of wI n+3 ... 3 n+3
o
(4.14 )
b
~
n+l.
yields
1 p+2 "'3 + .. . + "'n+3
1\
~
1\
1 "'p+2
which implies that a wI
(4 . 15)
E
3 p+2 Span( ... n+3. ··· .... n+3} , 3 ~ a ~ p+2 .
We next differentiate (4 . 9) . equations
(4.5)
and
(4.9) ,
we
Using the skew-symmetry relations (3 . 6) and see
that
all
terms
drop
out
except
the
following,
o
Thus, (4 . 16)
We now show that (4 . 16) implies that there is some function a on U such that I.) 1 a (4 . 17)
a a I.)n+3
n+3 I.)b
b a 1.)1
To see this , note that for any a, 3 5 a (4 . 18)
I.) 1 a
c I.) 3 3 n+3
+. . .+
3
~
a
~
p+2
p+3 5 b 5 n+l
~
p+2. (4.15) gives
for some c 3 '··· . c p +2
509 19
while for any b, p+3 d
(4.19)
b
~
~
n+1, (4.13) gives
wp + 3 + •. • + d for some d p+3' . . . , d n+1 n+1wn+1 1
p+3 1
Thus, (4 . 20)
+ ... +
... n+3",->a b n+3
(4.21)
d
+. . .+
p+3 a d b a + .. . +d ... n+1",->a p+3"'1 "'->n+3+"'+ b"'1"'->n+3 n+1 1 n+3
From (4.16), we know that the right-hand sides of (4.20) and (4.21) are equal. But these expressions contain no common terms from the basis of 2-forms except those involving w:+ 3
1\
w~.
Thence, all of the coefficients except c
a
and db
are zero, and we have
Thus c
db' we have shown that (4 . 18) and
If we set '" a
a
(4 . 19) reduce to
... a1
a a n+3
0. ...
n+3
0.
"'b
a
This procedure works for any choice of a and b in the appropriate ranges. holding a fixed and varying b . we see that all of the quantities to each other and to and (4.17) holds .
0.
a
~b
We now consider the expression (3 . 5) for dY , 3 a
n 2 USing (4 . 17) and the fact from (3 . 6) that w + a dY
a
Similarly, for p+3
b
are equal
Similarly, all of the quantities "'a are the same . ~
We omit the terms which vanish because of (3.6), (4.5) or (4 . 9),
(4 . 22)
By
n+l, we find
a
wn +3 , this becomes
a
~
p+2 .
SlO 20
(4.23)
We make the change of frame
(4.24)
P ,. 2 or n+2
We now drop the asterisks but use the new frame.
From (4.22) and (4.23), we
see that in this new frame, we have (4 . 25)
dY
a
Co)a
n+3
(_Y) + Co)3 y
2
a 3
+ . . .
~
(4.26)
+ ... +
That is, in the new frame, we have (4 . 27)
Col
1 a
n+3
(4 . 28)
~'b
3
0
p+3 5 b 5 n+1
~
a
p+2
0
~
Our goal now is to show that the two spaces (4.29)
E
and its orthogonal complement (4 . 30)
are invariant under d . Concerning E.
We
have
that
dY
b
E
E for
Furthermore . (3 . 6). (3 . 9) and (4 . 5) imply that
+ •. . +
p+3
~
b S n+1
by
(4 . 26).
Sl1 21
which is in E.
Thus. it only re.ains to show that dY2 is in E.
To do this.
we differentiate (4.27).
As before. we o.it ter.s which are zero because of l (3 . 6). (4.5). (4.9) and (4.27). We see that for.ula (3 . 7) for dW a reduces to (4 . 31)
~1
o
a
Si.ilarly . by differentiating (4.28) . we find that p+ 3 -< b -< n+ 1 .
.,b -1 A .,n+3 -2
o
Pro. this and (4 . 31) . we see that the wedge product of ~~+3 with every form in n+3 the basis (4 . 16) is zero. and hence 100)2 ; O. n+2 100)2
1
~n+3
Using this and the fact that
; O. and that by (3 . 6) and (4 . 27) . 100) 1 a
o
3
~
a
~
p+2 .
we have
which is in E.
So E Is invariant under d and is thus a fixed subspace of
pn+2 . independent of the choice of point of U. n+2 in (4 . 30) is also a fixed subspace of P
Obviously then. the space E.I.
n+3 Note that E has signature (l.q+1) as a vector subspace of 1R2 has signature (l.p+l) .
Take an orthonormal basis e . ... . " n+3 of 1
1 and E
1R~+3 with e 1
and e + timelike and n 3 E
Then E n Qn+l is given in homogeneous coordinates (xl .. ... x + ) with respect n 3 to this basis by (4 . 32)
x
2 2
+ .. . +
o
S12 22 q 1 This quadric is diffeoMorphic to the unit sphere sq in the span E + of the spacel1ke vectors e , ... , e q + with the diffeoMorphism '" T: Sq .... E n Qn+1 being 2 2 given by
(4.33)
Similarly, E~ n Qn+1 is the quadric given in homogeneous coordinates by (4 . 34)
o .
+ •. • +
E~ n Qn+1 is diffeomorphic to the unit sphere sP in the span e q +3 , . .. '~n+2 with the diffeomorphism ~ : SP .... E n Qn+l being given by (4.35)
1 EP +
of
~(v)
The focal point map Y of our Dupin submanifold is constant on the leaves of l the principal foliation Tr
.
and so Y factors through an immersion of the l
q-dimensionaJ space of leaves U/T (4.32) .
r
into the q-sphere given by the
Hence, the image of Y is an open subset of this quadric . l
quadric
Similarly ,
Y + factors through an immersion of the p-dimensional space of leaves U/ Ts n 3 onto an open subset of the p-sphere given by the quadric (4 . 34) . is
clear
that
the
unique
From this it
compact cyclide containing II : U .... II as
q submanifold is given by the Dupin submanifold A: S x sP ....
II
an
open
with
II (u. v)
where
'I'(v)
Geometricall y.
.
the image of " consists of all lines joining a point on the
quadric (4 . 32) to a point on the quadric (4.34) . Thus,
any choice of (q+l)-plane E in pn+2 with signatUl'e
(l , q+1)
and
513 23 corresponding orthogonal complement E~ deterMines a unique compact cyclide of characteristic (P.q) and vice-versa .
The local Lie equivalence of any two
cyclides of the same characteristic is then clear. From the spheres
standpoint of Euclidean geometry.
to be given by Qn+1
n
e J. • n+3
as
if we
consider
in Section 2.
the
point
then the Legendre
submanifold A above is induced in the usual way from the unit normal bundle n 1 q sq x sP of the standard embedding of sq as a great q-sphere E +1 n Sn q 1 where E + is the span of e . ... . e + and sn is the unit sphere in En+1 . the q 2 2 The spheres sq and sP sn n EP+1 . where EP+1 is the span of e 2 . ··· . e n +2 .
B -
span of e q + .. . .. e + . are the two focal submani folds in Sn of a 3 n 2
standard
product of spheres sP x sq in Sn (see [CR. p . 295]) .
5. DUpio sub.aoifolds for 0
4.
The class if ication of
Dupin subManifolds
follows from the results of the last section .
induced
from
surfaces in
R3
In his doctoral dissertation
[PI] (later published as [P2]). U. Pinkall obtained a local classification up to Lie equivalence of all Dupin submanifolds induced from hypersurfaces in R4. As we shall see. this is a far more complicated calculation than that of the previous section. and as n
Dupin hypersurfaces in
R
~et.
no one has obtained a similar class i fication of
for n ~ 5 .
In this section. we will prove Pinkall's
theorem using the method of movfng frames. We follow the notation used in Sections 3 and 4.
We consider a Dupin
submanifold A:B-+/\
(5 . I)
where (5 . 2)
dim B
3 . dim /\
7 .
and the image A(b) , b e B, is the line [V 'V ] of the Lie frame V ", .V . 1 7 1 7 assume that there are three distinct focal points on each line A(b) . By (3 . 39), we can choose the frame so that
o , (5 . 3)
o By making a c hange of frame of the form
We
514 24 VI*
aV 1
V* 2
{l/a )V
2
(5.4) V* 7
for
suitable
Silooth
PV
*
V6
7
functions a
(I/P)V6 '
and p on B,
we can arrange
represents the third focal point at each point of B.
Then,
that VI +V7
using the fact
that B is Dupin, we can use the aethod ellployed at the end of Section 3 to aake a change of fralle leading to the following equations sill11ar to (3.39) (and to (5.3»,
(5.5)
This completely fixes the Vi'
3,4 , 5, and V ,V are determined up to a I 7
transforllation of the forll (5.6)
Each of the three focal point aaps VI' V7 , VI + V7 is constant along the leaves of its corresponding principal foliation. factors
through an
Thus, each focal point !lap
illmersion of the corresponding
leaves of its principal foliation into Q5 .
2-dimensional
space
of
(See Section 4 of Chapter 2 of the
book [CR] for !lore detail on this pOint.) In teras of lIoving fraaes, 453 illplies that the forlls ~I' ~I' ~7 are linearly independent on B, i.e .,
this
(5.7)
This can also be seen by expressing the forms above in terMS of a Lie fralle VI' .. ·' V , where VI satisfies the regularity condition
7
fact that each focal point has multiplicity one .
(3.8), and using the
For simplicity, we will also
use the notation
(5 . 8)
Analytically,
the
Dupin
conditions
are
three
partial
differential
SIS 25 equations, and we are
treating an over-deter.ined system.
moving
the
handling
algebraic
problem,
frames
reduces
straightforward
The method of
of its integrability conditions viz.
that
of
repeated
to a
exterior
differentiations . We begin by taking the exterior derivatives of the three equations 3
~1
0,
4
~7
0,
5
~1
5
+ ~7
O.
Using the skew-symmetry relations (3.6), as well
as (5.3) and (5 . 5), the exterior derivatives of these three equations yield the system 0
4
~1
4 5" 5 " ~3 + ~1 "3
~5 A 10)5 + 10); A 10): 1 4 3 5 + 10)7 A 10)3
0
4 0 = 10)1 A
Io)~
4
If we take the wedge product of the first of these with 10)1' we conclude that 5 4 5
~3
is in the span of
and
~1
~1'
On the other hand, taking the wedge product
· . h 10)1 4 Y1e . ld s t a h t 10)3 5 .IS In . t he span of the third equa t Ion WIt
Consequently,
5
~3
4 P-'1
0
f
4 an d 10)3 7' 10)1
for SOlie smooth function p on B. Similarly , one can
show that there exist functions a and
T
such that
4
a
~3
5
~1
5
and 10)4
T
Io)~ .
Then, if we substitute these into the three equations above, we get that p = a
T,
and hence we have
(5 . 9)
Next we differentiate the equations
117
7
~1
= 0,
0, 10)7
~1
- 10)7
O.
As above ,
use of the skew-symmetry relations (3 . 6) and the equations (5 . 3), (5 . 5) yields the
existence
of
smooth
functions
a,b,c,p,q,r,s,t,u
following relations hold : 7
(5 . 10)
(5 . 11)
4
4
~1
+ b
~~
~4
~6
a
~5
7
5 10)6
4 b 10)1 +
C
1 10)3
3 10)2
3 P ~7
q 10)1
1 10)5
5 10)2
q 10)7
3
5 10)1
5
r
5
~1
on
B such
that
the
516 26
(5.12)
lo)~
lo)l 4
_ lo)4 2
b
3 lo)6
7 - lo)3
5 q lo)l +
+ " lo)4 + 1
t
3 lo)7
4
3
t lo)l + u lo)7
We next see what can be deduced fro. taking the exterior derivatives of the equations (5 . 9)-(5 . 12).
First, we take the exterior derivatives of the
4 5 3 three basis forms lo)l' lo)l' lo)7'
For example, using the relations that we have
derived so far, we have from the Maurer-Cartan equation (3.7), dlo)4
1
5
3 do>i'
We obtain similar expressions for do>l and 4
5
When we use the forms 8 ,11 ,11 1
2
3
3
defined in (5.8) for lo)l ' lo)l,lo)7 ' we have
1 lo)l A III
dill
dll
(5 . 13)
dll
lo) 1 A 9 1 2 1 lo)l A 113
2 3
We next differentiate (5 . 9)·.
We have
P
8
- P
8
- P
III A 112
5
4 3
3
A 113 A III
Col: ~ p.I~ .
Using the second equation in (5.13) with lo)l
do>
2
1 A ..,5 1
On the one hand ,
9 , this becomes 2
+ dp A ..,5
P "'1
1
4
On the other hand , we can compute
3 4
If we equate these two expressions for
(5 . 14)
517 27
Because of the independence of must vanish.
4
Of~!
2p
=
3
and~7'
both sides of the equation above
Thus, we conclude that
(5 . 15) and that dp +
5
~1' ~1
p.>!
4 Cfol 1
3
~7
2
-a-p ,
is a multiple of
5
Similarly, differentiation
~1'
pw~, yields the following analogue of (5.14),
(5 . 16)
and differentiation of ~~
(5 . 17)
=
PW~ yields
(c+p+u
(-dp
In each of the equations (5 . 14), must vanish .
(5 . 16),
(5 . 17)
both sides of the equation
From the vanishing of the left-hand sides of the equations, we
get the fundamental relationship, -a-p
(5 . 18)
a+r-s
c+p+u .
Furthermore, from the vanishing of the right-hand sides of the three equations (5 . 14),
(5.19)
(5 . 15) and (5 . 17), we can determine after some algebra that
dp + p
w~
q
w~
-
t
~~
The last equation shows the importance of
the
function p .
notation introduced in (5.8), we write (5 . 19) as (5.20)
where
(5 . 21)
D
. 1
b ,
are the "covariant derivatives" of p. Using the Maurer-Cartan equations , we can compute
Following the
Using (5.8) and (5.21). this can be rewritten as
The trick now is to express everything in terms of p and its successive covariant derivatives. We first derive a general form for these covariant derivatives.
Suppose
that a is a smooth function which satisfies a relation of the form
for some integer m .
(Note that (5.19) is such a relationship for p with m=l.)
By taking the exterior derivative of (5.23) and using (5.13) and (5.22) to express both sides in terms of the standard basis of two forms 9 A 9 1 2' 02A0
3
and9
A 01, one finds that the functions
01,02,03 satisfy
equations
of the form
where the coefficient functions o
aP
In particular, from relations on p
p : 1' 2' 3 p
equation
satisfy the commutation relations
(5.20).
we have the following commutation
519 29 We next take the exterior derivatives of the equations
(5 . 10)-(5 . 12) .
We
first differentiate the equation (5.27)
Col
7
4 7
On the one hand, frail the Maurer-Cartan equation (3 . 7) for dIooI , we have (by 4 not writing those terms which have already been shown to vanish), (5 . 28)
On the other hand, differentiation of the right-hand side of (5 . 27) yields
~
!
da
(5 . 29)
A
da A l- db
~
Iol
+ a
Col~
A
+
~~
a(Col~
+ db A
Iol~ + b(lol~
A
Col~
Iol
+ b
P Col~
Iol~
P
+ (al-u-c)p
Cool~)
A
~
A
Iol~
~~
Col~)
A
Iol~)
Equating (5.28) and (5 . 29) yields (da + 2a ColI 1-
(5 . 30)
Since b
(5 . 31)
+(db + 2b
P3'
Cool
1 l
Cool~
it follows from (5 . 19) and (5 . 24) that
db + 2b
Cool
1
1
5 3 By exallining the coefficient of ColI A Col
7
9
2
A 9
(5 . 31) , we get that (5 . 32)
A
P
33
p(c-a-·u).
Furthermore, the remaining terlls in (5 . 30) are
3
in equation (5.30) and using
520 30
(5 . 33)
(da
1
7
3
2a Col 1 - Col 2
+
5
4
2pb Col 7 - (pt + P31)Col I ) A ColI
+ terms involving
5
~l
and
3
~7
only . 4
Thus, the coefficient in parentheses must be a multiple of ColI' call it - 4
We can write this using (5 . 8) and (5.21) as
ac.> 1 .
(5.34)
In a
si~ilar
manner, if we differentiate
we obtain,
(5 . 35)
Thus, from the two equations in (5.10), we have obtained (5 . 32), (5.35).
In
completely
analogous
fashion,
we
can
(5.34) and
differentiate
the
two
equations in (5 . 11) to obtain (5 . 36)
Pll
(5.37)
dp + 2p ColI
7 Col 2
(5 . 38)
1 dr + 2r ColI
Col 2
J
p(s+r-p)
=
+ 2pp1 9 1 +
7
(-P
13
-PP )9 + 2 2
pe3
2pp 9 + r9 2 + (-P12 + PP )9 , 3 3 1 1
while differentiation of (5 . 12) yields (5 . 39)
p(p-r-s) ,
P22 + P33
(5 . 40)
ds
+
2s Col
1 1
s9
(5 . 41)
du
+
2u
1 1
(-P
In these
w
equations,
1
+ (P
23
the
-PP
31 1
)9
+PP
1
2
)9
+ (P
2
13
+ ( -P -PP
2
)9
21 2
+ PP
+ U9
coefficients a,c , p,r , s,u
3
)9
3
3
remain
undetermined .
However , by differentiating (5 . 18) and using the appropriate equations among those involving these quantities above, one can show that
521 31
(5.42)
a
-6PP1
c
6PP2
p
-6PP3
r
6PP2
s
-12pp1
u
I2pp3
From equations (5.32). (5.36). (5.39) and (5.18). we easily compute that (5 . 43)
Using (5.42). equations (5.40) and (5.41) can be rewritten as (5 . 44)
ds
(5 . 45)
+
du
1
2s 1,)1 +
-12Pp 9 + (P + PP )9 + (-P + PP )9 1 1 31 2 2 3 3 21 1
2u 1,)1
(-P 23 -PPl)9
1
+ (P
I3
-PP2)9
2
+ 12PP393
By taking the exterior derivatives of these two equations and making use of (5.43)
and
derivatives.
of
the
commutation
relations
(5 . 25)
one ultimately can show after a
for
P and its various
lengthy calculation that
the
following fundamental equations hold:
PP 12
.+
2
P P + P P 1 2 3
2
PP21 + P 1P 2 - P P 3
2
PP23 + P~3 + P PI
(5 . 46)
PPn + P~3
2 P PI
2
PP 3I + Pf>1 + P P 2
2
PPI3 + Pf>1 - P P 2
0 0 0 0 0 0
We now briefly outline the details of this calculation . have (5.47)
The commutation relation (5 . 25) for s with m=2 gives (5.48)
By (5 . 44). we
522 32 On the other hand, we can directly compute by taking covariant derivatives of (5 . 47) that (5 . 49)
The main problem now is to get P311
into a usable form.
By taking the
covariant derivative of the third equation in (5 . 26), we find (5.50)
Then using the commutation relation
we get from (5 . 50) (5.51)
Taking
the
covariant
derivative
of Pll
=
p(s+r-p)
and
substituting
the
expression obtained for P113 into (5.51), we get
(5.52)
If we substitute (5 . 52)
for P
311
in (5.49) and then equate the right-hand
sides of (5.48) and (5.49), we obtain the first equation in cyclic permutations are obtained in a similar way from s23 Our
frame
attached
to
the
line
[VI' V ) 7
is
still
(5.46) .
S32 ' etc . not
completely
determined , viz . , the following change is allowable : (5.53)
The Vi's ,
The
3,4,5 being completely determined, we have under this change,
523 33
4· 5· 4 3· 5 3 1.>1 = <JI.)l' 1.>1 <JI.)l' 1.>7 = <JI.)7 , 7· -1 7 + ~4 ~ 0: Co) 4 Co) 4 1 1· -1 1 3 I.> = a 1.>3 IN 7 3
which implies that a*
• p We choose 1.1 to make a •
p*.
a a
-2
-2
a + a
a
p
-1
-1
1.1 1.1
After dropping the asterisks, we have from
(5 . 18) that (5 . 54)
a
-P
= p
Now using the fact that a
2
, r
+ S
t
C
u.
p, we can subtract (5 . 37) from (5 . 34) and get that
(5 . 55)
We
are
finally
in
position
to
proceed
toward
the
main
results .
Ul timately , we show that the frame can be chosen so that the function P is constant, and the classification naturally splits into the two cases P = 0 and p
~
o.
The case
P"'O .
We now assume that the function p lemma is the key in this case . his
function
c
is
the
is never zero on B.
The following
This is Pinkall's Lemma [P2, p . 108). where
negative
of
our
function p .
Since p
fc.
0,
the
fundamental equations (5.46) allow one to express all of the second covariant derivatives Pap in terms of p and its first derivatives Pa '
This enables us
to give a somewhat simpler proof than Pinkall gave for the lemma . Le••a 5,1 : Suppose that
p never vanishes on B.
Then P1 - P
2
- P3 -
0 at
every point of B.
.fI:.!!2.L. First note that
i f the function
and the assumption that p
~
P3 vanishes identically, then (5 . 46)
0 imply that P1 and P2 also vanish identically .
524 34 We
now
cOllplete
everywhere .
the
proof
of
the
lemma by showing that P3 lIust vanish
This is accomplished by considering the expression s12
the commutation relations (5 . 25) , we have
By (5.46) and (5.47) , we see that
and so (5 . 56)
On the other hand , we can compute s12 directly from the equation sl Then using the expression for P12 obtained from (5 . 46), we get
(5.57)
Next we have from (5 . 47) ,
Using (5.46), we can write
and thus (5 . 58)
Then, we compute
Using (5 . 36) for Pll and (5 . 46) to get P
31
, this becomes
525 35
(5 . 59)
Now
equate
the
expression
(5 . 56)
for
s21
with
that
obtained
by
subtracting (5 . 59) from (5 . 57) to get
This can be rewritten as O - P (12p 2 3
(5 . 60)
+ 3 s+r-p
2p2 -2) 1P
Using the expressions in (5 . 54) for rand p, we see that 3s+r - p
45 + 4p2,
and so (5.60) can be written as (5 . 61)
Suppose that P3 " 0 at some point b neighborhood U of b . (5.62)
on U.
E
B.
Then P
3
does not yanish on some
By (5 . 61), we have
o
16p2 + 4s
We now take the 8 - covariant derivative of (5 . 62) and obtain 2
o
(5. 63)
We now substitute the expre ss ion (5 . 58) for s2 and the formula
obtained from (5 . 46) into (5.63).
Since p " 0 , this implies that P2
After some algebra, (5.63) reduces to
o on U.
But then the left side of the
526 36 equation (5 . 46)
must vanish on U.
Since p
to our assumption .
~
o
0 , we conclude that P3
on U, a contradiction
Hence , P3 must vanish identically on B and the lemma is
proven . We now continue with the case P '" covariant
derivatives
of p
are
zero ,
o.
According to Lemma 5 . I, all the
and our
formulas
simplify greatly.
Equations (5 . 32) and (5 . 36) give c-a-u
o ,
s+r-p
o .
These combined with (5 . 54) give c = r
(5 . 64) 7
By (5.55) we have w 2
O.
-s
So the differentials of t he frame vectors can now
be written
5
w1Y 1 1 wI Y 1 7 + <.: 1y 1 2 + lolly 1 6 3' = w7 Z3 + w4z 1 4 5 = w1 z5 +
Z3
-Y 6
dY
I
dY
7
dY 2 (5 . 65)
dY
6
dY3 dY
4
dY
5 w4 Y + lollY 5 I 4 3 5 w Y - w Y 7 3 1 5 2 3 5 4 P (w 7 Y3 + 3oI 1 Y4 + wI Y5 ) 2 3 4 5 P (2w 7 Y3 + wI Y4 _ W 1y 5 ) 5 4 p(W Y + wI Y ) 5 l 4 + p(_ w5y + W 3y ) 7 5 1 3 4 3 p(- w Y w Y ) 1 3 7 4
where
(5 , 66 )
Z4 Z5
From t his. we notice that
+
P2 (-Y l -2Y 7 )
2 Y2 + P (2Y 1 + Y7 ) -Y + Y + p2(_y 2 6 1
+
Y ) 7
527 37
o ,
(5 . 67)
so that the points Z3,Z4 , Z5 lie on a line . From (5 . 20) and (5.22) and the lemma we see that
We now make
doll
o
(5 . 68)
Q
1
o .
change of frame of the form
(5 . 69)
Then set Zi*
(5 . 70)
=
(l / p)Zi
4* 4 5* c.>1 =Pc.>l,c.>l The effect of this change is to make p *
i
=
3,4,5 . 5
3*
Pc.>l,c.>7
1* 1 and c.>1
the following :
(5 . 71)
with * 3 * dZ 4 * dZ 5 dZ
(5 . 72 )
3
-Pc.>7
3* 4* 5* 2( - a.>7 Y3 - c.> Y4 + c.>1 Y5 ) 3* 4* 5* 2(c.>7 Y3 + 2c.>1 Y4 + (0)1 Y5) 5· 3· 4* 2(c.>7 Y3 - (0)1 Y4 2c.>1 Y5 )
0 , for we can compute
528 38
and 5*
* A 8* 3 2 * * -8 A 8 1 3 * -9 A8 * · 2 1
* i. e. ,d8 1
A w3* 7 3* 4* w 7 A WI 4* 5* wI A WI
4* 1 5*
wI
-8
* 2 * i.e. ,d83
1. e. ,d8
Comparing the last equation with (5.13), we see that
1*
o
~1
and
p
*
1.
This is the final frame which we will need in this case p F O .
So, we
again drop the asterisks . We are now ready to prove Pinkall's classification result for the case p
~
0 [P2, p. 117].
As with the cyclides, there is only one compact model, up
to Lie equivalence .
This is Cartan's isoparametric hypersurface M3 in S4
It
is a tube of constant radius over each of its two focal submanifolds, which are standard Veronese surfaces detail . )
in S4.
(See
[CR,
pp.
296-299]
for
more
We will describe the Veronese surface after stating the theorem.
Theorea 5.2 : (Pinkall [P2]) : (a) Every connected Dupin submanifold with p is contained in a unique compact connected Dupin submanifold with p (b) Any two Dupin submanifolds with p
~
F
~
0
O.
0 are locally Lie equivalent.
each
being Lie equivalent to an open subset of Cartan's isoparametric hypersurface in S4
Our method of proof differs from that of Pinkall in that we will prove directly that each of the focal submanifolds can naturally be considered to be an open subset of a Veronese surface in a hyperplane p5 c
p6 .
The Dupin
submanifold can then be constructed from these focal submanifolds . We now recall the definition of a Veronese surface . . map f rom t h e unIt sp h ere YI2 + Y22 + Y32
=
. 1 In
~
3 .
Into
~
5
First consider the . b gIven y
(5.73)
This
map
takes
induces a map that
q,
the
t: p 2
same value on antipodal points of the 2-sphere . so it -+
IR
5
One can show by an elementary direct calculation
is an embedding 'If p2 and that
lie in any hyperplane.
q,
is substantial in 1R5. i.e . . does not
Any embedding of p2
into p5 which is projectively
equivalent to • is called a Veronese surface .
(See Lane [L . pp . 424-430] for
more detai 1. ) VI
+
V7 be the focal point maps of the Dupin
529 39 submanifold A:B
~ A
with p
~
o.
Each k i is constant along the leaves of its
corresponding principal foliation r , so each k factors through an immersion i i
~i of the 2-dimensional space of leaves BITi into
p6
We will show that each
of these ~i is an open subset of a Veronese surface in some pS c p6 . We wish to integrate the differential system (S . 71), which is completely integrable.
For this purpose we drop the asterisks and write the system as
follows:
(S.74)
dY 1
=
6 1 Y4
dY 7
=
6 aYa
+
6 2YS 6 2 YS
dY 2
6 aYa
dY 6
26 aYa + 9 1 Y4
dY
6 Z
a
a a
dY 4 dY
s
+
+
26 1 Y4
9 2 YS
9 Y
a
2
9 Y 1 a
with
(5.7S)
where
(5 . 76)
and
Y6 (S . 77)
so that (S.78)
Put (5.79)
2Y
1
+
6 2YS
6 Y + 9 Y 1 S 2 4
9 Z 1 4
6 Z 2 S
+
Y2
2Y7 +
Y7
+ 9
aYS
9 Y ; a 4
530 40 We find from (S.74) that
o ,
(S . 80)
so that the points W ,W are fixed. l 2
Their inner products are
-2 ,
(S . 8l)
and the line [Wl,W21 consists entirely of timelike points.
Its orthogonal
It consists entirely of spacelike points and has no point in common It suffices to solve the system (S.74) have
d(Z4-ZS-6Yl) = 0 , (S . 82)
d(Z4+2ZS-6Y7) = 0 ,
so that there exist constant vectors c ,C such that l 2
(S.83)
Thus,
Y1
and Y7 are determined by these equations,
determined from (5.79).
and then Y 2 and Y6 are
Note that C and C are timelike points and the line l 2
[CI,C21 consists entirely of timelike points . Equations
(5 . 76)
are
the
structure equations of SO(3) .
It
is
thus
natural to take the latter as the parameter space , whose points are the 3x3 matrices
A
[a
ik 1
,
1 ~
i,j,k
~
3 .
satisfying (S . 84)
I , det A
1 .
531 41
The first equations above, when expanded, are (5.85)
The Maurer-Cartan for.s of 50(3) are (5.86)
They satisfy the Maurer-Cartan equations (5 . 87)
[f we set (5.88)
these equations reduce to (5.76) .
With the 9
1
given by (5.88), we shall write
down an explicit solution of (5 . 74). 5 Let EA, 1 ~ A ~ 5, be a fixed linear frame in R (5 . 89)
F.
~i , j.k~3
1
Since
1 ,
we see from (5 . 73) , with Yj = a 3.
ij
. that Fi is a Veronese surface for
Using (5 . 85), we compute that
(5 . 90)
Since
constant.
the
2 a F / aai}a
coefficients ik
below satisfy (5 . 91)
Let
in
Fi
are
are independent of i .
quadratic, Moreover ,
the
partial
derivatives
the quantities G defined ik
532 42
We use these facts in the following computation : C2 F k
CF
dG
E _k _
ik
ca
da ..
+ E
IJ
i:1 • •
IJ
da
cakjcakl
kj
kt
(5 . 92)
CF E
ca
k
2 C F. da
1j
+ E
1
a .. IJ
kj
cai/a i l
da k €
E
CF k aa
da
CFi ij
kj
da
+ E
aa
kj
ij
where the last step follows from the linear hOllogeneity of aF /aa
ie
.
In terms
of a ij • we have
(5.93)
which g i ves. when expanded. (5 . 94)
and its cyclic permutations. On the other hand. by the same manipulation . we have ilF .
(5 . 95)
1
da . .
da
ij
IJ
giving
and its cyclic permutations . One can now immediately verify that a solution of (5 . 74) is given by
(5 . 96)
533 43 This
is
also
the
most
determined up to a
general
linear
solution
of
transformation,
(5 . 74),
for
the solution
and our choice of
frame
is
EA i s
arbi trar·y . By (5.96), the functions ZI , Z2,Z3 are expressible in terms of F I,F , F3 , 2 and then by (5.83), so also are Y ,Y ,Y +Y . I 7 I 7
Specifically, by (5 . 83) , (5.90),
and (5 . 96) we have
z4 -Z 5 -c I
so that the focal map Y , up to an additive constant vector, is the Veronese I surface F3 .
Similarly, the focal maps Y and Y +Y are the Veronese surfaces 7 1 7
FI and -F , respectively, up to additive constants . 2 We see from (5 . 79) that
o Thus Y is contained in the Moebius space r I WI ) / ./12 .
Then e
1
4
=
Q5 n W~ . Let e
7
is the unique unit vector on the timelike line
[W 'W ] which is orthogonal to WI . I 2
In a manner similar to that of Se ction 3,
we can write
where f maps B into the unit sphere S4 in the Euclidean space
IR~ .
~5
We call f the spherical projection of the Legendre map A determined by
the ordered pair
(e ,e ) 7 l
(see
fCC]
for
more detail) .
We know that f
is
constant along the leaves of the principal foliation Tl corresponding to VI' -
and f induces a map f : BI T I
-+
4
S .
By what we have shown above ,
open subset a spherical Veronese surface . Note that the unit timelike vector W / 2 satisfies 2
f
must be an
534 44 sin(W/3)e
1
+
cos(W/3)e
7
.
If we consider the points in the Moebius space E to represent point spheres in S4. then as we show in [CC]. points in Q5 n ~ represent oriented spheres in In a way similar to that above. the second
S4 with oriented radius --../3. focal submanifold Y7
C
Q5 n
w;
When
induces a spher lcal Veronese surface.
considered from the point of view of the Moebius space
E.
the points in Y7
represent oriented spheres of radius -n/3 centered at points of this Veronese surface.
These spheres must be in oriented contact with the point spheres of
the first Veronese surface determined by Y1 in
Q
5
5 n P.
Thus. the points in
the second Veronese surface must lie at a distance W/3 along normal geodesics in S4 to the first Veronese surface
f.
296-299]).
in S4 at distance n/3 from a spherical
the set of all
points
In fact
(see.
for example.
[CR.pp.
Veronese surface is another spherical Veronese surface. Thus. with this choice of coordinates. the Dupin submanifold in question is simply an open subset of the Legendre submanifold induced in the standard way by considering B to be the unit normal bundle to the spherical Veronese embedding
f
induced by Y1 .
For values of t
hyper surface at oriented distance t to
f
=
kIT/3. k
E
Z.
the parallel
in S4 is a Veronese surface .
For
other values of t. the parallel hypersurface is an iscparametric hypersurface in
S4
with
three
hypersurface) .
distinct
All of these
principal para~lel
curvatures
(Cartan's
isoparametric
hypersurfaces are Lie equivalent to each
other and to the Legendre submanifolds induced by the Veronese surfaces . The case p
=
O.
We now consider the case where p is identically zero on B.
It turns out
that no new examples occur here . in that these Dupin submanifolds can all be constructed from Dupin cycl ides by certain standard constructions.
To make
this precise. we recall Pinkall's [P3. p . 437] notion of reducibility .
Our
Dupin submanifold can be considered. as in Section 3. to have been induced from
a
Dupin hypersurface M3 c E4
The Dupin submanifold is reducible if M3
is obtained from a Dupin surface S c standard constructions .
E3 c E4 by one of the four following
535 45 i . M is a cylinder S x R in E4. ii. M is the hypersurface of revolution obtained by revolving S 3 about a plane n disjoint from S in E .
(5 . 97)
iii . Project S stereographically onto a surface N C S3
C
E4
M is
the cone R· N over N. iv . M is a tube of constant radius around S in E4. Pinkall proved [P3. p. 438] that the Dupin submanifold A: B ~ A7 is reducible if and only if some focal point map is contained in a 4-dimensional subspace p4 c pS . If P is
identically zero on B.
then by (5 . 20).
derivatives of p are also equal to zero .
all
of the covariant
From (5.21) and (5.54). we see that
the functions in equations (5.10)-(5.12) satisfy t
b
o
a = p
o
r
q
Then from (5.55). we have that among
the
Maurer-Cartan
forms
7
=
From these and the other relations
O.
~2
which
-u.
s. c
we
have
derived .
differentials of the frame vectors can be written dY dY dY (5 . 98)
dY dY dY dY
Note
l
7 2 S
3 4 5
1 ~1 Y1
4
~1 Y4
+
5
~l Y
5 5 3 _ W1y W y Y W1 5 1 7 7 3 5 1 4 + w y s(- w1 Y4 + w1y 5 ) 1 2 3 + ~ly u(~7Y3 + ~~Y5) 1 2 w3 (_y +uy ) 6 7 7 4 Y WI (sY l- 2) 5 w (-sY -Y + Y -uY ) 1 2 S 7 1
that from (5 . 44). (5.45). we have
(5 . 99)
1
ds + 2s wI
o
1
du + 2u wI
and from (5 . 13) that (5 . 100)
i
1.2.3 .
o .
we
see
that
the
536 46
From (5.22), we have that B,
~~
O.
Hence on any local disk neighborhood U in
we have that
(5 . 101 )
do,
for some smooth function a on U.
We next consider a change of frame of the
form
(5 . 102 )
1* The effect of this change is to make wI
o
while keeping p *
O.
If we set
then we can then compute that from (5 . 98) that * dYI * dY
4* 5* wI Y4 + wI Y5 3* 5* w7 V3 - c.l 1 V5 * 4* 5* s (- c.l V4 + c.l Y5) 1 1 * 3* 5* u (W Y + WI V ) 7 3 5 * 3* * where Z3 u* Y7* -V6* c.l 7 Z3' 4* * * s *VI* V* wI Z4 ' where Z4 2 5* * * * * -s V Y* wI Z5 ' where Z5 2 1
7
(5 . 103)
* dY 2 * dV 6 * dV 3 * dY 4 * dV 5
+
V6*
u* V* 7
where (5 . 104)
s*
se
2a
u*
ue
2a
Using (5.99) and (5 . 104) , we can then compute that (5 . 105 )
ds *
o
du *
o ,
* i . e .. sand u * are constant functions on the local neighborhood U. The frame (5 . 102) is our final frame, and we will now drop the asterisks
537 47 in further references to (S.102)-(S.10S) .
Since the functions sand u are now
constant, we can compute from (S . 103) that
dZ (S.106)
dZ dZ
3 4 S
3 - 2u '->7 Y 3 4 2s WI Y4 S 2(u-s)'->1 YS
From this we see that the following 4-dimensional subs paces , Span(Y l 'Y4 'YS ,Z4'ZS} (5 . 107 )
Span(Y 7 'Y3 'YS ,Z3,Z5} Span{Y1+Y7'Y3'Y4,Z3,Z4}
are invariant under exterior differentiation and are thus constant.
Thus,
each of
in
the
three
focal
point maps Y , Y and Y +Y is 1 7 1 7
contained
a
4-dimensional subspace of p6, and our Dupin submanifold is reducible in three different ways . the
space of
Each of the three focal point maps is thus an immersion of
leaves
of
its
principal
cyclide of Dupin in a space x 3
foliation onto an open subset of a
p4 n QS .
We state this result due to Pinkall [P2] as follows : Theorem 5 . 3: Every Dupin subllanifold with p obtained from a cyclide
in R3 by one of
0 is reducible . the
four
Thus,
it is
standard constructions
(5 .9 7) . Pinkall [P2, p. 111) then proceeds to classify Dupin submanifolds with p
0 up to Lie equivalence.
ca n follow his
proof
using
We will not prove his result her e. the
fact
that his
constant s a
The reader
and fJ are our
co ns tants sand -u, respectively.
REFERENCES [B]
W. Bl asc hke , Vorlesungen uber Differentlalgeometrie , Vol . 3, Springer,
[eC]
T. Cecil and S . S . Chern , Tautness and Lie sphere geometry, Math. Ann.
Berlin, 1929. 278 (1987), 381-399.
538 48 [CR]
T. Cecil and P
Ryan. Tight and taut imMersions of manifolds. Res. Notes
Math. 107. Pitman. London. 1985. [E)
L. Eisenhart. A treatise on the differential geometry of curves and
[GH]
K. Grove and S. Halperin. Dupin b¥persurfaces
surfaces. Ginn. Boston. 1909. group actions and the
double mappings cylinder. J . Differential Geometry 26 (1987). 429-459. [L]
E.P . Lane. A treatise on projective differential geometry. U. Chicago
[LS]
S. Lie and G. Scheffers. Geometrie der Beruhrungstransformationen.
[M1]
R. Miyaoka. Compact Dupin hypersurfaces with three principal curvatures.
Press. Chicago. 1942 . Teubner. Leipzig. 1896 . Math. Z. 187 (1984). 433-452. [M2]
____ . Dupin hypersurfaces with four principal curvatures. Preprint. Tokyo Institute of Technology.
[M3]
____ . Dupin hypersurfaces with six principal curvatures. Preprint. Tokyo Institute of Technology.
[Muj
H.F. MUnzner . Isoparametrische
Hyperflachen in Spharen
and II. Math .
Ann . 251 (1980). 57-71 and 256 (1981). 215-232 . [N]
K. Nomizu. Characteristic roots and vectors of a differentiable family of symmetric matrices. Lin. and Multilin. Alg. 2 (1973). 159-162 .
[P1]
U. Pinkall. DUDin'sche Hyperfl&chen. Dissertation. Univ . Freiburg. 1981.
[P2j
Dupin'sche Hyperfl&chen in E4. Manuscr .
[P3j
Dupin hypersurfaces. Math. Ann . 270 (1985). 427-440 .
[5]
Math 51 (1985). 89-119.
D. Singley. Smoothness theorems for the principal curvatures and principal vectors of a hypersurface. Rocky Mountain J . Math .. 5 (1975). 135-144.
[Thj
G. Thorbergsson. Dupin hypersurfaces. Bull . Lond. Math. Soc. 15 (1983). 493-498.
Thomas E. Cecil Department of Mathematics College of the Holy Cross Worcester. MA 01610
Shiing-Shen Chern Department of Mathematics University of California Berkeley. CA 94720 and Mathematical Sciences Research Institute 1000 Centennial Drive Berkeley . CA 94720
539
Historical Remarks on Gauss-Bonnet Shing-Shen Chern * Mathematics Department University of California Berkeley, California
Dedicated to Jiirgen Moser Let At be a two-dimensional oriented Riemannian manifold and D a compact domain on 111 bounded by a sectionally smooth curve C. The Gauss-Bonnet formula says
2::(11" - a) +
1
kgds
+
JL
I
=
211"X(D),
(0)
where X(D) is the Euler characteristic of D and the members at the left-hand side are respectively the exterior angles at the corners, the integral of the geodesic curvature, and the integral of the Gaussian curvature. These are respectively the point, line, and surface curvatures, so that the formula expresses the total curvature in terms of a topological invariant. The most important special case of the formula is the theorem on the angle sum of a rectilinear triangle in the euclidean plane. In §1 we will give the formal basis of the formula, which consists of the tangent circle bundle, the Levi-Civita connection, and
* Work done under partial support of NSF Grant DMS-87-01609. ANALYSIS, ET CETERA
209
Copyright @1990 by Academic Press, Inc.
540 210
CHERN
transgression. Gauss proved (0) for a geodesic triangle on a surface imbedded in the three-dimensional euclidean space. His main tool was the Gauss map. A number of historical remarks will be given in
§2. In §3 we study the question of a generalization of (0) to a Finsler surface. This was investigated by G. Landsberg in 1907-08. It turns out that a derivation of Finsler plane geometry by Elie Cartan leads directly to the Landsberg results. 1. Review of Surface Theory.
Let M be a two-dimensional oriented Riemannian manifold and E the circle bundle of its unit tangent vectors. We have the projection 7r:
~
E
M,
(1)
sending a vector xe to its origin x. E can be identified with the bundle of orthonormal frames xele2 of !If, by setting el = e,e2 = e L , the latter being obtained from e by a rotation of 90° in the right orientation. Let WI, w2 be the dual coframe of eI, e2, so that they are linear differential froms in E, which are pull-backs of forms on M. It is desirable to describe this situation locally. We choose a frame field e~, eg,with its dual coframe field w~, wg. Then we can write el = e2 = and WI
=
W2
=
o
. 0 + sznTe 2, . 0 0 -SZHTe l + COSTe 2 ;
COSTel
. 0 + sznTw2, . 0 0 -sznTwl + COSTw2,
(2a)
o
COSTW 1
(2b)
where T is a coordinate on the fiber at x. Taking the exterior derivative of (2b), we write
By setting
(3)
541
211
GAUSS-BONNET
we get the fundamental equations dw 1 dW2
W2
= W12 1\ W2, = WI 1\ WI2.
(4)
These equations completely determine W12. Since the forms WI, are globally defined in E, the same is true of WI2. We also have
(5) Thus E has a coframe field WI,~2,WI2, and is parallelizable. Exterior differentiation of (4) gives
It follows that
dWI2
is a multiple of WI I\. W2, and we write
(6) Its exterior differentiation gives
so that J{ is a function on AI. Observe that WI 1\ W2 is the element of area and J{ is the Gaussian curvature. The form WI2 is the connection form. Formula (6) says that its exterior derivative is in the base manifold M . Its restriction to a fiber is dr, the differential of the angle coordinate. Thus WI2 is an extension of dr to a form of E, whose exterior derivative is in M . Such a construction is called transgression. It contains the essence of the formalism leading to the proof of the Gauss-Bonnet Theorem. In fact, one only needs to take a section of the bundle (1) with suitable singularities and boundary values and apply Stokes Theorem, using (6). The connection form was avajlable neither to Gauss nor to Bonnet. N ow let Af be an immersed surface in R 3 , the three-dimensional euclidean space. Then x, ell e2 are realized as vectors in R 3 , and we have
(7)
542 CHERN
212 Let
es
=
el
x
e2
be the unit nonnal vector. We can write del
= w~2e2
de2
=
+ W13 e 3, -W:2el + W23e3,
de3
=
-WI3eI - W23 e 2,
(8)
where the equations have an anti-symmetric matrix of coefficients, because the frames el e2e3 are orthonormal. Exterior differentiation of (7) with the use of (8) gives
WI
1\ W13
+ W2 1\ W23
=
o.
Comparison of the first two equations with (4) gives
(9) This equation identifies the Levi-Civita connection with one defined by orthogonal projection, and was used by Levi-Civita in the highdimensional situation. By the Cartan lemma in exterior algebra, the last equation gives Wl3
=
W23
=
+ h 12W 2, h 21 W I + h 22 W 2,
hllWI
h12 = h 21 .
(10)
The quadratic differential form
is the second fundamental form. Exterior differentiation of (8), with the dash of W:2 dropped (because of (9)), gives (12) dw l2 = -W13 1\ W23 dW13
== WI2
1\ W23,
dW23
=
Wl3
1\ Wl2
(13)
Equation (12) is the Gauss equation. Equations (6), (10), and (12)
(14)
543
213
GAUSS-BONNET
which is the "Theorema egregium" . Equations (13) are the Codazzi equations. It has an interesting geometrical interpretation: Consider the diagram 9
--t
(15)
9
--t
where 52 is the unit sphere described by e3, g is the Gauss map sending x E M to its unit normal vector e3, and 9 is defined by parallelism in R3. When 52 is considered as a Riemannian manifold with the metric
(16) equations (13) show that it has the connection form W12 and equation (12) that it has constant Gaussian curvature +1. The Codazzi equations mean that the connection on AI is the pull-back of the standard connection on the unit sphere under the Gauss map. Although the above is classical surface theory, our treatment lays the emphasis on differential forms, and the unit tangent bundle E. The forms are pulled back and forth by natural maps, and the charm of the method is not to insist where they are, which should be clear by geometrical context. In particular, the importance of the connection form W12 cannot be overemphasized. Recently it has been used to solve an old problem of Bonnet (cf. [5)).
2. Contributions of Gauss, Bonnet, etc .. Formula (0) for a geodesic triangle was given by Gauss in [8]. In 1848 Bonnet generalized it to any simply-connected domain bounded by an arbitrary curve [3]. The surface was immersed in R3 and the main tool was the Gauss map, so that the theorema egregium played the crucial role. Bonnet remarked that this extension was natural, because the boundary curve could be approximated by a geodesic polygon. The extension was made independently by Binet. In Bonnet's own words [3, p. 129] "Depuis que ce Memoire est compose j'ai vu dans Ie tome III de la Correspondance de l'Ecole Poly technique que M. Binet, dans une Note annexee it un Memoire de M. Olinde
544 214
CHERN
Rodrigues, demontrait de la meme maniere que moi Ie theonne,e de M . Gauss ... " When the boundary curve in (0) is an arbitrary curve, it is natural to add such formulas and extend (0) to more general domains. For a closed surface the formula (0) can be written
~ j jKdA = .!.X(M), 47r 2
(17)
where the left-hand side, known as Gauss' integra curvatura, is the degree of the Gauss map, and (17) expresses it in terms of a topological invariant of M , the Euler characteristic. Classically this was derived from the Kronecker characteristic of a system of functions arising from the surface. It was essentially given by Walther Dyck [7, p . 485 and p . 505] . A beautiful treatment can be found in Blaschke's Differentialgeometrie [2], whose first edition appeared in 1921. (Actually the first edition only gave the formula, while the derivation was presented in later editions.) Our Formula (6) leads to the identification of the curvatura integra, the index-sum of a vector field, and the Euler characteristic. Its main feature is the use of the unit tangent bundle, instead of the Gauss map. It is a special case of a proof valid in n dimensions[6]. But the idea was new even for n = 2.
3. Finsler Surfaces and Landsberg Surfaces. The geometry on a Finsler surface (=two-dimensional manifold) M, with coordinates x,y, is based on the integral
j
<1> (x , y,
yl)dx,
dy yl = dx'
(18)
where <1> satisfies some generality condition, to be specified below. It contains the Riemannian geometry as a special case, when <1>2
= E(x"y) + 2F(x, y)yl + G(x, y)yI2.
(19)
We wish to investigate the question of the extension of the GaussBonnet Theorem to Finsler surfaces, and to show that this leads naturally to the Landsberg surfaces. For relevant literature on Finsler
545
215
GAUSS-BONNET
surfaces we list [1),[9),[10),[11), but our treatment makes use of Cartan [4), and is independent of them. In the projectivized tangent bundle PT Mover M, x,y,yl serve as a local coordinate system and the form dy - yldx is defined up to a factor . To develop the local geometry of the Finsler surface we set Wl =
+ ul(dy -
yfdx),
(20)
W2 = u2(dy - yfdx) .
The condi tion dw l
==
°
(21 )
mod W2
gives Hence the form Wl =
+
(22)
yfdx)
is intrinsically defined in PT!vI. It is known as Hilbert's invariant integral. Differentiating, we get dWl = (d
which we write as
(23) with W3
== ~ {
-
mod W2.
(24)
U2
We shall make the assumption
f:.
0,
(25)
we have
(27) But W3 is defined up to an additive term in W2 . By choosing this term properly, we can have
(28)
546 216
CHERN
Hence we have defined, intrinsically and globally, three forms WI, W2, Wa in PT lvI, everywhere linearly independent, which satisfy the equations (23), (28). This is the basic result in local two-dimensional Finsler geometry. Taking the exterior derivative of (23), we get "-'2
Hence dwa contains
W2
1\ dw 3 =
o.
as a factor and can be written (29)
Equations (23), (28), (29) are the fundamental equations of the Finsler surface;!, J,]{ are the three local invariants, all defined in PT M. For function L in PT 111 we define its covariant derivatives by
(30) Exterior differentiations of (28), (29) give J = II, ]{3 +]{ 1+
Along a curve we have curvature. Thus
W2
J I = O.
= 0, and
W3/WI
(31) = kg gives its geodesic
(32) are the equations of the geodesics. At a point we have WI = W2 = 0 and the integral of W3 gives the angle. We can easily show that the vanishing of I characterizes the Riemannian manifolds. In fact, we calculate I, i.e., the difference dW2 - WI 1\ W3 by ignoring the terms in WI 1\ W2, or, what is the same, the terms in dx 1\ (dy - yldx) . This gives 1 ~ 1=- 3(~2)ylylyl. 4 u2
(33)
It follows that I = 0 if and only if ~2 is quadratic in yl. In this case our formulas reduce to those of §l.
547 217
GAUSS-BONNET
From (29) we see that the Gauss-Bonnet formula remains valid if J = O. These are called Landsberg spaces, introduced by Landsberg in his effort to generalize Gauss-Bonnet. On a general Landsberg surface the form J(WI A W2 is in the base surface M, but unlike the Riemannian case the individual factors J( and WI AW2 are only defined in PT M. The latter means that there is no element of area in M. REFERENCES 1. Berwald, L., Uber zweidimensionale allgemeine metrische Riiume, J . fiir reine u. angew. Math., Bd 156 (1927), 191-210, 211-222. 2. Blaschke, W., Vor1esungen iiber Differentia1geometrie, erste AuBage, Berlin 1921, and later editions . 3. Bonnet, 0 ., Memoire sur 1a t11eorie generale des surfaces, J. de l'Ecole Poly, Tome 19, Cahier 32 (1848), 1-146. 4. Cartan, E., Sur un probJeme d'equivalence et 1a theorie des espaces metriques generalises, Mathematica 4 (1930), 114-136, or, Ouevres Completes, Partie III, 1131-1153. 5. Chern, S., Deformation of surfaces preserving principal curvatures, in "Differential Geometry", volume in memory of H. Rauch, 1984, 116-122. 6. Chern, S., A simple intrinsic proof of the Gauss-Bonnet formula for closed Riemannian manifolds, Annals of Math. 45 (1944), 747-752, or, Selected Papers, 83-88. 7. Dyck, W., Beitriige zur Analysis Situs, Math. Annalen 32 (1888), 457-512. 8. Gauss, C.F., Disquisitiones circa superficies curvas 1827 or Werke, Bd 4, 217-. 9. Landsberg, G., Uber die Totalkriimmung, Jahresberichte der deut Math. Ver. 16 (1907), 36-46; Kriimmungstheorie und Variationsrechnung, ibid 547-557. 10. Landsberg, G., iiber die Kriimmung in der Varia tionsrechn ung, Math. Annalen·65 (1908), 313-349. 11. Lichnerowicz, A., Quelques theoremes de geometrie differentielle globale, Comm. Math. Helv 22 (1949), 271-301.
548 Reprinted from Amer. Math. Monthly 97 (1990).
What Is Geometry? SHIING·SHEN CHERN', MSRl, Berkeley, CA 94720
SHIING-SHEN CHERN. Born October 26, 1911 in Kashing, Chekiang Province, China, Dr. Chern was educated at Nankai University, Tsinghua University, and the University of Hamburg, where he received his doctorate in 1936. He has been Professor at UC Berkeley since 1960, Emeritus since 1979, and is now Director Emeritus of MSRI in Berkeley as well as Director of the Nankai Institute of Mathematics in Tianjin, China. He is a member of the National Academy of Sciences and of numerous other Academies, domestic and foreign. He has received the National Medal of Science of the USA, and many other prizes, distinctions and honors.
To avoid misunderstanding I will not give a definition of geometry as in the customary mathematical treatment of a topic. I will only try to discuss its major historical developments. 1. Geometry as a logical system; Euclid. Euclid's "Elements of Geometry" (ca. 300 B.C.) is one of the great achievements of the human mind. It makes geometry into a deductive science and the geometrical phenomena as the logical conclusions of a system of axioms and postulates. The content is not restricted to geometry as we now understand the term. Its main geometrical results are: a) Pythagoras' Theorem.
a
b
FIG. 1
b) Angle-sum of a triangle.
a
+ f3 + Y
=
1800
FIG. 2
The result b) is derived using the fifth, or the last, postulate, which says: "And that, if a straight line falling on two straight lines make the angles, internal and on
'Work done under partial support of NSF grant DMS-87·01609
679
549 680
[October
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
the same side, less than two right angles, the two straight lines, being produced indefinitely, meet on the side on which are the angles less than two right angles."
t
---IX
+ (3 < 180·
FIG. 3
Euclid realized that the parallel postulate was not as transparent as his other axioms and postulates. Efforts were made to prove it as a consequence. Their failure led to the discovery of non-Euclidean geometry by C. F. Gauss, John Bolyai, and N. I. Lobachevski in the early 19th century. The "Elements" treated rectilinear figures and the circle. The last three of its thirteen Books were devoted to solid geometry. 2. Coordinatization of space; Descartes. The introduction of coordinates by Descartes (1596-1650) was a revolution in geometry. In the plane it can be described by the following figure:
o FIG . 4
where the role of the two coordinates x, y is not symmetric. Descartes' work was published in 1637 as an appendix, entitled "La geometrie", to his famous book on philosophy [6J. At about the same time Fermat (1601-1665) also found the concept of coordinates and used them to treat successfully geometric problems by algebraic methods. But Fermat's work was published only posthumously [7J. One immediate consequence was the study of curves defined by arbitrary equations F(x , y)
=
0,
(1)
thus enlarging the scope of the figures . Fermat went on to introduce some of the fundamental concepts of the calculus, such as the tangent line and the maxima and minima. From two dimensions one goes to n dimensions, and to an infinite number of dimensions . In these spaces one studies loci defined by arbitrary systems of equations. Thus a great vista was opened, and geometry and algebra became inseparable.
550 1990]
681
WHAT IS GEOMETRY?
A mystery is the role of differentiation. The analytic method is most effective when the functions involved are smooth. Hence I wish to quote a philosophical question posed by Clifford Taubes [15]: Do humans really take derivatives? Can they tell the difference? Coordinate geometry paved the way to applications to physics. An example was Newton's derivation of the Kepler laws from his law of gravitation. Kepler's first law says that the planetary orbits are ellipses with the sun as their common focus. The proof was possible only after an analytic theory of conics had been established. 3. Space based on the group concept; Klein's Erlanger Programm. Works on geometry led to the development of projective geometry, among whose founders were: 1. v. Poncelet (1788-1867), A. F. Mobius (1790-1868), M. Chasles (1793-1880), and 1. Steiner (1796-1863). Projective geometry studies the geometrical properties arising from the linear subspaces of a space and the transformations generated by projections and sections. Other geometries resulted, the most notable ones being affine geometry and conformal geometry. In 1872 Felix Klein formulated his Erlanger Programm [1], [11], which defines geometry as the study of the properties of a space that are invariant under a group of transformations. Thus there is a geometry corresponding to every group of transformations acting on a space. The basic notion is "group" and the notion of a space is now greatly expanded. In a certain sense the group of projective collineations is the most encompassing group and projective geometry occupies a dominant position. The most important application of the Erlanger Programm was the treatment of non-Euclidean geometry by the so-called Cayley-Klein projective metric [12]. The hyperbolic space can be identified with the interior of a hypersphere and the non-euclidean motions with the group of projective collineations leaving invariant the hypersphere. The same group may appear as a group of transformations in different spaces. As a result the same algebraic argument could give entirely different geometric ,ileorems. For example, everybody knows that the three medians of a triangle meet in a point. By using Study's dual numbers this translates into the following theorem of 1. Petersen and F. Morley: Let ABCDEF be a skew hexagon such that consecutive sides are perpendicular. The three common perpendiculars of the pairs of opposite sides AB, DE; BC, EF; CD, FA have a common perpendicular. See [13]. Sophus Lie founded a theory of general transformation groups, which became a fundamental tool of all geometry. 4. Localization of geometry; Gauss and Riemann. In his monograph on surface theory published in 1827 [8], Gauss (1777-1855) developed the geometry on a surface based on its fundamental form. This was generalized by B. Riemann (1826-1866) to n dimensions in his Habilitationschrift in 1854 [14]. Riemannian geometry is the geometry based on the quadratic differential form 1 :5; i, k
:5;
n
(2)
in the space of the coordinates u I , . .. , un, where the form is positive definite, or at least non-degenerate. Given ds 2 , one can define the arc length of a curve, the
SSt 682
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
[October
angle between two intersecting curves, the volume of a domain, and other geometrical concepts. The main characteristic of this geometry is that it is local: it is valid in a neighborhood of the u-space. Because of this feature it fits well with field theory in physics. Einstein's general theory of relativity interprets the physical universe as a four-dimensional Lorentzian space (with a ds 2 of signature + + + - ) satisfying the field equations
(3)
where Rik is the Ricci curvature tensor, R is the scalar curvature, K is a constant, and T;k is the energy-stress tensor. It is soon observed that most properties of Riemannian geometry derive from its Levi-Civita parallelism, an infinitesimal transport of the tangent spaces. In other words, Riemannian geometry studies the tangent bundle of a Riemannian space with the Levi-Civita connection. 5. Globalization; topology. Riemannian geometry and its generalizations in differential geometry are local in character. It seems a mystery to me that we do need a whole space to piece the neighborhoods together. This is achieved by topology. The notion of a differentiable manifold is one of the most sophisticated concepts in mathematics. The idea was clear to Riemann. The first mathematical formulation of a topological manifold was made by D. Hilbert in 1902 [10], [17]. Hermann Weyl identified the Riemann surfaces with one-dimensional complex manifolds and used it as the central theme of his epoch-making book Die Idee der Riemannschen Flache [16]. On the topological side "neighborhood" became the basic concept in Hausdorffs topology [9]. Hassler Whitney saw the merit of establishing an imbedding theorem on differentiable manifolds (1936), thus beginning the serious study of differential topology. That derivatives playa role in topology came as a shock when J. Milnor discovered the exotic differentiable structures on the seven-dimensional sphere (1956). By studying the Yang-Mills equations on a four-dimensional manifold, S. Donaldson found in 1983 a remarkable theorem on the intersection-form, which led to the existence of an infinite number of differentiable structures on R4. With the foundation of differentiable manifolds laid, geometrical structures can now be defined on them, such as the Riemannian structure, the complex structure, the conformal structure, the projective structure based on a system of paths, etc. Tools are developed for their treatment, of which the most important are the exterior differential calculus and the tensor analysis. A fundamental notion is "curvature," in its different forms. Its simplest manifestation is the circle in plane Euclidean geometry. It could also be the force of a physical system or the strength of a gravitational or electro-magnetic field. In mathematical terms it measures the non-commutativity of covariant differentiation. It is remarkable that suitable algebraic combinations of curvature give topological invariants. To illustrate this we wish to state the Gauss-Bonnet theorem. Let D be a domain with a sectionally smooth boundary on a two-dimensional Riemannian
552 1990]
WHAT IS GEOMETRY?
683
manifold. Then the Gauss-Bonnet theorem is the formula
( 4) where the first term is the sum of the exterior angles at the corners, the second term is the integral of the geodesic curvature along the sides, the third term is the integral of the Gaussian curvature over D, and XeD) is the Euler characteristic of D. For a rectilinear triangle in the Euclidean plane this is the theorem on the angle-sum stated in § 1. For higher dimensions we will only give, for the sake of simplicity, the theorem for a compact oriented Riemannian manifold M of dimension 2n without boundary. Let R ijkl be the Riemann-Christoffel tensor and let
(5) be the "curvature form". Let
( 6) be the pfaffian, where €i, ._. i2n is + lor -1 according as its indices form an even or odd permutation of 1, . . . , 2n, and is otherwise zero, and the sum is extended over all indices from 1 to 2n. Then the Gauss-Bonnet theorem says 1
(-1( 2 2n
n
7T
,jPf=x(M), n. M
(7)
where X(M) is the Euler-Poincare characteristic of M. 6. Connections in a fiber bundle; Elie Cartan. A notion which includes both Klein's homogeneous spaces and Riemann's local geometry is Cartan's generalized spaces (espaces generalises). In modern terms it is called "a connection in a fiber bundle. " It is a straightforward generalization of the Levi-Civita parallelism, which is a connection in the tangent bundle of a Riemannian manifold. In general, we have a fiber bundle 7T: E -> M, whose fibers 7T- 1(X), x E M, are homogeneous spaces acted on by a Lie group G. A connection is an infinitesimal transport of the fibers compatible with the group action by G. I wish to illustrate this more precisely in the case of a complex vector bundle, where the fibers are complex vector spaces Cq of dimension q and G = GL (q; C) [4]. The importance of complex numbers in geometry is a mystery to me. It is well organized and complete. One manifestation is the simple behaviour of the group GL(q; C): its maximal compact subgroup V(q) has no torsion and has as Weyl group the group of all permutations on q letters. We shall call a frame an ordered set of linearly independent vectors e l , • • . , e q E l 7T- (X) , x EM. In a neighborhood V where a frame field el(x), . .. , eq(x), x E V, is defined, a connection is given by the infinitesimal displacement l::o;;a,{3::o;;q,
(8)
553
684
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
[October
where w~ are linear differential forms in U. We call w~ the connection forms and the matrix
(9) the connection matrix. Under a change of the frame field
A
=
{an
( 10)
the connection matrix is changed as follows:
w'A =dA +Aw .
( 11)
We introduce the curvature matrix
0= dw - w
1\
w,
(12)
which is a matrix of exterior two-forms . By exterior differentiation of (11) we get
O'=AOA- I
( 13)
It follows that the exterior polynomial
det(I + 2i7T0)
=
1 + CI(O) + .. . +cq(O) ,
(14)
in which caCO) is a 2a-form, is independent of the choice of the frame field and is hence globally defined in M . Moreover, each c a is closed, i.e.,
dC a
=
O.
(15)
The form caCO) has been called the ath Chern form of the connection and its cohomology class (caCO)} in the sense of de Rham cohomology is an element of the cohomology group H 2a CM ; l) and is called the ath Chern class of the bundle E . These characteristic classes are the simplest and most fundamental global invariants of a complex vector bundle. They have the advantage of possessing a local representation, by curvature. As in the Gauss-Bonnet formula such a representation is of great importance, because the forms caCO) themselves have a geometrical significance. Moreover, let 7T' : P -> M be the bundle of frames of the complex vector bundle. Then the pull-back 7T'·C a becomes a derived form, i.e., ( 16) where Tc a , a form of degree 20' - 1 in P, is uniquely determined by certain properties. This operation is called transgression and TC a have been called the Chern-Simons forms (5). These forms have played a role in three-dimensional topology and in recent works of E. Witten on quantum field theory (20) . This theory can be developed for any fiber bundle; see (3). The above provides the geometrical basis of gauge field theory in physics. Here M is a four-dimensional Lorentzian manifold, so that the Hodge '" -operator is defined, and we define the codifferential
( 17) There is a discrepancy of terminology and notation, as given by the following table: mathematics connection w cUlvature n
physics gauge potential A strength F
554 1990)
WHAT IS GEOMETRY?
685
Maxwell's theory is based on a U (I)-bundle over 'M, and his field equations can be written
dA =F,
of=J,
(18)
where J is the current vector. Actually, Maxwell wrote the first equation as
dF
=
0,
(19)
which is a consequence. For most applications (19) is sufficient. But a critical study of an experiment proposed by Boehm and Aharanov and performed by Chambers shows that (18) are the correct equations [21). A generalization of (18) to an SU(2) bundle over M gives the Yang-Mills equations
DA =F,
of=J.
(20)
It is indeed remarkable that developments in geometry have been consistently parallel to those in physics.
7. An application to biology. So far the most far-reaching applications of geometry are to physics, from which it is indeed inseparable. I wish to mention an application to biology, namely, to the structures of DNA molecules. This is known to be a "double helix", which geometrically means a pair of closed curves. Their geometrical invariants will clearly be of significance in biology. The following three are most important: I) The linking number introduced by Gauss; 2) the total twist, which is essentially the integral of the torsion; 3) the writhing number. James White proved that between these invariants there is the relation [18)
Lk
=
Tw
+ Wr.
(21)
This formula is of fundamental importance in molecular biology. 8. Conclusion. Contemporary geometry is thus a far cry from Euclid. To summarize, I would like to consider the following as the major developments in the history of geometry: I) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Axioms (Euclid); Coordinates (Descartes, Fermat); Calculus (Newton, Leibniz); Groups (Klein, Lie); Manifolds (Riemann); Fiber bundles (Elie Cartan, Whitney).
A property is geometric, if it does not deal directly with numbl!rs or if it happens on a manifold, where the coordinates themselves have no meaning. Going to several variables, algebra and analysis have a tendency to be involved with geometry. This story is clearly one-sided and incomplete, representing only my personal viewpoint, and my limitations. It is clear that the story will not end here. Recent developments in theoretical physics, such as geometric quantum field theory, string theory, etc, are pushing for a much more general definition of geometry [19). It is sa tisfying to note that so far almost all the sophisticated notions introduced in geometry have been found useful. Finally, I wish to call attention to an early paper of mine [2), which could be read as a companion to this one.
555
686
[October
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
*)01 Jj} -y-j~ ~)I. ,~ff.ft ~f'?o- ~
:t
1* tt
~ -r t, /.7 ~ JJ.&..ll.. ~
MI~ HE .$..~~ ,.!1l ~
~~3t~~AJF1
:J
-t6
->+ _
1 t-
......... '''':1-.
.!HE.--§-
*- l::iK. ""
0
REFERENCES I.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
16. 17 18. 19. 20. 21.
G. Birkhoff and M. K. Bennett, Felix Klein and His "Erlanger Programm" , History and Philosophy of Modern Mathematics (W. Aspray and P. Kitcher, editors), Univ. of Minn . Press, 1988, 145-176. S. Chern, From triangles to manifolds, this Monthly, 86 (1979) 339-349. S. Chern, Complex Manifolds without Potential Theory, 2nd edition, Springer 1979. S. Chern, Vector bundles with a connection, Studies in Global Differential Geometry, Math. Asso. Amer. Studies no. 27, (1989) 1-26. S. Chern and J. Simons, Some cohomology classes in principal fiber bundles and their application to Riemannian geometry, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 68 (1971),791-794; or, characteristic forms and geometrical invariants, Annals of Math , 99 (1974) 48-69. Rene Descartes, Discours de la methode pour bien conduire sa raison et chercher la verite dans les sciences, 1637. Pierre de Fermat, Oeuvres, edited by Paul Tannery and Charles Henry, Gauthier-Villars, Paris, 1891-1912. C. F. Gauss, Disquisitiones generales circa superficies curvas, 1827; Ges. Werke, 4. F. Hausdorff, Grundziige der Mengenlehre ,. Leipzig 1914; dritte Auflage, Dover, N.Y. 1944; English translation , Chelsea, N.Y. 1957. D. Hilbert, Uber die Grundlagen der Geometrie, Gottinger Nachrichten , 1902, 233-241. F. Klein, Vergleichende Betrachtungen iiber neuere geometrische Forschungen, Math. Annalen 43 (1893), 63- 100 or Ges. Abh I (1921), 460-497. ___ , Vorlesungen iiber nicht-euklidische Geometrie, Springer. 1928. ___ , Hohere Geometrie, Springer, 1926, p. 314. B. Riemann, Uber die Hypothesen welche der Geometrie zu Grunde liegen , Habilitationschrift 1854; Gott Abh 13, 1868; Ges. Werke 1892. Clifford H. Taubes, Morse theory and monopoles; topology in longe range forces, Progress in Gauge Field Theory, Cargese 1983,563-587, NATO Adv. Sci. Inst, Ser B, physics 115, Plenum New York-London, 1984. H. Weyl, Die Idee der Riemannschen Flache, Leipzig, 1913; 3 te Auflage, verandert , Leipzig, 1955. ___ , Riemanns geometrische Ideen , ihre Auswirkung und ihre Verkniipfung mit der Gruppentheorie, Springer, 1988. James H. White, Self-linking and the Gauss integral in higher dimensions, Amer. J. Math., 91 (1969) 693-728. E. Witten, Physics and geometry, Proc. Int. Congo of Math . Berkeley 1986, Amer. Math . Soc., 1987, Vol. 1,267-303. ___ , Quantum field theory and the Jones polynomial, Braid Group, Knot Group, and Statistical Mechanics, (c. N. Yang and M. L. Ke editors), World Scientific, 1989, 239-329. C. N. Yang, Magnetic monopoles, fiber bundles, and gauge fields. Annals of New York Academy of Sciences, 294 (1977), 86-97.
556 Reprinted from Differential Geometry, Longman, 1991.
AN INTRODUCTION TO DUPIN SUBMANIFOLDS Shiing-Shen Chern * To Manfredo on his 60th Birthday
1. Dupin submanifolds and Lie sphere geometry Consider a piece of surface immersed in R3:
(1) Its normal lines are the common tangent lines of two surfaces, the focal surfaces . We have the theorem:
If the focal surfaces degenerate to curves, they are conics.
The surfaces in question are called the Dupin cyclides. The simplest example is given by a torus obtained by rotating a circle about a line not meeting it . Bllt there are other interesting examples, some with singularities. The cyclides were studied by Dupin in his famous book published in 1822. He defined them as follows: Consider in R3 three fixed spheres and the family of spheres which are tangent to all of them. Their envelope is a cyclide. The equivalence of the two definitions follows from the Lie line-sphere contact transformation . The corresponding problem in R4 was studied by U. Pinkall in 1985. An immersed hypersurface
(2) is called a Dupin hypersurface, if the three focal hypersurfaces all degenerate to two-dimensional surfaces. A remarkable situation arises: Besides the general case which generalizes the classical result in R3 there is an exceptional case where the three focal surfaces merge into the same Veronese surface. The classification of Dupin hypersurfaces in Rn with n 2: 5 remains an open problem. When the hypersurfaces is analytically given as a graph, the lowering • Work done under partial support of National Science Foundation grant DMS-87-01609 .
557 96
in dimension of the n - 1 focal hypersurfaces is given by n - 1 nonlinear partial differential equations, so that we are involved with an over-determined system. To understand the problem we make the key observation that the Dupin property is invariant under the Lie sphere group, which contains as a subgroup the group of euclidean motions. Consider the projectivized cotangent bundle
(3) where the left-hand side stands for the non-zero one-forms
0,
with
>. i- 0, identified. As local coordinates in PT" R n we take (Xl, ... ,xn , Xi,
1:<:; i :<:; n,
0
and
>'0,
PI,··· ,Pn-t),
being coordinates in Rn and
A local diffeomorphism in PT" Rn preserving the equation transformation. A submanifold of PT" Rn satisfying
0
0
= 0 is called a
contact
= 0 is called a Legendre
sub manifold.
Sophus Lie proved the local theorem: All the contact transformations carrying hyperspheres to hyperspheres in Rn form a finite- dimensional group . Here
hyperspheres are understood in the generalized sense, i.e., oriented hyperspheres including the points and hyperplanes. In fact, to describe the Lie sphere-group we introduce, for a hypersphere in Rn with center p ERn a!ld radius r, the (n+3)-sphere coordinates 1
(4)
2
2"(I- p . p +r),
p,
r],
when the dot-product is understood in Rn. These are homogeneous coordinates satisfying the relation
(5)
< X, X >= -x~ + x~ + ... + X~+2
-
X~+3
= O.
The condition of tangency of two hyperspheres X, Y is given by the polar equation
(6)
< X,Y >=0.
The coordinates extend to points for which r = 0 and to the oriented hyperplanes. For details cf. [2] . The Lie sphere-group is the group of all linear transformations on X leaving invariant the equation (5). It is thus isomorphic to O(n + 1,2)/ ± I .
SS8 97
By this representation the generalized hyperspheres of Rn become the points on the hyperquadric Qn+l C pn+2 defined by (5) . Qn+l contains a (2n-l)-parameter family of lines , representing the elements of contact of R" (i.e., the points of
PT'Rn) .
< A, A >< o. We can call " points" of R"
Let A be a point of pn+2 satisfying the hyperspheres X satisfying
(7)
< A, X > =
o.
The resulting geometry is Mobius geometry whose group, the Mobius group, is the subgroup of the Lie sphere-group O(n
+ 1, 2)/ ±
I, leaving the point A fixed .
Similarly, let C be a fixed point on Qn+l .
The hyperspheres X satisfying
< C, X > = 0 can be regarded as the hyperplanes. The subgroup of the Lie sphere-group leaving the point C fixed is called the Laguerre group. In Laguerre sphere-geometry there are hyperplanes , but no points. The euclidean group is the intersection of the Mobius group and the Laguerre group. Consider now the diagram
B"-l (= B)
(8)
11"
1
Mk -------t
R" ,
x
where Mk is immersed in R" and B"-l is its unit normal bundle . By definition, a point b E B is a unit normal vector at x
= 1I"(b) .
Let b.L be the oriented tangent
hyperplane perpendicular to it . The oriented hyperspheres tangent to b.L at x form a one-parameter family having the property that any two of them are tangent to each other. This defines a line on Qn+l, which we denote by >.(b) . We have therefore the mapping
(9)
>.:
B
--+
A2n-1 ,
where A2"-I, of dimension 2n - 1, is the manifold of all lines of Q"+l. We will call
A the Legendre map. Let b(t) be a curve on B. Then A(b(t)) is a ruled surface formed by lines of Q"+l. In order that it be a developable surface, i.e. , a ruled surface formed by
the tangent lines of a curve, the tangents of b(t) must be in principal directions . In analogy to surface theory we will call such a curve a line of curvature . The
SS9 98 submanifold Mk is called a Dupin submamfold if the lines ),(b(t)) pass through a point for any line of curvature b(t). This definition reduces to the classical one for a hypersurface and is clearly invariant under Lie sphere-transformations. An important class of examples of Dupin submanifolds is given by the extrinsic symmetric submanifolds Mk in Rn, which satisfy the equation
(10)
D II
= 0,
where II is the second fundamental form, a quadratic differential form with value in the normal bundle, and D is the covariant differential. These were completely determined by D. Ferus; cf. [6]. A local Euclidean characterization of the Dupin property seems to be complicated.
2. Taut imbedding Dupin submanifolds are closely related to the global problem of taut imbedding of manifolds in Rn. Given a compact manifold Mk, the question is how can it be best immersed in Rn ? The immersion is called tight if every height function has the minimum number of critical points. In 1957 Lashof and I proved that the k-sphere Sk is tightly immersed if and only if it is imbedded as a convex hypersurface in Rk+l
In 1970, T. Banchoff considered immersion of a compact manifold Mk in Rn, where every distance function from a fixed point has the minimum number of critical points. Such an immersion has since been called taut. It is a stronger property than tightnes: a taut immersion is necessarily tight. Carter and West proved that it is always an imbedding. Banchoff proved that a taut surface in R3 must be a round-sphere or a Dupin cyclide. Tautness can be defined for general subsets of R" by a homological condition. It has been proved that a taut submanifold remains taut under a Lie sphere-
transformation. All indications are that the taut submanifolds in Lie sphere geometry are characterized locally by the Dupin property. We refer to [4], [5], [7] for information on taut imbeddings.
560 99
3. A generalization of Lie sphere geometry and an equivalence problem The Lie sphere geometry can be generalized to the study of
oo"+!
hypersurfaces in
R" under contact transformations. We will formulate it a.s an equivalence problem: Cartan's equivalence problem is the following: Given two sets of linear differential forms 0', Xk,
0'; in the coordinates
l
x· respectively, 1 :S i,j,k,l :S n, both linearly independent, and
given a Lie group G
c
G L( n, R). To find the conditions that there are
functions
such that 0'; , after the substitution of these functions, differ from Oi by a transformation of G .
The problem generally involves local invariants, and Cartan gave a procedure to generate such invariants. In R" consider
oon+!
hypersurfaces defined by
(12)
Xn
= F( X 1 , ••• ,x"-1 ,
POt
= 8x Ot (x,a),
We have
(13)
8F
These equations can be solved for aA,
(14) Geometrically we have in
l:Sa:Sn-l.
1:S A :S
n
+ 1,
with a parameter t:
1 :S i :S n. R2n
two sets of coordinates, x Ot , aA and
tively, related by the above equations. The submanifolds aA
=
Xi,
POt, t respec-
const
define a
leaved structure, of dimension n - 1, in R 2n, which is also defined by a completely integrable system
561 100
dx" - EPadxa
(15)
=0
i
dpa - EPa(3 ( x , P"1't)dx dt - Et a (x 'P"1,t)dx a i
where Pa(3, ta are functions of
Xi,
(3
=0
1
~
0:,/3,[
~
n - 1
= 0,
Pa, t. For a function in these 2n variables we
define
(16) Then the complete integrability is expressed by the conditions
(17)
Pa(3
!!:!La
= P(3a,
dx
To an element of contact (xi, p) there are the parameter t. Thus a point of R
2
n
00 1
leaves tangent to it, depending on
is a leaf of the foliation (15) together with
a point on the leaf or a point of PT'Rn and a leaf tangent to the coresponding element of contact. As an example consider the hyperspheres of Rn:
(18) We have
(19)
We can set
The completely integrable differential system defining the hyperspheres is
562 101
(20)
dp'"
1 + -E(6"'i3 + p",pp ) dx p_ - 0, t
In the general case let (21) tw being the transpose of the one-columned matrix w. It is seen that w is defined
up to the transformation
(22)
1 :; a., {3 :; n - 1.
Thus the determination of the local invariants of the family (12) under contact transformations of R n is reduced the solution of the equivalence problem in R 2n where the group G is the group of all the (2n x 2n) matrices in (22). This, together with a new proof of Lie's theorem, will be presented in a forthcoming paper.
References [1
I Steven G.
Buyske, "Lie sphere transformations and the focal sets of hyper-
surfaces", thesis, Brown University, 1988. [2
I T.
Cecil and S. Chern, "Tautness and Lie sphere geometry" , Math. Annalen
278 (1987) 381-399. [3
IT.
Cecil and S. Chern, "Dupin submanifolds in Lie sphere geometry", Differ-
ential Geometry and Topology, Lecture Notes in Math . 1369, Springer-Verlag,
1989, 1-48. [4
I T.
Cecil and P.
Ryan, Tight and Taut Immersions of Manifolds (Pitman,
London, 1985) . [5
I Eugene
Curtin,
"Intermediate tautness and relative tautness for submani-
folds" , thesis, Brown University, 1988.
563 102 [6
I D.
Ferus, "Symmetric submanifolds of Euclidean space", Math. Annalen 247
(1980),81-93 . [7
I U.
[8
I G.
Pinkall, "Dupin hypersurfces", Math. Annalen 270 (1985), 427-440 . Thorbergsson,
"Dupin hypersurfaces", Bull. London Math.
(1983), 493-498.
Department of Mathematics University of California and Mathematical Sciences Research Institute Berkeley, California 94720
Soc . 15
S64 Reprinted from International Symposium in Memory of Hua Loo Keng, Springer Verlag, 1991.
Families of Hypersurfaces Under Contact Transformations in Rn IN MEMORY OF Loo-KENG HUA
SHIING-SHEN CHERN*
1. Introduction.
We consider the cotangent bundle T* Rn of Rn, which consists of the linear differential form 8 of Rn . By identifying the non-zero one-forms differing from each other by a factor, we get the projectivized cotangent bundle PT' Rn. If xi, 1 :S i :S n, are coordinates of Rn, we write
(1)
8=dxn-
2: p",dx'" ,
1
:S a :S n -1,
Then (xi, p",) can be taken as local coordinates in PT* Rn . A local diffeomorphism of PT" Rn, which preserves the equation
(2) is called a contact tran3formation. A submanifold of PT" Rn satisfying (2) is called a Legendre submanifold. Consider a family of hypersurfaces depending (smoothly) on n + 1/ parameters:
(3)
1/
2 o.
A hypersurface lifts to a Legendre submanifold in PT" Rn in an obvious way. The problem of the local invariants of such a family under contact transformations is a complicated one. The simplest case is of course when 1/ = O. In fact, we have shown in [2] that in this case there are no local invariants, i.e., the family is equivalent to the family of all hyperplanes in Rn. This will be given a new proof in this paper, and we will give in §3 the structure equations of the subgroup of the pseudo-group of contact transformations leaving invariant the hyperplanes. The case 1/ = 1 is also of importance, because the family (3) has as d. special case the family of all the hyperspheres of Rn, which is the geometrical structure leading to the Lie sphere geometry. In §4 we shall exhibit the first local invariant. "Work done under partial support of NSF Grant No. DMS87-01609.
565 50
Shiing·shen Chern
2. Formulation as a problem of equivalence. From (3) we get
po = -8f 8 (;,; 1 , ... ,;,; n-l ,al,·· · ,a n+ v ) · ;,;0
(4)
Equations (3) and (4) can be solved for
at, .•• , Un+v
in terms of v parameters giving
The hypersurfaces (3) in Rn can be considered as the integral manifolds of the differential system
(6)
en:
= d;,;"
11"0:
= dpo - LPO/l(;,;i,p_pt:..)d;,;/l = 0,
T:..:
- LPod;,;o
= dt:.. -
= 0,
Lt:..o(;,;i,p-y,tl')d;,;O
= o.
From here on in this section we will agree on the following ranges of indices:
(7)
1
:S a,{3,"(:S n -1, 1 :S i,j,k:S n, 1 :S >',I1-:S v.
The system (6) is completely integrable. Let E be the space of the variables ;,;i,Po,t:.., which is of dimension 2n - 1 + v. The differential system (6) defines a foliation in E, with leaves of dimension n - 1 given by aA = const, corresponding to the hypersurfaces of the family (3). Fixing;,; i, Po, we fix an element of contact in Rn and there are OOv hypersurfaces of (3) tangent to it, parametrized by t:... Let F be a function in E. We define
(8) Then the complete integrability of (6) is expressed by the conditions
(9)
Poll = P/lo,
The forms in (6), together with the forms d;,;o, give rise to a G-structure, where G is the group of the non-singular matrices
o (10)
up o o
~ ).
g~
We take the elements of M as auxiliary variables. In fact, in the space of ;,;i ,po, t:.. and the variables in M we introduce the one-forms
566 Families of Hypersunaces Under Contact Transformations in R"
51
(11) where the t's denote the transposes of the row-matrices. Suppose there be a second family of hypersurfaces of the same kind in R". We denote the corresponding quantities with the same notations with asterisks. Then the two families are equivalent under a contact transformation if and only if there is a diffeomorphism in the space of all the variables under which
(12) i.e., the corresponding forms are equal. Thus a condition among these forms is an invariant condition. We find, for example, mod w". Comparing with (11), it follows that we can have mod w",
(13) if and only if
(14)
These are thus invariant conditions on the auxiliary variables, and it is natural to impose them.
3. A notable pseudo-group of contact transformations. We consider the case
1/
= O. An important special case is the family of hyperplanes
(15) We shall show that this is no restriction vis-a.-vis the pseudo-group of contact transformations. In fact, taking the exterior derivative of (11), we see that we can write
(16)
dw" =
7r /\
d"P", =
L 7r~
w"
+ /\
LW'" /\ "P""
"P",
+ 7r", /\ w",
567 52
Shiing- shen Chern
where (17) are one-forms, which are not completely determined_ Because of (14) there are linear relations between them_ The easiest way to get these relations is to take the exterior derivative of the first equation of (16), obtaining (18) It follows that
where
On the other hand, the forms in (17) are subject to the change
7rp -+ 7rp + L P;"'cp.., + p$wn, P;'" = PJ"', p'{J
-+
p'{J
+ L R'{J..,w'" + LRp"'cp.., + R'{Jwn,R'{J.., =
R~p _
We can therefore utilize this indeterminancy to arrive at (19) Equation (18) then becomes
from which it follows that
where
d aP ..,
+ d Pa -r =
d aP
+ dPa
0,
= 0,
and, on substituting,
0l,{3,"( mutually distinct_ Keeping the condition (19), the allowable change of the forms in (17) is now given by
568 S3
Families of Hypersurfaces Under Contact Transformations in R"
11"fJo
+ Pw", p0"'/,n + POw" -+ ~o ufJ + ~ ~ fJ T-r fJ '
Pp
-+
Pp - L
pofJ
-+
pofJ _ LP;fJw-r + LQofJ-r'P-r + QOfJ w "
11"
-t
11"
(20)
pp-r'P-r
PfJ°-r
=.
PfJ-r o ,
+ (-P; + DpP)W n
where
(21) We can choose pofJ to make (22) The change (20) keeping the conditions (22) satisfies the further conditions
(23) It is not difficult to prove, using the Cartan-Kahler theory of exterior differential systems, that the system
Wn
= W*n ,
'Po
* = 'Po'
w
Q
=w
*0'
is in involution. From this it follows that any family of hyper surfaces (3) with v = 0 is equivalent under contact transformations to the family of hyperplanes (15) . A different, and more elementary, proof of this theorem was given in [2]. This proof has, however, another consequence. It leads to the subgroup of the contact transformations leaving the hyperplanes invariant . In fact, equations (16) are the structure equations of this pseudo-group in the sense of Elie Cartanj cf. [1] .
4. An invariant for oon+1 hypersurfaces. We consider the case v = 1, so that in our notations the indices A, /-L will be dropped . We write the equation (11) explicitly as
Wo = uO(dx" - LPpdxfJ) (24)
+L
updxfJ
+L
rofJ(dpp - LPlhdx-r),
fJ 'Po = fo(dx" - LPpdx ) + Lf!(dPfJ - LPp"dx"), 1/J = s(dxn - LPodx O) + L
where the subscripts have the ranges
hO(dpo - LPafJdxfJ)
+ g(dt -
L
todxO),
569 54
Shiing- shen Chern
(25)
1::; 0.,(3,"(::; n -1,
and Pat], ta are functions of
xi ,Pa, t_
1::; i,j::; n,
The other coefficients are auxiliary variables subject
to the conditions (14)_ As a consequence we can write, as in §3, dw" =
(26) where
7r
7r
1\ w"
+L
w a 1\ 'Pa,
is defined up to an additive term in w" _ Our objective is to impose further
invariant conditions, if they are available_ In fact, we have mod wn,'PP_
It is therefore natural to make the genericity assumption
(27) and impose the invariant condition p 'L~ " 8p -y fPf-Y b a p =ug ap,
(28) or
(28a) As a result we can write
(29)
The difference of this equation from the second equation of (16) is the presence of its first term_ It turns out that this does not affect the discussion in §3_ As a result we have the same conclusion: We have
(30)
dw
a
=
LP~ I\w P + Lpa P I\'PP +pa I\w n ,
and P~
(31)
+ 7rp - bp7r =
0,
pap = pP<>,
where the forms are defined up to the change in (20), with the conditions (23). Since the system w
n
= 0, 'Pa = 0, 'I/J = 0
is completely integrable, we can write
570 Families of Hypersurfuces Under Contact Transformations in RD
(32)
dl/J =
u "w" + L U
O
"'Po
+U
55
"l/J.
Taking the exterior derivative of (29), we get mod wn,'P..,. It follows that
(33)
mod wn,'P.."l/J,
where p 0.., -
(34)
C
c'"op·
Comparing with (20) and (32), we see that c~.., are invariant under the change (20) and a possible change of u. Hence
c~.., = 0
(35)
is an invariant condition, which we will examine closely. The issue is whether it can be fulfilled by imposing conditions on the auxiliary variables or it represents a property of the 00"+1 hypersurfaces under contact transformations. This investigation needs the explicit expression of c~.." and hence those of the left members of (33). We take the exterior derivatives of the expressions in (24) and compare them with (26), (29), (30), (32). This is a lengthy calculation, but is greatly simplified by noticing that it suffices to calculate mod w",'P""l/J. The result is:
7r =: u-1du 7rp
=: u- 1
u- 1
L
f..,w\
L u~dfJ + u- fpw'" 1
u-
1
L
op..,u~h"w'"
Of"f!l0P,,!' 'I ~u;.. P ..,-,,--w + U -2 ~ uP;..
(36)
P~ =: u- 1
L du~fJ -
u- 1 fpw'" - opu- 1
+ u- 1 ~ o~ u"'h"w'" ~ ~.., " u = g-ldg
-
(37)
~ uOf"f!lOP,,!' W.., ~ ;.. p .., oP;"
+ u- 1 ~ fP otp w.., + u- 1 ~ uPo hOw'" ~ .., at ~ .., "'P •
These relations are taken mod w ", 'Pc" l/J. We express the condition (35) by
or using (31) , by
u- 2
L f'lw'"
S71 56
Shiing· shen Chern
We differentiate the equation (28a), obtaining, by (28a), (38) Substituting (36) into (37) and using (38), we can write (35) as
8",8U- (L u~hP - f-y 1
(39)
+ u- 1 {-(l,8
-
+L
a: f~)
8t
L u~h(7)8~ -
- u- 2 "'(+u"f17fl' L.J A,8 -y
(I" -
L u~h(7)8~}
p 17 + u,8f17fl')8 1' >. " -y 8PA
-
-
0
.
We consider this equation as a system of linear equations in f", h,8. For n = 2 there is only one equation. But for n 2: 3 there will be compatibility conditions. Since (35) is an invariant condition , these compatibility relations will be the first invariants of the family of hypersurfaces under contact transformations. These invariants deserve to be further investigated, with geometrical interpretations. Our simplest, and most important, example is the family of hyperspheres in R n , defined by
(40) We find
(xn _ an)p" = _(XU - a,,), (xn - an )p",8 =
-8",8 -
P"P,8 .
Setting
t
(41)
= x" - an,
the hyperspheres are the integral manifolds of the differential system
dx" - L
(42)
dp"
+c
p"dx 1
u
= 0,
L(8",8
+ Pop,8)dx,8
= 0,
dt - LP"dx'" = O.
REFERENCES L E. Cartan, Sur la .t",cture de. groupe. infini. de tranoforTnation., Annales Ecole Norm . Sup. 21(1904), 153-206; Oeuvres Completes, Partie II, Vol. 2, 571-624. 2. S. S. Chern, Projective geometry, contact tran.forTnation., and C R-.t",ctive., Archiv der Mathematik 38 (1982), 1-5.
572 Reprinted from Miscellanea Mathematica, Springer, 1991.
Shiing-Shen Chern
Surface Theory with Darboux and Bianchi
The treatises of Darboux (1842-1917) and Bianchi (1856-1928) on surface theory are among the great works in the mathematical literature. They are: G. Darboux, Theorie generale des surfaces, Tome 1 (1887), 2 (1888),3 (1894), 4 (1896), and later editions and reprints. L. Bianchi, Lezioni di Geometria DifJerenziale, Pisa 1894; German translation by Lukat, Lehrbuch der DifJerentialgeometrie, 1899. The subject is basically local surface theory. There are beautiful spots and I wish to guide you through some of them. Needless to say, the corresponding global questions deserve study. They are interesting and are usually difficult.
1.
ISOMETRY
Classically this is known as the form problem : Given (1)
ds 2 =Edu 2 +2Fdudv+Gdv 2 , d s' 2 = E' d u' 2 + 2 F' d u' d v' + G' d v' 2,
both positive definite, to decide whether there is a transformation u'=u'(u, v),
(2)
v' = v' (u, v),
such that after substitution (3)
The fundamental invariant is the Gaussian curvature K(u, v). They have to be equal at corresponding points : (4)
K(u , v)=K' (u', v').
If one is a constant, the other must be the same constant. The surface then admits a three-parameter group of isometries. It is the euclidean plane, the hyperbolic plane, or the elliptic plane, according as K = 0, < 0, or > O.
573
s.-s. Chern
60
In the general case the main tool consists of the Beltrami differential parameters. For a function F(u, v) on the surface the first Beltrami differential parameter 17 F is the square of the norm of its gradient. The second Beltrami differential parameter ,1 F is its Laplacian. If G(u, v) is another function, we have also the polarization V (F, G), so that V (F, F) = V F. Given two invariant functions (5)
ep(u, v) = ep'(u', v') I/I(u, v)=I/I'(u', v'),
it follows that (6)
Vep=V'ep',
VI/I=V'I/I',
V(ep, I/I)=V'(ep', 1/1').
If the functions ep, 1/1 are independent, so that it determines the transformation (2), equations (6) are necessary conditions for the isometry (3). They are also sufficient. For, by the definition of the differential parameters, we have, by taking ep, 1/1 as parameters, ds 2 = Vl/ldep2 -2V(ep, 1/1) depdl/l + V(ep) dl/l 2 (7) VepVI/I-(I7(ep,I/I»2 K being an invariant function, not a constant, we search the second invariant function from V K, ,1 K. Hence the problem is solved, when there are two independent functions among K, V K, ,1K. The remaining case is when V K, ,1K are functions of K, say
(8)
VK=f(K),
,1K=g(K).
For (3) to hold we must have (9)
V' K' = f(K'),
,1'
K' = g(K'),
with the same functions f, g. This condition is sufficient. For with K and another parameter 1/1 we can write 2 2 2 (10) f(K)ds =dK +eXP (2S ~~~~ dK)dl/l Such a ds 2 is isometric to that of a surface of revolution. We shall call it rotation-like. It admits a one-parameter group of isometries. We notice the gap phenomenon: A ds 2 is generally rigid. It may admit a one-parameter group of isometries (rotation-like surfaces) or a three-parameter group of isometries (K = const), but
574 Surface Theory with Darboux and Bianchi
61
not a two-parameter group. Such a property persists in high dimensions. It should be interesting to study the global problem of complete rotation-like surfaces. Is it always a surface of revolution?
2.
ApPLICABLE SURFACES
Classically two surfaces with the same ds 2 are called applicable; in fact, one is also called a deformation of the other. Applicable surfaces may not be congruent. Their investigation is clearly an interesting and important problem. Let the surface S be (11)
x(u, v)=(x (u, v), y(u, v), z(u, v)),
with a ds 2 given by (1). Then the metric d x 2 + dy2 = ds 2 -dz 2
has Gaussian curvature zero. Expressing this fact, we get a long partial differential equation in the unknown function z, whose leading term is (12)
Given a surface, to find another surface applicable to it thus becomes analytically the study of a Monge-Ampere equation. Its characteristics are the asymptotic curves of S. This fact is the basis of the following theorem: Let C be a curve on S. If C is not an asymptotic curve, a surface keeping C fixed and applicable to S must be S itself. If C is an asymptotic curve, there is an infinite number of surfaces through C and applicable to S. Mon>. generally, given a curve C on S and a curve C in space, one asks the question whether there is a surface S' through C and applicable to S such that C goes into C . For this to be true it is necessary that C and C have the same geodesic curvature at corresponding points. For C this is equal to P sin (), where p is the curvature of C (which we suppose to be ~ 0) and () is the angle between the principal normal of C and the surface normal of S; the same notation, with dashes, will be used for C. It follows that C must satisfy the condition p' ~ Ip sin ()I. It can be proved that if p' > Ip sin ()I there are exactly two applicable surfaces S'
575 s.-s.
62
Chern
through C . On the other hand, if P' = Ip sin 81, C will be an asymptotic curve of S'. By a theorem of Beltrami-Enneper, its torsion is equal to ± K, which is another condition to be fulfilled by C. When C is given on S, the curve C is then determined up to a rigid motion and there is an infinite number of surfaces S' applicable to S with C going to C . Bonnet, and others, studied applicable surfaces with further conditions imposed. Analytically such a problem leads to an overdetermined system of partial differential equations. Bonnet proved the theorem : An isometry between two non-ruled surfaces which maps a family of asymptotic curves of one surface into the asymptotic curves of another is a rigid motion.
V-
Two other problems of this nature are: (X) isometries preserving the lines of curvature ; fJ) isometries preserving the principal curvatures or the mean curva-
ture, as the Gaussian curvature is always preserved. The study of such problems leads to long calculations. A more interesting question is the study of a family of applicable surfaces with the above properties (cf. [1 , 2]). A family of 00 1 surfaces is called non-trivial if it is not the orbit of one of them by a one-parameter group of rigid motions. We have the theorem : A non-trivial family of applicable surfaces preserving the lines of curvature is a family of cylindrical molding surfaces. We recall that a cylindrical molding surface is constructed as follows : Take a cylinder and a tangent plane 1t to it. On 1t take a curve C. A cylindrical molding surface is the locus of C as 1t rolls over the cylinder. When the cylinder is a line, the molding surface becomes a surface of revolution. Concerning the property fJ) Bonnet observed that a surface of constant mean curvature can be deformed continuously in a nontrivial way. In general we have the theorem : There exist non-trivial families of applicable surfaces of non-constant mean curvature, depending on six constants, such that the mean curvature is preserved during the deformation. It should be remarked that the proofs of this theorem and the theorem in the last section involve the studies of the respective over-determined systems and their integrability conditions, which look complica~ed but lead to unexpected simple conclusions.
576 Surface Theory with Darboux and Bianchi
3.
63
W-SURFACES
A Weingarten surface or a W-surface S is one which satisfies a relation between the principal curvatures: (13) Such surfaces include the minimal surfaces, the surfaces of constant mean curvature, the spherical and pseudospherical surfaces, etc. The first properties come from the congruence of normals. The latter consists of the common tangent lines of the evolute or focal surfaces of S. In fact, let x(u, v) be a point on S and let v(u, v) be a unit normal vector at that point. Then the focal surface F;, i = 1, 2, is the locus of the point (14)
where r; = 11k; is a principal radius of curvature. Weingarten proved the remarkable theorem : If S is a W-surface, F; is applicable to a surface of revolution, whose form depends only on the relation (13). The converse of this is also true. The normals establish a map between the two focal surfaces by mapping one focal point to the other. A congruence is called a W-congruence if this map preserves the asymptotic curves on the two focal surfaces. We have the following theorem of Ribaucour : A surface is a W-surface if and only if its normal congruence is a W-congruence. Let K; be the Gaussian curvature of F; at y;, i= 1, 2. For a W-surface we have the formula of Halphen : (15)
Sophus Lie proved another characterization of the W-surfaces: A surface is a W-surface if and only if the quadratic differential form (16)
P =(v, dx, dv)
has Gaussian curvature zero. Since the equation P =0 defines the lines of curvature, it follows that on a W-surface these can be determined by quadratures. The same is true of the asymptotic curves. Such properties are of importance, but they have been neglected in modern works on differential geometry.
S77
s.-s. Chern
64
An example of a minimal surface is the catenoid. One of its focal surfaces is a surface of revolution obtained by rotating the evolute of the catenary. By Weingarten's theorem one of the focal surfaces of any minimal surface is applicable to it. Similarly, consider Beltrami's pseudosphere obtained by the rotation of a tractrix. Since the catenary is the evolute of the tractrix, it follows that one of the focal surfaces of a pseudospherical surface is applicable to a catenoid. It should be remarked that the relation (13) is essentially a partial differential equation, generally non-linear, in two independent variables. For instance, if the surface is given as a graph z = z(x, y), the condition for a minimal surface is (17)
and the condition K = - 1 becomes (18)
The latter is thus the equation of a pseudospherical surface. It can be put in a different form: It 1/1 denotes the angle between the asymptotic curves, there are asymptotic parameters u, v, such that (19)
I/Iuv=sin 1/1.
This is called the sine-Gordon equation. Thus the study of pseudospherical surfaces is equivalent to that of the sine-Gordon equation. The above are remarks on some of the important local properties of W-surfaces. Their global properties, particularly those of minimal surfaces, have recently been exhaustively studied. For the global study of general W-surfaces I wish to refer to the works of H. Hopf; cf. [4].
4.
W-CONGR UENCES
An important feature of euclidean geometry is the role played by the straight lines. Thus the study of a surface is intimately tied to that of its normal congruence. On the other hand, it is justified to study line congruences, i.e., a two-parameter family of lines, on their own right. The first fundamental paper on line congruences was written
578 Surface Theory with Darboux and Bianchi
65
in 1860 by E. Kummer, the great algebraic number theorist. Let the lines be given by a point x(u, v) and a direction ~ (u, v), the latter being a unit vector. Kummer based his study on the two quadratic differential forms (20)
I'=(d~, d~),
II'=(dx, d~).
(We use the dashes to distinguish them from the forms in surface theory. Actually ~(u, v) defines an analogue of the Gauss map and I' is a generalization of the third fundamental form in surface theory.) The line congruence is called isotropic, if the forms I' and I I' are proportional. The notion is a generalization of the sphere (or plane) in surface theory. It has the following geometric interpretation: If the corresponding points of two applicable surfaces have a constant distance, the lines joining them form an isotropic congruence. The line ..1. with the parameters u, v and a neighboring line (u + d u, v + d v) have a common perpendicular. Its foot as d u -+ 0, d v -+ 0 gives a point on ..1.. All such points lie on a segment of ..1., whose endpoints L 1 , L2 are called the limit points on ..1.. On the other hand, the equations u=u(t), v=v(t) define a ruled surface consisting of lines of the congruence. There are in general two directions when it becomes a developable, whose lines are the tangent lines of a curve. The points of contact give two points Fl, i = 1, 2, on ..1.. They are called the foci and their loci
579 66
S.-S. Chern
Halphen's formula (15) can also be generalized: Let K j be the Gaussian curvature of iJ>j at F;, i = 1,2. For a W-congruence we have (21) where d is the distance between the limit points. A W-congruence for which both distances Fl F2 and Ll L2 are constants is called pseudospherical. In this case iJ>;, i = 1, 2, is a pseudospherical surface of curvature - d - 2 The correspondence between iJ>j is called a Backlund transformation. An important family of W-congruences was constructed by Darboux as follows : Consider a surface of translation (22) The lines of intersection of the osculating planes of the generating curves form a W-congruence such that the generating curves correspond to the asymptotic curves of the focal surfaces. Moreover, if the generating curves have the constant torsions + wand - w respectively, the W-congruence is a normal congruence of a Wsurface satisfying the relation (23) Its focal surfaces are applicable to a paraboloid of revolution. These Weingarten-Darboux surfaces have many interesting properties. A W-congruence is a projective property. Its study is an important chapter in projective differential geometry.
5. TRANSFORMATION OF SURFACES As remarked above, most properties of surfaces are described by partial differential equations. It is interesting, and mysterious, that the same property could be defined by equations which are very different in appearance. For example, the pseudospherical surfaces with K = -1 can be characterized either by Monge-Ampere equation (18) or the sine-Gordon equation (19). It is thus of clear interest to study the transformations of surfaces which preserve certain geometrical properties. We shall give some examples: IX) BONNET'S TRANSFORMATION. Let S be a surface with the principal curvatures k j and the radii of principal curvatures rj = l lk j ,
580 Surface Theory with Darboux and Bianchi
67
i = 1, 2. The principal curvatures of its parallel surface Sh at a distance h are given by
(24)
k I-hk /
k ~ = --'I
i= 1,2.
From this Bonnet made the following observation : If S has a constant Gaussian curvature l/a 2 , its parallel surface at a distance ± a has a constant mean curvature 1/2a. If S has a constant mean curvature I / a, its parallel surfaces at the dista nces a and a/2 have respectively the constant mean curvature - l/a and the constant Gaussian curvature l/a 2 (Note : mean curvature =(k 1 +k 2)/2.) Thus surfaces of constant mean curvature 0 and surfaces of constant positive Gaussian curvature are in a sense equivalent problems.
+
*'
(3) a -TRANSFORM . When the surface S is oriented, it has a complex structure defined by the rotation of a tangent vector by 90° (multiplication by i !). This leads to the definition of the operators and 0, which are respectively the exterior differentiations with respect to the holomorphic and anti-holomorphic coordinates. In particular, ax, where x(u, v) is the position vector, is a vectorial form of bidegree (1 , 0). The ratios of its components define a new complex surface, called the a-transform of S. A theorem on minimal surfaces says that they can be characterized by the condition
a
(25)
aox=o,
i.e., the coordinate functions are harmonic. This is equivalent to saying that the a- transform is a holomorphic curve. The latter property is the main reason for the Weierstrass formulas of a minimal surface. The notion of a a-transform is playing an important role in the study of minimal surfaces in other spaces; cf. [3]. y) BACKLUND TRANSFORMATIONS . In 1883 Backlund proved the
remarkable theorem : Let Sand S' be the focal surfaces of a pseudospherical congruence (for which the distances between the foci and the limit points are both constant). Then Sand S' have the same Gaussian
581
s.-s. Chern
68 2
curvature _d- , where d is the distance between the limit points. The transformation so defined between Sand S' is called a Backlund transformation. Given a pseudospherical surface S, to construct S' it suffices to construct a vector field on S such that the tangent lines to S along the vector field form a pseudo spherical congruence. This leads to a completely integrable total differential equation whose sorution depends on the solution of a Riccati equation. Since a pseudospherical surface corresponds to a solution of the sine-Gordon equation (19), a Backlund transformation can be interpreted as transforming one solution of (19) into another. In this way new solutions of (19) are produced. The method plays an important role in the theory of solitons in mathematical physics. 0) LAPLACE TRANSFORM (=!= LAPLACE TRANSFORM IN HARMONIC ANALYSIS). A net of curves N on a surface is called conjugate, if at every point the tangent directions to the curves of the net separate harmonically the asymptotic directions. Taking the net to be the parametric net with parameters u, v, we have, by one of the Gauss equations (26)
A conjugate net has the following geometrical interpretation: Take a v-curve Cv • The tangent lines of the u-curves at the points of C v form a developable surface. On such a tangent line there is thus a point Xl where it is tangent to the edge of regression. Reversing the role of u, v, we get a point X _ 1 on the tangent line of the v-curve Cv. As u, v vary, Xl (u, v) and X -1 (u, v) generally describe surfaces, which are called the Laplace transforms of the net N . The remarkable fact is that the u- and v-curves also form conjugate nets on x_du,v) and x 1(u, v); we will denote them by N- 1 and N1 respectively. Moreover, the positive (resp. negative) Laplace transform of N-1 (resp. N 1) is N itself. Continuing this process, we get a Laplace sequence of conjugate nets (27)
such that each one is the Laplace transform of the one to the left and is the negative Laplace transform of the one to the right. A conjugate net is a projective property. For its treatment it is advantageous to use homogeneous coordinates in the three-
582 Surface Theory with Darboux and Bianchi
69
dimensional ambient space. The homogeneous coordinates of a surface x(u, v) satisfy an equation of the form (28)
xuu+ ax u+ bxu+ ex =0,
if and only if the parametric net is a conjugate net. Equation (28) is called a Laplace equation. To every conjugate net is associated a Laplace equation, and vice versa. If x(u, v) defines N, its Laplace transforms are given by (29)
To the Laplace sequence (27) corresponds a sequence of Laplace equations, and the solution of a Laplace equation reduces to the solution of one of the equations in the sequence. In particular, the last problem could become a simple one, when the corresponding surface degenerates to a curve.
REFERENCES
1. Bryant, R., Chern, S., Griffiths, P.A. (1990) : Exterior differential systems. Proc. of 1980 Beijing DD-Symposium (1980), 219-338 or Bryant-ChernGardner-Goldschmidt-Griffiths, Exterior Differential Systems, Springer 2. Chern, S. (1989) : Deformation of surfaces preserving principal curvatures. Differential geometry and complex analysis, volume in memory of H. Rauch. Springer, 1984, pp. 155- 163, or Chern, selected papers, vol. 4, pp. 95-103, Springer 3. Chern, S., Wolfson, 1. (1989) : Harmonic maps of the two-sphere into a complex Grassmann manifold, II. Annals of Mathematics 125 (1987) 301 - 335 or S. Chern, selected papers, vol. 4, p. 189- 223, Springer 4. Hopf, H. (1983) : Differential geometry in the large, part. II. Lecture notes in mathematics, vol. 1000. Springer
Work done under partial support of NSF Grant DMS-87-01609. Research at MSRI supported in part by NSF Grant DMS-8505550.
583
TRANSGRESSION IN ASSOCIATED BUNDLES In memory of Guang-Lei Wu
SHIING-SHEN CHERN Mathematical Sciences Research Institute Berkeley CA 94720 USA Received 5 August 1990
1.
Introduction and Review
One of the fundamental notions in the differential geometry of fiber bundles is that of transgression. It can be fonnulated as follows: (cf., for example [3]): Let (1)
n:P-+M
be a principal bundle over a manifold M with structure group G a Lie group. Denote by L(G) the Lie algebra of G. A connection in the bundle is given by an L(G)-valued one-form in P satisfying certain conditions. Its curvature form is an L( G)-valued 2-form defined by (2)
In tenns of a chart n- l (U) ::::: U x G, with the local coordinates (x, su), x has the expression
E
U, Su E G,
(3)
where Su is an L(G)-valued two-fonn in U, and ad(su) is the adjoint representation of L(G). The property (3) prompts us to consider (real or complex-valued) functions F(X I , . · . , X h ), Xl' . .. , X h E L(G), which satisfy thefollowing conditions: (1) It is linear in each of the arguments and remains unchanged when any two arguments are interchanged; (2) It is "invariant", i.e., aE
Research at MSRI supported in part by NSF Grant DMS-87-01609.
383
Internationat Journal of Mathematics Vol 2 No 4 (1991) 383- 393 tF.\ World Scientific Puhlishin2 Comnanv
G.
(4)
584 384
S. S. CHERN
We can then substitute for each Xi the curvature form, getting F($) :
= F($, . .. ,$) = F(0 u , . . ,0 u ),
(5)
which is then a form of degree 2h in M. This form F($) has remarkable properties. In fact, we deform qJ to the zeroconnection by setting qJ(t) = tqJ ,
(6)
Its curvature form is (7)
We have the fundamental formula 1d
h dt F($(t» = dF(qJ, $(t), .. . , $(t)) . Define the transgression operator TF(qJ)
=h
r
F(qJ, $(t), ... , $(t)) dt.
(8)
(9)
Then we have d(TF(qJ))
= F($) = n*F(0 u ).
(10)
In other words, the "characteristic form" F(0 u ) is pulled back by n* into a coboundary in the principal bundle P. An important special case is when G = GL(q ; C). Then L(G) can be identified with the space of all (q x q)-matrices and the curvature form $ can be considered as a matrix-valued two form. We define the invariant forms c j ($), 1 ~ i ~ q, by (11)
so that cj ($) is a 2i-form in M. By the above general result it can be transgressed in the principal bundle P. We wish to show in this paper that it can be transgressed in a "smaller" associated bundle. For this purpose we identify P with the space of all frames, i.e., ordered sets oflinearly independent vectors e I , ... , eq , e I /\ ... /\ eq #- 0, with the same origin x E M. There is a natural projection
585 385
TRANSGRESSION IN ASSOCIATED BUNDLES
A..: P -+ p., which sends the vectors {e I ' ... , eq } to {e., .. . , eq }. Its image is an associated bundle having as fiber the Stiefel manifold Yq.q-.+1 of ordered sets of q - s + 1 independent vectors of the q-dimensional vector space, so that P = Pl. We have the fiberings
n = n.
0
(12)
A.•.
In Sec. 2 we will prove the theorem: Theorem 1. Consider an hermitian complex vector bundle and an admissible connection. The form n:c. is a coboundary in p•. An analogus result holds for hermitian holomorphic bundles. In this case we have the operators a, and their combinations
a,
d
= a+
a,
d C = i(a - a),
(13)
with (14)
Suppose H(t)(e, e l ), when e, e l are vectors with the same origin x hermitian metrics. The formula
E
M, be a family of
(15)
defines an endomorphism in the fiber ofthe vector bundle. For an invariant polynomial F, Bott and I proved in [2] the formula
-
d
haaF(L(t), (t), .. . , (t» = dt F((t» .
(16)
This allows a "double transgression". For defining
fF(f{J)
=
h
f
F(L(t), (t), ... , (t» dt,
(17)
we will have
aafF(f{J)
= F(
In Sec. 3 we will prove the theorem: Theorem 2.
The form c.(
(18)
586 386
S. S. CHERN
I believe such theorems are useful in the applications of characteristic forms, and particularly Theorem 2, in view of their recent role in algebraic number theory, cf. [1]. The vector bundles being of dimension q and Theorems 1 and 2 being concerned with the characteristic form c., 1 ~ s ~ q, we will use throughout the paper the following ranges of indices: 1 ~ A, B, C ...
~
q, 1 ~
(1.,
p, y, . . . ~ s -
1, s
~
i,j, k, . ..
~
q.
(19)
We will also use the summation convention. 2.
Differentiable Bundles
We will first give a review of connections in a complex vector bundle. The "points" ofthe principal bundle P being frames xeA , x E M, a connection is given by the absolute differentiation (20)
so that the forms cpi are in P. Its curvature, which measures the non-commutativity of the absolute differentiation, is given by the two-forms (21) We will sometimes use the matrix notation (22) so that (21) can be written CI>
= dcp - cp /\ cp .
(23)
An hermitian metric of the bundle is given by (24)
A bundle provided by an hermitian metric is called an hermitian bundle. Let (hAll) be the inverse matrix of (hAll), so that (25)
As in tensor analysis we will use the h's to raise or lower indices, thus (26)
A connection is called admissible to the hermitian metric if the latter is preserved
587 TRANSGRESSION IN ASSOCIATED BUNDLES
387
under the parallelism defined by the connection. Analytically this is characterized by the condition (27) We wish to express the forms of the associated bundle Ps ' By (20) they are generated by qJ{" fPiA., and the pull-backs of forms in M and are invariant under the change of the frame eA , which leaves each ej unchanged. Instead of P we restrict ourselves to the bundle Q of all frames eA such that (28)
By (27) we then have (29)
We imbed qJ in a family of matrices qJ(t)
= ( qJ!P tqJj.) , tqJj
tqJ!
0~t~1,
(30)
and define $(t)
= dqJ(t) - qJ(t) /\ qJ(t) ,
(31)
so that (32)
qJ(1) = qJ,
Write qJ(t) = qJ(o)
+ t'1 ,
(33)
where (34)
Differentiating (31) we get d$(t)
= qJ(t)
/\ $(t) - $(t) /\ qJ(t) .
(35)
We consider "invariant functions" F as defined in Sec. 1. For GL(C; q) condition (4) becomes (36)
588 s. S. CHERN
388
where A, Xl' ... , X h are (q x q)-matrices, A being non-singular. The infinitesimal fonn of this equation gives
L
(37)
F(Xl,·· · ,BXi - XiB, ... ,Xh ) = O.
l~i~h
Substituting into F matrix-valued differential fonns and differentiating, we get
dF(", cI>(t), . .. , cI>(t»
"---v----' h-I
= F(d", cI>(t), ... , cI>(t» - (h - l)F(",q>(t)
1\
cI>(t) - cI>(t)
1\
q>(t), cI>(t), ... , cI>(t».
By (37) the last tenn is equal to (h - 1)F(",q>(t)
= F(q>(t)
1\
1\
cI>(t) - cI>(t)
"+,,
1\
1\
11' (t), cI>(t), ... , cI>(t»
q>(t),cI>(t), ... ,cI>(t».
Hence
dF(", cI>(t), ... , cI>(t» = F(d" - q>(t)
1\ " -
" 1\
q>(t), cI>(t), ... , cI>(t»
(38)
By (33), (34), and (21) we have d" - q>(t)
1\ " -
" 1\
q>(t) = d" - 11'(0)
1\ " -
-2tq>~
1\
" 1\
11'(0) - 2t"
q>t
= ( cI>f + (1 - 2t)q>i
1\
q>!
1\ "
cI>! + (1 + (1 -
{
2t)q>~ 2t)q>/t
1\ 1\
q>i) 11'1 . (39)
On the other hand, from (30) and (31) we have
By (39) and (40) we observe that the matrix in (39) is equal to dcI>(t)/dt. Hence if we put TF(q» = h
r
F('1,cI>" ... ,cI>,)dt,
(41)
we will have
dTF(q» = F(cI>(1» - F(cI>(O».
(42)
TRANSGRESSION IN ASSOCIATED BUNDLES
389
By construction the form TF(cp)is in Q. It is generated by daerentiais in M and by the forms cpt, cp; and their complex conjugates. By (29) they satisfy the relations
and can be expressed as linear combinations of differentialson P,. We claim that TF(cp) itself is in Ps. For this it sufficesto show that it is invariant under a change of the vectors em.But this follows from the invariant property of F. Theorem 1 follows by taking F = c,, in which case we have
We wish to rewrite our formula as follows:
where
Notice that we have used the fact that cp is an admissible connection of an hermitian metric on the bundle, as expressed by (29). 3. Holomorphic Bundles
Now suppose M be a complex manifold and our complex vector bundle be a holomorphic bundle. The notations in Sec. 2 will be used. In particular, an hermitian metric will be given by (24). There is a uniquely determined type (1,O)-connection given by
Its curvature is
whose exterior differentiation gives
the so-called Bianchi identity. For completeness of our treatment we wish to give a proof of (16). We now have a
590 390
S. S. CHERN
family of hennitian metrices h"j(t) and the formulas (47), (48) are valid with the parameter t. By definition (15) we have (50) By exterior differentiation we have, using (49) aF(L(t), (t), ... , (t»
= F(aL(t), (t), ... , (t».
The same argument used in the proof of (38) gives aaF(L(t), (t), ... , (t»
= F(aaL(t) -
1\
aL(t) - aL(t)
1\
(51) using the fact that F is an invariant polynomial. For simplicity we shall use matrix notation. With H(t)
= (h"j(t»
(52)
we write (47), (48), and (50) respectively as
= aH(t),
(t)
= a
(53)
a
L(t)H(t) = at H(t).
Applying
ato the last equation, we get a
at
= aL(t) + L(t)
It follows that
0--
at (t) = aaL(t)
+ aL(t)
1\
+
_
1\
aL(t)
+ L(t)(t) -
Since F is an invariant polynomial, we have F(L(t)(t) - (t)L(t), (t), ... , (t» = 0,
(51) and (54) together give (16).
(t)L(t).
(54)
591 391
TRANSGRESSION IN ASSOCIATED BUNDLES
We now apply (16) to a special family of hermitian metrices hA1i(t), 0 ~ t ~ 1, given
by
(55) hiP(t)
= th iP '
hiJ
= (1
- t)hi]
Thus it is our original metric for t
+ th i].
= 1, while for t = 0 we have h(O)«] = 0,
h(O)i] =
hi]'
(56)
We will write Q)1(1)
=
cpl,
(57)
Differentiating (55) and using (47), we get
(58)
By (47) we calculate the connection forms
(59) cp(t)f = cp(t}{
=
CPt + (1
- t){ - h(t)lfi5hypcp/ - hkfh(t)JJfcpn,
+ (1
- t) { - h(tyPhypcp/ - Okfh(tyfcpn .
cp/
Application of the operator (j to these forms gives the curvature <1l(t) which enters in the formula (17). The complex conjugate of the formula (47) gives (60)
592 392
S. S. CHERN
We also have the obvious relation (61)
These relations allow us to apply J to the expressions in the braces of (59), and we have immediately the lemmas: Lemma 1.
J(h(t)AYh By ) contains no
Lemma 2.
Jh(t)A]contains no
It follows that each of (t) is generated by the differentials on M and by
and
which can be written as (62)
The left-hand side of this equation is the absolute differential of hia and is thus a linear combination of forms on p•. It follows that
= 0,
c.(l)
= c.(),
and Theorem 2 is proved. For C 1 we have a very simple double transgression formula. In fact, by (11) we have
so that by (17) and (50),
Hence we can write (63)
593 TRANSGRESSION IN ASSOCIATED BUNDLES
393
References 1. J. M. Bismut, H. Gillet and C. Soule, Analytic torsion and holomorphic determinant bundles: I, II, III, Comm. Math. Physics 115 (1988), 49-78; 79-126; 301-351. 2. R. Bou and S. Chern, Hermitian vector bundles and the equidistribution of the zeroes of their holomorphic sections, Acta Math. 114 (1965), 71-112; or Selected Papers, Vol. II, pp. 399-440, Springer-Verlag, 1989. 3. S. Chern, Complex Manifolds Without Potential Theory, Second Edition, Springer-Verlag, 1979. 4. Guang-Lei Wu, The transgression of characteristic forms, Acta Math. Sinica 19 (1976), 52-62, 119-128, (in Chinese).
594 Reprinted from PauL HaLrrws Springer Verlag. 1991.
CeLebrating 50 Years of Mathematics.
Characteristic Classes and Characteristic Forms Shiing-shen Chern Stiefel-Whitney and Pontrjagin Classes A vector bundle is a family of vector spaces, real or complex, which is parametrized by a manifold, such that (1) it is locally a product, and (2) the linear structure on the vector spaces (called fibers) has a meaning. More precisely, this can be described by a diagram:
(1)
Chern, 1959 x
--+
}vI
where M is a manifold and x E M . The bundle E consists of the vector spaces Vq which are inverse images under -rr of all points x E M. We suppose all spaces and maps to be smooth. Conditions (1) and (2) can be expressed as follows: (1) Every point x E M has a neighborhood U such that -rr-l(U) is a product U x Y (Y is the q-dimensional vector space) and thus has the local coordinates (x,yu), with x E U, YU E Y . (2) When the neighborhoods U and V have a nonempty intersection, the coordinates YU and Yv are related by a linear transformation: (2)
where we write the action on Y by GL(q) [= GL(q; R) or GL(q; C)] to the right. An immediate question is: Is such a local product structure always a product globally? This is not an easy question. Its answer is provided by the following theorem: Theorem (Poincare-Hopf). Let M be a compact orientable manifold and s(x), x E M be a generic vector field on M. Then L (zeroes o[s) = X(M),
(3)
595
170
Shiing-shen Chern
where X(M) is the Euler-Poincare characteristic 01 M.
We shall call a map s:M-+E
(4)
a section, if it satisfies the condition 7r 0 S = identity. A product bundle has sections which are nowhere zero. Hence the theorem of Poincare-Hopf says that if X(M) i- 0, the tangent bundle of M is not a product. But formula (3) says more. It can be used to define X(M) in terms of the left-hand side, i.e., in terms of a generic vector field. More generally, let Sl, • • • , Sk be k vector fields on M in general position. The points where they are linearly dependent form a (k-1)-dimensional set. It is tempting to make it a cycle and consider its homology class. This was done by E. Stiefel in his doctoral thesis in 1936. At the same time Hassler Whitney took a broader viewpoint and studied general sphere bundles. He also noticed that, as the "obstructions" are defined by conditions, the invariants should be cohomology classes. Without going into the fine points of algebraic topology such as local coefficients, the upshot is the introduction of the StiefelWhitney characteristic classes for a real vector bundle: (5a) with the Euler class (5b) The restriction to coefficients Z2 in relation (5a) is dictated by the topological properties of the Stiefel manifolds, viz, the presence of torsion. Whitney noticed the importance of the tautological bundle 7ro: - + Gr(q, N),
(6)
where Gr(q, N) is the Grassmann manifold of all the q-dimensionallinear spaces through the origin in Rq+N or Cq+N, as the case may be, and the fibers are the spaces themselves. This bundle is now called universal, because if N is sufficiently large, any bundle can be induced by a mapping
I: M
-+
Gr(q, N) .
Again under the assumption that N is large, Pontrjagin observed that the mapping 1 is defined up to a homotopy. The characteristic classes are naturally defined to be the elements in the image
r H*[Gr(q, N)] C H*(M) . From this viewpoint the crucial problem is the homology of the Grassmann manifolds. This was studied in a definitive way by C. Ehresmann, beginning in his thesis in 1934 (see [3]). It turns out that with the exception of the Euler class in relation (5b), for real vector bundles the integral characteristic classes are of dimension 4k. They are called the Pontrjagin classes and are denoted by Pk(E) E H 4k (Mj Z) . For reference to results in this section we recommend the classical book [4] .
596 Characteristic Classes and Characteristic Forms
171
Characteristic Classes in Terms of Curvature It was a trivial observation, and a stroke of luck, when I saw in 1944 that the situation for complex vector bundles is far simpler, because most of the classical complex spaces, such as the complex Grassmann manifolds, the complex Stiefel manifolds, etc., have no torsion. In particular, for a qdimensional complex vector bundle, by generalizing the construction of the Stiefel-Whitney classes, the consideration of q - s + 1 sections in general position leads to the Chern classes c.(E) E H2~(M; Z), with 1 ~ s ~ q, which are cohomology classes with integer coefficients. These classes have the important property that they are expressible in the sense of the de Rham theory by exterior differential forms constructed geometrically. The basic idea is that of a connection or absolute differentiation. The sections (4) form a vector space which we denote by r(E). A connection is a map
D: r(E) -. r(E ® T* M),
(7)
i.e., a r(E)-valued linear differential form, satisfying the following conditions: (8) D(Sl + S2) = DS 1 + DS2,
D[h(x)s] = dh ® s + hDs,
(9)
where Sl, S2, s E r(E) and hex), with x E M, is a function on M. Such a connection always exists, even in the real analytic category. A connection has local invariants in the form of "curvature," measuring the noncommutativity of the differentiation so defined. To describe it we call a frame an ordered set of q sections Si, with 1 ~ i ~ q, such that Sl /\ ... /\ Sq 1= o. In a neighborhood U we consider a frame field Si(X), with x E U . Then we can write
(10) The matrix
(11)
w = (wi)
is a (q x q) matrix of one-forms and is called the connection matrix. Since any section is a linear combination of the sections of a frame, the connection D is completely determined by w. In an obvious matrix notation we write Eq. (10) as
(12)
Ds =ws. Let
Sl(X)
= g(x)s(x),
xEU
(13)
be a change of the frame field, with g( x) being a nonsingular (q x q) matrix of functions on U . By differentiating Eq. (13) and using the conditions (8) and (9) we get (14)
597 172
Shiing-shen Chern
where wI is the connection matrix relative to the frame field SI(x). Taking the exterior derivative of Eq. (14), we get gO = 01 g ,
(15)
O=dw-w/\w
(16)
where 1
and 0 has a similar expression in terms of wI. By definition 0 is a (q x q) matrix of two-forms and is called the curvature matrix. Equation (15) motivates us to consider the determinant det
(1 + 2~ 0) 1+ =
Cl(O)
+ .. . + cq(O),
(17)
so that Ci(O) is a 2i-form on U, with 1 ~ i ~ q, independent of the choice of the frame field . We take a covering {Ua } of M and define Ci(O) in each member of the covering. Equations (15) and (17) show that they agree in the intersection of any two neighborhoods of the covering. Hence Ci(O) is a 2i-form in M. Moreover, it is closed. By the de Rham theory it defines an element {Ci(On E H 2i (M ;IR) . A fundamental result, which is not hard to prove, says that {Ci(On is exactly the Chern class ci(E) introduced above. The form Ci(O) is called a Chern form. This analytical representation of ci(E), by curvature, has important developments. For details see [1] and [2]. The Pontrjagin classes can be expressed in terms of the Chern classes through the complexification of the real vector bundle.
Transgression When a characteristic form is pulled back in a bundle, it could happen that it becomes an exact form. Such a process is called transgression. It is clearly of great importance. My favorite example is the Gauss-Bonnet formula. Let M be a twodimensional oriented Riemannian manifold. To a unit tangent vector el at x E M there is a unique unit tangent vector e2 = er, so that xele2 is a frame. Let WI, W2 be its dual coframe. In the unit tangent bundle 7T : E
--+
M
(18)
the forms WI, W2 are well-defined. In fact, WI /\W2 is in M and is the element of area. There is a uniquely defined one-form W12 , the connection form, which satisfies the conditions
(19) expressing the fact that the connection has no torsion.
598 Characteristic Classes and Characteristic Forms
173
By taking the exterior derivatives of conditions (19), we find (20) where K is the Gaussian curvature. Equation (20) is of great importance. By Gauss-Bonnet 2~ {KWI t\ W2} represents the Euler class. Now Eq. (20) says that its pull-back in E can be further "integrated," giving the connection form. The equation gives the most natural proof of the Gauss-Bonnet formula, which generalizes to high dimensions. It has many other applications. Further transgression phenomena occur in the principal bundle or frame bundle. In Eq. (13) we let 9 run over all nonsingular (q x q) matrices, i.e., we consider all frames over M. The frame bundle P so obtained has the local coordinates (x, g) . In P, the connection form, to be called cp, is well-defined. By Eq. (14) it has the local expression (21) The curvature form (22) is also well-defined in P. By Eq. (17) we have t
Cl(
271" Since Tr(cp t\ cp) = 0, we get from Eq. (22),
(23) In other words, in P the first Chern form can be written explicitly as an exact form. Similarly, Eq. (17) gives
C2(
C~) 2{Cl(
Tr(
(24)
Exterior differentiation of Eq. (22) gives the Bianchi identity
dIP = cp t\
(25)
It follows that
d{Tr( cp t\ cp t\ cp)} = 3 Tr( cp t\ cp t\
CS(cp) = +3"Tr(cp t\ cp t\ cp) + Tr(cp t\
(26)
599 174
Shiing-shen Chern
Then we have dCS(rp) =
Tr(~ 1\ ~).
(27)
The fonn in Eq. (26) is called the Chern-Simons fonn. It transgresses the second Chern form in the frame bundle. This is a three-form defined without reference to a metric in M. For dimension reason it is closed if M is of dimension 3. The Chern-Simons form has played an important role in recent developments in theoretical physics (see [6]).
Holomorphic Line Bundles and the Nevanlinna Theory We consider the case q = 1, where the fiber is the complex line and the group GL(l; C) is abelian. The universal bundle (6) becomes (28) the latter being the complex projective space of dimension N. Denote by ZO, ZI, ... , Zn the coordinates in CN+1. Restricting the bundle to the unit sphere we get the Hopf fibering. For N = 2 this gives the famous Hopf map S3 --+ PI (C) = S2, the first example of a continuous map from a space to one of lower dimension, which is not homotopic to the constant map. To study the geometry o( the universal line bundle (28) we introduce in CN+! the hermitian inner product 11"0:
(Z, W) = zowo
+ ... + ZNWN,
(29)
where Z = (zo, . .. ,ZN),
W = (wo, ... , WN) E CN+1.
(30)
Let Zo E CN+! and let Zo, Zl, . .. , ZN be a unitary frame such that (31) The family of all unitary frames can be identified with the group U(N + 1). We can write
(32) where W AB are the Maurer-Cartan forms of U(N of Eq. (31) they satisfy the relations W AB
+ WBA
= 0,
WBA =
+ 1). As a consequence
wBA ·
(33)
600
175
Characteristic Classes and Characteristic Forms Exterior differentiation of Eq. (32) gives the Maurer-Cartan equations
(34) We suppose Zo E eN+! and the projection 11"0 in Eq. (28) be defined by sending it to the point of PN with Zo as its homogeneous coordinate vector. By Eq. (32) with A = 0, a connection in the bundle (28) can be defined by (35) DZo = wooZo. By our general theory its curvature is, by Eq. (34), (36) This gives a transgression in the line bundle, because the right-hand side is a two-form in PN . On the other hand, PN has the Kahler metric
(37) Its Kahler form is
i
1
2~wOk /I. WOk = 2i n.
(38)
Integrating over a complex projective line, we find
1 P1
1
-n=1. 211"i
We can say that the Poincare dual *{ 2;iw} is the hyperplane PN-l in PN. It follows that if an algebraic curve in PN is given by a holomorphic map
where Ml is a compact Riemann surface, we have
1 -2.
r
11"1 } f(M 1 )
n = Area[J(Md] = order.
(39)
In other words the order of an algebraic curve is identified with the area of the image of Ml under f . The transgression formula (36) allows this identification to be carried further . If Ml is a compact Riemann surface with boundary and n[f(Md n PN-d is the number of points of intersection of the image f(Md with a generic hyperplane PN-l, a simple application of Stokes Theorem to Eq. (36) expresses the difference n[J(M1)nPN-l]- area[f(Ml)] as an integral over the boundary. The boundary term involves the connection form woo'
601
176
Shiing-shen Chern
In the holomorphic category the connection form woo can be "integrated," so that Eq. (36) is sharpened to a double transgression formula. In fact, let Z E eN+! - {O} and
Zo =
Z TZi'
2
IZI = (Z, Z).
We have
Woo = (DZo, Zo) = (dZo, Zo) 1 = 21Z1 2 {(dZ, Z) - (Z, dZ)} = (8 - 8) log IZI.
~
It follows that
n=
d(8 - 8) log IZI = -288 log IZI.
(41)
This double transgression formula is the key to the so-called first main theorem in the Nevanlinna theory. The deep result in the Nevanlinna theory is contained in the second main theorem. From our viewpoint it is simply the double transgression formula applied to the canonical bundle. It deals with the question of the relation between intrinsic invariants and mapping invariants and is a generalization of the Riemann-Hurwitz and Plucker formulas. Recently the Nevanlinna theory gains attention because it can be seen as the limiting case of algebraic number theory. In fact, the second main theorem, properly generalized to arithmetic geometry, contains Roth's theorem on diophantine approximation and Faltings' theorem on the Mordell conjecture (see [5]). REFERENCES
1. S. Chern, Complex Manifolds without Potential Theory, Second edition, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1979. 2. S. Chern, Vector bundles with a connection, in Global Differential Geometry, Studies in Mathematics, Mathematical Association of America, 1989, Vol. 27, pp. 1-26. 3. C. Ehresmann, Sur la topologie de certains espaces homogimes, Annals Math. 35 (1934), 396-443. 4. N. Steenrod, The Topology of Fibre Bundles, Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1951. 5. Paul Vojta, Diophantine Approximation and Value Distribution Theory, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1987, Vol. 1239.
602 Characteristic Classes and Characteristic Forms
177
6. E. Witten, Quantum field theory and the Jones polynomial, in Braid Group, Knot Theory, and Statistical Mechanics, edited by C.N. Yang and M.L. Ke, World Scientific, Singapore, 1989, pp. 239-329. Mathematical Sciences Research Institute 1000 Centennial Drive Berkeley, CA 94720
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, t. 314, Skrie I, p. 757-761, 1992
757
Giomttrie difftrentielIelDiJ"erentia1Geometry
On Finsler geometry Shiing-Shen CHERN Abstract - A new connection is introduced in a Finsler space, solving at the same time the problem of equivalence. I n terms of this connection the curvature is divided into two parts, to be called the Minkowski and the Riemannian curvature respectively. A formula for the second variation of the arc length is derived, which involves only the Riemannian curvature.
Sur la geomitrie finslerienne RPsumi
- On inrroduit une connexion nouvelle dans un espace de Finsler. qui rCsour el7 mPme temps
le probl2me de l't?quivalence. Dans cetre connexion lo courbure se parrage oi deuv parries, direr respecriuemenr la courbure de Minkowski el celle de Riemann. On rrouve une fornlule pour la seconde variorion de Ihrc, qui ne cotitienf que lo courbure riemannienne.
Version frangaise abrigie - Une connexion euclidienne pour un espace de Finsler a t t t introduite par Elie Cartan en 1934. Pour rtsoudre le nroblkme de l'kquivalence on trouve avantageux de prendre comme base I'espace des klkments lineaires et de considkrer une connexion dans cet espace. Ce traitement contient le cas riemannienn En gtnkral la courbure se partage en deux parties, respectivement la courbure de Minkowski et celle de Riemann. L'espace est riemannien si et seulement si la courbure de Minkowski s'annule. On dtduit des equations de structure une formule pour la seconde variation de I'arc, qui est de mime forme que dans le cas riemannien. Comme la seconde variation a jouk un r81e important en geomitrie riemannienne globale, il serait intkressant d'ktudier les problkmes analogues dans le cas finslerien gtntral.
1. The geometry based on the element of arc
(1)
~ S = F ( X ' ,. . .,x",dxl,
. . .,d.\n),
where F is positively homogeneous of degree 1 in drl('), went back to Riemann himself. As a result of Finsler's thesis in 1918, it is now called Finsler geometry. From the point of view of differential geometry the most significant result was Cartan's definition of an euclidean connection in 1934. Extensive and deep work was done by H. Busemann by a purely geometric approach. I propose to give a definition of a connection and curvature, which are natural generalizations of corresponding concepts in Riemannian geometry. Taking the place of the sectional curvature is the notion of flag curvature, to be defined below. The treatment is so simple and natural that the Riemannian restriction seems to be only a habit. In particular, we derive a formula for the second variation of the arc-length which is a replica of the Riemannian formula. This seems to open the way to Finsler manifolds of positive or negative curvature and to comparison and pinching theorems. It is possible that the generality of the metric gives the flexibility suitable for applications. This is already the case with the Caratheodory and Kobayashi metrics in complex analysis, which are Finsler metrics. I am inclined to think that if a metric is introduced on a stratified manifold, it will be more natural to have a Finsler one. Note prtsentie par Shiing-Shen CHERN.
758
C. R. Acad. &i,.b&,
t. 314, SCrie I, p. 757-761, 1992
2. Local Finsler geometry is basically very simple if we put ourselves from the point of view of the equivalence problem: To decide when two Finsler metncs differ by a change of coordinates. Denote by M our manifold and by TM and T*M its tangent and cotangent bundles. Let PTM be the projectivized tangent bundle (=bundle of line elements), whose "points" are the equivalence classes of non-zero tangent vectors differing from each other by a factor. The projection p : PTM + M induces a bundle p* TM i.PTM. A connection in this bundle will be introduced. We put dxi= yidt. The element of arc in (1) defines the form
+
o = F (xi,yi) dt hi (dxi-yidt), where hi are arbitrary.
By imposing the condition
(2)
d o = 0 mod dxi -yi dt,
we find Ai = aF/ayi and
(3)
w = Fi dxi.
Here and later, subscripts to F denote partial differentiations with respect to the yi. The form o is known as Hilbert's invariant integral. It is a Pfaffian form in PTM, since yi can be considered homogeneous coordinates in PTM and Fi is homogeneous of degree zero in 9. Let T, and T,* be respectively the tangent and cotangent spaces to M at x. The Y =yi (a/axi)~ p T,. * Its dual space p* T: is spanned by the annihilator Y' and o. We choose a basis o' in p* T,: such that on= o and omspan YL, so that onis defined up to a linear transformation. Condition (2) can be written don= 0 mod om, which gives don= ouA o:. On the other hand, we have dou= onA mi mod oe LEMMA.- There exists AuB= ABusuch that o:+ Ampo! =0 mod oY. The quadratic differential form
ouo h
=
(i
F 2 ) d 2 dx' ij
is well-defined in P T M . In the Riemannian case we have F Z = g i j ( xyiy', ) and we recover in (4) the quadratic differential form gij(x)dxidx'. In the general case the form in (4) depends on Y . It defines in p*T, and p*T: an inner product. We now make the HYPOTHESIS. - The form in (4) is positive definite. REGULARITY Thus it makes sense to talk about orthonormal coframes. Supposing mi orthonormal, we have
(5)
A,,= 6,,.
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, t. 314, SCrie I, p. 757-761, 1992
759
We shall call these the preferred coframes. Their space P is of dimension (n- l ) ( n - 2 ) / 2 + 2 n - 1 = n ( n + 1)/2. The fundamental theorem on the existence of a connection is: THEOREM 1. - Tlzere exists in P a uniquely determined set of Pfaflian forms satisfy the equations doi = A oj, (6)
I
4, which
w~+~~~w',=O, Sayogl+8prW: = - HaPp onP.
The forms w! define a connection in P. It solves the equivalence problem in the following sense: The forms mi, a!, i<j, are linearly independent and constitute a multiplicative basis of the algebra of exterior differential forms in P. Let F* (x*', dx*') be another Finsler metric whose corresponding quantities we denote by asterisks. Then the two Finsler metrics are locally equivalent, if and only if there is a local diffeomorphism between P and P* such that o*.j 1 '
Scalar invariants, to be called the curvature, are obtained from the exterior differentiaiion of these equations. THEOREM 2. - The Finsler metric is Riemannian, if and only if Hmpp=O. The forms
o ) then define the Levi-Civita connection. We find the structure equations (7)
do;
= oijA CO; 4
a;,
where
and
(9) R;jl + R,tlj= 0, Pitla= Plkia. These equations have several distinctive features: '1. There are no quadratic terms in a:; 2. By exterior differentiation of (7), i. e., by the Bianchi identities, one can show that P!,, can be expressed in terms of the covariant derivatives of Hap,; 3. P,: is zero whenever two of the Latin indices are equal to n. 3. Let e, be the frame in p*T,, which is dual to the coframe ok. The connection is defined by (10)
Dei= oF@ek.
The analytical conditions in Theorem 1 can be interpreted geometrically by the properties. 1. The connection is without torsion; 2. The inner products (e,, en) are preserved; 3. The inner products (e,, e,) are preserved when en is transported parallelly. We put
(1 1)
Rap= 6ay RnYnp.
Then Ram,as a function on PTM, is the Ricci curvature. More generally, if b=b"ea, the quantity
(12)
R ( b ) = - Rapb"b,
606 760
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, t. 314, Serie I, p. 757-761, 1992
is a function of the flag {x, en, en A b }; we will call it the flag curvature. This is a natural generalization of the sectional curvature since in the Riemannian case it depends only on the plane element {x, b A en} and is the sectional curvature. Thus the curvature splits into two parts, the Riemannian curvature R/ jl and H"pp, which we will call the Minkowski curvature. It is the flag curvature which plays an important role in variational problems in Finsler geometry . One finds evidence in the first and second variations of the arc length . In fact, map into P a (I, T)-unit square, so that its projection into M gives a family of curves with the parameter I, T being the parameter of the family. Supposing en be the unit tangent vectors to the curves, we can write, by pullback, (13)
00" = a" dl + b" dT,
00' = b" dT,
wi = a{ dt+ b{ dT . The length of the curve T is (14)
L(T)=
f:
andl.
The expressions (13) satisfy the structure equations (6), giving in particular aan ab n = +b"a~ . a't al It follows that the first variation of the arc length is (15)
8s= aL ('t) a't
I
1
=bnl
<=0
0
+
r b"a: dt. Jo 1
Hence the geodesics are characterized by the condition geodesics are defined by the differential system (16) OO"=OOp"=O.
a~ =
O.
In other words, the
To derive the second vanatIon we consider a family of geodesics, so that Making use of (6), we have the formula n 2 (17) a 2L ('t)=ab +b"b:ll+ rl{(b~)2-R(b)}a"dt.
~
~
0
a~ =
O.
Jo
This is the same formula as in the Riemannian case, with the sectional curvature replaced by the flag curvature, the Minkowski curvature playing no role. A crucial property for (17) to be valid is the analytical fact that p/ 1" is zero when two of its Latin indices are equal to n . This has the consequence that the P's do not appear in the second variation. Indications are that Finsler manifolds whose flag curvature keeps a constant sign will be an interesting subject for study. Added June 28 , 1991. - Dr. Patrick Foulon kindly infonned me that some of the results of this Note, including the notion of flag curvature (which he calls Jacobi endomorphism) and the formula for the second variation of the arc length, overlap with his in his work on dynamical systems. On the other hand, the main calculations were carried out in [2], a long·ignored paper published 43 years ago . The purpose of this Note is to call attention to the fact that the foundations of Finsler geometry and perhaps the behavior of its geodesics are not much different from Riemannian geometry, if properly treated. Needless to say, other questions, such as the expression of characteristic classes by curvature forms and the notion of volume, are more subtle in Finsler geometry and deserve further study. Also important are the complex Finsler spaces, which should playa role in several complex variables, as the Caratheodory and Kobayashi metrics of a domain are Finsler metrics. For a recent work, c/. J. J. Faran V, Hermitian Finsler metrics and the Kobayashi metric, J . DifJ. Geom., 31, 1990, pp. 601-625.
607 C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, t. 314, Serie I, p. 757-761, 1992
761
For Foulon's work, cf Nouveaux invariants geometriques des systemes dynamiques du second ordre, These d'Etat, 1986 and Geometrie des equations differentielles du second ordre, Ann. Inst. Henri Poincare , 45, 1986, pp. I-28. (I) Throughout this Note we shall agree that small Latin indices run from I to n and small Greek indices run from 1 to n - I and that repeated indices imply summation.
Note remise Ie 21 juin 1991, acceptee Ie 23 juin 1991.
REFERENCES
[I] E. CARTAN , Les espaces de Finsler, Actualites 79, Paris, 1934. [2] S.-S. CHERN, Local equivalence and euclidean connections in Finsler spaces, Sci. Rep. Nat. Tsing Hua Univ., Ser. A5, 1948, pp. 95-121, or, Selected Papers, II, Springer 1989, pp. 194-212. [3] H. RUND, The Differential Geometry of Finsler Spaces, Springer, 1959. Mathematical Sciences Research Institute, 1000 Centennial Drive, Berkeley, CA 94720.
608 CHINESE JOURNAL OF PHYSICS
VOL. 30, NO. 7
DECEMBER 1992
Yang-Mills Equations and Yang-Baxter Equations t Shiing-Shen Chern Mathematical Sciences Research Institute, University of California at Berkeley, Berkeley, CA 94720, U.SA. (Received October 20, 1992)
I. SIXTY-PLUS YEARS OF FRIENDSHIP I first saw Chen-Ning in the fall of 1930 when I joined the Peiping campus of this university as an assistant of the mathematics department. The department was small, consisting of four professors, two instructors, and myself as the only assistant. Chen-Ning's father, Professor K. C. Yang, was the algebraist in the department and I visited his house from time to time. There I saw Chen-Ning, a boy of 8, while I was 19. We must have talked to each other, but the contact was minimal. On several occasions Professor Yang told us stories about the inquisitive nature of Chen-Ning as a school boy, which created an impression. Because of the war the University moved to Changsha in 1937 and to Kunming in 1938. I joined the faculty after a study abroad for three years and he became a student. He took my course of differential geometry around 1940, followed by seminars on more advanced topics. I was struggling in learning Elie Cartan. I realized the central role to be played by the notion of a connection and wrote several papers associating a connection to a given geometrical structure. I am happy to say that connections have been involved in the works of both of us. In preparing for this talk I tried to learn something about Yang's works. The physics is, and has always been, hard for me. I wish to report what I have learnd, from the point of view of a mathematician.
II. YANG-MILLS EQUATIONS These are partial differential equations in a complex vector bundle over a four dimensional Riemannian or Lorenzian manifold. The unknown function is a connection ( = gauge potential). Denote the manifold by M and suppose for simplicity that it is Riemannian. Let (1)
7r:E-M
be a bundle of complex vector spaces of dimension q, and suppose its group be U(q) or SU(q). t Invited paper presented at the International Symposium in Honor of Professor C. N. Yang's 70th Birthday, July 10-11,
1992, National Tsing Hua University, Hsinchu, Taiwan, R.O.C. 949
101992 THE PHYSICAL SOCIETY OF THE REPUBLIC OF CHINA
609 950
YANG-MILLS EQUATIONS AND YANG-BAXTER EQUATIONS
VOL. 30
Analytically a connection is defined by a matrix w
= (W!),
1 ::; i , j ::;
(2)
1] ,
of linear differential forms. The matrix w is skew-hermitian, i.e., w
+ tw
tw
= 0,
= conjugate transpose of
(3)
w
as the bundle group is U(q) . It has the additional property (4)
Tl'W = 0,
if the group is SU(q). The connection allows us to define the covariant differentiation of vector fields ~i by 1 ::; i, j ::; q
(5)
In a standard way it also defines the covariant differentiation of tensor fields of the bundle (1); cf. Refs. 1 and 3. The connection matrix w is defined up to the transformation W
-t
Wi
= dgg- 1 + gwg- 1 ,
(6)
where g is a non-singular matrix, which describes the change of the local basis in terms of which E is coordinatized. Taking the exterior derivative of (6), we get
(7) where n=dw-w/l.w
(8)
and Q' is similarly defmed in terms of w· . Q is a (q x q)-matrix of two-forms, defined up to the transformation (7). It is called the curvature ( = strength) of the connection. (In the physics literature w, Q are denoted by A, F respectively). By (7) Tr(Q
/I. Q)
is a 4-form in M .
Suppose M is compact. It is a result in characteristic classes that the number -1, k = -
8;r-
1 M
Tl·(n /I. n)
(9)
is an integer and is an invariant of the bundle. This is a special case of the so-called Chern-Weil theory, which gives invariants of the bundle which are expressible by local data. Such invariants are rare and are useful in applications. Since M is Riemannian, the Hodge *-operator is defined, and we introduce the Yang-Mills functional
610 VOL. 30
Y 111 =
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
IInl12 =
JMr Tl,(n 1\ *n).
-
951
(10)
The Yang-Mills equations are the Euler-Lagrange equations of this functional. They can be written Dn= 0,
D
*n =
0,
(11)
where D is the covariant differential applied to the tensorial differential form Q in E . It should be remarked that the first equation is the so-called Bianchi identity, which follows from the exterior differentiation of (8). When current is present, the second equation of (11) has a second member;ot O. When q = 1, the Yang-Mills equations become the Maxwell equations, cf [2] . In this case the group is U(I), which is abelian. Since *2 = 1, Q splits:
n = n+ +n- ,
(12)
where
* n+ = n+,
(13)
It follows that
Now (9) can be written
It follows that
(14)
For a given k, YM reaches a minimum if
*n =
(sgn k)n .
(15)
In this case the connection is called self-dual or anti-self dual or an instanton, Notice that the sign of k depends on the orientation of M, A crucial question is therefore to find the instantons, i.e., solutions of the equations (15), or, more generally, to determine the space of all instantons over a given M and with a given integer k. This study leads to a remarkable result in differential topology, owing to a theorem of S. K. Donaldson. Consider the space of instantons over M, with k = 1. With the exception of some
611 YANG-MILLS EQUATIONS AND YANG-BAXTER EQUATIONS
952
VOL. 30
singularities this is a five dimensional manifold with M as a boundary. From this one derives the curious phenomenon on the existence of fake differentiable structures on R 4 , the 4-dimensional number space. It is known that R n , 11 ;to 4, has only one differentiable sturcture, the standard one. But there are Rfake4 , which are homeomorphic, but not diffeomorphic, to R4. In fact, Gompf and Taubes proved that there is a two-parameter family of such structures. A strange 4
property of RCake is: There is a compact set C in sphere surrounding it.
RCake
4
so that there is no smoothly embedded
III. YANG-BAXTER EQUATIONS * In 1967, in studying integrable problems in quantum mechanics, Yang wrote down the matrix equation
A(u)B(u + v)A(v) = B(v)A(u + v)B(u)
(16)
and gave an explicit solution in whichA(u) and B(u) are rational functions of u. This equation was also found by Baxter in 1972 when he studied a different integrable problem in classical statistical mechanics. In the last ten years, equation (16) has been extensively studied and has been named the Yang-Baxter equation. We remark that if A(u) and B(u) are independent of u , then (16) becomes
ABA = BAB.
(17)
This is the fundamental equation of Artin's theory of the braid group, an important out-growth of knot theory. Another body of results consists of generalizations of the following theorem of Weierstrass: If the function/(u) is meromorphic on the entire complex plane and satisfies a functional equation of the form
P(J(u).J(v).J(u
+ v»)
= 0,
(18)
where P is a non-zero polynomial, then / is either elliptic or rational or has the form
612 VOL 30
SHIING-SHEN CHERN
953
The Yang-Mills and Yang-Baxter equations are of such mathematical interest that they will occupy mathematicians for years· to come.
IV. APOEM
Old Master Maxwell, in electro-magnetism eminent; Young Master Yang invents the gauge theory, Searching indefatigably the Universe's mysteryOf our illustrious Yellow Race, the supreme talent.
REFERENCES 1. M. Atiyah, Collected Works, Vol. 5, Gauge Theories, Oxford, 1988. 2. S. S. Chern, Vector bundles with a connection, Global Differential Geometry, Math. Ass. of America, 1989, pp. 23-25. 3. Daniel S. Freed and Karen K. Uhlenbeck, Instantons and Four-manifolds, MSRI Publications, Vol. 1, 2nd edition, Springer, 1991. 4. M. limbo (Editor), Yang-Baxter Equation in Integrable Systems, World Scientific, 1989.
613 HOUSTON JOURNAL OF MATHEMATICS Volume 19. No . 1. 1993
ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
DAVID BAD AND
5 .5.
CHERN*
ABSTRACT . This paper explores the merits of a special connection in Finsler geometry which solves the equivalence problem. This connection is torsionfree and 'almost' compatible with the induced metric. We develop the calculus of geodesics and Jacobi fields . We also show that the expression for the second variation of arc length, when expressed in terms of this connection and its curvature tensor, is formally identical to that in Riemannian geometry. This fact then effects a straightforward generalization of the concept of sectional curvature, as well as a number of comparison theorems, to Finsler geometry.
1. Introduction and preliminaries. Let M be an n-dimensional manifold. It is said to be a Finsler space if the length of any given curve t 1-+ (x1(t), ... , xn(t)), t S b, is given by an integral
as
dx dxn Jor F(Xl, ... , Xn; Tt' ..., dt )dt , 1
b
(1.1 )
where the function F(x 1, ... , Xn; yl, ... , yn) is non-negative, and has the value zero only if yi = 0 for all i. Besides a regularity criterion that we will impose later, F is also assumed to be homogeneous of degree one in the following sense:
(1.2)
F(xl, ... ,xn;).yl, ... ,).yn)
= 1).IF(x1, ... ,xn;yl, ... ,yn) ,
). E JR.
Important examples of Finsler spaces include the following: (1) Riemann spaces, where
(1.3) ·Research partially supported by NSF Grant DMS 1-443964-21795 135
614 136
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
It may be of interest to remark that Riemann's 1854 'Habilitationsvortrag' dealt with the general case and was not under the restriction (1.3). (2) Minkowski spaces, where
(1.4)
F(XI, ... , xn; yl, ... , yn) = F(yl, ... , yn) does not involve xi.
Throughout the paper, our index conventions are as follows: lower case Latin indices (except the alphabet n) run from 1 to n, lower case Greek indices run from 1 to n-1, vector indices are up, co-vector indices are down, any repeated pair of indices-provided that one is up and the other is down-is automatically summed; the raising and lowering of indices is done by a metric that we will soon specify. To keep the notation simple, we will not distinguish between indices relative to a coordinate basis and those relative to an orthonormal frame, such is made clear by the context. The homogeneity condition (1.2) holds in particular for positive>. 'so Therefore, by Euler's theorem, we have (1.5a) Throughout this paper, Flli denotes ::. (higher order partial derivatives are denoted similarly) and, unless specified otherwise, is evaluated at the point (Xl, .. . , Xn; yl, ... , yn). Successive differentiation ::If (1.5a) with respect to y (as above, we abbreviate partial derivatives by subscripts) yields: (1.5b)
. . -- 0 YiF,lI'y'
,
(1.5c)
(l.5d) and so forth. Another consequence of (1.2) is that the length of a Curve is independent of its parametrization.
615 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
137
Let T M (resp. T· M) be the tangent (resp. cotangent) bundle over M, and T:r:M (resp. T; M) its fiber at x EM. T;r:M and T; M have dual bases {a~.} and {dxk}, so that k
(1.6)
0
k
(dx ) ( ~) = 6 i vX'
.
A vector of T;r:M can be written as y = yi a~. and we can use (Xi , yi ) as local coordinates in T M . Two such local coordinates (Xi, Yi) and (x· k , y. k) are related by the transformation
(1.7)
x .k
= X .k (X,1 ... , x n) ,
y .k
8
.k
= -x8 . yi x'
,
from which we have
(1.8) It follows that the I-form
(1.9) and the symmetric covariant 2-tensor . . (1.10) 9 = gijdx'®dx J :=
1
('2 F
2
..
.
.
)lhjdx'®dxJ = (FFlI' lIi+FlI,Fyj )dx'®dxJ
are intrinsically defined on TM. From (1.10) and (1.5), one finds that
(1. 11 a)
Yig ij = FFyi,
yiyjg"J'
= F2
and
(1.11b)
i Ogij 0 y--k= , oy
kogij y oyk
0
= .
Of importance to our treatment is the projectivized tangent bundle PTM obtained from TM by identifying its non-zero vectors which differ
616 138
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
from each other by a multiplicative factor. Geometrically PT M is the manifold of the line elements of M. As its local coordinates we can take (xi, yi) where (yl, .. ., y") # (0, ... ,0) are now homogeneous coordinates. Thus, local calculations on PT M can be performed conveniently on T M using all the yi 's (i = 1, ... , n), provided that the result is invariant under the scaling y -+ AY, A # O. Since Fyi is homogeneous of degree zero in y, the form w in (1.9) lives in PT M. In classical calculus of variations it is called Hilbert's invariant integral; we will call it the Hilbert form. Similarly, the metric tensor 9 in (1.10) also lives in PTM . In fact, the same is true of other geometrical quantities such as the special connection and its curvature that we will subsequently derive from F, even though the function F itself is defined on TM but not on PTM. Note that we are led to PTM, as opposed to the sphere bundle (equivalently, T M without its zero section), by the stipulation that (1.2) be valid for all A, rather than for positive A 's only. We would like to briefly justify this stipulation. Let us define the distance d(P, Q) between two points P and Q on M to be the infimum of the lengths of curves which connect these points. If (1.2) were to fail for A :5 0, then d(P, P) would in general not be zero, and d(P, Q) would likely differ with d(Q, P). FUrthermore, we will in section 4 need the fact that the reverse of a geodesic a(t) with velocity T(t) is again a geodesic. As shown there, the proof reduces essentially to the following question: Is the value of the connection at the point (a, T) in T M the same as that at the point (a, -T) ? Of course, such is automatically true if the connection lives on PTM. A more detailed argument is given at the beginning of section 4. Let 11": PT M -+ M be the canonical projection map 11" (xi ,yi) = (xi) . Using 11", the tangent bundle T M pulls back to a n-dimensional vector bundle 1I"·TM over the (2n-l)-dimensional manifold PTM. We would like to describe the geometry of this vector bundle, using the method of moving frames. Over each point (x, y) of PT M, the fibre of 1I"·T M has a basis {8~'} and a metric 9 given by (1.10). The regularity assumption (which we previously alluded to) on F is then: (1.12)
9(:z:,y) (P,p)
:=
that is, the metric 9
(9ij)(:z:,I/)
pipi >
°
unless (PI, ... ,p") = (0, ...,0) ;
= 9(:z:,1/) is positive-definite.
We shall list below some
617 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
139
immediate consequences of (1.12); complete proofs can be found in Rund [20]. We begin with the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality (which follows from (1.12)) (1.13) where equality holds iff p and q are collinear. Double contract (1.10) with p; to the quantity (Fyi pi)2 we apply the first part of (LIla), (1.13) , then the second part of (LIla) , and find that (1.14)
(Fy ' y ,
kr,y)
pirJ ~ 0 , and
= 0 only if p and y are collinear ;
in other words, the matrix (Fy ' y ') is positive semi-definite with rank n - 1, and its I-dimensional null-space is spanned by y. Expanding F( x, p) in terms of F(x, y) up to second order, namely
o < € < 1, and applying (1.14), we see that for
each fixed x, the graph of
F(x, y) is a convex function of the variable y : (1.15a) Simplifying the left hand side with Euler's theorem (1.5) gives the following fundamental inequality (1.15b) where equality holds iff p and y are collinear. Such an inequality will later play an important role in our proof that geodesics in a Finsler space minimize distance locally. In the meantime, we would like to point out that in the Riemannian case (1.3), where the metric 9 does not depend on y, (1.15b) reduces to 9(z)(P, y) :5 J9(z)(P,P)J9(z)(Y, y), which is 'half' of the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality (1.13). Finally, from (1.15b) one Can deduce the triangle inequality -
(1.16)
F(x,p+ q) :5 F(x,p) + F(x,q) .
618 140
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
Again, equality holds iff p and q are collinear. Let {ei} be a local orthonormal (with respect to g) frame field for the vector bundle 7r'TM such that
=
(1.17)
yi 0 F(x, y) ox i
.
Let {wi} be its dual co-frame field . The wi's are local sections of the dual bundle 7r' T' M. One readily finds that (1.18) which is the Hilbert form given in (1.9). We observe that along a curve Xi = xi(t) , with yi = dtt', Euler's theorem (1.5) allows us to rewrite the
J:
n integral (1.1) as w . Starting with a given F, our geometrical setup has the following number of essential variables: 2n-1 from the local coordinates (xi, yi) of PTM, and ~(n-l)(n-2) from the freedom to specify the remaining vectors e1, ... , en -1 in our orthonormal frame. So far, the number of linearly independent Pfaffian forms depending on these variables (and F) is n, namely the wi'S . It follows that we need to find (n-1)+~(n-1)(n-2) more, for then by a theorem of E. Cartan's [6], one can decide in a finite number of steps whether the two sets of Pfaffian forms corresponding to F(x, y) and F' (x· , y') are equivalent under a transformation of the essential variables. This information in turn decides whether F and F· will transform into each other under a diffeomorphism between x and x·; see Chern ([9], [10]) . In the next section, we shall produce these (n-1)+~(n-1)(n-2) extra Pfaffian forms as a special choice of connection I-forms for our co-frame field wi .
2. A special connection and its structural equations. In this section, we shall recall (from Chern [9]) a torsion-free connection which is not entirely compatible with the metric 9 defined in (1.10) . However, we shall see from this section on that it has retained, in some sense, just the right amount of metric-compatibility to let us carry out certain basic Riemannian geometry calculations in Finsler spaces. The curvature of this connection is also quite remarkable. It has only a P part and
619 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
141
a R part; we will see that in all the specific computations where this curvature is called upon, the P part eventually drops out, while the R part (when contracted with the 'appropriate' vectors) exhibits all the symmetries and skew-symmetries of the classical Riemann-Christoffel curvature tensor. Let us express our frame and co-frame fields as (2.1a) equivalently, (2.1b) This shows that wi and ej may be regarded, respectively, as I-forms and vector fields on PT M even though they are strictly speaking local sections of certain n-dimensional co-vector and vector bundles over PT M. Equations (1.17) and (1.18) give u nl
(2.2) Duality says that
hence
(2.3)
i Uk vk).
= Uj. J:i
Orthonormality amounts to (2.4a) which, when given (2.3), is equivalent to (2.4b)
v
k ~ i ukl
v
I
j
=
gij
,
and (2.4c)
Uj
I
=
i kl hji V k 9
Also, (2.2) and (2.3) imply that
(2.5)
v\ = .
b
i)"
I Uj glk.
620 DAVID BAO AND S.S. CHERN
142
while (1.10), (2.2), and (2.4) imply that (2.6)
We now compute. Differentiating (1.18) and repeatedly using Euler's theorem (1.5) on both F and Fzi, we find that (2.7)
where the I-forms
w/
can be chosen as
(2.8)
wOrn (2.9)
The arbitrary parameters )..Or{3 are symmetric in the two lower indices and will be fixed later. Next, differentiate wOr as expressed in (2.1). Using (2.3) and (2.5), one finds that
(2.10)
The parameters J-lOr{3"1 are arbitrary and symmetric in the two lower indices, and will be determined later along with the )..Or{3 's. The ~i 's are also arbitrary but we shall fix them now by demanding that the I-forms wnOr and wOrn be negatives of each other, that is,
(2.lla) put another way,
(2.llb)
w Or n
= _6 Or {3wt:/n "
• '
621 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
143
One can check that this is achieved by the choices (2.12)
(2.13) The
wrt in (2.10) are then determined as W{30 --
(2.14)
VO k du {3k
-
vCOCT(U CTiu (3kFyk;z;J
+ /lCT{3 \ )w n +
J-L0{3~,"'" " . '/ .
The connection I-forms w/ satisfy the torsion-free condition because (2.7) and (2.10) collectively say that (2 .15) We emphasize that d here means exterior differentiation on PT M . So far, the matrix of connection I-forms, namely (w/), has skew-symmetric last row and last column, as evident from (2.8) and (2.11). We shall now choose the parameters AO{3 and J-L0{3/ such that the remaining (n-l) x (n-1) block of the matrix (w/) is 'almost' skew-symmetric; specifically, we want wpCT+wcrp , that is, wpoOocr + wcrooop, to be a linear combination of the wn o 's. To this end, let us apply d (on PTM) to the first equation in (2 .6), contract the resulting equation twice with u, into this we substitute what one gets by differentiating (2.3); the result is (2.16) Using (2.16) and (2.14), one finds that
wpcr
+ wCTP = - ujupi[d(FFyiyi) + (Fyi;z;i + Fyi;z;i )w n] -
(2.17) Let us write (2.18)
+ (oocrJ-L°p/ + OopJ-L°cr/)w/
.
2ApcrWn
622 144
DAVID BAO AND S.S. CHERN
where both Kijo and Giil are symmetric in i, j; their explicit formulas will be given later in this section. One can now check (for details, see Chern [9]) that with the choices (2 .19)
(2.20) equation (2.17) can be reduced to (2.21) with
(2.22a) which is totally symmetric. We shall call Hebe the Minkowski potential. If we now observe that, on account of (2.2) and (l.l1b), (2.22b)
Hebe
is zero whenever any of its three indices has the value n ,
then (2.11) and (2.21) combine to give
-H"1 k"w J ni
(2.23)
.
Having specified>. in (2.19), we rewrite the formula for won, namely (2 .9), as
won = -u o FI/oy.dyk $
(2.24a)
+ u; [~~FI/I:(Gr.!n + Fyrzo
-~(G.kn + FI/oz. -
- FI/ozr)
k Fyl:zo)]dx .
623 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
145
As we shall see below, this can be more compactly re-expressed as (2.24b)
wQ
n
d k F d k] = -u s [9F t aGt ayk X + y'yk Y s
Q
,
where
G .- ~F2 2 '
(2.25a)
(2.25b)
GI
(2.25c) Formula (2.24b) follows from (2.24a) because of (2.5) and the identity
We shall obtain (2.26) as a by-product of the formulas for the coefficients Ki j Q and Gijl in (2.18). To derive the latter, substitute (2.24a) into (2.18) and contract with ~ and el respectively; then, using (2.1) - (2.6), it is not difficult to find that: (2.27a) that is, (2 . 27b)
y;) Q( 'F F 2 F. i kg kl) K ij Q= -v QI 9 Ik Fo(FFyi oyk = -v I y 11'11; + lI ll;lI ;
624 146
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
and Gijl
=
(P:z:kFy' y; + PFy.y;:z:k)U/
+ (yS PY ' y; + p2 Pyiy;yrgrs) [~~ bnl(Gksn -
Fy.:z:k
+ Pyk:z:.)
(2.28a)
where (2.28b) Using (2 .28b) and (2.25), it is straightforward to verify (2.26). As remarked before, (2.24b) then follows. Now that we have gotten (2.24b), we can use it (instead of (2.24a» to re-calculate the coefficients G ijl . Specifically, substitute (2.24b) into (2.18) and contract with el, the result is: (2 .28c) in particular, by (2.2) , (2.28d) Before we compute the curvature 2-forms, let us briefly discuss the significance of formula (2.23) . Let V denote covariant differentiation (of sections of tensor products of 7r*T M and 7r*T* M), on PTM, relative to the connection Then
w/
(2.29) and, along any tangent vector
tI,
one finds (with the help of (2.23» that
625 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
147
In other words, g(e n , ek) and g(ei, en) are covariantly constant in all directions, whereas g(e p , e a ) is covariantly constant only along those directions v which satisfy wna(v) = 0, that is, when en is parallely displaced. Thus, our torsion-free connection does exhibit a great deal of metric-compatibility; we will see later that it has just the right amount of such to effect the generalization of a good number of tools from Riemannian geometry to Finsler spaces. Furthermore, from (2.23) we see that the linearly independent entries in the matrix (w/) are w! and w! (0' < f3), which number exactly (n-1)+~(n-1)(n-2); since by construction these are also linearly independent (though not functionally independent) from the wi's, therefore together they can be used to solve the equivalence problem described at the end of section 1. Finally, from (1.10) and (2.22a), we see that the metric 9 is Riemannian (that is, independent of y) if and only if the Minkowski potential Hikj is zerG, and in that case the connection reduces to the usual Levi-Civita connection (pulled back from M onto PT M). In sum, the connection here, as characterized by (2.15) and (2.23), may be viewed as a natural analogue, in the Finsler setting, of the Levi-Civita connection of Riemannian geometry. Our work in sections 3-5 will further corroborate this belief. Differentiating (2.15) yields
w/
w/
o·,
(2.31) this says that the curvatures r'I i ._ Hk'-
(2.32)
dw
k
i
which are 2-forms on PT M, do not involve w na Aw! type terms, and hence can be expressed as (2.33)
r'lki H =
'12 R ki jlW j
Aw
I
+
Pk i jaW j
A 1\
wna .
Let us comment on the conventions and normalizations used in these structural equations:
(i) The minus sign in (2.32) indicates that the group action on the bundle 7r·T M is implicitly taken as a left action.
626 148
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
(ii) The R in (2.33) is -2 times the R in Chern [9]; the change is made here in order to agree with the conventions of Spivak [21] and, Cheeger and Ebin [8]. In this paper, wi 1\ wi := wi ® wi - wi ® wi. (iii) The P in (2.33) is, except for the a index written as a subscript, numerically the same as that in Chern [9]. In (2.33), we will suppose without loss of generality that (2.34)
also, (2.31) and (2.33) imply a Bianchi identity (2.35)
and the following symmetry on the first and third indices of P, (2.36)
More can be deduced about R and P. For such purpose, let us apply d to (2.23), use (2.32) and (2.8), and get (2.37)
where C\7H)kio:
(2.38)
= dHkio -
s s Hsiowk - Hksowi - HkisWos
= : Lkio/3 w!
+ Qkios W
S
is the I-form-valued (k, i, a)th component of the covariant derivative of the Minkowski potential Hiki. From (2.38) it is immediate that (2.39) (2.40)
Qnios =
o.
Substituting (2.33) and (2.38) into (2.37) shows that: L is symmetric in the indices a and f3; in addition, (2.41 )
627 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
149
In particular, when k is fixed as n, (2.42) Rnisl
+
Rinsl : = R! slDji
+
R/s1Djn
=
0 (hence Rnnsl
0)
and, (2.34), (2.35), (2.42) then give (2.43)
Rknnl = Rlnnk;
equivalently, Rnknl
Rnlnk.
Also, one finds that (2.44) this, together with (2.36), suggests that the quantity P kiso is algebraically similar to the following Christoffel symbols of the first kind in Riemannian geometry, namely {iks} := (9ik,s - 9ks,i+9si,k)' Imitating the usual derivation of the formula for {iks}, that is, applying (2.44) to the combination (Pkiso + Pikso) - (Pskio + P ksio ) + (Pisko + P siko ), leads to an intennediate formula for Pkiso which, in conjunction with (2.39) and (2.40), imply that
!
(2.45a)
P nino
= 0,
and then (2.45b) consequently one finds that 1
Pkiso =
(2.45c) where
Hpqr
·
4[Hi/Qjson -
. Hks'Qjion
1 - 2"[Qikos - Qksoi
.
+ Hs/Qikon]
+ Qsiok]
,
is given by (2.22) [of course, (2.45c) embodies (2.45a,b)]. Hence
PkisCi is expressed in terms of the Minkowski potential Hikj (which, as we
recall, vanishes if and only if the Finsler space is actually Riemannian) and the Q part of its covariant derivative.
628 150
DAVID BAO AND 5.S. CHERN
For the remainder of this section, we shall re-express the covariant differentiation formula (2.29) in terms of the natural homogeneous coordinates (x, y), (yl, ... , yn) =I (0, ... ,0), on PTM. Specifically, we seek I-forms r i k on PT M such that (2.46)
V'
a axk
=
-
a
r' k ® axi
.
rik
and w k i describe the same connection, the former concerns the 's while the latter concerns the ek 'so We write r i k instead of r ki in order to match certain conventions regarding Christoffel symbols_ Recall that V' denotes covariant differentiation of sections of tensor products of rr*T M and rr*T* M, hence quantities such as V' are not considered because they do not make sense. On the other hand, the r i k 's, being I-forms on PTM, should a priori be expected to have both dx and dy components. However, as we shall see, the torsion freeness (see (2 .15)) of V' implies that
Both
-/xr
a?-
(2.47a) and (2.47b) In particular, the dy components are absent afterall. Furthermore, if we define r jkl by (2.48a) we will (as demonstrated below) find that (2.48b) where (2.48c)
MJ-kl
'-
,- -
8g'k 8Gt J Byt
Byl '
629 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
151
and G t is defined in (2.25). The M tenns measure the lack of metriccompatibility of V' . We would like to emphasize that in (2.48b), the gij 's depend on both x and y. However, if the Finsler function F does not depend on the argument y, then (gij) depends only on x and is a Riemannian metric. Also, from (2.25), we see that when F depends only on x, then Mjkl = 0 and the f jkl 's are literally the Christoffel symbols of the first kind in Riemannian geometry. Thus, in that case, V' is none other than the Levi-Civita connection, a fact we already know (see thf' paragraph before (2.31) ). Let us outline the steps leading to (2.47) and (2.48) . Applying the Cart an exterior differential to the statement ek (8) w k = ~ (8) dx k , we get (V'ek) 0 w k + ek 0 dw k = (V'~) 0 dxk. Into this we substitute (2.29), (2.46), and find that (2.49)
ei
"
k
.
0 (dw' - w 1\ wk')
0 " k =~ (8) (f\ 1\ dx ) . vx'
By torsion freeness (see (2.15)), the left hand side of (2.49) vanishes. So we must have (2.50) which then implies (2.47a) and allows us to specify, without any loss of generality, that fi k1 obeys (2.47b). Next we apply V' to the statement gij = g( a~., a~J ), getting ~~i' dx k +
~~i' dyk = (V' g)( a~.' a~)) + g(V' a~., a~)) + g( a~.' V' a~J)' For the first term on the right, use (2.1b) , followed by (2.30). For the other two tenns on the right, use (2.46), (2.47a), and (2.48a). The right hand side then becomes vPivqjHpqswnS + (fjik + fijk)dx k . Consequently, (2.51 )
(f jik
d k + f ijk )dX k = Ogij ox k X -
h d p q t e x part of v iV jHpq3WnS
and (2.52)
ogij dYk = t he d y part 0 f v piV)" q H --k pqsWnIJ .
oy
630 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
152
By (2.22b) and (2.11),
Thus, upon substituting (2.24b) for w~ n, equations (2.51) and (2.52) become (2.53)
rijk
+ rjik =
Ogij
act (C-'~ U{5gst )
OXk - Oyk u
a
{3
V iV
H a{3-,
j-Y- ,
(2.54) It can be checked that (2.54) is equivalent to (2.22a). Next, note that 6-'~u~Sgst = 6-,c u / gst which, by (2.4b), is equal to V-'t . Using this, then
(2.22b), (2.22a), (1.10), and (2.48c), the right hand side of (2.53) can be re-written and we get (2.55) As in the derivation of the formula for the Christoffel symbols of the first kind in Riema.nnian geometry, we now apply (2.55) to the combination (r jk/ + rkjI) - (rklj + rlkj) + (rljk + rjlk), use (2.47b), and obtain (2.48b). This finishes our derivation of an explicit formula for the Christoffel symbols corresponding to the connection characterized by (2.15) and (2.23). The formula of the curvature tensor in terms of natural coordinates will be reported elsewhere.
3. The first and second variation of arc length, and the flag curvature. In this section, we shall derive the formulas for the first and second variation of arc length using two methods: one uses differential forms and produces an elegant calculation, while the other uses covariant differentiation along curves and is somewhat more geometric. We shall see that the special connection introduced in section 2, when used to express the second variation, gives a formula which is formally identical to that in Riema.nnian
631 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
153
geometry and, as a by-product, shows immediately how the sectional curvature of Riemannian manifolds can be generalized to Finsler spaces. We call this generalization the flag curvature. Finally, we identify the index form. We should mention that the second variation of arc length in Finsler geometry also appeared in two other authors' works, namely, that of L. Auslander ([2], [3]), and P. Foulon ([14], [15]) . The connection used by Auslander is that of Cartan's [7], which is metric-compatible but has torsion. On the other hand, Foulon approached the subject from a dynamical systems point of view; though he has a formula for the second variation in [14], it is not clear whether a specific connection is being used (or needed) in his work; also, he informs us that our flag curvature is analogous to the Jacobi endomorphism that he defined in [15]. Let us begin our derivations. Let b. := {(t, u) : to ~ t ~ t1 , -1 ~ u ~ + I} be a rectangle. We map it into M using a : b. -+ M, such that the t-curves (u = constant) are smooth. One obtains two vector fields defined over the square :
(3.1) T gives the velocity vectors to the t-curves. Strictly speaking, T and U are maps from b. into T M; but we will occasionally find it convenient to regard them, by a slight abuse of notation, as maps from b. into 7r·TM. The map a admits a lift a : b. -+ PTM, defined by
(3.2)
O'(t, u) := (a(t, u), T(t, u)) .
Correspondingly, one gets the following vector fields over the lifted square: (3.3) At each point O'(t, u) in PTM, we use the metric 9 given by (1.10) to calculate
(3.4)
IIT(t,u}II:= Jg(T,T).
There is also a preferred en satisfying (see (1.17))
(3.5)
632 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
154
which is then completed to an orthonormal basis by eo. With respect to this frame field, we obtain the dual co-frame field wi and the connection I-forms These I-forms can be pulled back to A by a·; we write
w/.
(3.6) (3.7)
£1*w/ = a/dt + b/du .
Since wi has no dy terms, one has wi(T) = wi(T), w(U) = Wi(U), consequently
(3.8) Also,
(3.9) and, from (2.11),
(3.10) Using £1· to pull back the torsion-free condition (2.15), then substituting in (3.6) and (3.7), one gets (3.11)
aa i
abi
-au - + -at
.. '
.. ,
= a'b ·' - b'a ·'
in particular,
(3.12) n
(3.13)
aa n ab b = + au at
O
a0
n
Doing the same to the structural equations (2.32) and (2.33), namely those involving the curvature, gives (after some simplification and the use of (2.34))
633 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
in particular, specializing k to one finds that Po nnf3 = 0 and
0',
155
i to n, and using (2.39), (2.40), (2.45c),
(3.15) We now compute the first and second variation of arc length. A priori, the length L(u) of a t-curve is given by It:l F(a, T)dt; but from (1.10), Euler's theorem (1.5), and (3.4), one finds that F(a, T) = IITII. Hence by (3.8), one has (3.16) The formula for the first variation of arc length now follows from (3.13): (3.17) Since bi = U i , the variational vector field, it is clear that the boundary term in (3.17) vanishes when all the t-curves have the same end-points. By specializing to delta-like variational vector fields, we see that the condition for the base curve (u = 0) to be critical-that is, a geodesic-is a on = 0, which by (3.10) is equivalent to (3.18) In other words, a geodesic in Finsler geometry is a curve (! in M whose lift a := (a, T) into PTM is a solution of the following differential system: (3.19a) more explicitly, (3.19b) As for the second variation of arc length, we differentiate (3.16) with respect to tt, which entails the calculation of Applying to (3.13),
a;:lft.
:u
634 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
156
The terms bOb on and -bnobon can be re-expressed using (3.9) and (3.10); also, one re-writes the R term using (2.42). Finally, we restrict (3.20) to u = 0 and assume that the base curve is a geodesic, then by (3.10) and (3.18) the terms proportional to aon drop out. The formula for the second variation of arc length along a geodesic in Finsler geometry is therefore: n
(3.21)
L"(O)
8b = [-8 - 6ij bibj] t=t + 1tl an [6;jb;bj + Rninjbibildt 1
U
t=to
.
to
We pause to note that the absence of any P term in (3.21) is traceable to the fact that Po nnl3 = 0, which in turn follows from the basic formula (2.45c) . In (3.21), the term Rninjbibi, that is, Rn;njUiU j (where U is the variation vector field, see (3.8)), is proportional to the negative of the following quantity (3.22)
-R . ·UiU j K(U, en) := 6ijUi~;~ (U n )2
which depends on the flag {x,e n , U /\ en} (in the context of (3.21), x = o(t)), and will be called a flag curvature. More generally, given any flag {x, Y, U /\ Y : Y, U E TzM} in M, the flag curvature K(U, Y) is defined as (3.23) where both R and 9 are evaluated at the point (x, Y) in PTM. As a result, the flag curvature depends not just on U /\ Y, but also on Y . In the
635 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
157
Riemannian case, the flag curvature reduces to the sectional curvature, and the minus sign in (3.22) and (3.23) reflects our adherence to the convention that the round Euclidean 2-sphere has (constant) positive curvature . We would like to point out that, even though the calculations in this section so far have been done with respect to a particular moving frame and its dual co-frame, the key formulas obtained (especially (3.21) , the second variation of arc length) are tensorial-that is, independent of the moving frame used. For the remainder of this section, we shall recast most of the formulas of this section in the language of covariant differentiation along curves. Thif:j has the advantage of making more explicit the geometric content and sets the stage for generalizing the theory to infinite-dimensional spaces. As a bonus, we shall readily identify the index form and see that it is, up to a multiple that will be made precise later, the integral in (3.21) plus a n )]2a n dt. 11011 ...L(aan)2dt an a u ' that is , 10 [.2..-(log au
111
Let a(t) be a curve in M with velocity T(t) := a.ft . It admits (however, see remark (i) below) a lift into PTM, namely o(t) := (a(t), T(t)), whose velocity is T(t) := o.ft = ft(a(t), T(t)). At each image point o(t) in PT M, take an orthonormal frame {ei} for the vector bundle 7r·T M, with en pointing in the direction of T (see (3.5)); correspondingly, one obtains the connection I-forms Wki. Given any vector field W(t) in M defined along a, we expand it as W = Wiei and define its covariant derivative along a as i
(3.25)
dW DT W := dt
ej
+ W'. V t
ej
=
[dW
j
- ] dt + W k wk'· (T) ej
•
Two remarks are in order: (i) In case a is a constant curve, the velocity T is identically zero, and the aforementioned lift 0 will not make sense. The solution is simple because all the vectors W(t) are now based at a common point of M, hence a meaningful derivative can be taken without first having to perform any parallel transport. In this case, one defines DTW to be ftW(t). (ii) As indicated at the beginning of this section, when dealing with a square a(t, u) in M, in other words a one parameter (namely u) family of t-curves in M, one always lifts both the t-curves and the u-curves into PT Musing the velocities of the t-curves, through 0 := (a, T). Using o· to pull back the torsion-free condition (2.15) will yield the statement
(3.26)
DTU = Du T ,
636 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
158
where the left hand side is defined by (3.25); but what about the right hand side? Well, even though it is given by a formula which is structurally identical to (3.25), namely
Du T
(3.27)
:= [
8T
i
· - ] au + T k wk'(U) ei ,
we hasten to add, however, that the quantities wk i and ei in (3.27) are evaluated at the point a = (o,T) [not (o,U)]; also, the vector U, as defined in (3.3), is (0, T) as opposed to (0, U). The point being that in computing the above covariant derivative-namely DuT-of T along au-curve, we did not lift the u-curve into PTM using its velocity U, as the instructions preceding (3.25) would have directed us to do; instead, we lifted it by the transversal directions T. Nevertheless, the elegance of (3.26) indicates that the tool of covariant differentiation along curves is worth retaining. At the same time, the fact that (3.27) is structurally the same as (3.25) suggests that they can be unified by a minor generalization of the instructions leading to (3.25). This we shall do below. Let us choose symbols that will not bias us into thinking about tcurves or u-curves. Let /,(s) be a curve in M with velocity 8(s); let W(s) be a vector field in M defined along /'. Corresponding to any lift ..:y( s) := (/'(s), y(s)) of /' from Minto PTM, we can define a covariant derivative of W along " as follows:
tu
tu
i
(3.28a)
DsW:=
dW . [dWi k · -] ds ei + W' 'f:J s ei = ds + W wk'(8) ei
where
(3.28b)
d d 8 := ..:y. ds = ds (/'(s), y(s))
and
(3.28c)
Wki and
ei
are evaluated at (/'(s), y(s)) .
The dependence of Ds W on the choice of the lift will be kept implicit. In each application, the specific lift involved should be clear from the context;
637 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
159
quite often it is given by the tangent to the curve in question, but the previous paragraph explains why such is not always the case. From (2.23), one derives readily the following: (3.29a)
d d)g(V, W)] = g(DsV, W)
. k + g(V, DsW) + VJW Hjk/3
(3 Wn
-
(S) ,
where (3.29b)
g, Hjk/3, and
w! are evaluated at (-y(s), y(s))
.
The third term on the right hand side of (3.29a) may be abbreviated as (Dsg)(V, W). We now mention two special cases under which this term drops out: (3.30a)
if V or W is proportional to y (and hence to en) ,
for example when 'Y is a u-curve, but y
= T, and either V
or W is T; or
(3.30b) for example when 'Y is at-curve, y (3.30c)
= T, and 'Y is a geodesic; then
d ds[g(V, W)] = g(DsV, W)
+ g(V, DsW)
,
a formula that would be true without the qualifications (3.30a), (3.30b) if the connection were metric-compatible. It turns out that even though the connection here is, strictly speaking, not metric-compatible, the contexts in which we shall need to calculate a quantity of the form g(V, W) always satisfy either (3.30a) or (3.30b). In this sense, one can say that the special connection introduced in section 2 has just the right amount of metriccompatibility. Return now to the rectangle o(t, u), 0 : ~ -+ M. As agreed, we shall lift it into PTM using the velocity T of the t-curves, namely through U := (0, T). Using u· to pull back the structural equations (2.15), (2.32) and (2.33), while keeping in mind that
is
(3.31)
638 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
160
one finds that DTU = DuT, which is (3.26), and (3.32a)
k
. -
-
DUDTZ = DTDUZ + Z Ok'(U,T)e;
for any vector field Z(t, u) in M defined over the square. The 0 term can be computed using (2.33), (3.31), and (2.34); the result is k
.
.
DUDTZ = DTDUZ + Z [Rk' jnUJIlTIl (3.32b) Formulas (3.26) and (3.32) are equivalent in content to (3.11) and (3.14), respectively. We can now give the variational formulas in terms of covariant derivatives. The length of a t-curve is L(u) := Jt~ Jg(T, T)dt, where 9 is evaluated at aCt, u) := (a(t, u), T(t, u)) in PTM. Differentiating with respect to u, using (3.30a,c), then (3.26), and then (3.30a,c) again, we find that tuJg(T,T) = lIing(DTU,T) = g(DTU, II~II) = %t[g(U, II~II)J g(U, DT( II~II )). Therefore the analogue of (3.17) is:
(3.33)
L'(u) =
1:
1
%t [g( u, II~II)] - g( U, DT( II~II))
dt .
The equation for a geodesic is thus (3.34) which is equivalent to (3.18) or (3.19). If the geodesic is given a constant speed parametrization, then (3.34) reduces to a form familiar from most Riemannian geometry texts, (3.35)
DTT=O.
Next we apply tu to (3.33). For the first term on the right, we use (3.30a,c) to get %t[g(DuU, frrr)] (which we retain) plus %t[g(U,Du(II~II))] (to which we apply (3.29)). This gives
%t [g( DuU, II~II)]
+ g(DTU,Du (II~II))
+ 9 (V, DTDU (II~II)) + H jk /3Vi [Du (II~II)] kw!(,i).
639 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
161
As for the second term on the right hand side of (3 .33), we apply (3.29) and the result is equal to
Now restrict to u = 0 and assume that the corresponding base t-curve is a geodesic, that is, w!(T) = 0 and D T ( II~II) = O. The two H terms, together with one other, then drop out. Thus the second variation L"(O) consists of a boundary term [g(DuU, II~II )]~~~~ plus the integral g(DTU, Du( II~II)) + g(U, [DTDU - DUDT]( II~II)) dt . By (3.32b), (3.31), (2.34), (2.45a), and
It:'
the fact that wnQ(T) = 0 at the base geodesic, we find that g(U, [DTDU DUDT]( frrr)) = liTIiRninjUiUj. The product rule and (3.26) show that
9(DTU,Du(II~II))
=
IIT"2 a~:lIg(DuT,T)
(3.30a,c), = [liT"' a~:I1][~ together gives
+
IIhg(DuT,DuT) which, by
;u IITII2] + nhg(DuT, DuT).
Putting the above
the second variation of arc length along the base (u = 0) geodesic. Let us compare (3.36) with its equivalent, (3.21). From (3.28), (3.9) and (3.8), one sees that (3 .37)
9 ( DuU,
T)
IITII
=
8b n
.
t
.
8u - 6ij b b,? .
Using (3.27), (3.5), (3.8), (3.9), we find that (3.38)
_1_ [g(DuT,Du T ) _
liT II
(8~TII)2] = ancijb;b,! uU
.
640 162
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
Finally, it's clear that (3.39) In (3.36), let us use (3.26) to rewrite DuT as DTU. To highlight the formal similiarity with the Riemannian case, we write the R term as (3.40) Formula (3.36) now reads L"(O)
(3.41)
= [g(Du U, II~II)]:::: +
tl IITII1 [g(DTU, DTU) + g(Rt,T , U)T, U)Jdt
1 to
_1tl _1 (oIlTII)2 liT I ou dt . to
The first integral on the right of (3.41) is the quadratic form of the so-called index form along a geodesic aCt), a :$ t :$ b, with velocity T(t): (3.42)
leV, W):=
lb II~II
[g(DTV,DTW)
+ g(R(T, V)T, W)Jdt .
Here, 9 is evaluated at the point (a(t), T(t)) of PTM and, from property (2.43) of R, we see that leV, W) is indeed symmetric, just like in the Riemannian case. We would like to mention that in some texts, geodesics are defined by (3.35) and hence automatically has a constant speed parametrizais a constant and is tion imposed on them; in that case, the factor typically omitted from the definition of leV, W). We will enumerate two fundamental properties of the index form in the next section. The second integral on the right hand side of (3.41) is, as remarked before, the term that must be added to the integral in (3.21) in order to get the index form. Our derivation of the first variation shows that 8~~1I = g(DTU, hence the integral in question may be re-expressed
nh
frrr),
641 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
163
It:'
as IIh [g(DTU, II~II )Fdt, and now the formula for the second variation of arc length looks formally identical to the one in Riemannian geometry; see, for example, Cheeger-Ebin [8]. We regard this as further evidence that the connection described in section 2 is the correct generalization of the Levi-Civita connection to Finsler geometry. Finally, the flag curvature defined in (3.23) now reads (3.43)
-g(R(Y, U)Y, U) K(U, Y) = g(U, U)g(Y, Y) - [g(U, Y)]2 ,
where Rand 9 are evaluated at the point (x,Y) in PTM. The object R(U, V)W encountered in both (3.40) and (3.43) is defined as (3.44)
R(U, V)W := [R/ kl
ei](x,y)
wj UkVI
.
Though R(U, V) behaves algebraically like the curvature operator V' V V' v V'vV'u - V'[U,V) in Riemannian geomt::try, we must emphasize that here, it
is only a piece of the Finsler curvature. We will utilize (3.44) again when we write down the Jacobi equation in the next section.
4. Geodesics, Jacobi fields, and the index form. In this section, we write down the geodesic equation on the Finsler space M in terms of the natural coordinates on PTM, summarize some analytical properties of geodesics, derive the Jacobi equation, demonstrate that the calculus of Jacobi fields generalizes verbatim to Finsler geometry, and review two fundamental properties of the index form . From (3.34), we recall that on M, a curve a(t) with velocity T(t) is a geodesic if DT( II~II) = o. In order to be able to refer to such Riemannian geometry texts as [8], [16], [19], and [21], we shall from this point on require that all geodesics be given a constant speed parametrization. From (3.34) and (3.30a,c), we see that a geodesic has constant speed if and only if its defining equation is DTT = O.
(4.1)
a:'
Let us write T as Ti = d~i 8:" where the ai(t) 's are the coordinate functions of the curve a(t). Using (2.1b) and then (3.25), it is straightfordT i 8 k 8 dlr ward to show that DTT = (ita;; + T V't a;r; . Here, T(t) := Tt, where
642 164
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
a(t) := (a(t), T(t)) is the lift of a into PTM. By (2.46) and (2.47a), we a . a . a . la have 'Vi' a;k = [(f\)Ii1(T)] ax' = [(f\)Ii1(T)]Fx' = (f\I)Ii1 T Fx'. Therefore (4 .1) , in natural coordinates, gives the ODE (4.2a) for the coordinate functions of the geodesic a(t). Using (2.48a,b ,c) and (l.llb) , we see that the ~ part of f does not contribute to the double contraction . So (4.2a) reduces to 2
(4.2b)
d a dt 2
k
i
+
l
da da [gij (8 g jk _ 8g kl dt dt 2 8x l 8x j
8 91j )] _ 0 ,
+ 8x k
which is formally identical to the equation for geodesics in Riemannian geometry. However, we hasten to caution that, unlike the Riemannian case, the metric coefficients grs here depend on both x = a(t) and y = T(t) = ~~. Hence, in the second term on the left hand side of (4.2b) , the non-linear dependence on the velocity is more than quadratic. We also remark that, since our connection here is derived solely from the Finsler function F, it is not surprising that our geodesic equation agrees with that in Rund [20], even though he takes a classical calculus of variations approach. Let us now show that, despite the above caution, the left hand side of (4.2b) [and, for that matter, that of (4.2a) as well] still scales in the usual way under an affine change of parameter t 1--+ ot + (3. More precisely, let ,,(s) := a(os + (3), 5 := 1(S) := (1'(s),5(s)), then
¥S'
We shall outline the elementary argument [which produces (4.3a)] because it explains clearly why we choose our base space to be PTM rather than, say, the sphere bundle or the full tangent bundle. Let us do so in two remarks: (i) By the chain rule, ~ = o(~~)lt=Q.s+fl. To avoid clutter, for the rest of this discussion it will be implicit that in any statement involving sand t, the t is set to the value os + (3. Hence ~i = 0 2 d;t~i
d:.
.
643 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
165
(ii) (rikl)Vy = (rikl),a because 1'(s) = (')'(s), ~~) = (I'(s),a~~), which is the same point in PTM as (')'(s), ~~) = (a(t), ~~) = a(t) . Note that the key identity 1'(s) = a(t) would fail completely if our base space were TM, and would only hold partially (namely for the case a > 0) if our base space were the sphere bundle. For later use, let us generalize the discussion here. Let a, T, a, 1', S, l' be as defined above. Let V(t) be a vector field along a and define W(s) := V(as + (3). Then (DsW)
(4.3b)
with lift
'Y
= a(DTV) with lift a
where, as before, the argument t on the right hand side is implicitly set dW'(s) to the value as + f3 . To see this, recall that (DsW )with lift 'Y = [-d-s- + i) ' Y (!!i)]() dV'(t) More .m: W k()( S w ds ei ''Y. By th e ch· am ru1e, dW'(s) ds - a dt. k
portantly, we have seen above that 1'(s) = a(t) in PTM. Thus (wki),'Y = (wki),a, (ei),'Y = (ei)'a and, by the chain rule, ~; = a~~. Equation (4.3b) now follows . From (4.3a), it follows that if a(t), a
~
t
~
b , is a geodesic, then so is its reverse,
I'(s) := a(a + b - s), a
(4.4)
~ s ~
b.
In conjunction with the standard existence and uniqueness result for the ODE in (4.2), property (4.3a) also implies that the time a map along the geodesic emanating from p with initial velocity v is the same as the time 1 map along that emanating from p with initial velocity avo This observation, familiar from Riemannian geometry, sets the stage for the introduction of the exponential map, which we will turn to after some technical preliminaries, whose proofs can be found in Spivak ([21], voU). In a coordinate patch, given any v = vi a~. E TqM, we let (4.5)
Ivl
:= [oii vivi]t and IIvll(q,y) := [9ii(q, y)vivi]f .
One can show that associated to any pre-compact (relative to the manifold topology of M) neighbourhood U are two positive constants k and K such that
(4.6)
644 166
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
for all q E U, v E TqM, and y E PTqM . Using (4.6) and the standard theory for the ODE (4 .2), one finds that Associated to each P E M is a neighbourhood U and an
> 0 such that
f
for each v E TqM (q E U) satisfying Iivli(q,y) < there exists a unique geodesic Ov: (-2,2) (4 .7)
with 0,,(0)
= q and 0~(0) = v
->
f ,
M
.
Due to (4.7), the exponential map v 1-+ ov(l) =: expq(v) is defined in a neighbourhood of (P,O) in TM, for each P E M. As in Riemannian geometry, its derivative (4.8)
(expq) .. is the identity map at 0 E TqM .
Applying (4.8) to the map (q,v) finds that
1-+
(q,expq(v)) from TM into M x M, one
Associated to each P E }.II is an open neighbourhood W and an
f
>0
such that any two points in W (4.9)
are joined by a unique geodesic of length <
f
.
Next, define the Finsler sphere in TpM :
(4.10)
Sa := {v E TpM:
IIVIi(p,v) = Q}
.
For Q small enough, eXPp(Sa) is diffeomorphic to Sa, and will be called a geodesic sphere centered at p. Each v E Sa gives a radial geodesic expp(tv) , 0 ::::; t ::::; 1, which intersects all geodesic spheres of radii not exceeding Q and centered at p. An application of the first variation of arc length formula (3.33) yields the following version of the Gauss lemma: Each such radial geodesic o(t) (with velocity T(t))
645 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
167
intersects the geodesic spheres perpendicularly, (4.11)
with respect to the inner product
g(l1(t),T(t»
.
We can now discuss two issues concerning geodesics in a Finsler space
M: (i) Are geodesics locally minimal ? (ii) Is the Hopf-Rinow theorem true? For (i), the usual proof in Riemannian geometry (see, for example, Spivak [21], voLl, chp.9, corollaries 16 and 17) does not carryover to the Finsler setting. We shall give a proof of the local minimization property using the fundamental inequality (1.15b) and the Gauss lemma (4 .11); then we shall pinpoint how the traditional Riemannian geometry argument breaks down in the Finsler setting. To this end, it is sufficient to focus on the essential part of the calculation. Choose a small enough so that the map (t, v) 1-+ expp(tv) maps ((t,v) : 0 $ t $ a, IIVlb,v) = F(p,v) = I} diffeomorphically onto a neighbourhood of p containing the geodesic sphere expp(So). Let a(t) := expp(tw), 0 $ t $ a, IIwlb,w) = 1 be a radial geodesic from p to some point q on expp(So); it has length a. Let c(u), 0 $ u $ 1, be any smooth comparison curve (with time parameter u) from p to q which never crosses the above geodesic sphere. We need to show that its length is at least a. First, using the geodesic polar coordinates t and v, we parametrize our comparison curve as c(u) := expp(t(u)v(u)), where 0 $ u $ 1, Ilv(u)lb,v) = 1, t(O) = 0, and t(l) = a. Next, we note that c(u) is related to a certain variation of our radial geodesic a(t), namely a(t, u) := expp(tv(u)), 0 $ t $ a, 0 $ u $ 1, in the following way: c(u) = a(t(u),u). Hence the chain rule gives ~~ = ~~ ~~ + ~~; this resolves the velocity ~~ of c( u) into two components, one is proportional to T := ~~, and the other is equal to U := ~~. Since all the t-curves in this variation are unit speed geodesics of the same length a, we see from the formula (3.33) for the first variation of arc length that T and U are perpendicular with respect to the metric 9(I1(t,u),T(t,u»; this is simply the Gauss lemma (4.11). In order to avoid clutter, let (c,T) abbreviate the point (c(u),T(t(u),u)) in the calculations below. Now, the length L(c) of c is F(c(u), ;~)du which, upon the use c(u), p = ;~, and y = of the fundamental inequality (1.15b) [with x
J;
=
646 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
168
T], followed by the decomposition of the velocity ~~ = ;~ T + U, is ~ J01[(Fyi )(c,T)T i ~~ + (Fyi )(c,T)Ui]du. In view of Euler's theorem (1.5) and F(c, T) = IITII(c,T) = IIv(u)lI(p,v) = 1, the first term in the integrand simplifies to ~~ . The second term in the integrand can be re-written via (1.1la) as *(gij)(c,T)UiTj and, as pointed out above, is zero by the Gauss lemma.
J;
Therefore, L(c) ~ ~~du = t(l) - t(O) = 0'. Let us note a subtlety in the above proof: it is with respect to the inner product g(c,T) that T has norm 1 and that U and T are orthogonal; such is false with respect to g(C ,;r;; de). We digress to see how an argument fashioned directly after that in Riemannian geometry would proceed: by the aforementioned decomposition of the velocity ~~, together with the Gauss lemma, one has II ~~ IIlc,T) = 1~~ 12 IITlIlc,T)
If; ~~dul =
+
IIUlIlc,T)
~ 1;~ 12 ; thus
J;
J; II ~~ II (c,T)du
~
J; 1;~ Idu ~
It(l) - t(O)1 = 0'. That is: 1I;~II(c,T)dU ~ 0'. In the Riemannian setting, the quantity II ~~ lI(c,T) is independent of the direction T and represents the speed of the curve c(u). However, in Finsler geometry, the metric used to compute the instantaneous speed along the curve c depends both on the point c( u) and the velocity ~~. In the above inequality, the speed was computed with the metric g(c,T) instead of g(c,¥..); as a re-
J;
sult, the integral II ~~ lI(c,T)dU does not represent the length of c. This pinpoints the breakdown of a standard Riemannian geometry argument when it is adapted superficially to the Finsler setting. We would also like to point out that, instead of the geometrical proof we have just given, it should be possible to deduce the local minimization property of geodesics in Finsler spaces by a classical calculus of variations argument. To pursue this, consult Rund [20] or Bolza ([5], pp. 164-187). Let us return to the discussion of questions (i) and (ii). We now know that the distance from p to any point on the geodesic sphere expp(So) is indeed equal to 0', provided that 0' is small. Given this fact, standard arguments (for example, Spivak [21] voLl) will show that any two points of a geodesically complete Finsler manifold can be joined by a minimal geodesic. Consequently (see, for example, the treatment in O'Neill [19]) one obtains the Hopf-Rinow theorem as well. We next show that with the connection defined in section 2, the calculus of Jacobi fields in Riemannian geometry generalizes to the Finsler set-
647 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
169
ting. Consider a variation aCt, u), and suppose all the t-curves are geodesics. As before, let T:= a.%t and U:= a.:u' Also, let 0 := (a,T) and define T := 0. %t' fj := 0. :u' From (3.26), one has DTU = DuT. Applying DT to this, followed by (3 .32b) and the fact that DTT = 0 and wnQ(T) = 0, one gets (4.12) By (3.5) and (2.34), the right hand side of (4.12) becomes
but the P part drops out by (2.45a), leaving IITII2 Rni np1ei which, in view of (3.44), one can abbreviate as R(T, U)T. So (4.12) now reads (4.13)
DTDTU
=
R(T,U)T,
the Jacobi equation in Finsler geometry; note that it is formally identical to that in Riemannian geometry. Standard ODE theory tells us that a unique solution exists for each set of prescribed initial data U(O) and (DTU)(O), such will be called a Jacobi field. We have just seen that with respect to our special connection, the variation vector field U of any variation by geodesics is a Jacobi field. The converse is also true. In fact, given any Jacobi field J(t) along a geodesic aCt), a $ t $ b, with velocity field T, construct a variation as follows: find a curve u 1-+ 'Y(u), with velocity V(u) such that Vju=o = Jlt=o; find vectors Y(u) along'Y such that Yju=o = T1t=0 and (Dv Y)lu=o = (DTJ)lt=o; here, Dv Y is the covariant derivative associated to the lift b( u), Y (u)), while DTJ is that relative to the lift (a(t), T(t)). Finally, define the variation as aCt, u) := exp-y(u)(tY(u)). By using (3.26) to calculate the initial data of the resulting variation vector field U(t, 0), we can conclude that it equals J by uniqueness. Any Jacobi field J(t) along a geodesic aCt), a $ t $ b, with velocity T(t) splits into two 9(0'(t),T(t»-orthogonal Jacobi fields, one of which is tangent to aCt), as follows:
(4.14)
J(t) = [a(t-a)+,B]T(t) + J1.(t) ,
648 DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
170
where
=
g«DTJ)(t),T(t)) _ constant
(4 .15a)
Q
and
g(J(a), T(a))
(4.15b)
=
(3.
tt
This is verified, as usual, by showing that ll [g«7(t),T(t»(J(t) , T(t))] = O. But first let us recall here for convenience that, along a geodesic aCt) with velocity T(t), (3.30) says that (4.16)
d
dt [g«7,T) (V, W)] = g«7,T) (DTV, W) + g«7,T) (V, DTW) .
By two successive applications of (4.16), (4.1), and then (4.13), we see that the second time derivative in question is g«7,T)(R(T, J)T, T), that is IITII3Rnnn;Ji, which vanishes by (2.42). We hasten to point out that (2.42) does not capture all the usual symmetries of the Riemann-Christoffel tensor of Riemannian geometry, but retains just enough of it to make the calculation here work. In the same spirit, an application of (4.16) and some residual symmetry (namely (2.43)) of the R part of our Finsler curvature effects the Lagrange identity:
If Vet), Wet) are Jacobi fields along a geodesic aCt) with velocity T(t),
(4.17)
then g«7,T)(DTU, W) - g«7,T)(U, DTW)
== some constant.
We also recall the usual characterization of conjugate points by Jacobi fields. One says that q is conjugate to p along a geodesic aCt), 0 $ t $ 1, with initial velocity v if: (i) a(O) = p, a(l) = q, and (ii) (expp).v: Tv(TpM) -+ TqM is singular [say, maps some non-zero vector W E Tv(TpM) to zero]. In this case, regard W as an element of To(TpM) and form the variation by geodesics aCt, u) := expp(t[v + uW)). The variation vector field Vet) is, by (4.8) and a continuity argument, a non-zero Jacobi field along o(t) which vanishes at t 0 (by construction) and t 1 (by the chain rule).
=
=
649 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
171
Conversely, given such a Jacobi field, say J, one can check that (DTJ)(O) is non-zero and lies in the null space of (exp p ).v. Thus, q is conjugate to p along a geodesic
(7
connecting them if and only if
(4.18) there exists a non-zero Jacobi field .J along
(7
which vanishes at p and q .
Let (7(t), a ~ t ~ b, be a geodesic with velocity T(t) from p to q, and suppose q is not conjugate to p along (7. Using (4.18), we observe that if {Vi(t)} are Jacobi fields along (7 such that V;(a) = 0 and {(DTVi)(a)} are linearly independent, then {V;(b)} are linearly independent also. This then allows us to construct a unique Jacobi field J along (7 such that J (a) = 0 and J(b) = any vector we specify. Next, using (4.3b) twice, together with the tensorial nature of R, one checks that if J(t) is a Jacobi field along a geodesic (7(t), a ~ t ~ b, then W(s) := J(a + b - s) is a Jacobi field along the reverse of (7. [In particular, q is conjugate to p along (7 iff p is conjugate to q along the reverse of (7.] Manipulating the ideas in this paragraph will show that: If q is not conjugate to p along a geodesic (7(t), a
~
t
~
b, which
connects them, then for any v E TpM and w E TqM, there exists a (4.19)
unique Jacobi field J along
(7
such that J(a) = v and J(b) = w .
Let us now turn to the index form (3.42) along a geodesic (7(t), a ~ T(t). Recall that in the current section and the next, all geodesics are given a constant speed parametrization; in our case, say, IIT(t)1I == some constant c. Then (3.42) reads
t ~ b, with velocity
(4.20)
I(V, W) = -1 c
lb
g(DTV, DTW) + g(R(T, V)T, W) dt ,
a
where 9 is evaluated at ((7,T). As remarked before, standard Riemannian geometry texts drop the constant factor ~ in the formula of the index form;
650 172
DAVID BAO AND 5.5. CHERN
we will keep that factor to avoid a change (albeit cosmetic) in the definition of I. Using (4.16) on (4 .20) gives (4.21 )
jt-b + -1 lb g(-DTDTV + R(T, V)T, W)dt .
I ( V, W ) = -1 [g(DTV, W) t;a C
C
a
In particular, (4.22a)
If V is Jacobi, then I(V, W)
= ~[9(DTV, W)j~~~ C -
,
and (4.22b) If V is Jacobi and W vanishes at both end-points, then I(V, W)
=0 .
The formula (3.41) for the second variation of arc length along a base geodesic aCt), a ~ t ~ b, with velocity T and constant speed IITII == c, now reads ( 4.23)
" L (0)
T )]t=b 1 [b(8 I1 TII)2 = [9 ( Du U, IITI! t=a + leU, U) - ~ Ja ---a;;- dt.
We remind ourselves that every covariant derivative in (4.23), whether it is DT or Du, is computed relative to the lift (a(t, u), T(t, u)). If the variation keeps the end-points of aCt) fixed, then we have U(a, u) = 0 = U(b, u) for all u; in that case, one sees from (3.28) that both (DuU)(a,O) and (DuU)(b,O) are zero, so that the boundary term in (4.23) drops out. Since ~ (a~~" )2dt is non-positive, one can therefore conclude that:
- J:
If the variation keeps the end-points of a fixed,
(4.24)
then leU, U) < 0 ::::}
L"(O) < 0 .
On the other hand, let us note that leU, U) > 0 does not say anything about the sign of L"(O). For the remainder of this section, we enumerate two fundamental properties of the index form. Let aCt), a $ t ~ b, be a geodesic with velocity
651 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
173
T(t) . Let Ou be the space of all piecewise smooth vector fields W(t) along a, and let O~ denote the subspace of those W 's satisfying W(a) = 0 = W(b) . Let us begin with a relationship between conjugate points and the sign of I(W, W) . Suppose no point along a is conjugate to a(a). Using the observation which immediately follows (4.18), one constructs Jacobi fields {Ji(t): i = 1, ... ,n} such that Ji(a) = 0 and {Ji(t)} is a basis for Tu(t)M, t ¥= a. Write W E O~ as W(t) = ji(t)Ji(t), with t(b) = O. Using (4.21) for I(W, W) and the Lagrange identity (4.17) on the Ji 's, one finds that ~ I(W, W) = l ab 9(u,T)( !it. dt Ji , dt Jj)dt. Thus: If no point along the geodesic a(t), a ~ t ~ b, is conjugate to a(a),
then I(W, W) ~ 0 for all W E O~, (4.25)
and equality holds only when W
== 0 .
More generally, take W E Ou. If a contains no point conjugate to a(a), then by (4.19), there exists a unique Jacobi field Jw(t) along a such that Jw(a) = W(a) and Jw(b) = W(b). By (4.25), one has 0 ~ I(W - Jw , W - Jw) = I(W, W) + I( Jw, Jw) - 2I( Jw, W), which becomes I(W, W) - I( Jw, Jw) through the use of (4.22a), together with the fact that Jw and W have the same boundary values [so that I(Jw, W) = I(Jw, Jw)] . Hence, If the geodesic a contains no conjugate points ,
then I(W, W) ~ I(Jw, Jw) for all W E Ou, (4.26)
and equality holds only when Jw
=W
.
On the other hand: If some a(7) is conjugate to a(a) along a geodesic a(t),a ~ t ~ b,
(4.27)
then there exists aWE n~ such that I(W, W)
<0
.
678 Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
585
in these spaces. We suppose the hypersurface A C Q be defined by an equation
where the left-hand side is a complex analytic function in its two arguments. Suppose A is smooth. On A let ._ .oF
_j _
8.- lozjdf. -
_
. oF
k
(1)
IO(kd( .
Let 8, 8~ (resp. 8, 8a) be linearly independent holomorphic I-forms in the zspace ( resp. (-space). They are defined up to a transformation 8* = u8,
+ ua8 , va8 + v~8fi '
8*'1. = ufi8fi
8: =
(2)
where u ,*,O,det(up) ,*,0, det(v~),*,O.
Then we have defined a G-structure, where G is the group of all complex matices
° ~0) °
ua
(
u
up
Va
Va
with u,*,O,det(up)'*'O, det(v~HO. We have d8
== iq~8a 1\ 8fl ,
mod(8) ,
for some holomorphic functions q~. The condition det(q~),*,O
(3 )
is invariant under the change (2). The Segre family is called non-degenerate, if (3) is satisfied. As a basic example of Segre family, we consider any domain D C CCn+! whose boundary is given by a real-analytic hypersurface
oD :=
{(za, w) C CCn+1Ir(za, w,z<', w) = O}
where r is a real-analytic function defined on CC n + l . Then this associates a Segre family A
D
:= {(za,w,(a,l]) C Q C <en
X
<e 211
X
CCn
X
CClr(z", w, (a, l])
= O}.
(4)
where the Q is some open subset in CC +2 which contains a neighborhood of the conjugate diagonal. When Q = <e 2n +2 , we say that the Segre family AD is defined on <e 2n +2 . For example, when D = Bn+ 1 is the unit ball, AB"+I = 2n 2 {za(a + WI] - I = O} is defined on CC + •
653 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
175
flag curvatures of Mn and M;+k satisfy
(4.28)
1«Z, T) :::; J((Zo, To) for any Z E Ta(t)M and Zo E Tao(t)Mo ,
then the respective index forms obey I(W, W)
( 4.29)
~
I(
This follows from (4.20), properties (1) through (4) of
5. Comparison theorems, minimal geodesics, and some global issues. The properties of the index form, as outlined in section 4, immediately generalize certain comparison theorems to Finsler spaces. We shall describe a few here, beginning with the Morse-Schoenberg theorem [(5.2), (5.3) be10wJ: Let a be a unit speed geodesic, with velocity field T, in a Finsler space N of dimension n; abbreviate the flag curvatures 1«U, T) (see (3.43) by K; (5.1 )
If 1< :::; 0, then a contains no conjugate points.
(5.2)
If K :::;
(5.3)
If 1<
~
and L(a) < 7rr, then a contains no conjugate points.
r
~
12 and L(a) > 7rr, then a contains conjugate points.
r
These are consequences of (4.28) and (4.29), followed by (4.25) and (4.27) . For (5.1), let the Mo in (4.28) be Euclidean ]Rn; for (5.2), Mo = the Euclidean n-sphere sn(r) ofradius r; and in both cases, M = N. As for (5.3), let M = sn(r) and Mo = N in (4.28) . More generally, the first Rauch comparison theorem also extends to Finsler spaces. For this, (i) The geometrical setup consists of: Two Finsler spaces Mn and M;+k, with induced metrics g and go; unit speed geodesics a(t) and ao(t), 0 $ t $ 1
654 DAVID BAD AND 5.5 . CHERN
176
(respectively in M and Mo) with velocity fields T(t) and To(t); also, the flag curvatures are to obey the inequality (4 .28), namely,
K(Z, T) ::; K(Zo, To) .
(5.4)
(ii) The data on vector fields is: Let J(t) := (at + f3)T(t) + J.1(t) and Jo(t) := (O:ot + (3o)To(t) + Jt(t) be two Jacobi fields, respectively along a and ao, decomposed as indicated using (4.14) and (4 .15); they are to satisfy (5.5)
0:
=
0:0
and {3
=
{30
(5.6)
(5 .7a) equivalently, since (4.1) and (4.16) imply that DTJ.1 is 9(<1,T)-orthogonal to T (similar statement holds for DTo Jt), one can use (5.5) to re-express (5.7a) as (5.7b) The theorem then states: given the assumptions (i) and (ii), If ao(t), 0::; t ::; l, contains no point conjugate to ao(O), then for all t :
(5 .8)
lI1(t)1I2
:=
9(<1,T)(J, J) ~ 90(<1o ,To)(Jo, Jo)
=:
IIJo(t)112.
In particular, a will not contain any point conjugate to a(O) either. Due to (5.5), it suffices to show that IIJ.1(t)1I2 ~ II1t(t)1I 2 • We shall very briefly sketch the argument. If (5.7b) reads 0 = 0, then the situation is trivial, so let us assume that (DTJ.1)(O) =1= 0 and (DToJt)(O) =1= O. In that case, J.1 and Jt are non-zero Jacobi fields. Furthermore, since ao contains no conjugate points, Jcf(t) is nowhere zero on (0,1]; the same cannot yet be said about J.1(t), though it is a consequence of (4.8) that there exist a positive i ::; 1 such that J.1(t) is nowhere zero on (0, I].
655 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
177
Work on 0 :::; t :::; 1. Using (4.16), the fact that II (DTJt )(0)11 i= 0, L'Hopital's rule twice, and (5.7b), one finds that the indeterminate quo2 . IIJJ.(t)1I 0 Usmg ' (416) tlent 11J,t(t)1I 2 h as li' mit 1 as t approach es. . an d (422 . a ), one checks that this quotient has a non-negative time derivative on (0, i] provided that [.(JJ.,JJ.) ~ ::~;~:~I::[«Jt,Jt), for each E in (0,1] ; here, the subscript E signifies that the index forms are calculated from t = 0 to t = E. Such inequality is a consequence of (4.29), followed by (4.26); in fact: construct our 'transplant' ~ JJ. such that (~JJ. )(E) = II~;~:W Jt(E), J. JJ.) [(if.. if.. ) IIJ.!.(E)1I2[ (1IJt(E)IIif.. IlJi(E)IIif.. ) t h en [(J E , ~ E 'oI!'JJ. , 'oI!'JJ. = 11J,t(E)l12 E IIJJ.«)II'oI!'JJ., IIJJ.«)II'oI!'JJ. ~
11~;~:m:[E(Jt,Jt). So one has: IIJJ.(t)1I2 ~ IIJt(t)1I 2 on 0 :::; t :::; 1. An argument using the connectedness of [0, I) extends this last inequality from [0, ~ to [0, I). Specifically, the set of all i 's as defined above form a subset A of [0,1] which is non-empty (due to (4.8)), open (by continuity), and closed (if Ii is a sequence in A ~ [0, I] which converges to p, then IIJJ.(i;)1I ~ IIJt(i;)1I => IIJJ.(P)II ~ IIJt(P)1I > 0 => pEA) . Hence A = [0,1] and our inequality is true on 0 :::; t :::; l. This ends the proof of the first Rauch comparison theorem. Quite a few other results in Riemannian geometry also generalize to the Finsler setting. Some of these are of a decidedly global nature. They include Myers' theorem (which says that completeness and uniform positive lower bound on the Ricci curvature imply compactness and finite fundamental group) , Synge's theorem (any compact, connected, orientable, even-dimensional Riemannian manifold with positive sectional curvatures is simply connected), and the Cartan-Hadamard theorem (any complete, simply connected Riemannian manifold with non-positive sectional curvatures is diffeomorphic to Euclidean space). Modulo the calculus of geodesics and covering spaces, the proofs of these theorems depend primarily on the formula for the second variation of arc length. Auslander [3] gave a generalization of the above theorems to Finsler spaces. He used the Cart an connection in his treatment. As a result, his curvature forms all have three pieces, two of which are analogous to the R and P tensors in our curvature formula (2.33), together with a third term (abbreviated as S) that is absent in our case because of torsion-freeness. When the second variation of arc length is expressed in terms of the Cartan
656 178
DAVID BAO AND S.S. CHERN
connection and its curvature, the S part does not enter. As for the P term, it was recently pointed out to us by Zhongmin Shen that it actually drops out; a direct calculation by us confirmed his claim. Since our formula of the second variation contains no P term either, we expect the same theorems to hold in our context as well. We now turn to the issue of whether geodesics are minimal among nearby curves with the same end-points. If a geodesic (J, with velocity T, contains conjugate points, then by (4.27), leW, W) < 0 for some W E n~, hence L"(O) < 0 by (4.24) . So (J is not minimal. The question is then: Will (J be minimal (among nearby curves with the same end-points) if it contains no conjugate points? With the absence of conjugate points, there is a standard argument in Riemannian geometry (see, for example, Gallot, Hulin, and Lafontaine [16), or Spivak [21] vol.4 and voLl) which reduces this question to whether short segments of (J are minimal, and we have already answered that in the affirmative at the beginning of section 4. Let us conclude by enumerating a few more global issues: (i) The classification of Finsler spaces with constant flag curvatures. Here, a modification of the scheme used by Wolf [23] is perhaps useful. (ii) The formulation and the proof of the Gauss-Bonnet-Chern theorem, using the connection defined in section 2. In 2 dimensions, this has already been done for Landsberg surfaces, see Chern [11]. In higher dimensions, a paper of Lichnerowicz's [18] proved a generalized version of this theorem using the Cartan connection, but only for Finsler spaces of Berwald type (namely, those for which the S part of the curvature vanishes). Preliminary investigations indicate that a satisfactory unified picture does emerge from the works of these authors (see Baa [4]). (iii) The proof of a sphere-pinching theorem. Zhongmin Shen called our attention to. the works of Dazord ([12], [13]) and Kern [17), which sketched the proofs of the homotopy sphere theorem and the differentiable sphere theorem, respectively. Both of these authors used the Cart an connection; but we believe that their methods will adapt readily to our setting. Alternatively, an approach advocated in Tsukamoto [22], which circumvented the Toponogov theorem, is perhaps also viable here. (iv) A detailed understanding of Finsler spaces for which the R part of the curvature vanishes. Finally, there has been some speculation that the L 4 -Finsler metric induced by the Finsler function F(x,y):= [~ijkl(X)yiyjykyl]t might provide
657 ON A NOTABLE CONNECTION IN FINSLER GEOMETRY
179
some geometrical insight for the Ginsburg-Landau model of superconductivity. The details remain to be worked out. A relevant reference here is Asanov [1].
Acknowledgements. We would like to thank: Giles Auchmuty for discussions about a possible extension of (1.15b) which turns out to be false; Robert Bryant for suggesting that we pursue the convexity of F in our proof that geodesics are locally minimal; Peter Li an-a Phil Yasskin for discussions about the relationship between the signs of I(U, U) and L"(O) (see the remark following (4.24)); Zhongmin Shen for discussions about the P term in Auslander's formula (for the second variation) and for supplying the references on the sphere-pinching theorems; Phil Yasskin for clarifying a certain property of the Cartan exterior differential; and one of the referees for some very constructive criticism regarding (2.5), (2.22b), (2 .31), and condition (5) in the construction of the transplant ~ w.
REFERENCES 1. Asanov, G.S., Fin3ler Geometry, Relativity and Gauge Theorie3 , D . Reidel 1985. 2. Auslander, L., The U3e of form.3 in variational calculation3, Pacific J . Math. 5 (1955), 853-859 . Remark on the U3e of fOTm3 in variational calculation3, Pacific J. Math. 6 (1956), 209-210. 3. Auslander, L., On curvature in Fin3ler geometry, Trans . Amer. Math. Soc. 79 (1955), 378-388. 4. Bao, D., A note on the Gauu·Bonnet· Chern theorem for Fin3ler 3pace3, in preparation. 5. BoIza, 0 ., Lecture3 on the Calculu3 of Variation3, G .E. Stechert and Co., New York 1946. 6. Canan, E., Le3 probleme3 d'equivalence, Select a de M. Elie Cartan, 113-136, Paris 1939. 7. Canan, E. , Le3 e3pace3 de Fin3ler, Actua.lites Scientmques et Industrie1les no. 79, Paris, Hermann 1934. 8. Cheeger, J. and Ebin, D., Compari3on Theorem3 in Riemannian Geometry, North Holland 1975. 9. Chern, 5.5., Local equivalence and Euclidean connection3 in Fin31er 3pace", Sci. Rep. Nat. Tsing Hua Univ. Ser.A 5 (1948), 95-121; or Selected Papers, vol. n, 194-212, Springer 1989. 10. Chern, 5.5., On Fin3ler geometry, Comptes Rendu Acad. Sci. Paris 314{1} (1992), 757-761.
658 180
DAVID BAO AND S.S. CHERN
11. Chern, 5.5., Hi$torica.l remark$ on Gau$$-Bonnet, In Analysis et Cetera, volume dedicated to Jiirgen Moser, 209-217, Academic Press 1990. 12. Dazord, P., Variete$ Fin$lerienne$ de dimen$ion paire 6-pincee$, Comptes Rendu Acad. Sci. Paris SU. A 266 (1968), 496-498. 13. Dazord, P., Variete$ Fin$lerienne6 en forme de 6phere$, Comptes Rendu Acad. Sci. Paris Ser. A 267 (1968), 353-355. 14. Fouion, P., Noufleauz intlariant$ geometrique$ de$ $1I$teme$ d1lnamique du $econd ordre. Applica.tion$ Ii l'etude de leur comportement ergodique., Theses d'etat 1986 . 15. Fouion, P., Geometrie de$ eqUatiOn6 differentielle6 du $econd ordre, Ann. Inst. Henri Poincare 45(1) (1986), 1-28. 16. Gallot, 5., Hulin, D. and Lafontaine, J., Riemannian Geometry, 2nd ed., Springer 1990. 17. Kern, J., Da6 pinchingproblem in futriemann6chen Fin6ler6chen mannigfaltgkeiten, Manuscripta Math. 4 (1971), 341-350. 18. Lichnerowicz, A., Quelque$ theoreme6 de geometrie differentielle globale, Comm. Math. Helv. 22 (1949), 271-301. 19. O ' Neill, B., Semi-Riemannian Geometry, Academic Press 1983. 20. Rund, H ., The Differential Geometry of Fin6ler Space6, Springer 1959. 21. Spivak, M ., A Comprehen$ifle Introduction to Differential Geometry, Publish or Perish 1975 . 22 . Tsukamoto, Y ., On Riemannian manifold., with po.,itifle curvature, Memoirs Fac. Sc., Kyushu Univ., Ser. A 15(2) (1961) , 90-96. 23. Wolf, J. , Space., of Con6tant Curvature, Publish or Perish 1974.
Department of Mathematics University of Houston Houston, TX 77204-3476 Mathemat ical Sciences Research Institute 1000 Centennial Drive Berkeley, CA 94720 Received September 10, 1991
659 Reprinted from Global Analysis in Modern Mathematics, Publish or Perish, 1994.
CHARACTERISTIC CLASSES AS A GEOMETRIC OBJECT Shiing-shen Chern
1. Riemannian geometry and Erlanger program Following Felix Klein [8] I take 1870 as the starting year. A year earlier, in 1869, E. Christoffel and R. Lipschitz solved the fundamental problem in Riemannian geometry, the form problem: To decide when two ds 2 's differ by a change of coordinates. In the solution, Christoffel introduced the covariant differentiation now called the Levi-Civita connection. In 1872 Klein announced his Erlanger program which defines geometry as the study of a space with a group of transformations. This has given geometry a unifying principle, which has dominated geometry for at least a century. Klein was aware that the Erlanger program does not include Riemannian geometry, as a generic Riemannian metric admits only the identity isometry, but the two views progressed in parallel. One of the implications of the Erlanger program was the development of non-euclidean geometry by the Cayley-Klein metric; non-euclidean geometry became a chapter of projective geometry. To illustrate the scope of Klein's great idea, let me give an example. As the group plays the central role, the same analytic argument could give geometrical theorems which are radically different. For example, the theorem that the three heights of a spherical triangle meet in a point can be "translated", using dual numbers, to the following theorem of Morley-Petersen (1898): Consider a simple skew hexagon in space whose adjacent sides are perpendicular. There is a line that meets perpendicularly the three common perpendiculars of the three pairs of opposite sides. Riemannian geometry received a great impetus through the theory of general relativity in 1915. Several books, now classics, appeared in the period 1924-26. On the other hand, following in the tradition of classic differential geom-
221
660 SHIING-SHEN CHERN
etry, there is a rich field of studying the geometry of submanifolds under a group other than the group of rigid motions. Of these the "'all-embracing" group is the projective group and, beginning in 1906 by E. J. Wilczynski and continued by the Italian school led by G. Fubini and E. Cech, there were considerable activities on projective differential geometry. The differential geometries of the other groups, such as the affine group and the various sphere groups, were also studied, principally by W. Blaschke and his school. An account can be found in Blaschke's classic treatise [3]. There are beautiful results, but the subjects suffer the disadvantage of being isolated. Activities in Riemannian geometry extend to efforts in finding a space which can be adapted as the universe of a unified field theory. The problem has too many constraints and there was no happy conclusion. In the thirties differential geometry fell to a low point, waiting for the dawn of a new era of global differential geometry.
2. Connections after Elie Cartan A generalization which embraces both Riemannian geometry and the Erlanger program is the "espaces generalises" of Elie Cartan. In modern terminology this is a fiber bundle with a connection. The latter gives an infinitesimal relationship between the fibers. This obviously includes the geometry in the sense of Klein, while Riemannian geometry can be looked on as the geometry of the tangent bundle with the Levi-Civita connection. Let me give the basic analytical facts of a connection. Let
7T:E-+M
(1)
be a principal bundle with structural group G a Lie group. The tangent space at the unit element e E G has a Lie algebra structure. It will be denoted by L(G) and the multiplication by a bracket. The map
(2)
g -+ aga- 1 ,
a, g
E
G,
a fixed,
leaves e invariant and induce the adjoint map (3)
ad(a): L(G) -+ L(G).
Using the connection, a covariant differentiation D can be defined, which converts an L(G)-valued exterior differential form of degree k into one of degree k + 1.
222
661 CHARACfERISTIC ClASSES AS A GEOMETRIC OBJECT
Over a neighborhood U of M, rr-I(U) can be described by the local coordinates (x. gu)' x E U. gu E G. Then a connection is given by a linear differential form (4)
where dg u ' g;;1 is the right-invariant Maurer-Cartan form in G and ()u(x. dx) is an L(G)-valued linear differential form in U. w is an L(G)-valued I-form in E, given locally in rr-I(U) by the expression (4). By covariant differentiation one finds (5)
(6)
Dw
= Q = ad(gu)8u. DQ=O.
where 8 u is an L(G)-valued exterior 2-form in U. Notice that w, Q are globally defined in E, with the local expressions (4), (5) respectively. They are called respectively the connection and curvature forms. Equation (6), which follows from (5) by exterior differentiation, is called the Bianchi identity. The form of equation (5) leads us to the consideration of the multilinear symmetric real-valued functions P(X 1 • • ••• X s), Xj E L(G), I :::: i :::: s. It is called invariant if
(7)
P(ad(a)XI •...• ad(a)Xs) = P(X 1 ••••• X s).
for all a E G. With multiplication defined in an obvious way all invariant polynomials P form a ring I (G). The form (8)
P(Q) = P(Q ..... Q) '-v-"
is an exterior differential form of degree 2s , which is globally defined in M. It will be called a characteristic form . As we will describe below, it plays an important role in both local and global problems. We wish to observe that if G = GL(q) , L(G) is the space of all (q x q) matrices. When a geometric structure is given, a fundamental problem is to see whether a connection can be defined intrinsically. This is the case with the Riemannian metric with its Levi-Civita connection. Generally the problem is non-trivial; in fact it is not always true that an intrinsic connection exists. In the case of the geometry of paths of Veblen and Thomas a normal projective connection exists. Recently Bao and I showed that for the Finsler metric an intrinsic connection exists whose base space is the space ofline elements of the manifold [1].
223
662 SHIING-SHEN CHERN
3. Global differential geometry Global problems in differential geometry have a long history. For example, particular emphasis was paid by Blaschke in his treatise [3]. But a systematic development needs a foundation of differential topology, and among those who contributed were H. Whitney, G. de Rham and H. Hopf. A fundamental tool is the exterior differential calculus. It was developed by Elie Cartan in 1922. Inspired by remarks by Poincare, de Rham showed its topological significance by proving the following theorem in 1931: Let M be a differentiable manifold. Let A k (M) be the space of its differential forms of degree k and Ck(M) C Ak(M) the subspace of closed k{orms. Then
(9) where the right-hand side stands for the k-dimensional cohomology group of M with real coefficients. Since a differential form is also a local entity, this gives a
relation between local and global properties. In his seminal paper [7] Heinz Hopf first drew attention to the relation between curvature and topology. He laid emphasis on the high-dimensional Gauss-Bonnet formula, which expresses the Euler-Poincare characteristic of a compact even-dimensional Riemannian manifold as an integral of a polynomial of the components of the Riemann-Christoffel tensor, a generalization of the classical 2-dimensional case. Hopf himself did the hypersurface case in his thesis in 1925. In 1940 C. B. Allendoerfer and W. Fenchel proved the formula for submanifolds imbedded in a high-dimensional euclidean space, the former making use of the Weyl tube formula. Andre Weil was attracted by the formula and in a tour de force he and Allendoerfer proved it for a Riemannian polyhedron in 1943. Finally in 1944 Chern gave a simple intrinsic proof, making essential use of the unit tangent bundle and with no use of an imbedding. This turns out to be a special case of the characteristic homomorphism, now commonly known as the Chern-Weil theory. This can be described as follows. Following section 2 we associate by (8) to an invariant polynomial P E / (G) of degree s an exterior differential form of degree 2s in M . This form is closed and by de Rham's theorem defines an element of H 2s (M; R). This leads to a homomorphism ( 10)
w: /(G) -+ H*(M; R)
where the right-hand side is the cohomology ring of M with real coefficients; w is a ring homomorphism. Applying the construction to the classifying
224
663 CHARACTERISTIC ClASSES AS A GEOMETRIC OBJECT
space BG, we have (lOa)
Wo:
I (G) -+ H*(BG; R)
which is an isomorphism, if G is connected, compact, and semi-simple. This result gives a bundle-theoretic interpretation of I (G), being the cohomology ring of the classifying space. Our main theorem is: If the bundle is induced l7y the mapping f: M -+ BG,
(11)
then
(12)
W
= f*
0
Wo o
This therefore identifies a characteristic form with a bundle invariant. The cohomology class of a characteristic form in the sense of the de Rham theory is called a characteristic class. Consider the special case G = GL(q; C). Then L(G) is the space of all (q x q )-matrices and the curvature form Q is a matrix-valued two-form , defined up to the change ad(s)Q = sQs- 1
The differential form
det
(I + 2~
Q) =
1 + Cl (Q)
+ ... + cq (Q) ,
where Ck (Q) is of degree 2k , 1 ::::: k ::::: q, is well-defined on M. These are the so-called Chern forms and their cohomology classes the Chern classes. We will denote the latter by q(£). Even the first Chern class Cl (£) has played a role in various problems in mathematics. The Gauss-Bonnet formula arises from the case that the group G = S0(2n) and P is the Pfaffian of an anti-symmetric matrix. If the bundle is the tangent bundle of a compact orientable manifold M of dimension 2n, the characteristic class in question, when properly normalized, gives the Euler-Poincare characteristic of M . The expression of characteristic classes by characteristic forms is of increasing importance in applications. For instance, it is well-known that
225
664 SHIING-SHEN CHERN
characteristic classes play an important role in the index theory of AtiyahSinger. By using the heat kernel, this can now be refined into a result on the characteristic forms (cf. [2]). In finding a combinatorial formula for the Pontryagin numbers, Gelfand and McPherson have extended the above theory to the important case of piecewise linear manifolds [6]. Another important case is when the manifolds in question are complexanalytic. Then the exterior differential calculus has two operators a and with the usual properties. Bott and I have developed the "transgression" in holomorphic vector bundles, which seem to be useful in several problems, including value distributions in several complex variables and algebraic number theory [4].
a,
BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. D. Bao and S. Chern, On a notable connection in Finsler geometry, Houston J. of Math. (to appear). 2. N. Berline, E. Getzler and M. Vergne, "Heat Kernels and Dirac Operators, Springer, 1992. 3. W. Blaschke. "Vorlesungen uber Differentialgeometrie, Bd. 1," 1921; Bd. 2, 1923; Bd. 3, 1929. Springer. 4. R Bott and S. Chern, Hermitian vector bundles and the equidistribution of the zeroes of their holomorphic sections, Acta Math. 114 (1965),71-112; also Chern, "Selected Papers, Vol. n," Springer, pp. 399-440. 5. S. Chern, "Complex Manifolds Without Potential Theory, 2nd edition," Springer, 1979. 6. I. M. Gelfand and R. D. McPherson, A combinatorial formula for the Pontryagin classes, Bull. Amer. Math . Soc. 26 (1992),304-309. 7. H . Hopf, Differentialgeometrie und tvpologische Gestalt, ]ahresberichte der Deut. Math. Vereinigung (1932) , 209-229. 8. F. Klein, "Entwicklung der Mathematik im 19. ]ahrhundert," Springer 1926-27; Chelsea 1956. h
226
665 Reprinted from The Sophus Lie Memorial Conference, Scandinavian Univ. Press.
Sophus Lie and diffferential geometry Shiing-Shen Chern 1
Abstract This is t he 150th anniversary of Sophu::; Lie (l Scl2 -99). I think he was a gr cH t mathema.tician even without Lie group::;. In t.he flllluwillg I shall
discu,;s two of his contributions to differential geometry which haw dcYeloped and promiscd to hav(' a futmc.
I
Contact Transformations and Lie Sphere Geometry
1. Contact transformations Let lH h e a manifold of d imension n, T*!vI its cotang(,nt Imndlc. a nd PT' JI it:' projectivized cotangent bundle. It is well kllO\\"ll that PT"_1I has a cont act st ru cture, i.e. , a linear differential forlll n. defi ned up to a factor. sllch that 1 0: 1\ (do:t - i=- 0, ( 1) the latter meaning tha.t the left-h a nd side is never zero. A local diffeomorphism of PT' lII preserving the contact structure is called a cont ac t transformation. If 1'\ i ::; i ::; n, are local coordiuates in .11 . \n' ca n take a = d.r" - P1d.r l _ •.. - Pn _l dxn-1, so that :z;i, 1)" , 1 ::; (\ ::; 17 - l. are local coord inates in PT* 111. Then a contact transformation ca n be written
I
1 ::;
Po satisf~' ing
0:,
{3 ::; n - 1,
1 ::; i, j ::;
11
the co ndition
I I tl _ . . '-PnI -I d X In- I = P(d X n -PI di dJ: In -Pier X
_ ..
· -Pn-Id.l' n- I ) . (:3)
lOepartJllent of :-- Ia( hemat ic5, University of California, Berkeley, California 9~""20 . \York dOlle with partial support of National Foundation grant 01\IS90- 01089.
129
666 p being a function of xj, P{3.
When we have a point transformation in (2), i.e., when X'i are functions of x j only, equation (3) determines p~ as functions of x j ,P{3. Thus a point transformation induces a contact transformation, but contact transformations are more general. Lie wrote a book on contact transformations. whose first volume, coauthored by G. Scheffers, appeared in 1896. The second volume was not finished; three chapters of it, edited by F. Engel, were published as a "Nachlass" in the l\latilematische A.nnalen in 1904. Contact transformations have a broader effect on geometrical structures. For instance, in the (x, y)-plane all the differential equations of the second order Y/I = F( .r. y. y I ) (4) are equivalent under contact transformations . as are the Finsler integrals
.I
F(.T:y.y')d.r.
(5)
In higher dimensions all first-ord er partial differental equations
( . aZ) = O.
(6)
F x' , z, axi
are equivalent under contact transformations. Thus it would be interesting to study the effect of contact transformations on a second-order equation i
a2Z ) = o.
az
1 :S i . j :S n,
F ( x , z, a----'" aa J.
x'
xt x
(7)
An important example of a contact transformation is the Legendre transformation. In three dimensions it can be written x'
= -q,
y'
= P,
z'
=z-
.rp - yq .
pi
= y,
q'
= -x .
(8)
Geometrically the transformation is based on the null system
-yx' + xy' +:' - :
=
o.
(9)
The Legendre transformation has many applications to nonlinear partial differential equations.
130
667
2. Lie sphere geometry Lie proved the remarkable theorem:
All contact transformations in the n-dimensional Euclidean space En which carry spheres into spheres form a finitedimensional group . The theorem is local, and spheres are to be understood in a generalized sense, i.e., oriented spheres including oriented hyperplanes and points, the latter being spheres of radius zero. To prove the theorem we introduce Lie sphere coordinates. For a sphere of center pEEn and radius r its Lie sphere coordinates are the homogeneous coordinates
(10) Xi+2
= p, .
Tn+3
= r,
1 :S i :S n,
where (11 )
They satisfy the relat ion
(x, x) =
-J.·i + ·d + ... + X; +2 -
X;+3
= O.
(12)
It can be shown that the tangency or contact of two spheres with the coordinates x and y is expressed by the polar relation
(.r. y) =
o.
(13)
This includes the generalized cases: for instance, the contact of a point and a sphere means that the point lies on the sphere, etc. From this the theorem can be proYed. The corresponding geometry is called the Lie sphere geometry. Its group is O(n + 1,2)/ ± I . We denote by p n+'2 the projective space with Xl," " X n +3 as homogeneous coordinates. Then equation (12) defines a hyperquadric Qn+l, whose points are generalized spheres of En Qn+l contains lines, but not lineare space of higher dimension. A line on Qn+l can be defined by the points Y, Z such that
(1". Y)
= (Z, Z) = (Y, Z) = O. 131
668 Its space is of dimension 2n - 1 and will be denoted by A2n-l. It has a contact structure defined by the one-form ex = (dY, Z)
(14)
Perhaps the most important objects in Lie sphere geometry are the Legendre submanifolds (15) which annihilate ex. They arise naturally from the unit normal bundle N n - 1 of an immersed manifold 111k ---; En; for x E Mk and v E Nn-l a unit normal vector at x, .-\(v) is the sphere tangent to Mk at x with center on the normal line in the direction of v. We call .-\ the Legendre map. It will likely playa role as important as the Gauss map in euclidean differential geometry. Given a Legendre submanifold (15) , we can define a second fundamental form and principal directions on N n - 1 , for details cf. (5) and T. Cecil and S. Chern, Dupin submanifolds in Lie spilere geometry, Springer Lecture Notes no.1369 , 1- 48 (1989), or Chern, Selected Papers, vol. IV, 269- 330, Springer, 1989. Generalizing the lines of curvature in classical surface theory, a priucipal curve is one which is everywhere tangent to a principal direction. Along a principal curve the lines .-\( v) form a developable. If all these developables are cones, the Legendre submanifold is called a Dupin submanifold. Consider the classical case n = 3, I.: = 2. The normal lines to the surface JI./2 have as envelope two focal sufaces. The Dupin condition means that they degenerate to curves. It is easy to show that they are conics. FollO\\"ing Dupin the surface itself is called a cyclide. The Dupin submanifolds are a natural generalization of the Dupin cyclides, and we have shown that they are best treated by Lie sphere geometry. In spite of their simple geometric characterization, in higher dimensions they demonstrate exotic phenomena and have not been COlllpletely classified. Their study is clearly an important problem in Lie sphere geometry. Dupin submanifolds are closely related to a global property of imbedded submanifolds in En , that of tautness. A compact submanifold k[k in En is called taut if the distance function dist( a, x), x E Mk, has the minimum number of critical points for all points a E En. Under 132
669 some mild conditions, Dupin submanifolds and taut submanifolds have been identified. The geometrical reason seems to be clear because both concepts are intimately involved with the spheres in En. Many important geometries can be built as a subgeometry of Lie sphere geometry. In fact, let Xo E pn+2 be a time-like point, i.e. (xo, xo) < 0, and call points the points x E Qn+l such that (xo: x) = O. This gives Mbius geometry, whose space has spheres and points. Similarly, let Xl E pn+2 be a space-like point, i.e., (Xl, Xl) > 0, and call hyperplanes the points X E Qn+l such that (Xl, X) = O. This gives Laguerre geometry, where we have spheres and hyperplanes. 'When both Xo and Xl are given, one time-like and one space-like, we get the non-euclidean hyperbolic geometry.
II
Surfaces of Translation and Web Geometry
3. Surfaces of translation Lie expanded an idea of I\longe and used surfaces of translation to study minimal surfaces. We recall that a surface of translation in E3 is defined by equations of the form (16) .r 1 = Ii (u) + 9i (V ) , 1:::; i :::; 3 whose parametric curves are called the directrix curves. For an oriented surface Min E3 described by the point x(u, v) we take the orthollormal frames xele2e3 , such that e3 is the unit normal vector. Then we call write
dx
+ W2 C2 ~(..JI + iW2)( e l
""leI
-
ie2)
+
complex conjugate.
The form (17)
defines the induced complex structure on 111. Using it , we have
Using the structure equations in E3, the exterior differentiation of this equation gives the interesting formula ( 18)
133
670 where H is the mean curvatue. This gives the theorem: M is a minimal surface (i. e., H only if the coordinate functions are harmonic. Suppose M is a minimal sufrace. Then the curve
y=
= 0) if and
J
ax
is holomorphic. Moreover, we have
(ax, ax)
=
(19)
O.
Such a curve is called isotrophic or minimal. Thus we have the theorem of Monge: A minimal surface is a surface of trallslation whose directrix curves are conjugate isotropi1ic curves. Lie exploited this theorem plus the fact that the equations of an isotropic curve can be put in a finite form involving an arbitrary function. He obtained in this way many concrete minimal surfaces. An example is the surface
In this way it is possible to get real minimal surfaces, but they are more complicated. It must have been a divine inspiration that he considered surfaces of double translation. These are surfaces which are surfaces of translation in two different ways. For such a surface there are four families of directrix curves. Take a direct rix curve and cut its tangent lines by the plane at infinity. The resulting curve of intersection does not depend on the choice of the curve in the family. Thus in the plane at infinity we have four curves. Lie's theorem says that these four curves belong to the same algebraic curve of degree four . Such a question drew his attention because mathematicians are interested in exotic objects as well as the general theory. If the surface is given in the non-parametric form z = f(x, y),
the condition for it to be a surface of translation is a partial differential equation of the form R( x, y, z, p, q)r
+ S(x, y, z, p, q)s + T(x, y, z, p, q)t = 134
O.
(21)
671
A surface of double translation satisfies an overdetermined system consisting of two such equations. The study of its integrability conditions is a formidable task, on which Lie was unexcelled. The theorem also has a beautiful proof by Darboux. Lie tried to extend the result to high dimensions, without complete success. The extension was finally completed by W . Wirtinger in 1938, using Chow coordinates. The general problem is best viewed by web geometry, which we will discuss in the following section.
4. Web geometry Web geometry was founded by W . Blaschke in 1926. It is the local theory of a number of foliations. I would like to discuss one of its fundamental problems , which contains Lie's theorem as a special case and which is even now not completely solved. In Rn we consider d foliations of co dimension one in general position. If xi , 1 :::; i :::; n, are the coordinates in Rn, they can be defined by the equations 1:::; ex:::; d, (22) where the functions are supposed to be smooth and satisfy some generality conditions. Such a geometric object is called a d-web of codimension one. An equation of the form (23) poses a condition on the web and is called an Abelian equation. The maximum number of linearly independent Abelian equations is called the rank of the web. In 1934 the author of this paper proved that the rank of a d-web of codimension one in R n has a universal upper bound 1
-rr(d, n) = 2(n _ 1) {(d - l)(d - n)
+ s(n -
s - I)} ,
(24)
where s is defined by s
== -d + 1 mod
n - 1,
O:::;s:::;n-2.
(25)
-rr(d, n) has been called the Castelnuovo number. It is the maximum genus of an algebraic curve of degree d in the projective space pn , 135
672
which does not belong to a hyperplane pn-l. In particular we have n(2n, n) = n + 1, and the corresponding Abelian equations can be written
(26) n+l::;a::;2n
These common expressions define III Rn + 1 a hypersurface of double translation and Lie's case corresponds to n = 2. Abelian equations are of fundamental importance in mathematics, because they generalize the addition formulas of classical functions, such as the circular and elliptic functions . From the point of view of web geometry a fundamental problem is that of "linearization" : when a web of maximum rank is given, can the local coordinates be so chosen that all the leaves of the foliations are linear spaces? The answer is not always affirmative. However, by a lengthy argument, Griffiths and I proved the theorem: In R n a normal d-web of codimension 1 and rank n(d, n), d ~ 2n, is linearizable. The issue is wether the "normality" condition can be dropped. Recently Robert Bryant showed that this is indeed the case if n :S 12 (unpublished). Very likely the normality condition is unnecessary for all n. For an expository account of web geometry, cf. reference 4.
5.
Conclusion
It is clear that transformation groups play an important role in all areas of mathematics. In the last decades there have been vigorous developments on abstract Lie groups and Lie algebras. They probably only touch the tip of Lie's work. A global theory of intransitive Lie transformation groups will heavily involve deep analysis and geometry, and awaits attention and progress. Lie has many interesting individual theorems, such as the Lie quadrics in projective surface theory, the Lie transforms of surfaces of constant Gaussian curvature, etc., etc., Fortunately, his "Gesammelte Abhandlungen" are available.
136
673
References [1] Sophus Lie and Georg Scheffers, Geometrie der Beriihrungstransformationen, Leipzig, 1896; second edition, Chelsea, Bronx, New York , 1977. [2] Sophus Lie , "Drei Kapitel aus dem unvollendeten zweiten Bande der Geometrie der Berhrungstransformationen" , Math. Annalen 59, 193- 313 (1904), aus dem Nachlass herausgegeben von F. Engel. [3] Sophus Lie, Gesmnmelte Abhandlungen, Leipzig, 1922-1960. [4] Chern, S., "Web geometry". Bulletin A . M. S. 6 . 1-8, 1982; also Chern, Selected Paper, vol. IV, 51- 58, Springer, 1989. [5] Cecil, T ., Lie Sphere Geometry, Springer 1992.
137
Math. Ann. 302, 581 - 600 (1995)
Amalen
@ Springer-Vcrlag 1995
Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem ShiingShen Chernls*, Shanyu Ji2,* MSRI, Department of Mathematics, University of California, Berkeley, CA 94270, USA Department of Mathematics, University of Houston, Houston, TX 77204, USA Received: 1 March 1994 /Revised version: 8 September 1994
1 Introduction A main purpose of this paper is to point out the rble that projective geometry plays in complex function theory. In one complex variable a cardinal fact is that the group of all holomorphic transformations leaving the unit disc invariant is a group of linear fractional transformations. Also the Schwarzian derivative is a projective invariant. In Cn with the coordinates zg, 1 a $ n, consider a domain D bounded by a real-analytic hypersurface
The work of Bochner-Fefferman P o ] [Fe] relates the biholomorphic geometry of D to the CR-geometry of its boundary dD. B. Segre suggested the consideration of the complex hypersurfaces
regarding the w a as parameters. With these hypersurfaces as a generalization of hyperplanes Hachtroudi [HI in 1937 introduced a projective connection or a generalized projective geometry. Such a projective structure will be within the holomorphic category and should be very useful, but we do not know how to define one for general domains. Instead we will restrict ourselves to a particular problem, viz., the problem of a generalization of Riemann's mapping theorem to higher dimensions. The Riemann mapping theorem asserted that any simply connected domain in C that is not the whole plane is biholomorphic to the unit disc. However for domains in C" where n > l , the situation becomes very subtle and *~esearch partially supported by National Science Foundation
582
S.-S. Chern,
S. Ji
complicated. As a well-known example due to Poincarb, the unit polydisc in C2 is not biholomorphic to the unit ball B2. Even for domains with smooth boundaries, the complex ellipsoid D := {(z, IV) E C211z12+ lw14 < 1) cannot be biholomorphic to the ball B2 [B, p. 2371. There are a few results around this problem: Wong-Rosay's theorem about a domain with C2 smooth boundary and with a transitive automorphic group [Wo] [R], Fridman's approximate Riemann mapping theorem [Fr], Stoll's theorem about strict parabolic manifolds [Sto], Bochner P o ] and Feffeman's works [Fe] about reduction from a domain equivalence problem into a boundary equivalence problem. Besides, the result of Cartan-Chem-Moser [Ca] [CM] can be regarded as a local version of the Riemann mapping theorem. For more information, see the nice survey papers by Bell and Stanton [B] [St]. In 1975, the first author showed [C] that a projective connection, called Hachtroudi connection in this paper, can be intrinsically defined over the Segre family associated to a real-analytic hypersurface in C n f ' ,which is a generalization of an early work of Hachtroudi [HI and of the classical projective geometry. The solution of local equivalence problem for Segre families was also found in [C] (cf. [F]), which is an analogue of the solution of the local equivalence problem for real hypersurfaces in Cn+' by Cartan-ChernMoser [Ca] [CM]. And as a consequence, one has a standard local property: given a Segre family, its Hachtroudi connection is flat if and only if it is locally isomorphic to the Segre family of the unit ball B"" (i.e., complex hyperquadric), which is an analogue of the similar local result in the CR-manifold theory. In the CR-manifold theory, a domain D in en+'whose Cartan connection is flat over aD may not be globally biholomorphic to B"+', by the example of Bums-Shnider P S I . However, for a Segre family AD,when its Hachtroudi connection is flat, we obtain the following global result.
Theorem 1. Let D c Cn+' be a bounded domain whose boundary
is a smooth connected recrl-crnalytic hypersurfizce, where r is a real-analytic jicnction defined on Cn+'.Then the jollowing three statements ure equivalent: (i) There is a hololnorphic mapping g : Cn+' + Cn+'such that the Jucobiun det(Dg) = constant and that the restriction g : D -,Bn+' is biholomorphic. smooth, liftable, non(ii) The Segre fimily AD is defined on degenerate and locally isomorphic to the Segre family MBn+1,and there is one +U(O) such that g(dD n U(0))c dBn+'n(l(o) biholomorphic mapping g : qo) and such that det(Dg) = constant, where U(o) and U(o) are open subsets in Cn+' with aD n U(o)0 and dBn+'n(l(o, 0. (iii) is dejned on C2n+2, smooth, liftable, non-degenerate, and the associated Hachtroudi connection is flat, and there is one local biholomorphjc g us in (ii). mapping Moreover, from (ii) or (iii), the local mapping g can be extended into the global mapping g in (i).
-
+
+
676 Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
583
If we drop off the conditions det(Dg) == constant for the local mapping g in (ii) and (iii), its global extension g may not be holomorphic on ern + l . For example, for 0 < lal < I, the function g(z) := ~ :z : BI -+ BI defines a local CR-isomorphic mapping near a boundary point, but g cannot be extended as an entire function. The remaining question is: if D is a simply connected domain of realanalytic boundary whose boundary defining function is only defined on a neighborhood of 15, and if the Hachtroudi connection is flat wherever it is defined, is there a biholomorphic mapping from D onto Bn +!? Maybe some stronger conditions on D are necessary. More generally, how to define a projective structure over a domain with smooth boundary? There is a restricted notion of equivalence of domains: either two domains are equivalent if there is an biholomorphism of all of ern+! whose restriction to one domain maps it onto the other, or two domains are related if there is an entire mapping whose restriction to one domain gives a biholomorphic mapping onto the other domain, and extend this relation to an equivalent relation. Theorem I seems to be related to the second of these. Let us discuss some ideas about the proof. Since we have a local isomorphism, a naive approach is to make holomorphic extension. However the extension situation here is delicate. In fact, Bums and Shnider [BS] constructed a hypersurface in er2 which is real-analytic, compact, strictly pseudoconvex, spherical (i.e., aD is locally CR-isomorphic to the unit sphere), and a nonextensible local holomorphic map from the unit sphere into this hypersurface. Therefore, it should be very difficult to extend a mapping from .A8"+1 to j t D . SO we approach our problem by making holomorphic extension from .AD to .A8 "+1. To show Theorem 1, a basic idea is to regard Theorem I as an analogue of the following result:
f
Lemma 1. (Pincuk) [Pi, I, theorem 2]. Let aD c ern+! be a compact, simply connected, spherical, real-analytic hypersurface. Then aD is CR-isomorphic to aB n +!. We are going to present a new proof of Lemma 1 (see Sect. 5), and Theorem 1 will follow in a similar way. In our new proof of Lemma 1, the following classical Poincare theorem played an important role: Lemma 2. (Poincare). Let U C ern+! be an open subset with Un aBn+ 1 *0. Let f : U -+ ern + 1 be a holomorphic mapping such that
f(U n aBn + l ) C aBn + 1
r
Then is constant or the form
r extends to be an automorphism of Bn+
1
which is in
S.-S. Chem, S. Ji
584
where
For n = 1, Lemma 2 was first proved by PoincarC [PI in 1907. For n > 1, this result was proved by Tanaka [T, I]. It was also rediscovered by Pelles [Pel and Alexander [A]. In order to prove Theorem 1 along the same line, we shall establish the following generalization of PoincarC theorem for A B n + t . Theorem 2. Let U c Let F : U -, F(U)C form of
be uiz open connected subset with U n ABn+l +O. a biholo~norphicmapping wlziclz is in the
a2"+'be
such t11ut
F(U n A B n + ~) c ,KBn+~ . Tllen F extends to be a birutioizal mapping from IdB.n+~ to itself such that
where all a;, 6:: E C are complex numbers. Throughout this article small Greek indices will run from 1 to n and the summation convention will be adopted. The authors wish to thank James Faran for giving helpful comments and suggestions to improve our first version of the manuscript. In particular, the original proof of Theorem 2 was long and the proof presented here is suggested by Faran.
2 Segre family a Segre family we mean a complex analytic hypersurface in an open subset
c an+'x c"", defined up to a complex analytic automorphism in each of the two factors. Denote by zJ, lk,1 5 j, k $ n + 1, respectively the coordinates Q
Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
585
in these spaces. We suppose the hypersurface A C 12 be defined by an equation
where the left-hand side is a complex analytic function in its two arguments. Suppose A is smooth. On A let
Let 8, f30L (resp. 8,OU) be linearly independent holomorphic I-forms in the zspace (resp. c-space). They are defined up to a transformation
where u 9 0, det(u;) 9 0, det(v!)
+0 .
Then we have defined a G-structure, where G is the group of all complex matices
(" &) uu
+
with u 0, det(u;)
0
vu
+0, der($) +0. We have
for some holomorphic functions
&. The condition
is invariant under the change (2). The Segre family is called non-degenerate, if (3) is satisfied. As a basic example of Segre family, we consider any domain D c Cn+' whose boundary is given by a real-analytic hypersurface
where r is a real-analytic function defined on C n f l .Then this associates a Segre family
2 contains a neighborhood of where the 12 is some open subset in C Z n f which we say that the Segre family AD the conjugate diagonal. When 12 = is defined on C2n+2.For example, when D = Bn+' is the unit ball, ABn+, = + wq - 1 = 0) is defined on C Z n f 2 .
679 S.-S. Chern, S. Ji
586
We denote
(5) A Segre family A is called liftable if there is a discrete set Ll C ([,,+1 such that for any compact curve y C ([,,+1 - Ll started from p, for any point PEA with "Ttl (P) = p where "Ttl (z", W, (II. '1) = (z'r, w) is the projection, there exists a compact curve yeA started from P with "TtICY) = y. We need this definition for some technical reason. This definition is equivalent to a local one: there is a discrete set Ll C ([n+ I and a constant f: > 0 such that for any ball B( q, f:) in ([n+ I with center q and with radius 1'" any compact curve y E B( q, e) - Ll started from a point p, any point PEA with "Tt1(P) = p , there is a compact curve yeA started from P with "Ttl CY) = y. As examples, .;I{8"+1 is liftable with Ll = {a}; if g : ([n+1 --+ ([n+1 is a locally biholomorphic mapping and D = g-I(Bn+l), then AD is liftable with Ll = g-I(O). The non-degeneracy of .;I{D implies that the real hypersurface iJD is nondegenerate. If in addition the Hachtroudi connection is flat, the Cartan connection over the real hypersurface iJD is flat [F, theorem 5.11], and thus iJD is spherical. For a general domain D, .;I{D may be degenerate (See Example 2).
3 Local criterion for non-degeneracy Let DC
([n+1
be a domain such that AD is smooth. Let (z(O)a w(O) r(O) '1(0» E AD P(0) .= . " ~" ,
with (6)
By the implicit function theorem, we have a unique holomorphic function p near the point (z(O)a , (~O), '1(0» such that
We may replace the equation r iJ Pa := iJ;'
iJ
p~ := iJ~ '
=0
iJp pll := iJ(/I'
by w - p(z'. , (a, '1)
p~ : =
iJ2 P iJz"iJ'1'
= O. Let iJ2 P
p~ := iJzaiJ(~'
iJ2 P Pa.11 := iJza.iJz/l
as functions of z", (a., '1. Note Pa.~
= Plla.·
(7)
By (6) and the implicit function theorem again, we have a unique holomorphic function '1 = '1(za. , w, (a.) near (z(O)a., w(O), (~O». Then the above functions Pa., P~ , p P, p~, Pp and Pa.P can be restricted on AtD as functions of variables z«, w,{o:.
680 Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
Consider dpa. = P~/ldzfl + p~d (fl + p~d 1'/ on dw = Pa.dz'" + pfid(/I + p"dl'/, we have
dll
587 ([2n+2.
Since on AD we have
dw - Pa.dza. - p11d(fI
= --~---=--.!.. pq
,
and
dpa.
P~Pfl) p~ = ( P~/I- - dz lI + -dw+ pq p"
( p~ - pZpfl). - d~fI ' pq
(8)
Here we used a fact pq(p(O»=t=O by (6).
Proposition 1. Let Dc
([1/+1
be a domain such that AD is smooth. Let
p(O) := (z(O)a., w(O), (~o>, 17(0» E AD satisfying (6). Theil the /ollOll'ing three statements are equivalent: (i) ./ltD is non-degenerate at p(O). (ii) 8, 8a., 8a. are linearly independent near p(O), where (9) ( 10) (11)
lind
(iii) The determinant d etC q~ )(p(O» =t= 0
(12 )
Proof By (6), q~ is well-defined. By (8) and (7) we have d8
= i8a. /\ (~~ 8 + q~d(p) = i8a. /\ 8a. . lp"
(\3 )
(ii) ¢:} (iii): 8, 8a., 8~ are linearly independent near p(O) is equivalent to 8/\8 1 /\ .. ·/\8 n /\ . .. /\8 1 /\, . ·/\8/1 = i det(q~ )dw/\dz l /\ • • ·/\dzn /\d( 1/\' . ·/\d(1/ =t= 0, at p(o) . (ii) =? (i): By (13). (i) =? (iii): Because the non-degeneracy is independent of the coframes.
o We make a remark. For any point PE'//{D with (ra.,rw)=t=(O) and (rfi,rq)=t= (0), if (6) is not satisfied, we can take an isomorphic linear transformation of ([2n+2 in the form
F(za., W,(/Iol'/) = (a~za.
+ bw,cxza. + dw,Aa.(a. + BII,Ca.(a. +Drf) = (z*a., w*,(~,1'/*) (14 )
S.-S. Chem,
588
S. Ji
where a,, b, c,, d , A', B, Cu, D are constant. We can choose suitable a,, b, c", d , ) (6) Au,B, Cu,D such that the point P* = F ( P ) E F ( A D ) = M F ( ~satisfies under the new coordinates system. We make another remark. When ( 6 ) is satisfied, we can use either the i,) or the coordinates system (zu,W , pa). Let P E AD coordinates system (zU,+v, satisfying ( 6 ) and ADbe non-degenerate. Consider the holomorphic mapping
whose Jacobian matrix is
From ( 6 ) , (za,w,[,) is a coordinates system near the point P in AD.Restricting the mapping H on ADnear the point P = (zu,w,[,, v), it induces a holomorphic map (z', t v , [,) w (zz,+v, p,) whose Jacobian matrix
is non-singular thanks to Proposition 1 . So near the point P we can use new coordinates (zU,w,p a ) instead of the coordinates (zu,w,[,). Under this new coordinates, the 1-forms in (9), (10) and ( 1 1 ) become
where pup = pb, are holomorphic functions. By the way, the coordinates system (zU,+v,[,)was used in F], while (zu,w,p,) was used in [C]. The formula ( 1 5 ) is the same as the one [C, ( 3 ) ] where pap was denoted by rap Example I . Let D = Bn+' C C n f ' be the unit ball. Its Segre family ADis also called the complex lzyperyuadric. Let P E M D be a point. When ( 6 ) is satisfied at P, i.e., w+0 and v+0, i.e., zu[,+l, we have
9, = dp, = -
Here
ia i(dw - ppdzb) i(1 - Z V [ ~ )
+
~ ( 6 2-; rS[,61; zY5,) dry, and ( 1 -z'CI2
+ zb[,) 4i= - lv(6i -( 1 ?[,6! -z'TO2
Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
589
Exumple 2. Let D := { ( z , w ) E C211z(2p+ IwI2P < 1)- where p E Z . D is ' the unit ball with respect to the norm Il(z,w)I12 = IzI2P + llv1*P in the Hilbert space C 2 . By functional analysis, it was known that D is biholomorphic to B2 if and only if p = 1. Let us show that ADis degenerate at some point (z,.?!) when p > 1. Since r = zprp + wPqP - 1, we have
Take P = ( 0 , 1 , 0 , 1 )E AD. Then r,(P) w=
+0, and rq(P)=t=0. Write
(1 - zpp)'lp
near P .
r]
By direct computation, we know
When p 2 2, q t ( ~=) 0. By Proposition 1 , ADis degenerate at P
4 Hachtroudi connection Let D c C"" be a domain such that ADis smooth and non-degenerate. We have defined a 1-form 8 on dflD by (1). Following [CM] [C], we define a 1-form w:=ue, U * O , U E C , (16) and we consider the holomorphic bundle &' over ADdefined by
Then the I-form o is intrinsically defined on B and hence a global holomorphic I-form on 8. For any point P = (zZ,l.v, la,r ] ) E AD,by the non-degeneracy, there is a neighborhood U of P in ADon which there are holomorphic 1-forms €la and 0, satisfying dB G dBa = 0, mod(B,Ba), dB dBa = 0, mod(B,B,), dB=iBar\Ba+Br\4
-
for some holomorphic 1-form 4. Let us define a holomorphic principal bundle g over dlu, where {(P,uB)lP E U,u+O). Consider all sets of I-forms on &'Iu,
such that (a) o is as above.
&'Iu
:=
S.-S. Chern, S. Ji
590
(b) ma is the pull back under projection of some multiple of 0" (i.e., oa= u;Ofi uaO for some holomorphic functions u; and ua). (c) w , is the pull back under projection of some multiple of 0, (i.e., wa = P vaO v!0p for some holomorphic functions va and v,). (d) dw = i o a A w , + w A 4. Then the set Y of all such (a,ma,ma,4 ) is a principal bundle over dlu with the structure group GI given by the complex matrices
+
+
with uivf = 6!. Therefore the I-forms
+
where u 0, uivf = us!, are globally and intrinsically defined over Y. The bundle Y -+ &Iu is indeed defined over Y -+ I. We denote YD by this principal bundle. The forms wu, o, and 4 are globally defined on YD.
Lemma 3. [Cj. There m e n2 + 2n + 1 more uniquely determined holomorphic 4~ and $ on Y D such that the forms I-fbrms @, r#$,
are linearly independent and satisjj
684 Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
59 1
where
und
:s!i = RE, = T:' = Qz = 0. These forms @, $;,4Pund $ are completely determined these conditions.
dy
The first (n + 2)2 - 1 equations above are called the structure equations, and the forms @,! @", @,, Y are called curvatures. We denote
These forms a, in fact define the Huchtroudi connection X D , which is a Cartan connection, on the principal bundle gD (cf. IF, proposition 4.151 [C]) given by: = 2ioa , Gf = 20.1, TI: = mu,
i
?I:
- 6 : ~ := $!,
X:
= -i&,
4:; - X:
x ; + ~= !@,
=4 ,
TI:+,
(23
= -$$
W e say that the Hachtroudi connection TID is flat i f the curvature forms @,! @", @, Y all vanish on gD. Given two smooth, non-degenerate Segre families MD, and A D , , and given points P I E AD,and P2 E AD,.Let gDIand g D , be the associated principal bundles, and let and c y ) , j = 1,2,. . .,(n + 2)' - 1, be the invariant forms over gD,and Y D , , respectively. A local biholomorphic mapping F : J ~ D -+, MD, with F ( P I )= P2 is called a local isomorphism if for some (and hence every) coframe { 8 ( 2 ) , 0:')) in the G-structure of A D , near P2, the coframe {O(I) = F * @ Z ) , =~ * e ( ~ 6:')) ~ = ,F*OY)) is in the G-smcture of AD, near P I .
4')
685 S.-S. Chern, S. Ii
592
Lemma 4. Let
"I( D, and "I( D: be two smooth non-degenerate Segre families. Suppose PI E ,/I(D, and P 2 E A D2 . Let F be a local isomorphism from AD, to "I(D2 with F(P I ) = P 2. Then F is locally the restriction of a biholomorphic mapping <en + I x <en + I -+ <e n+ 1 x <e n+ 1 given by
(z~, w, (~, '1)
f-+
(1(1 )(z~, w), . . . ,J(n+ I )(z~, W ),J( 1)( (~, '1), . .. ,J(n+ 1)( (~, '1») .
Proof If both the points PI and P 2 satisfy (6), Lemma 4 is a known result [F, Proposition 2.7]. If (6) is not satisfied for PI, or P 2, or for both the points, we can take a biholomorphic linear transformations HI and H2 in the form (14) to get a commutative diagram "I(D,
!
F
-+
"I(D2
!
H,
H2
F-
"I( H,(DIl
-+
"I( H2(02)
so that (6) is satisfied for the points Hl(Pd E HI (,/I(D, ) = AH,(o'), and H2 (P 2 ) E H2 ("I(0,) = "I(D2' Thus by [F, Proposition 2.7] again, F* as well as F = H 2- 1 0 F* 0 HI is in the desired form. 0 Notice that by Lemma 4, Theorem 2 can be restated as: any local isomorphism F : ,/1(8"+' -+ "I(8n+' can be extended to be a birational mapping of ,,1(8"+' .
A local isomorphism F : ,,1(0, -+ ,/1(0: induces a local biholomorphic map. en::.. &/ &/ • h en::* a (2) -- a (I). I , 2 , ... , ( n + 2)2 -. I We pmg :II' -~ D, -+ -~ D2 Wit :II' j ,j j also call such g; a local isomorphism. Conversely, any local isomorphism g; : i5.!J D, -+ i5.!JD2 induces a local isomorphism F : ,,1(0, -+ ,,1(02'
5 A new proof of Lemma 1 The following lemma is standard from Frobenius theorem and the uniqueness of the fundamental theorem of ordinary differential equations.
Lemma 5. Let aj and ai be l-forms on n-dimensional real (resp. real-analytic, or complex) manifolds M andM, respective/y, j = 1,2, ... ,n. Let p E M and p EM. Suppose al 1\ .. . 1\ an =F 0 and al 1\ .. . 1\ all =F 0 in neighborhoods of p in M and of p in M, respectively. Suppose that on some neighborhoods of p and ft we have dak
= Ckj/aj 1\ ai,
dak
= Ckj/aj 1\ a/
for all k,j, I with some constants Ckj/' Then there exists a unique local smooth diffeomorphic (resp. real-analytic diffeomorphic, or biholomorphic) mapping F with F(p) =p and F*aj = aj, i = 1,2, ... ,n.
Let D C <e n+ 1 be a domain such that aD is a smooth, non-degenerate, real-analytic hypersurface. There is a natural CR-structure on aD. By [CM], we can define the half-line bundle E over aD, the principal bundle Y,JO over E,
Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
593
and (n + 2)2 - 1 invariant I-forms uj on Ym with the structure equations and curvatures. We also define the Cartan connection nm (Comparing 8,YD, C j , XD defined in Sect. 4). We want to give another version of Lemma 2 (Poincart theorem) below in terms of the principal bundle YdD.
Lemma 6. Let dBn+' c C"" be the uizit sphere und YaBn+l the ussociated principul bundle. Let p I , ,p2E K,Bn+~be any t~vopoirzts. Then there is u unique I $12,g * a j = a,, V j d~ffeomorphismF : YrlBn+1-' Y,lBn+~ sutiSfYiizg F ( ~) = and the mupping 9 is induce0 by a unique uutoinorphism f E Aut(Bn+') kvlzich is in the form f (z", *v) = (f (')(zU,w), .. . ,f (n+')(zU,w))
Proof: It was well known that na~.+I is flat. Then the structure equations are the same in a neighborhood Ul of y l in Y , > B n + ~ and in a neighborhood U2 of ~2 in Yi3Bn+l. Apply Lemma 5, there is a unique diffeomorphism 9 from UI to U2 with F(pI) = ,p2 and 9 * o j = aj, j = 1,2,. . .,(n + 1)2 - 2, where we may shrink Ul and U2 if necessary. Then 9 induces a unique local CRisomorphism f from (dBn+', p l ) to (dBn+',pz), where pi is the projection of pj into (En+', j = 1,2. Since dBn+' is real-analytic hypersurface, f can be extended to a local biholomorphic mapping. By Lemma 2, f must be extended as an automorphism of B"+'. It was well-known that every component or f("+') of f is a linear fractional map as above. Therefore such f induces a local isomorphism F : Yi,Bn+l + YaB,,+~which coincides the previous mapping on Ul. Lemma 6 follows. Lemma 7. Let dD c c"" be a sphericul, real-anulytic Izypersurface, und ;I be a compact curve started jiom u point p on dD. The11 uny locul biholomorphic mupping g defined on a neighborhood U of p in a"+' with g(dDnU) c dBn+' can be extended ~~Iong y as u locally biholonzorplzic mupping.
Proof: Write y : [0, 11
-
do, t
++
y(t) with y(0) = p .
Suppose g can be extended at all points y(t), 0
4 t
g cannot be extended at the point y(c) .
1, but
(24)
We must find a contradiction with (24). Since dD is spherical, by the solution of local equivalence problem on CR-manifolds [CM], there is another local CR-isomorphism f defined on a
687 594
S.-S. Chern, S. Ii
neighborhood U of the point y(c) in aD to aBn + l • Take a point y(cd E U, where 0 < CI < c. Take a point p E YaD whose projection into aD is y(cl)' Let fF and ~ be induced local isomorphisms of f and 9 at P from YaD to YaB"+I, respectively. Let
be two points in YaB"+I. Apply Lemma 6, there is unique h E Aut(B"+ I ) such that its induced mapping :Yt' : YiJB"+1 -+ YiJBn+1 satisfies :Yt'(p!) = 'j5g . Then ~(p) = :Yt'ofF(p). By the uniqueness of Lemma 5, this infers that ~ = :Yt'ofF. By the standard argument in CR-manifold theory, 9 = h a f. Since f is defined on U and h is defined on aBn+ l , 9 is extended on U. This is a contradiction with (24). Finally, 9 is locally biholomorphically by Lemma 5. 0 Proof of Lemma 1. As above, there is a local CR-isomorphism 9 : aD -+ aBn + 1 near some point p E aD. By Lemma 7, 9 can be extended along any compact curve y started from p inside aD as a locally biholomorphic mapping. Since aD is simply connected, we have defined a CR-mapping g : aD -+ aB n + l • Since iJD and aB n + 1 are real-analytic hypersurfaces, 9 must be the restriction of a holomorphic mapping defined on a neighborhood of aD. Then applying the inverse mapping theorem, because iJB n+ 1 is simply connected and D is bounded, we can construct the inverse mapping g-I : aBn + 1 -+ iJD. So Lemma I follows . 0
6 Proof of Theorem 2 Let G be an m dimensional Lie group with Lie algebra g. A left-invariant 1form w on G is called a Maurer-Cartanform. The Maurer-Cartan connection of the Lie group G associates to each X E T( G) the left-invariant vector field that it generates, X -+ {V = Lg.X : 9 E G} In other words, the Maurer-Cartan connection on G is given by the g-valued I-form w such that w(A)=A , VAEg. So w is left-invariant on G. Let E I , E 2 , ... , Em be a basis for the Lie algebra g and write w = wiEi where wi is a real valued I-form. It follows that each wi is also a MaurerCartan form, and {WI , . . . , wm } is linearly independent. Thus (25) where C ik are the constants. This is the structural equation of the Lie group G. Henc~ the Maurer-Cartan connection is given by the Maurer-Cartan forms wl, . . . , w m
595
Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
If f is a local diffeomorphism from G to G which preserves all MaurerCartan forms, then by Lemma 5 and (25), f must be a left translation .
(26)
Let us review some known results about the complex hyperquadnc AB.+l [F, p. 147-1491 [CM]. By the natural embedding (En" x (En" C lPn+' x IPn+', ABn+~ can be considered as a hypersurface in IP"" x lPn+'. Using the linear fractional map (En+' x Cn" 4 Cn" x (En+' given by 2uz u - i 2u, -v-i u + i l u + i 9 - u + i 9 -U+i) '
- -
becomes the complex hyperquadric Q C IP"" x lPn+' given by
where zO,... ,zn+' are homogeneous coordinates for the first IP"" and co,.. ., t;,,+' homogeneous coordinates for the second P"". Define the hermitian scalar product (z,t;) := $ ( z " + ~ <j,,+lzo)-zzt;a. ~Then Q is given by (z,t;) = 0.By Qframe we mean an ordered set of ( 2 n f 2 ) vectors ZO,Z I ,. . .,Zn+1,ZO,Z ' , . . . ,Z n f in (~11+2 such that (ZA,zB)= h;, where
and
det(Zo,Z I ,. . .,Zn+1) = d e t ( z O , z ' ., . .,z"+' ) = 1 The special linear group SL(n + 1 ) acts on Q-frames by ZA* = zA*
~
Z
,B
= LBbChAzD D B C
-
7
where 4 E SL(n + 2), bia? = g, and h f h g = 6;. There is exactly one element of SL(n + 2 ) maps one Q-frame to another. By fixing one Q-frame, SL(n 2 ) can be identified with the set of all Q-frames. For any Q-frame Z A , Z ~ (Z0,Z0) , is a point of Q. Then the action of SL(n 2 ) on the set of all Q-frames induces an action on Q. So Q is a homogeneous space with the group SL(n 2 ) as its group of automorphisms, and
+
+
+
where H is the isotropy subgroup of SL(n + 2), i.e., the subgroup fixing (Zo,zO) E Q. The Maurer-Cartan forms of SL(n + 2 ) are the same as given in (23). The structures equations of the Lie group SL(n 2) are the same as the ones of qBn+l.Then by Lemma 5, SL(n + 2 ) is locally isomorphic [F, Theorem 4.331. to qjl~"+~
4
+
689 S.-S. Chern, S. Ii
596
Proof q[ Theorem 2. From the given local map F, it induces a local isomorphism!F from I1JJ 8n+1 to I1JJ 8"+1. Since locally I1JJ8"+1 ~ SL(n + 2), F also induces a local isomorphism !F from SL(n + 2) to SL(n + 2). Since $;"* (Jj = (Jj, 'Vj, where (Jj are the forms defined in (22). Then !F*n:! = n:!, 'VA,B, i.e., !F preserves all the Maurer-Cartan forms on SL(n + 2). By (26), ~ must be a left translation of SL( n +2). Thus ~ induces a action on ..;/{8"+1. Therefore the local 1 map F which induces ~ must be a linear transformation of IP n +1 x wn+ By restriction on ([11+1 X ([n+1 with the non-homogeneous coordinates (z", w, (,,' '1), F must be in the form of the desired linear fractional map. 0 Corollary 1. Let Bn+1 C ([n+1 be the unit ball and I1JJ 8"+1 the associated principal bundle. Let PI, P2 E I1JJ 8"+1 be any two points. Then there is a unique local isomorphism ~ from I1JJ8"+1 to I1JJB"+I such that !FCfJ d = ,fJ2 and the mapping !F is induced by a unique birational mapping F : ..;/{8n+1 --+ v-/t 8"+1 which is of the form
F(z", w, (,,' '1) =
(j< I )(ZX, w), . .. ,j(II+1 )(z", w ),j(l)( (,,' '1), ... ,j(n+l)( (,,' '1»)
, (27)
where F is the same as in Theorem 2.
7 Proof of Theorem 1 Lemma 8. Let 9 : ([11+1 --+ ([n+1 be a locally biholomorphic mapping. Suppose D := g-I(Bn+l). Then ..;/{D is defined on ([2n+2, smooth, liftable, nondegenerate and n:D is fiat.
Proof In fact, since the mapping 9 = (g(l), ... ,g(n+I» holomorphic mapping from ([2n+2 to itself r '1 ) G( z " ,w, .,,,,
induces a locally bi-
(,w , ) , ... , 9(n+I)( zIX ,w ),g 7;(1)(7 = (91 ) z, "IX' -) '1 , . .. , -(n+I)(7 9 "IX' -») '1
such that G : ..;/{D
--+ ..;/{ 8"+ 1
is locally biholomorphic, smoothness, non-degeneracy and the flatness follow by definition. ..;/{D is clearly defined on ([n+ I. The liftable property follows by local pushforward and pullback of 9 and by the fact that..;/{8"+1 is liftable, where we take the discrete set LI : = 9 - 1(0). 0
Proof of Theorem 1. (i) => (ii): By Lemma 8. (ii) ¢:} (iii): By [C] (cf. [F]). It remains to show (ii) => (i). The proof will be similar as the proof of Lemma 1 in Sect. 5. By the hypothesis, there is a biholomorphic mapping 9 : Up(O) --+ Up(O) such that g(Up(O)
n aD)
= Up(O) n aBn+l ,
and det(Dg)
== constant,*,O, where
Up(O) is a neighborhood of p(o) in ([,,+1 and Up(O) is a neighborhood of p(O) in = (zo, wo) E aD and p(O) = fo,wo) E aB,,+I. Let
([,,+1. Write the points p(O)
597
Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem
- - -- -
-
P(0)= ( z o , w o , % , ~ E) ADandF(0) = (zo,wo,zo,wo) E ./HB"+i. Here we always fix two coordinates systems (za,IV, ia, 11) and (F5,G,i,,7-)in the base - space and the target space ( c ~ " +respectively, ~, and denote F((za, 17,id,!) = t a [ , 177- 1 . The mapping g = ( g ( ' ) ,. ..,g('t+')) induces a local isomorphism
+
from ADto JdBn+1 with G(P(0))=F[O). We can fix a point ~ J ( o E ) gD whose projection into is P(0) and set ,6(0):= 9 ( , f ~ (E0gBn+1. ) ) Then the projection of gco)into ~ i i ' ~ n +SF(^). ~ G also such that 9(@(0)) = ,Gco). induces a local isomorphism 9 from gDto ?YE"+! We want to extend g on c"" Since ADis liftable, there is a discrete set A C c"+'such that any compact curve y C en+' - A started from p(o) can be lifted to a compact curve 7 c ADstarted from P(o).We assume p(o) $ A. By the theorem of removable singularities, it is sufficient to extend y on (c"" - A . Since en+' - A is simply connected, it is enough to extend g to any point q E c"" - A along any compact curve y from p(o) to q which is inside cs+ I - A. Given p(o),q,y as above. We have a lifted curve 7 in ADas above. Furthermore, we can find a compact curve r in CVD which is a lift of 7. For example, we may define r over ~ ( 0 by )
where U O , u&, u;, U O S , to are constant, and we can make the similar lift continuously. Since y and 7 are compact, r can be found. Write
y : [0, 11
-+
11
4
r : [O, 11
+
-y : [O,
C"" - A,
t H y(t), with y(0) = P(O) AD,t H y(t), with y(0) = P(o), gD,t H r ( t ) , with r ( 0 ) = ~ ( 0 )
such that the projections of 7 ( t ) ,r ( t ) into C"" are y(t), Vt. Suppose g can be extended at all points y(t), 0 $ t < c < 1, but g cannot be extended at the point ~ ( c .)
(28)
We must find a contradiction with (28). Since ~ C Dis flat, there is another local isomorphism F defined on? neighborhood fi of the point T(c) in ADto ABa+~. Take a point ;?(cl)E U , where 0 < cl < c and take a point T ( c l )E go. Let F and 9 be the induced local isomorphisms of F and G at the point T(cl) from gDto ?YE"+',respectively. By Corollary 1, for the points F ( T ( c l ) ) ,Y ( r ( c l)) E Y*.+I, there is a unique birational mapping H : YBn+1 + YBn+1 such that 9=H
o
F , near T(cl)
(29)
691 598
S.-S. Chern. S. Ii
with
£(~(r(CI)))
=
~(r(c.» ,
where £ is induced by a birational mapping
H as in (27). Denote by F, G, H the mapping between Segre families induced by ~,~, £, respectively. By the standard argument in the CR-manifold theory, we have G = H 0 F near y( CI ). Then we apply Lemma 4 to write
G = (g(l)(z", w), . . . , g(n+I)(z" , w), g(I)( (",11), · .. , g(n+I)( (",11» , F
= (f(I)(Z", w), . .. , /(II+I)(Z", w)'/(I)«(", 11), ... '/(n+I)«(", 11» ,
and H = (h(I)(z" ,w), .. . , h(n+I)(z",lv), h(li'''' if), . . . , h(II+I)«(", if» .
We write g := (g(l), . . . ,g(n+I»,/:= (f(I), . . . ,/(n+I» and h:= (h(l) , .. . , h(n+I» . Thus
9
= hoi,
(30)
near Y(Ct) .
By the uniqueness of holomorphic functions, 9 must be the extension of the local map 9 on UPrO) • By the hypothesis, (3\ ) det(Dg) == constant
*0
near the point p (O) = yeO). By the uniqueness of holomorphic functions, the identity (30) holds at any point wherever 9 is extended. In particular, (3\) holds near y(c.). Denote by U the projection of D into ern+! Then from (30) and (3\), det(D(h 0 f) == constant holds on U . Since F is an isomorphism on D, by Lemma 4, this infers that I is biholomorphic on U . Since f is biholomorphic on U, we claim: the rational mapping h is hoI om orphic on
I( U) .
(32)
Suppose h is not holomorphic. Since H is the linear fractional map as in the form of (27) (See Theorem 2), we know that the Jacobian det(Dh) is a rational function in which the degree of the nominator < the degree of the denominator. Then det(Dh) must have poles. But is biholomorphic whose Jacobian never vanish, by applying the chain rule to (30), this is a contradiction with (3\). Claim (32) is proved. Therefore, I E (!)(U) and hE (!)(f(U», and therefore 9 = hoi is extended on U . So we obtain a contradiction with (28). By the way, from Lemma 5, 9 is locally biholomorphic. Consider the domain D' := g-I(B n + I ), whose boundary aD' is given by the global equation Ig(I)1 2 + . .. + Ig(n+I)1 2 - I = o. We claim
r
D=D'.
(33 )
In fact, since ..,{{D and ..,{{ D' are smooth complex hypersurfaces in er 2n +2 , they are all irreducible. Since ./lI D and j{D' coincide in an open subset of er 2n+2 , we see ..,{{ D = ..litD'. Claim (33) follows from the fact that, when ..litD is smooth, (z'\ w) E aD if and only if (z''', w, rx, w") E ..,{{D.
Projective geometry and fiemann's mapping problem
599
Since dD is spherical, by Lemma 7, g extends along any curve in dD with its image in dBn+'. Since g is already defined on c"", we know g(dD) C dBn+'. Because g is locally biholomorphic, and D is bounded, and dB1'+' is simply connected, by the inverse mapping theorem, we can construct the inverse mapping g-' : dBn+' + dD. Thus g : D + Bn+' IS biholomorphic by Bochner extension theorem Po]. The proof of Theorem 1 is complete. '
Note udded B. Shiffman recently gave a new elementary proof of Theorem 2. Moreover he shown that Theorem 2 extends to the case of injective continuous maps. See: B. Shiffman, Synthetic projective geometry and Poincare's theorem on automorphisms of the ball, preprint.
References
Pel
Alexander, H.: Holomorphic mappings fiom the ball and polydisc, Math. AM. 209, 249-256 (1974) Bell, S.: Mapping problems in complex analysis and the 2-problem, Bull. A.M.S. Vol. 22, NO. 2, 233-259 (1990) Bochner, S.: Analytic and meromorphic continuation by means of Green's formula, Ann. of Math. 44, 652673 (1943) Bums, D. jr and Shnider, S.: Real hypersurfaces in complex manifolds. In: Several complex variables. Proc. Symp. Pure Math. 30, part 2, 141-167, Providence: Am. Math. Soc. 1977 Cartan, E.: Sur la gbomttrie pseudo-conforme des hypersurfaces de deux variables complexes, I. Ann. Math. Pura Appl., ( 4 ) l l (1932), 17-90; 11, AM. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa, (2) 1, 333-354 (1932) Chem, S.-S.: On the projective structure of a real hypersurface in Cn+',Math. Scand. 36, 7 4 8 2 (1975) Chem, S.-S. and Moser, J.K.: Real hypersurfaces in complex manifolds, Acta Math. 133, 219-271 (1974) Faran, J.: Segre families and real hypersurfaces, Invent. Math. 60, 135-172 (1980) Fefferman, C.: The Bergman kernel and biholomorphic mappings of pseudoconvex domains, Invent. Math. 26, 1-65 (1974) Fridman, B.: An approximate Riemam mapping theorem in C", Math. Ann. 257, 49-55 (1986) Hachtroudi, M.: Les espaces d1t16ments A comexion projective normale, Hermann, Paris 1937 Pelles, D.: Proper holomorphic self-maps of the unit ball, Math. Ann. 190, 298-305 (1971); " Correction", Math. Ann. 202, 135-136 (1973) PinPuk, S.I.: I. On the analytic continuation of holomorphic maps, Mat. Sb. 98(140), 4 1 6 4 3 5 (1975) [Russian]. English transl.: Math. USSR, Sb. 27, 375-392 (1975); 11. On holomorphic maps of real-analytic hypersurfaces, Mat. Sb., Nov. Ser. 105(147), 574-593 (1978) mussian]. Poincarb, H.: Les fonctions analytiques de deux variables et la representation conforme, Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo, 185-220 (1907) Rosay, J.-P.: Sur une caractbrisatopn de la boule parmi les domains de C" par son groupe d'automorphismes, Ann. Inst. Fourier (Grenoble) 29, 91-97 (1979) Segre, B.: I. Introno a1 problema di Poincare della rappresentazione psuedo-confome, Rend. Acc. Lincei 13, 676-683 (1931); 11. Questioni geometriche legate colla teoria delle funzioni di due variabili complesse, Rend. Semin. Mat. Roma 7 (1931) Stanton, N.: The Riemann mapping non-theorem, Mathematical intelligencer, Vol. 14, NO. 1, 32-36 (1992) Stoll, W.: The characterization of strictly parabolic manifolds, Annali Scuola Normale Supenore-Pisa, Class di Scienze, Series IV.Vol. VII, 87-154 (1980)
693 600 [T)
S.-S. Chern. S. Ji
Tanaka, N.: I. On pseudo-conformal geometry of hypersurfaces of the space of n complex variables, J. Math. Soc. Japan, 14, 397-429 (1962); 11. Graded Lie algebras and geometric structures, in: Proc. US-Japan Seminar in Differential Geometry, 1965, 147-150. Tokyo: Nippon Hyoronsha, 1966 [W) Webster, S.M.: On the mapping problem for algebraic real hypersurfaces, Invent. Math. 43, 53-68 (1977) [Wo) Wong, B. : Characterization of the ball in (:" by its automorphism group, Invent. Math. 41 , 253-257 (1977)
695 Shiing-Shen Chern CURRICULUM VITAE
Born: October 28, 1911 , Kashing, Chekiang Province, China Nationality: Naturalized U.S . citizen, 1961 Degrees B.Sc., Nankai University, Tientsin, China. 1930 M.Sc., Tsinghua University, Peiping, China. 1934 D.Sc. , University of Hamburg, Germany. 1936 LL.D. (honorary) , The Chinese University of Hong Kong. 1969 D.Sc. (honorary) , University of Chicago. 1969 D.Sc. (honorary) , University of Hamburg. 1971 Dr.Math., Eidgenossische Technische Hochschule, Zurich. 1982 D.Sc. (honorary), State University of New York at Stony Brook. 1985 Honorary Dr. , Nankai University. 1985 D.Sc. (honorary), University of Notre Dame, Indiana . 1994 Positions Held China Foundation Postdoctoral Fellow, Sorbonne, Paris , France. 1936-37 Professor of Mathematics, Tsinghua University and Southwest Associated University. Kunming, China. 1937- 43 Member , Inst. for Advanced Study, Princeton , New Jersey. 1943-45 Acting Director, Institute of Mathematics , Academia Sinica, Nanking, China. 1946-48 Professor of Mathematics, University of Chicago. 1949--60 Professor of Mathematics , University of California at Berkeley. 1960-79; Professor Emeritus , 1979- present Vice President , American Mathematical Society, 1962- 64 Director, Mathematical Sciences Research Institute, Berkeley, California. 1981 -84; Director Emeritus, 1984-present Director, Nankai Institute of Mathematics, Tianjin , China. 1984- 92 ; Director Emeritus, 1992- present Honorary Professorships Beijing University 1978, Nankai University 1978, Institute of Systems Science. Academy of Sciences (China) 1980, Chinan University (Canton) 1980, Graduate School. Academy of Sciences (China) 1984, Nanjing University 1985, East China Normal University 1985, Chinese University of Science and Technology 1985, Beijing Normal University 1985, Chekiang University 1985, Hangchow University 1986, Fudan University 1986, Shanghai University of Technology 1986, Tianjin University 1987. Tohoku University (Japan) 1987 Visiting Professorships Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1952 Eidgenossische Technische Hochschule, Zurich, Switzerland. 1953 Massachusetts Institiute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 1957 Institute for Advanced Study, Princeton, New Jersey. 1964
696
University of California at Los Angeles. 1966 Institut des Hautes Etudes Scientifiques, Paris , France. 1967 Instituto de Matematica Pura e Aplicada, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. 1970 University of Warwick , Coventry, England. 1972 Rockefeller University, New York, New York. 1973 Eidgenossische Technische Hochschule, Zurich, Switzerland. 1981 Max Planck Institut fur Mathematik, Bonn, Germany. 1982 University of Houston , Houston , Texas , 1988Memberships Member , Academia Sinica, Nanking, China, 1948Honorary Member, Indian Mathematical Society, 1950Member , National Academy of Sciences, USA, 1961Fellow, American Academy of Arts and Sciences, 1963Corresponding Member, Brazilian Academy of Sciences, 1971Associate Founding Fellow , Third World Academy of Sciences, 1983Foreign Member, Royal Society of London, 1985Honorary Member, London Mathematical Society, 1986Corresponding Member , Academia Peloritana, Messina, Sicily, 1986Honorary Life Member, New York Academy of Sciences, 1987Foreign Member, Accademia dei Lincei , Rome, 1988Foreign Member, Academie des Sciences, Paris, 1989Member, American Philosophical Society, 1989Foreign Member, Chinese Academy of Sciences, 1994Prizes Chauvenet Prize, Mathematical Association of America, 1970 National Medal of Science, 1975 Alexander von Humboldt Award, Germany, 1982 Steele Prize, American Mathematical Society, 1983 Wolf Prize, Israel, 1983-84
697
List of Ph.D. Theses Written Under the Supervision of S.S. Chern
I. At the University of Chicago 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Nomizu, Katsumi, Invariant affine connections on homogeneous spaces. June 1953 Auslander, Louis, Contribution to the curvature theory of Finsler spaces. June 1954 Liao, San Dao, On the theory of obstructions of fiber bundles. March 1955 Spanier, Jerome, Contributions to the theory of almost complex manifolds. September 1955 Rodrigues, Alexandre, Characteristic classes of homogeneous spaces. March 1957 Hertzig, David, On simple algebraic groups. August 1957 Levine, Harold I., Contributions to the theory of analytic maps of complex manifolds into projective space. August 1957 Suzuki, Haruo, On the realization of Stiefel-Whitney characteristic classes by submanifolds. August 1957 Wolf, Joseph Albert, On the manifolds covered by a given compact, connected Riemannian homogeneous manifold. December 1959 Petridis, Nicholas C , Quasiconformal mapping and pseudo-meromorphic curves. June 1961.
II. At the University of California at Berkeley 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Po hi, William Francis, DitTerential geometry of higher order. September 1961 Do Carmo, Manfredo Perdigao, The cohomology ring of certain Kahlerian manifolds. January 1963 Amaral, Leo Huet. Hypersurfaces in non-Euclidean spaces. June 1964 BanchotT, Thomas Francis, Tightly embedded two-dimensional polyhedral manifolds. June 1964 Garland, Howard, On the cohomology oflattices in Lie groups. June 1964. Gardner, Robert Brown, DitTerential geometric methods in partial ditTerential equations. June 1965 Smoke, William, DitTerential operators on homogeneous spaces. June 1965 Weinstein, Alan David, The cut locus and conjugate locus of a Riemannian manifold. March 1967
698 9. 10. 11
Shiffman, Bernard, On the removal of singularities in several complex variables. June 1968 Reilly, Robert, The Gauss map in the study of submanifolds of spheres. September 1968 Wolf, R., Some integral formulas related to the volume of tubes. September 1968
12 13 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
27. 28. 29 30. 31.
Eisenman, D., Intrinsic measures on complex manifolds and holomorphic mappings. June 1969 Jordan, Steve, Some invariants for complex manifolds, September 1970 Leung, Dominic, Deformations of integrals of exterior differential systems. September 1970 Lai, Hon-Fei, Characteristic classes of real manifolds immersed in complex manifolds. June 1971 Yau, Shing Tung, On the fundamental group of compact manifolds of nonpositive curvature. June 1971 Barbosa, Lucas, On the minimal immersions of S2 in S2m. December 1972 Bleecker, David, Contributions to the theory of surfaces. June 1973 Millson, John James, Chern-Simons invariants of constant curvature manifolds, December 1973 Simoes, Plinio, A class of minimal cones in IR", n -:; 8, that minimize area. December 1973 Cheng, Shiu-Yuen, Spectrum of the Laplacian and its applications to differential geometry. June 1974 Donnelly, Harold, Chern- Simons invariants of reductive homogeneous spaces. June 1974 Webster, Sidney Martin, Real hypersurfaces in complex spaces. June 1975 Sung, C. H., Contributions to holomorphic curves in complex manifolds. December 1975 Dunham, Douglas, Holomorphic and meromorphic vector fields on compact hermitian symmetric spaces. 1976 Faran, James, Segre families and real hypersurfaces. June 1978 Li, Peter, Eigenvalues of the Laplacian on a Riemannian manifold. June 1979 Shifrin, Ted, Kinematic formula in complex integral geometry. June 1979 Smith, Stuart Preston, Contributions to the eigenvalue pro.hlem for the Laplacian. December 1979 Wang, Ai-Nung, Contributions to Differential Geometry. June 1981 Wolfson, Jon, Minimal Surfaces in Complex Manifolds. June 1982
699
Bibliography of the Publications of S.S. Chern
I. Books and Monographs 1. Topics in Differential Geometry (mimeographed), Institute for Advanced Study, Princeton
(1951), 106 pp. 2. Differentiable Manifolds (mimeographed), University of Chicago, Chicago (1953),166 pp. 3. Complex Manifolds a. University of Chicago, Chicago (1956), 195 pp. b. University of Recife, Recife, Brazil (1959), 181 pp. c. Russian translation, Moscow (1961),239 pp. 4. Studies in Global Geometry and Analysis (Editor), Mathematical Association of America (1967), 200 pp. 5. Complex Manifolds without Potential Theory, van Nostrand (1968), 92 pp. Second edition, revised, Springer-Verlag (1979), 152 pp, 2nd printing (1995), 160 pp. 6. Minimal Submanifolds in a Riemannian Manifold (mimeographed), University of Kansas, Lawrence (1968),55 pp. 7. (with Wei-huan Chen) Differential Geometry Notes, in Chinese, Beijing University Press (1983), 321 pp. 8. Studies in Global Differential Geometry (Editor), Mathematical Association of America (1988), 350 pp. 9. (with R. Bryant, R. Gardner, H. Goldschmidt, P. Griffiths) Exterior Differential Systems, MSRI Series 18, Springer Verlag (1991), 475 pp. II. Papers
1932 [1] Pairs of plane curves with points in one-to-one correspondence. Science Reports Nat. Tsing Hua Univ. 1 (1932) 145-153. 1935 [2] Triads of rectilinear congruences with generators in correspondence. Tohoku Math. 1. 40 (1935) 179-188. [3] Associate quadratic complexes of a rectilinear congruence. Tohoku Math. 1. 40 (1935) 293-316. [4] Abzllhlungen mr Gewebe. Abh. Math . Sem. Univ. Hamburg 11 (1935) 163-170. 1936 [5] Eine Invariantentheorie der Dreigewebe aus r-dimensionalen Mannigfaltigkeiten im R 2 , Abh. Math . Sem. Univ. Hamburg 11 (1936) 333-358.
700 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF S.S. CHERN
1937 [6] Sur la geometrie d'une equation differentielle du troisieme ordre. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 204 (1937) 1227-1229. [7] Sur la possibilite de plonger un espace Ii connexion projective donne dans un espace projectif. Bull. Sci. Math. 61 (1937) 234-243. 1938 [8] On projective normal coordinates. Ann. of Math. 39 (1938) 165-171. [9] On two affine connections. J. Univ. Yunnan 1 (1938) 1-18. 1939 [10] Sur la geometrie d'un systeme d'equations differentielles du second ordre. Bull. Sci. Math 63 (1939) 206-212. 1940 [11] The geometry of higher path-spaces. J. Chin. Math. Soc. 2 (1940) 247-276. [12] Sur les invariants integraux en geometrie. Science Reports Nat. Tsing Hua Univ. 4 (1940) 85-95. [13] The geometry of the differential equation y'" = F(x, y', yU). Science Reports Nat. Tsing Hua-Univ. 4 (1940) 97-111. [14] Sur une generalisation d'une formule de Crofton. c.R. Acad. Sci. Paris 210 (1940) 757-758. [15] (with C.T. Yen) Sulla formula principale cinematica dello spazio ad n dimensioni. Boll. Un. Mat. Ital. 2 (1940) 434-437. [16] Generalization ofa formula of Crofton. Wuhan Univ. J. Sci. 7 (1940) 1-16. 1941 [17] Sur les invariants de contact en geometrie projective differentielle. Acta Ponti/. Acad. Sci. 5 (1941) 123-140. 1942 [18] On integral geometry in Klein spaces. Ann. of Math . 43 (1942) 178-189. [19] On the invariants of contact of curves in a projective space of N dimensions and their geometrical interpretation. Acad. Sinica Sci. Record 1 (1942) 11-15. [20] The geometry of isotropic surfaces. Ann. of Math. 43 (1942) 545-559. [21] On a Weyl geometry defined from an (n - I)-parameter family of hypersurfaces in a space of n dimensions. Acad. Sinica Sci. Record 1 (1942) 7-10. 1943 [22] On the Euclidean connections in a Finsler space. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 29 (1943) 33-37. [23] A generalization ofthe projective geometry of linear spaces. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 29 (1943) 38-43. 1944 [24] Laplace transforms of a class of higher dimensional varieties in a projective space of n dimensions. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 30 (1944) 95-97. [25] A simple intrinsic proof of the Gauss-Bonnet formula for closed Riemannian manifolds. Ann of Math. 45 (1944) 747-752. [26] Integral formulas for the characteristic classes of sphere bundles. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 30 (1944) 269-273. [27] On a theorem of algebra and its geometrical application. J. Indian Math . Soc. 8 (1944) 29-36.
701 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF S.S. CHERN
1945 [28] On Grassmann and differential rings and their relations to the theory of multiple integrals. Sankhya 7 (1945) 2-8. [29] Some new characterizations of the Euclidean sphere. Duke Math . J . 12 (1945) 279-290. [30] On the curvature integra in a Riemannian manifold. Ann. of Math . 46 (1945) 674-684. [31] On Riemannian manifolds of four dimensions. Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 51 (1945) 964-971. 1946 [32] Some new viewpoints in the differential geometry in the large. Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 52 (1946) 1-30. [33] Characteristic classes of Hermitian manifolds. Ann. of Math . 47 (1946) 85-121. 1947 [34] (with H.C. Wang). Differential geometry in symplectic space I. Science Report Nat. Tsing Hua Univ. 4 (1947) 453-477. [35] Sur une c1asse remarquable de varietes dans I'espace projectif a N dimensions. Science Reports Nat. Tsing Hua Univ. 4 (1947) 328-336. [36] On the characteristic classes of Riemannian manifolds. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci USA, 33 (1947) 78-82. [37] Note of affinely connected manifolds. Bull. Amer. Math . Soc. 53 (1947) 820-823; correction ibid 54 (1948) 985-986. [38] On the characteristic ring of a differentiable manifold. Acad. Sinica. Sci. Record 2 (1947) 1-5. 1948 [39] On the mUltiplication in the characteristic ring of a sphere bundle. Ann. of Math. 49 (1948) 362-372. [40] Note on projective differential line geometry. Acad. Sinica Sci. Record 2 (1948) 137-139. [41] (with Y.L. Jou) On the orientability of differentiable manifolds. Science Reports Nat . Tsing Hua Univ. 5 (1948) 13-17. [42] Local equivalence and Euclidean connections in Finsler spaces. Science Reports Nat. Tsing Hua Univ. 5 (1948) 95-121. 1949 [43] (with Y.F. Sun). The imbedding theorem for fibre bundles. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc 67 (1949) 286-303. [44] (with S.T. Hu) Parallelisability of principal fibre bundles. Trans . Amer. Math. Soc. 67 (1949) 304-309. 1950 [45] (with E. Spanier). The homology structure of sphere bundles. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 36 (1950) 248-255. [46] Differential geometry of fiber bundles. Proc. Int. Congr. Math . (1950) n 397-411. 1951 [47] (with E. Spanier). A theorem on orientable surfaces in four-dimensional space. Comm. Math. He/v. 25 (1951) 205-209.
702 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF S.S. CHERN
1952 [48] On the kinematic formula in the Euclidean space of N dimensions. Amer. J . Math 74 (1952) 227-236. [49] (with C. Chevalley). Elie Cartan and his mathematical work. Bull. Amer. Math . Soc. 58 (1952) 217-250. [50] (with N.H. Kuiper) Some theorems on the isometric imbedding of compact Riemann manifolds in Euclidean space. Ann. of Math. 56 (1952) 422-430. 1953 [51] On the characteristic classes of complex sphere bundles and algebraic varieties. Amer. J. of Math ., 75 (1953) 565-597. [52] Some formulas in the theory of surfaces. Boletin de la Sociedad Matematica Mex icana, 10 (1953) 30-40. [53] Relations between Riemannian and Hermitian geometries. Duke Math. J., 20 (1953) 575-587. 1954 [54] Pseudo-groupes continus infinis Colloque de Geom. Diff. Strasbourg (1954) 119-136. [55] (with P. Hartman and A. Wintner) On isothermic coordinates. Comm. Math . Helv. 28 (1954) 301-309. 1955 [56] La geometrie des sous-varietes d'un espace euclidien Ii plusieurs dimensions. ['Ens. Math., 40 (1955) 26-46. [57] An elementary proof of the existence of isothermal parameters on a surface. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 6 (1955) 771-782. [58] On special W-surfaces. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 6 (1955) 783-786. [59] On curvature and characteristic classes of a Riemann manifold. Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Hamburg 20 (1955) 117-126. 1956 [60] Topology and differential geometry of complex manifolds. Bull. Amer. Math. Soc., 62 (1956) 102-117. 1957 [61] On a generalization of Kiihler geometry. Lefschetzjubilee volume. Princeton Univ. Press (1957) 103-121. [62] (with R. Lashof) On the total curvature of immersed manifolds. Amer. J. of Math. 79 (1957) 306-318. [63] (with F. Hirzebruch and J-P. Serre) On the index of a fibered manifold. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 8 (1957) 587- 596. [64] A proof of the uniqueness of Minkowski's problem for convex surfaces. Amer. J. of Math ., 79 (1957) 949-950. 1958 [65] Geometry of submanifolds in complex projective space. Symposium Intemational de Topologia Algebraica (1958) 87-96. [66] (with R.K. Lashof) On the total curvature of immersed manifolds, II. Michigan Math. J. 5 (1958) 5-12. [67] Differential geometry and integral geometry. Proc. Int. Congr. Math. Edinburgh (1958) 441-449.
703 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF S.S. CHERN
1959 [68] Integral formulas for hypersurfaces in Euclidean space and their applications to uniqueness theorems. J . of Math . and Mech. 8 (1959) 947-956. 1960 [69] (with J. Hano and c.c. Hsiung) A uniqueness theorem on closed convex hypersurfaces in Euclidean space. J . of Math . and Mech. 9 (1960) 85-88. [70] Complex analytic mappings of Riemann surfaces I. Amer. J . of Math . 82 (1960) 323-337. [71] The integrated form of the first main theorem for complex analytic mappings in several complex variables. Ann. of Math . 71 (1960) 536-551. [72] Geometrical structures on manifolds. Amer. Math . Soc. Pub. (1960) 1-31. [73] La geometrie des hypersurfaces dans l'espace euclidean. Seminaire Bourbaki, 193 (1959-1960). [74] Sur les metriques Riemanniens compatibles avec une reduction du groupe structural. Seminaire Ehresmann, January 1960. 1961 [75] Holomorphic mappings of complex manifolds. L'Ens. Math. 7 (1961) 179-187. 1962 [76] Geometry of quadratic differential form. J . of SI AM 10 (1962) 751-755. 1963
[77] (with c.c. Hsiung) On the isometry of compact submanifolds in Euclidean space. Math . Annalen 149 (1963) 278-285. [78] Pseudo-Riemannian geometry and Gauss-Bonnet formula. Academia Brasileira de Ciencias 3S (1963) 17-26. 1965 [79] Minimal surfaces in aD Euclidean space of N dimensions. Differential and Combinatorial Topology, Princeton Univ. Press (1965) 187-198. [80] (with R. Bott) Hermitian vector bundles and the equidistribution of the zeroes of their holomorphic sections. Acta. Math . 114 (1965) 71-112. [81] On the curvatures of a piece of hypersurface in Euclidean space. Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Hamburg 29 (1965) 77 -91. [82] On the differential geometry of a piece of submanifold in Euclidean space. Proc. of U.S.-Japan Seminar in Diff. Geom. (1965) 17-21. 1966 [83] Geometry of G-structures. Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 72 (1966) 167-219. [84] On the kinematic formula in integral geometry. J . of Math. and Mech. 16 (1966) 101-118. [85] Geometrical structures on manifolds and submanifolds. Some Recent Advances in Basic Sciences, Yeshiva Univ. Press (1966) 127-135. 1967 [86] (with R. Osserman) Complete minimal surfaces in Euclidean n-space. J. de I'Analyse Math. 19 (1967) 15-34. [87] Einstein hypersurfaces in a Kihlerian manifold of constant holomorphic curvature. J. Diff. Geom. I (1967) 21-31.
704 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF S.S. CHERN
1968 [88] On holomorphic mappings of Hermitian manifolds of the same dimension. Proc. Symp. Pure Math . 11. Entire Functions and Related Parts of Analysis (1968) 157-170. 1969 [89] Simple proofs of two theorems on minimal surfaces. L 'Ens. Math. 15 (1969) 53-61. [90] [91]
[92] [93] [94] [95] [96]
1970 (with H. Levine and L. Nirenberg) Intrinsic norms on a complex manifold. Global analysis, Princeton Univ. Press (1970) 119-139. (with M. do Carmo and S. Kobayashi) Minimal submanifolds of a sphere with second fundamental form of constant length. Functional Analysis and Related Fields, SpringerVerlag (1970) 59-75. (with R. Bott) Some formulas related to complex transgression. Essays on Topology and Related Topics, Springer-Verlag, (1970) 48-57. Holomorphic curves and minimal surfaces. Carolina Conference Proceedings (1970) 28 pp. On minimal spheres in the four-sphere, Studies and Essays Presented to Y. W. Chen, Taiwan, (1970) 137-150. Differential geometry: Its past and its future. Actes Congres Intern. Math . (1970) 1, 41-53. On the minimal immersions of the two-sphere in a space of constant curvature. Problems in Analysis, Princeton Univ. Press, (1970) 27-40. 1971
[97] Brief survey of minimal submanifolds. Differentialgeometrie im Grossen. W. Klingenberg (eel), 4 (1971) 43-60. [98] (with J. Simons) Some cohomology classes in principal fibre bundles and their application to Riemannian geometry. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 68 (1971) 791-794. 1972 [99J Holomorphic curves in the plane. DifJ. Geom., in honor of K. Yana, (1972) 73-94. [100] Geometry of characteristic classes. Proc. 13th Biennial Sem. Canadian Math. Congress, (1972) 1-40. Also pub. in Russian translation. 1973 [101] Meromorphic vector fields and characteristic numbers. Scripta Math. 29 (1973) 243-251. [102] The mathematical works of Wilhelm Blaschke. Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Hamburg 39 (1973) 1-9. 1974 [103] (with. J. Simons) Characteristic forms and geometrical invariants. Ann. of Math. 99 (1974) 48-69. [104] (with M. Cowen, A. Vitter III) Frenet frames along holomorphic curves. Proc. of Con! on Value Distribution Theory, Tulane Univ. (1974) 191-203. [105] (with J. Moser) Real hypersurfaces in complex manifolds. Acta. Math. 133 (1974) 219-271. 1975 [106] (with S.I. Goldberg) On the volume decreasing property of a class of real harmonic mappings. Amer. J. of Math. 97 (1975) 133-147.
70S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICA nONS OF S.S. CHERN
[107] On the projective structure of a real hypersurface in C.+ 1 • Math. Scand. 36 (1975) 74-82. 1976 [108] (with J. White) Duality properties of characteristic fonns. Inv. Math . 35 (1976) 285297. 1977 [109] Circle bundles. Geometry and topology, II I. Latin Amer. School of Math, Lecture Notes in Math. Springer-Verlag, 597 (1977) 114-131. [110] (with P.A. Griffiths) Linearization of webs of codimension one and maximum rank. Proc. Int. Symp. on Algebraic Geometry, Kyoto (1977) 85-91. 1978 [111] On projective connections and projective relativity. Science of Matter, dedicated to Ta-you Wu, (1978) 225-232. [112] (with P.A. Griffiths) Abel's theorem and webs. Jber. d. Dt. Math . Verein . 80 (1978) 13-110. [113] (with P.A. Griffiths) An inequality for the rank of a web and webs of maximum rank. Annali Sc. Norm. Super.-Pisa, Serie IV, S (1978) 539-557. [114] Affine minimal hypersurfaces. Minimal Submanifolds and Geodesics. Kaigai Publications, Ltd. (1978) 1-14. 1979 [115] Herglotz's work on geometry. Ges. Schriften Gustav Herglotz, Gottingen (1979) xx-xxi. [116] (with c.L. Temg) An analogue of Backlund's theorem in affine geometry. Rocky Mountain J. Math. 10 (1979) 105-124. [117] From triangles to manifolds. Amer. Math. Monthly 86 (1979) 339-349. [118] (with c.K. Peng) Lie groups and KdV equations. Manuscripta Math. 28 (1979) 207-217. 1980 [119] General relativity and differential geometry. Some Strangeness in the Proportion: A Centennial Symp. to Celebrate the Achievements of Albert Einstein, Harry Woolf (ed.), Addison-Wesley Pub\. (1980) 271-287. [120] (with W.M . Boothby and S.P. Wang) The mathematical work of H.C. Wang. Bull. Inst. of Math, 8 (1980) xiii-xxiv. [121] Geometry and physics. Math . Medley, Singapore, 8 (1980) 1-6. [122] (with R. Bryant and P.A. Griffiths) Exterior differential systems. Proc. of 1980 Beijing DD-Symposium, (1980) 219-338. 1981 [123] Geometrical interpretation of the sinh-Gordon equation. Annales Polonici Mathematici 39 (1981) 63-69. [124] (with P.A. Griffiths) Corrections and addenda to our paper: "Abel's theorem and webs." Jber. d. Dt. Math.-Verein. 83 (1981) 78-83. [125] (with R. Ossennan) Remarks on the Riemannian metric of a minimal submanifold. Geometry Symposium Utrecht 1980, Lecture Notes in Math. Springer-Verlag 894 (1981) 49-90. [126] (with J. Wolfson) A simple proof of Frobenius theorem. Manifolds and Lie Groups, Papers in Honor of Y. Matsushima . Birkhauser (1981) 67-69. [127] (with K. Tenenblat) Foliations 00 a surface of constant curvature and modified Korteweg-de Vries equations. J . Diff. Geom. 16 (1981) 347-349.
706 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF S.S. CHERN
[128] (with C.K. Peng) On the Backlund transfonnations of KdV equations and modified KdV equations. J. of China Univ. of Sci. and Tech., 11 (1981) 1-6. 1982 [129] Web geometry. Proc. Symp. in Pure Math. 39 (1983) 3-10. [130] Projective geometry, contact transfonnations, and CR-structures. Archiv der Math. 38 (1982) 1-5. 1983 [131] (with J. Wolfson) Minimal surfaces by moving frames. Amer. J . Math. 105 (1983) 59-83. [132] On surfaces of constant mean curvature in a three-dimensional space of constant curvature. Geometric Dynamics, Springer Lecture Notes 1007 (1983) 104-108. 1984 [133] Defonnation of surfaces preserving principal curvatures, Differential Geometry and Complex Analysis, Volume in Memory of H. Rauch, Springer-Verlag (1984) 155-163. 1985 [134] (with R. Hamilton) ()n Riemannian metrics adapted to three-dimensional contact manifolds. Arbeitstagung Bonn 1984 Springer Lecture Notes 1111 (1985) 279-308. [135] (with J. Wolfson) Harmonic maps of S2 into a complex Grassmann manifold. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 82 (1985) 2217-2219. [136] Moving frames, Soc. Math. de France, Asterisque, (1985) 67-77. [137] Wilhelm Blaschke and web geometry, Wilhelm Blaschke-Gesammelte Werke. 5, Thales Verlag, (1985) 25-27. [138] The mathematical works of Wilhelm Blaschke-an update. Thales Verlag, (1985), 21-23. 1986 [139] (with K. Tenenblat) Pseudospherical surfaces and evolution equations. Studies in Applied Math. MIT 74 (1986) 55-83. [140] On a confonnal invariant of three-dimensional manifolds. Aspects of Mathematics and Its Applications Elsevier Science Publishers B.V. (1986) 245-252. [141] (with PA Griffiths) Pfaffian systems in involution. Proceedings of 1982 Changchun Symposium on Differential Geometry and Differential Equations, Science Press, China, (1986) 233-256. 1987 [142] (with J. Wolfson) Hannonic maps of the two-sphere into a complex Grassmann manifold II. Ann. of Math . 125 (1987) 301-335. [143] (with T . Cecil) Tautness and Lie Sphere geometry Math. Annalen, Volume Dedicated to F. Hirzebruch 278 (1987) 381-399. 1988 [144] Vector bundles with a connection. Studies in Global Differential Geometry, MAA, no. 27 (1988), 1-26. 1989 [145] (with T. Cecil) Dupin submanifolds in Lie sphere geometry, Differential Geometry and Topology, Springer Lecture Notes, No. 1369, 1-48.
707 1990 [146] Historical remarks on Gauss-Bonnet, Analysis, et cetera, Volume in Honor of Jurgen Moser, Academic Press (1990) 209-217. [147] What is geometry? Amer. Math. Monthly 97 (1990) 678-686. 1991 [148] An introduction to Dupin submanifo1ds, Differential Geometry, A Symposium in Honor of M. do Carmo, Longman (1991) 95-102. [149] Families of hypersurfaces under contact transformations in Memory of Hua Loo Keng , Springer (1991) 49-56.
R", International Symposium in
[150] Surface theory with Darboux and Bianchi, Miscellanea Mathematica , Volume Dedicated to H. Gotze, Springer (1991) 59-69. [151] Transgression in associated bundles, Internat. 1. Math. 2 (1991) 383-393. [152] Characteristic classes and characteristic forms, Paul Halmos Celebrating 50 Years of Math., Springer, 169-177. 1992 [153] On Finsler geometry, Comptes Rendus Sci., Paris 314 (1992) 757-761. [154] Yang-Mills equations and Yang-Baxter equations, Chinese 1. of Phys., Yang Volume, Taiwan Physical Society 30 (1992) 949-953. 1993 [155] (with David Bao) On a notable connection in Finsler Geometry, Houston 1. Math. 19 (1993) 135-180. 1994 [156] Characteristic classes as a geometric object, Global Analysis in Modern Mathematics (Palais Festival Volume), Publish or Perish, 221-226. [157] Sophus Lie and Differential Geometry, The Sophus Lie Memorial Conference, Oslo 1992 Proceedings, 129-137. 1995 [158] (with S. Y. Ji) Projective geometry and Riemann's mapping problem, Mathematische Annalen 302 (1995) 581-600. 1996 [159] (with David Bao) A note on the Gauss-Bonnet theorem for Finsler spaces, Ann. of Math. 143 (1996) 233-252. III. Collected Works I. Shiing-Shen Chern Selected Papers, Springer Verlag (1978), 508 pp. 2. Shiing-Shen Chern Selected Papers, Springer Verlag, Vols. 11,444 pp. , 504 pp., IV, 462 pp. (1989). 3. (in Chinese) Selected Essays by S S Chern, Science Press, Beijing (1989); Taipei (1993). 4. Chern - A Great Geometer of the Twentieth Century, International Press (1992), edited by S. T. Yau.